Greek grammar by mtice

XFG08}-

GREEK GRAMMAR BY WILLIAM WATSON GOODWIN Ph.D., LL.D., D.C.L.

Revised

CHARLES BURTON GULICK, Ph.D. Eliot Professor of Greek Literature in Harvard

Â£}UO

h$S

New

University

(S OO.P

Rochelle, New York

Collège Classical Sériés Greek Grammar

(PB): 0-89241-332-8 reprint of the 1930 édition. Reprinted 1992 by

ISBN Exact

Aristide D. Caratzas, Publisher 30 Church St., P.O. Box 210 New Rochelle, New York 10802 914/632-8487

PREFACE of his obiter dicta, "is like This remark, utdisastrously true two décades ago, when Greek was at its

"Greek, sir," said Dr. Johnson in

one

lace ; every man gets as much of it as he can." tered when men still wore lace, threatened to be in

contrary sense some

lowest ebb in American éducation.

But the tide has turned, and

the very noticeable revival of Greek studies in the collèges and universities of the country makes it appropriate that Goodwin's

Grammar should appear in a more modem dress. In this third édition I hâve entirely rewritten Parts I and II

(Phonology and Inflection), and to a great extent Part III (For¬ Words). Nevertheless, I have kept within the limits imposed by Goodwin in his treatment, which was designed to explain the language on its own soil, without too great inclusion of its pre-history or of Indo-European forms. Thus, for good or for ill, the morphology is expounded without reference to the labio-velar sounds, or to the law of long diphthongs shortened before a consonant ; but it is believed that nothing essential to the understanding of forms as they occur in classical literature has been omitted. More détails concerning accent have been added. The article, which constitutes a most important development peculiar to the Greek, has been placed where it logically belongs, with the démonstrative pronouns. Adverbs and prép¬ ositions have been given a somewhat fuller treatment ; and enough has been added from the material afforded by the dialects to answer the need of students of lyric poetry. The classes of verbs have been reduced from eight to five, partly through the simple distinction of thematic and athematic forms, and partly by the assignment of the greater number of verbs to the iota class. In accordance with the desire and the practice of ail teachers today, et/xt, etc. are treated with other fu verbs and not relegated to a separate category as though they were irregular or anomalous. Quantities are marked in Parts I and II, and occasionally elsewhere. The cross-references have been greatly increased in nummation of

iii

GREEK GRAMMAR

ber, and the Indexes enlarged. Répétition has not been avoided serve the reader better than a cross-reference. The translation of examples has been revised in the interest of

if it could

There is, strictly speaking, no such "literal translation," and much of the value of Greek as an aid to English dépends upon the constant practice of rendering the Greek idiom by the English idiom, with due regard, of course, to the character and style of the author to be translated. Many new examples have been added ; my studies in Athenaeus have prompted me to introduce sentences from later authors, including, on occasion, the New Testament. A lighter hand has been applied in the revision of Part IV. Goodwin was a master in his own field of the moods and tenses, and his exact knowledge combined with common sense produced a lucidity of statement that could hardly be improved. In the treatment of tense as well as of many other topics, Gildersleeve's "Syntax of Classical Greek," produced with the co-operation of Prof essor C. W. E. Miller, has illuminated much that was little understood before. I have tried to emphasize more distinctly the "character of the action"; this will be especially noted in the exposition of the imperfect and the perfect — "action in a line," and "perfective." I have purposely refrained from reducing Goodwin's account of the cases to fewer catégories, believing that the infinité variety and subtlety of the Greek can thereby better be kept in mind. I have gone farther than Goodwin in the matter of pronunciation, especially in the case of « ; and in the uncertainty as to the exact value of £ in Attic Greek, I have indicated the English z as an approximate équivalent. No one beyond the borders of the Greek Republic, of course, would follow the Modéra Greek as a guide to the value of the ancient vowels and consonants ; yet I firmly believe that every teacher today should have at least a slight acquaintance with Modem Greek, if only to realize more vividly the fluency of the language and the continuity of its history. And whatever may be said ôf the différence between stress and pitch accent, the fact remains that the observance of stress accent is the only device by which we can even remotely approach the ancient enunciation. I regret, therefore, the recent décision of my friends in the Classical Association of England a more

thing

contemporary idiom.

as a

PREFACE

and Wales to adhéré to the quantitative or Latin method of

pronunciation.

In the absence of

brief manual in English on Greek verse,

comparable to that of Masqueray in French, I need not apologize for retaining Part V, the section on Prosody. Full détails may be studied in the authoritative "Verse of Greek Comedy" by my late colleague John Williams White, although I cannot follow him in his abolition of ictus; and in the actual practice of the classroom, where reading aloud is of the first importance, I have foimd that the older system works better. This is a pragmatic position which by no means déniés the force of White's argument in many cases, and which recognizes fully the fallacy of analogies drawn from modem music of the West, on which the older system was largely based. I am under great obligation to many teachers who have kindly furnished me with corrections and suggestions inspired by the last édition. My particular thanks are due to my colleagues Professors Joshua Whatmough and Cari Newell Jackson. Prof essor Whatmough read Part I, and Prof essor Jackson read the entire book. To their helpful criticism I owe much; neither is chargeable with responsibility for any doctrine which may be debatable. To Mr. Byington of the Athenseum Press I am indebted for searching criticism, from the point of view of a profound scholar and an accomplished maker of books. CHARLES BURTON GULICK

CONTENTS INTRODUCTION PAGES

The Greek Language PART I. SECTIONS

and

Dialects

1-3

LETTERS, SYLLABLES, ACCENTS

Alphabet Diphthongs 7,10. Iota Subscript 8. Genuine and Spurious Diphthongs 11-15. Breathings

5, 6 6, 7 6, 7

16-27. Consonants and their Divisions

7-9

24, 25. Consonants ending Greek Words 27. Sonant Liquids and Nasals

8, 9

1-4. The

5-10. Vowels and

28. Ionic and Athenian

6 7

Alphabets

29. Ancient Pronunciation

30-37. Changes of Vowels 35. Shortening

11, 12 12

37. Lost Vowels

38. Collision of Vowels.

Hiatus

39-48. Contraction of Vowels

12-15

49-53. Crasis

14, 16 16 16, 17 17 18-25 23

54.

Synizesis

55-61. Elision 62.

Aphaeresis

63-109. Changes of Consonants 102. Digamma 106. Metathesis

110-116. Movable Consonants 117-118. Syllables and their Division 119-125. Quantity of Syllables

126-140. General Principles of Accent 135. Anastrophe

137-140. Accent of Contracted Syllables and Elided Words 141-149. Accent of Substantives and Adjectives 150-153. Accent of Verbs vii

25, 26 26

26, 27 27-30 29 30 30, 31

...

32, 33

GREEK GRAMMAR

viii

PAGES

SECTIONS

33, 34 34, 35 36, 37 37

154-157. Proclitics 158-163. Enclitics

from Attic Marks

164-166. Dialect Variations 167. Punctuation

PART II.

INFLECTION

168,169. Définitions : Inflection, Base, 170-178. Numbers, Genders, Cases

Stem, Suffix

38, 39

NOUNS

179. Three Declensions of Nouns 180. Case

Endings of Nouns First Declension

181,182. Stems and Terminations of First 183-188. First Declension Féminines 189-192. First Declension Masculines 193-195. Contracts of First Declension 196. First Declension in the Dialects

Declension

....

40, 41

...

44, 45

41, 42 42, 43 43 44

Second Declension

Terminations of Second Declension 200-202. Paradigms of Second Declension 203-207. Attic Second Declension 208-210. Contract Substantives of Second Declension 211. Second Declension in the Dialects 197-199. Stems and

....

46 46, 47 47

Third Declension

212, 213. Stems and Case

Endings of Third Declension

Formation of

Cases

Singular of Third Declension of Third Declension 221-224. Vocative Singular of Third Declension 225. Dative Plural of Third Declension 226. Accusative Plural of Third Declension 214-217. Nominative

218-220. Accusative Singular

48, 49 49 49, 50 50 50

Paradigms of Third Declension 227.

Palatal, Labial,

228. Neuters in

229. Nasal or

Dental Stems

Liquid Stems

50, 51

51, 52

CONTENTS

SECTIONS

PAGES

(with contraction)

230-244. Stems in

245-247. Stems in

cou

248-251. Stems in

252-264. Stems in

265-272. Stems in

eu, au, ou

273-278. Stems in

53-55 55 56

and

56-58

Varying with

58, 59 59, 60 60, 61

279-284. Gender of Third Declension 285. Third Declension in the Dialects

Irregular Substantives 292. Epie ~4>t~®ev>

286-291.

61-64 64

ADJECTIVES

293-305. 298-302.

303-305. 306-327.

Adjectives of the First and Second Declensions Adjectives of Two Endings Contract Adjectives in -eos and -oos Adjectives of the Third Declension .

313-327. First and Third Declensions Combined

Participles in -uv, -ovs, -as, -eis, -vs, -cos 336-338. Contract Participles in -auv, -ewv, -owv, -aws 339-341. Adjectives with One Ending 342-345. Irregular Adjectives: péyas, iroXvs, irpâos 328-335.

64-68 65, 66 66-68 68-71 69-71

71-74

74, 75 75 76, 77

Comparison of Adjectives 346-353. Comparison by -repos, -raros 354-356. Comparison by -lœv, -lctos 357-362. Irregular Comparison 363.

Comparison of Substantive Stems

77, 78 78, 79 79, 80 80

PRONOUNS

364-376. Personal and Intensive Pronouns

80-83

377-379. Reflexive Pronouns

380-382. Possessive Pronouns

383-384. Reciprocal Pronoun 385-387. The Article

84 85, 86

388-393. Démonstrative Pronouns

394-398. Interrogative and Indefinite 399-407. Relative Pronouns 408-411. Pronominal

Pronouns

Adjectives

86, 87

87, 88 88, 89

ADVERBS

412-420. Adverbs formed from

Adjectives etc

421-422. Comparison of Adverbs 423-428. Pronominal Adverbs

90, 91 91

91-93

GREEK GRAMMAR

NUMERALS

SECTIONS

PAGES

pipwa

Ordinal Numbers, and Numéral Adverbs 93-96 432-440. Declension of Cardinal and Ordinal Numbers, etc. . 94, 95 441-444. Compound Numbers, Fractions, Multiplication ... 95, 96

429-446. Cardinal and

446. Numerical

Symbols

VERBS

447-456. Voices, Moods, 457. Verbal Nouns

Tenses, Numbers, and Persons

458-462. Tense Systems

and Tense Stems

....

98, 99

463, 464. Principal Parts of a Greek Verb 465. Primitive and Denominative Verbs 466. Vowel Gradation 467. Thematic Vowel 468-470. Thematic and Athematic Inflection 471. Vowel and Consonant Stems

99 99 100 100 100

CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN Œ

100, 101

Description of Following Synopses 475,476. Synopsis of Auw 477. Synopsis of XeÎTrw 478,479. Synopsis of 4>aivo> 472-474.

480. Inflection of \vœ

481. Inflection of Second Aorist,

102,103 104 105

106-110

Perfect, and Pluperfect

111

of Xet7r«

482-490. Contract Verbs in 485. nXéw, déco, péw

486,487. Zàco,

aw, ew,

and

112-116

oœ

115 115, 116

xptt°Mat

116-122

491-499. Consonant Verbs

116-118 118

492-494. Inflection of 4>aLvœ

Polysyllabic Verbs 496-499. Perfect and Pluperfect Middle and Passive of Verbs 495. Accent of

119-122

with Consonant Stems

CONJUGATION OF VERBS IN MI pi. — Two Classes Synopsis of larrpxL, ridr/ni, SiSœ/xi, and SelKvvpi in Présent and Second Aorist Systems

500-502. General Character of Verbs in 503.

504. Inflection1 of Présent and Second Aorist of These

Verbs and of e5w and èwpi.âpriv

505, 506. Second Perfect and Pluperfect

122

123 124-129

129

CONTENTS

PAGES

SECTIONS

507. Full

Synopsis of These Verbs in Indicative

509-532. Et/xt,

et/iu,

ïiJM1) 4>rllJL<-f

rin

130 131-138

KeîfJiat., olôa

Augment and Reduplication 533.

138

Syllabic and Temporal Augment Defined of Imperfect, Aorist, and Pluper-

534-538. Syllabic Augment fect Indicative

Temporal Augment 542. Augment Omitted 543-549. Reduplication of Perfect and Future Perfect 550, 551. Reduplication of Pluperfect 539-541.

552. Et in etÀTjxa etc

Reduplication Omitted Reduplication 559, 560. Reduplicated Aorists 561. Reduplicated Présents 562-568. Augment and Reduplication of Compound Verbs 553.

554-558. Attic

Tense Stems

and

138

139, 140 140 140, 141 141, 142 142 142 142, 143 143 143 143, 144

Mood Suffixes

144, 145

569, 570. Tense Stems

145 145

571. Thematic Vowel 572. Tense Suffixes

573-576. Mood Suffixes

—

145, 146

Optative Endings

146

577. Personal Endings 578. Personal Endings of 579-581. 582.

Indicative, Subjunctive, Opta¬ tive, and Imperative 146, 147 Endings of Infinitive, Participle, and Verbal Adjective . 147 Remarks on the Endings 147-149 Formation

and

Inflection of Tense Systems

149

583. General Statement

584, 585. Vowel Gradation

Lengthened Grades E, a, and o added to Stem Lengthening of Vowels

586-589. Weak and 590-592. 593-595.

596-600. Short Vowel Retained

—

E Stems

601. Suffix e 602-603. N of Stem

Dropped

604. Weak Grades in Présent,

Second Aorist, Perfect

149 149, 150

150 150, 151

151, 152 152

....

152 152

GREEK GRAMMAR

xii

PAGES

SECTIONS

605.

153

Reduplication

153

606. Itératives

Formation of Tense Stems, and Inflection of Systems in Indicative

Tense

607-674. Présent System 607. Five Classes of Verbs

153-163

608-614. First Class

153, 154

(Iota) Class Class' 644-649. Fourth (-«mo) Class 650. Fifth (Mixed) Class 651-653. Présent and Imperfect of fi Verbs

154-156 156, 157 157 157, 158 158

615-636. Second

637-643. Third (Nasal)

654-658. Dialect and Poetic Forms of fi Verbs

659-661. Dialect Forms of Contract Verbs 662-668. Présent and

Imperfect of Mt Verbs

669-674. Dialect Forms of Mt Verbs

153

158-160 160, 161 161, 162 162, 163

709-715. First Perfect System 716-728. Second Perfect System

164, 165 165, 166 166-169 169 169-171

738-743. First Passive System 744-748. Second Passive System

173 173, 174

675-682. Future System 683-689. First Aorist System

690-708. Second Aorist System

729-737. Perfect Middle and Future Perfect

749. Table of Tense Stems

171, 172

174

Formation of Dépendent Moods and Participle

175, 176 176-178 178-180

750-761. Subjunctive

Optative 778-790. Imperative 762-777.

180, 181

791-799. Infinitive 800-803.

Participles

804. Verbals in

-ros

and

PART III.

181

-reos

181

FORMATION OF WORDS

805,806. Bases, Stems, Préfixés, Suffixes 807. Simple and Compound Words

182 182

SIMPLE WORDS

808, 809. Primitives and Denominatives 810-815. Suffixes

182, 183 183

xiii

CONTENTS Formation

SECTIONS

Nouns

PAGES

815, 816. Vowel Gradation 817-824. Primitives 825-840. Denominatives

183, 184 184, 185

830-832. Diminutives

186, 187 187, 188 188, 189

185-188

833-839. Patronymics 841-849. Formation of Adjectives 850. Adverbs

189

189, 190

851-855. Denominative Verbs COMPOUND WORDS

Subject Compound Word 863-868. Last Part of Compound Word 869-875. Meaning of Compounds

190 190-192 192, 193 193, 194

856. Division of the

857-862. First Part of

PART IV.

876-881. Sentence, Subject,

SYNTAX

Predicate, Object

195

SUBJECT AND PREDICATE

Subject Nominative of Finite Verb Subject Accusative of Infinitive b, c. Subject of Infinitive Omitted 884-887. Subject Nominative Omitted, Impersonal Verbs, etc. 888-895. Subject Nominative and Verb 896-899. Predicate in Same Case as Subject 882. 883.

196 196 196 196, 197 197, 198 198, 199

APPOSITION

199, 200

900-907. Various Forms of Apposition 906. Construction of Whole and Part

200 200, 201

908-914. Uses of Plural and Dual ADJECTIVES

Adjectives Agreeing with Substantives Adjectives Belonging to Omitted Subject of Infinitive 929-932. Adjective Used as Substantive 915-922. 923-928.

201, 202 202-204 204

THE ARTICLE

933-938. Homeric Use of the Article

939-958. Attic Use of the Article (as

(as Pronoun) Definite Article)

204, 205 206-208

GREEK GRAMMAR

xiv

PAGES

SECTIONS

959-978. Position of the Article 959-969. Attributive Position 970-978. Predicate Position

979-983. Pronominal Article in Attic

pev

6 6k etc.)

208-211 208-210 210, 211 . 212

PRONOUNS

212-214 214, 215 215, 216 216, 217

984-992. Personal and Intensive Pronouns 993-997. Reflexive Pronouns 998-1003. Possessive Pronouns 1004-1010. Démonstrative Pronouns 1011-1014.

217

Interrogative Pronoun

1015-1018. Indefinite Pronoun

1019-1025. Relative Pronoun as Related to 1024. b. Olos re

its Antécédent

Préposition Not Repeated Antécédent 1030-1037. Assimilation and Attraction of Relatives

219

1025.

1026-1029. Relative with Omitted

1038. Relative in Exclamations

1039. Relative Pronoun Not

Repeated in

217, 218 218, 219 219

....

New Case

219, 220 220, 221 221 .

221

THE CASES

Nominative and Yocative

222 222 222 222

1040. General Remark on the Cases 1041.

Nominative,

Subject

1042. Vocative Used in

Predicate

Addressing

1043. Nominative Used for Vocative

Accusative 1044. Various Functions of the

222

Accusative

(External) Object Cognate Accusative (of Internai Object) Accusative of Spécification

1045-1048. Accusative of Direct 1049-1055.

1056-1058.

....

225

1058. Construction of Whole and Part

1059,1060. Adverbial Accusative

1061-1063. Accusative of Extent of 1064. Terminal Accusative

Time

(Poetic)

225 226

Space

and /xà Two Accusatives with Verbs Signifying 1068-1070. To ask, teach, remind, clothe, conceal, divide, etc 1065-1067. Accusative with

223 223, 224 225

226 226

deprive,

226, 227

CONTENTS

SECTIONS

PAGES

To do anything to or say anything of a or thing 1074. Cognate and Object Accusative Together 1075-1079. Predicate and Object Accusative Together 1071-1073.

person

227

228

Genitive 1080. Various Functions of the Genitive 1081. Genitive with Substantives

228

(Attributive)

229

1082-1087. Seven Classes of Attributive Genitive 1088-1092. Partitive Genitive

(Genitive of the Whole)

Genitive with Verbs

1093-1096.

Predicate Genitive

1097,1098.

Genitive Expressing Part

1099-1102.

Partitive Genitive with Verbs Signifying To take hold of, touch, aim at, claim, hit, miss,

begin, etc

1103-1108.

To taste, smell, hear, perceive,

1109-1111.

To rule, lead, or dired Fulness or Want

1112-1116.

1117-1120.

desire,

spare,

remember, forget, negled, admire, despise, etc. .

Genitive of SĂŠparation and Comparison

1121-1123. Genitive of Cause and Source

234, 235

235

235, 236 236, 237

237, 238 238

1127-1131. Genitive with Verbs of Judicial Action

238

Compound Verbs or

233, 234

237

1125,1126. Genitive of Source 1126. Genitive of Agent or Instrument (Poetic)

1133-1135. Genitive of Price

231, 232 232, 233

237

1124. Causal Genitive in Exclamations

1132. Genitive with

229, 230 230, 231

239

Value

239

1136-1138. Genitive of Time and Place 1139-1142. Objective Genitive with Verbal Adjectives 1143-1145. Possessive Genitive with Adjectives denoting Possession etc .

1146. Genitive with Certain Adjectives of Place 1147-1150. Genitive with Comparatives 1151-1155. Genitive with Adverbs 1156. Genitive Absolute (see also 1570)

240

240, 241 241, 242 242 242 242, 243 243

Dative

243

1157. Various Functions of the Dative Dative Expressing to or for : 1158. Dative of Indirect Object

1159-1163.

Dative with Certain Intransitive Verbs

244

....

244, 245

xvi

GREEK GRAMMAR

SECTIONS

1164. 1165-1170. 1171. 1172.

PAGES

Dative with Verbs of Ruling Dative of Advantage or Disadvantage Ethical Dative Dative of Relation

245 245, 246

....

246 246

Dative of Possession (with eipL, etc.) 1174. Dative of Agent

246, 247 247 1175. DativewithAdjectives, Ad verbs, and Substantives 247 1176,1177. Dative with Words Implying Likeness or Unlikeness 247, 248 1178,1179. Dative with Compound Verbs 248 1173.

1180. Instrumental Dative

248

1181,1182. Dative of Cause, Manner, Means, and Respect 1183. Dative with

Xpo.op.aL use

1184,1185. Dative of Degree of Différence (with Comparatives) 1186,1187. Dative of Accompaniment (sometimes with avrôs) 1188-1190. Dative with Words Implying Agreement, Union, Approach

248, 249 249 249 249, 250 .

250 250, 251

1191-1193. Locative Dative 1194-1196. Dative of Time

251 PREPOSITIONS

1197.

Prépositions Originally Adverbs on the Prépositions

252 252, 253

1198-1206. Remarks 1199. Tmesis

1202,1203. Position

252

Anastrophe 1204. Constructio Praegnans 1206. Prépositions in Composition Taking their Own

252, 253 253

—

Cases

253

Prépositions with Genitive, Dative, and Accusative 253, 254 1209-1226. List of the Prépositions 254-261 1227. Improper Prépositions 262 1207.

ADVERBS

1228,1229. Adverbs Qualifying Verbs, Adjectives, and Adverbs 262, 263 SYNTAX OF THE VERB

VOICES 1230-1233. Active Voice

1234,1235. Passive Voice 1236. Agent with Passive Verbs (virô and Genitive) 1237-1239. Dative of Agent (see also 1174)

263

263, 264 264

....

1240. Passive Construction When Active Has Two Cases

264

CONTENTS

xvii

SECTIONS

PAGES

1241. Cognate Accusative Made Subject of Passive 1242. Intransitive Active Forms Used as Passives 1243-1248. Middle Voice (Three Uses)

....

265

265, 266

Tenses 1249. Two Relations Denoted by the Tenses I. Tenses

265

266

of the Indicative

1250-1268. Tenses of the Indicative (Time and Character of

Action)

267-270

1252-1261. Présent and Imperfect 1261-1264. Aorist

267-269 269

1265,1266. Peffect 1267. Future

269, 270

(in Commands)

270

1268. Future Perfect

1269-1272. Primary and

270

Secondary Tenses

II. Tenses of the A. Not

270

Dépendent Moods

Indirect Discourse

1273. Présent and Aorist Chiefly Used 1274. Distinction Between Présent and Aorist Here 1275-1277. Perfect Not in Indirect Discourse 1278-1280. Future Infinitive Not in Indirect Discourse

271 ....

271

271, 272 272

B. In Indirect Discourse

1281. Définition of Indirect Discourse 1282-1285. Optative and Infinitive in Indirect Discourse 1286. Présent Infinitive and Optative Include Imperfect 1287. Infinitive with Verbs of Hoping, Promising, etc. .

(Two Constructions Allowed) Only in Indirect Discourse

1288. Future Optative Used III. Tenses

1289.

272

272, 273

273 273

274

of the Participle

Expressing Time Relatively to Leading Verb

....

1290. Présent Participle as Imperfect 1291. Aorist Sometimes Denoting Same Time as Leading Verb

274 274

274

IV. Gnomic and Itérative Tenses

1292. Gnomic Présent, Truth

Expressing Habit

General

274, 275

GREEK GRAMMAR

xviii

pages

sections

1293-1295. Gnomic Aorist, Expressing Habit or General Truth 1296. Gnomic Perfect, Expressing Habit or General

275

Truth

275

1297,1298. Itérative Imperfect and Aorist with &p The Adverb "Ap 1299-1301. Two Uses of "Ap with the

1302.

275, 276

a.p

Indicative

276

Never with Présent or Perfect

With Future (Chiefly Homeric) 1304. With Secondary Tenses 1305. "Ap with the Subjunctive 1303.

1306,1307. "Ap with the Optative (Potential) . 1308,1309. "Ap with the Infinitive and Participle (Potential) 1310,1311. Position of ap 1312. "Ap Repeated in Long Apodosis 1313-1315. Spécial Uses of 'àv

. .

276 276 276, 277 . . 277 277, 278 278 278 278

The Moods

General Statement and Classification 1316-1318. Various Uses of Indicative

278, 279

1319,1320. Various Uses of Subjunctive 1321,1322. Various Uses of Optative 1323. The Imperative 1324. The Infinitive, Participle, Verbal 1325. Classification of Constructions of the Moods

279 279, 280 280

I. Potential 1326-1333. Potential

Optative and Indicative

Optative with àv

1334-1340. Potential Indicative with àv

II.

280 280, 281

281, 282 283, 284

Imperative and Subjunctive in Independent Sentences. Independent Sentences with or ottus

1341,1342. Imperative in Commands, Exhortations, etc 1343,1344. First Person of Subjunctive in Exhortations 1345,1346. Présent Imperative or Aorist Subjunctive in

284 284

Prohibitions 284, 1347,1348. Independent Subjunctive in Homer (Euripides, Plato) with m, Expressing Fear or Anxiety .... 1349,1350. Subjunctive or Indicative with m or ^ où in Cautious Assertions or Négations 1351-1354. Future Indicative in Commands and Prohibitions .

285

285 285 285

CONTENTS

xix

III- Expression of a Wish c

SECTIONS

PAGES

1355-1358. Optative in Wishes (with or without eïde etc.) 1359. Indicative in Wishes (with e'ide etc.)

....

286 286

1360-1363. "tifaXop with Infinitive in Wishes

287

IV. Homeric Subjunctive like Future Indicative.

Interrogative Subjunctive

1364-1366. Homeric Use of the Subjunctive as

Simple Future 1367, 1368. Interrogative Subjunctive (Questions of Doubt) .

V. Subjunctive and Future Indicative with

Object Clauses with Iva, ùs,

288

ottcos,

6<f>pa, and pi]

1371,1372. Three Classes of These Clauses 1373. Négative Particle in These Clauses

288, 289 289

I. Pure Final Clauses (after All the Final

Particles)

1374-1377. With Subjunctive and Optative 1378,1379. With Subjunctive after Secondary Tenses

289, 290

290

1380. Purpose Implied in a Condition 1381. With the Past Tenses of the Indicative II. Object Clauses

with ottcos after

1382,1383. With Future Indicative

Verbs

290 290

Striving Etc.

Optative 1384. Same Construction with Verbs of Exhorting etc. 1385-1387. Présent or Aorist Subjunctive or Optative Here 1388. Homeric Subjunctive and Optative with ottcos or ws 291, III. Clauses

with

pi) after Verbs

288

pi)

136S, 1370. As Emphatic Future and in Prohibitions VI. Final and

287

291 291 291

292

Fearing

1389. With Subjunctive and Optative 1390. With Future Indicative (rare) 1391. With Présent or Past Tenses of Indicative

292 292 .

292

VII. Conditional Sentences

1392. 1393. 1394. 1395.

Définition of Protasis and Apodosis Use of 'àv (Hom. «è) in Protasis and Apodosis Négative Particles in Protasis and Apodosis Distinction of Particular and General Suppositions

1396-1399. Classification of Conditional

Sentences

292 292, 293 293

293

293, 294

GREEK GRAMMAR

SECTIONS

i. present or past conditions with nothing implied

(Chiefly Particular) with

1400. Simple Suppositions Indicative

Denoting Présent Intention 1403-1406. Présent and Past General Suppositions 1401. Future Indicative

PAGES

294, 295

295 295, 296

....

II. present and past conditions with supposition contrary to fact

{&v ;n Apodosis) Optative Used' Here in Homer in Présent

296

1407. Past Tenses of Indicative 1408. Présent

296

Conditions

Optative with «è in Homer Rarely Past in Apodosis 1410-1412. "Eôet, xpvv, etc. with Infinitive in Apodosis without av 1409.

III. Future Conditions, More

. .

Vivid Form

298

1413,1414. Subjunctive with eàv in Protasis 1415. Future Indicative with

1416,1417. Subjunctive with Simple

in Threats and Warnings et

(in Homer)

IV. Future Conditions, Less Vivid

1418-1422.

297 297

298

298 Form

Optative in Both Protasis and Apodosis

298, 299

....

Peculiar Forms of Conditional Sentences

1423. Protasis Contained in

Participle

1424-1427. Ellipsis of Protasis or Apodosis 1428. Infinitive or Participle in Indirect 1429. 1430. 1431. 1432.

Other Word

Discourse Forming Apodosis Infinitive (Not in Indirect Discourse) Forming Apodosis Apodosis Implied in Context Protasis and Apodosis of Différent Classes Aé Introducing an Apodosis Et after Verbs of Wondering (0au/xàf«) etc

1433,1434. 1435,1436. Concessive Clauses

VIII. Relative and Temporal

299 300

300 300 300, 301 301 302

302 302

Sentences

1437. Relative Including Temporal Clauses 1438. Definite and Indefinite Antécédent Explained

1439. Relative with Definite Antécédent

302 302, 303

303

1440. Relative with Indefinite Antécédent. Conditional Relative

303

CONTENTS

xxi

SECTIONS

1441.

1442,1443. 1444.

I. (a) Simple Présent

PAGES

Past Conditions (6) Présent and Past General Conditions or

....

II. Présent and Past Unfulfilled Conditions

1445,1446. III. Future Conditions (More Vivid Form) 1447. IV. Future Conditions (Less Vivid Form)

303, 304

....

304

304, 305

305

1448. Peculiar Forms in Conditional Relative Sentences 1449. Optative Depending on a Verb Denoting

305

Obliga¬

tion etc

305

1450. Homeric Similes

305

1451-1453. Assimilation in Conditional Relative Sentences 1454-1456. Relative Clauses Expressing Purpose 1457-1460. Relative Clauses Expressing Resuit

305, 306

306

306, 307

1461,1462. Causal Relative

307

IX. Causal Sentences

1463-1465. Clauses Introduced by

on,

hreî, eiirep, etc

307, 308

X. Consécutive Clauses

1466-1475. Clauses

Expressing Resuit with XI.

1476,1477. 'E4>' $ XII.

308, 309

œare

Stipulative Clauses

or k<j> Are

with Infinitive

Future Indicative

309

Temporal Particles Signifying Until and Before

1478-1483. Constructions after eus, eo-re, 'àxph p-éxph °<t>pa until 1484-1486. Ilplv with the Infinitive and the Finite Moods 1487—1489. IIpiv y' ôre, irplv ij, irpÔTepov 77, rrpôadev g

....

310 311

311, 312

XIII. Indirect Discourse 1490. Direct and Indirect Quotations and Questions 1491-1494. Indirect Quotations and Questions, How Introduced .

1495.

Meaning of Expression Indirect Discourse 1496-1501. General Principles of Indirect Discourse. Use of âi>. Négative Particle Simple Sentences

1502. Indicative and

313

313 313

Indirect Discourse

Optative with

ùs, and in In¬

direct Questions 1503. Présent Optative Occasionally Represents Imperfect 1504. Présent and Perfect Changed to Imperfect and

Pluperfect

312

314 .

314

314,315

GREEK GRAMMAR

xxii SECTIONS

Optative in Indirect Questions, Representing Interrogative Subjunctive Indicative or Optative with av (Unchanged) Infinitive and Participle in Indirect Quotations . . Distinguished from Object Infinitive Négative of Infinitive and Participle (Sometimes m)

PAGES

1505-1507. Subjunctive or 1508. 1509. 1510.

1511.

Indirect

315 315 .

•

Dépendent Clauses in Indirect Quotation . . Changed to Optative, Another Unchanged . Dépendent Aorist Indicative Not Changed to Optative

1513. One Verb

1515,1516. Spécial Cases 1517,1518. Single Dépendent Clauses in Indirect Discourse, Independently of the Rest of the Sentence. Four Classes

1519. Oôx

316 316

Quotation of Complex Sentences

1512. Rule for 1514.

316

otl, ovx oirœs, pr/ on, prj

317 317

317

318

318, 319

319

oircos

The Infinitive

1520. Infinitive

Article)

Verbal Noun (with and without

319, 320

Infinitive without the Article

Predicate, or Appositive Object of a Verb :

1521. Infinitive as Subject, 1522. Infinitive as

1523-1525. 1526-1529.

....

Not in Indirect Discourse (Chiefly Présent and Aorist) In Indirect Discourse (with Time of Tenses Preserved)

1530,1531. Infinitive with Adjectives 1532-1535. Limiting Infinitive 1536,1537. Infinitive of Purpose (or Resuit, Hom.) 1538,1539. Absolute Infinitive. 'EkAp eîpcu etc 1540-1543. Infinitive in Commands, Wishes, Laws, etc

320

320 321, 322

322

322, 323

323 323, 324

324

Infinitive with the Article 1544. Character of Articular

325

Infinitive

1545-1547. Infinitive with to as Subject or Object 1548. Infinitive with rô with Nouns 1549. Infinitive with tov, tQ, or to after Prépositions

1550,1551. Infinitive with tov or rû

325

....

325 326

in Various Constructions... 326

CONTENTS

xxiii

SECTIONS

1552-1556. Infinitive with

(or

PAGES

without

roO or roO

pi], rô

or to prj

où), after Verbs of Hindrance etc. Adjuncts and to, as Noun 1558. Infinitive (generally with ré) in Exclamations py

326, 327

1557. Infinitive with

327 ....

1559. Infinitives Treated Elsewhere

328 328

The Participle

1560,1561. Participle

Verbal Adjective. Three Uses

328

Attributive Participle

Participle Qualifying a Noun (as Adjective) 1563,1564. Participle with Article as Substantive 1565. Neuter Participle with Article as Abstract Noun 1562.

328

328, 329 .

329

Circumstantial Participle 1566. Various Uses of this Participle 1567-1569. Adverbial Uses of the Participle 1570. Genitive Absolute

329, 330 330, 331 331

1571,1572. Accusative Absolute

332

1573. "fip Omitted 1574-1579. Various Adverbs with Circumstantial

332

Participle

332, 333

Supplementary Participle 1580,1581. Showing to What the Action of the Verb Relates Not

333

Indirect Discourse

1582,1583. With Verbs Signifying to begin, continue, cease, repent, etc 333, 334 1584,1585. With Verbs Signifying to perceive, find, or represent 334 1586. Bov\ôfj.evos, yb6jj.evos, etc., Agreeing with Dative 334 1587. With irepiopàœ and e^opâw overlook, see, allow 334, 335 1588. With XavQàvco, twyxwu, and <f>dâvœ 335 1589. With ôtareXéw, o'ixopat., etc 335 .

....

In Indirect Discourse

1590. 1591. 1592.

Participle with Verbs Signifying to see, hear, learn, perceive, know, etc Arj\6s or <t>avep6s eip.i with Participle Hùvoiba and crvyyiypûcrKœ with a Participle in Nomi¬ native

Dative

335, 336 336 336

GREEK GRAMMAR

xxiv

PAGES

SECTIONS

336

1593,1594. Verbs of 1590 with Other Constructions 1595. 'fis with Participle of Indirect Discourse

337

Verbal Adjectives in -réos and -réov

337

1596. Two Constructions

337 337, 338

1597,1598. Personal Construction of Verbal in -réos 1599,1600. Impersonal Verbal in -réov (or -réa) INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES

338 338

Interrogatives Interrogatives with One Verb

1601. Direct and Indirect 1602. Two or More

1603,1604. Interrogative as Predicate 1605. Direct Interrogatives, — àpa, rj, 1606. "AXXo

fj; or âXXo

1607. Indirect

ov,

pi], pûv,

ovkovi*

338, 339 .

tl;

Questions with et (Homeric fj or et) Questions, irôrepov . . . t) etc

339 339 339

339

1608. Alternative

NEGATIVES

1609. Two

Négatives, où and pi] Indicative and Optative or et p-q in Indirect Questions

1610. Où with Independent 1611. Et où

1612. Adherescent où

....

with Subjunctive and Imperative 1614. Négative with Infinitive 1615-1617. Négative with Participles and Adjectives .... 1618. m17 with Infinitive after Verbs with Négative Idea 1619,1620. M17 où with Infinitive (after Négative Leading Verb) 1621,1622. Two or More Négatives in One Clause 1613. M17

PART V.

1623-1625. Rhythm 1626.

1627. 1628. 1629. 1630.

and Metre

Ictus, Thesis, Arsis Metrical and Accentuai Rhythm Time. Long and Short Syllables Enumeration of Feet Tépos t<jov, ykvos 5iir\â<nov

Syncopation. Catalectic Verses

1635. Irrational Time 1636.

340

340 340 340, 341 . . 341

341, 342 342

VERSIFICATION

1631,1632. Place of the Ictus in a Foot 1633. Resolution and Contraction 1634.

340 340 340

Cyclic Dactyl and Anapaest

343 344

344 344, 345 345 346

346

346, 347

347

CONTENTS SECTIONS

1637. 1638.

Syllaba Anceps Rhythmical Sériés and Verse

1639. Close of Verse

1643-1645. Pauses.

Caesura, Diaeresis

1646. Names of Verses 1648. 1649. 1650.

1651. 1652-1658. 1659-1669.

Monometers, Dimeters, etc Tripodies, Tetrapodies, etc Ascending and Descending Rhythms Rendering of Verses Karà cttLxov, Strophe, Epode Trochaic Rhythms lambic Rhythms

1662. Porson's Rule

1670-1676. Dactylic Rhythms 1674,1675. Elegiac Distich 1677-1680. Anapaestic Rhythms 1681,1682. Rhythms with Feet of Five Times 1681,1682. Cretic, Paeonic, Bacchic 1683. Dochmiacs

Rhythms with Feet of Six Times Rhythms

1684. Ionic

1685. Anacreontic Verse. Ilemiambi 1686-1688. Choriambic Verse

1689-1690.

347, 348 348 349 349

349

349 349

349 349-351

351-354 352

1665. Choliambic Verse

1684.

347 347 347

1640-1642. Catalexis

1647.

xxv PAGES

353

354-356

355, 356 356-358 358

358

358, 359 359, 360 359, 360 360

360-362

Dactylo-Epitritic Rhythms

362

APPENDIX

Catalogue

Verbs

363-399 INDEXES

Greek-English English-Greek

403-433 435-457

AUTHORS

CITATIONS OF Aesch.

Aeschylus

Agamemnon Choëphori

....

Eumenides Persians Prometheus....

Eum. Pers. Pr.

Supplices

Suppl.

....

Andocides

....

Acharnenses

Aves Ecclesiazusae

Nubes Pax Plutus Ranae

Thesmophoriazusae Vespae

Demosthenes

....

Euripides

Alcestis Andromache Bacchae

Electra

Hecuba Helena Heracles Heraclidae

Hippolytus Medea Orestes Phoenissae Rhésus

....

Troades

Hesiod Theogonia

....

Herodotus Homer :

Isaeus Isocrates

Monostichi

....

Aie. Andr. Ba.

Menex. Meno Ph. Phdr. Phil. Pol.

Prot. Rep. So. Symp. Th. Tim.

Theae têtus Timaeus

Sapph. S.

Sappho Sophocles

Aj. Ant.

Ajax Antigone

El.

Electra

Hipp.

Oedipus at Colonus Oedipus Tyrannus

Philo ctetes Trachiniae

0. C. O.T.

Ph. Tr.

Stobaeus

Stob.

Theognis Thucydides Xenophon

Theognis Thuc. X.

Theoc.

Theocritus

Ages.

Agesilaus

Anabasis

Cyropaedia De re Equestri Hellenica

Hipparchicus Memorabilia Oeconomicus

Mon.

Mimn.

Lg. Lys.

Republic Sophist Symposium

Men.

Menander

Lach.

Protagoras

Dem.

Lys.

Lysias

...

Menexenus Meno Phaedo Phaedrus Philebus Politicus

Od. Isae. Isoc.

Odyssey

Euthyd. Euthyph. G. H. Maj.

....

Leges Lysis

Th. V.

Hes. Th. Hdt.

Critias Crito

Lâches

Il•

Iliad

Mimnermus

Euthydemus Euthyphro Gorgias Hippias Major

Nub. Pax Pl. R.

Med. Or. Phoen. Rh. Tro.

Plat. Ap. Ch. Crat.

Critias Crito

Eq. Lys.

El. Hec. Hel. Her. Heraclid.

Cratylus

Ar.

Cyc.

Cyclops

Charmides

Av. Eccl.

....

Apology

Ach.

Equités

Lysistrata

01. Py.

...

Plato

Alcae. Andoc.

Alcaeus

Aristophanes

Olympian Odes Pythian Odes

Sev.

Septem

Pind.

Pindar

Ag. Ch.

.... .... ....

C. Eq. H.

Hipp.

M. Oec.

Republica Atheniensi Rep. A.

Symposium xxvi

Symp.

GREEK GRAMMAR INTRODUCTION THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND DIALECTS The Greek language is the language spoken by the Greek race, which, from a period long before Homer, has occupied the lower part of the Balkan peninsula, the islands of the Aegean Sea, the coasts of Asia Minor, and, later, certain districts in Southern Italy, Sicily, Gaul, and Northern Africa. After the Homeric period the people of this race called themselves by the name Hellenes, and their language Hellenic. We call them Greeks, from the Roman

name

Graeci.

Although conscious of possessing the same speech and the same religion, the Greeks were not politically united. In the Homeric poems (before 900 B.c.) there is no common name to dénoté the entire

race.

The Homeric Hellenes

were a

small tribe in south-

Thessaly, of which Achilles was king ; and the Greeks in général were called by Homer Achaeans, Argives, or Danaans. Later, Greek literature recognized three important divisions which we may conveniently follow here, though they leave out of account many régions and dialects which differed from each other and from the three. These main divisions are Aeolic, Doric, and Ionic. The Attic dialect is closely related to the Ionic. Aeolic was the language of Lesbos and the Lesbian poets Alcaeus and Sappho. Many traces of it appear in Homer and later poetry. ' A variety of Aeolic was spoken in Thessaly and Boeotia. Doric belongs to Peloponnesus (except Elis and Arcadia), Crete and other islands, Southern Italy, and parts of Sicily. It is the dialect of many lyric poets, and the choral parts of Athenian tragedy have some forms related to it. In the language of the Ionians we must distinguish the Old and the New Ionic. The Old Ionic or Epie is the language of the eastern

GREEK GRAMMAR

Homeric poems, the

oldest literature of the Greeks and therefore

of Europe. It exercised a great influence on later poetry, diction and in the forms of words. As a spoken language

both in

Ionic is found on the coast of Asia Minor, in most of the Aegean Islands, and in Sicily. The New Ionic was the language of Ionia in the fifth century b.c., as it appears in Herodotus (about 484-425 b.c.) and Hippocrates (born 460 b.c.). The Attic was the language of Athens during her ' period of literary eminence (from about 500 to 300 b.c.). In it were written the tragédies of Aeschylus, Sophocles, and Euripides, the comedies of Aristophanes, the historiés of Thucydides and Xenophon, the orations of Demosthenes and the other orators of Athens, and the works of the philosopher Plato. Old Attic is a name often given to the dialect of the tragedians and Thucydides. New Attic is the language of most of the later Attic writers. The Attic dialect is the most cultivated and refined form of the Greek language. It is therefore made the basis of Greek Grammar, and the other dialects are usually treated, for convenience, as if their forms were merely variations of the Attic. This is a position, however, to which the Attic has no claim on the ground of âge or of more primitive forms, in respect to which it holds a rank below the other dialects.

and political importance of Athens caused her gradually to supplant the others wherever Greek was spoken ; but in this very extension to régions widely separated the Attic dialect itself was not a little modified by various local influences, and lost some of its early purity. The language which thus arose, with admixture of many Ionic elements, is called the Common Dialect, or Koiné (17 kolvti 5tâXe/cros). This begins with the Alexandrian period, the time of the literary eminence of Alexandria in Egypt, which dates from the accession of Ptolemy II in 285 b.c. The Greek of the philosopher Aristotle (384-322 b.c.) lies on the border line between this and the purer Attic. The name Hellenistic is often given to that form of the Common Dialect which was used by the Jews of Alexandria who made the Septuagint version of the Old Testament (283-135 b.c.) and by the writers of the New Testament, ail of whom were Hellenists (that is, foreigners who spoke Greek). The New Testament is in large part written in the popular colloquial language of the time. The literary

dialect

INTRODUCTION

Towards the end of the eleventh century after Christ the

popular Greek then spoken in the Byzantine Roman Empire began to appear in literature by the side of the scholastic ancient Greek, which had ceased to be intelligible to the common people. This popular language, the earliest form of Modem Greek, was called Romaic ('Pco/uaï/07), since the people called themselves

Romans.

The

name

Romaic has been little used since Greek

independence was established in the last century ; and the présent language of the Greeks is called simply 'EXXrjvucr} or 'EXXrçn/cà, while the country is 'EXXâs and the people are "EXX^m. The literary Greek has been greatly purified during the last halfcentury by the expulsion of foreign words and the restoration of classic forms; and the same process has afïected the spoken language, especially that of cultivated society in Athens, but to a far less extent. It is not too much to say that the Greek of many of the books and newspapers now published in Athens could have been understood by Demosthenes or Plato. The Greek language has thus an unbroken literary history, from Homer to the présent day, of perhaps thirty centuries. The Greek belongs to a great family of related languages called the Indo-European. These include ancient Indian (or Sanskrit), Persian, Armenian, Albanian, Slavic, Lithuanian, Italie (that is, Latin, Oscan, and Umbrian), Celtic, and Germanie. Greek is closely connected with the Italie languages, as is shown by many striking analogies between Greek and Latin, which appear in both bases and terminations ; but there are also many less obvious analogies between Greek and the Anglo-Saxon element in English, which are seen in words like me, is, know, etc. On the basis of this original kinship an important distinction is drawn between cognate and borrowed words. Thus, English is, Latin es-t, Greek ea-rl are cognate ; but English mechanic, theatre, téléphoné, and thousands of other words, are borrowed (or derived) from Attic Greek.

PART I

LETTERS, SYLLABLES, ACCENTS THE ALPHABET 1. The Greek Form

alphabet has twenty-four letters :

Equivalent

Name

aX0a PrjTCL

Sound

alpha

B /j r 7

b g

A ô

d ë

e?, e, ë \pThov Çrjra rjra drjra

epsilon

let

zeta

gaze

eta

French fête thin

z r H 7J

e e

beta

7a/iyua

gamma

ôéXra

delta

thêta iota

iœra

papa; â:

(also sing, 21)

French petit ;

ï: c

kappa

Kairira

kill

A X

M/x

Xâ(p)/3i5a

lambda

land

p.V

men

S f

xi Çeî, %i ov, ô, ô lûnpov omicron Tel, tÎ pi

p p S cr

$ 0

r s

alypa

(U) ph

rho

pco

pique

now wax

obey pet run

sigma

sit

raO

tau

tell

S, 5 \pTkbv 0eî, 0î xet, X? 0eî, 0Î <S, péya

upsilon phi

graphie

2. At the end of a word the form (Tvvdeats combination.

French u, German u

chi

Scotch loch

psi

gypsum tone

oméga

father

used, elsewhere the form

; e.g.

GREEK GRAMMAR

belonged to the primitive Greek alphabet : vau équivalent to w; koppa (?), équivalent to q ; and sampi (V)), which is a graphie combination of san, a form of sigma, and pi. They were used as numerals (446), vau here having the form ç~', which is used also as an abbreviation of crr. Vau had not entirely disappeared in pro3. Three other letters

digamma (f),

Homeric poems were composed, and the meter of in these is explained only by admitting its presence. Many also which seem irregular are explained only on the supposition

nunciation when the many verses

forms that

has been omitted

(see 102, 266, 267).

of the best period used the names d or ë for epsilon, or ô for omicron, u for upsilon, and & for oméga ; the présent names for these letters are late. Some médiéval Greek grammarians used ë i (plain e) and u ipï\6v (plain u) to distinguish e and u from tu and ot, in their time had similar sounds. 4. The Athenians

which

VOWELS AND

DIPHTHONGS

and v. Of these, e and o are and co are always long; a, 1, and v are long in some syllables and short in others, whence they are called doubtful 5. The

vowels

are a, e, 77, l, o, eu,

always short; 77 vowels.

to the more open or less open The open vowels, in order of openness, are a, 77, co ; the close vowels are e, 1, o, v, the closest being t and u. 7. The diphthongs (ôi-cfrdoyyoi double-sounding) are ai, av, et, ev, 01, ov, pv, vi, a, 7], 10. These unité in one syllable two vowels, of which the second is the close t or v. Ail diphthongs are long. The long vowels (â, 77, co) with 1 form the so-called improper diphthongs a, 77, co, in which the t is now usually written below the line and is called iota subscript. But with capitals it is written in the line {iota adscript) : THI KfiMfllAIAI to the comedy. So also "fitxero, 6. Vowels are open or close according position of the mouth in pronunciation.

he went away. diphthongs et and ou are either genuine or spurious. Genuine et, ou either belong to the earliest structure of the language, as in ireLdw persuade (cf. its perfect iréTrocda), or arise from contraction of e + t, as yévtri, y'evei by birth (232). Spurious et and ou arise from contraction e + e and e + o, o + e, or o + o, as in é7T0tet (for kiroiee) he made, kiroLovp (for kiroleop) they made; or from compensative lengthening (32), as in n0ets (for riOevT-s, 70) placing, tovs (for tôv-s, 75), the accusative plural of the article.

but coxe-ro 8. The

in of

the spurious diphthongs were written like (that is, el, oy) ; but in earlier times they were written

In the fourth century b.c.

genuine e

and

See 28.

VOWELS

9. The mark of diaeresis (ôialp&ns séparation), a double dot over a vowel, shows that this vowel does not form a diphthong with the preceding vowel ; e.g. ■Kpo'ik.vo.i (irpo-tevai) to go forward, 'ArpetS-gs son of Atreus.

10. The t now called subscript was written as an ordinary sound (that is, in the line with the first vowel) as long as it was pronounced. It was no longer sounded after about 200 B.c., though it was sometimes written (always in the line, or adscript), sometimes omitted. The iota subscript is not older than the eleventh century.

BREATHINGS

Every vowel or diphthong at the beginning of a word has breathing (') or the smooth breathing ('). The rough breathing shows that the vowel is aspirated, that is, that it is preceded by the sound h ; the smooth breathing shows that the vowel is not aspirated. Thus ôpœv seeing is pronounced hôrôn; but opœv of mountains is pronounced ôrôn. In. Attic words, initial v is always aspirated, as in vôcop water. 12. A diphthong takes the breathing, like the accent (128), upon its 11.

either the rough

second vowel. But £, y, and (7) have both breathing and accent first vowel, even when the i is written in the line. Thus

the

oi'xerat, evcfrpaLvw, "H1Ô77. On the other

Aïpœv ; but u>xeT0 or "Çhxero, q.5co or "Aiôco, ijÔTj or hand, the writing of âîôios ('AL5ios) shows that a and t do diphthong, and the diaeresis (9) is not needed in writing.

not form

13. The rough breathing was once denoted by H. When this sign was taken (which once was not distinguished in writing from ë), half of it (ï) was used for the rough breathing ; and afterwards the other half (I) was used for the smooth breathing. From these fragments came the later signs ' and '. 14. When a word beginning with the rough breathing is compounded, as in 7rpo-opœv foreseeing, the aspirate is not written. But it must often have been heard in pronunciation, e.g. in 7roXuto-rwp, Lat. polyhistor, and it affected consonants preceding it (51, 103). to dénoté ë

15. At the

beginning of

(Lat. rhetor) orator. a.

Older texts often printed

Pyrrhus.

word

pp as pp ;

is written

e.g.

apprjTos

in p^rcop

unspeakable, Uvppos

CONSONANTS 16. The consonants are divided, according to the organs of speech by which they are produced, or according to their sound effect, into stops (also called mutes), double consonants, liquids, nasals, and spirants.

GREEK GRAMMAR

Stops or mutes are

17.

the organ of three classes

produced by the complété

speech employed in uttering the sound. of stops, according to the organ : Labials (lips) ir /3 <j) Palatals Dentals

Stops of the same

(palate) (teeth)

closing of There are

class are called cognate.

Stops are also of three orders, breathing required : Smooth or Voiceless 18.

Middle

Rough

Voiced (23)

Aspirate

according to the effort of ir

<£

k y

order are called coôrdinate. 19. The Double Consonants are £, \p, f. S, pronounced na, may represent na, ya, xu ; na, not £, is written in compounds of (é/c) oui of, as ê/c-crràs standing ont of. Tq pronounced ira, may stand Stops of the same

for

ira,

fia, 0<r. The

Ail these have the

ing syllable

(120).

combinations aô, yi, or h give f. effect of two consonants in lengthening a preced-

Liquids are X and p. Nasals are p (a labial), v (a dental), and nasal y. a. The nasal y occurs before k, y, x, or £, and has the sound of n in king or ink; compare Concord with concordance. E.g. âyyeXos (Lat. angélus) messenger; aynvpa (an cor a) anchor; atpLy^ Sphinx. 20. The

21. The

22. The

only Spirant in Greek

also called a sibilant.

Rarely the spirant y gave place to f ; cf. Çvyov, Eng. yoke, Lat. iugum; more commonly to the rough breathing, e.g. fiirap liver, Lat. iecur. a.

vibrate. Ail vocalis). Of the and f are voiced; so also when not initial. Voiced sounds are also called sonants. Voiceless consonants are produced without vibration of the vocal cords ; they are x, t, k, <t>, 6, x, a, \p, £. These are sometimes called surds. 24. The only consonants which can end a Greek word are v, p, and If others are left at the end in forming words, they are 23. Voiced sounds are

produced when the vocal cords

vowels are voiced, as their name dénotés (cf. Lat. sounds explained above, /3, y, nasal y, 8, X, p, v, p

dropped, but

becomes v.

CONSONANTS

E.g. /néXi honey for /ueXir (gen. péXir-os) ; o-û/ia body for acopar (gen. oupar-os) ; aXXo of/ier for àXXoô (cf. Lat. aliud) ; ëXDe was loosingior èXve-r ; 'ifyepov was carrying for e-^epo-vr (cf. Lat. ferunt); ïirirov horse for tmro-p (cf. Lat. equum). 25. The only exceptions, and these are apparent, not real, are êx out of for ê£ (84 à), and ovk or ovx not, which has another for m où. They are pronounced as part of the following word. Final £ and («a and ira) are not exceptions. For v movable, see 110.

26. Lost Sounds. Besides f (3), a spirant, other sounds were lost very early (22). They include the semivowels i and v, corresponding to Eng. y and w ; cf. union, qyeer. These left many traces. See 37, 87, 92.

Liquids and Sonant Nasals. The sounds X, p, v, p performed the function of vowels and had syllabic force; cf. Eng. table, fathowï, cottow, Fr. timbre. In Greek sonant X is represented by Xa or aX ; sonant p, and v, by a (218 a) ; sonant p, by pa or ap. 27. Sonant

once

28. The Greek alphabet above described is the Ionic, used by the Asiatic a very early period, but not sanctioned officially at Athens until 403 B.c. The Athenians had previously used an alphabet which had no separate signs for ê, ô (long and open), ks, or ps. In this earlier alphabet E was used for ë and ê and also for the spurious diphthong et (8), which in some cases is an orthographie device to represent ë (long and close) ; 0 for ô and ô and for spurious ov (8) ; H was still an aspirate (h) ; stood for z., and for T. Thus the Athenians of the time of Pericles wrote in officiai documents EA OX^ E N TE I B01/EI KAI TOI A EMOI for 'éôoÇev rfj (3ovXfj K<d tu ôypai Resolved, by the Council and People ; TO 4*^ E^ I^MA TO AEMO for to ^ytfriapa. tov ôypov the decree of the people ; H E^ for rjs of which ; H EI for y to which ; IH E M t~l E N for irkpirei.v to send; XPYÔ^ for xpvaovs golden; TOYTO for both tovto and tovtov this and of this ;TO^ nPYTANE^ for tous irporaveis the prytanes ; APXOÎ for âpxovai they rule; AEOÔN for beovaûv lacking ; HOnO^ for 07rws how ; X^ E N 0<ï for £ét>os or £éwus alien or aliens. Ionians from

Ancient Pronunciation

[ For further remarks

pronunciation,

see

the Préfacé. ]

29. The pronunciation of ancient Greek varied with the dialect and the period. In général, such différences were represented orthographically, as in Boeotian rtovxa for Attic rvxv chance, wherein the pronunciation of v in Boeotia is shown to be the same as that of Eng. u in fwtile. With few exceptions, of which the iota subscript (7) is an example, letters actually written were also spoken. The following paragraphs suggest only the approximate équivalents for the Athenian pronunciation of Greek during the century from the death of Pericles (429 B.c.) to the death of Demosthenes (322 B.c.). a. Vowels. The long vowels à, y, i, were pronounced much

fête (French ê

è)

in there (but without

any

ivifather,

sound of r), i in machine

; « was

GREEK GRAMMAR

probably more open than the o in tone, more like the o in song. Originally u had the sound of Latin u (Eng. u in lunatic, brunette, or better, Eng. oo in moon) ; but before the fourth century b.c. it had come to that of French u or German u (pronounced by rounding the lips as in whistling, leaving the aperture small, and thus uttering e as in me). The short vowels a and i had the same quality as the long vowels, but shortened or less prolonged ; this is hard to express in English, as our short a and i, in pan and pit, have sounds of a différent nature from those of à and ï, given above. We have an approach to a, ë, ï, and ô in the second a in grandfather, French ê in réal, i in verity, and o in monastic, renovate. The sound of e (short, close) was nearer the e of beg than the e of net, while that of o (close) was certainly not the sound of o in not ; cf. o in consist. b. Diphthongs. We may assume that the diphthongs originally had the separate sounds of their two vowels, and only later became a single tone. Our ai in aisle, oi in oil, ui in quit, will give some idea of ai, 01, and ui ; av was sounded like au in Germ. aies, Eng. ou in stout ; ov like ou in youth. Likewise the genuine et must have been pronounced originally as e + t, later like ei in rein (cf. Hom. 'Arpeiôys, Attic 'ArpelSrjs) ; and genuine ov was a compound of o and v. But the spurious et and ov are written for simple sounds, represented by the Athenians of the best period by E and o (see 8 and 28), and sounded as long close ë (cf. Fr. é) and long close ô. We do not know how these sounds were related to ordinary e and o on one side and to et and ov on the other ; but after the beginning of the fourth century B.c. they appear to have agreed substantially with et and ov, since El and OY are written for both alike. In et the sound of t appears to have prevailed more and more, so that after 300 b.c. it had the sound of t. On the other hand, ov became (and still remains) a simple sound, like ou in youth. Eu was -pronounced somewhat like ëh-oo, yv like ëh-oo, cou perhaps like aw-oo. The diphthongs g., y, and co were probably always pronounced with the chief force on the first element, so that the t gradually disappeared (see 10). c. Consonants, Nasals, Liquids. Probably /3, 8, k, X, p., v, x, and p were sounded as b, d, k, l, m, n, p, and r in English, p being trilled at the tip of the tongue. Ordinary y was hard, like g in go; for nasal 7, see 21. T was always like t in tin or to; a was generally like s in so, though before voiced consonants (23) it may have been like z. Z is a compound of S and a (19) ; opinions differ whether it was 8a or 08, but the ancient testimony seems to point to aô ; cf. 'AOyvaÇe to Athens from 'Adyi>as-8e Athens-ward. In Hellenistic times f came to the sound of English z, which it still keeps. S represents ko, and 0 represents ira, although the earlier Athenians felt an aspirate in both, as they wrote xc for £ and 0<r for \p. The rough consonants 9, x, and 0 in the best period were r, k, and ir followed by h, so that tvda was 'ev-rha, à<j>lypi was àir-hiyp.L, «xco was é-xAco, etc. We cannot represent these aspirâtes in English ; our nearest approach is in words like hoi/iouse, blocAAead, and upMl, but here the h is not in the same syllable with the consonant. In later Greek 6 and 0 came to the modem pronunciation of th (in thin) and / (cf. phïlosophy), and x to that resembling ch in Scotch loch or German machen. Proper division of the syllables is of great importance in the pronunciation. See 118. In reading prose, the Greek accents (126) should be observed.

VOWEL CHANGE

CHANGES OF VOWELS 30. Vowels

undergo

changes in the formation and infleclanguages, ablaut). It may quantity or the quality of the vowel. many

tion of words. The process, which is common in other is known as vowel gradation (in German grammar involve either the

31. Quantitative Gradation. A short vowel interchanges with long vowel : a

with

(à after

with

with i with co

with

e, i,

E.g. près, indic. ri/.lâ-co I honor, fut. rlpp-au ; kà-u I let, fut. èé-crw ; riOp-pi I place, rLOe-piev we place ; ôl5œ-pi I give, ôiSo-pev we give ; Ïtvs willow rim, LTtâ willow tree ; <j>i)-<ns growth, <pvu I grow.

Compensative Lengthening. When one or more consonants dropped (especially before a), a preceding short vowel is often lengthened. Here 32.

are

a e

becomes à becomes

becomes l becomes ou

becomes

E.g. yuéXâs black for pe\av-s (75), a-Tas Standing for aravr-s (70), rideis placing for ndevr-s (70), Sovs having given for ôovr-s, \vovai they loose for Xvo-vai, tupïva I chose for ixpiv-aa, ôeiKvvs showing for Seucpwrs, Here ei and ov are the spurious diphthongs (8). a. In the first aorist of liquid and nasal verbs (687), a becomes v when <r is dropped ; e.g. e<t>r)va I showed for è^av-o-a, from epaivu (<pav~). But after or p in the stem a becomes à ; e.g. vyialvu (vyiav-) be healthy, aor. vylàva for vyiav-aa, palvco (pav-) Sprinkle, aor. eppâva. 33. Transfer of Quantity. The combinations po (âo) and pa often exchange quantity. Thus Epie vpôs (vàôs) temple, Attic vews ; Epie (3aaL\rjos, paerikpa king, Attic /3aatXécos, /3acriXéâ ; Epie perpopos in mid-air, Attic t

peréœpos. See 267.

34. Qualitative Gradation. An interchange of vowels and diph¬ thongs of différent quality is found in many bases (169) and suffixes. Cf. Eng. seek, sought ; choose, chose ; sink, sank, sunk. A regular sériés is established, involving strong grades and a weak (vanish) grade, in which the vowel may be lost entirely.

E.g. \elir- co, Xé-Xoiir-a leave, have left, weak grade (with loss of e) 'ér\Lir-ov left ; 4>tvy-w, iré-(f)evy-a, weak grade e-tpvy-ov flee, 4>vy-d] flight ; irer-opae fly,

GREEK GRAMMAR

12 iroT-âofj.ai

flit,

tribute, with weak

fall; Aéy-a> say, Aôy-os word; <f}ép-co carry, 4>6p-os grade in SL-4>P-os carrying two, chariot, cf. Eng. bear,

melt, è-raK-yv melted ; pyy-vvpi, ep-pœy-a, èp-pây-iiv break ; êAeû(69), è\r]\ov8-a, rfkv8-ov go, have gone; airev5-œ hasten, cnrovôy haste. a. Such variations arose under very ancient conditions of accent which were not in opération in the historical period. See 585, 806. b. When, in the weak grade, the syllable which has lost its vowel followed by one beginning with a vowel, as in ri-n-r-u, ôL-<pp-os, it is pronounced. But often combinations of consonants with sonant and liquids occurred which gave rise to the vowel a in the sériés Thus, Tpéir-oo, ré-rpocfr-a tum, rpoir-os Way, but weak grade è-Tpa—n-yv è-Tp-TT7]v ; <rré A-Xw s end, o-tôX-os expédition, weak grade è-o-raX-yp for è-rrX-yp bore ; tï]k-w aopa.i

is easily

nasals (27). for

was

sent.

Other Vowel Changes

A long vowel is often shortened before another (vocalis ante vocalem corripitur) ; e.g. é'cos dawn, Ep. rjcos ', ftaaiKéœv of kings, Ep. (3a<n\yœv ; redveûs dead, for Tedvrjdos. 36. Prothetic Vowel. An apparent prefixing of a, e, o sometimes oc¬ curred before X and p ; e.g. àXeLcfru smear, anoint, cf. Xtivos fat ; kXeWepos free, cf. Lat. liber; so àpkXyu> milk. In Epie it seems to occur also before f occasionally ; e.g. 'éeSva wedding-gifts (also là va), for è-feSva. 37. Lost Vowels. Diphthongs ending in i and v sometimes lose i and v, which became semivowels (26), before another vowel; e.g. iro-dv to make, often on inscriptions and in modem texts for iroLtiv ; /3o-ôs of an ox, for /3ov-os, nom. /3od-s ; vâ-os of a ship,îoY vâv-os, vâp-os (266); see PaaiXécos (265). See also 258. So peu flow, for pev-opaL, fut. pevaopai. See also 611. 35. Shortening.

vowel

Collision of

Vowels. Hiatus

38. A succession of two vowel sounds in adjoining syllables, though often tolerated in Ionic Greek, was generally displeasing to the Athenians. In the middle of a word this could be avoided

it is called (55-61) or (110-116) to the

by contraction (39-48). Between two words, where hiatus, it could be avoided by crasis (49-53), by elision aphaeresis (62), or by adding a movable consonant former word. Contraction of Vowels 39. Two

successive vowels, or a vowel

contraction in a single long 4>Lhéœ, (fihœ ; (fiXee, <fi\eL ripas, ripa. unless the former vowel is open (6). united by

a diphthong, may be vowel or a diphthong; It seldom takes place

and

CONTRACTION 40. The

regular

of contraction is one of the characteristics (48). It follows these four général principles :

use

of the Attic dialect

41. I. Two vowels which

can form a genuine diphthong (7) syllable; e.g. relxeï, relxei ; yépaï, yépai ; ois (Lat. ovis), oîs KXrjidpov, nXrjdpov. a. The second element in these cases is t. In Attic, v'i is either left uncontracted or becomes v : vLôiov, vôiov pig. If v is the second element, it does not unité with the first : irpâvvcris softening.

simply unité in paiaros, pçïotos

one

42. II. When the two vowels cannot form

a genuine diphthong, (i.e. two a-sounds, two e-sounds, or two osounds, without regard to quantity) unité to form the common long (à, 7], or co). But ee gives the spurious diphthong et (8), and oo gives the spurious ov (8). E.g.

two like vowels

pvââ, pvâ (193); 4>iXéyre, (fnXrjre ; ôyXôw, 8yXS>but è<f>LXee, ètpLXeL ; ttXoos, ■jtXovs.

43. III. When unlike vowels

diphthong,

occur

which cannot form

is assimilated to the other. a. When an o-sound précédés or follows an athe two become co. But oe and eo give the spurious

genuine

one

e-sound, (8). E.g.

or an ov

ôyXôyre, SrjXwTe ] 4>iXecocn, 4>iXco<ri ; TÏiihoiiev, Ti/xS>fxev ; Tlpàiopev, rly.wp.tv ; but vôe, vov ; 7éveos, ytvovs. b. When

a-sound

(in order) prevails, and

précédés we

krtyae, krtfjiâ ; rlpà^re,

have à

follows an e-sound, the first E.g.

or ?y.

rlyart ] reLxta, reixv

'Ep^iéâs, 'Eppîjs.

44. IV. A vowel

disappears by absorption before a diphthong beginning with the same vowel, and e is always absorbed before ot. In other cases, a simple vowel followed by a diphthong is contracted with the first vowel of the diphthong ; and a following t

remains

iota

subscript. E.g.

ixvàai, yvai ; yvaq., y.va ; 4>iXéei, <piXeï 4>iXéy, 4>iXfi ôrjXôoi, SrçAoî ; vôw, vÇt ; ôr/Xôov, ôrjXov ; 4>iXkoi, 4>iXoî ; xP^eoi, xp^croî rlpàti, ripa. ; rlpâ-j}, rly.5. ; rïpàoi, rlpw ; Xveai, Xvji (45 c) ; Xvyai, Xvy ; pepvyoïo, pepvwo. 45. a. In contracts of the first and second declensions, every short vowel before a, or before a long vowel or a diphthong, is absorbed. But in the

singular of the first declension or p, to â). See 195.

vowel

eci

is contracted

regularly to

(after

GREEK GRAMMAR

14 b. In the

third declension

See 269, 309. c. In the second person

becomes à after

and à

or t]

singular of the passive and middle,

after eai

i or u.

(for ecrat)

gives the common (later) Attic form in « as well as the regular contract form in y e.g. Xutai, Xvy or Xuei. See 582 g. d. In verbs in ou, oa gives oi ; e.g. ôyXôeis, SyXoîs ; oi is found also in the subjunctive for oy ; e.g. ôrjXôy, ôyXoî. e. The spurious diphthongs « and ou are contracted like simple e and o ; e.g. irXaKÔeLs, irXaKovs cake ; rï/xâov, tïjuû ; (piXéov, ipiXoD. Thus infinitives in aeiv and oew have no t in the contracted forms; e.g. Tly.cx.eiv, rlyav', ôrjXôeiv, ôyXow ; whereas Ttjuâet (genuine et) makes tï/xS., and ôyXôet, ôyXoî. See 793. /. When three vowels occurred in succession, the last two contracted first, and this diphthong sometimes contracted with the first vowel. E.g. rtjuà-ecrat, 2d pers. sing. ind. pass., lost a (90), rt/meai became Tïnây, whence rljuçî. Yet TlpaxXéous of Heracles was not contracted further from 'Hpa(cXeye(cr)os. See 48, 241. 46. The close vowel t is contracted with a following t in the Ionic dative singular of nouns in is (see 257) ; and v may be contracted with t or e in a few forms of epic nouns in us (see 41 a, 260, and 261). a. In some classes of nouns and adjectives of the third declension, contraction is confined to certain cases ; see 230-265. For exceptions in the contraction of verbs, see 486 and 488. See dialect forms of verbs in

in 659-661.

au, eu,

and

after

or ou means

ou,

15. In this Table, "sp." spurious, "gen." means genuine (8).

47. For Table of Contractions, see page et

48. Whenever contraction does not take place in Attic (40), an original p or v may be assumed as the hindering cause. E.g. àrçSfc unpleasant for à-pySys, 'ewea nine (cf. Lat. novem), véos young (Lat. no vus), 'Hpa/cXéous for 'HpafcXey-ous (45 /), (3oos for /3oyos (37), PavLXkus of a king for fiacnXyfos (33), tvbeâ déficient, from an original h-ôev-ea.

Crasis

diphthong at the end of a word may be con¬ the following word. This as well as in poetry, and is called crasis (agaças

49. A vowel or

tracted with occurs

one

in prose

at the beginning of

blending). The corônis (') is placed over the contracted syllable. The first of the two words is generally the article, a relative (ô or &), and aal, irgo, co, or by. 50. Crasis generally follows the laws of contraction (with which it is essentially identical), with these modifications: a. A diphthong at the end of the first word drops its last vowel before crasis takes place.

CONTRACTION Table a

at = at

yépaa, yépâ pvàai, pf at pvàa, pvq.

—

(gen.)

(sp.)

a a a

+ y = à + 77 = a + t = at

â +

—

= co

+ +

ot = co

(sp.) =

= co

= 77 =

at =

+ à

= et

(sp.) =

+ 77 = 77

e e

+ V + 1

—

= et

= ou

ot = ot

ou = ou

= eu

= co

r] rj

+ +

at = 77 e

= rj

ertpae, èripâ

TÏ/iâei,

Contractions 77

Ttpàetf, rtpcif (45 e) T~Lixâ.7]Te, rlpare

rlpay, ripa yepa'L, yépai ypâ-iÔLOv, ypaôiov rtpâopef, rlpœpev rtpâotpt, rlpcopc

rtpâou, rlpco (45 e) rtpàco, rt/xco ykvea, yevr] ôaréa, ocrra (45 a) xpûcéct, XPvrf

XÛeat, XÛ27 (45 c)

xpùcrat (45 a) (sp.) êc/>tXee, e^tXet (gen.) 0tXéet, </>tXet

y 71 7]

4>L\ér]Te, 4>Lhrjre </>iXéfl, 0tXfj

retxet, Tetxet

(sp.) yéveos, yévovs <£tXéot, 0tXot

(sp.) 0tXéou, c/>tXou (rare) èù, eu (41 a) <£tXéco, 0tXco ôaréco, ocra) Xurjcu, Xvrj rlprievTL, rlprjvTL

Tip,r]et,s,

r^et, 4>avr}7]Te, 4>av7]re £yy> Çy Kkrj-iOpOV, icXfjdpov

= 77

y = y t

TLprjs (45 e)

(gen.) =

+ + + +

=77

pepv7joip7]v,

ot = co

pepfco-

prjv

= t

= eu

at = at

—

Xttos, Xtos at5oa, atSco

1 doubtful ; J

see 304

(sp.) f6e, fou (gen.) ot ô?jX6et, 577X01 (45 e) (sp.) OU (sp.) ÔTjXÔeLV, Ô7]XoUf (45 e) = co 577X6777-6, Sr/Xcore = co ôiôôys, 5t5cps Oi 677X077, ÔTfXot co 5677s, ôc3s = ou

+ 77

+ y

xpucreat,

(sp.) </>tXéetf, <£tXetf

(sp.) =

rtpa

—

= ou —

(sp.) =

to = CO

co = a)

7ret0ot, 7ret0ot (sp.) fOOS, fous ôr/XôoL, ôrjXoî

(sp.)

577X00U, Ô77X0B 677X60), 677X6) d7rXoo), a7rX4)

Rarely the following : û ù

= eu

=0)

+ +

o) o)

Cf)

o=o)

tx^ue, tx#u (41 a) ixOvLôiov,, ixdvÔLOV ripœa, r}pw

77po;es,

Tjpcos

77PO)t, 77P0)

cf. ptyoifres (497)

GREEK GRAMMAR

loses its final

b. The article

vowel or diphthong in crasis

and nal drops ai But we have /cet

before a; the particle toi drops ot before a; before ail vowels and diphthongs except e and et. and /ceis for Kal

and

/cat ets.

foliowing are examples of crasis: rà àyadâ, tayadà ; to èvavTlov, rowavriov ; o Ik, oùk; b èirt, ovirl; rà 1/j.âTiop, dolpaTiov (103); â âv, av ; Kal âv, Kav; —b àvijp, avrjp; ol àôeXt/>oi, aôeXcfroi ; rû àvôpi, râvôpi ; to avrb, ravro ; roO avrov, ravrov ; — toi âv, t'ôv (p.kvTOi âv, pevrâv) ; toi âpa, Tapa ; — Kal avros, KavTÔs Kal avTTj, xa^TV (103); Kai êcrrt, Kâcrrt ; Kal ei, Kei', Kal elTa, KaTa', Kal ov, kov ; Kal ol, x°l ! Kal al, xaù So èyù olôa, kyûôa ; co âvOpuire, &v6pœire ; Tfj kirapfj, Trpirapfj. Likewise we have irpovpyov helpful for -n-po epyov ahead, in work', cf. 4>povdos vanished for irpo bôov, <f>poupos guard for irpo-hopos (14, 103). 52. If the first word is an article or relative with the rough breathing, this breathing is retained on the contracted syllable, taking the place of the coronis ; e.g. av, avpp, for S âv, b àvqp. 53. In crasis, «Vepos other takes the earlier form ârepos, — whence arepos (for b «repos), OàTtpov (for roO èrépou), ôâTéptp, etc. (50 6; 105/). 51. The

tô ôvopa, Tovvona ',

Synizesis 54. In poetry, two successive vowels (or a vowel and a diph¬ thong), not forming a diphthong, are sometimes united in pronunciation for the sake of the meter, although no contraction appears in writing. This is called synizesis (avvL^yais settling together).

Thus OeoL may

may a.

make two.

make one syllable in poetry; arydea or

xpveécp

Synizesis may also take the place of crasis (49) when the first word a long vowel or a diphthong, especially with kird since, prj not,

ends in

fi or, may

(interrog.), and èyâ> I. E.g. èvel ov may make two syllables, pi) eiôèvai make three ; pi) où always makes one syllable in poetry.

Elision 55. A short

final vowel may be

begins with a vowel. This marks the omission. E.g. Si' èpoD for ôià époO ; àvT evdvs for àXXà evdvs ;

oX-rjv for vÙKTa âXrjv

dropped when the next word

is called elision. An

'tKelvqs for àvrl èKeivrjs ', XéyoLp.' âv for éir' àvdpânroi for «7U àv6pwira>. So

(103).

apostrophe (')

Xéyoïpi âv ; àXX' «</)' èrépco ; vùxO'

CRASIS AND ELISION

56. Elision is especially fréquent in ordinary prépositions, conjunctions, and adverbs ; but it may also be used with short vowels at the end of nouns, adjectives, pronouns, and verbs. 57. Elision never occurs in The prépositions irepi and irpô, except irepL in Aeolic

in Attic). b. The relative and conjunction c.

tri, e.

(rarely before

on wlnat, that (ôr' is for ôre wheri). Monosyllables, except those ending in e, e.g. Sé, yk, ré. The dative singular in i of the third declension and the dative plural

except in epic poetry. Words ending in v.

58. The epic, lyric, and comic poets sometimes elide ai in the verbal par, «rat, Tat, and adai (dat). So ot in o t/xot woe is me, and rarely in to me.

endings pot

59. Elision is often neglected in prose, especially by certain writers (as Thucydides). Others (as Isocrates) are more strict in its use. In prose, forms which admit v movable (110) do not suffer elision, except tan is.

60. Apocope.

The poets and non-literary dialects sometimes eut off a a consonant. Thus in Homer we find the monosyllabic forms av, kclt, and iràp, for the more usual dissyllabic àvâ, Karâ, and irapâ. So Alcaeus : ôv (= àvà) to peaaov on the main. Both in composition and alone, /car assimilâtes its r to a following consonant and drops it before two consonants ; e.g. /câ/3/3a\e and KaKTave for /caré/3aAe and nareKTave — but nardavelv (not naddaveiv) for naradavelv (63 a), /cà/c Kopvrhyv, /cày yàvv, Kàir ireblov', and v in av (for àvâ) is subject to the changes of 72 and 73 ; e.g. àp-/3âXXw, âA-Aé£at, àp ireblov, àp 4>ovov. So v/3-(3à\\eiv (once) for viro-(3àWeiv. short vowel before

61. A short final vowel is generally elided also when it cornes before a vowel in forming a compound word. Here no apostrophe is used. E.g.

(àirô and alréco) demand back, bi-'efiaLvov (ôtâ and epaivov) they crossed So à<paipw {àirb and alpéœ) take away from ; Sex~vpepos (ôé/ca and r/pépa) lasting ten days ; 4>lh-nnros (</>tAo- and t7r7ros) fond of horses. 103.

àir-aiTœ

over.

Aphaeresis 62. In poetry, a short vowel at the beginning of

a word is sometimes long vowel or a diphthong, especially after ph not and y or. This is called aphaeresis (à4>alpecn<t taking away), or inverse elision. E.g. py 'yco for py èyco ; irov 'anv for irov ècrnv ) èyà> 'tpâvyv for èyw kefrâvyv) rj 'pou for y èpov.

dropped after

GREEK GRAMMAR

CHANGES OF CONSONANTS

Doubling of Consonants 63.

A rough stop (18)

never

doubled in literary Greek, but

Thus So

tr(f)> kx, and tQ are always written for (/></>, xx> and 66. Sa7r0co, Bà/cxos, Kardaveîv, not 2a00co, Bàxxos> Kaddaveîv (60). in Latin, Sappho, Bacchus. b. A voiced stop is never doubled in Attic Greek. In 77 the first

is always nasal (21). The doubling of voiceless stops, liquids, (73) is due to assimilation ; e.g. Ïttos horse (Uvos, Lat. equus), toWo'l many (ito\v-ol), kppévw (h-yévco) abide by. c. Attic has rr for the aa of Ionic and most of the other dialects in forms arising from voiceless palatals or dentals with t (17 ; 94 ; 95) ; e.g. «^uXarrco guard for cj)v\àaaco (base <fiv\aK-), eXarrcop less for êXacrow (éXax_)> pekirra bee for piéXicrcra, (/ueXtr-). Also rr (not for cra) and rd occur in a few other words; e.g. 'Attlkôs, 'At6ls, Attic (cf. 66). In tragedy and in Thucydides aa is an Ionism. 64. Initial p is doubled when a vowel précédés it in forming a compound word ; e.g. Kara-pptirro) throw down. So after the syllabic augment (535) ; as in eppÏTrov (imperfect of pÏtvtw). But after a diphthong it remains single ; as in eïipoos, evpovs fair-flowing.

and nasals

Euphonie Changes of Consonants following rules (66-109) apply chiefly to changes made of a stem to facilitate pronunciation. They occur when endings are added, especially in forming and inflecting the tenses of verbs and cases of nouns, when compounds are formed, and in other instances to be noted. 66. Consonants before Consonants. Before a dental stop 65. The

in the final consonant

labial (t, p, 0) or a palatal (/c, 7, x) must and another dental stop becomes a. E.g. T€rpî7rrat has been rubbed {jerTPiP~TaL) '■> 'éarpairTai is

(t, 5, 6, 17), a ordinate (18), pT, 4>t :

be cotwisted

(è-<TTpa<t>-rai). ■yT, \T XéXeKrat has been said (Xe-Xey-rai) ; ôéôeKTai has received (5e-ôex-rcu). irS, 4>S : K\kft5r]v by stealth (nXeir-Tw steal) ; ypâ(35rjp scraping (ypà4>-w scratch, •

ir0, P0 k0, "y0

write).

kXei<f>di]v Was left {e-Xenr-Oyv) ; erptefidy WCLS rubbed (êrTpl/3-dr]). èirXéxOyv Was plaited (èrTrXen-dyv) ; kXéxOrj was said (è-Xey-dri).

CHANGES OF CONSONANTS tt:

àpvcTTis ladle (for âpvr-Tis, àpvr-œ draw water). But cf. 63 vevôpco-Tcu is the custom (vervop.LÔ-Ta.1, from vopLÇco hold as a

custom)

; tare

know (iô-re, from oîôa I know). 80 : kpop.iady was believed (k-pop.LÔ-6yp, from vopLÇco) ; oîcrda thou knowest (oiô-da). 0t : TréireLcrTcu is persuaded (ire-ireiQ-rai, from ireLQ-œ persuade). 00: kireLaOyp Was persuaded (k-ireiQ-6yp). you

67. 'E£ from has in composition the form kn-Kpfpco, kK-ôpopy, 'éhc-Becris. 80 a 84 a.

kn before

consonant ; e.g.

68. No combinations of stops except those included in 63 and 66 (those in which the second is t, 8, or 6) are allowed in Greek. When any such

arise, the first stop is dropped; e.g. irkireuia have persuaded for -n-eireLO-Ka. y stands before k, y, or x, as in avyxéu confound (avv and xéw), it is not a stop but a nasal (21 ; 63 b). 69. Consonants before cr. No stop can stand before a except 7r and k. A labial with a forms \p, a palatal £, and a dental is first assimilated to form a a, and one a is then dropped. When

E.g.

rpixpoi shall rub (for Tpï(3-aw), ypàfœ shall write (ypa4>-au>), Xé£co shall say (Xey-aa>), ireiaœ shall persuade (preid-aœ), aati WÎll sing (ç.8-aei), crœpacn bodies, dative {aœpar-ai), ekiricTL hopes, dative (kXinS-at.), 4>Xé\f/ Vein (cj)Xe(3-s), êX7rts hope (kXTTLÔ-s), pvt; night (pvkt-s), Tràcrxw suffer (iraaaxw, irad-aKOû, with transfer of breathing, 105/). 70. The combinations vr, vb, vd, when they occur before a in

inflection,

(32). E.g.

are

dropped and the preceding vowel is lengthened

for ail (iravT-ai), yiyas giant (yiyapr-s), SeinpVs showing (ôeiKPVPT-s), plur. lions (Xeopr-at), TiOeîvL dat. plur. placing {ridePT-cn), ndels nom. sing. placing (tlOépt-s), SiSovs giving (ôlSopt-s), aireiaœ shall make libation (airep8-aw), irelaopai shall Suffer (irepd-ao-pai).

irâcn

Xkovai dat.

71. a. The combinations Xa, pa may become X, p and the preceding vowel be lengthened (32) ; e.g. rjyyeiXa reported (for yyyeX-aa, from ày-

yéXXw), 'é<t>deipa. destroyed (for k<f>9ep-aa). See 92. b. New Attic frequently shows pp for pa ; e.g. Xeppôpyaos for Xepaôpyaos Chersonesus. But pa is retained in ftvpaa ox-hide, and in the dat. plur. ; e.g. xepat from x«p hand (stem x«p-). 72.

before

before Consonants.

Before

palatal it becomes nasal unchanged. E.g. a

kpirtiTTU) fall into

(21)

;

labial stop

before

becomes

;

dental it remains

(kp-TriirTœ), avpf3atpu COme together (avp-/3aipù)), kp4>ap ys in plain sight (kp-cpapys) ; avyx^ui confound (<rw-x«o), avyyepys dkin to (avpyepys) ; kPTidyp.i put in.

GREEK GRAMMAR

20 73. Before X, p,

and

p, v

is assimilated. E.g.

by {&-

fail (kv-Xeiirœ), ovXXoyos assembly (avv-Xoyos), èppkvœ abide pévu), crvppkw flow together (cw-péco). So v is assimilated af ter X in ôXXûpi destroy (for oX-vv-pi, 640). 74. But verbs in -vu form the perfect middle (603) in -apat, not -ppai ;

èXXeiirw

e.g.

Trk<t>a(rpa.i (from 4>alv(xi show) for arising from a dental before a

ire-4>av-pai,

by analogy with forms in

dental (66, 82). See 499 d ; 732. 75. N before <r is generally dropped and the preceding vowel is lengthened (32). Here a becomes à, e the spurious diphthong et (8),

-o-rai

the spurious ov.

E.g.

èp-s), Xvovcn they loose (for Xvo-vac). Xvovt-lcl, Xvov-oa.), XvOeïaa loosed (for XvdevT-La, Xvdev-aa), irâoa ail (for iravr-ia, irav-aa). See 95 b. 76. N standing before <tl of the dative plural appears to be dropped without lengthening the vowel ; e.g. ôalpotn, apparently for baipov-ai. But the dat. plur. of such words originally had the weak grade (34) 8aipv-ai, which would give Sat-pa-at (27), becoming Saipoai through force of the other cases. So péXaai. for peXv-ai, 4>pa.<rl (Pindar) for <fipv-cn, Attic 4>peai

péXâs black (for peXav-s), els one (for ev-s, See 215 6; 582. So Xvovaa loosing (for

e in 4>pbes. préposition èv is not

conforming to the

changed before p, a, or f ; e.g. kvpàirTu sew into, 'évairovôoi allies, hv'çdtyvîipL yoke fast. a. 26? with becomes ow- before a and a vowel, but av- before a and a consonant or before f ; e.g. crva-crÏTos messmate, av-a-Tppa system, aù-Çvyos 77. The

78. na? and irâXcv may to

ovTos

iràv-ao4>os, irUacrocpos rushing back. See 86 c.

; e.g.

79.

Stops before |x.

paired. assimilate all-wise, ira.Xiv-CTK.ios thickly shaded, iraXLcr-

retain

Before

in composition before a or p a

labial stop becomes p, and a

palatal becomes (or remains) 7. E.g. XéXecppaL have been left (for XeXenr-pai), rerplppac have been rubbed (for rerplfipai), ykypappai have been written (for yeypacp-pai), ir'eirXeypai have been plaited (ireirXeK-pai), Ttrevypai have been made (reTevx-pai), Tkraypac have been posted (stem ray-). 80. But k and p may stand when they corne together through vowel gradation (34; 107 ; 169) ; e.g. Kk-Kpri-Ka am tired (see Kâpvœ). Both k and x may stand before p in the formation of substantives ; e.g. àKpri edge, àKp&v anvil, aixpi) spear-head, Spaxpv drachma. a. 'E£ is €/< in composition before p (67) ; e.g. kK-pavdâvoo learn thoroughly. 81. When y yp or ppp would thus arise, they are simplified to yp or pp ; e.g. éXévxûJ test, perfect éXijXeypai (for e\i)Xeyx-pa.L, eXtjXeyy-pai) ; Kapirrca bend, KkKappai have been bent (for KeKapir-pac, KeKapp-pai) ; irépiru send, irkireppac have been sent (for ireirepir-pai, ireirepp-pai.). See 499 b.

CHANGES OF CONSONANTS 82. Before

dental stop sometimes

appears

to become

;

e.g.

vevo<T(j)L(Tpai am separated (for vevoo4n8-pai, from vootpLÇw), irtireiopai am persuaded (for weireiO-pai, from weLdco). These forms, with their

ending -opai, are really due to analogy with the 3d sing. vevoo<t)ioTa.i, Tréireiorai, where a arose from a dental before a dental (66, 74). So lopev we know (Hom. iSpev), due to terre (for iô-re) you know ) àopa SOÏig (ç.8œ sing) ; vopiopa CUTrency {popL'Çiù hold as a custom) ; oxiopa schism (o-xéfco split). But in kperpôp oar, àpidpôs number, pvOpos rhythm, oTo.0p.os stage, the dental before p. is unchanged. 83. The Spirant <r. Between consonants or between a liquid and a consonant, o is dropped ; e.g. reraxOe you have been posted (for reray-oOe, 66) ; 'éoraXde you have been sent (for koraX-ode). 84. In compounds o is retained when it begins the second element of the compound; e.g. €p-ottop8oi allies (77). a. 'E£ from drops o before a consonant in compounds ; e.g. é/c-péw flow out, èK-wpeirris prééminent ; cf. é/c rrjs TroXecos from the city, but é£ 'Ad^vCov from

Athens. 25, 67. 85. When

<sa arises from inflection, one a is dropped; e.g. plur. words (Hom. eirea-at), èréXeaa I finished (Hom. éréXecr-cra). But acr, when represented by Attic tt, never becomes cr ; cf. (fvXâaao: (63 c). eirean

86.

dat.

Compounds of Svo- ïll and a word beginning with o and a vowel 8vooef3r]s impious ; but ôûcrxterros hard to split (for 8vo-oxiotos, from oxtfco split). b. S is usually dropped before p or v, with compensative lengthening (32) ; e.g. elpL I am (for èo-pc). But op may stand when p belongs to a suffix, e.g. xào-pa chasm (82), and in compounds of 8va- ill, e.g. Shopeinros retain

; e.g.

hard to mix. c. S is assimilated

(according to the ancient and still current etymology) in HeXoirôvvr]oos for IléXorros vrjoos 'Pelops' isle' SO also in evvvpi clothe (for ko-pvpL, Ionic e'Lvvpi), and in the Homeric forms àyà-wLôs very snowy, snow-capped (àya-ovuj>-), <piXo-ppei8ris laughter-loving (4>iXo-opei8-). d. Adverbs denoting motion towards may be formed by -fe, representing -o8e ; e.g. 'Adrjpaê to Athens for 'Adâs-Se. 19. 87. Loss of

a-.

Many forms

are

due to the loss of

original spirant,

which may be recognized in earlier Greek or in kindred languages. 88. At the beginning of rough breathing. E.g.

word

original

appears as

the

ïorripi set for oi~oTrj-pi, Lat. sisto ; ijpiovs half, Lat. sëmi- ; ëÇopai. sit, Lat. sedeo; èirrà seven, Lat. septem. Initial

o sometimes disappears before p without trace ; e.g. pia one puSrjoai to smile for opei8- (86 c), poïpa fate, perhaps for opop-ia. Compare apïnpos and plupos Utile, opîXaÇ and pîXa£ smilax.

for

opia,

GREEK GRAMMAR

22 89. In

some

appeared. E.g. Tjôîis sweet (base

crvos), Lat.

words both

and

(or the semivowel

26) have dis-

cpaô-), cf. Lat. su avis (for suâd-uis) ; Hom. os his (for

su us.

90. Between

vowels

became h, then disappeared. E.g.

y'evos race, Att. gen. yepovs, Hom. gen. yéveos for yevta-os, cf. Lat. gener-is ; Xvr,, Xvcl thou ransomest for Xve-aai, XÛe-ai ; è-Xve-cro, èXveo, èXuov ; âXrjOea-La (cf. àXrjdris true), àXrjdeia. truth ', einôprjP I followed (for (ratn-oprjp, cf. Lat. sequor), with transfer of breathing (105/) ; elxop I had (for è-aex-op).

are a few cases of the rétention of c between vowels, as in forms of the verb, e.g. "una-oai and lara-oo ; also, c is not dropped when it stands for cc (85), as in èrkXeaa, or when -ci- represents an orig¬ inal -n-, as in nXovaios for nXovr-ios, XiiovaL for Xvovtl, or, in général, where its loss would disturb an inflectional system, as in êXvaa, c being retained

91. There

some -/xi

because of

in enpà£a.

middle of liquid and nasal verbs, c is generally dropped, with compensative lengthening (32) ; e.g. <t>aLvœ (4>av-) show, aor. 'é4>7}V-a for è<f>av-aa, 'e<j)-qv-ci^7]V for k(j)ap~aaij.r]v. So ÔKeXXo) (ÔKeX-) TUÏl aground, aor. œKeiX-a for c'oKeX-aa ; but poetic KeXXœ has e/ceX-ca. See 71,687. 92. In the first aorist active and

Changes before i. The following changes occur (representing an original y, 26) follows a consonant. 94. The palatals k, x with such an i become in Attic rr, in Ionic and other dialects acr (63 c) ; labials give ttt (621). E.g. eut for kott-lco ) t(ipciTTCx) disturb îov Tapax~^, cf. rapax~v disturbance ; r/TTutu worse for rjK-ucv (357) ; 93.ttov sooner for rax-^ov (105 e). 93. Consonant

when

KonTco

r, 0 with i may become (cra-, 63 c) ; e.g. kopvttu, Hom. Kopvaaco equip, for kopvO-loj (cf. KÔpvs, stem KopvO-, helmet) ; /xéXirra bee for /xeXir-ia (cf. /xéXi, stem /xeXir-, honey). The poetical form xa-pteaaa graceful does not show a corresponding form in rr (323). b. Or, after- a long vowel, a diphthong, or a consonant, t, 9 with i may become c ; after a short vowel cc, Attic c ; e.g. in the féminine of participles and adjectives (324 b; 332 a), in which v is dropped with compensative lengthening (32) ; navr-, navr-ua., nâvaa (Thessalian, Cretan, Arcadian, Argive), Hom. and Att. nacra ail', Xîio-vt-, Xvovr-ia, Xvov-aa, Xbovaa loosing. Hom. /xéccos, Att. /xécos middle may corne from /xét-co-s (Boeot. /xéttos).

95. The dentals a. tt

a vowel ô or y with i becomes t ; e.g. <t>paçu> tell (for 4>pa8-iu>, Kop.l'Çu> tend (for /co/xiô-ico) ; ne'ços on foot (for neô-ios, cf. Lat. pës,

96. After

617, 623)

;

ped-is) ; /cpô/co screech (for npay-iu, 589) ; Ion. p'eÇwv (for pey-iuv), peLÇup greater, comp. of péy-as great (357). But after a consonant y i becomes ô ; e.g. ep8u do (for èpy-ico), cf. p«fco do (for pey-iw).

Att. with

CHANGES OF CONSONANTS

97. Verbs like -n-pir™ do, rârrco arrange, from stems in y (-rrpây-, ray-), seem to violate the principle of 96. They are probably due to analogy, since their futures, irpé£«, rà^co, are like the future of 4>vXàTrœ (0uXâ£do). The analogy was strengthened by verbs like àpiràÇœ, which has two stems, àpiraô- and àpiray-, giving Hom. future àp-n-afa, Att. àpirâaopaL snatch away. UptiTTœ may have had an earlier stem irpàK- (also ttpà%-, cf. ireirpâxa). Cf. <r<f>àÇiû and cr</>àrro) (stem <T<t>ay-) slaughter.

98. A with i becomes XX ; e.g. aréXXœ send for <rreX-i« ; àXXopai leap for à\-LopaL (cf. Lat. salio and 88) ; âXXos other for àX-tos, Lat. alius. 63 b ; 628. 99. After av, ap, op, an i is transposed and contracted with

a or o. This called epenthesis (tnépdeais insertion), though the process is really assimilation ; e.g. 4>aivu> show for (t>av-j.œ ; rejoice for x°-p~oj> ; pkXaiva. black for peXav-ia, fem. of péXàs (319) ; poîpa fate for pop-La (88 a), cf. pép-os

was

portion.

100. After

(e to et). E.g.

tv, ep, iv, ip, w, vp, an i

disappears and

e, i, or v

is lengthened

stretch, for rev-iu ', x^puv worse, for x(p~^p » Kelpaj eut the hair, for KptvLo separate, for Kpiv-iw ; oUrlpco pity, for o'lktlp-uo ; ttXwu> wash, for irXvv-uii ; crvpœ drag, for crup-tw. So aûreipa, fem. of au>TT)p savior, for

Teivœ

Kep-tw ;

ocoTep-ia.

630.

101. Before

(not the semivowel operating in the preceding cases, a in many dialects (not, e.g., in Doric). E.g. Dor. Xvo-vtl they loose, Xvo-vai, Hom. and Att. Xiovai (75), Aeolic Xùotcn; Tidrjcn he places, Dor. rl-dy-tl ', irXovcrios rich for ttXovt-los (cf. ttXovtos wealth) ; av thou, Dor. tv, Lat. tu. 91.

93-100),

becomes

102. Digamma.

The Aeolic and Doric retained f, équivalent to (3), long after it disappeared in Ionic and Attic. The following are a few of the many words in which its former presence is known : lap spring (Lat. vër), eïnu yield (Eng. weak), Sîos divine (dîvus), exos word, eïirop said (stem fer-, cf. Lat. voc-is), elôov saw (for è-ftS-ov, Lat. vid-eo), eXiropaL hope (Lat. volup-tas), 'éwvpi clothe (for pea-vvpL, 86 c), kadrjs garment (Lat. vestis), épéco I shall say (Lat. ver-bum), êWepos evening (vesper), ïs strength (vis), kXtiIs, Dor. «Xâts, key (clâvis), olôa I know (Eng. wise), oh sheep (ovis, Eng. ewé), ohos house (vïeus), olvos wine (vînum), aKaibs left (scaevus). See also the cases under the

English

semivowel u, 89.

103.

Changes in Aspirâtes. When

voiceless consonant {ir,

k, t) elision, by crasis, rough. E.g.

is brought before a rough breathing either by or in forming a compound, it is itself made

à<t>tr)pL for àir-lrjpi let go, Kadaipû for Kar-alpeco take down, âcf>' wv for àiro à>v from which, vt<x0' oXyv for vvura SX-qv ail night (55, 66). For crasis, see the examples in 51, 53. So ovx ovros not he (115).

GREEK GRAMMAR

but and ï-qpi, 165 i). Greeks generally avoided two rough consonants in

104. The Ionic generally has (for

example) àir'

105. The

ov,

does not observe this principle in writing,

à71-177au (from àiro

successive syllables. a.

reduplication (544) an initial rough stop

smooth. E.g.

■n-tyma for <t>e<pvKa,

(<j>, x, 9) is always made

perfect of 4>Vas grow ; Kkxvva for xwa, perf. of xâc/cw perf. of OàXXœ flourish. So in H-dripi place, for

rkOyXa for dedriXa, Oi-drini (612 b). gape ;

b. The

ending 61 of the first aorist

imperative passive becomes rt after

stem (789 a). E.g. XvBtjti be released (for XvOy-Oi), <t>âv0r]ti be shown 4>àvT)9i appear (789 b).

Or7- of the tense

(for 4>av6-q-0l) ; but 2 aor.

In the aorist passive kréOyv was placed from TÎBypi (9e-), and in èrvOrjv sacrificed from Otu (6v-), de and 9v become re and tv before Or]v. d. A similar change occurs in àprr-éxu (for àp<p-exu) and âprr-iax^ (for àn4>-L(7x<^) clothe, and in é/ce-xeipîâ (ex<^ and xe'p) truce. So an initial aspirate is lost in êx« (stem ex- for aex-, 88, 537), but reappears in fut. ë£w. e. There is a transfer of the aspirate in a few verbs which had originally two rough consonants in the stem; e.g. rpé</>w (stem rpefy- for Opecfr-) nourish, fut. 0pk\p(x> (675); rpéxw (rpex- for 6pex~) run, fut. Opk^opaL ; eTo.4>7)v from Oâ-n-rœ (racjy- for 9acf)-) bury ; see also Opv-wTu, tv4>w, and stem Oarr-, in the Catalogue of Verbs. So in 0pî£ (227) haïr, gen. tPlxôs (stem rptx- for 9pix~) ; and in raxvs swift, comparative Oaaauv for ôax-iuj> (94). Here the first aspirate reappears whenever the second is lost by any phonetic change. Yet in some forms both rough consonants appear. E.g. c.

was

èrtipé<t>-0t)v was nourished, inf. Opecp-drjvai, re-0pâ<t>-0ai ; e-axe-Qov I held ; and the imperatives 4>àQi say, 4>7]0l turn ; epic présent 4>9ivv0u waste.

re-Oà^-daL inf. lie buried ; ypà^yOt be written, arrpà-

f. An aspirate may pass from one syllable to another in early phonetic changes. E.g. Attic eus dawn, Hom. yùs, Aeolic avos for avcr-os, aù-ôs (90, cf. Lat. aur-ôra, from aus-ôsa) ; twvpi clothe (86 c) for fea-vvpi, feh-vvpi ; rrâaxu suffer for -iraO-uKu (69). So also the rough from irpo ôSov ; 4>povp6s watchman (for

106. Metathesis.

within for

word;

ri-TK-œ,

e.g.

breathing; e.g. 4>pov5os vanished rrpo-ôpos). 51.

A consonant sometimes shifts its position IIw£ Pnyx Hill, gen. IIukpôs ; tlktco give birth

aor. e-re/c-op;

an'eKTopai consider, Lat.

107. The term metathesis should not be Kàpros, Opacros

specio.

applied to cases like Kpàros and

and Oâparos, which arose from a sonant p

(27) ; cf. centre and

MOVABLE CONSONANTS center,

(apçn)

forms such as (3é-p\r)-Ka I have thrown, Te-rpy-Ka grade of the dissyllabic bases belè, temê (169) ; cf. jSdXXw, trf3a.\-ov, /3é-Xos, /3éXe-juvoV, rép-vu, e-rap-ov, répe-vos, ail representillg différent vowel grades (34). apron

; nor to

I have eut, which are

108. Between p

and

and X the sound of /3 is developed. E.g.

p or p

peaypppia midday for pea-ypp-ia, from péaos middle and the weak grade (vpp, 34) of rjpkpa day, Hom. fjpap ; pépfiXœKa, epic perfect of p\œakw go, from po\-, pXco-, pe-pXœ-Ka. Thus the vulgar chimley for chimney gener-

ally becomes chimbley, and Lat.

chamber.

caméra

became Fr. chambre, Eng.

a. In such cases the p before /S is lost when it begins a word. E.g. jSporôs mortal from pop-, pp- (cf. Lat. mor-ior die), but â-pPpo-ros immortal ; PXLttw take honey, from peXir-, pXit-, cf. péXi honey. See 625.

109. Between

and

p a

S is

developed ;

e.g.

in the oblique

cases

àvrjp man (277), gen. âvôpôs for àvp-os, dat. àvbpL, etc.; aLvopwv mischiefmaker, cf. aiva-pôs mischievous. Cf. Lat. cinerem and Eng. cinder.

Movable Consonants 110. Most words

ending in

-<n

(including -£i and -\pi), and ail

verbs of the third personal singular ending in e, may add the next word begins with a vowel. This is called v v

v when movable, è4>e\nv(TTtKÔi> (dragging after). It is not found in Herodotus. E.g.

ttcLctl ôlôœcn

he gives these things to everybody, but irâcnv ëôœKev 'eKeiva things to everybody. So ôiSuaL pot. he gives me ; but ôLôwo-iv

ravra

he gave those

kpoL.

111. 'EotL is may also take ai, or

may

v movable, like forms of the third admit elision (55 ; 59).

112. The third person singular of the pluperfect active in

went, may take in

-et

(for -ee),

movable ;

e.g.

e.g. &t>tX«, never

person

and fiei

yôei(v) he knew. But contracted imperfects take

in Attic.

113. The epic /cé (for av) is generally név before a vowel, and the poetic vvv (enclitic) has an epic form vv. Many adverbs in -6ev (as irpôaQev) have poetic forms in -de, which are regular in Herodotus.

114. N movable may be written at the end of a sentence or of a line of poetry. It may be added even before a consonant in poetry (and sometimes in prose) to make a syllable long by position (120). It may be added, by analogy with other neuters, to the pronominal forms tooovto(v),

roiovTo{v), ravTÔ(v). 115.

tence,

Où not is the

ovk

before

form used before a consonant or at the end of a sen¬ smooth vowel, and ovx before a rough vowel ; e.g. où

GREEK GRAMMAR

ov some, but others not, oIk abrôs not he himnot he (103). The emphatic form ovxt is used before both vowels and consonants. Mi? not inserts « in prtK-eri no longer, by the analogy of où/c-ért. 116. OStws thus, 4£ (eus) from, are used before a vowel, ovra and è* (cf. 84 a) before a consonant ; e.g. ovrais ëx« so it is, ovrœ ôoxeî so it seems, é£ âcrrews out of the city, ê/c rrjs xôXews out of the city. Ourcos is used at the end of a sentence or in answers, just so!

Xé<r« I shall not loose, oi pkv, ol S'

self,

ovx ovtos

SYLLABLES

syllables as it has separate diphthongs. The syllable next to the last (ultima) is called the penult (paen-ultima almost last) ; the one before the penult is called the antepenult. 118. The following rules, based on ancient tradition, are now generally observed in pronunciation and in dividing syllables at the end of a line : a. Single consonants, combinations of consonants which can begin a word (which may be seen from the Lexicon), and consonants followed by m or v are placed at the beginning of a syllable ; e.g. ë-xw, è-yœ, è-cnré-pa, ve-KTap, à-Kpr/, ôe-apôs, e-Xe-£a, ôa-V'i-Xr/s, pÂrKpbv, irpa-ypa-ros, pi-pv-p-aKœ, iri-irru. 117. A Greek word has as many

vowels

b. Other combinations of consonants, which cannot begin a word, are divided ; e.g. kX-wLs, ëv-Sov, âp-para. So doubled consonants, e.g. irpaa-aœ. c. Compound words are usually divided into their when the final vowel of a préposition has been elided

original parts ; but in composition, the

compound is perhaps more properly divided as a simple word would be, regard to the dérivation; e.g. Ka-dv-Qai-pG) (from ko.t&, v-n-b, and atpéw), ira-pà-yco (from rrapâ and ayu) ; SO ei-aay-ye-Xi-â (from eis and àyyeXiâ).

without

Quantity of Syllables

syllable is long by nature ((frvaei) when it has a long vowel diphthong : rl-yy honor, KreL-vœ Mil. 120. a. A syllable is long by position {OéaeC) when its vowel is followed by two consonants or a double consonant ; e.g. rpà-ire-Ça table, op-rvi; quail, l-arav-res setting. In l-arav-res the first two syllables are long by position. 119. A

or a

b. The length of the vowel itself is not affected by position. E.g. a was sounded as long in irphaato do, irpâypa deed, and 7rp££is action, but as short in Tâa-crw arrange, ràypa order, and râ£is ordering. c. One or both of the consonants which make position may be in the next word ; e.g. the second syllable in oCrôs <f>rjaLv he says and in xarà arôpa vis-à-vis is long by position.

SYLLABLES

121. When a vowel short by nature is followed by a stop with liquid or a nasal, the syllable is common (that is, it may be either long or short) ; e.g. rk-nvov child, v-fi pis insolence, v-tvos sleep. But in Attic poetry such a syllable is generally short (correptio Attica) ; in Homer it is generally long : irÏKpôs bitter, Att. irmpôs. a

122. A voiced stop (fi, y, S) before p or v, and generally before X, lengthens the preceding syllable by position; e.g. à-yvûs unknown, (hfiXL-ov book, ôô-ypa decree. Exceptions, however, occur metri

123. To allow

gratia.

preceding syllable to be common (e.g. short instead of long), the stop and the liquid or nasal must be in the same word, or in the same part of a compound. E.g. éc is common (i.e. it may be short) in trKpînpa I hid ( w or w) ; but it is always long when a liquid or nasal follows either in composition or in the next word : èn-Xéyu pick out, 'tu veûv from the ships (both v_v ). 124. The quantity of most syllables can be seen at once. Thus 77 and w and ail diphthongs are long by nature; e and o are short by nature. a

See 5.

125. When

a, 1, and v are not measured long by position, their quantity generally be learned by observing the usage of poets or from the

must

Lexicon. But it is to be remembered that a.

Every vowel arising from

yépà (for yepaa) prizes,

even

contraction or crasis is long ; e.g. a in (for àkuwv) unwillingly, and n'iv (for nal av)

anuv

if.

b. The combinations

and

are

long when

before a (70). c. The accent often shows the quantity of its in

own

following syllables. Thus the circumflex

acute

Kviaa

savor

shows that

has been

vowel,

long and

x&pà land shows that a is long ; on rives who ? that /3aai\eiâ kingdom the acute shows that the final a is long ; on on

that final

is short.

d. Within

See 126 ;

130 ; 132.

dropped

of vowels

is short

is short.

;

the On

(3aaL\eia queen,

word, a, 1, v are generally short before f ; e.g. davpàÇto wonder, vopLÇu think, -rroinrvÇœ smack. So before £ within a word, i and v are generally short ; e.g. ôprvÇ quail, arifa shall tattoo. a

ACCENT

General Principles 126.

There are three accents : The acute (') ; e.g. adavaros, avdpwiros, \6yos, avrôs, ôé. The grave (') ; e.g. avros e^rj. The circumflex (") ; e.g. iras, a.

tovto,

ripœv.

GREEK GRAMMAR

28 b. No accent can

stand in any syllable before

the antepenult

(117). The acute can stand only on one of the last three syllables of a word, the circumflex only on one of the last two, and the grave only on the last. c. The circumflex can stand only on a syllable long by nature. 127. a. The Greek accent was not a stress accent, like ours, but it raised the musical pitch or tone (topos) of the syllable. This appears in the terms tôvos and irpoaœôia, Lat. accentus, and also in ô£ûs sharp, and fiapiis grave, flat (see 129 a and c), ail taken from ancient Greek music. As the language declined, the musical accent gradually changed to a stress accent, which is now its only représentative in Greek as in most other languages. b. The marks and terms of accent were introduced by Aristophanes of Byzantium, an Alexandrian scholar, about 200 B.c., in order to teach foreigners the correct pronunciation of Greek. By the ancient theory every syllable not having either the acute or the circumflex was said to have the grave accent (KàràXvù, now written KaraXvco simply) ; and the circumflex, originally formed thus 'v, and still * in French, was the union of an acute and a following grave. See 137.

the breathing (12), stands on the second vowel diphthong ; e.g. aïpu, pavaa, tovs avrovs. But in the improper diphthongs (çt, v, v) it stands on the first vowel even when the i is written in the line; e.g. npfj, àirXQ, (w), T2i£a (<££«)• 129. a. A word is called oxytone (o£v-topos sharp-toned) when it has the acute on the last syllable, e.g. tLs who (interrog.), àvpp man, /3aaiXevs king ; paroxytone when it has the acute on the penult, e.g. Xtw, iràdos, (iaaiXéœs ; proparoxytone when it has the acute on the antepenult, e.g. ëXvop, 128. The accent, like

(3aaiXevoPTos. b. A word is called perispomenon

(wepi-airùpepop drawn round,

circum¬

when it has the circumflex on the last syllable, e.g. irais, èXdeÏp; properispomenon when it has the circumflex on the penult, e.g. podaa. c. A word is called barytone (fiapv-ropos, grave or flat-toned) when its last syllable has no accent (127 b). Of course, ail paroxytones, proparoxytones, and properispomena are at the same time barytones. d. When a word throws its accent as far back as possible (130) it is said to have récessive accent. This is especially the case with verbs (150).

flex us)

See 142. e. The term orthotone

is applied to a word, usually enclitic or proclitic (154), which acquires or retains an accent in certain positions; e.g. wp irepi instead of the usual irepl &p concerning which (135). So in English, Government ôf the people, by the people, for the people." "

Accent. The antepenult, if accented, takes have no accent if the last syllable is long by nature or ends in £ or \J/ ; e.g. TéXeKvs axe, avdpœiros man ; but àvdpœTrovs men, irpo<f>v\al; outpost. 130. Rules for the

the acute, but

can

ACCENT 131. Genitives in

and

of substantives in

-is and-us (252), adjectives in -eus and -œv of the Attic declension (205), and the Ionic genitive in -eco of the first declension (196 c), allow the acute on the antepenult ; e.g. irôXews, iro\eœv, MevéXecus, evyeœs, îXecus, 'Arpeiôeœ (gen. of 'Arpeiôrjs). So some compound adjectives in -eus, e.g. tnpL-nepœs with high antlers. For the accent of &cnrep, o'Lôe, euvnvœv, see 163.

ail

cases

-ecus

-eœv

of substantives and

132. The

penult, if accented, is circumflexed when it is long by syllable is short by nature; e.g. prj\oi>, vrjaos, rçXi£ (125 d). Otherwise, if accented, it takes the acute ; e.g. \6yos, tovtwv, àvdpcoirov, Oûpà^. nature while the last

133. Final

and

are

counted

short in

determining the accent;

except in the optative (e.g. TÏprjaai, iroLi]aoi) and in oÏkoi at home. 153.

e.g. âvdpœiroi, vrjaoi ;

iroirjaoi,

not Apria ai

134. An oxytone changes its acute to the grave before other words in same sentence, and no stress whatever should be placed upon a syllable SO marked ; e.g. roùs irovripovs àvdpùirovs (for tous irovtipovs àvOpûirovs), the

àiro lirirov. a.

tone

This

change, which of the

means

that ail the syllables of the former oxy¬

tone, is not made before enclitics (160), nor before an elided syllable (vvxO' oXrjv, 55, 140), nor in the interrogative tLs, tL ; H ôpâs what do you see? (394) It is not made before a colon or a period. Before a comma modem usage differs, and the tradition is uncertain. b. The grave accent is occasionally written on the indefinite pronoun ris, ri (394) to distinguish it from the interrogative ris, tL. are now

same

135. Anastrophe.

Dissyllabic prépositions, regularly oxytone, throw cases. This is called anastrophe (àvaaTpocjjri tuming back, reversion). It occurs a. When such a préposition follows its case ; e.g. in tovtuv irépi (for irepi tovtwv) àbout these matters. This occurs in prose only with irepi, but in the poets with other dis¬ syllabic prépositions except àvà, 5ià, àp4>l, and àvrL In Homer it occurs also when a préposition follows its verb ; e.g. ôXécras âiro having destroyed. the accent back

the penult in two

b. When a préposition stands for itself compounded with èarif ; e.g. iràpa for irâpecrriv (in poetry also for irâpeiai or even iràpeipi), evi for eveariv

{kvi being poetic for h). Homer has âva (for àvà-arriQi) up! and

eveicri.

136.

Anastrophe is really the reversion of

use as an

adverb, when it

evi

for

préposition to its original

orthotone (129 é) and generally more emphatic than its verb. Cf. the sentence-accent in Eng. go awây! Greek airiOi, and the poetic use of ava up! (adverb) with the unstressed âp

Pupoîai upôn thè âltars.

was

GREEK GRAMMAR

Words 137. A contracted syllable is accented if either of the original syllables had an accent. A contracted penult or antepenult is accented regularly (130 ; 132). A contracted final syllable, if the original word was oxytone, has the acute ; if not, the circumflex. Accent of

Contracted Syllables and Elided

E.g. TliJ.wiJ.evos from TÏpaôpevos, <j>i\eîre from </uAéere, 4>t,Xoîp.ev from 4>iXéoip.ev, (piXovvrwv from 4>L\eovTwv, (3ej3ws from (3e(3aws, but TÏpw from rï/jàw.

proceeds from the ancient principle that the circumflex cornes b), never from ' + ' ; so that Tipâw gives n/iû, but (ie(3àws gives /3e/3ws. So Hom. irais boy becomes Attic waîs, but kXï)Ls key, KXys. a. Some exceptions to the rule of 137 will be noticed under the declensions. See 209 ; 304. The analogy of other forms is the cause. This

from ' + ' (127

138. If neither of the form is accented evvoL

for

original syllables had an accent, the

without regard to the

contracted

contraction ; e.g. ripa for rt/iae,

evvooL.

(49) the accent of the first word is lost and that remains; e.g. râyadâ for rà àyadâ, ky&ôa for kyœ

139. In crasis

of the second

oîôa,

Kara

140. In

for nal

ara ;

raXXa for rà aXXa ; râpa or rapa

elision, oxytone prépositions

for toi âpa.

and conjunctions, since

they are of the nature of proclitics (154), lose their accent with the elided vowel ; so also the enclitics (158) tlvo. and iroré. Other oxytones throw the accent back to the penult, but without changing the acute to the grave (134). E.g. èir' avtw ÎOT 'eiri avrw, àXA' elirev ÎOT à\\à elirev, ris tôt àvOpwnwv for ris ttorè àvdpwTwv, 4>r]p.' èyw for (prjpi èyw, kLk eirij for nanà eirq. Accent

of Substantives and

Adjectives

place of the accent in the nominative singular of a nominative singular masculine of an adjective) must generally be learned by observation. The other forms accent the same syllable as this nominative, if the last syllable permits (130) ; otherwise the following syllable. E.g. OaXaTTa., da\à.TT7]s, doXarrav, OaXaTTai, daXàrrais ; KÔpa^, KÔpaKos, KÔpanes, KopaKwv ; irpcLypa, irpÛypaTos, ■npaypb.Twv ; ôiëovs, ôlôôvtos, ôl5ov<tlv. So xapleis, Xo-piicaa, xaplev, gen. xf-pîeî'Tos ; aÇios, àÇLâ, aîov, aîoi, aîai, âîa. 141. The

substantive (and the

The kind of accent is

determined

vrjaos, vijo'ov, vyaov, vrjooi, vyaots.

usual (130 ; 132) ; e.g.

See also the

phrases 'écmv oï etc., 1028.

895. A préposition with a numéral may represent the subject of a verb ; e.g. àirkdavov avrœv 7repl rpiaKoaiovs about three hundred of them were

killed, X. H. 4, 6, 11.

Predicate Substantive and Adjective 896. With verbs signifying to be, to become, to appear, to be named, chosen, made, thought or regarded, and the like, a sub¬ stantive or adjective in the predicate is in the same case as the subject. E.g. /3aaL\evs this

man is king ; 'A\'e^av8pos ôeôs wvopaÇero Alexander god; jjp'edrj <ttparrjyos he was chosen général', p tt6\l? 4>pobpiov Karéo-TT] the city became a fortress, Thuc. 7, 28; ovtôs èartv evbaipœv this man is happy ; 1) xéXts peyàXr] èyévero the city became great ; y'vfrTai p'eyas he has grown (to be) great; voplÇerai aoejios he is thought

ovtô?

ecTTL

was

named

wise.

897. The verbs which

are

here included with the copula elpl (879)

called copulative verbs. The predicate nominative with the passive verbs of this class represents the predicate accusative of the active construction (1075). are

199

APPOSITION 898. The predicate

in gender

and number,

adjective with these verbs agréés with the subject as well as in case. See 916.

899. The predicate of an infinitive with its subject accusative expressed (883 a) is in the accusative; e.g. /SoûXercu rov vlàv elvai. ao<p6v he wishes his son to be wise. So when the participle is used like the infinitive in indirect discourse (1590); e.g. fiSeaav rov JLvpov /SaouXéa yevopevov they knew that Cyrus had become king. For such

predicate with the subject omitted, see 923 and 924. Apposition

900. A substantive annexed to another

substantive to describe

thing, agréés with it in case. This is called apposition, and the noun thus used is called an appositive. E.g. Aapeîos ô /3aai\evs Darius the king. ' AOrjvai, peyoCKt) tvoAis Athens, a great city. "T/xâs tous oo4>ovs you wise ones. 'ilpAv tûv ' AdrjvaLuv of us Atheniansc it, and denoting the

same person or

QepLOTOKAvs gKu (se. iyù) wapà ak I, Themistocles, am corne to you, Thuc. 1, 137. "î'tX^crtos kal Avkcov oi 'Axcllol Philesius and Lycon the Achaeans, X. An. 5, 6, 27.

901. A noun in apposition with two or more nouns is generally plural (or dual) ; e.g. virvos irôvos re, kvplol ^wwpôraL sleep and toil, imperious conspirators, Aesch. Eu. 127 ; dappos Kal <fiô(3ov, a4>pove ^vpf3oûAw rashness and fear, two senseless counsellors, Plat. Ti. 69 d. 902. An adjective may have a genitive in apposition with a genitive which it implies ; e.g. 'Ad^vaîos TrôAeœs rfjs peyLarris an Athenian, citizen of the greatest city in the world, Plat. Ap. 29 d. For a genitive in apposition with the genitive implied in a possessive pronoun, see 1001. 903. A noun which might stand in the partitive genitive (1088) sometimes takes the case of the words denoting its parts, especially when the latter include the whole of the former ; e.g. oUtat at pèv woXAal ireivTcoKeaav, oALyai Se irepirjaav most of the houses were in ruins, but afew remained (where we might have rœv oIklwv), Thuc. 1, 89. So ovtol âAAos aXXa néyei. these men ail say différent things, X. An. 2, 1, 15; orav navres to èff kavTov enaaros cmevbri when ail devote themselves to their individual interests, Thuc. 1, 141. This is called partitive apposition.

904. A noun may be in apposition with a whole sentence, being in the nominative when it is closely connected in thought with- the subject of the sentence, elsewhere in the accusative; e.g. xelvraL.neaôvres, ttLotls ov <jpLKpà vrôXet they lie prostrate, — no small (cause of) confidence to the city, E. Rh. 415. 'E\'evr]v Krâvuipev, Me^éXeoi Xvirrjv irLKpâv let us kill Helen, — which will be a bitter grief to Menelaus, E. Or. 1105.

200 905. A

GREEK GRAMMAR

be in apposition with the subject

or the object of a like word ; e.g. Itt-kol ijyovTo dvpa tQ 'HX^ horses were brought as an offering to the Sun (in active, 'L-w-wovs âyeiv dvpa to bring horses as an offering), X. C. 8, 3,12 ; e^eanv ùpZv r/pâs XapeZv ^vppàxovs you can gain us as allies, X. An. 5, 4, 6. So rvxeZv tlvos çlXov to gain one as a friend', xp^pat tovtc^ <pLXcii I treat him as a friend', also tLvos ôiôâaitaXoi rç/cere as teachers of what are you come? Plat. Euthyd. 287 a. See 1078. noun

sentence, where

may

we use as or a

906. Homer often adds

an appositive denoting a part to a noun or denoting a person; e.g. ArpottLttjv ovtaaev œpov he wounded D. in the shoulder, II. 11, 420; â\X' oiiK 'ATpeîôy 'Ayapepvovt r/voave 6vp<2 but it pleased not the heart of Agamemnon, son of Atreus (lit. to A., his heart), II. 1, 24. Cf. 1058. For ô ôé in Homer followed by a noun in apposition, see 935 a.

pronoun

907. A substantive in apposition with another substantive may hâve the force of an attributive adjective ; e.g. àv-ff pa.ai.Xevs a king, àvyp povuôXos a herdsman. So ixvbpe s as a term of respect in ixvôpes arpar lût ai soldiers! ixvôpes ôiKaaraL gentlemen of the court! âvôpes â5eX(jx)L brethren! Acts 23, 1, but à5eX4>ol brothers! (informai), Acts 23, 5. But àvyp in this construc¬ tion may sometimes have a derogatory force ; e.g. ^X^rrjs àv-qp a cheat, Aesch. Cho. 1001. 908. Names of cities

are

sometimes plural, e.g. 0fj^ai (Hom.

Qvprj)

Thebes, UXaracat Plataea. The masculine plural originally referred to the inhabitants ; e.g. AeX4>oL Delphi, Aeovrîvoi Leontini. 909. The predicate with such substantives may conform to sense rather than to grammar ; e.g. Mwd^ai piKpbv fjv Mycenae was small

place), Thuc. 1, 10. On the other hand Athens in Thuc. 1, 36.

aurais her

refers to

rœv

(a small 'Ad-qvCbv

910. The plural may be used by a speaker in modest reference to himself. In tragedy it is often interchanged with the singular; e.g. xaptépeada, Kai <t>apev KaKÛs 4>povelv

tôt

àXX' txp.ei.vov

vvv

f3ef3ovXevpai I ask your

pardon, and admit that I was foolish before, but now have come to a better résolve, E. Med. 892. When women thus use the plural, a modifying adjective or participle is either masculine plural or féminine singular ;

e.g. TTjvôe ôè

this

land; for

êâré p' oinelv

•

Kal yàp riÔLKrjpévoL aiy^aopeada let me live in

though I am wronged, yet will I be silent, E. Med. 314 ; riypiûpeOa ôoKova' 'OpéaT-rjv ppned' rjXiov fiXéireiv I was embittered, thinking that Orestes no longer looked upon the light of day, E./. T. 348. So Med. 579, Ion 1250, I. A. 985. Cf. 173. even

911. The plural may be used by a speaker of another person in a général or abusive way ; e.g. v(3piopévovs vff 5>v riKtara kxpyv outraged by one who ought least (to have treated them so), Lys. 32, 10; ôeawoTœv davaroeai since the death of my lord, Aesch. Cho. 53. 912. The plural often dénotés parts, quantities, or instances of a

AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES

201

single object or abstract idea; e.g. àproL loaves of bread or différent kinds of bread, npka pièces of meat, irvpoL supplies of wheat, kv Koirpiyai in heaps of filth, Semonid. 7, 6. So raôra for roDro, e.g. raOr' àKovaas when he heard this.

913. Names of festivals are in the plural, e.g. rà Aiovvaia the festival of Dionysus, rà Qwpofybpia the Thesmophoria, rà 'OXûpTria the Olympic games. 914. The dual, fréquent in Homer and more common in Attic than in the other dialects, is used to dénoté natural pairs, e.g. rd> ô</>0aXp<& the two eyes. Yet al x«îp« the hands is preferred to rà x<7pe, and àp^œ and 8w regularly occur with the plural ; e.g. evpos 8vo irXédpœv (1082 e) of two plethra in breadth, X. An. 1, 2, 23.

Agreement

Adjectives

Adjectives agree with their substantives in gender, numcase. This applies also to the article and to adjective pronouns and participles. E.g. 915.

ber, and ô ao<t>os

àv-qp the wise man ; roO crocfiov àvàpôs, rû cro</>c3 àvôpt, rov aocpov âvSpa, àvSpwv, etc. 0vros à àv-qp this man ; tovtou rov àvSpôs, rovrœv àv8pœv. Ai irpo rov crrôparos vqes vavpaxovcrai the ships engaged in battle

rûv oocfrœv rœv

before the mouth (of the harbor), Thuc. 7, 23.

predicate adjectives with copulative verbs, the case of (896) ; e.g. ai âptarat cSo/coDaat elvai the natures which are deemed to be best, X. M. 4, 1, 3.

This includes

which has already been considered <t>v<rei.s

916. The adjective may be either attributive or predicate. An attribu¬ tive adjective simply qualifies the noun, without making an assertion about it ; e.g. ao^os àv-qp a wise man, o aocfros àv-qp the wise man. The

predicate adjective may be connected with its substantive by the copula (879) or by a copulative verb (897), becoming a part of the predicate or assertion which is made of the subject ; e.g. ô àv-qp àyadôs ko-nv the man is good ; KaXelrai, àyados he is called good. It may stand to its noun in any relation which implies some part of elpl ; e.g. -n-r-qvàs 5icô/cets rà s kXirlôas you are pursuing hopes which are winged, E. frag. 273 ; àdàvarov r-qv pvqpqv KaraXehpovcnv immortal is the memory they will leave behind them, Isoc. 9, 3 ; iroiei rov s Mi)8ovs àadeveîs he makes the Medes (to be) weak. Every adjective which is not attributive is classed as a predicate. A predicate adjective is often recognized by its position with respect to the article ; see 970, and the examples. 917. A collective noun in the singular denoting persons may take a plural participle ; e.g. Tpolav kXôvres 'Apyetœv crrôXos the Argives' army, having taken Troy, Aesch. Ag. 577. Cf. 890. 918. An adjective may conform to the real rather than the grammatical gender of a noun denoting a person ; e.g. </>tXe tIkvov dear child! (174 d).

202

GREEK GRAMMAR

919. An attributive adjective belonging to several nouns generally agréés

with the nearest

the most prominent

one,

and is understood

with the rest ; e.g. t6v koXôv Kàyadov avbpa Kai ywaïna the cultivated man and

wavri Kai X6yu> Kai yqxavv by every word and device. adjective (like a verb, 891) is regularly plural if it belongs to several singular nouns, or dual if it belongs to two. If the nouns are of différent genders, the adjective is commonly masculine if one of the nouns dénotés a maie person, and commonly neuter if ail denote things. E.g. elôe Trarépa re Kai pqrépa Kai âôeX<povs Kai ryv kavrov yvvaÏKa aixiJ-aXwTovs yeyevrip.évovs he saw that both his father and his mother, his brothers, and his own wife had been made captives, X. C. 3, 1, 7; <5ô£a ô-q woman,

920.

Kai

Plat. G. 470

A predicate

€TTLp.éXeLa Kai

vous

Kai r'exvq Kai vôpos auXqpwv Kai paXaKœv

irporepa

àv e'ùq,

opinion, therefore, and attention, reason, and art must be prior to things hard and soft, Plat. Lg. 892 b. Persons, even when female, may be referred to generically by the masculine ; e.g. (jweXqXùdacriv àôeX^ai re Kai àôeX4>iôaî Kai

àvexpiai

rocravrai, œare

elvai kv rfj oLiq. rkaaapas Kai ôé/ca roùs kXevdkpovs

sisters, nieces, and cousins have collected that there are in the house fourteen that are gentlefolk, X. M. 2, 7, 2. b. But a predicate adjective may agree in both gender and number with the nearest or most prominent noun ; e.g. irpoppiÇos aùros, v ywrj, rà iraibLa, kclkigt airoXoLp-qv may I perish miserably root and branch, myself, my wife, my children, Ar. R. 587. many

921. A masculine or féminine noun, denoting a class rather than an individual, may have a neuter predicate adjective; e.g. KaXdv v àX^Beta a beautiful thing is truth, Plat. Lg. 663 e ; àdàvarov apa -q fvxv ; is the soul then immortal (an immortal thing) ? Plat. Ph. 105 c; ywaïkes kapev àdxiûratov 4>vt6p we women are most unhappy créatures, E. Med. 231.

922. A predicate adjective is often used where the English has an adverb or adverbial phrase; e.g. èKôvres qXdov they came willingly or were glad to corne; opklos 8é aoi Xéyco I say it to you on my oath, S. Ant. 305; Karefiaivov eis ràs Kcopas aKoraîoL it was dark when they began the descent to the villages, X. A. 4,1,10. So aapevos gladly, and iroXvs, e.g. (pkpovrai oi XLdoi. ttoXXoL the stones are hurled in great numbers ; ttoXùs èpékecto Xéyup he was very

insistent in his speech, Hdt. 7, 158. There is often, however,

great

distinction between the adjective and the adverb ; e.g. xpwros avroùs eïoov I was the first to see them; ttpûtovs avroùs elôov they were the first whom I saw; irpûTov (adv.) avroù s elôov first (of ail that I did) I saw them.

Adjectives Belonging to 923. When the

the

same as

subject of

Omitted Subject

mfinitive is omitted because it is

the subject nominative of the leading verb (883 b),

adjective words and nouns which would agree with the omitted subject are assimilated to the preceding nominative. E.g.

OMITTED SUBJECT OF AN INFINITIVE

203

fiovXeraL croifiôs elvai he wishes to be mise', IIépar/s elvai he said he was a Persian, X. An. 4, 4, 17 ; oùx ôpoXoyr/aœ âKXyros r/Kuv I shall not admit that I am corne unbidden, Plat. Symp. 174 d; ovk ecfr-q avros àXX' kneïvov arparriyelv he (Cleon) said that not (he) himself, but he (Nicias) was

général ; he said ovk (èyù) avtos (arpaTijyûi) àXX' 'eKeZvos (arparr/yeZ), avrôs being adjective (988 a) and é/cetVos substantive ; Thuc. 4, 28. Such adjective words or nouns may be in the predicate with copulative verbs (896) or in other constructions. See X. Oec. 7, 8; Symp. 1, 6.

924. But when the

it is the

same as

ing verb,

subject of an infinitive is omitted because

the object or

other adjunct (883 c) of the lead-

—

dative, adjective words and nouns may in the accusative in agreement with the omitted subject of the infinitive. E.g. 7rpéxet croi elvai. Trpodv/j.œ (or irpodvpov) it becomes you to be zealous ; vvv croi 'éÇecrTiv àvôpi yevéaOaL now it is in your power to show yourself a man, X. An. 7,1, 21 ; iravrl TrpoarjKei. apxovri. cjjpovLpcc elvai. it becomes every ruler to be prudent, X. Hipp. 7, 1; avpcj)épel avroZs <pLXovs elvai. it is for their a.

If this

adjunct is

either be assimilated to the dative, or stand

interest to be

friends, X. Oec. 11, 23; ë8o£ev avroZs ava-KevaaapévoLs &

elxov Kal é^o7rXt(Tapevois irpoiévai. they decided to pack up what they had and arm themselves completely and advance, X. An. 2,1,2; but eôo^ev aiiroZs

KaT acrr-qa avr as crvyKaXeZv tous arpaT ilôt as they decided pickets and to assemble the soldiers (ib. 3, 2,1) ; in 1, 2,1 we

TrpocjivXaKàs

to station

find two datives and

accusative.

adjunct is a genitive, predicate adjectives are generally ; but other adjective words and ail substantives stand in the accusative. E.g. b. If the

assimilated to it

Los tt podv pot cltov y eveadae they asked Cyrus to be as devoted to possible, X. H. 1, 5, 2 ; but (with a substantive) 'Aer/valœv èôe-qd-qaav crcpLoi fSorj6ovs yevéadai they asked the Athenians to become their helpers, Hdt. 6, 100; KaKovpyov èari Kpid'evT àirodaveZv, ŒTpaTijyov ôè ^axonevov rots iroXepîois it is proper for a malefactor to die by the sen¬ tence of a court, but for a général (to die) fighting the enemy, Dem. 4, 47 ; ôéopiat vp.ûv p,ep.vripévovs tlZiv eipqpévccv rà ôiKaia fqtpLcraadai. I beg of yOU to remember what has been said, and to vote what is just, Isoc. 19, 51.

K vpov

eôéovTo

them

preceding accu¬ avp.p.adyràs p-ol 4>oltôlv I have induced others to go as my fellow-pupils, Plat. Euthyd. 272 c. 926. The principles of 923 and 924 apply also to a predicate with &v or with the participle of a copulative verb; e.g. ySeaav aocfrol ovres they knew that they were wise (but fiôeaav tovtovs aocpovs ocras they knew that these 925. Words in the construction of 924

sative

are

men were

course

which refer to

in the accusative; e.g. aXXovs iréireiKa

wise). 1590.

204

GREEK GRAMMAR

927. When

infinitive dépends on

participle which supplies its

omitted subject, predicate words take the case of the participle; e.g. rjXOov èiri tlvo. tgjv ôokovvtoop elvai aoipojp I accosted one who h<xd the réputation

of being wise, Plat. Ap. 21 b ; t£>p -k poa-kolovpkpw elpai <jo§igtûip tlpos some of those who profess to be sophists, Isoc. 15, 221. So roîs ôokovœlp eleai ao^oïs to those who are reputed to be wise.

928. When the subject of an infinitive is général or indefinite it is often omitted ; e.g. cnyâp KeXevœ (se. Trapras) I command silence, S. Ph. 865. Here a predicate modifier is in the accusative ; e.g. pdop exopTas 4>vXârTeLP y

nTycracrdat. tvo.pta irétfrvKep it is naturally easier to Jceep anything when you have it than to acquire it, Dem. 2, 26.

Adjective Used

as a

Substantive

929. a. An attributive adjective or participle, generally with the article, may be used as a substantive. E.g.

ô ôLkciios the just man ; ô kxOpôs

the enemy ; <frLXos a friend ; kany a base woman ; pkaop or péaop the middle ; oi kokoL the bad ; tols àyaOoîs to the good ; Kcuiâ evils ; rà 6p7]to. things mortal ; ol ypafapepoi hcoKpaTrjp the accusers to

of Socrates. b. In

some cases, a noun is distinctly implied; e.g. rf? vaTepata (se. rjpkpç.) on the next day ; y ôe£iâ (se. the right hand ; y evdeïa (se. ôôôs) the straight road ; ô â/eparos (se. oïpos) unmixed wine. So with other attrib¬ utive words, e.g. « ti)p èavrâp (se. yrjp) into their own land ; eis roO àôeX<t>ov to my brother's (for eis Typ tov àôeX<f>ov OLKiap).

930. Sometimes the omitted substantive is not easy to supply; e.g. ê£ evapTias from the opposite quarter, over against; é£ ïcrov on an equal basis, equal ; kp àotpaXeï in safety (= àatpaXés, safe).

931. The neuter

used

bLuaiOV

singular of

abstract noun; e.g.

justice (= ÔLKaLoavvrj).

adjective with the article is often to koXôv beauty (= kôlWos), to

932. The participle, which is a verbal adjective, is occasionally thus used; e.g. t6 ôeôt.6s fear (= rô ôeÔLkpcu), Thuc. 1, 36; kp râ p.y peXertipTi in the want of practice (in the not practising) (= kp râ py peXeTS.p), Thuc. 1,142. So in Latin, opus est maturato there is need of haste.

The Article Homeric Use of the Article 933. In Homer the article appears pronoun,

which

it may serve

as a

generally

as a

démonstrative

its original function. If used as a substantive, personal pronoun of the third person or (in the

was

HOMERIC USE OF THE ARTICLE

205

beginning with r) as a relative, when the antécédent is E.g. ttjv 8' kyth ov Xvaa) but her I will not free, II. 1, 29 ; rov ôè icXve &oî(3os ' AirôXXœv

forms

definite.

heard him, II. 1, 43 ; ô yàp fjXde Ooàs kirl vijas 'Axatwv ships of the Achaeans, II. 1, 12. As relative, irvpà fires which were burning, II. 10, 12 ; ôûpa rà oL ijeîvos ôûne gifts which a stranger gave him, Od. 21, 13. 934. Even in Homer, adjectives and participles used as substantives (929 a) sometimes have the article, as in Attic Greek ; e.g. ol yàp àp tarot kv vgvalv Kéarat for the bravest lie in the ships, II. 11, 658; ol à\\ot the (those) others ; rà r' kovra rà r kaaopeva both things that are and things that are to be, II. 1, 70. 935. a. When ô, fj, rô are used before a noun in Homer, they are generally pronouns (especially ô 8k), and the substantive is in apposition with them ; e.g. ô 8' efipaxe xôX/ceos "Aprjs and he, brazen Ares, roared, II. 5, 859 ; r) 8' âéKova' a p. a roïat ywi) Kiev and she, the woman, went with them unwillingly) II. 1, 348. b. Nearer the Attic use of the article are examples like these: avràp ô roîaL yéptov ô8ov rjyepôvevev but he, the old man, showed them the way, Od. 24, 225; rov S' olov irarép' evpov and him, the father, they found alone, ib. 226. c. Hardly, if at ail, to be distinguished from the Attic article is that found in examples like these : ôre ôrj rrp> vrjaov àtptKÔpeO' when now we had corne to the island, Od. 9, 543 ; rô re adkvos 'V.aplœvos and the might of Orion, II. 18, 486 ; al Se ywaïnes laràpevat davpaÇov and the women stood and wondered, II. 18, 495. d. It is therefore often difficult to décidé the exact force of an article in early Greek. The examples above show a graduai transition, even in Homer, from the original pronoun to the true definite article. 936. The examples in 935 c are exceptional ; in such cases the nouns usually stand without the article in Homer, as in Latin. E.g. 8etvi] 8è KXayyv ykver àpyvpéoto fttolo and terrible came the clang from the silver bow, II. 1, 49, would in Attic Greek require v KXayyr/ and roD /3toD. 937. Herodotus generally uses the forms of the article beginning with r in the place of the ordinary relative, of which he uses only the forms os, rj, o'L, and aï, except after prépositions. E.g. âXXos opvis Ipos, rc2 o'ivopa QotvtÇ another sacred bird, whose name is Phoenix, 2, 73. In other respects and, Phoebus Apollo

came to the swift iroWà rà KcdeTo many

for he

uses

the article

it is used in Attic prose.

the Homeric usage with respect to the closely than Herodotus; and the tragic poets, especially in the lyric chorus, admit the article in the r forms as a relative or a Personal pronoun to avoid hiatus, to make a syllable long by position, or to mark spécial emphasis. The article is often omitted in Attic poetry where it would be required in prose (936). The dialogue of comedy, being more colloquial, uses it oftener than that of tragedy. 938. The lyric poets follow

article

206

GREEK GRAMMAR Attic

Use of the Article

939. In Attic Greek the article

article the ;

e.g.

ô àvyp the

man,

"EWrjatv to the Greeks, rà 5é/ca Troy), Thuc. 1, 11. 940. The Greek may use

the

English omits it. Such

err]

generally corresponds to our tûv 7rôXeo;^ of the cities ; rots the (well known) ten years (at

the article in certain cases in which the following (941-949) :

are

941. Proper names may take the article; e.g. ô Sco/cpâr??* or Zooicparys

Socrates.

942. Abstract substantives often take the article; e.g.

ÔLKcuoavvr] justice ;

same

sense,

«uXâ/îeia caution. But àperi] etc.

and words like

evpos

omit the article. 943.

width, p'eyedos size,

77 àpen7 virtue, also used in the name, commonly

are

ovopa

Substantives qualified by a démonstrative pronoun regularly

take the article ; e.g. ovtos ô àvyp this man ; h> raîaôe raïs irbXtaiv in these cities. For the position see 972. b. But this article may

be omitted with

proper names,

e.g. ovtos

NeoirrôXepos this Neoptolemus, Dem. 18, 114; also when the substantive is in the predicate, or where the démonstrative is équivalent to here or

e.g. ôpûpev àXLyovs tovtovs àvdpœirovs we seefew men here, X. An. 4, 7, 5 ; 'écTTU) lua-vr] àiroXoyLa let this be a sufficient answer, Plat. Ap. 24 b. So oîitoai àvijp this man here, and ovtos àvyp used familiarly or contemptuously ; see also vrjes 'enelvai 'eiTLirXeovai. ships are sailing up yonder, Thuc. 1, 51. c. The tragedians often omit this article with démonstratives.

there, avrri

944. a. Substantives with a possessive pronoun take the article when they refer to definite individuals, but not otherwise; e.g. ô kpos iraTyp myfather, b ad s kolvuvôs your partner, Dem. 18, 21 (998) ; but <7 OS KOLVœvOS would mean a partner of yours. For predicates see 954. b. So also with substantives on which a possessive genitive of a Per¬ sonal, démonstrative, or reflexive pronoun dépends ; e.g. ô iraT-jp pov my father ; ô èpavrov irar-pp my own father ; ô tovtwv iraT-jp their father ; 77 èavrccv 777 their own land, but irais èavTov a child of his own. 945. Tolovtos, toaovtos, tolôaôe, Toaôaôe, and t-rfXiKovTos, standing in the attributive position (959), may take the article; e.g. tov tolovtov avopa such a man as he. It is always used with oeLva (398), e.g. 6 oeiva What 's-his-name. 946. A numéral may have the article to distinguish a part of a number (443) ; to express a round number, especially with àp4>i, irept, virép, or eis ; to express merely a number in the abstract. E.g. tûv irkvre ràs 5vo polpas vtpovTai they hold two parts out offive, or twofifths, Thuc. 1,10; oi ptv TtTTapes ovôh 'é4>aaav eioévai tov irpàypatos four of them (out of the total of five) said they knew nothing of the affair, Lys. 22, 8 ; 'èpeivav rjpkpas àp4>l ràs tplcluovta they remained about thirty days, X. An. 4, 8, 22 ; ôirœs py èpeîs on han Ta

ATTIC USE OF THE ARTICLE

207

don't say that twélve is twice six, Plat. Rep. 337 b ; number one, unity, A. Met. 986 a 15. SûSeKa ôls

h> the

947. The article is often used, where we use a possessive pronoun, to

mark something as

sentence; vlov

her

belonging to

e.g. 'épxetœl

abri]

te 57

'éxovaa Mandane cornes to

son

Cyrus, X. C. 1, 3, 1.

a person or

Mavbâvy

thing mentioned in the

Trpos tov

irarépa nai

tov

Kvpov

tov

her father (lit. to the father) herself, and with generic force, marking an object as the (in général) ; oi âvdpwiroL the lower animais) ; ol ykpovres the aged (as

948. The article may have a

représentative of a class ; mankind (opposed to gods a class).

e.g. ô avdpunros man or

949. The article sometimes has Use

each

et; e.g.

promises to give three half-darics

See 444

distributive force, where

viriaxveïtal ôoxreiv rpia ypibapeLKa

1136.

tov pyvos tw

should

orparidoTr]

month to each soldier, X. An. 1, 3, 21.

préposition with its case, or any similar expres¬ be used with the article to qualify a substantive, like an attributive adjective ; e.g. ol rore avdpœiroi the men of that time ; tov TrâXcu Kàôpov of ancient Cadmus, S. O.T. 1 ; ol èv acrrei 'Adyvaïoi. the Athenians in the city ; ô -n-pos toùs Aanebaipovlovs irôXepos the Peloponnesian War. b. Here a substantive denoting men or things is often omitted ; e.g. oi èv ao-Tei the city party (of 403 B.c.) ; rots rore to the men of that time; ol à/j.(f>l ITXârowa Plato and his school, or (in later Greek) simply Plato. 950.

sion,

An adverb, a

may

951. The substantives yy land, irpàypaTa things or affairs, vlôs son, and sometimes others readily suggested by the context, may be omitted after the article, when a qualifying adjective or genitive is added ; e.g. els rr]v

(se. yfjp) to their own land; é/c rys irepioudbos from the neighboring ; rà rrjs irôXeœs the affairs of the state, politics ; rà tô>i> iroXepluv the enemy's cause; Ilepu<\rjs ô "EavOlirirov (se. vlôs) Pericles son of Xanthippus; tt)v raxlo-ryp (se. ôô6i>) the quickest way. Expressions like rà (or rà) rrjs rvxys, rà Tïjs ôpyrjs, with no definite nouns understood, sometimes do not differ from tvxv fortune and bpyy wrath. Cf. 929 b. èavTÛv

country

substantive with new adjuncts in the same its article ; e.g. ol tûv ttoXltûp and those of the other inhabitants. 953. a. The infinitive, as a verbal noun (1520), may take a neuter article ; e.g. to dbkvai the knowledge ; aol to yy cnyrjaai XoLirov rjv it remained for you not to be silent, Dem. 18, 23. b. In like manner, a neuter article may précédé a whole clause con952. Instead of

repeating

sentence, it may be sufficient to repeat iraîôes Kai oi tûv âÀÀa>v the children of citizens

as a substantive; e.g. to yvàQi aavrov saying " know thyself" is everywhere useful.

sidered

the

iravTaxov

Vrt

xpyai-u°v

the

seldom has the article ; e.g. vi>% y ygépy kyévero day became night, Hdt. 1, 103 ; KaXetrat y àKpôiroXis en vit' 'Adyvaluv ttôXls

954. A predicate noun

208

GREEK GRAMMAR

the citadel is still called " city" by the

Athenians, Thuc. 2, 15. So when it has possessive pronoun ; e.g. ovtos kpos kraîpos yv he was a chum of mine, Plat. Ap. 21 a. But when the predicate refers definitely to distinct persons or things, it may have the article; e.g. eial 8' ovtol ol eldores TàXydks; and are they the ones (whom I mean) who know the truth? Plat. H.Maj. 284 e ; ovtol ol SclvoL eicri pov KaryyopoL these are my really formidable accusers, Plat. Ap. 18 c. 955. BacrtXeûs is generally used without the article to designate the king of Persia; e.g. tovtovs airo-rrép-irel (iaoïXel these he sends to the King, Thuc. 1, 128. But the article is sometimes found : compare Isoc. 4, 166 a

and 179.

So sometimes

peyas

PacrLXevs', e.g. peyâXov f3aaiXécos (3aaLXeLa a

palace of the Great King, X. An. 1, 2, 8. The article is omitted in officiai records of personal names, and in formai use ; e.g. ToXplSys 'HXeïos Tolmides of Elis, X. An. 2, 2, 20. 956. The article is often omitted in

some familiar expressions of time place, which are probably older than the Attic use of the article; e.g. apa ecç at daybreak ; wktôs by night ; âpa ypL at the opening of spring ; h âyopà in the market-place ; /car' àypovs in the country ; /carà yrjp by land ; /carà dâXaTTav by sea ; 'en ôe&âs from the right. 957. The article is generally used with the name of a god and an epithet denoting his cuit, or when the name dépends upon a substantive which has the article ; e.g. ô Zeùs ô MaXlxios Zeus, requirer of propitiatory offerings, X. An. 7, 8, 4 ; rrjs 'AprépiSos rfjs 'E4>eaLas of Ephesian Artemis, X. An. 5, 3, 6 ; to lepov to0 'AirôXXccvos the sanctuary of Apollo, Thuc. 1, 29. The article is necessary in oaths except with the name of Zeus, e.g. vp A la by Zeus, vr) tov "HpaKXea. by Heracles, pà tous deoùs no, by the gods. Without the article deôs is often used to mean divinity, God (with no implication of monotheism).

and

958. The article must be used in y 'Aata Asia, y 'EXXâs Hellas, y Evpûiry Europe, and with many adjectival names; e.g. y 'Attlktj Attica (se. yy, 951) ; yet koltcl QeTTaXLav in Thessaly.

Position 959. Attributive Position,

of the Article

a. An attributive adjective which substantive with the article commonly stands between the article and the substantive, and is said to be in the attributive position ; e.g. 6 aoefos àvpp the wise man, twv peyahcov irôXeœv of the great cities. See 916. b. The noun with the article may be foliowed by the adjective with the article repeated. The first article is sometimes omitted. In these cases the noun has greater emphasis than in the preceding form (a). E.g.

qualifies

POSITION OF THE ARTICLE

209

sometimes àpqp 6 <ro</>6s the wise man (but not ô àpqp cro<f>6s, ai -n-ôXeis al SripoKpaTovpevaL the states which are under democraCÎeS ; àpOpanroL oi àôiKÛTaroi men who are the most unjust ; 7rcos V aKparos ôiKaioawT] irpos àôudav ti)v auparov ex« (the question) how pure justice is

ô àvr/p à <ro(f>ôs, see

970)

;

related to pure injustice, Plat. Rep. 545 a.

960. This applies to possessive pronouns and ail expressions which have the force of attributive adjectives, when they are preceded by the article (950 a), and to dépendent genitives (except partitives and the

genitive of the personal pronoun) ; e.g. ô kpos irarqp my father ; q aq pqTqp thy mother ; ô kpavTov ivaryp my own father (but ô war-qp pov my father, see 975 a) ', oi h> aarrei avdpœiroi. or oi avOpwKoi oi kp aarei the men in the dty ; ovôeis tCHv tore 'EXXqpœp none of the Greeks of that time ; to ti3 Bvti xfevôos the real falsehood ; eis ttjv èKeivuv tvo\lv into their city ; oi tu>v QqfiaLwv OTpaTqyoi the générais of the Thébans ; top ôqpop top 'Adqpaiœp the people of Athens ; èp rg àpafiâcrei rg perà Kvpov in the upward march with Cyrus, X. An. 5, 1, 1. For participles see 968. 961. Two

or even

Trjs tûp iroWûv fvxqs 254 a.

three articles may

oppara

the

eyes

thus stand together; e.g. rà yàp of the soul of the multitude, Plat. So.

962. Of the three attributive positions, the first (e.g. ô o-o<t>os àp-qp) is common and the most simple and natural ; the second (ô àpqp ô ao4>6s) is rather formai ; the third (àp-qp ô ao^os) is the least common except the most

in poetry,

the attributive being added

as an

afterthought

correction.

963. The article at the beginning of a clause may be separated from its substantive by the postpositive words pkv, Sé, rè, ye, yàp, 5-q, ow, olpai,

roi, to'lpvp, and by ris in Herodotus.

stands in either of the attribu¬ follows the governing noun and its tûp ttoXltwp oi KaKoi the bad among the

964. The partitive genitive (1088) rarely

tive

positions, but either précédés

article ; *e.g. oi KaKoi tû>p -ttoXltûp, or citizens (rarely oi tûp ttoXltSip KaKoi). Even the other uses of the adnominal genitive occasionally have this position, e.g. <5<.à top oXedpop tûp avarparLcoTcHp ôpyiÇôpepoi angered by the death

of their fellow soldiers, X. An. 1, 2, 26.

in the singular generally means the rest, seldom the q à\\q ivoXis the rest of the state (but aXX-q ttoXls another state) ; oi aXXot "EXXqpes the other Greeks ; irepi tûp HXXup àiràPTMP Çûojp in the case of ail other animais, Plat. Ap. 25 b. b. Both ô aXXos and aXXos (rarely «repos) may have the meaning of

965.

'O âWos

other ; oi aXXoL means the others : e.g.

besides; e.g. evôaipopiÇôpepos viro t&p ttoXltup Kal tu>p àXXojp Çkpwp congratulated by the citizens and the foreigners besides, Plat. G. 473 c ; où yàp qp xbpros ovôh aXXo ovôkv SépSpop for there was no grass, nor any tree either (lit. nor any other tree), X. An. 1, 5, 5. Hence ô aXXos is used in summing up, and may mean in général ; e.g. top àXXop tôp èpop (3Lop my means of livélihood in général, Lys. 24, 5.

210

GREEK GRAMMAR

966. IIoXus with the article generally (though not always) means the greater part, especially in oi iroXXol the multitude, the majority, the rabble, and to tcoXv the greater part. E.g. ol irXeloves the majority, to irXkov the greater part, ol 7rXeîcrrot and to ir\el<TTov the greatest number or part ; 0X1701 few, only a few, ol àXlyoL the aristocracy. a noun has two or more qualifying words, each of them take an article and stand in either attributive position (959), or ail may stand between one article and its noun ; e.g. Karà ttjv 'Attlktiv ti)v iraXa.Làv 4>oivi]v according to the oldAttic dialect, Plat. Crat. 398 d ; rà relxv rà eavrcàv rà paKpâ their OWU long walls, Thuc. 1, 108; irepirovTes els ras aXXas 'Ap/catù/càs TrôXeLs sending to the other Arcadian cities, X. H. 7, 4, 38 ; tt)v vit' 'Aper^s 'Hpa/cXéoos iraiôevaLv the instruction of Heracles by Virtue, X. M. 2,1,34. Occasionally one stands between the article and the noun, while another follows the noun without an article; e.g. ol à7ro tûv èv rfj 'Aalq. irôXewv 'EXXrjvLSœv the men from the Greek cities in Asia, X. H. 4, 3, 15. 968. When an attributive participle (916) with dépendent words qual¬ ifies a substantive with the article, either the participle or the dépendent words may follow the substantive; e.g. tov péovra iroTapov 5lù rrjs -rrôXecos the river which runs through the city, X. H. 5, 2,4 ; tov kfeaT-nKÔT a kLvôwov Tfj ttôXél the danger impending over the city, Dem. 18,176 ; j h râ 'ladpif è-mpovr) yevopévrj the delay which occurred at the Isthmus, Thuc. 2, 18. But such expressions may also take either of the attributive positions (959 a or b). 969. The Greeks commonly said the Euphrates river, tov EvfpàT-^v 7Torapov, etc., rather than the river Euphrates. So sometimes with names of mountains, e.g. to TItiXlov (ôpos) Mt. Pelion ; and seas, e.g. ô 'EXXrjav-ovTos,

967. When

may

With names of cities and islands the article is often It may be omitted also with names of inhabitants, e.g. Q-nfialoi,

à 'lôvLos kôXjtos.

omitted.

"EXXyves (except when opposed to ol /3âp/3apoL), and with winds, e.g. 'EXa0r?/3oXtûj'os (prjvôs), vôtos, f3opéas.

and

names

of months

970. Predicate Position. When an adjective either précédés the article, or follows directly a noun which has an article, it is always a predicate adjective, and is said to be in the predicate position (see 916). E.g. o

àvijp aofôs or aofos ô àvrjp (se. karlv) the man is wise, or wise is the man ; iroXXol ol iravovpyoï. many are the evil-doers ; kcfyrjpépovs ye ràs tvxus KeKTî]peda we possess our fortunes only for a day, Gnom. ; j/iXriv 'éxuv rr)v Kef>aXi]v having his head bare, X. An. 1, 8, 6.

971. The predicate force of such adjectives must often be rendered by periphrasis ; e.g. irT^vàs ôiÛKeLs ràs kXirlôas the hopes you are pursuing are winged, lit. y ou are pursuing hopes (which are) winged, E. frag. 273 ; rjyovpevoL avTovôpuv toûv Çvppâxoov being leaders of allies who were independent, Thuc. 1, 97. So irôaov ayei to aTpaTevpa; how large is the army he is bringing? a

972. A

noun

qualified by

démonstrative

pronoun

(ovtos, o<5e,

POSITION OF THE ARTICLE

kneivos) regularly takes the article, and the predicate position (970). See 943 a-c. E.g. ouros

ô àvyp

this

ô àvyp cities.

mciïl OT

irokeoûv about these

ovtos

(never ô

211

pronoun

ouros

àvrjp)

;

stands in the irepi

tovtoiv

t&v

973. But if an adjective or other qualifying word is added, the démon¬ strative may stand between this and its noun ; e.g. y arevi] aiWy ôôôs this narrow road, X. An. 4, 2, 6 ; tQ> à(t>ikop,kvi>) toûtco pw to this stranger who has come, Plat. Prot. 313 b. See 975 b. 974. "E/caorros,

eKarepos, ap.<fico, and àp4>ôrepos have the predicate position démonstrative, e.g. èKàary y yykpa each day ; but with ëKaaros the article may be omitted. Toioûros, ToaovTos, TOLÔaôe, Tooôoàe, and TyXiKovTos, when they take the article, usually have the first attributive position (959 a). 975. a. A dépendent genitive of the personal pronoun (whether parti¬ tive or not) has the predicate position (970, 998 b), while the genitive of other pronouns (unless it is partitive) has the first attributive position (959 a) ; e.g. y pœv y ttôXls or y ttôXls y pœv our city ; y tovtcov ttôXls these vien's dty ; peTeirépipaTO 'Aarvâyqs ttjv kavrov Ovyarkpa Kai tov iraïôa avrrjs Astyages sent for his (own) daughter and her son, X. C. 1, 3,1. b. But if a qualifying word is added, the personal pronoun may stand between this and the noun; e.g. 17 ooKovoa rjpœv irpbrepov aoxfypoavpri what previously seemed to be our modesty, Thuc. 1, 32 ; 17 iràXcu ypccp 4>vai.s our old nature, Plat. Symp. 189 d. See 973. 976. a. The adjectives aupos, yéaos, and ëaxaros, when they are in the predicate position (970), mean the top (or extremity), the middle, the last, of the thing which their substantives dénoté ; e.g. 17 àyopà péar/ or pkay 17 àyopâ the middle of the market (while 17 pkay àyopà would mean the middle market) ; a/cpa 17 x«p the extremity of the hand. But they may also be used (like the corresponding words in English) with dépendent genitive ; e.g. péar/ rjpépa or pkaov ypépas mid-day ; to 'ânpov tov ôpovs the top of the mountain. b. When no article is used, as in the older poetry, the context must décidé the meaning. Compare summus, médius, extremus, and

ultimus in Latin. 977. lias and

ail and ôXos whole generally have the predicate or oî àvôpes iràvres ail the men ; bXr] ri ttôXls or y] ttôXls 6X77 ail the city. But they are preceded by the article when they dénoté the sum total ; e.g. 17 rràaa It^eXta the whole of Sicily, to oXov ykvos

position

the entire

<rvp.Tras

iràvTes ol àvôpes

; e.g.

race.

The distinction here

was probably no greater than that between ail the city and the whole city in English. We find even oî iràvres àvOpwiroL ail mankind, X. An. 5, 6, 7.

978. Aôros

position ;

a), has the predicate himself, But ô aûrôs àvyp the same man.

intensive pronoun, ipse (988

e.g. aûrôs 6 àvyp

the

man

212

GREEK GRAMMAR Pronominal Article in Attic Greek

the article retains its original démonstrative in the expression ô pév ... o bé the one ... the

979. In Attic prose force chiefly other. E.g.

krôÇevov, oi ô' èa<fcep5ôva>p some of them shot with bows, and others

ot \xh> avrwv

used slings, X. An. 3, 3, 7 ; bel tovs pév elvai ôvarvxfls, tovs ô' evrvxels some must be unfortunate, while others are (must be) fortunate, E. frag. 207;

pév

tûv iroXecov al

TvpavvovvTai,

al ôè ôypoKpaTovvTai, al ôè àpiaTOKpaTovPTaL

governed by tyrants, others by democracies, and others by aristocracies, Plat. Rep. 338 d. 980. Some authorities accent the démonstrative article, 6, y, o'L, ai. some

states

are

See 157.

to p'ev to ôè, rà pév rà ôé, may be used adverpartly. For toOto pév toûto ôé in this sense, see 1010. 982. a. 'O ôé etc., indicating a change of subject, mean and he, but he, but the other, etc., even when no ô pév précédés ; e.g. 'Ivâpœs ' A.0yvaLovst éirpyàyero ■ ol ôè fjXOov Inaros called in the Athenians ; and they came, Thuc.

981. The neuter

bially, partly

1,104.

prépositions these expressions are generally inverted; e.g. èv ôè rois, Plat. Euthyd. 303 C ; ttapà pév to0 £î>Xa, irapà ôè roO iTLÔrjpos, [X.] Rep. A. 2, 11. b. With

7roXXà

pév

983. A few other relies of the démonstrative

meaning of the

found in Attic, chiefly the following : tov Kal tôv this man and that ; to Kal tô this and that ; rà nal rà these and those ; e.g. eôet yàp to Kal to iroLrjaai, Kal to prj Tvoirjaai for we OUght to have done this thing and that, and not to have done the other, Dem. 9, 68. irpo tov (or irpoTov) before this, formerly. Kal tôv or Kal ttjv, before an infinitive ,' e.g. Kal tôv KeXevcrai ôovvai (se. Xéyercu) and (it is said) he commanded him to give (it), X. C. 1, 3, 9. So occasionally r<£ therefore, which is common in Homer. article

are

Pronouns Personal and Intensive Pronouns 984. The nominatives of the

personal

985. The forms èpov, èpot, and èpè are more pov,

usually See 885.

pronouns are

omitted except when emphasis or contrast is required.

emphatic than the enclitics

pol, pè. The latter seldom occur after prépositions, except in irpôs

personal pronouns of the third (364), only oî and the plural forms in acj)986. Of the

oî, etc. used in Attic

person, ov, are

pe.

PERSONAL AND INTENSIVE PRONOUNS

213

There they are generally indirect reflexives, that is, in a dépendent clause (or joined with an infinitive or participle in the leading clause) they refer to the subject of the leading verb. E.g. prose.

eXe£cw ôrt irkpftLt (r4>âs à 'Iv8û>v (3a<ri.\evs they said that the king of the Hindus had Sent them, X. C. 2, 4, 7 ; kirpta^ebovro kyKXppaTa irot.obp.evoi, oircos cr 4>ia lv oti [j.eylatrj irpStpaars etg tov iroXepeîv they sent embassies, making charges, that

they might have the strongest possible ground for

war,

Thuc. 1, 126

;

Xkyœv oti irXeiovs en ai XoLirai eicri vrjes xP17crtA"5't (t4>L<tlv (= kavToîs) î) rois iroXepLoLs saying that they themselves had more seaworthy ships remaining than the enemy,

Thuc. 7, 72 ; kvravOa Xkyerai 'AirôXXaov knbelpai Mapabav kpiÇovrâ oi irepi croulas here Apollo is said to have flayed Marsyas, having beaten him in a contest (with himself, ol) in skill, X. An. 1, 2, 8. vLKyaas

For the restricted use of these pronouns in Attic Greek, see also 367. For acpty, vtv, and p,Lv, see 370 and 371.

987. In Homer and Herodotus, and when they occur in the Attic poets, ail these pronouns are generally personal pronouns,

though sometimes (direct

ê/c

indirect) reflexives. E.g.

yâp orftecov (= avrcov) <frpkvas eïXero IlaXXàs 'Adrjvv for Pallas Athena bereft them of their senses, II. 18, 311 ; TOV Kpcov àiro eo (= kavrov) irkpire dvpa'Çe he sent the ram forth from himself through the door, Od. 9, 461 ; aùrka 8k oi (— aurai) euôovrc kirkart) ôveipos and soon a dream came to him in his sleep, Hdt. 1, 34; ovôapolm TÛV vvv aifreas irept.oi.Ke6vTwv eiai ôpôyXaicrcroi

they have not the

tlvl

same

Tpôircp Oaveïv cr^e

speech as any of their présent neighbors, Hdt. 1, 57 ; in what manner do you say she died? S. Tr. 878.

988. Aûtos has three

In ail its

uses :

intensive adjectival himself, herself, itself, themselves (like Lat. ipse). E.g. a.

cases

it may be an

pronoun,

(TTpaTijyôs the général himself', kir' abrots toîs aiyiaXoîs on the very coasts, Thuc. 1, 7 ; ùiro X6<f>ov avrov right under the crest, II. 13, 615 ; abri] ÔLKaioabvri pure justice ; to StKaLov avTo justice in the abstract.

aiiros 6

b. Aûtos in ail its cases,

the

same

(idem). E.g.

when preceded by the article,

means

àvrip the same maw, tov abrov irôXepov the same war ; rabrà the things (49), to be distinguished from raOra these things.

ô abros

The

oblique

of aûrôs are the ordinary personal him, her, it, them. E.g.

cases

of the third person,

pronouns

abrov àirkôeL^e he appointed him as général. See four other ples in X. An. 1, 1, 2 and 3.

(Trparriyov

may

have

exam¬

always emphatic, and even the oblique intensive meaning if placed in an emphatic position.

The nominative of abros is cases

same

214

GREEK GRAMMAR

989. A pronoun with which avrôs intensive agréés is often omitted ; ravra èiroLeïre avroi (se. ipeîs) yOU did this yourselves ; irXevarèov eis t au¬ ras avroîs èp/3âai.v (se. vpïv) you must sail, embarking on these ships in pere.g.

son,

Dem. 4, 16. Hence, used absolutely by slave

pupil, it

may mean

master, e.g. aûros è(f>y (ipse dixit) the master said it. So in the

sense

by oneself ; e.g. avrol yâp ècrpev we are ail alone by ourselves, Ar. Ach. 504. For the meaning and ail with the dative, see 1187. 990. Avrôs with an ordinal numéral. (429) may designate a person as making one of a given number; e.g. ypèd-ri irpeafièvres ôèKaros avrôs he was chosen ambassador with nine others, X. H. 2, 2, 17 ; perairepfapevot pe irèptttov avrôv sending for me and four others, Plat. Ap. 32 c (443). 991. The oblique cases of avrôs are often used where the indirect reflexives (986) might stand, and sometimes even where the direct reflexives (993) would be allowed; e.g. àirXâis ryv èavrov yvtopyv àire<t>aLvero HœKparys irpos rovs ôpiXovpras abrQ> Socrates used to déclaré his own opinion plainly to those who associated with him, X. M. 4, 7, 1, where oZ might have been USed; but in M. 1, 2, 3, we have èXiriÇeiv èirotei roùs avvÔiarpLfiovras kavrû he inspired hope in those who associated with him. The union of an intensive and a personal pronoun in avrôs explains this freedom of usage. 992. In Homer avrôs may mean same without the article; e.g. 'Ltttvol eacrt irapotrepai. aï ro irâpos irep the same mares are leading that led before, II. 23, 480. Generally avrôs emphasizes the chief person or thing in contrast to a subordinate person or thing ; e.g. avrûp Kal reneuv themselves and their children, II. 3, 301. 5' aùrai

Reflexive Pronouns 993. The reflexive pronouns

(377) refer to the subject of the Sometimes in a dépendent clause they refer to the subject of the leading verb — that is, they are indirect reflexives (986). E.g. yvœdi aeavrôv know thyself ; ôLôojpL croi kpavrôv ôovkov I give myself to you as clause in which they stand.

a slave, X. C. 4, 6, 2 ; oi rfrrcopevoL èavrovs re Kal rà eavrœv rcàvra àirofiàWovcnv the vanquished lose themselves as well as ail that belongs to them, X. C. 3, 3, 45; eireiaev 'AOrjvatovs èavrov Karâyeiv he persuaded the Athenians to restore him (from exile), Thuc. 1, 111.

994. Occasionally a reflexive refers to some emphatic word which is

neither the leading nor a dépendent subject; e.g. clitô cravroD 'yœ ae ôiôâ£« I will teach you from your own case (from yourself), Ar. N. 385. In fact, these pronouns correspond almost exactly in their use to the English re¬ flexives

myself, thyself, himself, etc.

995. The third person of the reflexive is sometimes used for the first or second; e.g. ôeî ypâs èpèadai èavrovs we must ask ourselves, Plat. Ph. 78 b;

REFLEXIVE AND POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS où yàp pôvov rinîv irapelvae ovk k£rjv, allowed to be présent (at their our own

homes, Lys. 12, 33.

215

àXX' ovôk rrap' avrols elvai SO far from being we could not even be présent in

meetings),

996. The reflexive is sometimes used for the reciprocal (383); rjp.1v avrols ôiaXe^ôpeda. we will discourse with one another (i.e. among ourselves), Dem.

48, 6.

997. A reflexive may be strengthened by a preceding aùrôs ; e.g. olôs re avros aurai ftorjdeîv able (himself) to help himself, Plat. G. 483 b ; to y ly vœu kllv avrov èavTÔv for one (himself) to know himself, Plat. Ch. 165 b. For the personal pronouns où, 61, etc. as direct and indirect reflexives,

see

986 and 987.

Possessive Pronouns a. The possessive pronouns (380) are generally équivalent possessive genitive (1082 a) of the personal pronouns. Thus irarrip = ô irar-qp crov, your father.

998. to the

cros

For the article with possessives, see 944 a. b. For kpos and aôs here the enclitic forms pod (not kpov) and croO may be used ; rjpœv and vpœv for rjpkrepos and vpérepos are less

fréquent. These genitives have the predicate position (975). 999. The possessive is occasionally équivalent to the objective genitive of the personal pronoun; e.g. y kprj evvoia, which commonly means my good-will (towards others), may mean good-wïll (felt) to me ; e.g. evvota yàp èpœ rfj afj for I shall speak out of good-will to you, Plat. G. 486 a ; krrl rfj vperépç. wapaKeXevaeL for your exhortation, to exhort you, Plat. Ap. 36 d. See 1082 c. 1000. S</>érepos their, and (poetic) os his, her, its, are regularly reflexive (direct or indirect). 1001. An adjective or an appositive in the genitive may refer to the genitive implied in a possessive; e.g. ràpà ôvarrjvov ko.ko the woes of me, unhappy one, S. O. C. 344 ; rrjv vperkpav tûv <to4>lcttS>v texvyv the art of you Sophists, Plat. H. Maj. 281 d. See 902.

1002. By the possessive pronouns and the possessive genitive, the

words my father can be expressed in Greek in five forms : à kpos irarrjp, ô rrarrjp ô kpos, rrarrjp o kpos, ô rrarrjp pov, and (after another Word) pov ô irarrjp (e.g. 'é<t>Tj pov ô irarrjp). So ô vos irarrjp, etc. The article is necessary in ail these forms. See 944 a.

1003.

Our own, your own (plural), and their own are expressed by

rjpkrepos, vpérepos, and acjrkrepos, USUally strengthened by avrœv (988 a) in agreement with the rjpûv, vpwv, or a^œv implied in the possessive ; e.g. rov rjp'erepov avrcov irarkpa OUr own father ; rfj vperepa avrœv pijrpL to your own mother ; rovs a4>erkpovs avrœv iraîSas their own children. For the third person plural kavrœv can be used ; e.g. rovs kavrœv iraïôas more common than

GREEK GRAMMAR

216 roùs <T<t>erepovs avrciv we

iralôas (also crcficov

seldom find ypGiv (or vpGiv)

avrcov

iraiôas without

th6 article) ; but

avrœv.

b. Expressions like tov 'epov avrov irarépa for rov èpavrov irarépa, etc., with singular possessives, are poetic. In prose the genitive of the reflexive (.'epavTod, aeavTov, or kavrod), in the attributive position (959), is the regular form ; e.g. pereirépfaroryv èavrov dvyarépa he sent for his (own) daughter, X. C. 1, 3, 1.

Démonstrative Pronouns

this, that and oôe this generally refer to what is near place, time, or thought ; 'enelvos that refers to what is more remote. They may be used as substantives or adjectives. 1004. Oîitos

ovros and ôôe, both of which correspond this, must be learned by practice. In the historians oSros (with tolovtos, Toaovros, and ovTGJs) frequently refers to a speech just made, while oôe (with Toioaôe, rooôaôe, and <S5e) refers to one about to be made; e.g. râôe elirev he spoke as follows, but ravra elirev thus he spoke or that is what he said (said after the speech) : see Thuc. 1, 72, and 79, 85, and 87. In the orators ovros refers to one's opponent. Elsewhere ovros (especially in the neuter) often refers to something that follows; e.g. pâov yàp rovruv

1005. The distinction between

our

irpoeipripévGJv paOpoeL for you will more

easily understand it when this (the

following) is premised, Plat. Rep. 510 b. So 'exelvos and its derivatives may refer to what follows as being unfamiliar and therefore remote until it has been presented ; e.g. iro\v av ÔLKcuÔTepov eneivois rots ypâppacnv t) tovtols -iruTTevoiTe it would be much fairer for you to trust these documents (to be cited) than the others (already presented), Lys. 16, 7. Here the common translation of eneivos former, ovros latter, would be wholly wrong. So eneWev e'Lcreode, on, etc. you will realize (it) from the following circumstance, viz. that, etc., Dem. 45, 48. Conversely, oôe may sometimes refer to what pré¬ cédés ; e.g. olôe pev rQ 'Iovtu> ko\itu> ôpiÇopevoi the foregoing are bounded by the Ionian gulf, Thuc. 7, 57. 1006. Ovros is sometimes exclamatory, e.g. what are you doing? Ar. R. 198.

ovros,

ri iroieîs you there!

English those who were présent) is not expressed in Greek. Here a participle with the article is generally used ; e.g. elôov tous 7rapôvras. If a démonstrative is used (oï iraprjoav rovrovs elôov I saw these men who were présent), it has spécial emphasis (1029). A rela¬ tive with omitted antécédent sometimes expresses the sense required; e.g. elôov ods 'éXapev I saw (those) whom he took (1026). 1007. The unemphatic démonstrative which is often used in

the antécédent of

relative (7 saw

especially oôe, may call attention to the approach of an object, in the sense of here or there -, oôe yàp ôy Çia&iXevs xwpas for here now is the king of the land, S. Ant. 155; aœya pev 1008. The démonstratives,

presence or

DEMONSTRATIVES AND INTERROGATIVES

217

kv kôXttols

Karéxei rôôe yaîa nxàrœvos here lies Plato's body, held in the lap of Earth, Speusippus ; for vrjes kKeïvat (Thuc. 1, 51) see 943 b. In colloquial language oôe is often équivalent to the first personal pronoun (=1 or your humble servant). 1009. Ovros sometimes repeats a preceding description for emphasis single Word ; e.g. o yàp ro airéppa Trapaoxùv, ovros rwv <frvvrœv clltlos for he who supplied the seed — he is responsible for the harvest, Dem. 18, 159. in

1010. ToOto

nearly in the

p.ev

tovto

first

secondly, partly

partly, is used

pkv ro Sk (981), especially by Herodotus (1059). For ovroai, b8L, eKeivocri, ovtomtL, Ù8L, etc., see 392. sense

...

Interrogative Pronoun 1011. The

stantive

interrogative ris who? what? may be either subadjective; e.g. rivas eïôov whom did I see? or rivas

âvôpas eïôov what

men

did I see?

1012. Tls may

be used both in direct and in indirect questions ; ri fiovXerai; what does he want ? épura ri fiovheade he asks what you want. In indirect questions the relative forms oans, biroïos, oivcxjos are more common than ris, iroîos, ttoctos ; e.g. épura o ri {3ov\ea6e (1601). e.g.

1013. The article may be used with an interrogative ; e.g. âye 8r/ raxéus £wàpiraaov come now, catch this quickly ; ro ri catch what? Ar. Nub. 775 ;

tovtl

rôvôe riva KaXeis rbv

one? Plat.

1014. The 7TOLOS,

5rjp.L0vpyôv ; what do

Rep. 596 same

etc. (408).

y OU

call this artist?

rov

iroïov ;

which

principles apply to the pronominal adjectives irbaos,

Indefinite Pronoun 1015. a. The indefinite ris (enclitic) generally means some, any, and may be either substantive or adjective; e.g. rovro Àéyei tls

somebody

says this, avdpuirbs tls some man. b. It is sometimes nearly équivalent to

the English a or an; certain man, or I saw a man ; ecrrt man named Socrates, Plat. Ap. 18 b. 1016. Tis sometimes implies that the word to which it is joined is not to be taken in its strict meaning ; e.g. KXéirrys tls Lvaire^avrat he now turns out to be a sort of thief, Plat. Rep. 334 a; péyas tls rather large; rpLânovra TLvas àireKTeLvav they killed some thirty men, Thuc. 8, 73. So often with the adverbial ri (1059) ; e.g. ax^ov tl very nearly, e.g.

eîôov avdpurrov riva I tls hcoxparys there is a

Thuc. 3, 68.

saw a

218

GREEK GRAMMAR

1017. Occasionally ris means everyone, like

well his afraid, Aesch. Cho. 56.

dy^àadœ let everyone sharpen is

one

1018. In e.g. are

olovraL

spear,

iras ns;

e.g. ev p'ev ris b6pv

II. 2, 382 ; 4>o/3eÏTaL bk

ris every¬

half-ironical way, rîs, ri may mean something important',

elva.i,

ovres

worth nothing, Plat.

ovôevos a&oi they think they are something, when they Ap. 41 e; xkyeiv tl to say something (worth while),

opposed to ovbev XéyeLv to talk nonsense.

Relative Pronouns 1019. A relative agréés

with its antécédent in gender and

num-

ber ; but its case dépends on the construction of the clause in which it stands. E.g. eibov

tous

the

avbpas ol -qXQov I Saw the men whom you saw went away.

who Came ; ol avbpes oOs elôes àirfjXdov

men

1020. The relative follows the person of the antécédent; e.g. vpeîs oî ttoieîte you who do this; kyco ôs tovto èiroLr]aa i, the one who did this; ovtos crû, MeveXaov elirov, ôs ireirvpyœoaL dpàaeL, yOU there, MenelauS I

tovto

mean,

who exalt yourself in boldness, E. Or. 1567. For this the construc¬ used.

tion of 1562 may be

1021. a. A relative referring to several antécédents follows the rule given for predicate adjectives (920) ; e.g. irepi iroXkpov /cai eippvrjs, a peyiaTyv exet bvvap.Lv 'ev rai /3ta> rœv àvdpœirœv about war and peace, which have a very great influence in the lives of men, Isoc. 8,2 ; àiraXXayevres TroXépw nai klvôvvlov Kal rapaxps, els fj v vvv irpbs àXXpXovs KadeaTapev freed from wars, dangers, and confusion, in which we are now involved with one another, Isoc. 8, 20. b. The relative may be plural if it refers to a collective noun (890) ; e.g. irXydeL olirep ÔLKàaovaLv to the multitude who are to judge, Plat. Phdr. 260 a. c. On the other hand, ôcttls whoever may have a plural antécédent; e.g. iravra 6 tl fiovxovtal everything, whatsoever they want. 1022. A neuter relative may refer to a masculine or féminine anté¬ cédent denoting a thing ; e.g. ôià ttjv irXeoveÇLav, ô Tràaa <fivais ôlûkelv iré<pvKev for gain, which every nature naturally follows, Plat. Rep. 359 c. See 921. 1023.

In Homer the

original démonstrative force of ôs is still

some-

times apparent (cf. 933) ; e.g. ôs yàp bevraros fjX9ev for he came second, Od. 1, 286; ô yàp y'epas écrri davovTccv for this is the right of the dead, II. 23, 9. b. A few similar expressions occur in Attic prose, especially the Platonic

(where fj is imperfect of ypt say). So «ai ôs and he, Kal ol and they, and (in Hdt.) ôs Kal ôs this man and that. (Cf. tov Kal tôv, 983.) So also ôs p'ev ôs be, in the oblique cases, are occasionally used for 6 pév

rj b' ôs said he .

ô be ; e.g. TroXeLs 'EXXrjj'tôas, as pev àvaLpœv, els as ôè tov s (pvyàbas Karaycov

for cities in Greece — he is destroying exiles, Dem. 18, 71. as

some,

into others bringing back their

RELATIVE PRONOUNS

219

1024.

a. In the epic and lyric poets rè — originally a sign of parataxis coordination — is often appended to relative words without affecting their meaning ; e.g. ovk àîeis à ré 4>ygl deâ; dost thou not hear what the goddess says? II. 15, 130. Sometimes it makes the relative more indefinite, cf. Lat. quicumque. or

b. But oïôs re in Attic Greek means able, capable, like ôvvarôs. Cf. ov yàp rjv cLpa o'ia apôetp it was not the proper seasonfor watering, X. An. 2, 3,13, and t'l oîol re 'écreade yplv Gvpivpâ^aL what will you be able to do to help us? X. An. 5, 4, 9, rè having had originally a

generic force.

1025. Préposition omitted. When the relative and its antécédent would

properly have the same préposition, it is usually expressed only with the antécédent; e.g. âxô Trjs clvtt}s àyvotas tjgttep 7roXXà irpoteade tûv kolvuv by the same want of sense by which (for â</>' rjcnrep) you sacrifice many of your public interests, Dem. 18, 134. Omission

1026. The antécédent of

of the

Antécédent

relative may be omitted when it can easily be supplied from the context, especially if it is indefinite a

(1438). E.g.

eXaftev â kfSovXero he took what he wanted ; 'éireidev ôitôgovs ebvvaro he persuaded as many as he could ; à py oïôa ovôè oïopaL eièévai what I do not know I do not even think I know, Plat. Ap. 21 d; èyù Kal uv èyù Kparû pevovpev irapà aoi I and those whom I control will remain with you, X. C. 5, 1, 26.

1027. In such cases it is a mistake to say that raOra, é/ceîwt, etc. are understood ; see 1029. The relative clause here really becomes a substantive, and contains its antécédent within itself. Such a relative

clause, as substantive, may even have the article; e.g. 'éxovga t^v errumplav ttjv tov ô Igtlv having the name of the absolutely existent (of the "what is"), Plat. Ph. 92d; 'enelvov ôpéyeraL tov ô 6gtlv 'Lgov they aim at that absolute equality (at the " what is equal"), ibid. 75 b; ™ opiKpQ> pépec, tÇ> ô fjpxe èv aùrtS through the small element which was shown to be the ruling power within him (the "what ruled"), Plat. Rep. 442 c. Here it must not be thought that tov and tû are antécédents, or pronouns at ail. 1028. The following expressions belong here: — 'éotiv &v, Igtiv ois, Igtlv ous some (894; in the nominative bIgIv o'L is more common than Igtlv o'L, cf. Lat. sunt qui = aliqui); €gtlv oltlvés (especially in questions) ; 'cvlol (from evL eveGTL or eveLGL, and o't) some', èvioTe (evL and ore) sometimes', eg t lv ov somewhere; Igtlv y in some way; Igtlv oit us somehow. Other copulative verbs (897) are sometimes used in this way ; e.g. cfraveÎTaL â tûv îipeTepuv ovk èXàGoto rjpîv irpÔGeLGL just as many of your allies, so it will turn oui, will join us, Thuc. 1, 40. 1029. When a clause containing a relative with omitted antécédent précédés the leading clause, the latter often contains a démonstrative a

—

GREEK GRAMMAR

220

referring back with emphasis to the omitted antécédent ; e.g. â k^ovXero ravra 'é\a(3ev what he wanted, that he took, entirely différent from ravra à èfiovXero tXafiev he took these (definite) things, which he wanted; ravr' oaa' 'é/jcadov I have (only) that which I have learned, Chrysippus ; â tvoielv aiaxpov, ravra vopiÇe ppôè Xkyeiv elvai KaXov what it ÎS base to do, this deem not good even to say, Isoc. 1,15 (here ravra is not the antécédent of à, indefinite and is not expressed). See 1007.

which is

Assimilation and

Attraction

relative would naturally be in the accusative as object of a verb, it is generally assimilated to the case of its antécédent if this is a genitive or dative. E.g. èK tGjv TÔXewv &v ex« from the cities which he holds (for as <=X60 ; rois àyadols ois 'éxopev with the good things which we have (for à 'éxopev) ; â^ot rfjs eXevdepLas rjs KtKrrjaOe worthy of the freedom which y ou possess, X. An. 1,7,3 ; rq) rjye/iôvL irLarevaopev c3 àv KOpos ôiôœ if we shall tTUSt the guide whom Cyrus may give us, X. An. 1, 3, 16. This assimilation is also called 1030. When a

the

attraction.

an antécédent is omitted which (if expressed) would have genitive or dative, the assimilation still takes place ; and a prépo¬ sition which would have belonged to the antécédent passes over to the relative; e.g. kôrjXœae rovro ois 'éirparre he showed this by what he did (like èKeivoLs a) ; avv ois pâXLara <pLXeîs with those men who'ïïi you most love (aille 'eneivois ots), X. An. 1, 9, 25 ; àpeXrjaas Siv pe ôet irpârreiv having neglected what (eneLvaiv a) I OUght to do, X. C. 5, 1, 8 ; ois yvrvxVKeaan kv Aevurpois ov perptœs kK.kxpvpr0 they had not used moderately the successes which ihey had gained at Leuctra (rois evrvxvpaaiv â yvrvxyKeaav, see 1052), Dem. 18, 18. 1032. A relative is seldom assimilated from any other construction than that of the object accusative, or into any other case than the genitive or dative. Yet exceptions OCCUr; e.g. nrap' (3oydeIs ovk àiroXrupei xàpw V°u will get no thanks from those whom (irap' kneLvorv ois) you help, Aeschin. 2,117. Even the nominative is (very rarely) assimilated; e.g. fiXà-n-readai à4>' &v fipïv TrapeaKevaaraL to be injured as a resuit of our préparations (like kneLvcov a), Thuc. 7, 67. 1033. A like assimilation takes place in relative adverbs; e.g. bieKoptÇovro evdùs 66ev vireÇkdevro iraïôas Kai ywoluas they immediately brought over their children and women from the places to which they had carried them for safety (where odev from which stands for kKeîOev ol from the places whither), Thuc. 1, 89.

1031. When

been

àir'

1034. The antécédent occasionally is assimilated to the case relative, when this immediately follows; e.g. 'éXeyov on irâvrœv &v ireirpayores elev they said that they had carried out everything which

of the bkovrai

(iràvra &v)

RELATIVE PRONOUNS

221

they needed, X. H. 1, 4, 2 ; rgv ovcrLav gv KareXiive où irXeLovos ài;La kerrlv g rerrâkclI bkna TaXâprwp the estate which he left is not worth more tlnan fourteen talents, Lys. 19, 47 ; irAovrov ô' ôv pev Scout Oeoi irapayLyveraL epirebos Wealth which the gods give abides steadfast, Solon 12, 9. Cf. urbem quam statuo vestra est, Verg. Aen. 1, 573. This inverted assimilation takes place in ovôels offres où everybody, in which ovôeLs follows the case of the relative; e.g. ovôevi orœ ovk. àirokpevôpevos (for ovôeLs 'ecrriv 6ru>) replying to everybody, Plat. Men. 70 c. puv

1035. A peculiar assimilation occurs in certain expressions with olos uoi âvôpL pleasing a man lïke you (for roiovrco olos ffb ), X. M. 2, 9,3 ; irpos avôpas roXpgpovs olovs Kal ' AdgvaLovs against bold men like the Athenians, Thuc. 7, 21 ; ôvros irâyov olov ôeivorârov there being a most awful frost (for rotovrov olos ôtivoraros), Plat. Symp. 220 b; gp4>Le<rpevu>v Oavpaffrà ocra clad in a marvelous quantity of wraps (for davpaurov eurtv ocra and ôffos ; e.g. xaPLf°iu&ov olcp

(1068), Plat. Symp. 220 b.

1036. The antécédent is often attracted into the relative

and agréés pi] àcfreXgffOe

with the relative. E.g.

vpcov avrcov gv

rob

ôià

âei

iravros

rov

clause,

xpôvov ôôtjav Kenrgcrde KaXgv do not

yourselves of the good réputation which (what good réputation) you have always had through ail time (for rgv naXgv ôôÇav gv neurgffde), Dem. 20, 142. The article is sometimes allowed even here; e.g. âs où Xéyets ràs ffuefeis, pg crKeppara g rcov paôLcos àiroKrivvvvnov as for the con¬ sidérations you urge, I rather suspect they may prove to be (1349) the considérations of persons who so rashly Jcill, Plat. Crito 48 c.

1037. This attraction may be joined with assimilation (1030)

;

e.g.

àpadécrraroL 'terre &v kyœ ol8a 'lïAAgvixtv you are the most ignorant of the Greelcs whom I know (for rcov 'EXXgvcov ovs olda), Thuc. 6, 40 ; rjs ro irpœrov eirxe ywaiKos

from the wife whom he married first, Dem. 57, 37

ôvvâpei he marched with the force which he had (for X. H. 4, 1, 23. Relative

uvv

; erropevero uvv g

rfj ôwâpet

elxe

eïxev),

Exclamations

1038. Olos, oaos, and <bs are used in exclamations ; e.g. oaa irphypara exeis how much trouble you have! X. C. 1,3,4; chs aarelos how witty! oîa iroLelre how you are behaving! Plat. Ph. 117 d. Relative

1039. A relative is seldom sentence.

not repeated

repeated in

a new case

in the

same

Either it is omitted and understood in the latter part

of the sentence, or a

place. E.g.

personal

démonstrative

pronoun

takes its

GREEK GRAMMAR

222 tKtlvoi vw

To'ivvv, ois ovk txa-pifovO' oi Xkyovres oùô' èipLXovv aùroùs cùairep those men, then, whom the orators did not try to gratify,

ùpâs ovroi

and whom

they did not love as these now love you (lit. and they did not love them as etc.), Dem. 3, 24. Here avroù s is used to avoid repeating the a new case, oiïs. 'Apiaîos <5è, ôv ryiels ydkXopev pacnXéa KaOurravai, Kai eôœKapev Kai èXâ/3opev -mara and Ariaeus, whom we wished to make king, (to whom) we gave and (from whom) we received pledges, etc., 3, 2, 5 ; rL avrov o'Leade ireiroLyKbai irepi de oùôeis aùrœ ovvoiôev, aùros povos ôlexéLpiÇev, ôs â ôl' èréptvv èirpàxdy Kai où x^er-ois rjv irepl toùtlov irvÔe-

relative in

and X. An. àXX'

adai, èrôXpriae rerrapoL

Kai e'tKoai. pvaùs roùs aùrov

8vyarpi.ôovs ^rjpLÔiaac

done (in matters) about which nobody shares he managed ail alone, seeing that in matters which were transacted through other persons, and about which it was easy to learn the facts, he has gone so far as to cause a loss of four and twenty minas to his own grandchildren? Lys. 32, 27. Here both the omission and the substitution of a démonstrative pronoun are illustrated.

what do you suppose he has his knowledge, but (which)

THE CASES 1040. The Greek is

descended from a language which

had eighl cases:

ablative, a locative, and an instrumentai, besides the five found in Greek. In form these cases reappear in a few words in Greek. In syntax the functions of the ablative were absorbed by the genitive ; those of the instrumental (including the notion of accompaniment) and of the loca¬ tive, by the dative. an

NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE

nominative is used chiefly as the subject of a finite (882), or in the predicate after verbs signifying to he etc. in agreement with the subject (896). 1042. The vocative, with or without &, is used in addressing 1041. The

verb

person or

thing;

e.g. co

avôpes 'AdyvaîoL men of Athens! ànoveis,

Alax'^V 1 do you hear, Aeschines?

exclamations, and even in expressions, when characterization is intended ; e.g. &poi kyù ô«À6s is me, wretch that I am! <S ttôXls, wôXls O my city! Xfjpos what nonsense!

1043. The nominative is sometimes used in

other woe

1124.

YLpokvt) eKpaive

Procne, corne out! Ar. Av. 665. For the

genitive, see

ACCUSATIVE 1044. The primary purpose of the accusative is to dénoté the direct object of a verb, as opposed to the remoter or indirect denoted by the dative (880). It thus bears the same relation to or

nearer

object

verb

ACCUSATIVE

223

that the objective genitive (1082 c) bears to a noun. The object denoted by the accusative may be the external object of the action of a transitive

verb, or the internai (cognate) object which is often implied in the meaning of even an intransitive verb. But the accusative has also assumed other functions, as will be seen, which cannot be brought under this or any other single category.

Accusative of Direct

(External) Object

1045. The direct in the

object of the action of a transitive verb is put e.g. tovto aùÇei ppâs this préserves us; tclvtcl do these things.

accusative;

iroiovpiev we

1046. Many verbs which

objective

case,

1160, 1183.

take either

are

transitive in

genitive

or a

English, and

dative in Greek.

govern

the

See 1099,

1047. Many verbs which are transitive in Greek are intransitive in English; e.g. opovpai toùs deovs I will swear by the gods; navras 'éXadev he escaped the notice of ail ; alaxvverat. rov narépa hefeels shame before hisfather ; aLyç. (or <7(xo7ra) rt he keeps silent about something. 1048. Verbal adjectives and even verbal nouns occasionally take an object accusative instead of the regular objective genitive (1142, 1082 c), e.g. èTncrTTjpoves f/aav rà irpoayKovra they were acquainted with what was proper, X. C. 3, 3, 9; rà peréœpa <hpovTL<jrr)s a student of celestial matters (like 4>povrl^cov), Plat. Ap. 18 b; x°às npoiropTros escorting libations (like irpoirép-Trova-a), Aesch. Ch. 23. Cf. 1056.

Cognate Accusative (Internai Object) 1049.

Any verb whose meaning permits it

may take an accusa¬ This accusative repeats the idea already contained in the verb, and may foliow intransitive as well

tive of kindred signification.

transitive verbs.

nacras

E.g.

ySovàs ybecrdai to enjoy ail pleasures, Plat. Phil. 63

a ; rivtvxycrav tovto

they enjoyed this good fortune, X. An. 6, 3, 6. So neaeiv 7rTÙ>p.ara to suffer (to fall) falls, Aesch. Pr. 919; voaov voaeïv or vocrov àcrdeveïv Or vbaov Kap.veiv to suffer with a disease ; àpapTypa àpapraveiv to commit an error (to sin a sin) ; SovXeLav ôovXevtiv to be subject to slavery ; àpxyv apx&-v to hold an office ; àyûva àyccvlffiadai to contend in a trial or in the games ; ypafpyv ypàcpeaOaL to bring an indictment ; ypa<t>yv ôiÛKeiv to prosecute an indictment ; StKyv o<t>\eiv to lose a lawsuit ; vUyv vlkôv to gain a victory ; pàxw vlkSlv to win a battle ; iropirr/v n-kpireiv to form or conduct a procession ; nXyyyv Tvirreiv to strike a blow ; QyKOov è^oôovs they went out on expéditions, X. H. 1, 2, 17. to

evtvxypa.

GREEK GRAMMAR

224

1050. It will be seen that this Greek than in English. It includes

construction is far more extensive in not only accusatives of kindred forma¬

to gain a victory, but also those of merely kindred meaning, e.g. pàxyv vikS.v to win a battle. Cf. ripwptav noXv x<*Xe■wurepav fj olav kpè kireKTovare vengeance far more severe than that which you have inflicted by killing me, Plat. Ap. 39 c. The accusative may the meaning of the verb to one of many applications ; e.g. 'OXûpirca vlkRv

tion and meaning, e.g. vLktjv vlkSLp

also limit

to gain an Olympic victory, Thuc. 1, 126 ; èanav yàpovs to give a wedding feast, Ar. Av. 132 ; f^Lo-pa vikS. he carries a decree (gains a victory with a decree), Aeschin. 3, 68; Boyôpôpia ivepireiv to celebrate the Boedromia by a

procession, Dem. 3, 31. So also (in poetry) fialveiv (or èXdeîv) irôôa to take a step or to set foot; see E. Aie. 1153. For the cognate accusative becoming the subject of a passive verb, see

1241.

1051. The cognate

accusative

may

foliow adjectives or even

substantives. E.g. Kami lïâcrav Kantav bad in every kind of badness, Plat. ràs peyio-ras ôovXetas a slave to the direst slavery, ibid.

Rep. 490 d; ôoOXos 579 d. 1052. A neuter adjective sometimes represents a cognate accu¬ sative, its noun being implied in the verb. E.g. peyàXa àpapràve iv (se. àpapr^para) to commit great faults ; ravrà XvTreiadcu Kal ravrà xo-tpav to have the same griefs and the same joys, Dem. 18, 292. So tL xp1'propeu Tovrœ (— riva xp^clv xpvaoPaL) what use shall I make of this? and ovôèv xprprop^'■ tovtu) I shall make no use of this (1183). So Xpginpos ovôév good for nothing (1051). See 1059. 1053. a. Here belongs the accusative of effect ; this expresses a resuit beyond the action of the verb, which is efïected by that action. E.g.

to negotiate a peace (as ambassadors, irpéafieLs), Dem. 19, irpea^eLav to go on an embassy ; (Xkos ovrâaaL to wound with a thrust, II. 5, 361 (lit. thrust a wound). Cf. the English breaking a hole, as opposed to breaking a stick. See 1079. b. So after verbs of looking; e.g. "Ap-rj ôeôopKévai. to look war (Ares), cf. Aesch. Sev. 53.; 77 fouX-rj 'éflXefe vâirv the Council looked mustard, Ar. Eq. 631. This idiom, occurring first in poetry, is fréquent in colloquial speech. 1054. For verbs which take a cognate accusative and an ordinary object accusative at the same time, see 1074. 1055. Connected with the cognate accusative is the accusative used with verbs of motion to express the particular ground over which the motion passes; e.g. ôôôv levai. (eXQelv, iropeveadai., etc.) to go over a road; opos Karafiaiveiv to descend a mountain ; irXeïv doXarrav to sail the sea. These verbs thus acquire a transitive meaning. Cf. 1047.

irpeafievap r-qv elprjvyv

134 ; but irpea(3eveiv

ACCUSATIVE Accusative of Spécification

—

225

Adverbial Accusative

1056. The accusative of spécification may be joined with a verb, adjective, noun, or even a whole sentence, to dénoté a part, character, or quality to which the expression refers. E.g. ra ôppar' et you are blind in your eyes, S. O. T. 371 ; koXos to elbos beautiful in form ; airtcpoi to irXrjdos infinité in number ; bUaLos tov Tpo-n-ov just in his character ; beivol paxv mighty in battle ; napvco tt]v KerpaX-qv I hâve a pain in my head ; t6s 4>pkvas vyLaivecv to be sound in mind ; ôta</>épei tt)v 4>v<tlv he differs in nature', iroTapos, Kvbvos ôvopa, evpos bvo irXkdpcov a river, Cydnus by name, of two plethra in breadth, X. An. 1, 2, 23 ; "EAÀrçpés ettrt to ykvos they are Greeks by race', ykveade ri]v biàvoLav pi] kv tco biKaoTripLcp, 6XX' kv tco OeaTpcp imagine yourselves (become in thought) not in court, but in the theatre, Aeschin. 3,153 ; kirLo-Taadk (pe) ov pbvov t6

rvcjiXàs

peyâXa aXXà Kai rà not

p lkp

à irecptbpevov àel àiro decov ôppâada t yOU know that

only in great things but C. 1, 5, 14.

even

in -small I try to begin with the gods,

1057. This is sometimes called the accusative by synecdoche, or the limiting accusative. It most frequently dénotés a part ; but it may refer to any circumstance to which the meaning of the expression is restricted. This construction sometimes resembles that of 1240, with which it must not be confounded. For the dative of respect, see 1182. 1058. Accusative of the Whole and of the Part. In poetry, especially common to find an accusative denoting a person with an-

Homer, it is

other accusative denoting the part especially affected. Both are direct objects of the verb, but when the construction becomes passive the per¬ son becomes the subject, the part remains as an accusative of spécifica¬ tion ; e.g. aieL

piv cfrpévas 6pcf>l KaKal Tetpovai pepipvac ever do harsh cares wear spirit, Mimn. 1, 7; fe (= ê) (36Xe Kvpp-qv him he smote on the shin, II. 21, 591 ; in the passive construction, (IXrjTo Kvgpgv he was smitten on the shin, II. 4, 518. Cf. 906.

out his

1059. An accusative in certain expressions has the force of adverb. E.g.

Tpoirov in this Wap, thus ; ttjv TaxtcTTTjv (se. bbov) in the quickest {ri]v) àpxvv o>t first ; Ti]v àpxvv où not at ail ; réAos finally ; irpoÏKa as a gift, gratis ; xàpw for the sake of ; binpv in the manner of ; kwos bU-pv like a dog ; to irpcoTov or irpuiTov at first ; to Xolt-ôv for the rest ; ttàvra in ail things; raXXa in other respects; ovbév in nothing, not at ail; tL in what, why? H in any respect, at ail; raOra in respect to this, therefore. So TOVTO pkv tovto 5é (1010).

tovtov

tov

way ',

1060. Several of these (1059) are to be explained by 1056, e.g. raXXa, tL why? ravTa, tovto (with pkv and bk), and sometimes ovbkv and rt. Some are

to be

explained

cognate accusatives (see 1051 and 1052).

GREEK GRAMMAR

226

Accusative of Extent

dénoté extent of time or space. E.g. ai cnrovôai èvLavrov éoovrai the truce is to be for a year, Thuc. 4, 118 ; épeivev ripépas névre he remained five days ; âxéxet y nXâraia rccv Qyflw v arabious è(35onyi<ovTa Plataea is seventy stadia distant from Thebes, Thuc. 2, 5 ; àiréXovra 'ZvpaKovaœv ovre irXovv ttoXùv ovre àbôv (Mégara) not a long sail ot land-journey distant from Syracuse, Thuc. 6, 49. 1062. This accusative with an ordinal number dénotés how long since (including the date of the event) ; e.g. efibopiyv ypépav rys dvyarpos avrœ TereXevTyKvLas when his daughter had been dead (only) six days (lit. for the 1061. The accusative may

seventh day),

Aeschin. 3, 77.

1063. A peculiar idiom is found in expressions like rpirov éros rovri (this the third year), i.e. two years ago', e.g. àTryyyé\dy QÏKiinros rpirov f) reraprov éros rovrl 'llpaùov reïxos ttoXlopkûv two or three years ago (lit. this is the third or

fourth year since) Philip was reported to be besieging 3, 4. Terminal Accusative (Poetic)

Dem.

Fort Heraion,

the accusative without a préposition may deobject toward which motion is directed. E.g. Iivyarypas à^LKero she came to the suitors, Od. 1, 332; àvé/3y péyav ovpavov Oij\vp.irôv re she ascended to mighty heaven and Olympus, II. 1,497 ; koîXov "Apyos fias <pvyàs going as an exile to the hollow Argos, S.O.C. 1064. In poetry,

note the

place

378.

In prose a

préposition would be used here. Accusative in Oaths with

1065. The accusative

ph by. Cf. 1047. 1066. An oath

and pâ

follows the adverbs of swearing

introduced by

and

is affirmative ; one introduced

by pâ (unless val yes précédés) is négative; e.g. vy tov A la yes, by Zeus ; pà tov A La no, by Zeus ; but val, pà A la yes, by Zeus. 1067. Mâ is sometimes omitted when a négative précédés ; e.g. ou, rôvS' "OXvpirov, no, by yonder Olympus, S. Ant. 758. Two Accusatives with One Verb

signifying to ask, to demand, to teach, to remind, to unclothe, to conceal, to deprive, and to take away, may take two object accusatives. E.g. 1068. Verbs

clothe

ACCUSATIVE où tout'

èpœrœ

that is not what I

avvovaLas àpyvpiov

irpaTTei

227

asking you, Ar. Nub. 641 ; ovbeva rrjs fee for your teaching from any

you exact no

X. M. 1, 6, 11 ; irodev qp^aro cre bibàaneiv T-qv OTpaTqylav how dld he begin to teach you strategy? ibid. 3,1, 5; Tqv ^uppaxlav àvapLpvyaKovTes roùs 'AOyvalovs reminding the Athenians of the alliance, Thuc. 6, 6 ; tov pèv èavTov (xiTÛva) 'enelvov qp/fiLeoe he put his own (tunic) on the other boy, X. C. 1, 3, 17; ènôvœv èpè xPri,JTrip''-av èadijTa stripping me of my oracular garb, Aesch. Ag. 1269 ; ti)v duyarepa eKpuirTe tov Oolvcltov tov àvôpôs he concealed from his daughter her husband's death, Lys. 32, 7 ; toutuv ttjv Tipjv àiroaTepeî pe he cheats me out of the price of these, Dem. 28,13 ; tov navra ô' 'oXftov fjpap 'év p âcf>el\eTo but one day deprived me of ail my happi/ness, one,

E. Hec. 285.

1069. In poetry some other verbs have this construction; thus xpoa vlfero aXprjv he washed the dried spray from his skin, Od. 6, 224 ; so Tipupeîodai tlvcl aîpa to punish one for blood (shed), see E. Aie. 733. 1070. Verbs of this class sometimes have other constructions. For depriving and taking away, see 1118. For the accusative and genitive with verbs of reminding, see 1107. verbs of

1071. Verbs person or ravri

signifying to do anything to or to thing take two accusatives. E.g.

pe iroiovoiv

to me?

KaKa

say

anything of

they do these things to me ; tL p' elpyàaœ; what didst thou do iroWà œpyev Tpœas many evils has he wrought to the Trojans,

II. 16, 424 ; eKeîvôv Te Kal tous THopLvdLovs iroXXâ re Kal KaKa 'éXeye of him and the Corinthians he said much that was bad, Hdt. 8, 61 ; où <£povTio-Téov tL 'epovcnv oi ttoXXoI qpâs we must not consider what the multitude will say

us,

Plat. Crito 48

1072. These verbs often take accusative of

injures

thing ;

toutous eu

KaXûs

well,

you ; kokûs ypâs Xéyet he abuses us. The passive of these expressions is eu nâaxere,

1073. A verb and

accusative

depending

ill, instead of the good ; ùpâs xaxûs noiel he

or xa/ews

noiet he does them

àKoûopev. See 1242.

it may together be single word having another accusative as its object; e.g. riva ràxeis olpœyàv tov ex ôoXepâs parpos àXôvTa; why art thou dissolved in lamentation for him who was overthrown by a deceitful mother? S. E. 122 (= tL oip&Çeis grieve for). So with rtOepaL, woioupac, etc. ; e.g. uKeuq Kal âvôpàiroôa àpirayrjv -Kourjcràpevos (= àpirâaas) seizing (as booty) equipment and slaves, Thuc. 8, 62. treated

upon

1074. A transitive verb may

and

MéXrjrés

have a cognate accusative (1049) ordinary object accusative at the same time. E.g.

pe 'eypâfaro rqv ypafrjv TavTqv Meletus brought this indictment against Plat. Ap. 19 b ; MiXTiâùrçs ô t^v èv Mapadûvi pàxvv tous (3ap/3àpous vcKqaas Miltiades, who won the battle at Marathon over the barbarians, Aeschin. 3,

me,

GREEK GRAMMAR

228

peyiarovs oaths, Thuc. 8, 75.

181 ; œpKœcrav navras roi/s or par luit as rovs

the soldiers swear the strongest On this

opKovs

they made ail

principle verbs of dividing may take two accusatives ; e.g. ro he made twelve divisions of the army, X. C. 7,

arpàrevpa Karkveipe ôwôena péprj

5, 13.

signifying to name, to choose or appoint, to make, to regard, and the like, may take a predicate accusative besides the object accusative. E.g. ri rrjv ttÔXlv npocrayopeveLS ; what do yOU cdll the State? rrjv roiavrr]v 5vvap.lv àvôpetav 'éyœye Kakû such a power as this I call courage, Plat. Rep. 430 b ; arparrjyov axirov àTréôeiÇe he appointed him général, X. An. 1, 1, 2 ; evepykr-qv rov 'UXlttttov rjyovvro they thought Philip a benefactor, Dem. 18, 43 ; iràvrcov ôecnrôryv èavrov TreiroLrjKev he has made himself master of everything, 1075. Verbs

think

X. C.

1, 3, 18.

1076. This is the active construction corresponding to that of the passive

copulative verbs (897), in which the object accusative becomes the sub-

ject nominative (1236) and the predicate accusative becomes a predicate nominative (896). Like the latter, it includes also predicate adjectives; e.g. rovs crvppâxovs irpoOvpovs noieicrOai to make the allies eager ; ras àpaprias peyâXas rjyev he thought the fautts great. 1077. With verbs of naming the infinitive elvai may connect the two accusatives; e.g. o-o^lo-ttiv àvopaÇovai rov âvôpa elvai they call the man a sophist, Plat. Prot. 311 e. 1078. Many other transitive verbs may take a predicate accusative in apposition with the object accusative ; e.g. ëXa/3e toDto ôœpov he took this as a gift ; dàvarôv vv roi opta' erapvov death to thee, then, are the oaths I have sworn, II. 4, 155 (see 905). Especially an interrogative pronoun may be so used ; e.g. rivas roiirovs ôpœ ; who are these whom I see ? or whom do I see here ? See 916, 971. 1079. A predicate accusative may dénoté the effect of the action of the verb upon its direct object ; e.g. naiôeveiv nvà ao<t>ôv to train one (to be) wise. See 1053. For one of two accusatives retained with the passive, see 1240. For the accusative absolute, see 1571. GENITIVE use of the accusative is to limit the meaning of a the chief use of the genitive is to limit the meaning of a noun (substantive, adjective, sometimes adverb). When the genitive is used as the object of a verb, it seems to dépend on the nominal idea which belongs to the verb : PaaiXevei rrjs x&pas involves the idea /3aaiXevs k<rn rrjs x<hpas he is king of the country. The Greek is somewhat arbitrary in decid-

1080. As the chief

verb,

GENITIVE

ing when it will allow either idea

with

some

229

preponderate in the construction, and

verbs it allows both the accusative and the genitive.

In the

général sense the genitive follows verbal adjectives. Besides this genitive, there is the genitive used in constructions which originally belonged to the ablative. Most uses of the genitive may be traced either to the partitive idea or to the idea of séparation (including source). See 1040. same

Genitive with Substantives (Attributive

Genitive)

1081. A substantive in the

genitive may limit the meaning of substantive, to express various relations, most of which are denoted by of or by the possessive case in English. 1082. The genitive thus depending on a substantive is called attributive (916) or adnominal. Its most important relations are the following : another

Possession

other close relation

e.g. 17 tov irarpos

oUla the

father's house, p irarpls ppœv our country, to tûv àvôpuv yevos the lineage of the men. So 17 tov Alôs the daughter of Zeus, rà tuiv 9eûv religion, rà tï}s irôAews the interests of the state, politics (951). The Possessive Genitive. b. The Subject of an action or feeling : e.g. the good-will of the people (i.e. which the people

jective Genitive.

97 tov

ôgpov

evvoia.

feel). The Sub¬

c. The Object of an action or feeling : e.g. ôià to ILavaavLov plaos owing to the hatred of (i.e. felt against) Pausanias, Thuc. 1, 96 ; irpos ras tov x^P-^vos «apteppaeis as regards his endurance of the winter, Plat. Symp. 220 a. So ol deœv opuoc the oaths (sworn) in the name of the gods (cf. deovs ôpvvvai, 1047), X. An. 2, 5, 7. The Objective Genitive.

d. Material or Contents, including that of which anything consists: e.g. /3ocov àyekp a herd of cattle ; âAaos 17pépœv ôévôpcov a

of cultivated trees, X. An. 5, 3, 12 ; uppvp pôéos vôaros a spring of fresh water, X. An. 6, 4, 4 ; bvo xoivLices aAfiiTwv two quarts of meal. grove

Genitive of Material.

Measure, of space, time, or value: e.g. rpi&v ppepwv 686s a journey ; ôktù arab'iwv reîxos a wall of eight stadia (in length) ; rptaKovra raAàvTwv ovaia an estate of thirty talents ; piados reTTâpojv ppvcov pay for four months ; ivpàypara 7roAAœv raXdvrcov affairs of (i.e. involving) many talents, Ar. Nub. 472. Genitive of e.

three days'

Measure.

GREEK GRAMMAR

230

/. Cause or Origin : peyaXccv àÔLKypaTwv opyr] anger at great offences, ypa<fi] àaefieLas an indictment for impiety. The Causal Genitive.

substantives denoting a part : e.g. iroWol of the orators, àvrjp tûv eXevdépœv a man (i.e. one) of the freemen. The Partitive Genitive. See also 1088. These seven classes are not exhaustive; but they will give a général idea of these relations, many of which it is difficult to classify. The range is extended, especially in poetry. See 1083-1086. 1083. Examples like ttôXls "Apyovs city of Argos, Ar. Eq. 813, Tpotvs 7TToXledpov the city of Troy, Od. 1, 2, in which the genitive is used instead g.

tojv

The Whole, with

pyropœv many

apposition, are poetic. 1084. Poetry often has a periphrasis of a substantive and dépendent genitive, instead of a qualifying adjective; e.g. pkvos 'Arpetôao the mighty son of Atreus, II. 11, 268 ; àpcpi (3Lr]v ALoprjôeos round the mighty Diomed, II. 5, 781. Here an adjective or participle sometimes agréés in sense rather than in grammar ; e.g. </)tXrar' AiyLaOov f3La dearest Aegislhus, Aesch. Ch. 893. Such expressions dénoté majesty, courtesy, or affection. Cf. '\ok6l<jtt)s Kapa dear Iocasta, S. O. T. 950.

1085. Quality may

be expressed by the genitive,

especially in poetry;

with snow-white pinion, S. Ant. 114. 1086. Two genitives denoting différent relations may dépend on one noun ; e.g. 'U-kov ôpôpov gpkpas within a day's run for a horse, Dem. 19, 273 ;

e.g.

XevKijs

xi-ovos TTTtpvyL

àvkpov ânojcrlv olvt&v ks to iréXayos by the wind's driving them (the wrecks) out to sea, Thuc. 7, 34. 1087. Certain substantives on which the genitive dépends may be omitted, if easily understood ; e.g. ArpioaOevqs ArjpoaOévovs (se. vlôs) Demosthenes son of Demosthenes ; eis tov â5eX<frov (se. ointav) to my brother's ; eis Kovpéœs (se. Kovpeîov) to the barber's ; eis 'ALôao to the house of Hades.

ôià t-qv tov

1088. Partitive Genitive (Genitive of the Whole). The partitive genitive (1082 g) may follow ail substantives, adjectives (especially superlatives), pronouns, participles with the article, and adverbs, which dénoté a part. E.g. of àyadoi tûv àvQpùirwv the good among (the) men, or men who are good; ô r/plcrvs tov àpi.0p.ov the half of the number~, âvdpa oïôa tov ôgpov I know of a man belonging to the people; rots Opavhais tûv vavtûv to the upper benches of the sailors, Thuc. 6, 31 ; ov5els rûv iraiôcjv no one of the children', tv6.vtu>v tGjv pytopuiv ôeivôtatos most éloquent of ail the orators', ô fiovXôpevos Kai àoTœv Kal £évcov any one who pleases, citizens or strangers, Thuc. 2, 34; ôîa ywaLnûv divine among women, Od. 4, 305; irov yijs; ubi terrarum?

whereonearth? tLstûv ttoXitûv who of the citizens?

ôls

GENITIVE

231

Tïjs r/pépas twice

a day ; eis tovto àvoias to tflis pitch of folly ; eiri peya great degree of power, Thuc. 1,118; h> tovto> irapacrKevrjs in this stdte of préparation', a pev ôicoKei tov fycfrLapaTos ravr' kariv what

ôwàpews to

he attacJcs in the decree is this (lit. what parts of the decree he prosecutes, etc.), Dem. 18, 56; eû^>?iporaT àvOpdcivœv in the most plausible way pos¬ sible (most plausibly of meri), Dem. 19, 50; ore ôeivÔTaros cravrov ravra f/ada when you were at the top of your form in these matters, X. M. 1, 2, 46 ; aaipéaraTa àvûpûTrwv more clearly than anybody else in the world, Lys. 24, 9 ; ev v-avrl kcikov in utter distress, Plat. Rep. 579 b. See 964. 1089. The partitive genitive has the predicate position as regards the article (970), while other attributive genitives (except personal pronouns, 975) have the attributive position (959). It is often separated from the word on which it dépends by other words and phrases, and often begins a sentence or clause as the logical topic. 1090. An adjective or participle generally agréés in gender with a dépendent partitive genitive. But sometimes, especially when it is singular, it is neuter, agreeing with pkpos part understood; e.g. tûv ■n-oXepiuv to 7roÀû (for ol 7roXXoî) the greater part of the enemy. On the other hand, adjectives denoting size or quantity sometimes agree in gender with the genitive ; e.g. rrjs papi\r]s avxvgv a lot of coal dust, Ar. Ach. 350. 1091. A partitive genitive sometimes dépends on ris or pkpos under¬ stood; e.g. 'éipaaav kin.peiyvvvai a<pœv re irpos eKeivovs Kal èiceLvcûv irpos eavrovs they said that some of their own men had mixed with them, and some of thern with their own men {rivas being understood with ofywv and eneivœv), X. An. 3, 5,16. Cf. 1098.

1092. Similar to such phrases as ttoO yfjs; ds tovto àvoias, etc. is the of êx<o and an adverb with the genitive; e.g. irôis 'éxeis 5ô^s; in what state of opinion are you? Plat. Rep. 456 d ; ev owparos 'éxeiv to be in a good condition of body, ibid. 404 d ; cbs elx« râxovs as fast as he could (lit. in the condition of speed in which he was), Thuc. 2, 90 ; so œs ttoôûv eîxov, Hdt. 6, 116 ; ev ëxeiv 4>pevôiv to be in his right mind (see E. Hipp. 462). use

Genitive with Verbs Predicate Genitive

1093. As the attributive

genitive (1082) stands in the relation attributive adjective to its leading substantive, so a genitive may stand in the relation of a predicate adjective (896) to a verb. of

1094. Verbs

signifying to be

to become and other copulative

verbs may have a predicate genitive expressing any of the rela¬ tions of the attributive genitive (1082). E.g.

GREEK GRAMMAR

232 o.

Possessive. fO vôpos kcrriv

ovtos

Apolkovtos this law

is Draco's, Dem.

is not in roD deûv vop.it;trou (ô x<âpos) ; to what god is the place held sacred? S. 0. C. 38. b. Subjective. 0tpai avro (to prjpa) lieplâvùpov elvcu I think it (the say23, 51; irevLai> (pepetv où wavros, dXX' âvôpos ao<po0 bearing poverty the power of every one, but only of a wise man, Men. Mon. 463;

ing) is Periander's, Plat. Rep. 336 a. c. Objective. Où rûv kakovpywv oïktos, àXXà rrjs ôLkt] s pity is not for evïir doers, but for the right, E.frag. 272. d. Material, "Epupa XLdœv ireiroirjpkvov a wall built of stones, Thuc. 4, 31; oi depekioL TravroLœv XLOœv viroK.ei.vTai the foundations are laid (consisting) of ail kinds of stones, Thuc. 1, 93. e. Measure. (Tà Teixri) aTabiœv fjv ôktù the watts were eight stadia (in length), Thuc. 4, 66 ; eireiôàv èrco v fj tis TpiàKovTa, when one is thirty years old, Plat. Lg. 721 a. /. Origin. Toiovtwv èo-rè irpoyôvcov from such ancestors are y ou sprung, X. Aw.3,2,14. g. Partitive. Tovtuv yevov pot become one of these for my sake, Ar. Nub. 107; 26Xœv tûv èittà oo4>kttûv ê/cX^ Solon was called one of the Seven Wise Men, Isoc. 15, 235. 1095. Verbs signifying to name, to choose or appoint, to make, to think or regard, and the like, which take two accusatives referring to the same person or thing (1075), may take a possessive or par¬

genitive in place of the predicate accusative. E.g. iroiovvTai they make Asia their own, X. Ag. 1, 33 ; epè dès tûv ireireicrpèvivv put me down as (one) of those who are persuaded, Plat. Rep. 424 c; (roôro) tt}s riperèpas àpeXei as av tis OeLy ôt/catws anyone might rightfully charge this to our neglect, Dem. 1, 10. 1096. These verbs (1095) in the passive are among the copulative verbs of 896, and they still retain the genitive ; e.g. rïjs irpÛT-qs (se. râ^ecos) TeTaypèvos posted in (so as to be of) the front rank, Lys. 16, 15. See also

titive tt]v

'Aaiav èavTÛv

the last

example under 1094

Genitive expressing a Part

1097.

affects the

Any verb may take a partitive object only in part. E.g.

ivèpirei tS>v Avôûv he sends some of the sends the Lydians) ; irivei roO o'tvov

genitive if its action

Lydians (but irépirei tovs AvSovs he

he drinks some of the wine\ Trjs yrjs

land, Thuc. 1, 30. principle applies especially to verbs signifying to share (i.e. to give or take a part) or to enjoy. E.g. pereïxov rrjs Xetas they shared in the booty, and so often petairoieiodai tlvos èrepov

they ravaged (some) of the

b. This

to claim a

share of anything (cf.

1099) ; àiroXaîiopev t&v àyaOûv we enjoy

GENITIVE

233

the blessings (i.e. our share of them) ; ovtus ôvaiade tovtuv thus may you enjoy these, Dem. 28, 20. So où rrpoarjKei poi rrjs àpxys I have no concern in the government ; ptrecrri

pot tovtov

I have

share in this (1161).

1098. Many of these verbs also take an accusative, "when they refer to the whole object. Thus 'é\axe tovtov means he obtained a share of this by lot, but 'éXaxe tovto he obtained this by lot. Meréxw and similar verbs may regularly take an accusative like pkpos part ; e.g. t&v kivôvvwv irXeïoTov pkpos pedéÇovo-Lv they will have the greatest share of the dangers, Isoc. 6, 3 (where pkpovs would mean that they have only a part of a share). This use of pkpos shows the nature of the genitive with these verbs. Cf. 1091. In ovvTpifieiv Trjs necjjaXrjs to bruise his head and Kareayevai Trjs KecpaXrjs to have his head broken the genitive is probably partitive. See Ar. Ach.

1180, Fax 71

;

Isoc. 18, 52. These verbs take also the accusative. Genitive

with

Various Verbs

1099. The

partitive genitive is used with verbs signifying to of, to touch, to claim, to aim at, to hit, to attain, to miss, to make trial of, to begin. E.g. take hold

êXct/3ero tt)s xeLPos avTov he grasped his hand, X. H. 4,1,38; irvpos tari diyôvTa pi] evOvs KaLeodai it is possible to touch fire and not be burned

immediately, X. C. 5,1,16; tt}s Çvvéaecos peTairoieîoûcu to lay claim to sagacity, Thuc. 1,140; tikloto. tû>v àWoTpLœi> èpkyovTai they are least of ail eagerfor what is another's, X. Symp. 4, 42 ; ovSè pi]v âXXov oToxa'çôpevos

did he aim at another man and hit this one, Antiphon 4; tt)s àpeTrjs è<pLKé<rdaL to attain to virtue, Isoc. 1, 5; ôôoO evirôpov tvxAv to find a passable road, X. H. 6, 5, 52 ; TroXXœv ko.1 xa-Xeicchv x^ptuv èireXàl3oi>To they took possession of many rough places, ibid. ; TreLpàoavTes tov x^ptov having made an attempt on the place, Thuc. 1, 61. eroxe tovtov nor

1100. With verbs meaning to miss and to begin the genitive may be ablatival (denoting séparation, 1117) or partitive; e.g. TavTys àiroo^aXévTa

rrjs eXiriôos disappointed in this

hope, Hdt. 6, 5 (ablatival)

;

o-<f>aXeis Trjs

àXydeias having missed the truth, Plat. Rep. 451 a ; to kf évadai Trjs âXr/deLas to be cheated oui of the truth ; tCov oTpaTeiûv ovôepiâs àireXeLcjrdyv rrurroTe I never yet

missed

single campaign, Lys. 16,18 ; eUds apxw Xôyov it is proper that speak firsl, X. C. 6,1, 6 (partitive) ; roC Xôyov rjpxero u>ôe he began his speech as follows, X. An. 3, 2, 7 ; Aios àpxôpevai beginning with Zeus, Pind. N. 5, 25 (ablatival) ; -irôdev ap&pai; where am I to begin? (lit. from what ? 292), Aesch. Ch. 855. Here a préposition is more common in prose ; e.g. êfc Traiôàs àp^àpevov beginning with boyhood, Plat. Ap. 31 d. 1101. Verbs of taking hold may have an object accusative, with a geni¬ tive of the part taken hold of ; e g. eXafiov Trjs Çûvys tov 'OpôvTav they seized Orontas by his girdle, X. An. 1, 6, 10. 1102. a. The poets extend the construction of verbs of taking hold to a

I should

GREEK GRAMMAR

234

pulling, dragging, leading, and the like; e.g. HXXov pkv xhaLv-gs xltûvos pulling one by the cloak, another by the tunic, II. 22,493 ; fiow àykrgv Kepàuv the two led the heifer by the horns, Od. 3, 439. b. So even in prose: rà vgina iracbLa bkovai tov iroôos airâptu) they tie the infants by the foot WÎth a cord, Hdt. 5, 16 ; pgirore ayecv Trjs rjvtas tov Ïttttov never to lead the horse by the bridle, X. Eq. 6, 9. c. Under this head is usually placed the poetic genitive with verbs of imploring, denoting the part grasped by the suppliant ; e.g. kpk hiaokaKero yovvœv she implored me by (i.e. clasping) my knees, II. 9, 451. The explanation is less simple in Xtaaopac. Zgvos 'OXvpirLov I implore by Olympian Zeus, Od. 2, 68 : cf. vvv 5k ae rrpàs irarpos yovvaÇopai and now I implore thee by thy father, Od. 13, 324. 1103. The partitive genitive is used with verbs signifying to

those of

kpvcov aXXov ôk

smell, to hear, to perceive, to comprehend, to remember, forget, to desire, to care for, to spare, to neglect, to wonder at, to admire, to despise. E.g. èXevdepl g s yevaàpevoL having tasted of freedom, Hdt. 6, 5; Kpoppvcov 6acf)paLvopai I smell onions, At.R. 654; 4>uvi}s àkoveiv pol ôok£> methinks I hear a Voice, Ar. Pax 61; aiaGàvecrdai., pepvrjodai., OV tTTLXavdâveadaL tovtcov to perceive, remember, or forget this~, ôooi àWyXœv ÇwLeaav ail who comprehendedeach other's speech, Thuc. 1, 3 (1105) ; tovtojvtw padypàruv èindvpû) I long for this learning, X. M. 2, 6, 30; xpvn&Toiv 4>eL5eodat. to be sparing of money, ibid. 1, 2, 22; rrjs àperfjs àpeXeîv to neglect virtue, Isoc. 1, 48 ; et ayaaai. tov ivatpos if you admire your father, X. C. 3,1,15 ; pgôevos ovv oXtywpetre pgôè Ka.Ta<fipoveÏTe Tœv TrpooTeTaypévcav do not then neglect or despise any of my injunctions, Isoc. 3, 48; twv KaTrjyôpuv 0avp.àÇœ I am astonished at my accusers, Lys. 25, 1. For a causal genitive with verbs like davpâfœ, see 1121. 1104. Verbs of hearing, learning, etc. may take an accusative of the thing heard etc. and a genitive of the person heard from; e.g. tovtcov tolovtovs ànovco Xôyovs I hear suchsayings from these men ; irvdéuOai tovto vpœv to learn this from you. The genitive here belongs under 1125. A sentence may take the place of the accusative ; e.g. tovtcov anove Ô rt Xkyovacv hear from these men what they say. See also àiroôkxop.cu accept (a statement) from,

taste, to to

in the Lexicon.

1105. Verbs of under standing, e.g. k-rcLoTapai,

have the accusative.

takes the

~2vvlypi, quoted above with the genitive (1103), usually accusa¬ tive of a thing. Mkp.vrip.ai. means to remember about, be reminded of, mention, when it has the genitive ; with accusative it means keep in remembrance.

1106. The impersonals pk\ei and perapéXet take the genitive of a thing with the dative of a person (1161) ; e.g. pkXet. poc. tovtov I am interested in this, perapeXeL aoL tovtov you are sorry for this; v-pocr-gnei. it concerns has the same construction.

GENITIVE

235

1107. Causative verbs of this class take the accusative of a person and the genitive of a thing; e.g. pq p.' àvapvqaris ko.kû>v do not remind me of evils

(i.e.

cause me to remember them), E. Aie. 1045; tovs -n-aîSas yevarkov aïpaTos must make the children tasie blood, Plat. Rep. 537 a.

But verbs of reminding also take two accusatives

(1068). smell of has a genitive, probably partitive; e.g. oÇova' àpppocrias Kal v'eKTapos they smell of ambrosia and nectar, Ar. Ach. 196. A second genitive may be added to designate the source of the odor; e.g. el tt}s Ke<pa\rjs 6Çco pvpov if my head smells of perfume, Ar. Eccl. 524. 1108. "Ofco

1109. The

rule, to lead,

partitive genitive is used with verbs signifying to to direct. E.g.

"Epcos TÔiv deœv fiacrCXeveL Love is king of the gods, Plat. Symp. 195 c; IIoAuKpârps 2âp.ov rvpavvûv Polycrates, while he was tyrant of Samos, Thuc. 1,13; Mtecos rrjs vvv 'EXXqvLKrjs 6 aXâcr aqs êKpaTqcre Kai rœv KwcAâcSaw vrjaœv rjp£e Minos became master of what is now the Greek sea, and ruler of the Cyclades, Thuc. 1,4; tûjv qbovwv eKpàrei. he was master over his pleasures, X. M. 1, 5, 6 ; qyovp-evoi avrovèpcov tojv Çvg.pâxwv leading their allies

on a

basis of

independence (971), Thuc. 1, 97.

1110. Some verbs meaning to rule may have the accusative when the idea of conquering is uppermost ; e.g. tovs 9panas KpaTqaavres having beaten the Thracians, X. An. 7, 6, 32 (having got them in hand).

1111. For other cases with many of the verbs of 1099,1102, and 1109, the Lexicon. For the dative in poetry with rjyéopcu and àvâaau, see

see

1164.

1112. Verbs

signifying fulness and want take the genitive of E.g.

material (1082 d).

àrœv evTrôpei. he had plenty of money, Dem. 18, 235 ; aeaaypévos ttXovtov fvxyv 'écropcu I shall have my soul loaded withwealth, X. Symp. 4, 64 ; ovk 'àv airopoî ttap a.8eiy p arœv he would be at no loss for examples, Plat.

XPVp

tt)v

Rep. 557 d ; ovôèv Se^crei iroXXwv ypappàroiv there will be documents, Isoc. 4, 78. 1113. Verbs

need of many

signifying to fïll take the accusative of the thing

filled and the genitive of material. E.g. ôaKpvcov 'éirXrjaev èpé he filled me with tears, E. Or. 368. 1114. Aéopcu I want may have a cognate accusative of the thing desired ; e.g. ôeqaopai vpœv perptav bkyaiv I will make of you a moderate request, Aeschin. 3, 61 ; roOro vpwv Séopai, I beg this of you, Plat. Ap. 17 c; cf. 1074. 1115. Aeî there is need may take a dative (sometimes in poetry an accusative) of the person besides the genitive; e.g. Seî poi tovtov I need this, avrov yâ.p cre ôeî irpoprjdéœs for thou thyself needest a counsellor, Aesch. Pr. 86.

236

GREEK GRAMMAR

a. Besides the common phrases iroXXov Seî far from it, ôXLyov almost, in which the main idea is expressed in the infinitive clause subject of Seî (1521), Demosthenes has ironically ovoè iroXXov Seî one may not even say that it is far from it, i.e. it lacks everything of being. b. By an ellipsis of ôeîj> (1538), ôXLyov and pi/cpoO come to mean almost-, e.g. ôXLyov iravres almost ail, Plat. Rep. 552 d.

1116.

8eï

Genitive of Séparation and Comparison

1117. The genitive (as ablative) may dénoté that from which anything is separated or distinguished. On this principle the geni¬ tive is used with verbs denoting to remove, to restrain, to release, to cease, to fait, to give up, and the like. E.g. ■f) vrjcros ov iroXv Stéxet rfjs rjireLpov the island is not far distant from the main-

land; 'eiriaTrip.ri xwpifo/xép?7 8lkaïoavv-qs knowledge separated from justice, Plat. Menex. 246 e ; XDoôv pe S eo-pû v release me from chains ; èirLoxes tov ôpôfiov stop your running, Ar. Av. 1200; tovtovs ov iravou rrjs àpxqs I will not déposé themfrom their authority, X. C. 8,6,3 ; ov iraveade r^pox^ptas y ou do not cease from your rascality; ovk efebaO-q rijs èX-n-Lô os he was not disappointed in his hope, X.H. 7, 5, 24 (1100) ; Trjs èXevdepLas ttapaxupycrcu 4>tXt7T7rcp to surrender freedom to Philip, Dem. 18, 68; ?) ê^to-roXi) rjv ovtos typaxpev àiroXeL<pdeis r/p&v the letter which this man wrote without our knowledge (lit. separated from us), Dem. 19, 36.

Transitive verbs of this class may take also an accusative if the sense

requires it;

e.g. Xvo-w

E. Her. 1123.

Seo-pà 7rat56s; shall I take the shackles off the child?

See 1118, 1125.

1118. Verbs of depriving may take a genitive in place of the accusative

thing, and those of taking away a genitive in place of the accusative (1068, 1070) ; e.g. èpè rœv -karpcpœv àireoTep7]Ke he has robbed me of my patrimony, Dem. 29, 3 ; tûv aXXwv àcj>cupovp.evoL xpvpo,ra taking away property from the others, X. M. 1, 5, 3 ; irôoœv à-n-earépriode of how much have you been bereft! Dem. 8, 63. 1119. The poets use this genitive with verbs of motion ; e.g. OvXvpiroio KaTrfXdopev we descended from Olympus, II. 20,125 ; Uvdûvos 'é(3as thou didst come from Pytho, S. O. T. 152. Here a préposition would be used in prose. of

person

1120. The

genitive is used with verbs signifying to

surpass,

be inferior, to differ, and ail others which imply comparison. E.g.

(âvdpuTros) £wécrei virepéxa T&v dXXœv

man surpasses

the others in sagacity,

P. Menex. 237 d ; èirLÔeL^avtes ttjv àperrjv tov irXrjdovs ■Ktpiyiyvop.k.vyv showing that bravery proves superior to numbers, Isoc. 4, 91 ; ôpûv votepiçovoav tt\v

irôXiv tûv ko.t.pû>v

seeing the city too lateforits opportunities, Dem. 18,102;

èpireipia iroXv irpotxert rœv aXXcov in experience you far excel the others, X.H. 7,1, 4; ovôh -n-Xydei ye rjpœv XeLcfrdevres when they were not at ail

GENITIVE

237

inferior to (left behind by) us in numbers, X. An. 7, 7, 31 ; tlirov (aurai) Krjpvnos pi] Xeiireadai they told him not to be left behind the herald (i,e. to foliow him closely), Thuc. 1,131 ; où5kv 5iotatis XaipvpûvTos you will not differ from Chaerephon at ail, Ar. Nub. 503. So rûv kxdpâiv viKâadai (or J/TTS.o-9ai), to be overcome by one's enemies; but these two verbs take also the genitive with ùirô (1236). So rœv kxBpûv KpartZv to prevail over one's enemies, and rys daXâaays Kpareîv to be master of the sea. Compare the examples under 1109. rov

Genitive of Cause and Source 1121. The ablatival

genitive often dénotés

a cause,

especially

with verbs expressing émotions, e.g. admiration, wonder, affection,

hatred, pity, anger, envy, or revenge. E.g. (toutous) tt)s pkv ro\p77s où daupâÇœ, rrjs 5k â^uveaias I wonder not at their boldness, but at their folly, Thuc. 6, 36 ; îtoXX eucis at7]ù5aipoviaa roO tpôirou often have I thought you happy because of your disposition, Plat. Crito 43 b; Çr/Xœ otToû vou, rrjs 5k StiXLas aruyco I envy y ou for your mind, but loathe you for your cowardice, S. El. 1027 ; py poi tpdovyoys rod padrj par os don't grudge me the knowledge, Plat. Euthyd. 297 b ; auyyiyvûaKtiv aùroîs xpi7 rys kiridupLas we must forgive themfor their desire, ibid. 306 c; nai arpeas Tipœp-qaopai rrjs kvdàSe àir L^ios and I shall punish them for coming hither, Hdt. 3,145 ; toutous oiktipœ rijs voaou I pity them for their disease, X. Symp. 4, 37 ; tG>v à5inypàtu>v ôpyLfeodai to be angry at the offences,

Lys. 31,11.

Most of these verbs may take

also

dative of the person. motive (where ivena rrjs tôiv 'EWyvœv kXeudtpLas for the liberty of the an

accusative

1122. The genitive sometimes dénotés a purpose or

generally expressed)

Greeks, Dem. 18, 100;

; e.g. so

19, 76. See 1551.

1123. Verbs of disputing take a causal genitive; e.g. où fiaoïXti àvnTvoioùpeda rijs àpxvs we do not dispute with the King the title to his dominion, X. An. 2, 3, 23 ; EiVoX7ros rjpcpiaPyTrjaev 'EpexBéi rrjs irôXeœs Eumàlpus dis-

puted with Erechtheus for the city (i.e. disputed its possession with him), Isoc. 12, 193.

genitive is sometimes used in exclamations, to give E.g. Uôaeiôov, rrjs rkxvys O Poséidon, what a trade! Ar. Eq. 144 ; 'fi ZeO /Sao-iXeD, rrjs Xe7rtoty\tos rœv (ppevaiv! O King Zeus! what subtlety of intellect! 1124. The

the

cause

of the astonishment.

Ar. Nub. 153.

1125. pàde

pou

The

For the nominative, see 1043.

genitive sometimes dénotés the source. E.g. Add the examples given

raSe learn this from me, X. C. 1, 6,44.

under 1104.

238

GREEK GRAMMAR

b. So with yLyvo/j.a.1, in the sense to be born ; e.g. Aapelov nal UapvaàrLÔos yLyvovTai iraïbes ôùo of Darius and Parysaiis are born two sons, X. An. 1,1,1.

1126. In poetry the genitive occasionally dénotés the agent or instru¬ 'ALôa Keîcrcu, aâs àXôxov acfmyels AlyLaOov re thou liest in the house

ment ; e.g. èv

of Hades, slain by thy wife and Aegisthus, E. El. 122

Gvperpa to burn the gâtes with ravening fire, II. 2, 415.

Genitive with Verbs

;

Trprjcrai

nrvpos

ôyioio

of Judicial Action

signifying to accuse, to prosecute, to convict, to acquit, a genitive denoting the crime, with an accusative of the person. E.g. 1127. Verbs

and to condemn take

4>6vov I charge him with the murder; èypàfaro avrov he indicted him for an illégal proposition; ôlookéi. pe ôupœv he prosecutes me for bribery; KXéawa ôApœv èXôvres kal kXottt)s having convicted Cleon of bribery and theft, Ar. Nub. 591; 'écpevye irpoôooLas he was brought to trial for treachery, but àwé^vye irpoboalas he was acquitted of treachery ; f evbopaprvp lûvlàXœcreaOai TrpoaôoKÛv expecting to be con¬ victed of false-witness, Dem. 39,18.

aîrtûpat

avrov

tov

irapavopœv

1128. '0<p\iaKàvGj lose a suit has the construction of a passive of this icXoirrjs he was convicted of theft. It may also have a cognate accusative ; e.g. SxfrXe kXotttjs SLktjv he was convicted of theft (1049). For other accusatives with o^Xianàvœ, e.g. pcopiav folly, aiaxvvyv shame, class (1236) ; e.g.

xpvpara

money

(fine),

see

the Lexicon.

Compounds of /card of this class, including Karyyopœ (868 b), commonly take a genitive of the person, which dépends on the /carà. They may take also an object accusative denoting the crime or punishment. E.g. 1129.

avrod Karr]yôpr]ae irà>iroTe no man ever accused himself, Dem. Karepoœv rcbv 'AO-qvaLœv they decried the Athenians, Thuc. 1, 67 ; Oàvarov Karéyvwaav avrov they condemned him to dealh, Thuc. 6, 61 ; vpûv Séopai prj Karayvûvai bwpoboKlav kpov I beg you not to déclaré me guilty of taking bribes, Lys. 21,21 ; rà irXeîara Karefevaarô pov he mostly lied about

ovôeis

avros

38, 26

;

(against) me, Dem. 18, 9 ; Xkya> irpos rovs kpov Kara\pr](f>Lcrapkvovs d àvarov am speaking to those who voted to condemn me to death, Plat. Ap. 38 d.

1130. Verbs of condemning which are compounds of narà may take rjpœv prjô l<t pov Oàvarov Karkyvœaav OUr

three cases; e.g. iroXXœp ol irarkpes

fathers condemned many to death for Medism, Isoc. 4,157. For a genitive (of value) denoting the penalty, see 1133.

1131. The verbs of 1127 often have a cognate accusative (1049) on which the genitive dépends ; e.g. ypaffy ypà<j>eaOaL v/3pea>s to bring an indidment for outrage; ypatprjv (or 8Lkï]v) virex^iv, 4>evyei.v, Siuiceiv, ofXeïv, àXwvai.

GENITIVE Genitive with

Compound Verbs

1132. The genitive often dépends compound verb. E.g.

TvpoKeiTai

rfjs x^pas yp&v

opt]

239

préposition included in

on a

peyàXa high mountains lie in front of

our

land,

X. M. 3,5,25; vnepecfràvrioav tov XôQov they appeared above the hill, Thuc. 4, 93; ovtws vpœv vxepaXycj I grieve so for you, Ar. Av. 466; attorpénei pe tovtov it tums me from this, Plat. Ap. 31 d; rw è-irl^àvtl irpœtlo tov relxovs to him who should first mount the wall, Thuc. 4,116; ovk àvOpœirœv virepepbvei he did not despise men, X. Ages. 11, 2. For the genitive with verbs of accusing and

of Karâ, see 1129.

Genitive of Price 1133. The

condemning, compounds

Value

genitive may dénoté the price

value of

thing. E.g.

reûxe' apet/Se xpûcrea xa-XKetwv, eKaTop^oC kvveafiotwv he gave gold armor for

bronze,

armor

worth

hundred

oxen

for

armor

worth nine, II. 6, 235

;

ô6£a xp'jpâ.rœv ovk ùfrjTr] (se. èartv) glory is not to be bought with money, Isoc. 2, 32 ; ttooov SiôâoKei; what does he charge for his lessons? irkvre pvcôv

five minas, Plat. Ap. 20 b ; ovk âv àweôôpyv ttoXXov ràs èXTrtôas I would not have sold my hopes for a great deal, Plat. Ph. 98b; peLÇovo s avrà Tip&vTai they value them more, X. C. 2,1,13. But with iroLovpcu and other verbs of valuing or rating irepL with the genitive is more common ; e.g. irepl irXeicrTov iroieiaOai. to deem of the utmost importance. In judicial language, ttpâv tlvL tlvos is said of the court's judgment in estimating the penalty, to fix the penalty ; tlpâooai tlvL tlvos of either party to the suit, to propose a penalty; e.g. àXXà ôy <pi>yys TLpyawpai ; icrtos yàp 'àv pot tovtov tipyaatte but shall I then propose exile as my punishment? — you (the court) might perhaps fix my penalty at this, Plat. Ap. 37 c. So rtpârat ô' ovv pol 6 àvyp OavaTov anyhow, the man proposes death as my pun¬ ishment, Plat. Ap. 36b. So also 2</>oôpîae vivyyov OavaTov they impeached Sphodrias on a capital charge (cf. 1130), X. H. 5, 4, 24.

1134. The thing bought sometimes stands in the genitive, either by analogy to the genitive of price, or in a causal sense (1121); e.g. tov SûdeKo. pvâs Ilao-ta (se. àfclXu) ; for what (do I owe) twelve minas to Pasias? Ar. Nub. 22; ovôéva rfs awova Las àpyvpiov irpaTTei you exact no money for your

teaching from anybody, X. M. 1, 6, 11.

1135. The genitive depending on â&os worth, worthy, and its compounds, or on à^LÔco think worthy, is the genitive of price or value ; e.g. â£iôs «art davârov he deserves death; ov QepioTOKXka twv peyiaTœv ôwpeûv yÇLœcrav; did

they not think Themistocles worthy of the highest gifts? Isoc. 4, 154. So sometimes âripos and àrtpàfw take the genitive. See 1140.

GREEK GRAMMAR

240

Genitive of

Time and Place

genitive may dénoté the period of time within which anything takes place. E.g. ravra rrjs rjpepas kyevero this happened during the day, X. An. 7, 4, 14 (tt]v ypépav would mean through the whole day, 1061); ttoLov xpôvov <5è ko.1 ■?reirôpdt]tcu ttôxls ; and how long since (within what time) has the city really lain in ruins (1250 c)? Aesch. Ag. 290; roO 'eiriyi.yvop.evov xe>-pûvos in the following winter, Thuc. 8, 29 ; ôé«a krwv ovx v&vol they will not come within ten years, Plat. Lg. 642 e. So ôpaxpyv eXâpfiave rrjs gpepas he 1136. The

received

drachma

day (949), Thuc. 3, 17.

genitive of the place within which or at which is found in poetry. E.g. ?i ovic "Apyeos rjev 'Axan/cou was he not in Achaean Argos? Od. 3, 251 ; o'Ltj vvv ovk eotl yvvt) kcit' ' AxcaiSa yaZav, ovre UvXov lepfjs ovt' 'Apyeos ovre MvKTivris a woman whose like there is not in the Achaean land, nor at sacred Pylos, nor at Argos, nor at Mycenae, Od. 21, 107. So in the 1137. A similar

Homeric ireôioio deetv to

run over

the plain (i.e. within its limits), II. 22,

similar ex¬ (5, 77). 1138. A genitive denoting place occurs in Attic prose in a few such expressions as ievairov irpôocc to go forward, X. An. 1, 3, 1, and èireTâxwov rrjs ôôov tovs axoXaLrepov irpocnovras they hurried over the road those who came up more slowly, Thuc. 4, 47. 23, XoveaOai iroTapoïo to bathe in the river, II. 6, 508, and pressions. So àpLOTepijs x«pôs on the left hand, even in Hdt.

Genitive with Adjectives

objective genitive follows many verbal adjectives. adjectives are chiefly kindred (in meaning or déri¬ vation) to verbs which take the genitive. E.g. péroxos ooifilas partaking of wisdom, Plat. Lg. 689 d ; icrôpoipoi twv irarpûuv 1139. The

1140. These

sharing equally their father's estate, Isae. 6, 25. (1097 b)

'eirhtti]pr)s

eir-qfioXoL having

daxâoatis

epireipotaroi

attained knowledge, Plat. Euthyd. 289 b;

most familiar with the sea (experienced in navi¬

gation), Thuc. 1, 80. (1099) obedient (Jiearkening) to his parents, Plat. Rep. 463 d; àpvripwv twv Kivôvvwv unmindful of the dangers, Antiphon 2, a, 7; ayevaTos kclkwv without a taste of evils, S. Ant. 582; èiripeXris àyadwv, àpeXi)s kclkwv caring for the good, neglectful of the bad ; (peiôwXol xpvp cltwv sparing of money, Plat. Rep. 548 b. (1103) twv ri 8 o v w v iraawv 'eyiipatearatos perfect master of ail pleasures, X. M. 1, 2, 14 ; vews àpx'Koî fit to command a ship, Plat. Rep. 488 d; èaurov wv âKpàrwp not being master of himself, ibid. 579 c. (1109) virrjKoos twv yoveœv

GENITIVE

241

neo-ràs KaKœvfull of evïls ; kir caTq pqs Kevôs void of knowledge, Plat. Rep. 486 c ; \qdqs ôv irXkois being fuïl of fovgetfulness, ibid. ; irXetoTOiv kvôekaTaTOS most wanting in most ihings, ibid. 579 e; 17 fvxv yvpvq tov aûpaTos the soul stript of the body, Plat. Crat. 403 b ; Kadapà itclvtoiv tGiv irepl to crojpa naKûv free {pure) from ail the evïls that belong to the body, ibid. 403 e; tolovtoiv àv 5 pôiv 6p<pavr} bereft of SUCh men, Lys. 2, 60 ; kircoTripq kir loti) pq s ÔLcufropos knowledge distinct from knowledge, Plat. Phil. 61 d ; erepov to qôv tov àyadod the pleasant (is) distinct from the good, Plat. G. 500 d.

(1112, 1117)

'évoxos o e t X t a s chargeable with cowardice, sible for this, Plat. G. 447 a. (1127)

Lys. 14, 5 ;

a£ios TroXXwf worth much, genitive of value.

tovtoiv

a'Lrios respon-

(1135)

1141. Compounds of alpha privative (861) sometimes take a geni¬ tive of kindred meaning, which dépends on the idea of séparation (1117)

implied in them; e.g. a irai s âppkvœv iraLôoiv destitute (childless) of maie children, X. C. 4, 6, 2; Tiprjs arcpos rrâaqs destitute of ail honor, Plat. Lg. 774 b; xpvuàrœv àdœpÔTaros most free from taking bribes, Thuc. 2, 65; àv-qvepov irâvTuv x^pbivœv free from the blast of every slorm, S. O. C. 677 ; àfbtpqros ôÇkoiv KWKvpaTœv without the Sound of shrïïl waïlings, S. Aj. 321. 1142. Some of these adjectives (1139) are kindred to verbs which take the accusative. E.g. kiri.crTrip.oiv Trjs Tkxvqs underslanding the art, Plat. G. 448 b (1103) ; kiuTqSevpa irôXeœs àvaTpeirTLKov a praclice subversive of a state, Plat. Rep. 389 d;

aWoiv, kavTov 5k iroXù KaKovpyÔTepos harmful to Others, far more harmful to himself, X. M. 1, 5, 3 ; avyyvchpoiv toiv àvdpœirLvoiv àpapTqpccTcov considerate of human faults, X. C. 6, 1, 37; avpfqcpôs aoL eipL tovtov tov vôpov I vote with you for this law, Plat. Rep. 380 c. KaKovpyos pev toiv

but

1143. The

possessive genitive sometimes follows adjectives de-

noting possession. E.g.

toiv k<fieutqkotoiv 'Lôlol the risks belong especially to the men in authority, Dem. 2, 28 ; lepos ô x^pos Trjs 'Aprépiôos the place is sacred to Artemis, X. An. 5, 3, 13; kolvov iràvtoiv common to ail, Plat. Symp.

ol klvôvvol

205

adjectives, see 1175. genitive sometimes dénotés mere connection-, e.g. uvyyevqs avrov a relative of his, X. C. 4, 1, 22; ZœKpârovs ôpcovvpos a namesake of Socrates, Plat. Soph. 218 b. The adjective is here really used as a substantive. Such adjectives naturally take the dative (1176). b. Here probably belongs kvayqs tov 'AirôWœvos accursed (in the sight) of Apollo, Aeschin. 3,110; also kvayeîs nal àXcTqpLoi. Trjs deov accursed of the goddess, Thuc. 1,126, and ka toiv àXcTqpLoov tûv Trjs deov Ar. Eq. 445 ; — kvayqs etc. being really substantives. For the dative with such

1144.

Such

242

GREEK GRAMMAR

1145. After some adjectives the genitive can be best explained as depending on the substantive implied in them; e.g. rrjs àpxvs vwevOwos responsible for the office, i.e. liable to evdwai for it, Dem. 18,117 (see ôkôuKâ ye evdwas hueLvcov, in the same section) ; irapdkvoi. y à pu y ùpaïaL maidens ripe for marriage, i.e. having reached the âge (upa) for marriage, Hdt. 1,196 (see ês y âpov uprjv àTvuiopkvgv, Hdt. 6, 61) ; f>ôpov viroTeXeîs subject to the payment (réXos) of tribute, Thuc. 1, 19. 1146. Some adjectives of place, like kvavHos opposite, may take the genitive instead of the regular dative (1175), but chiefly in poetry; e.g. 'evavtlol ecrrav 'kx^t-ûv they stood opposite the Achaeans, II. 17, 343; tov Uôvtov ettikapcncu at an angle with the Pontus, Hdt. 7, 36.

Genitive with Comparatives

Adjectives and adverbs of the comparative degree may genitive of séparation or distinction (1117) instead of the conjunction f) than and another case. 1147.

have the

KpelrTuv kart tovtuv he is better than they (— kpsLttuv ij ovtol se. eicri) ; vkois to oiyâv kpeïttov kcrri tov XaXeîv for the young silence is better than too much talk (= r) to XaXeLV, 1545), Men. Mon. 387 ; TrovqpLa 6S.ttov davâTov 6eî wickedness runs faster than death, Plat. Ap. 39 a. 1148. Ail adjectives and adverbs which imply a comparison may take genitive : e.g. êVepot tovtuv others than these, vattpoi ttjs pàxvs too late for (later than) the battle, Tfj vo-Tepaia Trjs piixvs on the day after the battle. So TpLirXàcnov rjpûv thrice as much as we. 1149. The genitive is less common than g when, if g were used, it would be followed by any other case than the nominative or the accusative without a préposition. Thus, for ë^etrrt ô' gpiv pâXXov kTkpuv and we can (do this) better than others (Thuc. 1, 85) pâXXov g kTkpois would be more common. See X. M. 3, 5, 16 in 1159. 1150. After irXkov (irXeîv) more, or 'éXaTTov less, g is occasionally omitted before a numéral without affecting the case; e.g. irkpfu opvls kir' avTÔv, Tr'heîv kl; a ko a tov s tov àpiOpov I will send birds against him, more than six hundred in number, Ar. Av. 1251. a

Genitive with Adverbs 1151. The

and

genitive is used with adverbs derived from adjectives participles which take the genitive. E.g.

they who are acquainted with him ; àvaÇius Trjs iroXeus unworthy of the state ; tuv aWuv 'kdgv aLuv àirâvTuv SuMfrepôvTus beyond ail the other Athenians, Plat. Crito 52 b; kpâxovTo àÇlus \6yov theyfought in a manner worthy of note, Hdt. 6, 112. So kvavrtov (1146).

oi kpiretpus avTov 'éxovTes

way

GENITIVE 1152. The

genitive follows

many

243

adverbs of place. E.g.

within the fortreSS ; e£a> tov reLxovs OUtside of the wall ; ektôs 7w opo:v beyond the boundaries; x^pis tov a do par os apart from the body; irepav tov irorapod acTOSS the river, Thuc. 6, 101 ; irpôadev tov arpaTOTréôov in front of the camp, X. H. 4,1, 22; âp<poTkpcodev rrjs ôbov on both sides of the road, ibid. 5, 2, 6 ; evâù rrjs «tao-rçÀiôos straight towards Phasëlis, Thuc. 8, 88.

e'Laœ

tov

epvpaTos

1153. Such adverbs, besides those given above, are chiefly kvros within ; ôtxa apart from; kyyvs, âyxh 7réXas, and irh-qatov near; iroppoi (irpoaœ) far from ; oino-oev and kototylv behind ; and a few others of similar meaning.

with most of them can be explained as a partitive genitive genitive of séparation ; with ev6v, for example, it is partitive (1099), ablative (1117). For the dative in poetry, see 1190.

The genitive

or as a

with

1154. A6.9pa (Ionic XàOpy) and Kpv4>a, without the knowledge of, sometimes take the genitive; e.g. Xàdpy Aaopéôovros without the knowledge of Laomedon, II. 5, 269 ; Kptxpa rûv 'Adr/vatuiv, Thuc. 1, 101. on

1155. "Avev and àrep without, a-XPL and péxpt until, 'éveKaÇëtveKa, ovvena) account of, pera^v between, and tv\t]v except, take the genitive like

prépositions. See 1227.

Genitive Ahsolute 1156. A

noun or

and

pronoun

participle not grammatically

connected with the main construction of the sentence may stand

by themselves in the genitive. E.g.

solute.

This is called the genitive ab-

tclût' èirpàxdr] kovoovos cttparriyovvtos thiswas done when Conon was gén¬ éral, IsOC. 9, 56; ovbkv tu>v beovroov iroLovvrœv vpœv kakoos rà TrpâypciTa 'éxei while you do nothing that you ought to do, affairs are in a bad state, Dem. 4, 2 ; deûv bibovtoov ovk âv kKcpvyoi KaKa if the gods should grant

(it to be so), he could not escape evils, Aesch. Sev. 719 ; ovtos ye \fevbovs àiràrr) when there is falsehood, there is deceit, Plat. Soph. 260 c.

eariv

See 1571 and 1566.

DATIVE

1157. The primary use of the dative case is to dénoté that to or for which anything is or is done : this includes the dative of the remote or indirect object, and the dative of advantage or disadvantage. The dative also dénotés that by which or with which, and the time (sometimes the

place) in which, anything takes place, also

instrumental and

into datives

locative

of interest. Cf. 1040.

—

case.

i.e. it is not merely

Most datives may

dative, but be resolved

GREEK GRAMMAR

244

Dative

1158. The indirect

in the dative. to.

Expressing to

for

Dative of the Indirect Object

■

object of the action of a transitive verb is put

This object is generally introduced in English by

E.g.

ôlôcooi

piaQov tQ> crtp aTeiipar i lie gives pay to the army; VTriaxveÎTai aoi he promises y OU ten talents ; eXe^av ra> fi a cr iXeî rà yeyevrjpkva

ràXavra

ôé/ca

they

had happened; fiorjdeiav irkpfopev rois crvppâxois we allies (here the dative is not the end of the motion, but dénotés the persons interested in the sending). told the Icing what

will send aid- to

our

1159. Certain intransitive verbs

English

may

have

take the dative,

many

direct object without to. E.g.

of which

Ipray (to) the gods, Dem. 18,1 ; XvaireXovv r<3 'éxovri advanPlat. Rep. 392 c ; e'Lnova âvâyKjj rfjôe yielding to this necessity, Aesch. Ag. 1071 ; rois vôpois neLdovrai they are obedient to the laws (they obey the laws), X. M. 4, 4,15 ; fio-qdelv ôiKaioavvy to vindiCatejustice, Plat.Rep.427e ; ei rois irXkooiv àpkoKovTks kopev, TOÎaô' àvpôvois ovk. opdcôs àirapéa-KOLpep if we are pleasing to the majority, it cannot be right that we should be displeasing to these alone, Thuc. 1, 38 ; kirioTevov avrw al irôXeis the cities trusted him, X. An. 1, 9, 8; rots 'AOrjvalois irapfivei he used to advise the Athenians, Thuc. 1, 93 ; tov paXiara kiriTip.œi'Ta rois ireirpay pevois r/èetos âv epoLp-qv I should like to ask the man who censures most severely what has been done, Dem. 18, 64 ; tL kyKaXœv i]pïv éxix«peîs

ToîsOeoîs

evxopcLL

tageous to the possessor,

i]pas àiroXXvvai; what fault do you find with us that you try to destroy us? Plat. Crito 50 d ; tovtois pep^et rt; have you anything to blâme themfor? ibid. ; k-n-qpeàÇovaiv àXAijXois «ai <j>dovovaiv kavroîs pâXXov t) toîs âAAots àvdpânrois they revïle one than to other men, X. M. 3,

another, and 5,16

are more

malicious to themselves

kxaXkiraLvov rots arparriyoîs they were 1, 4,12 ; kpoi ôpyLÇovrai they are angry

;

with the générais, X. An. Plat. Ap. 23 c. So irp'eireL poi Xkyeiv it is becoming to me to speak, Trpoar]Kei poi it belongs to me, SoKeï poi it seems to me, ôokû pou methinks. angry

with me,

this class which are not translated with to English are chiefly those signifying to benefit, serve, obey, defend, assist, please, trust, satisfy, advise, exhort, or any of their opposites ; also those expressing friendliness, hostility, blâme, abuse, reproach, envy, anger, threats. 1161. The impersonals ôeï, pkreart, pkXei, perapkXei, and TTpocj'rjKei take the dative of a person with the genitive of a thing ; e.g. 5eï poi tovtov I have need of this, péTeart poi tovtov I have a share in this, pkXei poi tovtov I am interested in this, perapeXrjvei aùr<3 tovtojv he will be sorry for that, irpoo-quei 1160. The verbs of

DATIVE fxol tovtov

concerned in this. For the genitive,

e^ecrrt it is possible takes the dative alone.

245 see

1097 b, 1106,1115.

xpv take the accusative when an infinitive follows. For (in poetry) with the accusative and the genitive, see 1115.

1162. Aeî and bel

1163. Some verbs of this class (1160) may take the accusative; e.g.

blamed them, X. An. 2, 6, 30. Others, whose meaning would place them here (e.g. picréw haie), take only the accusative. Aoiôopéœ revile has the accusative, but XoLbopéopaL (middle) has the dative. 'OveiôLÇco reproach and è-n-LTLpœ censure have the accusative as well as the dative; we have also bvtlblçelv (kwltlpav) ri tlvl to cast a reproach (or cen¬ sure) on one. ilpwpeiv tlvl means regularly to avenge one (to take vengeance for him), tlpwpeiadal (rarely tlpœpezv) tlvo. to punish one (to avenge oneself on him) : see X. C. 4, 6, 8, tlpu>pr]aelv col tov iraLbos tov <f>ovea invloxvovpal I promise to avenge you on the murderer of your son (or for your son, 1121). Borjdeïv corne to the aid of has the dative ; but oxpeXelv help more often has ovôels avroiis kpkpcfreTo no one

the accusative.

1164.

Verbs of ruling, which take the genitive in prose (1109), have

also the dative in poetry, especially in Homer; e.g. iroXXfja-Lv vtjo-olœl Kal "Apyeï iravri âvàcraeLv to be lord over many islands and ail Argos, II. 2,108; bapov ovk ap&l 6eoîs he will not rule the gods long, Aesch. Pr. 940. KeXeûw

command, which in Attic Greek has only the accusative (generally with the infinitive), has the dative in Homer ; see II. 2,50. b. 'ïLyéopaL in the sense of guide or direct takes the dative even in prose; e.g. ovkétl Tipïv 17717cerai. he will no longer be our guide, X. An. 3, 2, 20. Dative of Advantage or Disadvantage

thing for whose advantage or disadvantage anything is or is done is put in the dative (dativus commodi etincommodi). This dative is generally introduced in English by for. E.g. iras clvtjp clvtcû irovei every man labors for himself, S. Aj. 1366; ~E6\wv 'Adr/vaioLs vôpovs W-qKeSolonmade lawsfor the Athenians; naLpol irpoeîvraL rfj irôXeL opportunities have been let slip to (the détriment of) the state, 1165. The person or

Dem. 19, 8; 177617-0 avTÛv enacrros ovxl TQ xarpi Kal rfj prirpl povov yeyevrj&daL, àXXà Kal rfj TraTptbL each one of them believed that he was born not

merely for his father and mother, but for his country also, Dem. 18, 205.

found in statements of time ; e.g. had already passed away for him (i.e. he had seen them pass away), II. 1, 250 ; yp'epaL pàXLara fjo-avTy MvtlXtivu èaXa>KvLa kirrâ it was about seven days since the capture of Mitylene (lit. for Mitylene captured, 1564 b), Thuc. 3, 29; fjv yp'epa irépirTr] èirLirXéovcrL toïs 'AOyvatoLs it was the fifth day since the Athenians began to corne on in their ships, X. H. 2, 1, 27. See 1172 b.

1166. A peculiar use of this dative is rc3 77Ô17 bvo yeveal è^diaro two générations

246

GREEK GRAMMAR

1167. Here belong such Homeric expressions as rotai ô' àvearp and he

up for them (i.e. to address them), II. 1, 68; rotai pWœv fjpx<w he hegan speak (1099) before them {for them), Od. 1, 28. Cf. 1178.

rose

accusative of the dative of the person; e.g. a avaoîai Xoiyov apwov ward off destruction from the Danai (lit. for the Danai), II. 1, 456. Here the accusa¬ tive may be omitted, so that Aavaotai àpweiv means to defend the Danai. For other constructions of àpwu see the Lexicon, and cf. npupeîv, 1163. 1168. In Homer, verbs signifying to ward off take an

thing and

similar idiom ; e.g. ôéÇarô ot from him (lit. for him), II. 2, 186. 1170. Sometimes this dative has a force which seems to approach that of the possessive genitive ; e.g. yXôiaaa be ol ôéôerai and his tongue is tied (lit .for him), Theognis 178; ol iimoi avrol s bebevrai they have their horses tied (lit. the horses are tied for them), X. An. 3,4, 35. The dative here is the dativus incommodi (1165). 1171. Here belongs the so-called ethical dative, in which the Personal pronouns have the force of for my sake etc. Sometimes it has emotional effect ; e.g. rt aoi paBpaopai; what am I to learn, please you? Ar. Nub. 111 ; tovtoj iràw poi irpoaexete T°v vovv to this, I beg you, give your close attention, 1169. Aexopai receive takes a dative by a

aKyjirrpov he took his sceptre

Dem. 18, 178. For a dative with the dative of ftovXôpepos etc., see 1586.

Dative of Relation

1172. ment is

than to

The dative may dénoté a person to whose case a statelimited, — often belonging to the whole sentence rather any spécial word. E.g. a.

tQ> y>ofiovpevip xfoifreî everything sounds to one who is afraid, S. frag. a <fr <2 v pèv èvroXf) Aiàs i=x« réXos as regards you two, the order of Zeus is fully executed, Aesch. Pr. 12; ir7toX au fi Ivpilw 5et t2 toiovtco on €v7]d7)s ris àisdpùmos with regard to such a one we must suppose that he is a simple

airavra

58 ;

person,

Plat. Rep. 598 d; ré^x' vptv rraKai I have long been dead to thought), S. Ph. 1030 ; wâai vikolv toîs Kpiraîs of ail the judges, Ar. Av. 445.

you (in your eyes or as you to be the best in the opinion

b. So in such

général expressions as these: kv Ôefiâ kairXkovri on the sait in {with respect to one sailing in), Thuc. 1,24; aweXovn Or ws avveXovri eiireîv concisely or to speak concisely (lit. for one who has made the matter concise). So As kpot in my opinion. See 1166. right

as you

Dative 1173. The dative with

dénoté the possessor.

E.g.

Possession

pi, ylyvopai., and similar verbs

may

DATIVE daiv è/j.oi ê/ceî féwi

247

I have (sunt mihi) friends there, Plat. Crito 45 c;

rts

^oppaxos yevrjaeTai poi; what ally shall I find? Ar. Eq. 222 ; aXXots pèv xpvparâ kcrri 7roXXâ, r/pîv ôè Çvn/xaxot àyadoL others have plenty of money, but we have good allies, Thuc. 1, 86.

Dative 1174.

The dative,

of Agent

denoting the person interested, may appear pluperfect passive, rarely with

the agent with the perfect and other passive tenses (1236). E.g. as

Treirpo-KTaL rots aXXois to ask what has been done by the others, 2, 27 ; kweiôr) aùroïs irapeaKevauTo when préparation had been made by them (when they had their préparations made), Thuc. 1,46; iroXXat OepoLirtiat. rots iarpoîs TjvprjvTaL many cures have been discovered by physicians, Isoc. 8, 39 ; rots hLepKvpaioLs ovx kwp&vTo (ai vijes) the ships were not visible to the Corcyraeans, Thuc. 1, 51.

e^erâcraL ri Dem.

adjective in -réos, in its personal construction (1597), the agent is expressed by the dative; in its impersonal construction (1599), by the dative or the accusative. b. With the verbal

Dative with Adjectives, Adverbs, and Substantives

adjectives, adverbs, and sub¬ with the verbs of 1160 and 1165. E.g. Svapevris cfrL'Kot.'; hostile to friends, E. Med. 1151 ; ïnroxos rots fôyuois subject to the laws', kiriKlvôwov rf) TrôXet dangerous to the state; fiXaPepov rû adopaTL hurtful to the body; evvovs èavr<2 kind to himself ; evavTios avrCi opposed to him (cf. 1146) ; roîaô' airacrt. kolvov common to ail these, Aesch. Ag. 523; crvp4>epovrtos avrû> profitably to himself ; 'epiro5ù>v kpot in my way ; rà irap' -qpwv ôû>pa rots 9eots the gifts (given) by us to the gods, Plat. Euthyph. 15a. So with an objective genitive and a dative; e.g. é7rt KaTaôov\co<T€L Tccv "EXX^fcof 'AdrjvaLoLs for the subjugation of the Greeks 1175. The dative follows many

stantives of kindred meaning

to the

Athenians, Thuc. 3,10.

1176. The dative is thus

used with ail words implying likeness

unlikeness. Here it is not always possible to from the instrumental dative. E.g. or

distinguish it

koikores like shadows', to ô/dotow kavtov âXXw the making oneself like another, Plat. Rep. 393 c; roôrots ôpolôtcltov most like these, Plat. G. 513 b; cÔ7rXicrfx'evoi rois aôrots K6pa> Ô7rXots armed with the same arms as Cyrus, X. C. 7,1, 2 ; fj ôpoLov ovtos roûrots fj àvopotov being either like or unlike these, Plat. Ph. 74 c ; ôpotws Skatof àôt/cw (3\à\peiv that he will punish ajust and an unjust man alike, Plat. Rep. 364 c ; levai. àXXiîXots

<r/ctats

248

GREEK GRAMMAR

àvoijlolœs to move unlike one another, Plat. Tim. 36 d ; top ôpcbpvpop é/xaurw namesake, Dem. 3, 21 ; ovre èavroîs ovre âXXyXoi.s 6poXoyovan.p they

neither with themselves nor with one another, Plat. Phdr. 237 c ; fjp ôyoypwnwp he was of the same mind with him, Thuc. 8, 92 ; âroxos 0/j.olôtys tovtojp ètceipois remarkable is the likeness of these to the others,

agree avTÛ y

Plat. Th. 158

1177. After adjectives of likeness an abridged form of expression (brachylogy) may be used; e.g. kôpai. Xapireo-olp àpoïai hair like (that of) the Grâces> II. 17, 51; ràs 'Laas TrXyyàs tfioL the same number of blows

receive, Ar. R. 636. Cf. "an

that I

Dative with

eye

like Mars."

Compound Verbs

1178. The dative with many compound verbs must be interpreted from the context. E.g. "Rpy <5' àvearp "Apre/jus Artemis opposed Hera (1175), II. 20, 70 ; x^pa iropyos avécrra he arose as a tower (of strength) to the land, S. 0. T. 1201.

compounded with avv and compounded with év or hrL, and with some compounded irpbs, irapà, irepi, and virô. E.g.

1179. The dative is used with verbs many

with rots

opKoi s kppéveL ô ôrjpos the people abide by the oaths, X. H. 2, 4, 43 ; ai... f]8ovai fvxy èTTLOTrip.rip ovôepLap èpTroiovcnp (such) pleasures produce no knowledge in the soul, X. M. 2,1, 20 ; èvéKeivTo r$ Ilept/cXer they attacked Pericles, Thuc. 2, 59; èpavrœ avpfiôri ovôèv eTnarapépcp I was conscious

(lit. shared with myself the knowledge) that I knew nothing, Plat. Ap. 22 d ;

r/ôy irork croi èirrjXOev; did it ever OCCUr to you? X. M. 4, 3, 3 ; TrpocréfiaWov rœ Teixt<rna-TL they attacked the fortification, Thuc. 4, 11 ; dSeX^ôs àpôpl ■wapetr] let a brother stand byaman (i.e. let a man's brother stand byhim), Plat. Rep. 362d; rots kokols irepL-n-LirTovcn.p they are involved in evils, X. M. 4, 2, 27 ; Ù7rô/ceirat to ireôiop t£ iepû the plain lies below the temple, Aeschin. 3,118.

Instrumental Dative Instrumental Proper

dative, representing the lost instrumen¬ (1040), may dénoté the means, manner, or cause (instru¬ ment proper), or association and accompaniment (sociative or comitative dative). 1180. The instrumental

tal

case

1181. The dative is used to dénoté cause, manner,

instrument. Cause

tovto

and

means or

E.g.

vôaœ àiroOavùv

having died of disease, Thuc. 8, 84

Troieî, âXX' àypoig. for he does not do this from

;

où yàp kakopoîç.

ill-will, but from

DATIVE

249

ignorance, X. C. 3,1,38; /Siafopevoi tov irieiv kmdvpia forced by a désire to drink, Thuc. 7, 84; a'iaxvvopai toi raïs irpoTepov àpaprLais I am ashamed of (because of) my former faults, Ar. Nub. 1355. Manner: ôpopœ Uvto ès tous (3ap(3âpovs they rushed upon the barbarians in double time, Hdt. 6, 112 ; Kpavyfj 7roXAg eiriaaiv they will advance with a loud shout, X. An. 1, 7,4; rfj àXydeLq. in truth', rû ôvti in reality, fila forcibly, ravrrj in this manner, thus ; Xàyœ in word ; ëpycp in deed ; rfj kp.fi yvùpy in my judgment; iôiq. privately; b-qpoolq. publicly, Koivfi in common. Means or Instrument: ôpœpev rots à<pdaXpoîs we see with our eyes; yvœaôkvTes rfj aKevfj tûv ottXojv recognized by the fashion of their arms, Thuc. 1, 8; naKoîs lâaOai Kanâ to cure evils by evils,S.frag.75', ovôels eiraivov rjdovaîs kKTTjaaro no one gains praise by (indulging in) pleasures, Stob. 29, 31. 1182. The dative of respect is a form of the dative of manner ; e.g.

rots

<jûp.aaiv àôwaroi, . . . raïs fvxaîs àvo7]Toi incapable in their bodies, senseless in their minds, X. M. 2, 1, 31; varepov ôv rfj t à £ et, irporepov rfj ôvvàpei Kal KpeÎTrov èanv although it is later in order, it is prior and superior .

Dem. 3, 15. So irôXis, OâfaKos ovopari a city, Thapsacus by X. An. 1, 4,11. Cf. 1056. 1183. Xpâopaito use (to serve one's self by) has the instrumental dative ; e.g. xpûvrai àpyvpLiç they use money. A neuter pronoun (e.g. tL, ri, o rt, or tovto) may be added as a cognate accusative (1049) ; e.g. tL xpv^erai iroT aùrcS ; what will he ever do with him? (lit. what use will he make of him?), Ar. Ach. 935. So occasionally voplfœ ; e.g. àyibai Kal dva'iais ôieryaLois vop.'ifovres holding games and yearly festivals, Thuc. 2, 38. in power,

name,

1184. The dative of ttoààw riva

is used with comparatives to dénoté

manner

the degree of différence.

E.g.

KpeiTTÔv kuTiv it is much better (better by much) ; kàv rfj ne<paXrj pd'çovâ (pfjs elvai Kal êXàrrco if you say that anyone is a head tôlier or shorter

(lit. by the head), Plat. Ph. 101

7TÔXt Xoyîpip y 'EXXàs ykyove àa-devearépr) illustrions city, Hdt. 6,106 ; totoùtic ySiov Çû I live so much the more happily, X. C. 8, 3, 40 ; rex-v S' àvàyxys àadevearepa paKpû and art is weaker than necessity by far, Aesch. Pr. 514. a;

Greece has become weaker by one

and even with other expres¬ imply comparison ; e.g. opOorara paKpû most correctly by far, Plat. Lg, 768 c; axeSof ôkKa 'éreai irpo rrjs kv HaXapivi vavpaxlos about ten years before the sea-fight at Salamis, ibid. 698 c. But the neuter pronouns ovbkv (prjôkv), rt, and rt are in the accusative with a comparative; e.g. ovôkv rjrTov none the less, just as much. 1185. So sometimes with superlatives,

sions which

Dative

Accompaniment

by which thing is accompanied (sociative dative). E.g.

1186. The dative is used to dénoté that or

any person

GREEK GRAMMAR

250

crrt/3o) t&v ïinrcov 'éirecrdai to

t(2>

follow the horses' tracks, X. An. 7, 3, 43 ;

Hepcrœv\rapi.irX.T]9eî crrôXaj when the Persians came with an army in full force, X. An. 3, 2, 11 ; ypeîs Kal ïirirois toÎ s SwarcoTctTOis Kal âvôp àa i iropevcôpeda let us march with the strongest horses and men, X. C. 5, 3,35; ol AaKeôaipovioi rt3 re narà yrjv arparQ irpocré(3aXXov tQ TtixlapaTi Kal rats vavaiv the Lacedaemonians attacked the wall both with their land forces and with their ships, Thuc. 4, 11. èXQovTcov

1187. This dative sometimes takes the dative of avrôs for emphasis; e.g.

p.lav (vavv) avroîs àvôpaulv éVXov

they took one (ship), men and ail,

Thuc. 2, 90; xaUaL PaXe ôévôpea paKpà avTfjaiv pLÇrjcri Kal avroîs âvdecri prfXa>v he threw to the ground tall trees, with their very roots and their fruit-blossoms, IL 9, 541.

1188. The dative is

used with words implying agreement or

disagreement, union or approach. E.g.

èxdpol àXX^Xois friends dispute friends, but enemies quarrel with one another, Plat. Prot. 337 b ; toîs Trovr]poîs ôiacfrépecrdai. to be at variance with the bad, X. M. 2, 9, 8 ; kokoîs ôpiXûv associating with bad men, Men. Mon. 274; rots ($pOVlp(X>t o.tois TrXrjala^e draw near to the wisest, Isoc. 2,13 ; âXXots Koivœveîv to share with others, Plat. Rep. 369 e; to èavtov epyov airacri kolvov katatiokvai, to make his work common to ail, ibid. ; ôebpevoi tovs 4>evyovtas £waXXà£at cr<f>icrL asking to bring the exiles to terms with them, Thuc. 1,24; povXopai ae aûrc2 ôiaXéyeadai I want you to converse with him, Plat. Lys. 211 c; irpoo(3oXàs -n-oiovpevoi tQ> retx« making assaults upon the wall, Thuc. 4, 23 ; kiravâaTaais pépovs tlvos

àpcf>l(rl3r]tovai,p ol 4>LXoi toîs 4>L\ols, tplÇovoi ht ol with

oXcp rrjs fvxvs a

Plat. Rep.

444 b.

rébellion of

one

part of the soul against the whole,

1189. To this class belong p.âxop.ai fight, iroXepkœ make war, and similar expressions ; e.g. pàxeadai toîs Qri(3aiois to fight against the Thebans, iroXepovaiv ripîv they are at war with us. So ès x«tpas ëXdeîv tlvl or ès Xôyovs kXdeîv tivi to corne to a conflict (or a conférence) with any one, <5tà <£tXtas levai tlvl to be on friendly terms with one. See Thuc. 7, 44 ; 8, 48. X. An. 3, 2, 8. 1190. The dative thus dépends on adverbs of place and time; e.g. âpa Tj) f/pépa at daybreak ; vôœp bpov râ -rryXœ ypaTwpévov water stained with blood together with the mud, Thuc. 7, 84 ; rà tovtols ètfieÇrjs what cornes next to this, Plat. Tim. 30 c; roto-5' èyyvs nigh unto these, E. Her. 37 (èyybs usually has the genitive, 1153).

Locative Dative

frequently represents the lost locative case Mapadûvl at Marathon, kvkXcp in a circle, rfjôe this way,

1191. The dative

(1040)

here.

; e.g.

The locative dative may dénoté place or date.

251

DATIVE

only in adverbial forms ; where, ryeî there.

The true locative survives

(lit. wheré), Dor.

Dative

there, el if

Place

poetry, the dative without place where. E.g.

1192. In

the

e.g. «m

préposition often dénotés

inhabiting dwellings in Hellas, II. 16, 595; aidepi vatœv dwelling in heaven, II. 4,166; ovpeaL on the mountains, II. 13, 390; rô£' &p.oLCTLv exw having his bow on his shoulders, II. 1, 45 ; p.tpvei ày pû he remains in the country, Od. 11, 188 ; fjcrdai ôôpoLs to sit at home, Aesch. Ag. 862 ; vvv ày polo 1 rvyxàvei (se. ù3v) now he happens to be in the country, S. El. 313 ; adkvos ûpae èKâarœ xapôtr] she roused strength in each man's heart, II. 11, 11 (yet for this cf. 906).

'EXXôAi olkLo. vaLœv

the dative of place is chiefly used of Attic demes pdxv the battle of Marathon, Ili;0ot at Pytho (Delphi). Ordinarily a préposition is used ; e.g. kv 'AdpvaLs in Athens (place where), eis 'Adyvas to Athens (place whither). 1193. In prose,

and

few other proper names ; e.g. 17 Mapadœvi

Dative

Time

préposition often dénotés time when. date, E.g. rfj avrfj ripkpq. àirkdavev he died on the same day, ("Eppaî) pLÔ. vvktl oi 7rXeî<TTCH irepLtKoiryaav the most of the Hermae were mutilated in one night, Thuc. 6, 27 ; oi ~Zàp.LOL è^6Tro\i.opK7]Ôr)o~ai' kv àrcù p-qvl the Samians were taken by siege in the ninth month, Thuc. 1,117; ôeKârcp érei Çvvkfiyaav they came to 1194. The dative without

This is confined chiefly to words which express definitely a such as the day, night, month, or year, and names of festivals.

Thuc. 1,103 ; œanepel Qeap.c>4>opLois vyaTevopev fast as if it were (on) the Thesmophoria, Ar. Av. 1519. So rrj varepata (se. ypépg.) on the following day, and ôevrépa, rptry, on the second, third, etc., in giving the day of the month.

terms in the tenth year, we

1195. Even the words mentioned, except names of

festivals, generally

modifying word is joined with them. Thus h vvktL at night (rarely, in poetry, vvktL) , but pea wktL in one night ; occasionally rc3 avrœ xecpûvL in the same winter, but more often kv tQ> avrû x^-i^vl, Thuc. 2, 34. Titles of books are often thus given in citation: EvplttLôtis 'AX/crço-nôi in Euripides, Alcestis.

take kv when

expressions occur like ùo-répw xp°vy in after time, in the winter season, vovpyla (new-moon day) on the first of the month, and others in poetry. 1196. A few

œpq.

GREEK GRAMMAR

252

PREPOSITIONS

prépositions were originally adverbs, and as such in composition with verbs (see 868 a). They are used also as independent words, to connect substantives with other parts of the sentence. 1198. Homer often shows the original adverbial use of the préposition, e.g. àiro iro.Tpi <£tAa> 56/j.evaL Koûprjv back to her dear father to give the maiden, II. 1, 98, which gradually became warpl àiroôovvai to restore to her father, in which the adverb becomes part of the verb. In other instances it is connected more closely with the substantive, e.g. é£ 6x^v avv revxecrLv a.\ro forth from the chariot he leapt with ail his arms, II. 4, 419, so that the préposition is felt to govern the substantive. 1199. Tmesis (récris cutting, from répvw eut) is a term applied to the artificial séparation of a préposition from its verb in poetry after Homer, especially by the interposition of enclitics and particles; e.g. irpô ye arevàfeLs too soon you mourn, Aesch. Pr. 696. 1200. In général, the meaning proper to a case when used alone is retained when the case follows a préposition. The accusative dénotés that toward which, over which, along which, or upon which motion is directed ; the genitive, that from which anything pro1197. The

they

appear

(ablatival), or connection of any kind; the dative, that in which, near which, or with which (instrumental) anything is done. Thus irapâ near, by the side of, is modified in meaning by the case following it ; e.g. ttapà tov /3acrtXécos from (the side of) the king, irapà tû j3ao-tXet beside the king (or at the court), irapà top iSaaîKea into the king's presence (1220). 1201. The original adverbial use of the prépositions sometimes appears when they are used without a case ; this occurs especially in the older .Greek, seldom in Attic prose. Thus irepL round about or exceedingly, in Homer; and xpôs 5é or Kal irpôs and besides (occasionally in Attic prose), év ôé and among them, kirl ôé and upon this, perà ôé and next, in Herodotus. 1202. Position, a. A préposition sometimes follows its case, or a verb to which it belongs; e.g. veûv dxo; ôXéo-as d-n-o, Od. 9, 534. For the accent (anastrophe), see 135, 136. Attic prose admits this only with irtpL ; e.g. &v èyù ovôèv irépi èiraiœ which I don't profess any knowledge about, Plat. Ap. 19 c. b. A préposition may be separated from its case by particles, such as p.év, ôé, ye, re, y dp, ovv ; by the parenthetical olpai I think ; by attributives modifying the noun. c. In poetry a préposition often stands between a noun and its attribu¬ tive ; e.g. r/perépeo évl oïkcc in our house, II. 1, 30. This order, very common in Latin, is rare in Attic prose. ceeds

PREPOSITIONS

253

1203. A few prépositions are used adverbially, with a verb (generally èari) understood ; e.g. irâpa for iràpeo-TL, 'éiri and péra (in Homer) for eireuTL andpérearL. So'évLÎOT ëvecrTL, and poetic âva up! for àvàara (àvàaTydi). For the accent, see 135 b.

1204.

genitive,

Sometimes els with the accusative, and é/c or àirô with the

used in expressions which themselves imply no motion, with motion implied or expressed in the context; e.g. al Çvvoôol ks to lepov 'eylyvovto the synods were held in the temple (lit. into the temple, involving the idea of going into the temple to hold the synods), Thuc. 1, 96 ; roïs 'en IIûAou Xy^deiar (èoLKÔres) lilce the men captured (in Pylos, and brought home) from Pylos, i.e. the captives from Pylos, Ar. Nub. 186; ôiypiraaTo Kal avrà rà àiro rG>v o'lklûv £6Aa even the very timbers in the houses (lit. from the housCs) had been stolen, X. An. 2, 2,16 ; ot 'en tt}s àyopàs KaraXi.irovres rà &>via 'é<t>vyov the people in the market-place abandoned their wares and fled, X. An. 1, 2, 18; ovx oloi t 'éipaaav elvaL tovs en rrjs doXarrys àveXéadai they said that they were unable to pick up the men in the water, Lys. 12, 36. See Plat. Ap. 32 b, where tov s 'en rijs vavpaxlas is used of the same are reference to

some

event.

b. So 'ev with the dative sometimes occurs with verbs of motion, referring to rest which follows the motion ; e.g. 'ev râ iroTapûi ëireaov they fell (into and remained) in the river, X. Ages. 1, 32 ; 'ev yovvacn irîirTe Aahvris she fell in Dione's lap, II. 5, 370: see S. El. 1476. These (a and b) are instances of the so-called constructiopraegnans. c. Source or starting-point often détermines the choice of a préposi¬ tion; e.g. àiro iraiàtuv âpÇàpevoi beginning with boyhood, Hdt. 3, 11. Especially with verbs of tying ; e.g. é£ àÇlov tov £ûàou (à-n-ày^audai) to hang oneself on a proper beam, Ar. R. 736; naTaôyaas àiro ôévôpœv tovs lirirovs tying his horses to trees, X. H. 4, 4,10.

1205. Adverbs of place are sometimes interchanged in the same way (1204) ; e.g. 6-iroi nadéoTapev where we are standing (lit. whither we have set OUrselves, 1250 c), S. O. C. 23; tLs àyvoeï TOV 'eneldev iroKepov ôevpo r/ÇovTa; war that is there will corne hither? Dem. 1, 15. this side and on that, like 'en <5e£i£s (a dextra) on the

who does not know that the So ëvdev nal ëvdev

right. Cf. 1204

préposition is often followed by its compound verb. E.g.

1206. A

part of

own case

when it is

irapeKoplfovTo tt)v 'IraXtav they sailed along the coast of Italy, Thuc. 6, 44 ; ecrrfKd'e pe it occurred to me, Hdt. 7, 46 ; è£eX(9érco tls oupàTcov let some one

forthfrom the house, Aesch. Ch. 663 ; Çwéirpaaaov avTÛ 'kp4>L<r<jrjs the Amphisseans assisted him, Thuc. 3, 101. For other examples of the genitive, see 1132; for those of the dative, see 1179. corne

1207.

take the genitive only : àvrl, àiro, é£(é/c), irpô. only : 'ev, <rvv.

Four prépositions

b. Two take the dative

GREEK GRAMMAR

254 c.

only : àvà, els (es). genitive and accusative : àp<pl, ôià, Karà, perd, virkp. Five take the genitive, dative, and accusative: kirl, irapà, irepl,

Two take the accusative

d. Five take the e.

irpôs, vttô.

in prose. For àvà and perd with the dative in poetry, for àp<j>l with the dative in poetry and Hdt., see 1209. For the improper prépositions, see 1227. These

see

are

the

1210, 1219

uses

;

(of source) is used with différent prépositions to the agent. With virô by, the regular préposition in prose with a passive verb, the genitive dénotés persons or things personified ; with 7Tapd from the idea of source is uppermost ; with Scà through, the intermediary; with âx6 from, the starting-point, denoting in conséquence of (often in Thucydides) ; é£ from denoting source is common in Hdt. and in poetry; irpôs in the presence of, and therefore with the connivance of, especially in Hdt. and in poetry. 1208. The genitive

express

LIST OF PREPOSITIONS

1209. <x|Ju|h (Lat. amb-, cf. apcfœ both), originally on both sides of ; hence about. Chiefly poetic and Ionic. In Attic prose chiefly with the accusative, but rrepi is more common.

in prose), about, concerning: àp<t>i Aesch. Ag. 62. b. With the dative (only poetic and Ionic), about, concerning, on acCOUnt of : àpff ccpoiOL about his shoulders, II. 11, 527 ; àpipi râ vôpco tovto) concerning this law, Hdt. 1, 140 ; àp4>i <£6/3w through fear, E. Or. 825. c. With the accusative, about, near, of place, time, number, etc. : àpff a\a by the sea, II. 1, 409 ; àp<j>l ôelXyv towards evening, X. C. 5, 4,16 ; àp<pl IIXeiâ<W bbaLv about (the time of) the Pleiads' setting, Aesch. Ag. 826. So àp4>l ôeùrvov elxev he was at dinner, X. C. 5, 5, 44. ol àp4>l Kvpov Cyrus and his staff (those in the entourage of Cyrus) ; ol àpfil nxàrùwa Plato and his school (in later Greek Platonists or simply Plato, 950 b). In comp. : about, on both sides, in two ways (cf. âpct>L(3o'kos ambiguous). a.

With the genitive (very rare

ywaiKos

about

1210. dvd a.

With the

staff, II. 1, 15.

a woman,

(cf. adv. dative

avec

above), originally

(only epic and lyric),

(opposed to Karà).

up on:

àvà

oKpirrpoô

on a

b. With the accusative, up along ; and of motion over, through, among (cf karâ)l (1) of place: àvà tov Trorapov up the river, Hdt. 2, 96; àvà OTparov throughout the host, II. 1,10 ; ohcelv àvà rà opy to dwell on the tops of the hills, X. An. 3, 5,16. (2) of time : àvà tov TroXepov through the war, Hdt. 8, 123 ; àvà xpàvov in course of time, Hdt. 5, 27. .

PREPOSITIONS

255

(3) in distributive expressions : àvà Skotov by hundreds, X. An. 5, 4, 12 ; àvà irâaav ripkprjv every day, Hdt. 2, 37 (so X. C. 1, 2, 8). In comp. : up (cf. àvafiaLvui go up), back (cf. àvax^peco retire), again (cf.

àj<a7râX\a!

swing back andforth).

dvTL, with genitive only, instead of, for : àpri iroKépov eipyvyv eKccpeda in place of war let us choose peace, Thuc. 4, 20 ; àvd' œv wherefore, Aesch. Pr. 31 ; avr âôe\(j)ov for a brother's sake, S. EL 537. Original meaning, over against, against. 1211.

comp. :

against, in opposition, in return, instead.

1212. diro

(Lat. ab), with genitive only, from, off from, away from ; originally (as opposed to 4£) denoting séparation or départure from something : (1) of

place: àff lirirwv à\ro he leaped from the car (fiorses), II. 16, 733; 9a\àaar]s at o distqnce from the sea, Thuc. 1, 7. (2) of time : àito tovtov tov xp°vov from this time, X. An. 7, 5, 8. (3) of cause or origin: (X7TO tovtov tov ToXpr] pO.tos èlTT}véO'l] fût this bold OCt he was praised, Thuc. 2, 25; to Çrjv àiro iroXepov to live by war, Hdt. 5, 6; àP ov ripets yeyôvapev from whom we are sprung, Hdt. 7,150; sometimes the agent (1208): kwpàxdg àP avrûv ovS'ev nothing was done by them, Thuc. 1,17. In comp. : from, away, off, in return, back (cf. àiroSLôœpi. give what is due). àiro

Also négative (âirayopevu forbid) and intensive (àwocpaivoj show forth). 1213. 8ia a.

through.

With the genitive

(1) of place: ôià àairLôos fjhde it went through the shield, II. 7, 251. (2) of time : Sià wktos through the night, X. An. 4, 6, 22. (3) of intervals of time or place: <5ià iroWov xp°"ov after a long time, Ar. Pl. 1045 ; ôià Tptrgs gpepris every other day, Hdt. 2, 37 ; <5ià raxéœv soon after, Plat. Ap. 32 e. (4) of means : 'eKeye ôi' kppL-qvkws he spoke through an interpréter, X. An. 2,3,17. (5) in various phrases like ôd olktov lx^ to pity ; 5ià </>i\îas levai., to be onfriendly terms (1189). b. With the accusative

(1) of cause on

account of, by help of, by reason of : bià. tovto by help of Athena, Od. 8, 520 ; où 8d èpé not owing ôd avôpas àyadovs had it not been for some brave

or agency, on

this account ; Si' 'AOgvyv

Dem. 18,18; eî pg Lys. 12, 60 (1424). (2) of place or time, through, during (poetic) : ôià 8œpara through the halls, II. 1, 600 ; ôià vvKTa through the night, Od. 19, 66. In comp. (Lat. di-, dis-): through (SLafiaivœ cross, Siapâxopai fight it out) ; apart, throughly, i.e. thoroughly (ôiapirâÇœ tear in pièces, Siaefrdelpw destroy utterly) ; severally (SiaSlôiopi distribute, SiaXéyopaL converse). to me, men,

GREEK GRAMMAR

256

4s, with accusative only, into, to, originally (as opposed to é£) to within (Lat. in with the accusative) : eîs always in Attic prose, except in Thucydides, who has es. Both eis and es are for èvs ; see also kv. (1) of place: <5téfi-qaav ks 'ZineXiav they crossed over into Sicily, Thuc. 6, 2 ; sis TLkpaas eiropevero he departed for Persia (the Persians), X. C. 8, 5, 20; ks IlaXXiîvt)v reîxos the wall toward (looking to) Pallene, Thuc. 1, 56. (2) of TIME : ks vœ until dawn, Od. 11, 375 ; so of a time looked forward to : npoeïne rots kavrov eis tp'lttjv ripkpav napeîvaL he QCLVe notice to his men to be présent the next day but one, X. C. 3,1, 42. So eros eis 'éros from year to year, S. Ant. 340 ; eis 'eviavrov year in, year out, Solon 12, 47. So ks o until, 1214. 6is or

tov airavra xpôvov f01" atl time. (3) of number and measure : eis ôiaKoaiovs (amounting) to two hundred, eis bvvap.Lv to (the extent of) one's power. (4) of purpose or reference : iraLÔeveiv eis rrjv àper-qv to train for virtue, Plat. G. 519 e; eis navra irpœrov eïvai to befirstfor everything, Plat. Ch. 158 a; xpvcnpov e'Ls tl useful for anything. In comp. : into, in, to.

eis

1215.

4v, with

dative

in with the ablative ;

only, in (Hom. evl), équivalent to Lat.

(1) of place: kv SirâpTri in Sparta; — with words implying a number people, among: kv ywaiQ aXwpos brave among women, E. Or. 754; kv naiTL in the presence of ail', kv ôt/cacrraîs before (coram) a court', kv rots rpLânovra at meetings of the Thirty, Lys. 12, 6. (2) of time : kv tovtw râ eret in the course of this year ; kv x^p^vl in winter ; kv ereai nevT-qKovTa within fifty years, Thuc. 1, 118. (3) of other relations : figuratively, tov Hepmkka kv opyrj elxov they were angry with P. {held him in anger), Thuc. 2, 21 ; kv iroWfj ânopip rjaav they were in great perplexity, X. An. 3, 1, 2. Cause and dependence : kv râ deû to tovtov réXos rjv, ovk kv kpoL the issue of this was with (in the power of) God, not with me, Dem. 18, 193 ; kv ôopl pkv pot pâfa my staff of life is my of

(dépends on it), Archil. 2. Instrument: kv 'Ctvaioi xepo-t K^bevOeis tended in death by strangers' hands, S. El. 1141. As kv was the form out of which eis and ks were developed, kv allowed the accusative (like Latin in) in some dialects, especially Aeolic; e.g. kv spear

navra

vopov

In comp.

in :

every

in,

kind of government, Pind. P. 2, 86.

on,

at.

4k, with genitive only (Lat. ex, e), from, out of; originally (as contrasted with àirô) from within (cf. eis). (1) of PLACE : kic Sr-âprTjs 4>evyei he is banished from Sparta. (2) of time : 'en naXaioTCLTov from the most ancient time, Thuc. 1,18. (3) of origin : ovap 'en Alôs koTiv the dream cornes from Zeus, II. 1, 63. 1216.

PREPOSITIONS

257

So also with

passive verbs: ê/c 4>ot/3ou SapeLs destroyed by Phoebus, S. Plu. 335 (the agent viewed as the source), seldom in Attic prose. See 1208. (4) of ground for a judgment: k(3ov\evovTO ê/c tÛv irapovTOiv they took COV/ïlsel with a view to (starting from) the présent state of things, Thuc. 3, 29 ; é/c TovTœv aKonelv to consider in (the light of) these facts. In comp. : out, from, away, off, thoroughly (i=£oiôa know ail). 1217. a.

on, upon.

With the

(1) of

genitive :

place:

c7rc irvpyov ear-r/

he stood

on a

tower, II. 16, 700; sometimes

towards: irXevaavTes kirl ~Zàpov having saïled towards Samos, Thuc. 1, 116; so kirl rrjs toio.vtt]s yevéadai yvùpys to adopt (go over to) such an opinion, Dem. 4, 6.

(2) of time : k<j> ijpwv in our time, kir' dp-gv-gs in time of peace, II. 2, 797. (3) of relation or reference to an object: tovs kirl tusv irpaypaTœv those in charge of (public) affairs, Dem. 18, 247 ; êxî AiPvgs exeiv to 'ôvopa to be named for Libya, Hdt. 4, 45; kirl tlvos Xkyœv speaking with reference to a person, see Plat. Ch. 155 d; so êxt o-xoAgs at leisure; ex' ta as (se. polpas) in equal measure, S. El. 1061. b. With the dative

(1) of place :

irvpyw they sat on a tower, II. 3,153 ; xôXts êxt rg da.\ÔLTT\i oinovp'evq a city situated upon (by) the sea, X. An. 1, 4,1. (2) of time (of immédiate succession): êxt tovtols thereupon, X.C.5, rtvT

kirl

5,21. (3) of CAUSE, PURPOSE, CONDITIONS : êxt xcuSeiVet péya 4>povovvres proud of their éducation, Plat. Prot. 342 d ; êx' kÇayœyrj for exportation, Hdt. 7, 156 ; êxt roîaSe on these conditions, Ar. Av. 1602 ; êxt rg 'La-g Kal ôpoia on fair and equal terms, Thuc. 1, 27. So ê<£' w and k<t>' cSre (1477). (4) Likewise over, for, at, in addition to, in the power of : êxt tQ oLtco ofov a relish with bread, X. M. 3,14, 2 ; to êxt rc2§e after this, E. Hipp. 855 ; êxt t<3 àôe\(j)û) in his brother's power, X. An. 1,1,4. c.

With the

accusative :

(1) of place : to,

to, towards, against : àva^às êxt tov txxof mounting the right, on the right hand, X. An. 6, 4,1 ; /lacrtAéa levai to march against the King, X. An. 1, 3,1 ; êAdelv êxt riva to up

his horse, X. An. 1, 8, 3 ; êxt 5e£tà to êxt

accost

one.

(2) of time or space, denoting extension : kirl ôkKa 'érg for ten years, Thuc. 3, 68; êx' kwka kéîto ireXedpa he covered (lay over) nine plethra, Od. 11, 577 ; so êxt xoA{i widely ; to kirl xoXû for the most part ; ê/c tov kirl irXeïaTov from the remotest period, Thuc. 1, 2. (3) of an object sought: KarrjXeov kirl iroigTgv I came down for a poet, Ar. R. 1418 ; rpêxw êx' à<t>vas I run to get anchovies, Ar. Av. 77. In comp. : upon, over, after, toward, to, for, at, against, besides. 1218. Ka/rd to

àva).

(cf. adverb

kcltco

below), originally down (opposed

258 a.

GREEK GRAMMAR With the

genitive :

(1) down from: àXàpevoL Karà rîjs ireTpas by leaping down from the rock, X. An. 4, 2,17. (2) down upon : pvpov Karà rrjs KetpaXrjs Karaxtavres pouring perfwme on his head, Plat. Rep. 398 a. (3) beneath: Karà x^ovos tupwpe he buried beneath the earth, S. Ant. 24; oi Karà xOovos deoi the gods below, Aesch. Pers. 689. (4) against: Xeyuv Kad' r/pcov recounting against me (us), S. Ph. 65; in lawsuits, Aiax.tvys karà Ktt]<jl4>G)vtos Aeschines against Ctesiphon. b. With the accusative, down along : of motion over, through, among, into, against ; also according to, concerning, opposite, dividing. (1) of PLACE.' Karà povv down stream; Karà yT)v Kai Karà OàXarrav by land and by sea, X. An. 3, 2, 13; Karà Thv&irrjv irbXiv opposite the city of Sinope, Hdt. 1, 76. (2) of time: Karà rov iroXepov during (at the time of) the war, Hdt. 7,137 ; Karà "Apacnv about the time of Amasis, Hdt. 2,134. (3) distributively : Karà rpeîs by threes, three by three ; kad' ypepav or Kad' îKacrrriv rjpépav day by day, daily. (4) according to, concerning : Karà rovs vbpovs according to law, Dem. 8, 2 ; to Kar' è/xé as regards myself, Dem. 18, 247 ; peLÇœ f) Kar' avdpwirov ao(j>Lav a greater than human wisdom, Plat. Ap. 20 d ; so Karà navra in ail respects, Karà 4>v<riv according to nature, naturally ; rà Karà noXepov military matters. In comp. : down, against ; often denoting intensity or completeness (/caraÀÉtxw leave behind, abandon, bequeath ; KaranLvw gulp down, drink up). 1219. [i€Ta a.

With the

with, amid,

among.

See

avv.

genitive :

(1) with, in company with: per âXXœv Xé£o èraLpuv lie down with the rest of thy companions, Od. 10, 320 ; perà Çœvrœv among the living, S. Ph. 1312. (2) in union with, with the coopération of : perà Mavrivécov ^vveiroXépow they fought in alliance with the Mantineans, Thuc. 6,105 ; o'tSe per aùrov paav these were on his side, Thuc. 3, 56; "TirépfioXov àiroKreLvovaL perà XappLvov they put Hyperbolus to death by the aid of Charminus, Thuc. 8, 73 ; ot perà Kûpov BàpBapot the Persians under Cyrus, X. An. 1, 7,10; perà rov vôpov on the side of the law, Plat. Ap. 32 c. b. With the dative (poetic, chiefly epic), among : perà ôè rpiraroLaiv àvaacrev and he was reigning in the third génération, II. 1, 252. c.

With the accusative

(1) into (the midst of), after (in quest of) poetic: perà arparov rfXaa' 'Axaiûv he drove into the host of the Achaeans, II. 5, 589 ; irXkoiv perà x&Xkôv sailing after (in quest of) copper, Od. 1,184. (2) generally after, next to : perà rov troXepov after the war ; peyiaros perà "larpov the largest (river) next to the Ister, Hdt. 4, 53. In comp. : with (of sharing, e.g. peréxco have a share), among, after (in quest of) : it also dénotés change (peravokœ change one's mind, repent).

PREPOSITIONS 1220. irapa

(Hom. also irapaL), by,

near,

259

alongside of (see 1200).

With the GENITIVE, fTOWj beside, from : irapà vrjwv àirovocrTr]creiv to T6turn from the ships, II. 12,114 ; irap' rjpQ>v àiràyyeXXe tclôé take this message Q.

X. An. 2,1, 20. with, beside, near : irapà Ilpiâpoio Ovpyaiv at Priam's gâtes, II. 7, 346; irapà aot naTekvov they lodged with you (were your guests), Dem. 18, 82 ; irap' aùroîs in our own homes, Lys. 12, 33. c. With the accusative, to (a place) near, to ; also by the side of, beyond or beside, except, along with, because of. (1) of place: rpefas iràp irorapôv turning to the {bank of the) river, II. 21, 603 ; ecrLovTts irapà tovs <pi\ovs going in to {visit) their friends, Thuc. 2, 51. (2) of time : irapà iràvra tov xpôvov throughout the whole time, Dem. 18,10. (3) of CAUSE : irapà tt\v rjpeTépav àpeheiav on account of OUr neglect, Dem. 4, 11. (4) of comparison : irapà raXXa 'Çœa compared with {by the side of) other animais, X. M. 1, 4,14. (5) with idea of beyond or beside, and except : ovk Ioti irapà ravr dXXa there are no others besides these, Ar. Nub. 698 ; irapà tov vopov contrary to the law (properly beyond it). In comp. : beside, along by, hitherward, wrongly {beside the mark, irapàyco mislead), over (as in overstep, irapopû overlook). from

us,

b. With the dative,

1221. irepi

around (on ail sides), about (cf. àpcfL).

With the genitive, about, concerning (Lat. de) : irepi irarpos kpéadai to inquire about his father, Od. 3, 77 ; irepi tov aTecfiàvov (oration) On the a.

Crown, Lat. de Corona; ôeÔLÙs irepi aÙTov fearing for him, Plat. Prot. a. Poetic (chiefly epic) above, surpassing: KpaTepos irepi iràvTœv mighty above ail, II. 21, 566. b. With the dative, about, around, concerning, of place or cause (chiefly poetic) : evbwe irepi aTrjdeaaL xLT&va he put on his tunic about his breast, II. 10, 21 ; eôôeraev irepi MeveXàw he feared for Menelaus, II. 10, 240; helaavTes irepi rfj x&pq- through fear for our land, Thuc. 1, 74. c. With the accusative (nearly the same as àp4>l), about, near: èaTàpevat. irepi toïxo" to stand round the wall, II. 18, 374 ; irepi '~E\\i)<nrovTov about (near) the Hellespont, Dem. 8, 3 ; irepi toûtovs tovs xp°v°vs about these times, Thuc. 3, 89 ; &v irepi ravTa being about (engaged in) this, Thuc. 7, 31. In comp. : around, about, over {irepiopû overlook, permit ; irept.ylyvop.aL get the better of ; also in arithmetic, remain over) ; exceedingly {irept.xa.pris overjoyed). 320

1222.

irpd (Lat. pro), with the

genitive

only, before:

(1) of PLACE: irpo Ovpàsv before the door, S. El. 109. (2) of time : irpô delirvov before dinner, X. C. 5, 5, 39. (3) of defence : pàxeaOai irpo iralôuv to fight for their children, II. 8, 57 ; SiaKLvôweveiv irpô /3a<ri\éois to run risk in behalf of the king, X. C. 8, 8, 4.

GREEK GRAMMAR

260

(4) of CHOICE Or PREFERENCE : Kepôos aivfjaai ivpo 8'iKas ôoXlov to dpproVÉ wily gain before justice, Pind. P. 4, 140; irpo rovrov redvâvai àv ëXoiro in preference to this he would choose death, Plat. Symp. 179 a. In comp. : before, in defence of, forward. 1223. irpos (Hom. also With the genitive :

Trpo-L or ttotL), at or by (in front of).

(1) in front of, looking towards: Keïrai irpos QpaKtjs it lies over against Thrace, Dem. 23, 182. In swearing: wpos Oetiv before (by) the gods. Sometimes pertaining to (as character) : fj Kàpra irpos ywaucos surely it is very like a woman, Aesch. Ag. 592 ; irpos K vpov char acier istic of Cyrus. (2) from (on the part of) : npjv wpos Zrjvds ëxovres having honor from Zeus, Od. 11, 302. Sometimes with passive verbs, especially Ionic (1208): àrt/xâfeodai irpos YleicnarpâTov to be dishonored by Pisistratus, Hdt. 1, 61 ; àôoÇovvTaL irpos rtiv irôXeuv b. With the dative :

they

are

held in contempt by states, X. Oec. 4, 2.

(1) at : kirei irpàs Ba/3uXwpt fjv à KDpos when Cyrus was at Babylon, X. C. 7,5,1. (2) in addition to : irpos tovtols besides this ; irpos rots aXXots besides ail the rest, Thuc. 2, 61. c.

With the accusative

(1) to : elp.' avril ^pos "Q\vp.irov I am going myself to Olympus, II. 1,420. (2) towards : irpos Boppâv towards the North, Thuc. 6, 2; in relation to (of persons) : irpos àXXrjXovs rjavxLav elxov they kept the peace towards one another, IsOC. 7, 51 ; Trpôs rovs aXXovs airavras ovrœs fiefitcoKa tiare pot. p-qbe irpos ëva prjôèv ëynX-ppa yeveadai in my relations with ail other persons I have so lived that no complaint has arisen against me on the part of a single individual, Lys. 16,10. (3) with a view to, according to, with reference to : r-pos ri pe ravr' épuras; what are you driving at (lit. to what does your question refer) ? X. M. 3, 7, 2 ; irpos rijv irapovaav bvvapuv according to their power at the time, Dem 15, 28 ; Trpôs ravra in view of this, especially with the imperative, Lat. proinde. In comp. : to, toward, against, besides.

older Attic %vv (Lat. eu m), with dative only, with, of. ~Zvv is chiefly poetic ; it seldom in Xenophon, perd with the genitive taking its place. The dative with avv is instrumental. (1) in company with : yXvde avv MeveXày he came with Menelaus, II. 3,206 (in prose avvrjXOe rti MeifeAàco, 1179). (2) by aid of : avv deti with God's help, II. 9, 49. (3) in accordance with : aùv ôUa with justice, Pind. P. 9, 96. (4) INSTRUMENT (like simple dative) : p'eyav ttXovtov enT-pato %vv aixprj thou didst gain great wealth by (with) thy spear, Aesch. Pers. 755. 1224. o-uv,

in company with, or by aid occurs in Attic prose except

comp. :

with, together, altogether.

261

PREPOSITIONS 1225. \)TT€p (Hom. also With the gbnitive :

vireip) over (Lat. super).

(1) of place : arrj ùirèp ice^aXrjs it stood over (his) head, II. 2, 20 ; of over : ùirèp daXâao-ris Kal x^ovos TrorœpkvoLs (se. ypîv) as we flit over sea and land, Aesch. Ag. 576. (2) for, in behalf of (opposed to /carà) : dvôpeva ùirèp rrjs 7roX«os sacrificed in behalf of the state, X. M. 2, 2, 13 ; ùirèp iràvTwv àycov a struggle for our ail, Aesch. Pers. 405. Sometimes with roD and infin., like ïva with subj. : ùirèp tov rà awriO-q pij yLyveadai to prevent the regular methods from being followed, Aeschin. 3,1. (3) chiefly in the orators, concerning (like irepi) : r-qv ùirèp tov iroXèpov yvùpyv èxovTas having such an opinion about the war, Dem. 2,1. b. With the accusative, over, beyond, exceeding : ùirèp ovôov èfiriaeTo ôcopaTos he stepped over the threshold of the house, Od. 7,135 ; ùirelp aXa over the sea, Od. 3, 73 ; ùirèp to fièxtlcrtov beyond what is best, Aesch. Ag. 378 ; ùirèp ôùvapcv beyond its power, Thuc. 6, 16. In comp. : over, above, beyond, in defence of, for the sake of. motion

1226. ùiro a.

(Hom. also vttai) under (Lat. sub), by.

With the genitive

(1) of place : rà ùiro yrjs things under the earth, Plat. Ap. 18 b. Some¬ times from under (chiefly poetic) : ovs ùiro x^ovos fjKe cpàoade whom he sent to light from beneath the earth, Hes. Th. 669. (2) to dénoté the agent with passive verbs : e'L tls ètiparo ùiro tov ôrjpov (1208) if anyone was honored by the people, X. H. 2, 3, 15. When the agent is a thing and not a person, ùiro personifies it : r]vâynacrpai ùiro tûv yeyevrjpkvoiv

tovtov

kat-qyopéiv I am forced by

what has happened to

accuse

this

Lys. 12, 3. Hence (3) of cause : ùiro ôèovs throughfear ; v<f>' yôovTjs through pleasure ; ùir' àirXotas by détention in port, Thuc. 2, 85. b. With the dative (especially poetic) : tûv ùiro iroaaL beneath their feet, II. 2, 784 ; twv OavovTwv ùir' 'IXLw of those whofell at (under the walls of) Ilium, E. Hec. 764 ; ùiro rf) àKpoirôXi. below the acropolis, Hdt. 6, 105 ; ol ùiro PaaiXeZ ovTes those who are under the king, X. C. 8, 1, 6 ; ùiro 0eiôcoXc3 irarpl TeOpap.p.èvos brought up under the domination of a stingy father, Plat. Rep. 572 e.

man,

With the accusative

(1) of PLACE, under, properly to (a place) under : ùiro airèos r/Xaae pfjXa he drives (drove) the sheep into {under) a cave, II. 4, 279 ; r/Xded' ùiro TpoL^v you came to Troy (i.e. to besiege it), Od. 4,146 ; rà5e iravra ùiro a<pàs iroieîodaL to bring ail these under their sway, Thuc. 4, 60. (2) of time, toward {entering into) : ùiro vùktœ at nightfall (Lat. sub noctem) Thuc. 1,115. Sometimes at the time of, during: ùiro tov aeiapôv at the time of the earthquake, Thuc. 2, 27. In comp. : under (in place or rank), underhand, slightly, gradually (like sub).

GREEK GRAMMAR

262

Improper Prépositions 1227. These

adverbs which can never be used in composi¬ Most of them take the genitive.

are

tion with verbs.

aveu without, except, apartfrom : âvev àxoXoWov without an attendant, Symp.217a; âvev rov xaXijv ôôÇav eveyneiv apart from (besides) bringing a good réputation, Dem. 18, 89. So àpa with, 1190. 2. a.T«p without, apart from (poetic) : ârep Z^ôs without (the help of) Zeus, II. 15, 292. 3. a\pi until, as far as: âxp<- Trjs reXevrrj s until the end, Dem. 18, 179. 4. S£\a apart from, unlike (poetic) : irvpos ôlxa. without the aid of fire, Aesch. Sev. 25 ; ôlxa â\\uv différent from others, Aesch. Ag. 757. 5. èyyvs near (with dative in poetry, 1190) : davârov èyyùs near death, Plat. Ap. 38 c (1153). 6. «ïo-« (ïo-w) inside, within : ei'o-« vvKùv within the gâtes, Aesch. Sev. 557. 7. €kt6s outside, without : euros eXirlôos beyond hope, S. Ant. 330. 8. €p/Trpoo-0€v in front of : ëp7rpoaOe avrrjs in front of it, Hdt. 8, 87. 9. «vavTÎov against : 'AxiApos evavriov against Achilles, II. 20, 97 ; confronting, evavrtov tûv diKaorSiv before the judges (i.e. at the bar). 10. ïveKa or Ïvékév (Ionic e'Lvexa, eivenev) on account of, for the sake of (generally after its noun) : ï>f3pi.os e'Lvexa rrjaôe on account of this outrage, II. 1, 214; prjôéva Ko\aKebeiv evena /xiodov to flatter no one for a reward, X. H. 5, 1, 17. Also ovveKo. (ov êvexa) for bexa, chiefly in the dramatists. 11. €vt6s within : arépvuv evros within the breast, Aesch. Ag. 77. 12. ëjjtt out of, beyond : ëfœ fieXûv out of the range of missiles, X. C. 3, 3, 69. 13. ev0v straight to : evdù neW^s straight to Pellene, Ar. Av. 1421. 14. p.€ra|v between : peraÇv coûtas xal àpaOLas between wisdom and folly, Plat. Symp. 202 a. 15. pe'xpi until, as far as: péxpi rfjs iroXeœs as far as the city, Thuc. 6, 96. 16. oiricr0€v behind : oirioOe rrjs dvprjs behind the door, Hdt. 1, 9. 17. irXrjv except : ttXvv y' èpov xal croO except myself and you, S. El. 909. 18. ir\T|or£ov near (sometimes with dative, 1190) : -irXt]aiov irarpôs near your father, S. Tr. 1076 (1153). 19. xwp's separate from : x^pis rrjs ôô&is apart from (the question of) honor, Plat. Ap. 35 b. 20. «s to, with the accusative, but only with personal objects : àfiixero Jjs Tlepôlxxav xal ès ryv XaXxLÔLKrjv he came to Perdiccas and into Chalcidice, Thuc. 4, 79.

Plat.

ADVERBS 1228. Adverbs ovrcos

qualify verbs, adjectives, and other adverbs. E.g.

spoke', cb's ôvvapai. as I am able ; xpÛToc àirrfKde first he xaxôv that which is truly evil', aurai, a' ôôrjyriaovcri pà\' àapévus these will guide you even most gladly, Aesch. Pr. 728.

ehvev thus he

went away ; TO àXrjOûs xal

THE VERB

263

1229. For adjectives used as adverbs, see 922. For adverbs preceded by the article, and qualifying a noun like adjectives, see 950. For adverbs with the

genitive

dative,

see

1088, 1092, 1152, 1175, 1176, 1190. THE VERB VOICES

Active 1230. In the active voice the

d<f)6o.\povs I turn father loves his child ; o liriros

e.g. tpeiilû tous

the

subject is represented as acting ; my eyes ; ô iraryp cjnXeZ tov iraiba rpexec the horse runs.

1231. The form of the active voice includes most intransitive verbs;

I run. On the other hand, the form of the middle voice includes déponent verbs which are active and transitive in meaning ; e.g. tovto teniialpojiai I infer this. Some transitive verbs have certain intransi¬ tive tenses, which generally have the meaning of the middle voice, e.g. eart]Ka I stand, earrjv I stood or came to a stop, from ïarrifxL set ; other in¬ transitive tenses have a passive force, e.g. àpkvT-qaap vA aûroD they were driven out by him, Thuc. 1, 8. 1232. The same verb may be both transitive and intransitive : e.g. eXawcx) drive (trans. or intrans.) or march ; ?x<a have, sometimes hold or stay (e.g. exe stay now> Plat. Prot. 349 d) ; with adverbs, be, e.g. eu ëx« it is well, bene se habet. So irpâttœdo, eu (or kclkûs) 7rpârrwiamwell (or badly) off, I do well (or badly). The intransitive use sometimes arose from the omission of a familiar object; e.g. kXavpeiv (ïinrop or appa) ride or drive, reXeurav (tôp j8Lop) end (life) or die. Cf. the English verbs drive, turn, move, increase, gather. 1233. When a verb has both the first and the second aorist, or first and second perfect, the first aorist and perfect are generally transitive or causative, the second aorist and perfect generally intransitive (479 c). In such verbs the future active is transitive. Thus (3alpo) go, p-poco shall cause to go, /3-ri<jop.ai. shall go, ëp-qua caused to go, ëftrip went ; ôvco enter, kpéovaa put on (another), èpkôvp entered, put on one's self ; ïcrrppt set, 'éoTrjoa set, 'éo-T7]p stood, 1 and 2 perf. both intrans. ëorrjKa, ëaraTop stand ; Karâypvpi break, Karkaya be broken ; patpco madden, ëprjpa maddened, pkp-qpa be mad ; ôXXupi destroy, lose, oXiAena have destroyed, lost, ôXwXa am ruined ; 4>vu make grow, ë4>vaa produced, ë<j>vp grew, is, iré<pvKa am by nature. e.g. rpéxw many

Passive 1234. In the upon ; e.g.

father.

passive voice the subject is represented as acted vtto tov irarpos 4>lXeîrat the child is loved by his

ô 7rcûs

264

GREEK GRAMMAR

1235. The passive is later in origin than the middle, and is the resuit

of using middle forms and certain intransitive active forms in a passive sense. Thus the middle XvopaL, kXvôprjp, XéXvpaL served also as passive

forms, and there is no essential différence in form between 'éaryp (aorist active intransitive) and 'tfykvpv (aorist passive). The future middle may always be used as a passive in Homer (cf. 1248), but a spécial form 04>avr)ao[xcLi, Xvdyaopai.) was developed early from the aorists in -rjv and -dr]v. Even the second aorist middle may have a passive sense in Homer and occasionally in Attic (especially kolttaxero was seized).

object of the active becomes the subject of the pas¬ subject of the active, the personal agent, is generally expressed by vivo with the genitive in the passive construction (1208). 1236. The

sive. The

1237. The dative

here,

elsewhere, generally expresses the fiaWovTai \L6ols they are pelted with

inanimate instrument; e.g. stones. 1238. Even voice

can

genitive

dative depending

on a

verb in the active

become the subject of the passive; e.g. Kara^popelraL

èpov

despised by me (active, Kara^povœ avrod, 1103) ; TTLareverat vtto tcov àpxopevcov he îs trusted by his subjects (active, TTLarevovaLP clvtû, 1160) ; apxovrai vtto paaiXécôv they are ruled by kings (active, (iaaiXeïs apxovaiv avrûv) ; vtto âXXo4>vXœv pâXXov k-irefiovXevovro they were plotted against to a greater degree by men of other races, Thuc. 1, 2 (active, kirePovXevop avroïs). he is

1239.

The perfect

of the agent (1174). b. The personal

impersonal in

-reov

and pluperfect passive

may

have the dative

verbal in -réos takes the dative (1598), the the dative or accusative, of the agent (1599).

1240. When the active is followed

by two accusatives, or by an dative of a person, the case denoting a person is generally made the subject of the passive, and the other (an accusative) remains unchanged. E.g. accusative of

thing and

ovôèv âXXo ÔLÔâaKeraL

iivdpcûTros a man is taught nothing else (in the active, apdpœTrop), Plat. Meno 87 C ; aXXo ri p.eLÇov kiriraxO'h-

ovôev aXXo ÔLÔâaKovacv aeade you

will have

some

other greater command imposed

on you

(active,

pei'çov vpîp kTrirâÇovaip they will impose some other greater com¬ mand on you), Thuc. 1,140; ol eTVLrerpappkpoL ri/p <pvXaKrip those to whom the guard has been intrusted (active, eirlrpk-kelp ri]p 4>vxakyp tovtols), Thuc. 1,126 ; 8L<pdépap kprippkpos clad in a leather jerkin factive, kvâirreiv ri tlpl to fit a thing on one), Ar. Nub. 72 ; so èKKÔirreadai top 64>6aXp.6p to have his eye knocked out, and àirorkppeaOai rpp Ke<paXr]p to have his head eut off, etc., from possible active constructions innà-krelp ri tlpl, and àivoreppelp tl tlpl. This construction has nothing to do with that of 1056. aXXo

VOICES

265

In this construction the accusative of the thing (which is sometimes cognate, 1049) is retained with the passive, whereas the accusative or dative of the person is made the subject. 1241.

A cognate accusative

(1049) of the active form, or a neuter adjective representing such an accusative, may become the subject of the passive. E.g. ô kLvôwos klvôweveral the risk is encountered (active, rov kLvôwov Kivbwevei he runs the risk), see Plat. Lach. 187 b ; et ovbkv riuàprriTaL poi granting that nofault has been committed by me (active, ovbkv ripapr^Ka), Andoc. 1, 33. a.

pronoun or

b. The passive may also be used impersonally, the cognate subject being implied in the verb itself ; e.g. kivet.br] aûroîs irapeaKevaaro when prépa¬ ration had been made by them, Thuc. 1, 46 ; oure r]ak(3riTai oure (bpoXôypTai (se. kpoi) no sacrilege has been committed and no confession has been made (by me), Andoc. 1,17. c. This use occurs chiefly in such neuter participial expressions as rà aol Kàpol pePiupkva whatyouandl have done inour lives((3i6u lire), Dem.18,265; ai tûv iveiro\iTevpki>œv evOwat. the accounts of their public acts, Dem. 1, 28; so rà r]ae/3r]pkva the impious acts which have been done ; rà Kivbw evO kvr a the risks which were run\ rà fiuapriipkva the errors which have been com¬ mitted. Even an intransitive verb may thus have a passive voice. 1242. Some intransitive active forms are used as passives of other verbs. Thus eu ivoieïv benefit, eu irâcTxeiv be benefited ; eu \eyeiv praise, eu à/coûeiv (poet. /cXûetf) be praised ; aipeîv capture, àXCivo.t be captured ; àivoKTtLvtLv kill, àirodvyaiceiv be killed ; eK]SàXXetf cast oui, kKirLirreiv be cast out ; ôttùKeLv prosecute, (pevyetv be prosecuted (be a défendant) ; âiroXvco acquit, àirotfievyco be acquitted ; atrtâtr^at (déponent) accuse, airLav exetp be accused ; ndevat place, KeîaOai. be placed ; eu ÔLandeis putting in a good frame of mind, eu bianeipievos having a good disposition (or being in a favorable situation).

Middle

subject is represented as acting himself, or in some manner which concerns himself. a. As acting on himself. E.g. krpàivovTo ivpôs XrjcrTetav they betook (turned) themselves to piracy, Thuc. 1, 5. So tvavopai cease (stop one's self), iretdeadai trust (persuade one's self), <t>aLvouai appear (show one's self). This reflexive use of the middle is 1243. In the middle voice the

upon

the least

b. As

common.

acting for himself

with reference to himself. E.g.

the people make laws for themselves, whereas riOr/ai vôptovs would properly be said of a lawgiver ; rovrov pera-n-eu-nopai I send for him (to corne to me) ; à-weireuivero avrovs he dismissed them ; Tvpo(3à\-

ô ôrjpos riderai vôpovs

GREEK GRAMMAR

266 Xétcu rrjv

àcnriôa he holds

choose, rà oirXa

his shield to protect himself. So alpovpai

defend one's self (ward off from one's self), Tidépevoi (technical in military language) taking up their position. c. As acting on an object belonging to himself. E.g. àpvvopai

he came to ransom his iown) daughter, II. 1,13. than is implied in the active ; e.g. TpÔTraLov laTaadai to raise a trophy for themselves, or rpoiraiov lot b.vai to raise a trophy. The middle sometimes appears not to differ at ail from the active in meaning, and has given way to it in some forms ; e.g. Hom. and poetic ôpàopai, regular Attic ôpû, see~, Hom. ànobopai, Att. ànovco, hear (but always fut. ànoboopaC). 1245. On the other hand, the distinction between active and middle is often important ; e.g. eiprjvyv iroLovpaL conclude peace, eip-qvyv ttolû bring about a peace (of the mediator) ; aip« take, alpovpai choose ; àiroStSoipi give back, àivoôiùopai sell ', âirru fasten, airropai cling to ', apx^ rule, be first, apxopai begin ; yapœ marry (of the man), yap.ovp.ai be married (of the woman) ; bavtl'Çcû lend, SavelÇopai borrow, ôiKaÇœ sit in judgment, SiKùÇopai go to law; ëx^ hâve, hold, 'éxopai cling to, be next to ; </>uXàrraj watch, <pv\àTTopaL be on one's guard against ; ypàcfjœ vopov propose a vote, ypâ<popai. indict ; npwpS> rcva avenge one, npwpovpai punish. See also vopov TiO'evai in 1243 b, and 1248. 1246. The middle sometimes has a causative meaning; e.g. è8i.8aÇàpr)v ael had you taught, Ar. Nub. 1338; 'Apyeioi 8e (T(t>e(x>v e'iKÔvas èTTOLr/cravTo the Argives caused statues of them (Cleobis and Biton) to be made, Hdt. 1, 31 (èirotricre would have been used of the artist). 1247. The passive of some of these verbs is used as a passive to both active and middle ; e.g. kypâ^yv can mean either be written or be indicted, ■fipkôriv either be taken or be chosen. 1248. The future middle of some verbs has a passive sense even in

fj\ge Xvaôpevos dvyarpa

1244. Often the middle expresses no more

Attic ; e.g. àSixco

shall be wronged ; àpidpcô I count, E. Bacch. 1318 ; so occasionally the second

I do wrong, à8ucr\<ropai I

àpidpr)ae( you will be numbered, aorist middle (1235).

TENSES

1249. The tenses may express

time of an action as

two relations. They may

designate the

and also its character as going simply taking place or occurring, or as

présent, past, or future ;

continuously or repeatedly, as finished with a permanent resuit. Thus the présent and the imperfect express action in a line, or extended ; the aorist dénotés action at a point (1261). See the parts of 'Luttipl in 507. The character of an action appears in ail the moods and in the infinitive and participle ; the relation of time appears always in the indicative, and to a certain extent (hereafter to be explained) in some of the dépendent moods and in the participle.

267

TENSES I. Tenses 1250. The tenses of the

of action a.

follows

of the Indicative

indicative

express

time and character

Présent, action going on in présent

time : ypàefrœ I am writing,

binding. b. Imperfect, action going on in past time : 'éypa&v I was writ¬ ing, 'é5eop I was binding. c. Perfect, action finished in présent time and so denoting an accomplished state : yéypa^a I Inave written, ôéôepai I am in ôéù) I

'prison.

action finished in past time: èyeypâcfrr] I had written, èôeôéprjv I was in prison. Aorist, action simply taking place in past time : eypcupa I wrote, 'éôr]aa I bound.

d. Pluperfect, e.

f. Future, future action (either in its progress or in its mere occurrence) : ypà\f/u I shall write or I shall be writing ; e£co I shall have, o-x1?*™ 7 shall get. g. Future Perfect, action to be finished in future time and so denoting a future state : yeypâxl/ercu it will have been written, it will stand written ; ôeôriaojiaL I shall lie in prison ; Tedvrj^eL he will be dead. 1251. This is shown

Action on

Action

going i J

in the following table :

Présent Time

Past Time

Future Time

present

Imperfect

Future

Aorist

Future

Pluperfect

Fut. Perfect

simply^

taking place j 1 finished J

Action

For the

Perfect

présent and the aorist

1292, 1293.

1252. In narration

the aorist.

E.g.

expressing a général truth

the présent is

(gnomic), see

sometimes used vividly for

268

GREEK GRAMMAR

' àiroorkXXovoiv ovv, Kai irepl avrûv ô QepLOTOKXrjs Kpvfa he bids them send men: accordingly they dispatch them, and Themistocles sends secretly concerning them, Thuc. 1, 91.

KeXeveu ire

iré/Mpcu avôpas

p. tv ei.

This is called the Historical Présent.

1253.

It does not

occur

in Homer.

repeated action vôœp, kyù <5è olvov irtvu> he drinks water, but I

The présent often expresses a customary or

présent time ; e.g. ovtos pev urine, Dem. 19, 46. See 1292. b. The imperfect likewise may express customary or repeated past action; e.g. Sw/cpâ'rrç s œoirep ky Lyvuo nev oïitùjs 'éXeye as Socrates thought, so he used to speak, X. M. 1,1, 4. in

drink

1254. The présent péXXw, with the présent or future (seldom the aorist) infinitive, forms a periphrastic future, which sometimes dénotés intention or expectation ; e.g. ei péXXei g iroXcreta ay 'çeadai if the constitution is to be saved, Plat. Rep. 412 a; rà p'eXXovra 'éoeoOai the future. 1255. The présent and the imperfect, since they cannot dénoté the completion of an act, often express an attempted action; e.g. ireidovoiv vpâs they are trying to persuade y ou, Isae. 1, 26 ; 'A Xowqoov èôtôov he offered (;tried to give) Halonnesus, Aeschin. 3, 83 ; à êirpâooeto ovk 'ey'eveTo what was attempted did not happen, Thuc. 6, 74. 1256. a. The présents f/Kco I am corne and oïxopat I am gone have the force of perfects, the imperfects having the force of pluperfects.

présent of a few other verbs may often be translated best by perfect ; e.g. àôi/cw (= &ôlk6s eipi) i have done wrong (am in the wrong), viKûpev we have won. 1257. The présent eîpt I am going, with its compounds, usually has a future sense, and is used as a future of ëpxopat, kXevaopat not being in good use in Attic prose (511 c). In Homer elpi is also présent in sense. 1258. a. The présent with irâXaL or any other expression of past time dénotés an action begun in the past and continued in the présent, and is translated by the perfect ; e.g. nelvov Ixvevœ iràXat. I have been tracking him a long time, S. Aj. 20. b. Even without an adverb referring to the past, the présent may be rendered by the English perfect if the action is not completed ; e.g. ôirep Xéyw as I have been saying, Plat. Ap. 21 a ; ê£ &v ànovw from what I have heard, X. An. 1, 9, 28. So other verbs of perception, such as pavdâvu learn, irvvdcLvopLOLL hear, aiadâvopaL perceive. b. The

the

1259. The imperfect of repeated action (1253 b) with a négative may ovk e'La inreikelv he would not

dénoté insistence, résistance, or refusai ; e.g.

permit them to give in, i.e. he urged them not to give in, Thuc. 1,127. 1260. a. The imperfect of elpt, generally with âpa, may express a fact which is just recognized, having previously been denied or overlooked; e.g. ov où pôvos ap' fjoO' 'en of ; so you are not the only hoopoe, after ail? Ar. Av. 280.

TENSES

269

Similarly, the imperfect may express something which is the resuit previous discussion, with reference to which the past tense is used ; e.g. oi avrol ttoàé/uoi y]ixiv fjaav the same men are, as we saw, hostile to us, Thuc. 1,35; ô rœ gtv ÔLKatop (Où\tiov èytyvero, rô ôè àôiKu àiricWvTO that which, as we proved, becomes better byjustice but is ruined by injustice, Plat. Crito 47 d. b.

1261. a. The aorist takes its name (àopiaros unlimited, unqualified) from its denoting a simple past occurrence, with none of the limitations

as to completion, continuance, répétition, etc. which belong to the other past tenses. It corresponds to the ordinary preterite in English, whereas the Greek imperfect corresponds to the forms I was doing, etc.

(ôpoi)

he did this habitually, ireirotgKe tovto he had already (at some past time) done this, but è-n-oirioe tovto is simply he did this without qualification of any kind. The aorist is therefore commonly used in rapid narration, the imperfect in detailed description. The aorist is more common in négative sentences (except in the case noted in 1259). b. As it is not always important to distinguish between the progress of an action and its mere occurrence, it is occasionally indiffèrent whether the imperfect or the aorist is used; cf. e\eyoi> in Thuc. 1, 72 (end) with elirov, eXeÇav, and ëXtfe in 1, 79. The two tenses show différent views (both natural views) of the same act. 1262. The aorist of verbs which dénoté a state or condition may express the entrance into that state or condition ; e.g. xXourû I am rich, èir'XovTow I was rich, eirXovT^aa I became rich. So è/3aoL\evoe he became king, fjpÇe he took office (also he held office), elxov I had, 'êaxov I acquired. This is called the Inceptive or Ingressive Aorist. 1263. With èirei and èireid-n after the aorist is generally to be translated by our pluperfect; e.g. ètreiôrj àirrjKdov after they had departed. Cf. postquam venit. 1264. The aorist (sometimes the perfect) participle with ëxw may form a periphrastic perfect, especially in Attic poetry ; e.g. Oavpanas ëx^ rôôe I have wondered at this, S. Ph. 1362. In prose, ëXw with a participle generally has its common force ; e.g. rr]i> irpoïna ëx« Xa/3dw he has received and has the dowry (not simply he has taken it), Dem. 27, 17. 1265. Since the perfect dénotés a présent state, it is often translated by the présent; e.g. àivodvfiaKeiv die, TedvrjKévai. be dead; yiyveadaL become, yeyovkvai be; p.ip.vrioKeiv remind, p.egvTjodai. remember; KaXeîv call, KenXrjcrdai be called; Krâodai acquire, KeKrrjadai possess. So oïôa I know (novi) and many others. For further remarks on the perfect, see 735. In such verbs the pluperfect has the force of an imperfect; e.g. yôy E.g. èirotei.

tovto

was

doing this

he has already done this, 'tiveiroi-qkei

I knew.

1266. The

perfect sometimes refers vividly to the future; e.g. e'I ge if he shall perceive me, I am ruined (perii), S. Ph. 75.

aiadrjcreTai, ôXwXa

GREEK GRAMMAR

270

I am lost, Lys. 12, 14 ; and even (through the context) imply a future action, e.g. àircoXôpyv eï fie \eL\peis I am undone if you leave me, E. Aie. 386 (1415). 1267. The second person of the future may express a -permission, or even a command; e.g. irpàÇeis olov âv déXys you may act as you please, S. O. C. 956 ; 7r<Wcos ôè tovto ôpâaets and in any case do this (you shall do this), Ar. Nub. 1352. So in imprécations; e.g. àiroXelade to destruction with you! (lit. you shall perish). For pèXXco and the infinitive, see 1254. 1268. The future perfect dénotés that a future act will be immédiate, décisive, or permanent', e.g. <}>pô.Çe, ko.1 ireTpàÇerai speak, and it shall be (no sooner said than) done, Ar. Pl. 1027 ; où KpÉo^ros irpoaTâTov yeypâxfopaL I shall not be enrolled under the patronage of Creon, S. O. T. 411 ; Tedvq^ei So sometimes the présent, e.g. àirôXXvpaL

the aorist may

he will be dead. Cf. the similar

1269.

use

of the perfect infinitive, 1277. See 735.

The division of the tenses of the indicative into primary

(or principal) and secondary (or historical) is explained in 453. b. In dépendent clauses, when the construction allows both subjunctive and optative, or both indicative and optative, the subjunctive or indicative regularly follows primary tenses, and the optative follows secondary tenses. E.g. irpaTTOvalv a âv (3ovXœvrai they do whatever they please, eirpaTTOV â (iovXoivto they did whatever they pleased, Xeyova lv otl tovto iroiovcnv they say that they are doing this, 'éXeÇav otl toûto iroiolev they said that they

were

doing this. See 1442, 1502.

1270. The gnomic aorist is a primary tense, as it refers to présent time

(1293) ; and the historical présent is secondary, as it refers to past time (1252). 1271. An exception to the principle of 1269 b occurs in indirect dis¬ course, where the form of the direct discourse may always be retained, even after secondary tenses ; so also in final and object clauses. See 1378,1382, 1496 b.

1272. a. The distinction of primary and secondary tenses extends to the dépendent moods only where the tenses there keep the same distinc¬ tion of time which they have in the indicative, as in the optative and infinitive of indirect discourse (1282). b. An

optative of future time generally assimilâtes

dépendent

con-

ditional relative clause or protasis to the optative when it might otherwise be in the subjunctive : thus we should generally have irpaTTotev av à

fiovXoLVTo they would do whatever they pleased. See 1451. Such an optative seldom assimilâtes the subjunctive or indicative of a final or object clause

(1371) in

prose;

but oftener in poetry.

very

rarely assimilâtes

indicative of indirect discourse, although it may assimilate an interrogative subjunctive (1367).

TENSES II. Tenses of the

271

Dépendent Moods

A. Not in Indirect Discourse

1273. In the

subjunctive and imperative, and also in the op(1281),

tative and infinitive when they are not in indirect discourse the tenses chiefly used are the présent and aorist. 1274.

These tenses here differ

only in this, that the présent action in its duration, that is, as going on or repeated, while the aorist expresses simply its occurrence, the time of both being otherwise precisely the same. E.g. 'eàv tovto troifj if he shall be doing this, or if he shall do this (habitually), kàv tovto -kol-qa-q (simply) if he shall do this; ei tovto noioir) if he should be doing this, or if he should do this (habitually), d tovto iroiyoeie (simply) if he should do this; tovto -irotei do this (habitually), tovto iroLyaov (simply) do this; oirrco v my a aipi t 'eyù> Kai vopiÇo'ipyv ao<pôs on this condition may I gain the victory (aor.) and be thought (près.) wise. Ar. Nub. 520; f3ovXerai tovto voieïv he wishes to be doing this or to do this (habitually), PovXerai tovto wo lrjcra.1 (simply) he wishes to do this. b. This is a distinction entirely unknown to the Latin, which has (e.g.) only one form, si faciat, corresponding to ei voioLy and ei iroiycreiev. c. When, however, the aorist subjunctive is introduced by 'eireibâv and similar conjunctions meaning after, or by «os âv, irplv âv, until, the aorist dénotés a time preceding the action of the main verb, and may be translated by the perfect or the future perfect ; e.g. raOra, èireiôàv irepi roO y'evovs eÏ7rco, èpôi when I shall have spoken (after I have spoken) about my birth, I will speak of these matters, Dem. 57, 16 ; «os âv eKp.ù.6-Qs, ex èX-n-Lôa until you have learnt ail, have hope, S. O. T. 834. a.

expresses an

1275. The perfect, which seldom occurs in these constructions, represents an action as finished at the time at which the présent would represent it as going on. Frequently it dénotés a présent state.

E.g.

pi) Xyd-gv ir eir oii) ay I fear that it may have caused forgetfulness (pi) Troifj would mean that it may cause), Dem. 19, 3 ; pyôevi fioydeïv 6s âv pi) irpoTepos /3e/3or)dr)kùs bptv fi to help no one who shall not previously have helped you (6s âv pi)... /3oy9fj would mean who shall not previously help you), Dem. 19, 16. ovk âv Sià tovtô y' elev ovk evOvs SeSwKÔTes it would not prove (on inquiry) that this was why they had failed to pay immediately (with où ôiSoîev this would mean they failed topay), Dem. 30,10 ; oti (3ov\evecrdai ërt &pa, dXXà /3e/3ov\evcr0ai it is no longer time to be deliberating, but to make a décision (lit. to have finished deliberating), Plat. Crito 46 a.

ôédoLKa

GREEK GRAMMAR

272

1276. The perfect imperative generally expresses a command that something shall be décisive and permanent ; e.g. radra eippodœ let this have been said (i.e. let what has been said be final), or let this (which follows) be said once for ail; ypappi] ab yeypcufrdœ let a line AB be drawn (and assumed throughout the démonstration) ; pexpe roOôe copia du vpûv 1) /3paôvrrjs at this point let the limit of your sluggishness be fixed, Thuc. 1, 71. This is confined to the third person singular passive, the rare second person singular middle being merely emphatic. The active is used only when the perfect has a présent meaning (1265). 1277. The perfect infinitive expresses décisive action or permanent state; g.g. elirov ryv dvpav neuXeiadat they ordered the gâte to be shut (and kept So), X. H. 5, 4, 7. rfXawev É7ri tovs Mévcovos, uar 'enelvovs eicireirXrjx^at Kai rp'exeiv èirl rà oirXa so that they were in deadly terror (thoroughly frightened) and ran to get their arms, X. An. 1, 5, 13. So àit-qxxàxoal kclkûi> to be rid of trouble once for ail. The regular meaning of this tense, when it is not in indirect discourse, is that given in 1275.

regularly used only to represent (1282). 1279. It occurs occasionally in other constructions, in place of the regular présent or aorist, to make more emphatic a future 1278. The future infinitive is

the future indicative in indirect discourse

idea which the infinitive receives from the context, or to express

présent intention of doing something in the future. E.g. tlov Meyapécov l'aval a<fiâs pir poir eprp eiv they asked the Megarians to escort them with ships, Thuc. 1, 27 ; ovk à-kokuxva eiv Swarol ôvres not being able to prevent, Thuc. 3, 28; iroXXov 5éw epavrov y' àbwycreiv I am far from (1116) intending to injure myself, Plat. Ap. 37 b. In ail such cases the future is rather exceptional (see 1273). 1280. One regular exception to the principle just stated is found in the periphrastic future (1254). a

èôer]drjaav

B. In Indirect Discourse

1281. The term indirect discourse includes ail clauses depending on a verb of

saying

thinking which contain the thoughts

words of any

person stated indirectly, i.e. incorporated into the général structure of sentence. It includes of course ail indirect quotations and questions.

the

1282. When the optative and infinitive stand in indirect discourse, each tense

represents the corresponding tense of the same verb in the E.g.

direct discourse.

eXe^ev oti ypàcpoi he said that he was writing (he said ypâtpœ I am writing) ; 'éXe^er on ypàfioi he said that he should write (he said ypàfiœ I shall write) ; eXe&v on ypàfieiev he said that he had written (he said eypafia) ; 'éXeÇev on yeypafyùs en? he said that he had already written (he said

TENSES

ykypa<t>a)

273

ris êjuov e'it] ao^ùrepos he asked whether any one was (he asked lart ris;), Plat. Ap. 21 a. <t>-pal yp âtpeiv he says that he is writing (he says ypà<t>u) ; 'é<t>r} ypù.4>tiv he said that he was writing (ypâ^co) ; 4>yai ypàfeiv he says that he will write (ypàxf/o)) ; (prjcrl y pâfai he says that he wrote ('éypafa) ; efir) ypœpai he said that he had written (eypafa) ; <t>ycri yey pa<pévai he says that he has written (yéypa<f>a) ; 'é<fiaaav reôvâvai top avôpa they said that the man was dead (they said rédvyKev à àvyp, 1265), Antiphon 5, 29. ehrev on avôpa. âyoi ôv eïpÇai ôéoi he said that he was bringing a man whom they must lock up (he said avôpa âyoïôv elpÇai ôeî), X. H. 5, 4, 8 ; eXoyiÇovTO ùs, et prj pâxoivto, àiroaT-qcroivTo ai iroXeis they considered that, if they should not fight, the cities would revolt (they thought tàv pf paxûpeda, àwoa'T'qaovTai if we do not fight, they will revolt), ibid. 6, 4. 6.

; rjpero eï

wiser than I

1283. These constructions are explained in 1502, 1509, and 1512. Here they merely show the force of the tenses in indirect discourse. Contrast especially the différence between (ppal ypâ<peiv and 4>-q<ii ypâf ai above with that between fiovXerai iroieîv and /3ov\erai iroiTjcrai under 1274. No¬ tice also the same distinction in the présent and aorist optative. See 1510. 1284. The construction of 1282 is the infinitive

(1278, 1279).

strictly

proper use

of the future

1285. The future perfect infinitive is used here to express future completion with permanent effect (cf. 1277) ; e.g. vcpLÇere h> rfjôe rfj ypépa èpè KaraneKofecrdai believe that on that day I shall have been already (i.e. shall be the same as) eut in pièces, X. An. 1, 5, 16.

1286. a. The présent infinitive may represent the imperfect as well as the présent indicative; e.g. rivas evxàs v-iroXapfiâvtT' evxecrOai tov <$>LXnr.rov ot ecnrevôev what prayers do you suppose Philip made when he was pouring libations? (i.e. rivas yvxero), Dem. 19, 130. The perfect infinitive likewise represents both perfect and pluperfect. In such cases the time of the infinitive must always be shown by the context (as above by or' ecrirevôev). b. For the présent optative representing the imperfect, see 1503. 1287. Verbs of hoping, expecting, promising, swearing, and a few others, an intermediate class between verbs which take the infinitive in indirect discourse and those which do not (see 1281) ; and though they form

regularly have the future infinitive (in indirect discourse, 1282), the présent and aorist infinitive (not in indirect discourse, 1274) are allowed. E.g.

rfkiriÇov pâxyv eaeadai they expected that there would be a batile, Thuc. 4, 71 ; but à ouTrore rfXiriaev ttadeîv what he never expected to suffer, E. Her. 746; virkcrxeTo pyxavvv irapéÇeiv he promised that he would provide an engine, X. C. 6, 1, 21 ; ivepi rovrœv vTvk(rxtT° fiovXevaaadai he promised to take this matter under considération, X. An. 2, 3,19 ; bpôaavres ravrais

èppeveiv having sworn to (or that they would)

abide by these, X. H. 5, 3,

GREEK GRAMMAR

274

26 ; ôpôaai elvai pev rrjv àpxvv KOLvrjv. navras 8' vpîv airoSovvai rrjv xdcpav to swear that the government should be (shared in) common, but that ail

should give up

the land to

you,

Dem. 23, 170.

1288. The future optative is never used except as the représentative of the future indicative, either in indirect discourse (1282) or in the con¬ struction of 1382 (which is governed by the principles of indirect dis¬

course). Even in these the future indicative is generally retained. See

also 1518.

III. Tenses 1289. The tenses of the

time

of the Participle

participle generally

those of the indicative;

future relatively to connected. E.g.

but they

express

are

the

same

présent, past, or

the time of the verb with which they are

rovro iroiœv he errs in doing this, r\p.àprave rovro ttolCjv he erred doing this, àpaprpaerai rovro iroiœv he will err in doing this. Here iroccov is first présent, then past, then future, absolutely ; but always présent to the verb of the sentence. So in indirect discourse : olôa rovrov y pà4>ovra {y p àip avr a, y p aipovr a, OT y ey pacpôr a) I know that he is writing (that he wrote, will write, or has written). ov iroWol 4>atvovraL k\dbvres it is plain that not many went (on the expédition), Thuc. 1, 10. For other examples see 1590. ravra eiirôvres àiYrjXdov when they had said this they departed, kiryveuav rovs eiprjkôtas they praised those who had (already) spoken, roûro Troiyoœv ipxtrai he is coming to do this, rovro n o ltj a o: v rfkdev he came to do this, aireXde ravra \afiwv take this and be off (Xafiwv being past to âireXde, but absolutely future).

àpapràvei in

1290.

The présent may here also represent the

imperfect;

e.g.

I know that even those two men were temperate as long as they associaied with Socrates (i.e. kau»}>pove'iTTjv), X. M. 1, 2, 18. See 1286.

olôa Kànetvio aux})povovvre, eare 'ZuiKpârei avv7]orr)v

b. The (rare) future perfect participle is used to express future completion with permanent effect (cf. 1277) ; e.g. d>s ÔLaireTro\epyaôp.evov(accusative absolute, 1571) since the war would be at an end, Thuc. 7, 25. 1291. The aorist participle in certain constructions (generally with a verb in the aorist) does not dénoté time past with reference to the leading verb, but expresses time coincident with that of the verb when the action of the verb and of the participle is practically one. See examples in 1566 h, 1587, 1588, and Greek Moods and Tenses, §§ 144-150.

IV. Gnomic and Itérative Tenses 1292. The

présent is the tense commonly used in Greek, as in

English, to dénoté

général truth

or an

habituai action. E.g.

THE ADVERB "AN

275

toi Kopos vftpiv, orav nanQ ôX/Sos 'éirritcli satiety begets insolence, whenever prosperity attends the wicked, Theognis 153.

tLktél

language the aorist is used in this sense. gnomic aorist, and is generally translated by the English présent. E.g. 1293. In animated

This is called the

napa.f3o.Lpri, tfrjpLap avToïs kir kd ea av they impose a penalty on ail wlno transgress, X. C. 1, 2, 2 ; p'C rjpkpa top pkv aaOeîXev ùipôdev, top ô' ftp' avœ one day (often) brings down one man from a height and raises another high, E. frag. 424.

rjv tls tovtccv tl

1294. Here

case in past time is vividly used to represent ail Examples containing such adverbs as iroWâias often, r/8r) ovirœ never yet illustrate the construction; e.g. àdvpouvres âvôpes ov7rcc Tpoiraiov eaT-qaav disheartened men never yet raised (i.e. never raise) a trophy, Plat. Critias 108 c. Cf. "Faint heart never won fair lady." 1295. An aorist resembling the gnomic is found in Homeric similes ; e.g. f/perre ô' œs ôre ns ôpûs rjpLTrev and he féll, os wluen some oakfalls (lit. as when an oak once fell), II. 13, 389.

possible already,

1296. The to

ôk

one

cases.

perfect is sometimes gnomic, like the aorist. E.g.

pi] kpiroôùv àvavTayicviaTcç evvoLç. reriprital but those who

men's eyes are Thuc. 2, 45.

1297. The

adverb

held in honor with

are

good will which has

not before

rivalry,

imperfect and aorist are sometimes used with the a customary action. E.g.

to dénoté

Slt]pccTuv âv aî/Tovs tL \kyoiev I used to ask them (/ would often ask them) what they meant, Plat. Ap. 22 b; TroXXà/cts i]Kovcrapev âv vpâs we used often to hear you, Ar. Lys. 511. This itérative usage, which involves no condition (1304), may have

been colloquial.

1298. The Ionic has itérative forms in

imperfect and aorist. above (1297).

See 606.

Herodotus

THE ADVERB

1299. The adverb

distinct

-<tkov

uses

and -aKÔprjv in both these also with âv, as

(epic enclitic Kèv, nè, Doric ko) has two

uses.

a. It may be joined to ail the secondary tenses of the indicative (in Homer also to the future indicative), and to the optative, infinitive, or participle, to dénoté that the action of the verb is dépendent on some circumstances or condition, expressed or implied. Here it belongs strictly to the verb. b. It is joined regularly to et if, to ail relative and temporal words, and sometimes to the final conjunctions œs, oirœs, and

GREEK GRAMMAR

276

followed by the subjunctive. Here, although the verb, it is always closely attached to relative, with which it often forms one word, as

ô<£pa, when these are as an

the

adverb it qualifies

particle

'eireibàv (1311). 1300. There is no English word which can translate àv. In its first use it is expressed in the would or should of the verb (fioûXotro àv he would wish; èXoLpyv àv I should choose). In its second use it generally has no force which can be made apparent in English. 1301. "Av never begins a sentence or clause, but it may be separated from its verb and attached to a négative or interrogative word, to an ad¬ verb, or to a verb of saying or thinking ; e.g. ovk àv poi ôoKel to tolovto £vp(3rjvai yev'eaOaL I do not think that such a thing could by any chance have happened, Thuc. 3, 89 ; oûs vopiÇw àv crùv rrj irapouay hvvàpei raireivovs vp.lv irapa<TX^v whom I think I could, with the force at hand, bring under submission to you, X. An. 2, 5, 13 ; Tàx'fr àv re iroAiv oi tolovtol eTepovs TveiaavTes àiroA'ecreiav further, such men as these, if they should win others over, would very soon destroy a state, Thuc. 2, 63. See 1310. in kàv,

otolV,

1302. The

présent and perfect indicative never take av. sometimes takes av (or xè) in the

1303. The future indicative

early poets, especially Homer ; very rarely in Attic Greek. E.g. tls coô' hpeet and some one will (or may) speak thus, II. 4,176 ; aXXoi o'L Ke pe Tiprjaovai others who will (perchance) honor me, II. 1,174. The future with àv seems to be an intermediate construction between the simple future, will honor, and the optative with àv, would honor. The few examples in Attic prose are suspected. In Plat. Ap. 29 c ySy àv is sepa¬ rated by a long interval from the verb bia4êap^aovTai (anacoluthon). 1304. a. The past tenses of the indicative (generally the imperfect or aorist) are used with av in a potential sense (1334), or in the apodosis of an unfulfilled condition (1407). E.g. oiôèv àv Kaicov eiroLyaav they could (or would) have done no harm ; fj\6ev àv et kneXevcra he would have corne if I had commanded him.

kat né

b. The

imperfect and aorist indicative with àv may also have

itérative

sense.

See 1297.

subjunctive is used with àv only in dépendent constructions mentioned in 1299 b, where àv is attached to the introductory particle or relative word. 1305.

In Attic Greek the

the

See 1376, 1387, 1393, 1440.

epic poetry, where the independent subjunctive often has of the future indicative (1364), it may take /cè or àv, like the future (1303). E.g. b. In

the

sense

THE ADVERB "AN K6 nrj Sûrjaiv, kycb 8k nev avros eXco/xat and I will take her myself, II. 1, 324 (1432).

ei Sk

if he does not give her

277 up,

then

1306. The

optative with dv has a potential sense (1326), and it apodosis of a condition expressed by the optative with ei, denoting what would happen if the condition should be fulfilled (1418). often forms the

1307. The future optative is never used with âv, since it could represent only the future indicative with âv (1288). Similarly the future infinitive and future participle with âv are excluded. In Plat. Ap. 30 b read âv iroii]aavtos, not ttolti<tovtos. Cf. Plat. Crito 53 c, where some MSS. omit it. a. The présent and aorist (rarely the perfect) infinitive participle with av represent the indicative or optative with dv ; each tense being équivalent to the corresponding tense of one of these moods with dv, — the présent representing also the imperfect, and the perfect also the pluperfect (1286, 1290). b. Thus the présent infinitive or participle with av may repre¬ sent either an imperfect indicative or a présent optative with dv ;

1308.

and

either an aorist indicative or an aorist optative with the perfect, either a pluperfect indicative or a perfect op¬ tative with av. E.g. the aorist, av

;

PRESENT. Arçcrte aùroùs kXevdkpovs âv elvai, ei tovto eirpa^av he says that they would (now) be free (fjaav âv) if they had done this ; (frrjalv avroùs kXevdkpovs

eïvai, ei tovto irpâÇeeav he says that they would (hereafter) be free (elev âv) if they should do this; oïôa avroùs kXevdkpovs àv ovt as, ei tovto 'éirpaÇav I know that they would (now) be free (fjaav âv) if they had done this ; olôa aùroùs kXevdkpovs âv ovras, ei ravra irp âi^eiav I know that they WOuld (hereafter) be free (elev âv) if they should do this ; 7r6XX' âv 'éxa>v erep eiireîv although I might (= exoipi âv) say many other things, Dem. 18, 258. AORIST. 4>aal-v uùtov kXdelv âv (or olôa aùrov kXdôvra âv), ei tovto kykvero they say (or I know) that he would have come (fjXdev âv) if this had happened ; 4>a<rlv aùrov kXdeîv âv (OT olôa aùrov kXdôvra âv), ei tovto ykvolro they say (or I know) that he would come (ëXdoL âv) if this should happen; pq.8icos âv à(j)e9eis, nvpoeiXero àivodavetv although he might easïly have been acquitted (à^eidy âv) he preferred to die, X. M. 4, 4, 4. PERFECT. et py ràs àperàs eKeivas irapkaxovTO, iravra ravd' ùiro tuv fiapfiàpcvv âv kaXa)Kevai (</>■>)(mec âv ris) had they not exhibited those exploits of valor, (one might say that) ail this would now be in the hands of (lit. would have been captured by, 1265) the barbarians (êaXct/cei âv), Dem. 19, 312 ; oùk âv rjyovpai aùroùs ô'iktjv àÇiav ôeôœtckvai, ei aÙTUiv KaTaiprjcùio'aiaOe I do not think that, if you should condemn them, they would (thereby, in the future, prove to) have suffered proper punishment (ôeôœKôres âv elev), Lys. 27, 9. âv

GREEK GRAMMAR

278

équivalent In the examples given, the form of the protasis generally settles the question. 1309. The infinitive with âv is used chiefly in indirect discourse (1509) ; but the participle with âv is more common in other constructions (see examples above). The context must décidé in each case whether we have the

of the indicative

of the optative with âv.

av is used with the subjunctive (as in 1299 fo), it be separated from the introductory word only by monosyllabic particles like pév, be, rè, yàp, etc. Cf. 1301.

1310. When

may

1311. When âv is used with the subjunctive, it is combined with the introductory conjunction if crasis (49) is possible. Thus arise the forms kâv (yv, av), kiryv (kirav), kireiôàv, orav, oirorav, from ei if, kirei, kireLÔri wheïl, ore, oiroTe when, + âv', also âv for a âv, Kâv for «ai âv (or kâv), but ecos âv, irplv âv. 1312. In

long apodosis

times with the ovk

âv

rjyelad'

same

avrov

av may

verb. E.g.

be used twice

or even

three

Kâv kir i5 p a pelv ; do you not think that he would even have

rushed thither? Dem. 27, 56. In Thuc. 2,41, âv is used three times with

irapkxeodaL ; in Plat. Ap. 40 d, three times with evpelv ; cf.

~Ei.I.T. 245,627.

be used elliptically with a verb understood. E.g. oLKeraL pkyKovaiv • àXX' ovk âv irpo roO (se. eppeyKov) my servants are snoring ; but in old times they wouldn't have, Ar. Nub. 5. So in <t>o(iovpevos &<nrep âv ei irais SCared as a child (ucrirep âv ètpofieÎTO ei irais fjv), Plat. G. 479 a. 1313. "Av may

1314. When an apodosis consists of several coordinate verbs, generally stands only with the first. E.g.

iroiol, àXX' kirl ravrov ïoiev âp^orepoL he WOUÏd do nothing différent from the other man, but both would make for (go to get) the same object (âv belongs also with ïoiev), Plat. Rep. 360 c.

ovôkv âv ôiâcfropov tov erepov

1315. The adverb raya quickly, soon, readily is often prefixed to âv, in which case ràx' âv is nearly équivalent to ïaœs perhaps. The âv here always

belongs in its regular

sense

(1299 a) to the verb of the sentence ; e.g. would (or might)

râx âv 'è\doi perhaps he would corne, ràx' âv rjXdev perhaps he have corne. A redundant ïaœs may follow râx' âv. THE MOODS

1316. The indicative is used in simple, absolute assertions or négations, and in questions or exclamations which include or concern such assertions ; e.g. ypàcfeL he writes, ovk eypa\f/ev he did not write, ypaxpet he will write, y'eypa<pev he has written, t'l eypâipare; what did y ou write? eypaxpe tovto; did he write this? ola iroLeire how you hehave!

THE MOODS

279

1317. The indicative has a tense to express every variety of time which is recognized by the Greek verb, and thus it can state a

supposition

future.

as well as make an assertion in the past, présent, or It also expresses certain other relations which in other

languages (e.g. Latin) are generally expressed by a différent mood. The following examples will illustrate these uses :

àXydés 'tari, xulpoo if Ihis true, I am glad (1400), ei ey paipev, y\6ov if ha had WTittan, I should hava coma (1407), et tovto woLycreLs, ptT apeXpcrei croc if you do that you will ha sorry (1415), 'eiripeXelTai oirws tovto y evrj cr er at ha takas cara that this shall happen (1382), Xéyet ôrt tovto -n-oiet ha says that ha is doing this ; sometimes ehrev on tovto 7rotet ha said that he was doing this (he said ttolco, 1502), elde pe eKTeiv as, ws pyiroTe tovto èiroLycra O that thou hadst Jcillad ma, that I might navar hava dona this ! (1359,1381), e'Lde tovto àXrjdès ijv O that this wave trua ! (1359). 1318. These constructions are explained in the sections referred to. Their variety shows the impossibility of including ail the actual uses even of the indicative under any single fundamental idea. ei

tovto av

1319. The various

uses

following examples :

of the

subjunctive

are

shown by the

îœpev lat us go (1343),

py 6o.vpàayTe do not wondar (1345), tL eïirw; what (1367), où pi/ tovto ytvyral this (suraly) will not happan (1369), oùôè ÏSœpaL (Homeric) nor shall I saa (1364). epxitcll Iva tovto ïôy ha is coming that ha may saa this (1374), </>o/3etrat pi/ tovto yévr)Tai he faars that this may happan (1389), èàv e\9y, tovto TroLTjau if ha cornes (or if he shall corne), I shall do this (1413), 'eàv ns eXQy, tovto iroiœ if any one (aver) cornes, I (always) do this (1403 a), otav e\0ri, tovto ttolt]oui when he cornes (or whan ha shall corne), I shall do this (1445), orav r ts ëXdn, tovto ttolSj when any one cornes, I (always) do this (1442 a). am

I to say?

1320. The subjunctive, in its simplest and apparently most primitive

simple futurity (négative où) ; this is seen in the Homeric independent construction, ïôupcu I shall see, etiryai tls one will say. In commands it is still future (négative pri) ; e.g. ïœpev let us go, pv troipapte tovto do not do this. In final and object clauses it expresses a future purpose or a future object of fear. In conditional and conditional relative sentences it expresses a future supposition ; except in général conditions, where it is indefinite (but never strictly présent) in its time. use, expresses

1321. The various

lowing examples :

uses

of the optative are shown by the fol¬

you have good luck-, py yévoLro may it not àitoXolvto O that they may not he lost (1355) ; 'éXdoL àv

eùrvxolrts may

might

(1326).

happen; e'ide pf\ he may go or he

GREEK GRAMMAR

280

Î8ol he came that he might see this (1374) ; ê^o/Seîro py tovto he feared that this might happen (1389) ; el èXdoL, tout' 'àv 71-01■qaoiLpi if he should corne, I should do this (1418) ; et tls 'éXdoi, tout' èirotow if anyone (ever) came, I (always) did this (1403 b) ; ore 'éXdoi, tovt' 'àv ■kol7]<jaip.L whenever he should corne (at any time when he should corne), I should do this (1447) ; ôre tls 'éX9oi, tovt 'entoLovv whenever anyone came, I (always) did this (1442 6); èirepeXeÎTO oitlûs tovto yevr)GOLTO he took care that this should happen (1382) ; elirev otl tovto hololti (71-01170-01 or iroir/creie) he said that he was doing (would do or had done) this (1502). 1322. The optative in many of its uses is a vaguer and less distinct form of expression than the subjunctive, indicative, or imperative, in constructions of the same général character. This appears especially in its independent uses; e.g. the Homeric 'EXèvqv d-y017-0 he may take Helen away, II. 4,19 (see yvvalua àyko-dœ, II. 3, 72, referring to the same thing, and kclL 7roré tls etir y & lv and sometime one will say, 1320); loipev may we go (cf. tcofiev let us go) ; p-n yèvoLTo may it not happen (cf. pr\ yéi^rcu let it not happen) ; eXoiro àv (Hom. sometimes ëXoiro alone) he would take (cf. Hom. 'éXr]Tai, sometimes with ne, he will take). So in future conditions; e.g. el yevoiTo if it should happen (cf. èàv yéfijrat if it shall happen). In other dépendent clauses it is generally a corrélative of the subjunctive, some¬ times of the indicative; here it represents a dépendent subjunctive or indicative in its changed relation when the verb on which it dépends is changed from présent or future to past time. The same change in relation is expressed in English by a change from shall, will, may, do, is, etc. to should, would, might, did, was, etc. To illustrate these last relations, com¬ pare epxttcli tva Ï8rj, 4>ofieÏTaL pr) y'evtito.l, èàv tls 'é\9rj tovto ttolcj, eiTLpeXeÏTaL o7rcos tovto yevrjGeTaL, and Xèyei otl tovto ivoLeï, with the corresponding forms after past leading verbs given in 1321. For a discussion of the whole relation of the optative to the subjunctive and the other moods, and of the original meaning of the subjunctive and optative, see Moods and Tenses, pp. 371-389.

ijXdev ïva

tovto

yevoito

imperative is used to express commands and pro¬ do this ; py cfrevyeTe do not fly. 1324. The infinitive, which is a verbal noun, and the participle and the verbal in -réos, which are verbal adjectives, are closely connected with the moods of the verb in many constructions. 1323. The

hibitions ; e.g. tovto Tcolet

ail construc¬ finite verb than the (1316). The infinitive and participle are included here so far as either of them is used in indirect discourse, in protasis or apodosis, or after coure (côs, è<p' u> or è</>' coTe) and irplv. These constructions are divided as follows : 1325. The

following sections (1326-1519) treat of

tions which require any other form of the indicative in simple assertions and questions

OPTATIVE WITH "AN

281

I. Potential Optative and Indicative with âv.

II. Imperative and dicative with

III. IV. V. VI. VII. VIII. IX. X.

XI. XII. XIII.

Subjunctive in commands. — Subjunctive and In¬ or jiij où in cautious assertions. — "Ottcos with the independent Future Indicative (page 284). Expression of a Wish (page 286). Homeric Subjunctive. —Interrogative Subjunctive (page 287). Où nv with Subjunctive and Future Indicative (page 288). Final and Object Clauses with ïva, <hs, ovus, '6<t>pa, and py (page 288). Conditional Sentences (page 292). Relative and Temporal Sentences (page 302). Causal Sentences (page 307). Consécutive Clauses (page 308). Stipulative Clauses (page 309). Clauses signifying Until and Before (page 310). Indirect Discourse or Oratio Obliqua (page 312). /x17

I. Potential

Optative and Indicative with Potential

Optative

optative with av expresses a future action as dé¬ circumstances or conditions. Thus eX0oi av is he may go, he might (could or would) go, or he would he likely to go, as opposed to an absolute statement like he will go. But the trans¬ lation he will go as a future in assertions often quite positive, or he must go, in inferences, is frequently appropriate. E.g. 1326. The

pendent

icev à\ù£,aip.ev nanov fjpap for (perhaps) we may still escape the evil day, Od. 10, 269 ; vâv yàp âv ttùOolo pov for you can learn anything you please from me, Aesch. Pr. 617 ; ri rôvô' âv eïvoLs aXXo; what else could you say of this man? S. Ant. 646 ; oùk âv \ei<j>den;v I would not be left behind (in any case), Hdt. 4, 97 ; ôls es tov aùrov irorapov oùk âv 'epfiaLps you cannot (could not) step twice into the same river, Plat. Crat. 402a; où5' aXXo oùôèv ràyadov âv et?7 the chief çood cannot be anything else, either, Aristot. Nie. Eth. 1172b 32; ySéus âv kpoipyv Aeirrlv-gv I would gladly ask (I should like to ask) Leptines, Dem. 20,129 ; vol ovv tpavolped' âv en; in what other direction can we (could we) possibly turn? Plat. Euthyd. 290 a; où yàp âv àveKdoip', àXXà KÔfoi ryv Gùpav I will not go away, but Fil knock at the door, Ar. Ach. 403 ; oùkovv kv pkaœ ns âv eïrj àpLcrroKpanas Te Kal ôXi/yapxîas avrrj rj voXcrela ; must not this form of govemment, then, be something midway between aristocracy and oligarchy? Plat. Rep. 547 c. So ^ov\otpyv âv, velim, I should like; cf. k(3ov\6pr)v âv, vellem (1338). 1327. This optative is usually called potential, and corresponds generally to the English potential forms with may, can, might, could, would, en

yàp

GREEK GRAMMAR

282

It is équivalent to the Latin potential subjunctive, e.g. dicas, credas, cernas, putes, etc. y ou may say, believe, perceive, think, etc. The limiting condition is generally too indefinite to be distinctly présent to the mind, and can be expressed only by words like perhaps, possibly, or probably, or by such vague forms as if he pleased, if he should try, if he could, if there should be an opportunity, etc. Sometimes a général condi¬ tion, like in any possible case, is felt to be implied, so that the optative with âv hardly differs from an absolute future; e.g. ovk âv pedeip-qv roû Opôvov I will not (would never) give up the throne, Ar. R. 830. See the etc.

examples in 1329. Cf. 1335.

1328. The potential optative can express every degree of potentiality from the almost absolute future of the last example to the apodosis of a future condition expressed by the optative with et (1418), where the form of the condition is assimilated to that of the conclusion. The intermediate steps may be seen in the following examples : ovk âv ôi.k.aiu>s ks kclkov tt éooifxL tl I could not justly fall into any trouble, S. Ant. 240, where ôlkclLus points to the condition if justice should be donc, ovre ecrdiovcri irXeto) ij ôvvavrai (pépeiv ' ôiappay eîev yàp âv nor do they eat more than they can carry, for (if they did) they would burst, X. C. 8, 2, 21, where el êaûtoiev is implied by the former clause. 1329. The potential optative of the second person may express a mild command or exhortation; e.g. x^poîs âv eïaco you may go in, or go in, S. Ph. 674 ; kXvois âv f/ô-q hear me now, S. El. 637. See 1327, 1358. 1330. The potential optative may express what may hereafter prove to be true or to have been true; e.g. j èpq (ao4>La) 4>av\rj ns âv eh? my wisdom may turn out to be of a trivial sort, Plat. Symp. 175 e; irov ôrjr' âv eîev ol Çévoi where may the strangers be? i.e. where is it likely to prove that they are? S. El. 1450 ; elr/crav 8' âv ovtol Kpyres and these would probably be (or must have been) Cretans, Hdt. 1, 2 ; aurai Sè ovk âv 71-oXXai etycrav and these (the islands) cannot have been "many," Thuc. 1, 9 ; ovroi 8è râx' âv petfa nvà i) /car' âvdpuirov aof>tav crocfrol eîev but these men may perhaps (prove to) be wise in a kind of superhuman wisdom, Plat. Ap. 20 d. 1331. Occasionally âv is omitted with the potential optative, chiefly in Homer; e.g. oi; rt KaKwrepov aXXo irâdoip.i I could suffer nothing else that is worse, II. 19, 321. See Gildersleeve S. C. G. 450. 1332. The Attic poets sometimes omit âv after such indefinite expres¬ sions as 'écrriv ocrris, euriv Ô7rois, ecrriv ottol, etc.; e.g. ëcrr' ovv Ô7rws "AXktjcttis 'es yrjpas pô\oi; is it possible then that Alcestis can corne to old âge? E. Aie. 52 ; so 113, and Aesch. Pr. 292. 1333. For the potential optative in Homer referring to past time, see

1409.

INDICATIVE WITH 'AN

283

Potential Indicative 1334. The

past tenses of the indicative with àv express a past dépendent on past circumstances or conditions. Thus, while rjXdev means he went, rjXdev àv means he would have gone (•under some past circumstances). action

1335. This is called the potential indicative; and it probably arose as past form of the potential optative, so that, while ëXBoi âv meant originally he may go or he would he likely to go, rjXdev âv meant he may have gone or he would have heen likely to go. It is the équivalent of the Latin forms like diceres y ou would have said, crederes you would have believed, cerneres, putares, etc., which are past potential forms corresponding to dicas, credas, cernas, putes, etc. (1327). E.g. putet and putaret are équivalent to o'Lolto âv he would be likely to think, and œero av he would have been likely to think. a

1336. The potential indicative sometimes expresses (in its original force) what would have been likely to happen, i.e. might have happened (and perhaps did happen) with no reference to any definite condition., E.g. vtto kev raXaaLcfjpovâ irep ôéos elXev fear might have seized (i.e. would have been likely to seize) even a man of stout heart, II. 4, 421 ; fjXde tovto rovveiôos râx' àv ôpyrj piaaOév this reproach may perhaps have corne from violence of wrath, S. O. T. 523 ; kv Taurfl rfj riXuâq, XkyovTes ivpos vpâs kv y àv p.âXiara kir larev a are talking to you at that âge at which you would have been most likely to put trust in them, Plat. Ap. 18 c. to

1337. Generally, however, the potential indicative implies a reference some circumstances différent from the real ones, so that rjXdev àv

commonly

(if something had not been as it was). indefinite as the (1327). E.g. où yâp Kev ôvvâpecrOa (impf.) dvpâwv àirœaaadai X'idov for we COuld not have moved the stone from the doorway, Od. 9, 304 ; cf. oùôkv àv KaKov -Koiyoeiav they could do no harm (if they should try), with oùôkv àv kaKov kirolyaav they could have done no harm (if they had tried) ; toùtov tLs àv ool ràvôpos àpeivcov gùpkQr); who could have beenfound better than this man? S. Aj. 119 ; ôipk fjv, Kai ràs xeîpas oùk àv KaOeœpuv it was late, and they would not have seen the show of hands, X. H. 1, 7, 7 ; rrotœv àv ëpywv àirkargcr av ; from what labors would they have shrunk? Isoc. 4, 83. 1338. When no definite condition is understood with the potential in¬ dicative, the imperfect with âv is regularly past, as it always is in Homer (1408). See the examples in 1337. The imperfect with âv referring to présent time, which is common in apodosis after Homer (1407), seldom appears in purely potential expres¬ sions, chiefly in k^ovXôprjv âv vellem, I should wish, I should like (which means

he would have

gone

The unreal past condition here may be as vague and future condition to which the potential optative refers

GREEK GRAMMAR

284 can mean

also I should have wished) ; e.g. k(3ov\ôpgv àv avrovs à\gQg \kyeiv

I could wish

that they spoke the truih, Lys. 12, 22.

potential indicative may express every degree of potentiality frora that seen in 1336 to that of the apodosis of an unfulfilled condition actually expressed. (Cf. the potential optative, 1328.) Here, after Homer, the imperfect with av may express présent time (see 1407). The intermediate steps to the complété 1339. The

apodosis

may

be seen in the following

examples :

eipgvgv opccs ' ov yàp gv o tl àv ènoieîre still you kept the peace; for there was nothing which you could have done (if you had mot), Dem. 18, 43. iroXXoO yàp àv rà ôpyavarjv à&a for the tools would be worth much (if they had this power), Plat. Rep. 374 d. For the full conditional sentences, see 1407.

gyere rgv

1340. For

II.

imperfects denotwith the infinitive, see 1410.

peculiar potential expression formed by

ing obligation etc., like 'éôei, xpvv, etc.,

Commands, Exhortations, Prohibitions

imperative expresses a command, exhortation, or Xéye speak! 4>tvye begone! éXdérco let hirn come, Xcupôvrœv let them rejoice. For the optative with av, see 1329. 1342. A combination of command and question is found in such phrases as oîa-6' ô Spàaov; dost thou know what to do? Ar. Av. 54, where the imperative is the verb of the relative clause. So olada vvv à pot yevécxOu; do you know what must be done for me? E.I. T. 1203. 1343. The first person of the subjunctive (generally plural) is used in exhortations. Its négative is pp. E.g. 'iwpev let us go, 'Lôœpev let us see, pg tovto iroLwpev let us not do this. This sup¬ plies the want of a first person of the imperative. 1344. Both subjunctive and imperative may be preceded by àye (àyere), <t>épe, or 191 come ! These words are used without regard to the number or person of the verb which follows. A hortatory àXXâ often pré¬ cédés the imperative; e.g. àXX' àye ptpvere navres avTÔdt. nay come, stay ye ail here, II. 2, 331. 1345. In prohibitions, in the second and third persons, the présent imperative or the aorist subjunctive is used with pg and its compounds. E.g. p9i irotei tovto do not do this (habitually, 1274) or do not go on doing this or abstain from doing this; pg no ego-g s tovto (simply) do not do this; pil Karà tovs vôpovs SiKacrgre ' pg (3og6gcrgre tco nenovdôri SeLvà • pg eiop1341. The

entreaty;

e.g.

COMMANDS AND EXHORTATIONS Keïre

285

do not judge according io the

outrages; do not abide by

your

laws; do not help him who has suffered oaths, Dem. 21, 211.

1346. The third person of the aorist imperative sometimes

prohibitions

the second

;

person very

occurs

rarely.

1347. In Homer the independent subjunctive with py (generally in the third person) may express fear or anxiety, with a desire to avert the object of the fear. E.g. yy

vyas eXojcrt may they not seize the ships (as I fear they may), II. 16, 128; yy tl xoXcocrâjueî'os pé£j7 ko.kov vîas 'Axaiûv may he not (as I fear he may) in his wrath do any harm to the sons of the Achaeans, II. 2,195.

ôrj

1348. This usage occurs sometimes in Euripides and Plato; e.g.

o-oùs

fear is that you may be sullied for a proper marriage, E. Aie. 315 ; yy rts o'iyrai I fear that one may think, Plat. Legg. 861 e. See Moods and Tenses, §§261-264. ÔLCMfrdetpy yàyovs

1349. An

independent présent subjunctive with

py may express

cautious assertion, or a suspicion that something may be true ; and with py ov a cautious négation, or a suspicion that something a

may yy

not be true. This is

favorite

usage

with Plato. E.g.

à\y6ès eiirtiv I suspect that it may be rather boorish to tell the truth, Plat. G. 462 e; àXXà yy où tout' y xAXeivbv but I rather think

àypolkôtepov

y to

that this may not

difficult thing, Plat. Ap. 39 a.

1350. The indicative may be thus used (1349) with

ring to présent

past time. E.g.

or yr) ov,

refer-

but perhaps We did not do well in Hence yy-wort perhaps in Aristotle and

àXXà yy tovto ov KaXûs ùyoXoyyaayev

assenting to this, Plat. Meno 89

later Greek.

1351. In Attic Greek

oirtos

and birœs

used colloquially prohibitions. E.g.

py are

with the future indicative in commands and

Ô7rcos crwcreis ye SO UOW Save me, Ar. Nub. 1177 ; Karàdov ra (TKevy, xôj7tcos èpeïs kvTavOa yyôèv fevôos put down the packs, and tell no lies here, Ar. R. 627 ; o7rcos ovv ecreade a£ioi tt}s eXevdepias (see that you) prove yourselves worthy offreedom, X. An. 1, 7, 3 ; ottcos yoi yy epeîs otl ccttl rà ôûôeKa ôls ëÇ see that you do not tell me that twelve is twice six, Plat. Rep. 337 b.

vvv ovv

1352. The construction of 1351 is often explained by an ellipsis of crKÔTrei

Or cr/coxetTe

(see 1382).

1353. The subjunctive with o7rcos alone ; e.g. ôxcos 430 d.

occasionally occurs here with ottcos yy, but not maybe this will prove true, Plat. Crat.

yy y tovto

1354. The future indicative with où, put as a question, may express a

command; e.g. oùros, où yeveïs;

you

there, stop! Ar. Av. 1055.

GREEK GRAMMAR

286

III. 1355. When

Expression of

Wish

wish refers to the future, it is expressed by the

without e'ide or ei yàp (et alone in poetry, yàp) O that, O if. The négative is py, stand alone with the optative. E.g.

optative, either with

or in Homer also a'Lde, aï

which

can

v/jlîv deoi ôoîev eKirépacu Ilpiâ/xoto ttô\lv may the gods grant to you to destroy Priam's city, II. 1, 18; aï yàp kpoi ToooyvSe deoi Siivapiv Trepcdeîev O that the gods would clothe me with so much strength, Od. 3, 205 ; to pev vvv raOra tt pyacroLs Tàirep 'tv xtpvi for Ike présent may you carry OUt these things which you have now in hand, Hdt. 7, 5 ; e'tde <j>t\os ypîv

X. H. 4,1,38; pyicén Çd>y v kyœ longer live, Ar. Nub. 1255; et poi yk.vot.To cfrdôyyos kv (ipaxioaiv 0 that I might find a voice in my arms, E. Hec. 836. The force of the tenses here is the same as in protasis (see 1274). y'evoio O that you may become our friend, may

1356. In poetry e.g. 7rcos

irws

àv may introduce a

àv p.' â8e\4>rjs xeip TrepLOTeikeiev;

compose my

body! E. I. T. 627.

wish in the form of

would that

question ;

sister's hand might

sometimes prefix ùs (probably exclamatory) to the optative in wishes ; e.g. ws àirôXoLTo Kal âXXos ôrts rotaûrâ ye pkÇoi likewise perish any other who may do the like! Od. 1, 47. 1357. The poets, especially Homer,

especially in Homer, the optative alone sometimes concession or permission, sometimes a command or exhortation ; e.g. auTLs 'Apyetyv 'EXkvyv MevkXaos àyot-To Menelaus may take back Argive Helen, II. 4,19; tedvatys, <5 Ilpoir', y KàKTa.ve BeXXepo4>ôvTyv either die, O Proetus, or kill Bellerophon, II. 6, 164 ; neivos e'Lyv set me down an empty fool, Pind. O. 3, 45. Here, and in wishes without ei, ei yàp, etc., we prob¬ ably have an original independent use of the optative; whereas wishes introduced by any form of ei are probably elliptical protases. See 1329 and Appendix I in Greek Moods and Tenses, pp. 371-389. 1358. In poetry,

expresses a

1359. When a wish refers to the présent or the past, and it is implied that its object is not or was not attained, it is expressed in Attic Greek by a secondary tense of the indicative with eWe or el yàp, which here cannot be omitted. The négative is pp. The imperfect and aorist are distinguished here as in protasis (1407). E.g. e'tde

eiro'iei O that he were doing this, or O that he had done this; e'tde eTvoiyaev O that he had done this ; e'td' elxes (ieXTLOvs <j>pkvas O that thou hadst a better understanding, E. El. 1061 ; ei yàp Toaavryv ôvvap.Lv eîxov O that I had so great power, E. Aie. 1072; e'tde <tol rore aweyevopyv 1 wish I had met you at that time, X. M. 1, 2,46. tovto

tovto

WISHES

—

INDEPENDENT SUBJUNCTIVE

287

1360. The aorist oxfeXov ought of oefeLXoo owe (Lat. debeo), and in Homer sometimes the imperfect &4>e\\ov, are used with the

infinitive, chiefly in poetry, to tained wish (1412 6). E.g. w</)eXe

express a présent or past unat-

iroieîv would that he

were doing this (lit. he ought to be doing would that he had done this (habitually) ; &4>eXe tovto Trocrjcrai would that he had done this. For the distinction made by the différent tenses of the infinitive, see 1410 6. Tr\v 64>eX' ev vrieooi kotoktâpev "Apreyuis would that Artemis had slain her at the ships, II. 19, 59. 1361. "ilfytkov with the infinitive is negatived by pi] (not ov), and it may even be preceded by e'Lde, el yâp, or ds ; e.g. pi] ttot' &(jieXov XLireïv trp> Zkvpov O that I had never left Scyros, S. Ph. 969; ei yâp &4>eXov oïoL re elvai would that they were able, Plat. Crito 44 d ; cbs œ<peXes oXeodcu would that you had perished, II. 3, 428 (1357)

tovto

this),

1362. In Homer the présent optative

(generally with eWe or el yâp) unattained wish in présent time; e.g. eïd' &s vfiâoipi /3b] be pot epirebos e'Lr] would that I were again as young and my strength were firm, II. 11, 670. This corresponds to the Homeric use of the optative in unreal condi¬ tions and their apodoses (1408). In both constructions the présent op¬ tative is commonly future in Homer, as in other Greek. may express an

1363. Homer

never uses the indicative (1359) in wishes. He always past wish by the construction with &<j>eXov (1360), and a présent wish sometimes by û<peXov and sometimes by the présent opta¬ tive (1362). For the infinitive, see 1541.

expresses a

IV. Homeric

1364. In

Subjunctive like Future Indicative Interrogative Subjunctive

—

Homer the subjunctive in independent sentences a future indicative. E.g.

sometimes has the force of ov

toIovs 'Lbov àvepas, ovbe ïôœpai for I never yet saw nor shall I ever such men, II. 1, 262; kch ttoté t is eïtryoïv and one will (or may) some time say, II. 6, 459.

yâp

7rco

see

1365. This subjunctive may, like the future indicative, take ne or âv in See 1305 6, 1320. 1366. The question tI irâdœ; what will become of me? or what harm will

the potential sense.

it do me? carries this

use even

into Attic Greek.

E.g.

èyâ>, ri irâdw; Od. 5, 465; t'l irâdw tXtjplûv; what will become of me, wretch that I am? Aesch. Pr. 912; to péXXov, el xpv> Trelcropai ■ tl yâp ■jrâdœ; I shall suffer what is to corne, if it must be; for what harm can

& pol

it do me? E. Ph. 895.

GREEK GRAMMAR

288

of the subjunctive may be used in ques¬ appeal, where a person asks himself or another what he is to do. The négative is pp. It is often accompanied by a parenthetical /3oî'\ei or fiovXeode (in poetry 0éAeis or déAere). E.g. e'Liru ravra; Qffll I to Say this? or (ioiiXeL etirio raOra; do you wishme to say this? 7roî TpG.7rc0fj.atj ttol TTopevdûj whither shall I turn? whither shall 1367. The first person

tions of

go? E. He,C. 1099 ;

thou that

ttov

ôi] (3ov\ei KadiÇbpevoi àvayvœpev;

sit dovm and read? Plat. Phdr. 228 e.

1368. The third person is

where nowwilt

sometimes found in these questions, chiefly what are we (is one)

when ris has the force of we ; e.g. tL tls elvai tovto to say

this is? Dem. 19, 88. V. Où

|xtj with Subjunctive and Future Indicative

subjunctive (generally the aorist) and sometimes the with the double négative où pp in the sense of an emphatic future indicative with où. E.g. oi pi] TtLOpTai he wïll not obey, S. Ph. 103; ovté yàp yiyveTai ovre y'eyovev, oîiôè ovv pi] yévr)Tai for there is not, nor has there been, nor will there ever be, etc., Plat. Rep. 492 e ; ov ttot ê£ kpov ye pi] Trâdys rôôe you never shall suffer this at my hands, S. El. 1029 ; ov toi p-q-n-ote ae . . . clkovtû. tls d£el no one shall ever take you against your will, S. O. C. 176. 1370. In the dramatic poets, the second person singular of the future indicative (occasionally of the aorist subjunctive) with où py may express a strong prohibition. E.g. pi] KO.Tafii]ati don't corne down (you shall not corne down), Ar. V. 397 ; pi] Tcx.be yyjpvcreL do not speak out in this way, E. Hipp. 213; ov pi] o-KcoxJ/ys do not jeer, Ar. Nub. 296. 1369. The

future indicative are used

This construction is not interrogative.

VI. Final and

Object Clauses with ïva, às, oircos, o<J>pa, and

1371. The final

particles

are

ïva, ùs,

orrais,

|i/rj

and (epic and lyric)

ôefipa that, in order that. To these must be added pp lest or that, which became in use a négative final particle. The clauses which are introduced by these particles may be divided into three classes a.

final clauses, expressing a purpose or motive; e.g. tovto ïby he is coming that he may see this. Here any final particles may be used (see 1377).

Pure

epxerat

of the

ïva

FINAL CLAUSES b. care

289

Objecta clauses with oirœs and verbs signifying to strive for, to for, to effect; e.g. o7co7ret ottojs tovto yevyaetcu see to it that this

is done. c.

ni]

Clauses with

tovto

ny and verbs of fear or caution ; yévr]tal he fears that this may happen.

e.g.

<£o/3eirat

1372. The first two classes are to be specially distinguished. The ob¬ ject clauses in b are the direct object of the leading verb, and can even stand in apposition to an object accusative like tovto; e.g. akoiret tovto, ôttcos pq <re oi/'erat see to this, that he does not see you. But a final clause could stand in apposition only to tovtov evena for the sake of this, or ôtà tovto to this end ; e.g. 'épxetcu tovtov evtna, ïva qpâs ïôq he is coming for this purpose, that he may see us. For the origin of the clauses in c, which are objects of a verb of fear, and the development of final clauses, see Moods and Tenses, §§ 307-316.

1373. The négative in ail these clauses is pq, except after pq lest, where KarappùSqaav pq ov SvvaToi y'evoivTai vireppaXécrdaL they feared that they should not be able to overcome them, Hdt. 6, 9. où is used ; e.g.

I. Pure Final Clauses 1374. Final

clauses, expressing the

purpose

of the action de-

noted in the main clause, take the subjunctive after primary

tenses, and the optative after secondary tenses. E.g.

Tas àpâÇas, ïva pq rà Çevyq qpùv cttp aTqyq I think We should burnour wagons, that our cattle may not be our commander s, X. An. 3, 2, 27 ; étira) tl ôrjta /caXX', Iv àpyLcr77 irXkov; shall I speak still further, that you may be the more angry? S. O. T. 364 ; irapaKaXeîs iaTpovs, Ô7ra>s

ôoKeî poi Karanavcrai

prj

àirodàvy you call in physicians, that he may not die, X. M. 2,10, 2 ; Kat tovtov iroXkpiov irpoadwpeda it IS ex¬

XucrireXeî 'eâaai 'tv rû irapovTL, pq

pédient to allow it for a time, lest we add him to the nurnber of our enemies, X. C. 2, 4, 12; <£îXos ê/SoîiXero elvai. toîs pkyioTa ôwapkvoLS, ïva àôucœv pq ÔLÔotq ôinqv he wished to be a friend to men high in power, that he might do wrong and not be punished, X. An. 2, 6, 21 ; tovtov 'éveKa <pL\a>v &tro deïcrbai, ùs awepyoùs exot what he thought he needed friends for was that he might have helpers, X. An. 1, 9, 21 ; à<t>LKÔpqv ôwœs aov ôôpovs èXOôvTos ev irpâ£ai.pl tl I came that I might gain some good by your reiurn home, S. O. T. 1005.

6<f)pa tterro L9qs I will nod my assent, that you may trust II. 1, 522 ; 'évOa /carécrxer', o4>p' erapov 9 air toi there he tarried that he might bury his companion, Od. 3, 284.

K&paXfj

Karavevaopai,

me,

1375. The future indicative is rarely found in final clauses

6<t>pa, ùs, and 56 ;

4, 163

;

with

oirus,

This is almost entirely confined to poetry. See Od. 1, II. 20, 301 ; Ar. Eccl. 495. pq.

GREEK GRAMMAR

290

1376. The adverb àv («è) is sometimes joined with d>s, ôirœs, and ôtppa (never with Iva) before the subjunctive in final clauses ; e.g. ûs àv pàdys, àvTaKovaov hear the other side, that you may learn, X. An. 2, 5,16. For this use, see Moods and Tenses, §§ 325-328. The final optative with àv is probably always potential (1326).

tragedy, and

1377. "0<f>pa is the most common final particle in Homer, ùs in and Iva in comedy and prose. But ôwœs exceeds Iva in Thucydides

Xenophon. 'fis

in good use in prose, except in Xenophon.

was never

the purpose or motive of some they admit the double construction of indirect discourse (1496, 1517). Hence instead of the optative after past tenses we can have the mood and tense which would be used when a person conceived the purpose; that is, we can say either rjXdev 'iva 'iôoi he came that he might see (1374), or ffkOev 'iva 'Lôy because the person himself would have said 'épxopat, 'iva 'iôœ I come that I may see. E.g. 1378. As final clauses express

person,

he advised the 1, 65 ;

rots aXAots eKirXevaai, oitojs kiri irXkov ô irtros àv t La XV rest to sait away, that the provisions might hold out longer, Thuc. rà irAoîa Karénavaev, Iva py KOpos ôiafifj he burned the vessels, that

£uvef3où\eve

Cyrus

might not pass over, X. An. 1,4, 18; /cat è7rtr?jôés cre ovk ijyeipov Iva dis ijÔLara ôiâyys in fact I did not wake you up on purpose, for I wanted you to pass your

time

happily

possible, Plat. Crito 43 b. than the optative after Thucydides and Herodotus ; but much

1379. The subjunctive is even more common

past tenses in certain authors, e.g. so in others, e.g. Homer and Xenophon.

less

suggested in a condition ; e.g. 7retpàI wïll make trial if so be that I may release thee from these toils, Aesch. Pr. 327. This occurs especially when the condition is introduced by et irœs, kàv ttcos, et àpa if haply ; e.g. I8ùv avkrjv ffKdev el àpa tl eîipycrti kv aùrfj seeing a fig tree he came, if haply he might find anything thereon, Mark 11, 13. See 1430. 1380. Purpose is often

cropaL

implied

kàv ôvvcopat rœvôk a' è/tXCcrat irôvcov

1381. The past tenses

of the indicative are used in final clauses ùs, to dénoté that the purpose does not or did not take place

with 'iva, sometimes with oirws or is dépendent on some act which

(as

or some unaccomplished not attained. E.g.

unfulfilled condition

on some

and therefore is not

or was

wish),

ws eSetf a pyiroTe, k.t.\. why did yOU not take me that I might never have shown (as I have done), etc.? S.O. T. 1391; </>eD, 4>ev, to py ta irphypar' àvOpcoirois exetp 4>ojvt]V, Ïv rjaav pyôkv oi Seivol Xôyoi alas! alas! that the facts have no voice for men, so that words of éloquence might be as nothing, E .frag. 442.

ri p ov

\a(3<hv

and kill

enTeivas

evdvs,

at once,

OBJECT CLAUSES

291

II. Object Clauses with ôtccs after Verbs of

Striving, etc.

Object clauses, which take the place of a substantive ob¬ ject of the main verb, dépend on verbs signifying to strive for, to care for, to effect, and take the future indicative with ôttws or oxcos fj.ii after both primary and secondary tenses. The future optative may be used after secondary tenses, as the corrélative of the future indicative, but commonly the indicative is retained on the principle of 1378. E.g. 1382.

4>p6vTiÇ' oirœs pyôèv àvà^iov rrjs TLprjs ravrys ir partis take heed that you do nothing unworthy of this honor, Isoc. 2, 37 ; èwepeXeÏTo ôwus py aairol 7rore 'èiTOLVTo he took care that they should never be without food, X. C. 8, 1, 43 (here ecrovrai would be more common) ; 'eirpacraov ôxcos ns Po-qdeLa they were trying to bring about the arrivai of some assistance, Thuc. 3,4. .

For Ô7rcos and 6irœs ph with the future indicative in commands and pro¬ an ellipsis of oKÔiret. or ono-nelre in this con¬

hibitions, often explained by struction, see 1351.

1383. When the main verb is in the passive, the substantive clause is of subject, not object ; e.g. kirparrero oirœs pi] irepiptveïre tovs irpécrfleis, ïva iôLç. Troii]<rT]a9e ttjv eipijvr]v it was contrived that you should not wait for the COUrse

envoys,

in order that

you

might make

separate

peace,

Aeschin. 3, 64.

1384. The future indicative with Ô7rcos sometimes follows verbs of

ex-

horting, entreating, commanding, and forbidding, which commonly take an infinitive of the object; e.g. ÔLaKeXevovrai oxcos TLpœpijaerai navras tovs tolovtovs they exhort him to take vengeance on ail such, Plat. Rep. 549 e.

1385. a. Sometimes the présent or aorist subjunctive or opta¬ tive is used in object clauses as in those expressing purpose. E.g. âXXov

tov

'enLpeXpcrei

rj oiroos

thing except that

o n

we may

ftéXricrToi iroXirat. copev ; will yOU Care for anybe the best possible citizens? Plat. G. 515 b;

kirepëXero avrûv, ottws àel àvôpcLTroôa ôiareXolev he took should always remain slaves, X. C. 8,1, 44.

Xenophon allows

ùs with the

subjunctive

that

Care

they

optative here.

1386. M17 lest may be used for ôttcos pi] with the subjunctive. 1387. "Av or *:è can be used here, as in final clauses (1376), with ônus or ùs and the subjunctive. So (rarely) in a construction corresponding to that of 1384 ; e.g. napayykXXovcTLv oncxts âv rfjSe rfj gpépq. reXevrç. they notify him that he is to die that day, Plat. Phaedo 59 e. 1388. In Homer the construction of 1382 with future is not found ; but verbs signifying to plan,

try take

orcos or

cbs and the subjunctive

oirœs

and the

consider, and optative. E.g.

GREEK GRAMMAR

292

tppaSûued' o7rcos ox àpiara yévrjTai let us consider how the very best may be done, Od. 13, 365; cfrpàcraeTat. ws Ke verrai he will plan for his return, Od. 1,205; povXevov Ô7rcos ox' apicrra ykvoiro they deliberated that the very best might be done, Od. 9, 420. So rarely with Xlaaopai entreat (see 1384). III. Clauses with py

after Verbs of Fearing, etc.

denoting fear, caution, or danger, prj that or subjunctive after primary tenses, and the optative after secondary tenses. The subjunctive may also follow secondary tenses, to retain the mood in which the fear originally occurred to the mind. The négative form is py ov (1373). E.g. 4>o(3ovp.ai pi) tovto yéptjrac (vereor ne accidat) I fear that this may happen; <t>ofiovpai pi) où tovto y evr)tai (vereor ut accidat) I fear that this may not happen) 4>povtlÇco pi) kpcltkjtov fj poi cnyâv I am anxious lest it may be best for me to be silent, X. M. 4, 2, 39; où/cért eirerLdevTo, ôeôtôres pi) àiroTpr)delr)<Tav they no longer made attacks, fearing that they vjould be eut off, X. An. 3, 4, 29; k4>o(3ovvto pi) tl -n-kd-p they feared that something might happen to him (1378), X. Symp. 2,11. 1390. The future indicative is very rarely used after pi) in this con¬ struction. But 071-cos pi) is sometimes used here, as in the object clauses of 1382, with both future indicative and subjunctive; e.g. ôéôoLKa ottus py àvàyKr) yevijaeTai I fear that there may corne a necessity, Dem. 9, 75; ôirws ph here is the équivalent of pi), that or lest, in the ordinary construction. 1389. With verbs

lest takes the

fearing may refer to objects of fear which are présent or past. Here py takes the présent and past tenses of the indicative. E.g. 1391. Verbs of

pi) irXyyœv Séeilfear that you need a whipping, Ar. Nub. 493 ; <j)o(3ovpeda pi) àp4>oTepu>v apa hpapri)Kapev we fear that we have missed both at once, Thuc. 3, 53 ; ôetôco pi) 8ii iràvTa, deà vrjpepTka elir ev I fear that ail which the goddess said was true, Od. 5, 300; ôpa pi) ivaLÇwv 'èXeyev beware lest

ôéôoïKa

was

speaking injest, Plat. Th. 145 b. For the infinitive, see 1523. VII. Conditional Sentences

containing the con¬ protasis, and that containing the conclusion is called the apodosis. The protasis is introduced by some form of el if. 1392. In conditional sentences the clause

dition is called the

1393. The adverb av (epic xè or nèv) is regularly joined to (epic at) in the protasis when the verb is in the subjunctive ;

CONDITIONAL SENTENCES with

forming kàv, 'av,

293

See 1299 b, 1311. The simple el is optative. The same adverb av is optative, and also with the past tenses of the indicative when it is implied that the condition is av

or yv.

used with the indicative and used in the apodosis with the

not fulfilled. 1394.

The négative adverb of the

that of the apodosis is b. When

word

(e.g.

stands in

protasis is regularly

py,

ov.

protasis, it generally belongs to

some

particular

iroXXoL few, ov cfiryj.1 I deny, 1612), and not to the protasis as a whole ; e.g. kàv re <rv kal "Awtos ov <t>fjte kàv re 4>r}te whether you and Anytus

deny it

admit it, Plat. Ap. 25 b. See 1241

second example.

The

supposition contained in a protasis may be either particular or général. A particular supposition refers to a definite act or to several definite acts, supposed to occur at some definite time or times ; e.g. if he (now) has this, he will give it ; if he had it, he gave it ; if he had had the power, he would have helped me ; if he shall receive it (or if he receives it), he will give it ; if he should receive it, he would give it. A général supposition refers indefinitely to any act or acts of a given class, which may be supposed to occur or to have occurred at any time; e.g. if ever he receives anything, he (always) gives it ; if ever he received anything, he (always) gave it ; if (on any occasion) he had had the power, he would (always) have helped me ; if ever any one shall (or should) wish to go, he will (or would) always be permitted. 1395.

b. Although this distinction is seen in ail classes of conditions (as the examples show), it is only in the présent and past conditions which do not imply non-fulfilment, i.e. in those of class I (1398), that the distinction

affects the construction.

Classification of Conditional Sentences 1396. The classification of conditional sentences is based partly on the time to which the supposition refers, partly on what is implied with regard to the fulfilment of the condition, and partly on the distinction between

particular and général suppositions explained in 1395.

1397. Conditional sentences have four classes, two (I and II) containing présent and past suppositions, and two (III and IV) containing future suppositions. Class I has two forms, one (a) with chiefly particular suppositions (présent and past), the other (b) with only général suppositions (1 présent, 2 past).

GREEK GRAMMAR

294

thus the following forms :

1398. We have

suppositions implying nothing as to the untruth of the protasis : (protasis) ei with indicative ; (apodosis) any form of the verb. El tovto iroieî, KaXûs ex« if he is doing this, it is (a) Chiefly I. Présent and past

truth

well ; ei tovto €ttol7]<te, «aXcos exei if he did See 1400. In Latin: si hoc facit, bene

Particular:

(b) General:

this, it is well. est.

{prot.) 'eâv with subjunctive ; (apod.) présent indicative. 'eà? tls KXéirTv, koxàçetal if anyone {ever) steals, he is {always) punished. See 1403 a. {prot.) ei with optative; {apod.) imperfect indicative. Et tls k\kir toi, inoxaçeto if anyone ever stole, he was {always) punished. See 1403 b. For the Latin, see 1399.

II. Présent and past

suppositions implying that the protasis is

fulfilled : indicative; {apod.) past tense of indicative with Et tovto eiroLyoe, KaXœs âv eaxev if he had done this, it would have been well ; ei tovto èiroiei, koXoûs âv elxev if he were doing this, it would {now) be well, or if he had done this, it would have been well. See 1407. Latin: si hoc faceret, bene esset (présent); si hoc fecisset, and that the condition is not

not true

{prot.) ei with past tense of av.

bene fuisset

(past).

suppositions in more vivid form : {prot.) 'eâv with subjunctive (sometimes et with future indicative) ; (apod.) any future form. 'Eàf tovto iroiy (or irol-qarj), KaXâis ë£ei if he shall do this (or if he does this), it will be well (1413). For et tovto troirjael see 1415. In Latin : si hoc faciet (or f ecerit), bene erit. IV. Future suppositions in less vivid form : (prot.) ei with optative; {apod.) optative with âv. Eî tovto wololt] (or 7roti7crete), koXûs âv ilxoi if he should do this, it would be well. See 1418. III. Future

In Latin

si hoc f aciat, bene sit.

1399. Latin commonly agréés with English in not marking the distinc¬ tion between the général and the particular présent and past conditions

by différent forms,

and uses the indicative in both alike. See

I. Présent and Past A. Simple Suppositions,

1405.

Conditions

Chiefly Particular

protasis simply states a particular supposition, implying nothing as to the fulfilment of the condition, it has the indicative with et. The apodosis may have any form of the verb required by the sense. E.g. 1400. When the

CONDITIONAL SENTENCES eî riavx'iav

$L\unros

295

ôeZ Xeyeiv if Philip is keeping peace (with longer, Dem. 8, 5; ei èyù •baZbpov âyvoû, Kai èpavrov èTnXéXijapai • àXXà yàp ovôérepâ êcrri rovrwv if I don'l know Phœdrus, I have forgotten who I am myself ; but neither of these two things is so, Plat. Phdr. 228 a ; ei deov fjv, ovk i)v aiaxpoKtpôrjs granting that he was the son of a god, he was not avaricious, Plat. Rep. 408 c ; àXX' ei SoKeZ, irXeœpev but if it pleases you, let us sail, S. Ph. 526 ; kclkictt' à-KoXoip-pv, TZavdLav ei pi) 4>iXû> perdition catch me if I don't love Xanthias, Ar. R. 579; ei ôé n âXXo (SeXriov r) ravry, roXpàrai Kai ô iÔLwr tjs bi.5o.cTK.eLV but if any other way is better than this, let even the private soldier venture to tell us, X. An. 3, 2 32; rore rov 'TirepeLÔT]P, eïirep àXrjdij pou vvv KarrjyopeZ, pâXXov âv e'iKÔTCos rj tôvô' èôiwKev granting that what he now charges against me is true, it would have been more reasonable for him to prosecute Hyper ides at that time than my client, Dem. 18, 223.

us), weneed talk

ay ei, ovKeri

1401. Even the future indicative may stand in a protasis of this class if it expresses merely a présent intention or necessity that something shall hereafter be done; e.g. alpe ttXtjktpov, ei paxtZ raise your spur, if you are

going to fight, Ar. Av. 759. Here ei péXXeis pax^dat would be the common expression in prose (1254). or

1402. For présent or past conditions containing a potential indicative

optative (with av),

see

B. PRESENT

1431

AND

PAST GENERAL SUPPOSITIONS

1403. In

général suppositions, the apodosis expresses a customrepeated action or a général truth in présent or past time, and the protasis refers in a général way to any of a class of acts. a. Présent général suppositions have eav with the subjunctive in the protasis, and the présent indicative (or some other présent form denoting répétition) in the apodosis. E.g. ary or

7)v

èyyùs 'èXdp Oâvaros, ovdels (3ovXeTai dvfjcrKeiv if death cornes near, no one is {evef) willing to die, E. Aie. 671 ; a7ras Xôyos, àv àirfj rà ttpâypara, pàraiov ti <t>aiveTai Kai Kevov ail speech, if deeds are wanting, is plainly a vain and empty

b. Past

thing, Dem. 2, 12.

général suppositions have

et with the optative in the protasis, and the imperfect indicative (or some other form de¬ noting past répétition) in the apodosis. E.g. et rivas dopv/3ovpévovs aîadoiro, Karaa^evvvvai tt\v rapaxvv èireiparo if he Saw any falling into disorder (or whenever he saw, etc.), he (always) tried to quiet the confusion, X. C. 5, 3, 55; et ns avreLvoi, evdùs 'eredvi]Kei if any one objected, he was immediately put to death, Thuc. 8, 66. This con¬

struction

occurs

only

once

in Homer, II. 24, 768.

GREEK GRAMMAR

296

gnomic aorist, which is a primary tense (1270), can always apodosis with a dépendent subjunctive; e.g. fjv tls irapafiaLvri, Çyplav avroîs kir etSeaav if anyone transgresses, they (always) 1404. The

be used here in the

him, X. C. 1, 2, 2. occasionally used in the place of the subjunc¬ tive or optative in général suppositions ; that is, these sentences may follow the construction of ordinary présent and past suppositions (1400), as in Latin and English ; e.g. e'i tls ôvo rj KaL tl irXelovs ripkpas Xoy LÇeral, paraLos

impose a penalty on

1405. The indicative is

èoTLv

if anyone counts on two or

haply more days he is afool, S. Tr. 944.

conditions (1416), el (without dv) is sometimes used with the subjunctive in poetry. In Homer this is the more fréquent form in général conditions. 1406. Here, as in future

II. Présent

and Past Conditions with Contrary to Fact

Supposition

1407. When the protasis states a présent or past supposition, implying that the condition is not or was not fulfilled, the secondary tenses of the indicative are used in both protasis and apodosis. The apodosis has the adverb av. The imperfect here refers to présent time or to an act as going on or repeated in past time, the aorist to a simple occurrence in past time, and the (rare) pluperfect to an act completed in past or présent time. E.g. tclvtcl ovk dv kôvvavTO iroLeiv, ei pi] ôlclItti perptq. kxpûvTO they WOldd not be able (as they are) to do this if they did not lead an abstemious life, X. C. 1,2,16; 7roXù dv davpaoTÔrepov fjv ei 'er Lpœvro it would be far more wonder-

honored, Plat. Rep. 489 b; el fjaav avôpes àyadol, ùs <rù cj>fis, 'éiraoxov if they had been good men, as you say, they would never have suffered these things (referring to several cases), Plat. G. 516 e; Kal 'tous dv àirkdavov, el ph y àpxv kclteXvdy and perhaps I should have been put to death, if their government had not been overthrown, Plat. Ap. 32 d ; el àireKpivœ, LKavœs dv yôy epepad-qK-q if you had answered, I should already have learned enough (or I should now be sufficiently instructed, which now I am not, cf. 1265), Plat. Euthyph. 14 c; el pi] vpeïs f]X6ere, kivopevbpeda dv 'eirl tov j3acrLXéa if you had not come (aor.), we should now be on our way (impf.) to the King, X. An. 2,1,4. 1408. In Homer the imperfect in this class of sentences is always past (see II. 7, 273 ; 8,130), and the présent optative is used where the Attic would have the imperfect referring to présent time; e.g. el pev tls tov oveLpov dXXos ëvLOTrev, fevôôs Kev 4>aîpev if any other had told this dream (1407), we ful if they were ovk

irore ravra

should call it

lie, II. 2, 80 ; see 24, 222.

CONDITIONS CONTRARY TO FACT

297

1409. In Homer the optative with «è is occasionally past in apodosis ; e.g. Kai vv Kev 'évd' àirôXoLTo Aiveias, ei pi] vôyae 'At^poôtrij and UOW Aeneas would there have perished, had not Aphrodite àirwXero with

perceived him, II. 5,311. Here

would be the regular form in Homer, as in other Greek. Homer has also a past potential optative ; see II. 5, 85. Kev

or âv

The

imperfects 'éôei, xpyv or elicos yv, impersonal expressions denoting obligation, propriety, possibility, and the like, are often used without dv to iorm an apodosis implying that the duty is not or was not performed, or the possibility not realized. E.g. 1410.

and other

ëô et

4>i\elv you ought to love him, (but do not), or you ought to have substantially équivalent to y ou would love him, or would have loved him (é^tXets âv tovtov), if you did your duty (rà SéovTa). So èÇrjv <roi tovto tt o lt] a ai you might have done this (but you did not do it) ; eUos fjv ae tovto iroLrjaaL you would properly (ebcôtcvs) have done this. The actual apodosis is here always in the infinitive, and the ae tovtov

loved him (but did not), is

reality of the action of the infinitive is generally denied. b. When the présent

infinitive is used, the construction gener¬ ally refers to the présent or to continued or repeated action in the past ; when the aorist is used, it refers to the past. E.g. pi] Çrjv 'éôet these ought not to be living (as they are), S. Ph. 418; \x'eveiv yàp Qrjv for he might have stood his ground (but did not), Dem. 3,17 ; 6aveïv ae xpw iràpos TeKvusv you ought to have died before your children, E. Andr. 1208; et ê/3ovkeTO ôt/catos eïvat, èÇrjv avTœ piaOûaai. tov oIkov if he had wanted to be honest, he might have let the estate, Lys. 32, 23 ; xpw &<=

Tombe

irapaKaXeîv tovs iraplôvtas pàptvpas you ought summoned the passers-by as witnesses, Lys. 7, 20.

tore

immediately to have

1411. When the actual apodosis is in the verb of obligation etc., ëSeï can be used; e.g. ei rà ôkovTa ovtoi avvefiovAevaav, ovôèv âv vp.âs vvv ëôei fiovAeveadai if these men had given you the advice you needed, there would now be no need of your deliberating, Dem. 4,1. âv

1412.

Other imperfects, especially e^ovKôpyv, may be used without

âv', e.g. kj3ovX6pr/v ovk kpL'Çeiv evOàbe I could wish that the contest should not take place here, Ar. R. 866 ; see Plat. Rep. 408 c, where ovk rjv alaxpokepbr,s,

though the apodosis of

simple supposition (1400),

may

be rendered he

could not have been avaricious. b. So &4>e\ov or wtfreAAov ought, aorist and imperfect of ô^éXXco owe

(epic ô4>eL\w), in Homer; whence cornes the use of &4>e\ov in wishes (1360) ; e.g. M^eXe KDpos 'Çpv would that Cyrus were alive, X. An. 2,1, 4. C. So 'épeXXov with the infinitive; e.g. <t}9Laeadai 'épeWov, ei A»7 'èeiires I should have perished if thou hadst not spoken, Od. 13, 383. So Dem. 19,159. for

GREEK GRAMMAR

298

III. Future Conditions, More Subjunctive in Protasis with

1413. When a

Vivid Form

Future Apodosis

supposed future case is stated distinctly

and

if I go), the protasis has the subjunctive with kav (epic e'i ne), and the apodosis has the future indicative or some other form expressing future time. E.g. pév Kev MeveXaov 'KhQavdpos /car cnrétpvy, avros «ret9' 'EXér^f èxérw Kai Krypara ■n-âvra if Alexander shall slay Menelaus, then let him have Helen and ail vividly (as in English if I shall go or

the goods himself, II. 3, 281 ; av rts avOiarriTai, ireipa.cr6fj.é)a XÉtpoDcrflat if anyone oppose us, we shall try to overcorne him, X. An. 7, 3, 11 ; kàv ovv 'Lys vxiv, trôre ëtret o'Lkol; if therefore you go now, when shall you be at home? X. C. 5, 3, 27. Note that the character of the apodosis distinguishes these future con¬ ditions from présent général suppositions (1403 a). 1414. The older English forms if he shall go and if he go both express the force of the Greek subjunctive and future indicative in protasis ; but ordinary modem English uses if he goes even when the time is clearly

future.

et is very often used in future likelihood of fulfilment, especially in appeals to the feelings and in threats and warnings. E.g. jttij Kadk^eLs yXwcrcrav, ëerrat crot if you do not restrain your tongue, you

1415. The future

indicative with

conditions implying strong et

will have trouble, E.frag. 5. This common use be confounded with that of 1401.

of the future must not

1416. In Homer et (without av or *è) is sometimes used with the sub¬ junctive in future conditions, apparently in the same sense as et «e or yv ; e.g. et ôè vrf Wé\y oKkaai but if he shall wish to destroy our ship, Od. 12, 348. This is more common in général conditions in Homer (see 1406). The same use of et for èàv is found occasionally even in Attic poetry. 1417. For the Homeric subjunctive with /cè in the apodosis of a future condition, see 1305 b.

Vivid Form

IV. Future Conditions, Less Optative in both Protasis and

1418. When a

supposed future case is stated in a less distinct in English if I should go, often if I went), the

and vivid form (as

protasis has the optative with et, and the tive with

av.

Apodosis

E.g.

apodosis has the opta¬

FUTURE CONDITIONS et

299

(fjopyjtos ovk âv, et -jrpàacrols kcl\G> s you would not be endurable if you should prosper, Aesch. Pr. 979; où iroXXr] âv àXoy'ia et77, et </>oj3otTO tov dâvarov ô tolovtos ; would it not be a great absurdity if such a man should fear death? Plat. Ph. 68 b ; oIkos ô' aÙTÔs, et 4>6oyyi)v Xâfioi, oa<j>éaTaT' âv XéÇeiev but tke house itself, if it should find a voice, would

77 s

speak most

plainly, Aesch. Ag. 37.

Note that the character of the apodosis ditions from past général suppositions

distinguishes these future con¬ (1403 b). 1419. The optative with âv in apodosis is the potential optative (1328). 1420. The future optative cannot be used in protasis or apodosis, except in indirect discourse representing the future indicative after a past tense (see the second example under 1512 b).

1421. Et Ke is sometimes found with the optative in Homer, in place of the simple et (1418) ; e.g. et ôé Kev "Apyos iKoLped', . . yapfipos Kev poi toi and if we should ever come to Argos, he would be .

son-in-law, II. 9, 141.

1422. For the Homeric optative used like the past tenses of the indicative conditions, see 1408 and 1409.

in unreal

Peculiar Forms of Conditional Sentences Ellipsis

and

Substitution

Protasis

Apodosis

1423. The

protasis sometimes is not expressed in its regular or edv, but is contained in a participle, or implied in an adverb or some other part of the sentence. When a parti¬ ciple represents the protasis, its tense is always that in which the verb itself would have stood in the indicative, subjunctive, or optative, —the présent (as usual) including the imperfect. E.g. form with d

51kt]s ou<777s ô Zeùs ovk àirôxusxev; how is it that Zeus has not been destroyed, if Justice exists? (et SLktj eaTiv), Ar. Nub. 904 ; (tv Se kXùcvv e'taei Taxa- but you will soon Tcnow, if you listen (— èàv KXvys), Ar. Av. 1390 ; rotaOrà râv ywailji ovwaiiov txois such things would you surely have to endure if you dwelt among women (i.e. et avwaiois), Aesch. Sev. 195; 777710777cref âv ns à ko va as anyone would have disbelieved (such a thing) if he had heard it (i.e. et fjKovaev), Thuc. 7, 28; pappâv ô' âv a'iTriaavTos (se. aov) f]Kov aoi 4>kpœv âv âprov and if you (ever) cried for food (et atrTjoetas, 1403 b), I used to come to you with bread (1297), Ar. Nub. 1383. ôiâ ye ùpâs aùrovs iràXai âv àiroXœXeiTe if it had depended on yourselves, (cf. 1424a, second example), you would long ago have been ruined, Dem. 18, 49 ; ovrœ yàp ovKeri tov Xolttov iràaxoipev âv kœkcos for in that case WC should no longer suffer harm (the protasis being in ourco), X. An. 1,1,10 ; oùô' âv St/catcos és kokov iréaoïpL rt nor should I justly (i.e. if I were treated justly) fall into any trouble, S. Ant. 240. 7rws

GREEK GRAMMAR

300

a. There is a (probably unconscious) suppression of the verb of protasis in several phrases introduced by et py except. E.g. rts rot àXXos ô/iotos, et jtt97 Ildrpo/cXos; who else is like you, except Patroclus (i.e. unless it is Patroclus)? II. 17. 475; et py ôtà tov irpvtaviv, èvé-n-eaev av had it not been for the Prytanis (except for the Prytanis), he would have been thrown in (to the Pit), Plat. G. 516 e (1213 b). b. The protasis or the apodosis, or both, may be suppressed with the Homeric œs el or dis et re ; e.g. tû>v vees w/tetat cbs et irTepov yè vôypa their ships are swift as a wing or thought (as they would be if they were, etc.), Od. 7, 36. For the double ellipsis in &awep âv et, see 1313. 1425. In neither of the cases of 1424 is it probable that any definite verb was in the speaker's mind. 1426. The apodosis is sometimes entirely suppressed for rhetorical effect (aposiopesis) ; e.g. et ptv ôœaovaL ykpas if they shall give me a prize — very well, II. 1, 135, cf. 1, 580 ; et pev yàp evena xpypo.Tcov Ve <TVKO<}>OLVTet—for if he is trying to play the informer against me to get my money —■ (the sup¬ position is too absurd), Lys. 24, 2. 1427. Et 5è py without a verb often has the meaning otherwise, even where the clause would not be négative if completed, or where the verb if supplied would be a subjunctive; e.g. py iroiycrys ravra • et ôè /x97, airlav i=£ets do not do this ; otherwise (if you do not do what I say) you will be blamed, X. An. 7, 1, 8.

1424.

the

1428. The apodosis may be expressed by an infinitive or participle in indirect discourse, each tense representing its own tenses of the indicative or optative (1282, 1286). If the finite verb in the apodosis would have taken âv, this particle is used with the infinitive or participle. E.g. rjyovpal, et tovto xotetre, tvâvra koXûs exeip I believe that if y ou are doing this ail is well', rjyovpai, kàv tovto Trot^re, ircivta Ka\œs e£etf I believe that if you (shall) do this ail will be well ; ol5a vpâs, èàv raDra ■yé^rat, eB irpâÇovTas I know that you will prosper if this is (shall be) done. For examples of the infinitive and

participle with 'àv,

see

1308.

be expressed in an infinitive not in especially one depending on a verb of wishing, commanding, advising, etc., from which the infinitive 1429. The

apodosis

may

indirect discourse (1273), receives

future meaning.

E.g.

/îoiiXeTat e\deiv kàv tovto yevritcu he wishes to go if this (shall) be donc, nekevu) vpâs kàv ôvvyaOe àireKOeïv I command you to départ if you can. For the principle of indirect discourse which appears in the protasis here after past tenses, see

1510, 1517

1430. Sometimes the

apodosis is merely implied in the context,

ELLIPSIS OF PROTASIS OR APODOSIS and in such in

case

cases et or

eâv is often to be translated

that, if perchance,

ixnovaov Kai

if haply. E.g.

301

supposing that,

hear me also, in case the same shall please assent to it), Plat. Rep. 358 b. So Trpôs ryv ttoKlv, ei kirifioydoîev, 'exùpow they marched toward the city, in case they (the citizens) should rush out (i.e. to meet them if they should rush out), Thuc. 6,100. On this principle we must explain aï xkv ttoj? /îoûXercu if you

kpov, èâv

ctol

(i.e. that then

ravrà ôoKfj

you may

haply he may wish (i.e. in hope that he may wish), II. 1, 66 ; a'L k' kOkXyada, Od. 3, 92; and similar passages. For this construction, both in Homer and elsewhere, see Moods and Tenses, §§ 486-491. See 1380. 1431. The

forms.

protasis and apodosis sometimes belong to différent

Especially any tense of the indicative with et in the protasis be followed by a potential optative with dv in the apodo¬ sis. E.g. a.

may

ovpavov e'iXyXovd as, ovk 'àv deoiai paxoipyv if you have COme down from heaven, I cannot fight against the gods, II. 6,128; et vvv ye ôvarvxovpev, irûs ravavTL àv tt p arrovres ov aœÇoLped' àv ; granted that today we have bad luck, how could we help coming out right if we should do the opposite? Ar. R. 1449 (here irparrovres = et irpàrTOipev) ; e'i ovtoi àpdûs àirkaryaav, vpeîs àv ov xptùv apxotre if these had a right to secede, you cannot possibly hold your power rightfully, Thuc. 3, 40.

et nar

b. Sometimes a subjunctive or a future indicative in the prota¬ sis has a potential optative in the apodosis. E.g. yv

XkÇaip' àv if you (will) permit me, I would fain speak, S .El. (1328) ; ovôk yàp àv iroWai yetpvpai 'utrcv, 'éxoi-pev àv ottol <f>vyôvTes au>dûp.ev for not even if there prove to be many bridges could we find a place to fly to and be saved, X. An. 2, 4,19 (1367) ; abiKoLyp-ev àv et py à-rroôwo-œl should be guilty of wrong if I fail to restore her, E. Hel. 1010.

k4>rjs

pot,

554

c. A potential optative (with àv) may express a présent condition, and potential indicative (with àv) may express a présent or past condition ; e.g. xal kyo), e'Lirep âXXw to> ireiOotpyv àv, Kai crot iretdopai. I also, if (it is true, as I think it is, that) I would trust any man, certainly trust you, Plat. Prot. 329 b; et tovto iaxvpôv rjv àv tovtw TtKpyptov, Kàpol yevkaOco reKpypœv if this would have been a strong proof in his favor (as it would have been), so let it be also a proof in mine, Dem. 49, 58. d. The optative in protasis sometimes dépends on the présent of a verb expressing obligation, propriety, possibility, or expediency; e.g. et yàp e'Lyaav ôvo TLvks kvavrLoi vbpoi, ovk àp(f>OTkpoi,s evL ôyirov ipycà'iaacrdai for if there should be two contradictory laws, you could not, of course, vote for both, Dem. 24, 35. This use is more common in the corresponding relative condition (1449).

GREEK GRAMMAR

302

Aé in Apodosis

apodosis is sometimes introduced by ôé, dXXd, or This is a relie of parataxis, or the coordination of sentences, and is common in Homer. In Attic prose ôé is sometimes used after a number of protases, and it is then resumptive, I say. E.g. ôé ne p 17 ôœwcriv, kyù ôé nev avros eXcopai but if they do UOt give her up, then 1432. The

avràp yet, still.

I will take her

myself, II. 1,137. See Plat. Ap. 28

Et AFTER

VERBS

WONDERING ETC.

1433. Some verbs expressing wonder, delight, contentment, disappointment, and indignation may have the cause of the émotion stated by a protasis with et (éâv) instead of by cm because (1463).

E.g.

eycuye et prjSels vpœv ppr' èvOvpeÎTdi prjr opylierai and I Wonder that of y ou is either concerned or angry (lit. if no one of you is, etc., I wonder), Dem. 4,43 ; àyavanrcc et à vote pi] olôs t' eipl ei-jreîy i am indignant that I am not dble to say what I mean, Plat. Lach. 194 a. See also 1512 b

davpàÇo) ô'

no one

for the

principle of indirect discourse applied to these sentences.

1434. Such verbs

are

vanréeû, with ôetvov 'eariv.

especially davpàÇcj, alaxhfopaL, àyairàœ, and â^aConcessive Clauses

1435. Conditional even

if, and

et nat or

et (/cet), naï edv (nav), kàv nai although, dénoté concession.

clauses introduced by Kal

participle, with or without clause with pev contrasted with a ôé clause; e.g. o'terat pev elvai ao<pôs, tari, ô' ov although he thinks he is wise, he really is not, cf. Plat. Ap. 21 d. 1436. Concession is expressed also by the

naLirep. See 1566/.

Also by

VIII. Relative and

Temporal Sentences

différent types of conditional sen¬ (1398) apply also to relative and temporal sentences. Temporal clauses introduced by éws, irpLv, and other particles meaning until have spécial peculiarities, and are therefore treated separately (1478-1489). Relative clauses may be introduced by relative pronouns or relative 1437. The principles underlying the

tences

adverbs.

1438. The antécédent of a relative

is either definite or indefinite. definite person or thing,

It is definite when the relative refers to a

RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES to

some

definite time, place, or

manner ;

it is indefinite when

such definite person, thing, time, place, or to. Both definite and indefinite antécédents no

pressed

Definite you see

understood. E.g.

303

manner

may

is referred

be either

ex-

raûra à ëxai ôpâs you see thesè things which I have, or s ex&> opq.s the things which I have ; ôre é/3oûXero gXdev (once) when he wished,

came.

Indefinite

iràvTa à 'àv /3ovXcûvto.l ëÇovaiv

they will have everything which they will have whatever they may want; orav ëXdg, tovto iroigaœ when he shall corne (or when he cornes), I will do this ; ôre PovXolto, tovto kirolei whenever he wished, he (always) did this ; dis àv èLirio, iroi.œpev let US do as I say ; à ex«i fiovXopai Xa(3elv they

may want, or à àv fiovXœvTai. ëÇovaiv

I want to take whatever he has.

Definite Antécédent 1439. A relative

such has

effect

the mood of the follow-

ing verb. A relative with a definite antécédent therefore may take the indicative (with ov for its négative) or any other construction which could occur in an independent sentence. E.g.

ris ecr0' à x&pos

ôt)t' èv ai fàefigKapev; what is the place wherein we now stand? S. O. C. 52 ; é'ojs èotI KCLipôs, âvTiXàpeode tûv irpaypaToiv (now) while there is opportunity, take a hand in the business, Dem. 1,20; tovto ovk kirotgaev,

ôrjpov èTLpgaev àv this he failed to do, although he might have honored the people therein, Dem. 21, 69. So ô pg yèvoiTo and may this not happen, èv

a> tov

Dem. 27, 67.

Indefinite Antécédent 1440. a. A relative clause with an indefinite antécédent has a conditional force, and is called a conditional relative clause. Its

négative is always pp. b. Relative words, like el if, take See 1299 b, 1311.

generally find

ore

"A what with /ce etc. (like eï

/ce,

before the subjunctive. form av. In Homer we 1413), or ôre etc. alone (1448). av

may

Conditional Relative Sentences 1441. I. (a) Présent or past condition simply stated, with the indicative, — chiefly in particular suppositions (1400). E.g. â pg

olSa, ovSè o'Lopai eiô&ai what I do not know, I do not even think I know are any things which I do not know), Plat. Ap.

(like eï tlvcl pg olôa if there

GREEK GRAMMAR

304 21 d; oûs not

py yvplitkov,

find (= eï

riras py

k.ei>otâ(j)iov avroïs kiroLijaap

for any whom they did

rjvpicTKov) they raised a cenotaph, X. An. 6, 4, 9.

(b) a. Présent général condition, depending on a denoting répétition, with subjunctive (1403 a). E.g.

1442.

form

présent

edeAovmp an après, ovs àp ôpûai napecrKevaapkpovs ail WÎsh to be of those whom they see prepared, Dem. 4, 6 ; yrU' ".p oïkoi y erairr ai, ôpûhtlp ovk àraaxerâ when they get home, they do things unbearable, Ar. Pax

ovppaxeir rovrois

allies

1179.

général condition, depending on a past form denoting répétition, with optative (1403 b). E.g. oi)s per 18ol evraurais iorras, ripes re elep y paira, Kal enei nvOoiro èiryrei he (always) asfced those whom he saw (at any time) marching in good order, who they were; and when he learned, he praised them, X. C. 5, 3, 55; 'eiveiôy de àpolx@e<-V> el<rfjpep napà top ItœKpârr] and (each moming) when ihe prison was opened, we went in to visit Socrates, Plat. Ph. 59 d. 1443. The indicative sometimes takes the place of the subjunctive or optative here, as in other général suppositions (1405). This occurs especially with oans, which itself expresses the same idea of indefiniteness that ôs with the subjunctive or optative usually expresses; e.g. oans prj râip àplorojp anrerai (3ov\evp.aruip, Kataoros elpai boue! whoever clingS not to b. Past

the best counsels is accounted most

would be the

common

expression.

1444. II. Présent or

the condition is not

base, S. Ant. 178. Here ôs àp

past condition stated so as to

or was

py anryrai

imply that

not fulfilled (supposition contrary to

fact), with the secondary tenses of the indicative (1407). E.g. ovk àp ènexet-povpep npàrreip à yn car âped a w€ should not be Undertaking to do (as we now are) things which we did not understand (like e'i rêva py ymaràpeda if there were any things which we did not understand, the whole belonging to a supposition not realized), Plat. Ch. 171 e ; ônôrepa Tovroip ènolyaep, ovSepos àp yrrop 'Adypalaip n\ovoi,oi yaav whichever of these things he had done, they would have been second to no Athenian in wealth, Lys. 32, 23. So ôp yypas ererpev Od. 1,218. 1445. III. Future condition in the more vivid form, with âv and the subjunctive (1413). E.g. ôrap py oQ'epoi, nenavaopai when I (shall) have no more strength, I shall cease, S. Ant. 91 ; àXôxovs Kal pynia reKPa âÇopep èp pyecrcTLP, enyp nroAiedpop eAaipep we will carry off their wives and young children in our ships, when we (shall) have taken the city, II. 4, 238. This use may be extended by analogy to clauses where there is little or no condition ; e.g. encrerai ypap ôr' àp rror' ôXcôXr/ "IXios a day there shall be when Ilios is entirely destroyed, II. 6, 448.

RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL SENTENCES

305

1446. The future indicative cannot be substituted for the subjunctive as it can in common protasis. When the future indicative occurs in

here,

relative protasis it

usually dénotés a simple supposition (1439), and the intention (1401). A rare case is X. C. 1, 5,13 : ô ri yàp pi) toiovtov ànol3r]aeTai irap' vpœv, e'is èpè to éXXeÎTrov 'éoTai whatever you accomplish (lit. results from your actions) which is not of that quality, the loss will fait on me. Here there is an emotional appeal (1415). Cf. also Luke 17, 22 : eXevaovTai r/pépai me 'eiridvp-qaeTe piav tûv rjpepcov to0 vlov tov àvOpcoirov iôeîv nal ovk o^eoOe days will come when ye shall desire to see one of the days of the Son of Man and ye shall not see it. a

future expresses a présent

1447. IV. Future condition in the less vivid

(1418). E.g.

tative

form, with the

op-

4>âyol âc on ôre (3ov\olto if he were hungry, he would eat whenever (i.e. at such time in the future as) he might wish (like et irore (3ov\oito if he should ever wish), X. M. 2,1,18.

trelvœv

1448. Conditional relative sentences have most of the peculiarities and

irregularities of

protasis. E.g., the protasis and apodosis may (1431) ; the relative without âv or *è is sometimes found in poetry with the subjunctive (like d for kâv or e'L Ke, 1406, 1416), especially in général conditions in Homer; the relative (like ei, 1421) in Homer may take «è or âv with the optative ; the relative clause may dépend on an infinitive, participle, or other construction (1428, 1429) ; and the conjunction 5é may connect the relative clause to the antécédent clause (1432). common

have différent forms

1449. The optative in a relative clause sometimes dépends on the prés¬

ent of

expressing obligation, propriety, possibility, or expediency; rovôe xpv kXvclv we should obey any one whom the state may appoint, S. Ant. 666. This is more common than the corresponding construction with d (1431 d). e.g.

verb

ôv irôXis

ar-po-eie,

1450. Homeric similes often have (besides the aorist indicative, 1295) the subjunctive with ùs ôre (occasionally tbs or' av), sometimes with ùs or ws

ùs ôre Kiviiari Zécfrvpos (3a6v \ipov as (happens) when the west wind deep grain-field, II. 2, 147 ; dis ywi) KXaLyoL &s 'Oôvoevs ôâKpvov a wife weeps so did Ulysses shed tears, Od. 8, 523.

Te; e.g.

moves a

elfiev

Assimilation in Conditional Relative Clauses 1451. When

conditional relative clause expressing either a

future

or a

èâv

oî âv ôvvcovtai

général supposition dépends on a subjunctive or op¬ tative, it regularly takes the same mood by assimilation. E.g. tives

tovto

do this, it will be well', eï

KaX<3s e£« if any who may be able shall oî ôvvaivTO tovto iroioîev, /caXcos âv ?xot

itogi, Tives

GREEK GRAMMAR

306

who should be (or were) able should do this, it would be well ; eïde navres a lv r o rovro n o tôt ev O th<Xt 0,11 who 7YIOÏJ be (or were) able WOUld do this (here the optative notoïev (1355) makes oï ôvvatvro préférable to oï àv ôvvœvrai, which would express the same idea) ; èneLÔàv &v àv npl-gr ai kvplos yévyrai when (in any case) he becomes master of what he lias bought, Dem. 18, 47 ; ùs ànoXotro Kal aXXos, ô rts roiadrâ ye p'eÇot perish any other, also, who should do the like! Od. 1, 47 ; redvaiyv ore pot p-qKert ravra péXot may I die when I no longer care for these delights (orav peXy would express the same idea), Mimn. 1, 2. any

o t

5vv

Likewise, when a conditional relative sentence dépends secondary tense of the indicative implying the non-fulfilment of a condition, it takes by assimilation a similar form. E.g. e'i TLves oï eôvv avro rovro 'enotriaav, naXcos àv elyev if any who had been able had done this, it would have been well ; e't 'ev èKeLvr] rfj </>œvfj re Kal rQ> rpontp èXeyov èv ois èredpâppyv if I were speaking to you in the accent and the dialect in which I had been brought up (ail introduced by e't £evos 'erbyxavov &v supposing I happened to be a foreigner), Plat. Ap. 17 d. 1452.

on a

1453. Ail clauses which come under this principle of assimilation belong (as conditional forms) equally under 1445, 1447, 1442, 1444. This principle often décidés which form shall be used in future conditions (1272 b).

Greek requires sequence

of mood ; Latin, sequence of tense. But see 1504.

Relative Clauses Expressing Purpose 1454. The relative with the future purpose.

indicative

may express a

E.g.

irepnetv r/rts ravr 'epel Kal irapearai rots npàypaatv to send an embassy to say this and to be présent at the transactions, Dem. 1,2; où yàp eart pot xpvuaTa on66ev èicr elau for I have no money to pay the fine with, Plat. Ap. 37 c. The antécédent here may be definite or indefinite; but the négative particle is always pti, as in final clauses (1373). 1455. Homer generally has the subjunctive (with ne joined to the rela¬ tive) in this construction after primary tenses, and the optative (without Ke) after secondary tenses. The optative is sometimes found even in Attic

ivpecrjieLav

prose.

The earlier Greek here agréés with the Latin.

1456. In this construction the future indicative is very to the future optative after past tenses.

rarely changed

Relative Clauses Expressing Resuit 1457. The relative with any tense

of the indicative,

with

potential optative, may express a resuit. The négative is où. E.g.

RELATIVE AND CAUSAL SENTENCES ris

ovtco

307

palperai bans où /3ovXerai

not wish to be your

crot 0îXos elvai; who is so mad that he does friend? X. An. 2, 5,12 ; ovôels âv y hoir o ovrws àôapàv-

ôs 'àv jdt'ivelev h> rfj ôikaioavvy no one would ever become so like adamant that he would remain firm in his justice, Plat. Rep. 360 b.

tlvos,

1458. With this construction compare the use of tiare with the finite

(1467, 1470). It occurs chiefly after négative leading clauses interrogatives implying a négative. moods

1459. The relative with a future (sometimes a présent) indica¬ tive may express a resuit which is aimed at. The négative here is pp. E.g. pvxero

ppôeplav ot avvrvx'ipv yevéadai,

p yiv ir averti

Karaarp'epaadai

rpv

Evpûirpv

prayed that no such chance might befall him as to prevent him from subjugating Europe (—tiare pnv iraîiaai), Hdt. 7, 54 ; (3ov~kp0els tolovtov he

p.vppelov K.ara\nreiv ô such

mémorial

Isoc. 4, 89.

pp rps

àvOpwirLvps ipvaetis èanv when he wished to leave

might be beyond human nature (= tiare

elvai),

1460. Compare the construction of tiare with the infinitive (1467).

Causal Relative 1461. A relative clause may express a cause. The verb is in the indicative, as in causal sentences (1463), and the négative is

generally où. E.g.

Oavpaarov iroeeîs, ôs pp.1v ovSèv ôtôijjs you do a strange thing in giving us nothing (like on ai) ovôèv ôLôœs), X. M. 2, 7, 13 ; ô6£as âpadéa elvai, ôs e/céXeue .

believing him to be stupid because he commanded, etc., Hdt. 1, 33. 1462. When the négative is pp, the sentence is conditional as well as causal; e.g. raXatirupos et, ti ppre deol irarptioL eiai ppd' tepâ unfortunate you are, since you have neither ancestral gods nor temples (implying also if you really have none), Plat. Euthyd. 302 b. This is équivalent to a clause introduced by ehrep, Lat. si qui de m. IX. Causal Sentences 1463. Causal sentences express a cause,

and are introduced by since ; e'iirep seeing that, since ; and by other particles of similar meaning. They have the indicative after both primary and secondary tenses. The négative particle is où. E.g. otl

and

cos

because ; exeL, kireibp,

ore, oirore,

Kpôero yàp Aavativ, otl pa dvpaKovras bpâro for she pitied the Danai, because she saw them dying, II. 1, 56;, ore rovd' ovrws «Xet, irpoapKtL rrpodvpœs eOtkeiv àKoveiv

hear

since this is so, it is

eagerly, Dem. 1,1.

becoming that

you

should be willing to

GREEK GRAMMAR

308 A

or potential Dem. 18, 49 and 79.

potential optative

tence

see

indicative

may

stand in

causal

sen¬

of indirect discourse (1517), a causal sentence have the optative, to imply that the cause is assigned on the authority of some other person than the writer; e.g. rov UepiKXka eaâKifov orl arparpyos œv ovu èireÇàyoL they abused Pericles, because (as they said) although he was général he did not lead them out, Thuc. 2, 21. This assigns the Athenians' reason for abusing Pericles, but does 1464. On the principle

after

past tense

not show the

may

historian's opinion.

1465. Besides the construction of 1461 and 1463, cause may be ex-

pressed by a participle (1566) and by Sià tô with the

infinitive (1549).

X. Consécutive Clauses 1466. "Vmt6 (sometimes cbs) so as, so that, is used tive and with the indicative to express a resuit.

1467. With the

with the infini¬

infinitive (the négative being pp), the resuit is

stated as one which the action of the leading verb tends to produce ; with the indicative (the négative being ov), as one which that ac¬ tion actually does produce. E.g. navras

otrco ôiandeis

uxrre

avrûi pâWov cf>i\ovs elvau

of mind that they were (tended to ivâv

rroLovcnv

ùxrre ôLktjv

putting ail in SUch

a frame

be) more friendly to him, X. An. 1,1, 5 ;

8i.ôôvai they do anything

and everything (calcu-

lated) to resuit in not being punished, i.e. they aim at not being punished, not implying that they actually escape, Plat. G. 479 c ; ovrœs àyvwpôvuis exere, œ<rre e~hir L'Ç er e avrà XPV<rrà yevpaeodai; are you SO senseless that you expect them to become good? Dem. 2, 26. But with wre ehnlfeiv the meaning would be so senseless as to expect, i.e. senseless enough to ex¬ pect, without implying necessarily that you do expect. 1468. These two constructions are essentially distinct when it is indiffèrent to the général sense which is

even

in their nature, used in a given

case; e.g. ovrœs tari ôeLvos uxrre SLupp prj 8lSovat he is so skilful as not to be punished, and ovrcos 'earl Set vos uxrre d'ucpv ov 8L8uxriv he is so skilful that he is not punished. Idiomatic English usually requires the latter construc¬ tion in translation (see the first example in 1467). The use of pp with the infinitive and of où with the indicative shows that the distinction was really felt. When the infinitive with uxrre has ot), it generally represents, in indirect discourse, an indicative with ov of the direct form (see Plat. Ap. 26 d and Moods and Tenses, §§ 594-598). 1469. The infinitive with uxrre may express a purpose like a final clause: see &are ôUpv pp bibôvai (= ïva pp StSwcri), quoted in 1467. It may also be équivalent to an object clause with ônœs (1382) ; e.g. ppxavàs

CONSECUTIVE AND STIPULATIVE CLAUSES evpyeopev

you

ibar

'es rô

wav ce

rbvo

àiraWùfaL

wholly from these troubles (=6irus

1470. As

309

irovov we WÏll find devices to free à-n-aWâÇopev), Aesch. Eum. 82.

with the indicative has no effect on the form of the verb, be used in the same way with any verbal form which can stand in an independent sentence; e.g. iber ovk âv avrov yvupLeatpl so that I should not know him, E. Or. 379 ; ibere yy XLav crève so do not lament overmuch, S. El. 1172. iccre

it may

1471. "fis resuit

re (written as two words) in Homer has the infinitive of only twice ; elsewhere it means simply as, like ibenep.

1472. 'fis is sometimes used like cbare with the infinitive and the finite moods, but chiefly in Aeschylus, Sophocles, Herodotus,

Xenophon, and late Greek.

1473. Verbs, substantives, and adjectives which commonly take the simple infinitive occasionally have the infinitive with ibere or <bs ; e.g. fy4>ieâyevoL ibere àyvveiv having VOted to defend them, Thuc. 6, 88; ireLdovciv ibere èifLx^PVcaL they persuade them to make an attempt, Thuc. 3,102 ; 4>poviy<brepoL ibere yadeïv wiser in leaming, X. C. 4, 3, 11 ; bXlyoL ws èyKpareîs elvac too few to have the power, X. C. 4, 5,15; àvâyny ibere lavôvveveLv a necessity of incurring risk, Isoc. 6, 51. 1474. In the same way (1473) ibere or with the infinitive may follow the comparative with y ; e.g. èXârrœ 'éxovra bvvap.iv y ibere rovs 4>iXovs <bf>eXeïv

having too little 1475. "fio-re

power

to aid his friends, X. H. 4, 8, 23. See 1535.

cbs is

occasionally followed by a participle, generally participle is caused by assimilation with a preceding participial construction; e.g. ibere cKéfacdai ôéov so that we must consider, Dem. 3, 1. or

where the

XI.

Stipulative Clauses

1476. The infinitive with

lation.

E.g.

wave

may express a

condition

stipu¬

èÇov avroîs rebv XoLirûv

apx&-v 'TZXXyvoûv, iber avroùs vitanoveiv fiacCkel although they inight have ruled over the rest of the Greeks, provided (on the terms that) they themselves obeyed the King, Dem. 6, 11.

1477. 'E(f>' cS or èc/>' ère on condition that is followed by the in¬ finitive, and occasionally (in Herodotus and Thucydides) by the future indicative. E.g. àtftLeyév

this

ce,

èirl

rovrw

p'evroi é</>' ebre yyn'erL 4>iXoeo4>eïv We release yOU, but

condition, that

shall no longer pursue philosophy, Plat. Ap. 29 c ; hri rovrep virei;lcrayai, k(f>' ebre vit' ovôevos vyéœv âptjoyai I withdraw on this condition, that I shall be ruled by none of you, Hdt. 3, 83. See 1217 b. you

GREEK GRAMMAR

310 XII.

Temporal Particles Signifying Until and Before ï«s,

«TT€, a\pt,

pe'xpi, ocf>pa

'écrre, axP<-> P£XP<-> anpa mean they are not distinguished in their use from other relatives. But when they mean until, they have many peculiarities. Homer has rjos (sometimes written elos or eïcos) for ë'cos (33). 1479. When ëcos, 'tare, axPL> P^XPL> and ocfrpa until refer to a definite past action they take the indicative, usually the aorist. E.g. vrixov vrâXiv, rjos èrrijXdov eis ttotclpôv I swam on again, until I came into a 1478. When ëcos,

while,

long

as,

kiroLow, péxpt- ukotos èyévero this they did until X. An. 4,2,4; ov irporepov èiravaavro ëcos ryv eis (Traoels KarecTT-qaav they did not stop until they had put the city into a turmoil of faction, Lys. 25, 26. This is the construction of the relative with a definite antécédent (1439). river, Od. 7, 280; darkness

ravra

came on,

particles, when they mean until, follow the con¬ both forms of future condi¬ tions, in unfulfilled conditions, and in présent and past général suppositions. E.g. ê7rc(rxes, «rr' âv Kal rà Xonrà irpoupaOys wait until you (shall) learn the rest besides (1445), Aesch. Pr. 697 ; etiroep' âv . . . ëcos iraparetvaipi tovtov I should tell him until I put him to torture (1447), X. C. 1, 3,11 ; 17ÔÉCOS âv Tovrœ ërt ôie\eyôpr]v, ëcos aùrco . . . arréScon a I should have been glad to continue conversing with him until I had given him back, etc. (1444), Plat. G. 506 ; â ô' àv ào-vvraKTa ri, àvâyKT) ravra âel Trpâypara irapéxeLv, ëcos àv x^pav \â(3rj whatever is in disorder must necessarily make trouble until it is put in order (1442 a), X. C. 4, 5, 37 ; irept-epévopev eKaarore, ëcos avoixOety rà ôeapuirripiov we waited each day until the prison 1480. These

struction of conditional relatives in

was

opened (1442 b), Plat. Ph. 59 d.

1481. The omission of âv after these

particles, when the verb is in the

subjunctive, is more common than it is after ei or ordinary relatives (1416), occurring sometimes in Attic prose ; e.g. tXoDs yévyrai until the ship saïls, Thuc. 1, 137. 1482. Clauses introduced by ëcos etc. frequently imply a purpose; see the examples under 1480. When such clauses dépend upon a past tense, they admit the double construction of indirect discourse (1517 c), like final clauses (1378). 1483. Homer uses eis o /ce until like ëcos /ce ; and Herodotus uses és ô and es ov

6COS.

CONSTRUCTIONS WITH "EI22 AND IIPIN

311

IIpCv before, until 1484.

TLplv is followed by the infinitive, and also (like eus) by

the finite moods. 1485. erence

It is often correlated with irporepov.

In Homer irpLv generally has the infinitive without refto its meaning or to the nature of the a.

in other Greek it has the infinitive

leading verb. But

chiefly when it means simply before (and not until) and when the leading clause is affirmative. b. The finite moods are used with -irpiv when it means until (as well as before), and chiefly when the leading verb is négative or implies a négative. It has the subjunctive and optative only after négatives. 1486.

Examples of irpiv with the infinitive :

llriôaLou irplv èXdeîv vlas 'Axo-lûv and he dwelt in Pedaeum before the coming of the sons of the Achaeans, II. 13,172 (here irpiv è\0eïv tyP6 to0 èXdeïv) ; ov p airorpepeis irplv xa^KV paxécracr Qai yOU shall not tum me

voie ôè

—

away

before (i.e. until)

have fought together, II. 20, 257 (here the Attic

would prefer irpiv àv pax^crœpeOa ) ; àTroirépirov<n.v avrov irpiv à ko va ai they send him away before (i.e. without) hearing him, Thuc. 2,12 ;

Meoorivv" eïXopev ivplv népcras \a/3e ïv Trjv fiacriKetav we took Messene before the Persians obtained their kingdom, Isoc. 6, 26; irpïv ùs "k^ofiov 'eXdelv ptav rjpkpap ovk kxhptvaev she was not a widow a single day before she went to

Aphobus, Dem. 30, 33 (here the infinitive is required, until).

mean

as irptv

does not

b. Examples of ivplv until, with the indicative (generally after négatives), and with the subjunctive and optative (always after négatives), the constructions being the same as those with tcos (1479-1482): ovk

fjv aXk^rjp' ovôév, irptv y' eyœ otpLOLv e 8 e i £ a etc. there was no relief, until I showed them, etc. (1479), Aesch. Pr. 479 ; ov xpv m6 kvdevhe àireXOetv, irpiv âv dû ôLktiv I must not départ hence until I am punished (1445), X. An. 5, 7, 5 ; ovk Hp eiôeiris tt piv ir ei prjd eLrjs y ou cannot know until you have tried it (1447), Theognis 125 ; èxpvv UV irpbrepov crvpfiovXeveLV, irplv r)p.âs èôtôaÇav etc. they ought not to have given advice until they had instrucied us, etc. (1444), ISOC. 4, 19 ; bpûcri tovs irpecrpvTépovs ov irpoodev à-iriovras, irplv 'àv

à<t)û<TLv ol apxovres they see that the elders never go away until the authorities dismiss them (1442 a), X. C. 1, 2, 8; àir-qybpeve pt]8éva fiâWeiv, irplv

KOpos èpirXyodel-n 07]pû>v he forbade any one to shoot until Cyrus had had his fill of hunting (1482, 1517 c), X. C. 1, 4,14.

1487. In Homer irpiv

indicative, and -rrpLv subjunctive.

y ore (never the simple wplv) is used with the or' âv (sometimes irptv, without âv) with the

GREEK GRAMMAR

312

like eus etc. (1481), sometimes has the subjunctive within Attic Greek ; e.g. ait) arévaÇe irplv paOys weep not before you know (or until you hâve heard), S. Ph. 917. 1489. Ilph 77 (a developed form for irpLv) is used by Herodotus (rarely by Homer), and irporepov 77 sooner than, before, by Herodotus and Thucydides, in most of the constructions of irpLv. So irâpos before in Homer with the infinitive. Even varepov 77 later than once takes the infinitive by analogy. E.g. irplv yàp 77 ôiriau aifiéas àv airXûa ai, rfhu ô Kpoîcros for before they had sailed back, Croesus was overthrown, Hdt. 1, 78; ovôè f/ôeaav irpôrepov 77 xep kirvdovTo Tprjxi-vLoûv they did not even know of it until they heard from the Trachinians, Hdt. 7, 175; pr) àiraviaraadai àiro rfjs ttôXios irpôrepov 77 ê^éXwcrt not to withdraw from the city until they capture it, Hdt. 9, 86 ; 1488. llpip,

out

av,

even

6, 58; took

irpôrepov 77 aiadeaOai avrovs before they perceived them, Thuc. see Thuc. 1,69, 2,65; renvae^eiKovro irâpos Trererjvà yeveaOai they away the nestlings before they were fledged, Od. 16, 218. So also ereaiv varepov ènarov 77

avroùs oUrjaai a

hundred years after their own seulement, Thuc. 6,4.

XIII. Indirect Discourse or

Oratio Obliqua

General Principles

quotation or question gives the exact words of original speaker or writer (i.e. of the oratio recta). In an in¬ direct quotation or question (oratio obliqua) the original words conform to the construction of the sentence in which they are quoted. E.g. the words eiriaro\r]v ypàcfru I am writing a leiter may be quoted either directly, \kyei ris " eTviaro\r}v ypâcf>u>," or indirectly, \eyei ris on 1490. A direct

the

that he is writing but indi¬

eivioToXyv ypafyei or (priât ns eTviaro\r}v ypàcpeiv some one says a letter. So 'épura "ri ypàcpeis;" he asks, "what are you writing?"

rectly 'épura ri ypàcpei he asks what he

is writing.

quotations may be expressed by on or às that, with a finite verb, or by the infinitive (see 1509) ; or by the par¬ ti ciple (1590). 1492. "On that often introduces a direct quotation ; e.g. elirov on bcavoi eapev they said, "we are able," X. An. 5, 4,10 ; so ëXe£e râôe (uôe) he spoke as follows, since quotation marks were unknown. 1493. a. Homer sometimes has 6 (neuter of ôs) for on that ; e.g. Xevaaere yàp rô ye iràvres, o poi ykpas epx^rai àXXri for you ail see this, that my prize goes another way, II. 1, 120 ; so 5, 433. 1491. Indirect

b. "Oirus is sometimes

oit us ovk

used, especially in poetry ; e.g. rovro pv p.01 that thou art not base, S. O. T. 548.

eî naKôs tell me not

(ppaç',

INDIRECT DISCOURSE c.

Ovvena

poetry.

813

and ôdovveKa that sometimes introduce indirect quotations in

1494. Indirect questions follow the same principles as indirect quotations with ôtl or côs in regard to their moods and tenses. For thewords used to introduce indirect questions, see 1607 and 1608.

1495. The term indirect discourse applies to ail clauses (even single clauses in sentences of différent construction) which indirectly express

the words

(see 1517).

thought of

any person, even

1496. Indirect quotations after tions follow these général rules :

those of the speaker himself

and

ces

and indirect

ques¬

a. After primary tenses, each verb retains both the mood and the tense of the direct discourse.

b. After past

tenses, each indicative or subjunctive of the direct dis¬ be either changed to the same tense of the optative or retained in its original mood and tense. But ail secondary tenses of the indicative in conditions contrary to fact (1407, 1444) or in itérative constructions (1297), ail aorist indicatives in dépendent clauses (1514), and ail optatives remain unchanged. course

may

1497. The imperfect and pluperfect, having no tenses in the optative, generally remain unchanged in ail kinds of sentences (but see 1503). Observe that in Greek the mood, not the tense, is changed after a second¬ ary tense (for exceptions, see 1504) ; and that the subjunctive is never used because of the indirect discourse. When the subjunctive stands in indirect discourse it represents a subjunctive of the direct statement.

quotation dépends on a verb which takes the participle, its leading verb is changed to the corre¬ spondis tense of the infinitive or participle (av being retained when there is one), and its dépendent verbs follow the preceding rule (1496). 1498. When the

infinitive

1499. "Av is never omitted with the indicative or optative in indirect discourse, if it was used in the direct form ; but when a

particle or a relative word has av with the subjunctive in the direct form, as in èâv, orav, ôs av, etc. (1299 b), the av is dropped when the subjunctive is changed to the optative after a past tense in indirect discourse. 1500.

"Av is

never

added in indirect discourse when it

was

not used in

the direct form.

1501. The

négative particle of the direct discourse is regularly

retained in the indirect form.

But

see

1511.

314

GREEK GRAMMAR

Simple Sentences in Indirect Discourse Indicative

and

1502. After

Optative

with

ôn

primary tenses

and «s,

and in

Indirect Questions

indicative (without âv) retains

both its mood and its tense in indirect discourse.

After past

changed to the same tense of the optative retained in the original mood and tense. E.g. tenses it is either

ypà4>et, lie says tli(it he is writing, XéyeL on eypa<pev he says that he writing, Xeyei on. 'éypaxfev he says that he wrote, Xé£et on y éy pa4>ev he wïll say that he has written; epoorq. ri (or on) PovXovtœl he asks what they want, àyvoû n (or on) iroiriaovo-Lv I do not know what they will do. elirev otl ypà<poL or on ypâ<fiei he said that he was writing (he said ypàcfru)', elirev Ôn ypâxpot or on ypàxf/eL he said that he should write (he said ypàtpa) I shall write) ; elirev otl ypà\pelev or otl iypaif/ev he said that he had written (he said 'éypafa I wrote)', elirev otl yeypa<pùs eti) or otl yeypa<t>ev he said that he had written (he said yéypa<pa I have written). OPTATIVE : éireLpœpi]v avrâ ôeLKvvvdL otl o'lolto pév elvaL ao<pos, e'lr\ ô' ov I tried to show him that although he thought he was wise, he really was not (i.e. oleTCLL pév eciTL ô' ov), Plat. Ap. 21 c; vireLirùv otl avTos TaKeî irpâÇoL, wxero intimating that he would himself attend to the business there, he departed (he said avros TaKeî irpâÇœ), Thuc. 1, 90; 'éXeÇav otl irép\feLe cr<£âs ô 'Ivôûv (3acriXeùs, KeXevaiv èpcoTav é| otov ô irôXepos e'irj they Said that the king of India had sent them, commanding them to ask what the cause of the war was (they said eirepftv rjpâs, and the question was è/c rlvos éanv ô iroXepos ;), X. C. 2, 4, 7 ', rjpero e'L tls épov etr] crotp&Tepos he asked whether there was any one wiser than I (i.e. éern tls aocpÛTepos ;), Plat. Ap. 21 a. Indicative: 'éXeyov otl èXir LÇova l oé Kal tt\v ttôXlv e^eLv pol x^pLv they said that they hoped you and the state would be grateful to me (they said kXiriÇopev, and the hope was cru Kal rj ttôXls e^eTe poL xh-Plv), Isoc. 5, 23 ; fjKe ô' àyyéXXwv ùs 'EAâreta koteiXr]irt ol some one had come with a report that Elatea had been taken (here the perfect optative might have been used), Dem. 18, 169; àiroKpLvàpevoL OTL ir épipova l irpecrfSeLS, evdvs àiryXXaÇav replying that they would send ambassadors, they immediately dismissed them, Thuc. 1, 90 ; yirôpow tI irore XéyeL I was uncertain what he meant (tL 7rore XéyeL;), Plat. Ap. 21 b ; é(3ovXevovTo tLv' avrov kataXeifovalv they were considering (the question) whom they should leave here, Dem. 19,122. XéyeL

otl

was

1503. Occasionally the présent optative represents the imperfect in¬ dicative in this construction; e.g. àireKplvavTO OTL ovSels pâprvs irapelr] they

replied that there had been no witness présent (ovôels iraprjv), Dem. 30, 20 (here the context makes it clear that irapelti does not stand for irâpeaTL). 1504. a. In a number of cases, contrary to the rules given above, Greek changes a présent indicative to the imperfect, or a perfect to

the the

SIMPLE SENTENCES QUOTED

315

pluperfect, in indirect discourse, instead of retaining it or changing it to the Optative ; e.g. èv à-Tropiq jjaav, kvvoovpevoL otl èni rats /3aac\éws dvpals rjaav, irpovôeôÛKeaav 8è avrovs oi (3àpl3apoi they were in a quandary, reflecting that ihey were at the king's gâtes, and that the barbarians had betrayed them, X. An. 3,1, 2. Here the author gives his own point of view as he recalls these past events in his own experience. This is also the English usage. It occurs oftenest with verbs of knowing and perceiving. b. In Homer this is the ordinary construction : yiyvuxjKov 6 5r] /ccucà pyôeTo ôaiyœv I knew that the god plotted mischief, Od. 3,166. subjunctive or optative representing Interrogative Subjunctive 1505. An

the

interrogative subjunctive (1367), after

primary

tense, retains its mood and tense in an indirect question ; after a past tense, it may be either changed to the same tense of the

optative

retained in the subjunctive. E.g.

àiroôpœ I am trying to think how I shall escape y ou (tos àiroôpS>;), X. C. 1,4, 13; ovk olô' ei Xpvaâvrq tovtlp 8û I don't know whether to give (them) to Chrysantas here, ibid. 8, 4,16 ; ovk i=xw tL eïirœ I do not know what to say (ri ehr«;), Dem. 9, 54 (cf. nonhabeoquid dicam) ; 'eir-qpovTo ei 7rapaôoîev tyv ttôXlv they asked whether they should give up the city (irapaôœpev ri]v irôXiv ; shall we give up the city ?), Thuc. 1,25; rjiTopei 6 tl xpijcratro r<3 -jrpâypaTL he was at a loss how to deal with the matter (tl xpyvupaL;), X. H. 7, 4, 39 ; è/3ovXevovTO ehe kclt aKavcrœcr lv e'he tl âXXo xpywvTaL they were debating whether they should burn them or dispose of them in some other way, Thuc. 2, 4.

Pov'kevop.a.L

oirœs ce

cre

1506. In these questions ei (not èàv) is used for whether, with both subjunctive and optative (see the second example in 1505). 1507. An interrogative subjunctive may be changed to the optative when the leading verb is optative, contrary to the général usage of in¬ direct discourse (1272 b); e.g. ovk âv exois ô tl xpiio-cllo aavtû) you would not know what to do with yourself (tl xpyau>PaL èpavtw,-), Plat. G. 486 b. Indicative

Optative with

optative with av retains its mood and (with av) unchanged in indirect discourse after otl or cbs and in indirect questions. E.g. XéyeL (or eXeÇev) otl tovto âv ey'evero he says (or said) that this would have happened ; eXe^ev otl ovtos ôlkclLus âv àirodâvol he said that this man would justly die ; ripÛTu>v ei ôoîev âv ra tylotL they asked whether they would give the pledges (ôoirjTe âv;), X. An. 4, 8, 7. 1508. An indicative

tense

GREEK GRAMMAR

316

Infinitive and Participle in

Indirect Discourse

of the infinitive or participle in indirect dis¬ represents the tense of the finite verb which would be used in the direct form, the présent and perfect including the imperfect 1509. Each tense

course

and

pluperfect. Each tense

with àv can represent the correspond¬

èpxopévovs he

announced that these were coming (ovtoi

is tenses of either indicative or optative with àv. E.g. àppuxTTeïv irpoej) aviserai he prétends that he is sick; e^iopoaev àppœcrreîv tovtovl he took an oath that this man was sick, Dem. 19,124 ; naraaxeîv (prjai. tovtovs he says that he detained them, ibid. 39 ; <=</>?? xpvv^' éaurcS tovs QrjPaiovs èiraceK-qpvxévai he said that the Thebans had offered a reward for him, ibid. 21; eirayyeXXerai rà ôinaia ivoi-qaeiv he promises to do what is right, ibid. 48. yyyeiXe

tovtovs

'èpxovtai) ; âyyéXXei tovtovs 'e\6ovtas he announces that these came (ovtoi ffKdov)', aiadavérai tovto y evy aopevov he perceives that this will ; fjcrOeTo tovto yevyaopevov he perceived that this would be done ; eîôe tovto

be done

he SaW that this had been done (tovto yeyévyrai). of àv with infinitive and participle in 1308. For the présent infinitive and participle as imperfect, see 1286 and 1290. 1510. The infinitive or participle is said to stand in indirect discourse, and its tenses correspond to those of the finite moods, when it dépends on a verb implying thought or the expression of thought, and when also the thought, as originally conceived, would have been expressed by some tense of the indicative (with or without av) or optative (with av), so that it can be transferred without change of tense to the infinitive (orparticiple). E.g. in /loûXerat 'eXdeiv he wishes to go, èXdeîv represents no form of either aorist indicative or aorist optative, and is not in indirect discourse (1523). But in 4>rjoiv kXdeîv he says that he went, èXdeîv represents rjXdov of the direct discourse. It is important to observe this grammatical distinction, though it cannot in ail cases be maintained logically. A verb of commanding is also a verb of saying, though it takes the object infinitive, not the infini¬ tive in indirect discourse ; e.g. ol Se aaTTeiv 'eneXevov • ov yàp àv ôvvaadai Tropevdrjvai they told him to (go ahead and) kill them; for (said they, implied in eneXevov) they could not go on, X. An. 4, 5,16. See 1429, 1517, and Greek yey evypevov

See examples

Moods and Tenses, § 684. 1511. The regular

négative of the infinitive and

participle in indirect

Especially the infinitive after verbs of hoping, promising, and swearing (see 1287) regularly has py for its négative ; e.g. œpwe pySèv eipyn'evai he swore that he had said nothing,

discourse is

Dem.

ov,

21, 119.

but exceptions occur.

COMPLEX SENTENCES QUOTED Indirect

317

Quotation of Comptez Sentences

1512. a. When a complex sentence is indirectly quoted, its leading verb follows the rule for simple sentences (1502-1509). b. The dépendent verbs after primary tenses retain the same mood and tense. After past tenses, dépendent primary tenses of the indicative and ail dépendent subjunctives may either be changed to the same tense of the optative or retain their original mood and tense. When a subjunctive becomes optative, dv is dropped, kâv, otclv, etc. becoming et, ore, etc. But dépendent secondary tenses of the indicative remain unchanged. E.g.

(a) âv vpels Xeygre, iroLgaeLV (4>gaiv) ô pgt' aiaxvvgv M1?7"' àSoÇLav avru> 4>kpet. if you say so, he déclarés lue will do whatever does not bring either shame in

TTOLÏjaeLV

discrédit to him, Dem. 19, 41.

(1509).

Here

change is made, except

(b) àirekpivato otl pavd âvoiev à ovk kir La t aivro he replied that they were learning what they did not understand (he said pavdàvovolv â ovk kirLaravrat,, which might have been retained), Plat. Euthyd. 276 e; eï nva 4>evyovTa Xg\f/o lto, irporiyôpevev otl ùs iroXepLœ xpv^olto he announced that if he should catch any one running away he should treat him as an enemy (he said eï TLva XgfopaL, xPVaoPaL), X. C. 3, 1, 3 (1415) ; vopLÇuv, ôaa rrjs irôXeios irpoXaf3ol, ttlivra ravra fieflaLios e^eiv believing that he should hold securely ail régions belonging to our city which he should seize first (oa' âv -n-poXâfiœ, ëfa), Dem. 18, 26; éôô/cet pol ravr-g ireipâadai aœdfjvaL, kvdvpovpkvui otl, kàv pkv Xàdw, aoiOgaopaL I resolved to try to gain safety in this way, reflecting that if I escaped détection I should be saved (we might have had d XâdoipL, aœdgaoipgv), Lys. 12, 15; e<t>aaav rovs avôpas àiroKreveïv oîis ëxovoL Çcovras they said that they should Icill the men whom they had alive (àiroKrevovpev oSs ëxopev, which might have been changed to àiroKTeveïv ovs ëxoiev), Thuc. 2, 5; irpoôgXov fjv (tovto) kaôpevov, ei pg KœXvaere it was plain that this would be so unless you should prevent (faraL, ei pg KcoXvaere, which might have become ei pg KcvXvaoLre), Aeschin. 3, 90; gX-rrLÇov rovs 2iKeXoùs ravrg ovs per eir epip avro àiravrgaeadaL they hoped the Sikels whom they had sent for would meet them here, Thuc. 7, 80. 1513. One verb may be changed to the optative while another is re¬ tained; e.g. ôgXwaas otl ëroLpoi eioL pàxeadaL, eï tls e£epxOLTO having shown that they were ready to fight if any one should come forth (ëroLpoL kapev, kâv tls Qepxgrai), X. C. 4,1,1. This sometimes causes a variety of constructions

in the

same

sentence.

1514. The aorist indicative is not

changed to the aorist optative in dépendent clauses, because in these the aorist optative generally represents the aorist subjunctive.

GREEK GRAMMAR

318

The présent indicative is seldom changed to the présent optative dépendent clauses, for a similar reason. For the imperfect and pluperfect, see 1497. 1515. A dépendent optative of the direct form of course remains unchanged in ail indirect discourse (1496 b). 1516. Occasionally a dépendent présent or perfect indicative is changed to the imperfect or pluperfect, as in the leading clause (1504). 1517. The principles of 1512 appiy also to ail dépendent clauses

after

past tenses,

person.

which express indirectly the past thought of any

This applies especially to

the following constructions :

depending on an infinitive after verbs of wishing, commanding, advising, and others which imply thought but do not take the infinitive in indirect discourse (1510). b. Clauses containing a protasis with the apodosis implied in the context (1430), or with the apodosis expressed in a verb like davpàfw (1433). c. Temporal clauses expressing a past intention, purpose, or expectation, especially those introduced by ews or irp'iv. d. Ordinary relative sentences, regularly taking the indicative. (a) k(3ov\oi>To kXdeïv, ei tovto yévoiTo they wished to go if this should happen. (We might have 'eàv tovto ykvrjTaL, expressing the form if this shall happen, in which the wish would be conceived.) Here kXdeïv is not in in¬ direct discourse (1510). 'eKeXevaev o ti ôvv aivTO XaflôvTas petaôl&kelv he COMmanded them to take what they could and pursue (we might have o tl àv bvvuvTai, representing ô tl 'àv ôvvyade), X. C. 7, 3, 7 ; TrpoeÎTvov avToîs prj vavpaX^v Kopiï^tois, yv A"7 €7ri Kepuvpav TvXkcoaL Kal pkXXoocr lv airo^alveLv they instructed them not to engage in a sea-fight with Corinthians, unless these should be sailing against Corcyra and should be on the point of landing (we might have ei py TvXkoLev Kal peXXoLev), Thuc. 1, 45. (b) <t>vXa.Kas <Tvp.Tvep.TreL, ôirœs (jrvXâTTOLev avTov Kal ei tov àypLœv tl (paveir/ dypLuv he sent (1270) guards along to protect him and (to be ready) in case any wïld animais should appear (the thought being 'eàv tl <pavfj), X. C. 1, 4,7 ; TaXXa, fjv eTL vavpaxtiv ol 'Adrji>aîo>. toX pp o œ a l, -rvn.pecrKevàÇovTO they made ail other préparations (to be ready) in case the Athenians should still venture a naval battle, Thuc. 7, 59 ; ûktlpov ei àXûaoLVTo they pitied them, if they were to be caught (the thought being we pity them if they are caught, ei àXcoaovTaL, which might be retained), X. An. 1,4,7 (1415) ; 'éxaLpov àyaivûiv eÏTLs eàaoL I rejoiced, being content if anyone was going to let it pass (the thought was àyatvœ e'L tls 'eacrec), Plat. Rep. 450 a; kdavpaÇev eï tls àpyvpiov pàTTOLTo he wondered that anyone demanded money, X. M. 1, 2, 7 ; but in the same book (1, 1, 13) we find 'efiavpaÇe ô' ei py cpavepov aiiToîs k(TTLV he wondered that it was not plain to them. a.

■iv

Clauses

DEPENDENT CLAUSES QUOTED

319

(c) (Tirovbàs kirOLrjaavro é'cos air ay y e\0 elr) rà Xeydkvra eis AaKeSatpova they made a truce, (to continue) until what had been said should be reported at Sparta (their thought was «os âv àirayye\df), X. H. 3, 2, 20 ; où yàp ôq cripecLS kir 1er b Qeos rfjs àiroLKiqs, irpïv ôr] àirLku>vt ai es avrqv Aifivqv for the god did not mean to release them from the colony until they should actually come to Libya (we might have kirUoivro), Hdt. 4, 157 (see 1482, 1488); pkvovres earaaav birirore irvpyos Tpœœv b p pq a eie they stood waiting until (for the time when) a serried line should rush upon the Trojans, II. 4, 334.

(d) Kal

qree aqpa

ISkaOai,

ottl

p& ot yap.fipoïo iràpa Ilpotroto (fiepocro he asked

bringing (as he said) from his son-in-law Proetus, II. 6, 176; Karriybpeov ràv aiylvyttwv rà ir tiroir] ko rev irpoSovres rr\v 'EXXâôa they accused the Aeginetans for what (as they said) they had done in betraying Greece, Hdt. 6, 49. to

see

the token, which he was

For the

same

principle in causal sentences,

see

1464.

1518. On this principle, clauses introduced by Iva,

oiruis, ùs, '64>pa, and ph admit the double construction of indirect discourse, and allow the sub-

junctive or future indicative to stand unchanged after past tenses (see 1378). The same principle extends to ail conditional and ail conditional relative and temporal sentences depending on clauses with Iva etc., as these too belong to the indirect discourse. ovix. otu, ov\ oirws, |at] on, [j.Tj oirws,

not only not

expressions, by the ellipsis of a verb of saying, often speak of, or not to speak of. With oû% an indicative (e.g. Xéyoj) was originally understood, and with py an imperative or subjunctive (e.g. Xéye or elV^s). E.g. 1519. These

mean

oî>x

I do not

oirws

rà aKeiir] àireôoaOe, àXXà Kal al dvpar àrfiqpiràad-qaav not only did you

fail to sell the furniture,

even

the doors

were

carried off, Lys. 19, 31

; py

debs, àXXà Kal âvdpcciroL où </>tXoûo't tovs àirLarovvTas not only God (not to speak of God), but men also love not those who distrust them, X. C. 7, 2, 17 ; ireiravped' ypeTs, ovx oirus cre irabaopev we have been Stopped otl

...

ourselves; there is

When these forms never

talk of stopping

were

présent to the mind.

you,

S. El. 796.

thus used, the original ellipsis was

probably

THE INFINITIVE

origin a neuter substantive, with attributes of a verb. Thus, like a verb, it has voices and tenses; it may have a subject or object; and it is qualified by adverbs, not by adjectives. 1520.

many

The infinitive is in

GREEK GRAMMAR

320 b. When the

definite article came into use with other nouns

(see 935 d), it was used also with the infinitive, came more distinctly a noun with four cases. For the

which thus be-

For the case of predicate when the subject is omitted, see 923 and 924.

subject of the infinitive, see 883.

substantives and adjectives

Infinitive without the Article As Subject,

Predicate, Object, or Appositive

be the subject nominative of a finite (especially of an impersonal verb, 887, or of èari), or the subject accusative of another infinitive. It may be a predicate nominative (896), and it may stand in apposition to a substantive (900). E.g. o-wé/Srj cwtQ èXOeîv it happened that he went, èÇrjv ykveiv it was possible to stay, rjôv ttoWovs kxdpovs exeiv; is it pleasant to hâve many enemies? <pyalv k^elvai tovtols yeveiv he says it is possible for them to stay (yéveiv being subject of ê£etVc«) ; to y vûv a i èiriaTy/j.7]v Xa(3eiv ecTTiv to leam is to acquire Jcnowledge, Plat. Th. 209 e; to yàp Qo.vo.tov ôeôiévai ovôèv âXXo èariv rj ôoKelv aocfrôv elvai yy ovtcl for to fear death (the fear of death) is nothing else than pretending to be wise without being so, Plat. Ap. 29 a; els oicovos apuTTos, à /xv v eo~d a t. irept iraTprjs one omen is best, to fight for our country, II. 12, 243. See also 1116 a. For the subject infinitive with the article, see 1545. 1522. The infinitive may be the object of a verb. It generally has the force of an object accusative, sometimes that of an accu¬ sative of kindred signification (1049), and sometimes that of an object genitive. 1523. The object infinitive not in indirect discourse (1510) follows verbs whose action naturally implies another action as its object, especially those expressing wish, command, advice, cause, attempt, intention, prévention, ability, fitness, necessity, or their opposites. Such verbs are in général the same in Greek as in English, and others will be learned by practice. The négative is pp. E.g. (iob\eT<ii k\detv he wishes to go ; Çiotiherai tous ttoKLtas Tro\ep.LKOvs elvai he wishes the citizens to be warlike ; irapaivoviiév ctoi péveiv we advise you to remain ; irpoetXeTo ir o~ke pr] a ai he preferred to make war ; neXevei ae yy à-n-eXOeîv he commands y ou not to départ; à&ovcriv apx^iv they claim the right to rule ; àÇiodTai àiroQaveiv he is deemed worthy of death ; ôéoyai 1521. The infinitive may

verb

THE INFINITIVE v/j.wp

avyyvûiiriv

p.0L ex^v

I ask

ÎJOU

to pardon

321 So àvafiâ\\eTO.L

me.

tovto

he postpones doing this; 4>o(3eÎTaL àiroOaveîv he is afraidto die (cf. 1389 and X. An. 1, 3,17) ; kir'urTaTcu veiv he knows how to swim (1594 b).

iroieïv

1524. The tenses here used

are chiefly the présent and aorist, and these time, but solely in the character of their action (1274). In this construction the infinitive has no more reference to time than any other verbal noun would have, but the meaning of the verb generally gives it a reference to the future ; e.g. in à&oOrat àirodaveïv (above) àiTodaveîv expresses time only in so far as davârov would express it.

do not differ in their

1525. The infinitive may dépend on a noun and a verb (generally kart) which together are équivalent to a verb which takes an object infinitive

(1523). E.g.

navras âneXOelv ail MUSt withdraiV ; kLvÔvvos rjv avrco iradeïv tl in danger of suffering something ; èX-n-Lôas ex&. tovto iroirjaat. he

âvâyKT] kart he

was

has

hopes of doing this; &pa. àxLevai it is time to

42 a;

rots crrpartwrats

fortify the place fell

ôp/xi)

upon

evenreoe

k kt € lx^ a ctt

the soldiers, Thuc. 4, 4.

go away,

Plat. Ap.

x^ptov an impulse to

For the infinitive with rot) depending on a noun, see 1550.

(1510) is generally of a verb of saying or thinking or some équivalent ex¬ pression. Here each tense of the infinitive corresponds in time to the same tense of some finite mood. See 1509, with the examples. b. Many verbs of this class (especially the passive of Xéyoj) allow both a personal and an impersonal construction. Thus we can say Xéyerai ô Kvpos ekdeîv Cyrus is said to have gone, or Xéyerat top Kvpop eXOcÏp it is said that Cyrus went. Aoxéw seem is generally used personally ; e.g. ôoxeï elvat aocfôs he seems to be wise (has the réputation of being wise). 1526.

The infinitive in indirect discourse

the object

a. Of the three common verbs meaning to say, (1) (jyruxL regularly takes the infinitive in indirect discourse; (2) eÎTOp regularly takes ort or ùs with the indicative or optative ; (3) Xéyo) allows either construction, but in the active voice it generally takes otl or à'?, in the passive it takes the infinitive. Most verbs meaning to think or believe regularly take the in¬ finitive in indirect discourse; the commonest are olpai, (o'Lopai), pyoïipaL, vo/dLfco, and ôokoo (Ionic, poetic, and in Plato in this sense). b. Exceptional cases of elirov with the infinitive are more common than those of 077/xt with 6ti or côs, which are very rare except in late Greek.

1527.

GREEK GRAMMAR

322 Wlttov and Xéyu

in the

of command take the infinitive by the rule

sense

(1523).

For the two constructions allowed after verbs of hoping, expecting, promising, and swearing, see 1287. 1528. A relative or temporal clause depending on an infinitive in in¬ direct discourse sometimes takes the infinitive by assimilation ; e.g. èireeôy ôè y evea9 eu ènl rfj obeip, (ecfry) à.veepypèuyv naTaAap(36.veiv Tyv dvpav and when they had come to the house, (he said) they found the door open, Plat. Symp. 174 d. Herodotus allows this assimilation even after et if and ôlôtl because.

1529. In narration, the infinitive often seems to stand for the indicative, when it dépends on some word like XéyeraL it is said, expressed or implied in what précédés. E.g. àirikojj.épovs 5è es to "Apyos, 8larL6ea9al tov cfiôprov and they had arrived at Argos and were (it is said) setting ont their cargo for sale, Hdt. 1,1; ôlarL9ea9aL is an imperfect infinitive (1286 a) : see also Hdt. 1, 24 and X. C. 1,3, 5. Infinitive with Adjectives

1530. The infinitive may

dépend

adjectives corresponding in

meaning to verbs which take an object infinitive (1523),

especially

expressing ability, fitness, desert, willingness, and their opposites. E.g. ôwaros tovto iroeelv dble to do this ; SeLvos \kyeiv skilled in speaking ; a£ios A (3 et v worthy to receive this; %p69vpos A'eyeev eager to speak; paXaKoi naprepelv too effeminate to endure, Plat. Hep. 556 c; èTnarripwv Aèyeiv te kcll aiyav knowing how to speak as well as to be silent, Plat. those

tovto

(1594 b). oîoi irovypov tlvos èpyov è<f>tea9cu that they may UOt be capable of aiming at any vicious act, X. C. 1, 2, 3 ; olos àet irore pera(3âAAea9at. one likely to be always changing, X. H. 2, 3, 45. 1531. ALkclios just and some other adjectives may thus be used personally with the infinitive; e.g. ôkaiôs èan tovto iroielv he has a right to do this (équivalent to ô'ikcllÔv èaTiv avTov tovto Troieîv). Cf. 1591. Phdr. 276

py tolovtol eaovraL

Limiting Infinitive with Adjectives,

Adverbs, and

substantives

or adverb may take an infinitive to limit particular action (epexegetic infinitive). E.g. 9'eapa. aiaxpov ôpâv a sight disgraceful to behold', Aôyoi vptv xpy^'-y-'hTaTOL àKovaai WOrds most USeful for you to hear\ rà xaXe7TWTara evpeîv the things hardest to find; iroAueta y moto, xo-he-rry av'Çyv a government least hard to live under, Plat. Pol. 302b; oULa yôtoTy èvôuju.Tâa9eu a house

1532.

Any adjective

its meaning to a

THE INFINITIVE most most

pleasant to live in, X. M. 3, 8, 8; «âXXiara (adv.) iôelv in delightful to behold, X. C. 8, 3, 5.

323 a manner

1533. This infinitive is generally active rather than passive; e.g. xa-beirov iroieîv a hard thing to do, rather than xaXe7rov iroLeîadai hard to be done. ivpaypa

1534. Nouns and even verbs may take the infinitive as a limiting accusative (1056); e.g. davpa iôéadai a wonder to behold, Od. 8,366; àpicrTevtcTKe p,âxevdai he was the best in fighting (like pàxyv), 17.6,460; ôLcufiépeLP avToùs lôeîv; do you think they differ in appearance? Plat.

ôoKels

Rep. 495

1535. Here belongs the infinitive after a comparative with y than-, e.g. vôaypa peZÇov y <pkpei.i> an affliction too heavy to bear, S. O.T. 1293. For wore with this infinitive, see 1474.

Infinitive

1536.

E.g. ol

Purpose

The infinitive may express a purpose with a few verbs.

ovs eikecrOe apxeiv pov the officers whom y ou chose to command Plat. Ap. 28 e; ryv iroXiv <£uXàrreiv avroïs TrapéôcoKap they delivered the city to them to guard, X. U. 4,4,15; Oeàaacrdat. -Kapyv ras yvpaÎKas irielv 4>epovaas the women were to be seen bringing them (something) to drink, X. H. 7, 2, 9.

âpxopres, me,

b. The verbs which allow this construction in prose

instead of the more (1374) are a few meaning to appoint, give, take, send, bring. Here, as with adjectives (1533), the infinitive is active rather than passive ; e.g. Kraveïv kpot vlv eôoaav they gave her to me to kill (to be killed), E. Tro. 874 ; ourot -KaiSas trapyaœ tovs èpoùs Kadvf3pL<rai verïly I shall not give over my children to outrage, E. Med. 1061. Cf. the infinitive with roO expressing purpose, 1551. c. With verbs of naming and calling a redundant elvai is often added ; e.g. ovopa tovto Xéyeadai. cro(f>os elvai to be called this by name, "wise," Plat. Ap. 23 a. Cf. 1539. 1537. In Homer, where <ï>s re only twice has the sense of so as (1471), the simple infinitive may express a resuit; e.g. ris a4>œe Çvvkyne p.àxe<rdai.; who brought them together to contend? II. 1, 8. common

final clause

Absolute Infinitive

1538. The

infinitive

may

phrases, generally with ùs The most

put it in

common

word

stand absolutely in parenthetical ôaov. is ws eiros eiireîv or côs direiv to used to soften a statement. Others

of these expressions one may say so,

GREEK GRAMMAR

324

concisely; to Çvpirav canjudge; oaov y'e p' eiàevoiL as far as I know; cbs kpoi Soneïv or kpoi doueZv as it seems to me; cbs ourw y ànovcrai at first hearing (or without cbs). So àXLyov Selv and fXLKpov Selv to want little, i.e. almost (see 1116 b). Herodotus has dis Xôyco eiirelv and où iroXXû Xôyio eiireîv not to make a long story, in short ; Plato, dis irpds ypas eipijadai between ourselves. 1539. In certain cases étvai seems to be superfluous ; especially in e/cd^ elvai willingly, which generally stands in a négative sentence. So in to vvv elvai at présent; to rijpepov elvai today ; to kir' 'eneLvoLs elva l and similar phrases as far as dépends on them; tt)v -kpùt^v elvai at first, Hdt. 1,153 ; elvai SO far as concems this, Plat. Prot. 317 a; cbs iraXaià elvai considering their âge, Thuc. 1, 21 ; and some other phrases. Cf. 1536 c. cbs awTôpœs (or avveXovri, eiivelvin a word, in général;

are

KaTa

1172 b) e'nvélv to speak

cbs à ire m à a ai as far as we

tovto

Infinitive in Commands,

1540. The infinitive

E.g. iroTe

nai cù

yvvaiKi irep

a subject nominative is sometimes of the imperative, especially in Homer.

with

used like the second person pi]

Wishes, Laws

f/inos elvai be thou never indulgent to thy wife, do not approach them {—pi] irkXafe), Aesch.

Od. 11, 441 ; ois pi] ire\àfeiv Pr. 712.

subject accusative sometimes ex¬ wish, like the optative (1355) ; and sometimes a command, like the third person of the imperative. E.g. ZeO 7ra/rep, i) A'tavTa Xax^lv rj Tuôéos viôv Father Zeus, may the lot fall either on Ajax or on the son of Tydeus (=Acas Xdxoi, etc.), II. 7,179; deol iroXiTai, pi] pe SovXeLas tvx^ïv gods of our city, may slavery not be my lot, Aesch. Sev. 253; Tpûas e-n-aO' 'EXevt]v àiroôodvai after that let the Trojans 1541. The infinitive with a

presses a

surrender Helen (=

âiroSoiev), II. 3, 285.

supplying a verb like take vengeance, II. 3, 351),

1542. This construction has been explained by ôôs or ôôre

grant (see Sos Teiaaadai grant

or yevoiTo

may

it be.

that I

may

laws, treaties, and proclamations, the infinitive often dépends on e5o£e or ôkôoKraL be it enacted, or KeneXeuaraL it is com¬ mandent; which may be expressed in a previous sentence or understood. E.g. SiKaÇeiv Sè rijv kv 'ApeLœ iràycp <pôvov and (be it enacted) that the Council of the Areopagus shall have jurisdiction in cases of murder, Dem. 23, 22; cTT] Sè elvae ràs airovSàs irevT-rjKovTa and that the treaty shall continue fifty years, Thuc. 5, 18; à/coûere Xecb • toùs ôxXtras àiriévai iraXiv o'iKaôe hear ye people ! let the heavy-armed go back home again, Ar. Av. 448. 1543. In

325

THE INFINITIVE

Infinitive with the Article 1544. When the infinitive has the neuter substantive becomes

its attributes

as a

verb.

article, its character as a distinct, while it loses none of

The addition of the article extends its

constructions, especially to those with préposi¬ tions ; and the article is sometimes allowed even in many of the older constructions in which the infinitive regularly stands alone. use

to many new

Infinitive with t6

Subject

Object

1545. The

subject infinitive (1521) may take the article to make distinctly a substantive. E.g.

-yvLovai

'ekiatruj.r)v xafjeïv kcrnv to learn is to acquire Tcnowledge, Plat. Th. to àôuceîis ïhis is wrong-doing, Plat. G. 483 c; to yàp OàvaTOV SeSiévai ovôèv aXXo kaTiv rj SoKeïv aocftov eiv ai prj ovto. the fear 209 e; tovtô kcrn

of death is nothing else than pretending to be wise without being so, Plat. Ap. 29 a. The predicate infinitives here omit the article (1521).

See 954.

1546. The

object infinitive takes the article chiefly after verbs regularly take the simple infinitive (see 1523), or

which do not

when the relation of the infinitive to the verb is less close than it

usually is. E.g. CLppointed the death of 43 ; et to kojXOcrât t-qv twv 'Wkkqvoiv Koivwv'iav èirewpâKeiv kyù ^iXLirircp if I had sold to Philip the prévention of the unity of the Greeks (i.e. had prevented this as Philip's hireling), Dem. 18, 23; to ÇwoiKeïv trj5' ôpov tîs àv ywv ôvvatto; to live

to t

e\evTrj a ai irâvTiov y ireirpcopévri KaTeupivev fate hcLS ail things (like dâvaTov iràvTwv KaTkupivev), IsOC. 1,

with her—what

woman

could do it? S. Tr. 545.

1547. Sometimes in poetry the distinction between the object infini¬ tive with and without rô is hardly perceptible ; e.g. rXquopai ro nardaveiv I shall dare death, Aesch. Ag. 1290; to 8 pâv ovk ■qdtkqaav they refused to

act, S. O. C. 442 ;

XaXayjyo-at 0ë\wv willing to babble, Pind. O. 2, 97.

Infinitive with t6 depending on Nouns

used with the adjecregularly take the simple infinitive

1548. The infinitive with rô is sometimes

tives and substantives which

(1530). E.g. to

/3tçt ttoxtrcof 8pâv ecfrvv àpqxavos I am helpless to act zens, S. Ant. 79 ; rô és tt\v yrjv ripœv karpâhXeiv . the power to

invade

our

land, Thuc. 6,17.

in défiance of the citiluavoi elai they have

GREEK GRAMMAR

326

ÏNFINITIVE WITH toû, TW, OR r6 IN

1549. The

VARIOUS CONSTRUCTIONS

genitive, dative, or accusative of the infinitive

the article may

dépend

on a

préposition. E.g.

with

Dem. 18, 26; irpos tQ besides receiving no profit from the mission, Dem. 19,229; ôià to £évos elvai ovk àv olei àôiKï]Orjvai; do you think you would not be wronged on account of your being a stranger? X. M. 2,1,15 ; vtrkp tov rà perpta. pi] yiyveodai that moderate counsels may not prevail (= ï'va pi] ylyvrjTat.), Aeschin. 3, 1.

irpo tov tovs opKovs

àiroôodpal before taking the oaths,

p-qbtv é/c rrjs irpeafielas Xa/3elv

genitive and dative of the infinitive, with the article, those cases ; as in that of the attributive genitive, the genitive after a compara¬ tive or with verbs and adjectives, the dative of cause, manner, or means, and the dative with verbs and adjectives. E.g. 1550. The

can

tov

stand in most of the constructions belonging to

desire to drink, Thuc. 7, 84 ; véois to aiyâv KpeÎTTÔv 'e<TTL for the young silence is better than too much talk, Men. Mon. 387 (1147) ; 'e-n-eaxoptv tov ôaKpveiv we restrained our tears, Plat. Ph. 117e; àrjOevs tov kcltaKoveiv tlvôs eioiv they are unused to obeying any one, Dem. 1, 23 ; tQ> <f>avepôs elvai tolovtos &v by having it évident that he was such a man, X. M. 1, 2, 3 ; ra> Koo-ptcos Çijv irioTeveiv to trust in an orderly life, Isoc. 15,24; ïoov râ npootéveiv equal to lamenting beforehand, Aesch. Ag. 253. irieîv kindvpLa a

tov

XaXeïv

1551. The infinitive with tov may express a purpose, generally négative purpose, where with ordinary genitives 'évena is regularly used (see 1122, 1536). E.g. eTeixtvûV ' A.ta\à.vTr], tov pi] XyaTas kœkov py eïv Ti]v ~Ev(3oiav Atalante was fortified, that pirates might not ravage Euboea, Thuc. 2, 32 ; Mt^cos t6 a

Minos put down piracy, (than to them), Thuc. 1,4; went forth to sow, Matthew 13, 3.

\t](ttlk6v Kadfipet, tov Tas frpocrôSovs pSXKov levai, that the revenues might corne to him rather

kÇrjXdev à crireipcov

tov

airelpeLv the sower

avreo

expressions denoting hindrance or freedom from anything allow either the infinitive with tov (1550) or the simple infinitive (1523). As the infinitive with such verbs can take the négative py without affecting the sense (1618), we have a third and fourth form, still with the same meaning. See 1554. E.g. 1552. Verbs and

e'ipyei ce tovto iroielv, e'ipyei ce tov tovto iroieïv, e'Lpyei ce pi] tovto ivoieïv, elpyet ce tov pi] tovto iroielv, ail meaning he prevents you from doing this ; tov <Pl\LTrirov irapeXdeïv ovk èSùvavTo KcoXûaai they could not hinder

Philip from passing through, Dem. 5, 20; tov ôpairereveiv àirelpyovai; do they restrain them from running away? X. M. 2,1,16 ; o-n-ep éexe ph

THE INFINITIVE

327

•n)v He\oirbvv7]crov iropOeïv which prevented (him) from ravaging Peloponnesus, Thuc. 1,73; ôùo avôpas ëtjei roD pi/ /caraôvvai it will keep two

menfrom sinking, X. An. 3, 5, 11. leading verb is negatived (or is interrogative implying a négative), the double négative pi) où is generally used with the infinitive rather than the simple pi) (1619), so that we can say oùk eïpyei ae pi) où tovto ivoielv he does not prevent you from doing this; roO pi/ où iroieXv is rarely (if ever) used. 1553. When the

1554. The infinitive with

to prj may be used after expressions denoting hindrance, and also after ail which even imply préven¬ tion, omission, or déniai. This infinitive with rô is less closely connected with the leading verb than are the forms before mentioned (1552), and it may often be considered an accusative of spécification (1056), and sometimes (as after verbs of déniai) an object accusative. Sometimes it expresses merely a resuit. E.g.

oplXop elpyov

to pi) ta èyyùs Trjs TcôXecvs Kanov py eïv they prevented the from injuring the neighboring parts of the city, Thuc. 3,1 ; KLpuva 7rapà Tpeîs acheta av \pi)(t>ovs to pi) davaTip Ç-r)piû a ai they allowed Cimon by three votes to escape the punishment of death (they let him off from the punishment of death), Dem. 23, 205; <£6/3os àvd' ïnrvov irapaotatei, to pi) pxé<j>apa avpjiaXelv fear stands by me instead of sleep, preventing me from closing my eyelids, Aesch. Ag. 15. Thus we have a fifth form, eïpyei ae tô pi/ tovto iroieïv, added to those given in 1552, as équivalents of the English he prevents youfrom doing this. 1555. Here, as above (1553), pi) où is generally used when the leading Verb is negatived; e.g. oùôèv yàp aÙTœ Ta Or' 'eirapnéoei to pi) où iceaeïv for this will not at ail suffice to prevent him from falling, Aesch. Pr. 918. 1556. The infinitive with roO pi) and with rô pi) may also be' used in the ordinary négative sense; e.g. oùôepta Trpô^acrts roO pi) ôpâv raûra no ground for not doing this, Plat. Tim. 20 c. top

crowd

1557. The infinitive with its subject, object, or other adjuncts (sometimes including dépendent clauses) may be preceded by to, the whole standing as a single noun in any ordinary construction. E.g. to

pi)Te iràXai tovto tceicovdevai, ireiprjpépai Te Tiva i)pîv avppaxiav toÙtoip àvTippoirov, àv flovXwpeOa xPV^ai, Trjs irap' kneLvcov eùvotas eùepyeTrjp 'àv eycvye Oetr/v but the fact that we have not suffiered this long ago, and that, more-

ôè

alliance has appeared in our favor to balance these dangers, if use it, — this I should ascribe as a benefaction to their goodwill, Dem. 1,10. Here the whole sentence rô xpw^ai is the object accusative of deirjv av. This construction corresponds more or less generally to the English gerund in -ing. over, an

wish to

GREEK GRAMMAR

328

Infinitive in Exclamations

1558.

to express

rrjs jucopîas ■

The infinitive with ALa

may

be used in exclamations,

indignation. E.g. vo pLÇeiv, ovra tt]\lkovtovL what foolishness! believing in

surprise

big ! Ar. Nub. 819. See 1124. sometimes omitted; e.g. toiovtovI rpk^eiv «k to keep a dog like that ! Ar. V. 835. 1559. a. For the infinitive as well as the finite moods with œore, «s, €(/>' «5 and &}>' c5re, see 1466-1477. b. For the infinitive and finite moods with irpLv, see 1484-1489. Zeus

now

you are so

b. The article here is

For the infinitive with

av, see

1308.

THE PARTICIPLE

1560. The participle is a of the nature of verb and

verbal adjective, in function partaking

adjective. It has three uses. First, it attribute, qualifying a noun like an ordinary ad¬ jective (1562-1565) ; secondly, it may define the circumstances under which an action takes place (1566-1579) ; thirdly, it may be joined to certain verbs to supplément their meaning, often having a force resembling that of the infinitive (1580-1595). may express an

are not always exact, and the same participle belong to more than one class. E.g. in 6 ph Sapeis âvdpœiros the unflogged man, ôapeis is both attributive and conditional (1566 e). Similarly, a circumstantial participle may dénoté more than one of the relations

1561. These distinctions

may

described in 1566.

Attributive 1562. The

participle

may

Participle

qualify

substantive, like

attribu¬

adjective. Here it may often be translated by a relative and a finite verb, especially when it has the article. E.g. 6 irapùv naipos the présent occasion, Dem. 3, 3 ; deol a'ùv kôvres immortal gods (that live forever), II. 21, 518; irô\is /câXAei ôta<t>epovaa a city excelling in beauty; àvi)p ko\w ireiraibevpevos a manwho has been well educated (or a Well-educated man) ; ot irpéafleis ot vtto <f>L)\lirirov wep.cj>0évres the tive

ambassadors whom Philip who are to do this.

had sent; avôpes 6i

tovto iroipcrovtes

men

1563. a. The participle with the article may be used substantively, like any adjective. It is then équivalent to he who, they who, that which, etc., with a finite verb. E.g.

THE PARTICIPLE

329

the conquerors; ol ire-n-eio- pkvoL those who have been convinced; irapà tols àpiaroLs ôokovœlv elvai among those who are accounted best, X. M. 4, 2,6; ô ttju yvùp-qv to.vtt)v elirœv the man who

ol KpaTovvres

gave

this opinion,

Thuc. 8, 68 ; tols 'Ap/câôcof crcperépoLS ovai Çvppàxois irpoelirov they proclaimed to those Arcadians who were their allies, Thuc. 5, 64 ; toùs âel èyyvrâToo èavrcov ovras those who for the time being (or whoever) are nearest

them, Plat. Ap. 25

b. The article is sometimes

belligerents, X. C. 7, 5, 73.

omitted;

e.g. woXepowTuv ttôXls a

city of

1564. a. Sometimes a participle becomes so completely a substantive that it takes an object genitive instead of an object accusative; e.g. ô eneLvov reKcov his father (for ô knelvov reKcop), E. El. 335. Contrast 1048. b. A participle should often be rendered by an

English substantive ; kaXœKvLç. since the capture of Mitylene (1166). So in Latin, ab urbe condita, since the founding of Rome. e.g. rfj MuTi.Xi7î>77

1565. The neuter abstract courage, KâWos

participle with the article is sometimes used as an substantive, like the infinitive; e.g. to ôcôlôs fear, to dapaodv

bebikvaL and

beauty. In both

cases

to dapaeîp, Thuc. 1, 36. Cf. t6 koXôv for the adjective is used substantively.

Circumstantial Participle 1566. The participle may define the circumstances of an action. It may express the following relations : a. Time ; the tenses denoting various points of time, which is relative to that of the verb of the sentence (1289). E.g. 'éirpa^e cttpa.T7]ywv he did this while he was général', raOra 7Tpâ£ei paTTiySiv he will do this while he is général ; Tvpawevaas ôè er^ rpla 'I-n-Tuas èxwpa ès 'Zlyeiov and after he had been tyrant three years Hippias withdrew to Sigeum, Thuc. 6, 59.

TOLVTa

b. Cause.

Aéya; ôè tovô'

E.g. eveKa,

fiovXopevos SôÇcu

(■immédiate) reason — I want have, Plat. Ph. 102 d.

you

(tol

oirep

come

èpoi and I spealc for this to the same opinion that I

c. Means, manner, and similar relations, including employment. E.g.

manner

irpoe'ikeTO paXXov tols vopoLS eppevcov àirodaveiv tj irapavofiœv Çrjv he preferred to die abiding by the laws rather than to live transgressing them, X. M.

4,4,4; was

tovto

absent

kirotrioe \adcov he did this secretly ; àireôiipei TpLripcLpxûv he duty as trierarch; XyÇôpevoL Çûltlv they live by plunder,

X. C. 3, 2, 25.

GEEEK GRAMMAR

330 d. Pur pose or

intention ; generally expressed by the future

(sometimes by the présent)

participle. E.g.

fj\9e \v<TÔfj,evo s ôùyarpa he came to ransom his daughter, II. 1,13 ; irépireip 7rpécr/3eis ravra èpovpr as Kal Avaapôpop airrjaoPTas to Send ambassadors to say

this and to ask for

Lysander, X. H. 2,1, 6.

the tenses of the participle here represent the corresponding tenses of the indicative, subjunctive, or optative, e.

Condition ;

in ail classes of See 1423,

protasis. The négative is

/. Opposition, limitation, or generally to be translated by

ov.

p,y.

where examples will be found.

E.g.

concession ; where the participle is although and a verb. The négative able

èXLya bvv àpevot irpoopâv iroXXà envLXH-povpev irpciTTeiP although We are to foresee few things, we try to carry out many things, X. C. 3, 2,15. "Çlv is sometimes omitted in this construction ; e.g. Zeûs, naLirep avdâô^s tfipevûv Zeus,

albeit stubborn in mind, Aesch. Pr. 907. See 1573. of expressing concession, see 1435, 1436.

For other modes

g. Any attendant circumstance, the participle being merely de¬ scriptive. This is one of the most common relations of the circumstantial participle. E.g. ëpxÉTat top vlov 'éxovaa she came bringing her son, X. C. 1, 3,1; ttapaXa(3 âpres Boiwtoùs 'eaTpàrtvaav kirl (S>âpoa\ov they took Boeotians with them and marched against Pharsalus, Thuc. 1,111.

h. That in fbhich

the action of the verb

consists. E.g.

thus he spake saying, Aesch. Ag. 205; eu y pvqaas pe you did wéll in reminding me, Plat. Ph. 60 c. For the time of the aorist participle here, see 1291.

tôô' elire <t> uvûv

'eroLyaas àva-

1567. These participles denoting time, cause, manner, condition, con¬ cession, and attendant circumstance are best translated by finite verbs. Certain participles of time and manner have almost the force of adverbs by idiomatic usage. Such are àpxôpevos at first ; reXevTÛp at last, finally ; ôloXlttùp xpôpop after a while ; 4>kpœp hastily ; 4>ep6pepos with a rush ; Karareipas earnestly ; <t>dàaas sooner (anticipating) ; XaOùp secretly ; 'èx^v continually ; àpvaas quickly ; KXaiœp to one's sorrow ; xo-lp^p with impunity. E.g. airep

àpxônepos elirop OS I

Said at first, Thuc. 4, 64; taeireaop cfrepôpepoi 210 ;

"EXXypas they fell upon the Greeks with a rush, Hdt. 7, ri Kv-n-TâÇeis e x o> u ; why do you keep poking about? Ar. icXatup àfr} rûpôe you will lay hands on them to your sorrow, Heraclid. 270. es

tovs

Nub. 509; E.

THE PARTICIPEE

1568. "Exwf, 4>'epuv,

with.

pLa

E.g.

a>xero

ayiov,

331

\a(3œv, and xpûpwos may often be translated

irpkafieis âyovaa one (ship) was gone with ambassadors, Thuc. 7, 25. 1, 3, 1 in 1566 g. /3ofj xpùpevoi- with a shout, Thuc. 2, 84.

See X. C.

1569. a. T i iradojv what has happened to him ? or what ailed him ? and ri fxadûv what has he taken into his head ? are used in the général sense of why ? how cornes he to? how is it that? ete. E.g. tL

padtûv trpoaéypaipep ; with what idea did he add ihis clause ? Dem. 20, 127 ; tL 7r ado va ai Opérais eîÇaai yvvcu&v ; what makes them look like mortal women? Ar. Nub. 340.

tovto

b. The

corresponding relative forms 6

iradœv and ô

padûv

hardly

differ in meaning from the causal ô™ ; e.g. tL a&ôs dpi iradeîp r? à-n-oreicrat., o tl padùv kv rep (3Lcp ovx rio~vxcav r\yov ; what do I deserve to suffer or to pay because in the course of my life I have never kept quiet? Plat. Ap. 36 b. Genitive

and

Accusative Absolute

1570. Whëb.

a circumstantial participle belongs to a noun or which is not grammatically connected with the main construction of the sentence, they stand together in the genitive

pronoun

absolute.

E.g.

àvéfiri ovôevos koAvovtos he made the ascent with no one interfering, X. An. 1, 2, 22 ; kcù peTaireprropkvov aÙTov ovk èdeheo ëXdeîv although he keeps sending

for

me,

I do not want to

go,

X. An. 1, 3,10. See 1156.

participle stands alone in the genitive absolute, when subject can easily be supplied from the context, or when some général Subject like àvdpîoircov or irpaypàTcov is understood ; e.g. ol iroXepLOL, irpocnovtcov, récos ptv fiavxa^ov but the enemy, as they (men before mentioned) came on, kept quiet for a time, X. An. 5, 4,16 ; ovtw 5' èxôvTccv, 6'lkôs (kcmv), /c.r.À. and this being the case (se. irpaypâTcop), it is likely etc., X. An. 3, 2,10. So with verbs like u« (886 e) ; e.g. voptos ttoXXcS when it was raining heavïly (where originally Alôs was understood), X. H. 1, 1,16. b. The genitive absolute is regularly used only when a new subject is introduced into the sentence and not when the participle can be joined with any noun or pronoun already belonging to the construction. Yet this principle is sometimes violated in order to make the participial clause more prominent ; e.g. a.

Sometimes

côs ôeipôp

oiopépovs ireiaeadaL d àiroOapodpTaL,

cocrirep

àOavaTCûv kaoptpcov

vpéis

because they think they will suffer something dreadful if they die, as though they were never going to die if you do not put them to death, Plat. Ap. 35 b. So Thuc. 7, 48. Cf. 1595 b.

mi)

clttokt€lp7]T€

GREEK GRAMMAR

332

participles of impersonal verbs stand in the accusathe neuter singular, when others would be in the genitive absolute. So passive participles and ov, when they are used impersonally. E.g. t'l 5t), vpâs è^àv àiroXkaai, ovk 'eiri tovto rfkQopev ; why now, when W6 might hctve destroyed you, did we not proceed to do it? X. An. 2, 5, 22. oi ô' /3or)9r](ravTes ôéov iyieîs kir^dov ; and did those who brought no aid when itwasneededescapesafeandsound? Plat. Aie. 115b. So eu 5è irapaaxov and when a good opportunity offers, Thuc. 1, 120; ov irpoarjKov improperly (it being not becoming), Thuc. 4, 95 ; tvxov by chance (it having happened)irpoarax9ép poi when I had been commanded; eiprj pévov when it has been said ; àôvvarov ôv kv wktl crriprjvai it being impossible to 1571. The

tive absolute, in

signal by night, Thuc. 7, 44.

of personal verbs sometimes stand with their subjects in the accusative absolute ; but very seldom unless they are preceded by ws or wo-n-ep. E.g. 1572. The participles

avroïs they ate their dinner in if this had been the command given to them, X. Symp. 1, 11. 1573. "ilv as a circumstantial participle is seldom omitted, except with the adjectives ècdw willing and âncov unwilling, and after are, oTa, d>s, or Ka'nrep ; e.g. èpov ovx ènôvTos against my will (1615) S. Aj. 455 ; also àirôpprjTov 7rôXet when it is forbidden to the state, S. Ant. 44. Cf. 1566/, 1588. <tmirfj eSeLirvow, &oirep tovto irpo(ttetayp.evov

silence,

Adverbs with Circumstantial Participle

1574. The adverbs apa, pera^v, evdvs, avTLKa, apTL, and k^aLcj)vr]s are often connected (in position and in sense) with the temporal participle, though

grammatically they qualify the leading verb; e.g. apa /caraAa/Sô^res ■jrpoaeKkaTÔ crfa as soon as they overtook them, they began to attack them,

9, 57; Ne^ws peTa£ù opvaao:v èiravaaTo Necho stopped in the midst of digging (the canal), i.e. before it was completed, Hdt. 2, 158. 1575. The participle denoting opposition (1566/) is often strengthened by Kal or Katirep even (Homeric also nal . . . irep), and in négative sentences by oûSé Or py8é', also by Kal raOra and that too', e.g. kiroiKTipco vlv, Katirep ovTa ôvapevrj I pity him, even though he is an enemy, S. Aj. 122; ovk &p irpoôoLyp, ovôé irep irpàacraiv kokcvs I would not be faithless, even though I am in a wretched state, E. Ph. 1624. While irep is common in Homer with a concessive participle, the parti¬ ciple with irep is not always concessive. Hdt.

participles, especially those denoting cause often preceded by cbs. This particle shows that they express the idea or the assertion of the subject of the leading 1576. Circumstantial

purpose, are

THE PARTICIPLE

333

verb out tov

or that of some other person prominent in the sentence, withimplying that it is also the idea of the speaker or writer. E.g.

Ilepi/cXéa kv air La elxov ùs Pericles because (as they

ela avr a a(f>âs iro\epeîv they found fault with thought) he had persuaded them to engage in war, Thuc. 2, 59 ; àyavaKrovcnv dis peyâXcov tlvwv àirearepypkvoL they are indignant because (as they say) they have been deprived of some great blessings, Plat. Rep. 329 a. ir

1577. The causal participle is often emphasized by are and olov or ola inasmuch as ; but these particles have no such force as dis (1576) ; e.g. are 7rats ûv ySero like the child that he was, he showed his delight, X. C. 1, as,

3, 3. Here the

cause is given on the authority of the writer. "Çlairep as, as itwere, with the participle expresses a comparison between the action of the verb and that of the parti¬ ciple. E.g.

1578.

cbairep dXXots kiri.Sei.Kvvp.6voL they danced as if they were showing off to other s (i.e. they danced, apparently showing off), X. An. 5, 4, 34 ; tL tovto Xéyeis, &airep ovk kirl aoi ôv o tl âv (3ov\y \eyeiv ; why do yOU Say this, as if it were not in your power to say what you please? X. M. 2, 6, 36. Although we find as if a convenient translation, there is really no con¬ dition, as appears from the négative ov (not py). See 1615.

œpxovvro

1579. "Çlcrirep, like other words meaning as, may be followed by a protasis ; e.g. ciairep et irapeaTareis as (it would be) if you had lived near, Aesch. Ag. 1201. For &cnrep âv et, see 1313.

Supplementary Participle 1580. The supplementary participle complétés the idea expressed by the verb, by showing to what its action relates. It may belong to either the subject or the object of the verb, and agree with it in case. E.g. iravopkv

cre

Xeyovra We Stop you from Speaking, iravôpeda \eyovres

speaking.

We Cease

1581. This participle has many points of resemblance to the infinitive in similar constructions. In the use of the participle (as in that of the

infinitive)

must distinguish between indirect discourse (where each

tense préserves

its force) and other constructions. Participle

not in

Indirect Discourse

supplementary participle is used with verbs signifying to begin, to continue, to endure, to persevere, to cease, to repent, 1582. The

GREEK GRAMMAR

334

to be pleased, displeased, or ashamed ; and with the object of verbs signifying to permit or to cause to cease. E.g. vpx°v xa.xeir alpccp I was the first to be angry, II. 2,378; ovk àvk^opaL çooaa. I to be weary,

E. Hipp. 354 ; è-n-rà ypipas paxopepoi ôuTeXeaap they continued fighting seven days, X. An. 4, 3, 2 ; TipœpepoL xaîpoucrt^ they delight in being honored, E. Hipp. 8 ; èXeyxopepoi qxOopTo they were displeased at being put to the proof, X. M. 1, 2, 47 ; tovto ovk aiaxvpopai. Xéycov I say this without shame (see 1583), X. C. 5, 1, 21 ; r-qv 4>i\ooo4>tav iravaov ravra Xéyovoap make Philosophy stop talking in this style, Plat. shall not endure my life,

G. 482

1583. Some of these verbs also take the infinitive, but generally with some différence of meaning; e.g. aio-xwerai tovto xeyeip he is ashamed to

say this (and does not say it), —see 1582 ; àiroKâp.pei tovto -Koieip he ceases to do this, through weariness, but àirokàppei tovto -kolûp he is weary of doing

this.

\kyen> he begins to speak, but apxeTai. Xeyœp he begins by he is at the beginning of his speech; -wavu ae pâxeadaL I prey ou from fighting, but navw <re paxopepop I stop you while fighting. So

apxerai

speaking vent

1584. The participle may be used with verbs signifying to perceive, to find, or to represent, denoting an act or state in which the object is perceived, found, or represented. E.g.

hiding your hand, E. Hec. 342 ; qKovaà aov speak', kàp àKovqTé pov àiroXoyovp'epov if you hear me making my defence, Plat. Ap. 17 c; qvpe KpopLôqp iiTep qpepop a\\œp he found the son of Cronos sitting apartfrom the others, II. 1,498 ; /3aoiXéas ireiroLqKe tovs h> "AiSov rifiupovpépovs he has represented kings in Hades as suffering punishment, Plat. G. 525 d.

opco cre KpvirTOPTa. xe'Pa

see y ou

XkyoPTos I heard you

1585. This must not be confounded with indirect discourse, in which ôp<S

would mean I see that you are hiding, ùkovu> ae \kyopra I for I hear you speaking the genitive is used (1103) : XéyoPTOs. See 1590.

cre kpvirtopta

hear that you say ; olkovu) aov

1586. The participles /3ov\6pepos wishing, qôôpepos pleased, -Kpoa&exop-tpos cxpecting, and some others, may agree in case with a dative which dé¬ pends on eipt, yLypopcu, or some similar verb. E.g. tû> wXrjdeL ov PovXop.épw fjp it was not pleasing to the people (it was not to their liking), Thuc. 2, 3 ; irpoaôexopépcv pot. rà tt)s àpyrjs vpœp es èpè yeyepqTai I have been expecting the manifestations of your wrath against me (i.e. they have corne as I expected), Thuc. 2, 60. Cf. 1165. 1587. With verbs to allow

signifying to overlook

eiveîbov, sometimes elbov), the participle which

or see,

in the

sense

let happen (xepLopœ and èfiopoo, with ireptelbov and

may be used in a sense approaches that of the object infinitive, the présent and

THE PARTICIPLE

335

aorist

participas differing merely as the présent and aorist infinitives would differ in similar constructions. E.g. py irepdbwpev v fi pcad eta av Tyv AaKeôaipova Kal Kar aef) povqO eîa av let US not allow Lacedaemon to be insulted and despised, Isoc. 6, 108; py p' iôelv Oavôvd' ùir' à<ttûv not to see me killed by citizens, E. Or. 746 ; irepuôeZv ryv yyv tpyd eZa av to let the land be ravaged, i.e. to look on and see it ravaged, Thuc. 2, 18; but in 2, 20 we have irepubeZv ryv yrjv t pyOijv aL to permit the land to be ravaged, referring to the same thing from another point of view, Tpydyvai being strictly future to ttepuôeZv, while TpyOeZaav is coincident with it. The infinitive is generally preferred in Hdt. and Thuc.

1588. The participle with Xavdâvœ escape the notice of, rvyxhvo> happen, and <fdàvoo anticipate, contains the leading idea of the expression and is usually translated by a verb. The aorist parti¬ ciple here coincides in time with the verb (unless this expresses duration) and does not dénoté past time in itself. See 1291. E.g.

4>ovéa

tov 7rai5ôs èXâvdave (36akœv he was unconsciously supporting the slayer of his son, Hdt. 1, 44; ervxov nadripevos èvravda I happened to be sitting there, Plat. Euthyd. 272 e; avrol cjjdyaovtai. tovto 8p àaavr es they will do this themselves first (—tovto ôpàaovcri. nporepoi), Plat. Rep. 375 c; roùs 8' ë\ad' eiaeXdœv and he entered unnoticed by them (—eiariXde Xàdpa), II. 24, 477; ë4>dyaav iroXXw tov s Ilkpaas àir lkopevoi they arrived long before the Persians, Hdt. 4,136; tovs âvdpcoirovs Xrjaopev kir lit ecr ovt es we shall rush in unnoticed by the men, X. An. 7, 3, 43 ; âXXa Te iroXXà XavdàveL nal aù Tovpov ev ovôevl iroLovpevos there are many things that people don't see, and among them, that you hold my interest of no importance, Libanius Epist. 98 ; here Xavdàveis (understood) is contrasted with a preceding

e'i

yôeaav.

The perfect

participle here has its ordinary force. With Tvyxàvœ the présent participle &v is sometimes omitted (cf. 1573). 1589. The participle with StareXéw continue (1582), olxopai be gone (1256), 6apiÇw be wont or be fréquent, and some others, expresses the lead¬ ing idea; e.g. o'ix^ai 4>evywv he has taken flight, Ar. Pl. 933; ov dapLÇeis kata(3aivcov eis tov Ileipcuâ y ou don't come down to the Peiraeus very often, Plat. Rep. 328 c. So with the Homeric firj and e/3av or fiâv from (3aLvw ; e.g. /3rj 4>evywv he took flight, II. 2, ,665; so 2,167. The aorist participle, if used here, does not dénoté antécédent time (1291). Participle

Indirect Discourse

1590. With many verbs the course,

participle stands in indirect dis¬ each tense representing the corresponding tense of a

finite mood.

GREEK GRAMMAR

336

Such verbs are chiefly those signifying to see, to hear or learn, perceive, to know, to be ignorant of, to remember, to forget, to show, to appear, to prove, to acknowledge, and àyyeXXw announce. E.g. ôpS) ôé p' epyov Seivov 'e^eipy a a pkvrjv but I see that I have done a dreadful deed, S. Tr. 706; r/kovae Kvpov kv KlXlkLo. ovto. he heard that Cyrus was in Cilicia (cf. 1585), X. An. 1, 4, 5 ; brav K\vy fjÇovr' 'Opkar-qv when she to

will corne, S. El. 293 ; olôa ovôkv kir l<jt âpevos I know nothing; ovk fjôeaav avrov r edvrik.br a they did not know that he was dead, X. An. 1, 10, 16; kirelôàv yvwaiv àmarovpevol after they find out that they are distrusted, X. C. 7, 2, 17 ; pep.vrip.ai k\9wv I remember that I went', pkpvrjpai. avrov kXdôvra I remember that he went) ôeLÇu) tovtov 'exdpov ovra I shall show that this man is an enemy (passive ovros ôeLxSv<rerai. or (fravriaeraL 'exdpos &v) ; aurai Kvpov kirlcttparevovra irpcoTos yyyeiXa I was the first to report to him that Cyrus was marching against him, X. An. 2, 3,19. hears that Orestes

that I understand

See 1509 and 1593; also 1308 for examples of the participle with âv representing both indicative and optative with âv.

1591.

ArjXôs ei/jLL and cpavepôs eipt take the participle

direct discourse, where we use an

ôrjXos rjv oiopevos it was évident ôijXov rjv otl o'lolto). Cf. 1531.

in in¬

impersonal construction;

e.g.

that he thought, X. An. 2, 5, 27 (like

or ovyyiyvœoicœ and a dative of the reflexive, a be in either the nominative or the dative; e.g. awoiôa epavrâi r]ôi.Kr]péva> or i)8int]pevos I am conscious that I have been wronged; èpavrû Çwyôr] ovôèv kirl<ttapevu> I felt sure that I understood nothing, Plat. Ap. 22 c. But if the dative is not a reflexive, the participle is in the dative only ; e.g. ÇwLoaoi MeXi^rw pkv \pevôopkvtp, kpol 5k àXrjdevovri they know as well as Meletus does that he is lying, but (know as well as I do) that I am telling the truth, Plat. Ap. 34 b.

1592. With avvoLôa

participle

may

1593. Most of the verbs may

also take

1594.

included in 1590 (especially àyyeXXœ)

clause with

otl or

côs in indirect discourse.

Some of these verbs have the infinitive of indirect discourse

in nearly or quite the same sense as the participle. Others have the in¬ finitive in a différent sense: e.g. 4>aLverai. crocfros &>v generally means it is

plain that he is wise, and 4>atverai ao4>6s elvai he seems to be wise; but sometimes this distinction is not observed. Here, as in 1591, the Greek prefers the personal to the impersonal construction. Cf. 1583. b. Others, again, may be used in a peculiar sense, in which they have the infinitive not in indirect discourse. E.g. olôa and kirLorapac regularly have this infinitive when they mean know how; e.g. olôa rovro irotrjaaL I know how to do this (but olôa rovro ir o l g a a s I know that I did this). Mavdàvw,

VERBAL ADJECTIVES

337

pëpvqpai, and èiri\avOâi>o/j.ai, in the

sense of learn, remember, or forget to do anything, take the regular object infinitive. See also the uses of ylyvùanu,

beLuvvpi, hrfkù, 4>aivo/xaL, and etiplantô in the Lexicon. 1595. course

dis

'fis may be used with the

in the

nrjKér'

ovra

For the

sense

kéïvov kv

participle of indirect dis¬ explained in 1576. E.g. (jiàei voei think of him as no longer living, S. Ph. 415.

négative, see 1617. ArfXos fjv KDpos dis oirevbwv Cyrus was evidently hurrying, X. An. 1, 5, 9. Thus an ordinary circumstantial parti¬ ciple may sometimes be rendered as in indirect discourse; e.g. r-qv

irpôcjjaaLP kiroieÎTo dis Iliotôas (3ovXôpevos h((3a\etv he made the wanted to drive out the Pisidians, X. An. 1, 2,1 ; vvv de itÙttote

ÔLavoqdrjvat dis 4>avepàv

lieve that he

ever once

Lys. 32, 23.

excuse pot.

that he

ooneï ovôe-

KaraoTqoojv rqv ovoLav but as it is, I do not bethought of converting the property into real estate,

b. The

genitive absolute with ùs is sometimes found where we should expect the participle to agree with the object of the verb ; e.g. dis iroXépov 'ôvtos irap' vpùv àirayyeXù ; shall I announce from y ou that there is war? (lit. assuming that there is war, shall I announce it from you?), X. An. 2,1, 21, where we might have ir oXepov ovra with less emphasis and in cl oser con¬

—

nection with the verb. So dis ùô' 'exôvr œi> tùj>5' èirio-Taadai ae XPV y OU must understand that this is so (lit. believing this to be so, you must understand

it), S. A;. 281. Cf. 1570 6.

Verbal Adjectives

-réos and

-tœv

1596. The verbal in -réos has both a personal and an impersonal construction ; the impersonal is more common. The négative is

always

ov.

personal construction it is passive in sense, and necessity, like the Latin participle in - dus, agreeing with the subject. E.g. 1597. In the

expresses

ù<j>e\7)Teâ (fem.)

crot 17

7r6Ais êoriV you must benefit the state, X. M. 3, 6, 3 ; (ë^rj) he said that other (ships) must be sent

aAÀas perairepirreas elvai

for, Thuc. 6, 25. 1598. The

noun

denoting the agent is here in the dative (1174 b)•

This construction is of

1599. In the

course

confined to transitive verbs.

impersonal construction the verbal is in the neuter singular (sometimes plural), with karL expressed or understood. The expression is équivalent to 5eï (one) must, with the infinitive. It is practically active in sense, and allows transitive verbals to have an object like their verbs. of

the nominative

338

GREEK GRAMMAR

is generally expressed by the dative, sometimes by E.g.

The agent

the accusative.

yplv (or y pas) iroLyrkov kartv we must do this (équivalent to ravra ypâs ôel Troirjaai) ; oiaréov râôe we must bear these things (se. yplv), E. Or. 769; ri avT<2 iroiriTtov elg; what would he be obliged to do? (=tL àv ôkoL avrôv woirjirai, X. M. 1. 7, 2 (1600) ; k\py4>L<Javro iroXepyrka (neut.

ravra

plur. 888 b) eïvai they voted that they must go to war (= ôelv iroXepeïv), Thuc. 1, 88 ; fvppaxoL, oûs ov irapaôorka rots ' AOyvaioLS kariv allies, whom we must not abandon to the Athenians, Thuc. 1, 86.

1600. Though the verbal in -r'eov allows both the dative and the accusa-' équivalent ôeî with the infinitive allows only

tive of the agent (1174), the the accusative (1162).

INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES

interrogative

1601. Ail

pronominal adjectives, and The relative 6<jtts (rarely os) and the relative pronominal adjectives (408) may be used in indirect questions. E.g. adverbs

t'l

pronouns,

be used in both direct and indirect questions.

can

XkyeL; what does he say?

irore fjXdev; when did he corne? Trôcra elôes; how see? ypovro tL Xéyot (or 6 tl Xéyot) they asked what he said; ripovTo irore (or àirore) fjXdev they asked when he came (or had corne) ; ôpâ.s rjpcis ôcroL kapkv; do you see how many of us there are? Plat. Rep. 327 c.

many

did

you

Prolepsis (anticipation of the subject of the dépendent clause) is very in the last example ; olôâ ae t'ls eï "I know thee who thou art."

common, as

1602. The Greek, unlike the English, freely interrogatives with the same verb. E.g.

uses

two

or more

î) t'lctl tL àiroÔLÔovaa rkxvii ÔLKaLoavvij àv kclXoîto; Justice might be called the

art which renders what to what? Plat. Rep. 332 d. See the five inter¬ rogatives (used for comic effect) in Dem. 4, 36: irpooibev ëKaaros ris Xopyyos, irore Kal irapà tov kclI t'l Xa(3ôvra t'l 5eZ iroLeïv, meaning everybody knows who the choregus is to be, what he is to get, when and from whom he is to get it, and what he is to do with it. .

1603. An interrogative word often

belongs to

subordinate part of

the sentence, and is not, as in English, attached to the main verb ; e.g. riva irore fvxyv ex^ov à£ïoî tolclvt-q yveopy xpv<rdal; what heart could he possibly have that he thought it right to adopt such a policy ? Lys. 32,12. The participle is causal. Cf. the first sentence in 1602. Ilcis

pe <f>ys dra^detpeLV rovs veurkpovs; men? Plat. Ap. 26 b; kyù ovv tov U irotas irôXetos aTparyyov irpoaboKW ravra irpà^eev; from what dty do I expect the général to be who is to do this? X. An. 3,1,14.

how,

say you,

do I corrupt the

young

INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES

339

1604. An interrogative sometimes stands as a predicate with a dé¬ monstrative ; e.g. tl tovto 'éXeÇas ; what is this that you said? (= eXe£as tovto, t'l ôv; lit. you said this, heing what?) ; rivas rovaô' daopâ>; who are these that Isee? E. Or. 1347. 1605. The

principal direct interrogative particles are àpa and y. imply nothing as to the answer expected ; but àpa ov im¬ plies an affirmative and apa py a négative answer. Où and py are These

used alone with the same force as with àpa, py suggesting the impossibility of the thing questioned. So pûv (for py ovv) implies a négative answer; and ovkovv therefore (with no négative force) implies an affirmative answer. E.g.

fi axoXr/ 'éarai. ; wïll there he leisure ? àp' doi

TLves a£ioi ; are there any deserving (3ovXeode kXOeïv ; or ov fiovXeode kXfJdv ; do you not wish to go (i.e. you wish, do you not)? àpa pp fiovXeode 'eXOeîv; or pp (or poôv) fiovXeode èXdeîv; do you wish to go (you don't wish to go, do you) ? ovkovv vol Soicel avpcfjopov elvai ; does it seem to you to be of advantage? X. C. 2,4, 15. This distinction between ov and prj does not apply to questions with the interrogative subjunctive (1367), which allow

ones? àp'

only

1606. "A XXo

aXXo tl;

pp.

fj ; is it any thing else than? or (more frequently) is it not? is used as a direct interrogative, expecting an

affirmative

answer.

E.g.

i) ôpoXoyovpev ; do we not agree? (do we do any thing else than agreel), Plat. g. 470 b ; aXXo tl ovv 8vo raOra 'èXeyes; did you note ail these " two" ?

âXXo

ibid. 495

1607. Indirect

in Homer by

questions E.g.

may

be introduced by eî whether

;

and

y or et.

d (3ovXolto kXdeîv I asked whether he wished to go ; cpxero irevaôpevos er' e'tps he was gone to inquire whether you were still living, Od. 13, 415 ; rà 6/C7Tcopara ovk olôa ei tovtlo 5û> (1505) I do not know whether I am

ppcotpoa

p 7rov

(or simply whether) to give him the cups, X. C. 8, 4,16. Here ei is used with the subjunctive : see 1506.

even

1608. Alternative questions (both direct and indirect) may be introduced by irÔTepov (7rôrepa) y whether or. Indirect alternative questions can also be introduced by et . y or e'tre e'tre whether or. Homer has y (ye) . . . y (ye) in direct, and .

(ye)

...

èâs

(ye) in indirect, alternatives,

—

never Trorepop.

E.g.

fj âXXov kaotarps; do you permit him to rule, or do you appoint another? X. C. 3, 1, 12 ; ê/3ovXevero d TrépwoLév TLvas p iràvTts 'ioLev

trorepov

was

apxelv

deliberating whether they should send

An. 1, 10, 5.

some or

should ail

go,

GREEK GRAMMAR

340

NEGATIVES

négative adverbs, où and pi]. What generally applies to its compounds, —

1609. The Greek has two

is said of each of these

ovôeLs, oiib'e,

oure,

etc., and prjôeis, ppb'e, ppre, etc. the indicative and optative in ail inde-

1610. Où is used with

pendent sentences, except wishes ; also in indirect discourse after oti and œs, in causal sentences, and in dépendent clauses of resuit. 1611. In indirect questions, introduced by ei whether, pq can be used as well as où; e.g. /3ov~k6pevos 'epeaOai ei padtiv ris tl ixep.vqp.evos pq oiôev WÎshing to ask whether one who

has learnt

thing and remembers it does not know it,

Plat. Th. 163 d. In the second part of an

(1608) both où and

look and

see

are

allowed;

whether it suits

ireipâo-opcu padeîv but I

indirect alternative question let us

e.g. anoirtipev ei qpïv irpéiret, q oïl or not, Plat. Rep. 451 d; ei ôè âXqdès

q pq,

wïll try to learn whether it is true or not, ibid. 339 a.

1612. The adherescent (or privative) où adhères closely to the following word, practically forming a compound with négative meaning ; e.g. ovk e'La vireUeLv he would not let them yield, Thuc. 1, 127 ; oùk 'é4>q i'evai he refused to go, X. An. 1, 3, 8. Thus où may occur even in protasis, 1394 b. 1613. M-q is used with the subjunctive and imperative in ail constructions, except with the Homeric subjunctive (1364), which has the force of a future indicative. M17 is used in ail final and

object clauses with t'va, chrcos, etc. and the subjunctive, optative, and indicative ; except after pi] lest, which takes où. It is used in ail conditional and conditional relative clauses, and in the corre¬ spondis temporal sentences after ecos, irplv, etc., in relative sen¬ tences expressing a purpose (1454), and in ail expressions of a wish with both indicative and optative (1355, 1359). For causal relative clauses with pq (also conditional), see 1462. For ei où

occasionally used in protasis,

see

1394 b.

is used with the infinitive in ail constructions, both with and without the article, except in indirect discourse. The infinitive in indirect discourse regularly has où, to retain the néga¬ tive of the direct discourse; but some exceptions occur (1511). For tiare où with the infinitive, see 1468. For pq with the infinitive after verbs of hoping, promising, swearing, etc., see 1511. 1614. M17

participle expresses a condition (1566 e) it takes when it is équivalent to a conditional relative clause, e.g. pi] (3ov\ôpepoi any who do not wish ; and when the participle

1615. When

pi] ol

; so

NEGATIVES dénotés

341

character, assigning the subject to

a général class (the Xevaaœv he who cannot see, S. Tr. 829. Otherwise the participle takes où. In indirect discourse it sometimes, like the infinitive, takes pp irregularly (1511).

generic pp), e.g. ô

1616. Adjectives follow the same principle as participles, taking pp only when they do not refer to definite persons or things (i.e. when they can be expressed by a relative clause with an indefinite antécédent).

E.g. oi ol

àyaOoi ttoXîtcli is (any) citizens who are not good (generic pp), but àyadol 7roXîrat means spécial citizens who are not good ; ovros kbonei 7rporepov 7roXXà pôp àXpOevaac roiavra, rà ovra cbs ovra /cal rà pp ovra cbs pp

ovk

Kal

he had the réputation of having spoken the truth in many similar instances (1049) before this, (reporting) things that were so as being so, and things that were not so as being not so ovk ovra

non-facts

were

(or that facts

not), X. An. 4, 4, 15.

were

facts and

1617. Participles or adjectives connected with a protasis, a command, infinitive which would be negatived by un, generally take pp ; e.g. KeXevec ptïvai è-n-l tov irorapod /xt) ôiafiâpras he orders them to hait by the river or an

without crossing, X. An. 4, 3, 28.

1618. When verbs which contain a négative idea (as those of hindering, forbidding, denying, concealing, and distrusting) take the infinitive, pp can be added to the infinitive to strengthen the négation. Such a négative cannot be translated in English, and can be omitted in Greek. For examples see 1552-1554. 1619. An infinitive which would regularly be negatived by pp, either in the ordinary way (1614) or to strengthen a preceding

négation (1618), generally takes the double négative on which it dépends itself has a négative.

verb

où if the

Thus sckalôp kcttl prj tovtov à/fielvat, it is just not to acquit him, if we négative the leading verb, generally becomes ov SUacop kan prj ov tovtov à4>eivai it is not just not to acquit him. ÔLKaioo-vvp since (as you said) it

ovx

o<nov ooi

ôv

pr) ov

/3o^deïv

failure in piety for you not to vindicate justice, Plat. Rep. 427 e. Here the subordinate négative must be translated (cf. 1556), the context determining the sense. But with the verbs of 1618 ph or pp ov are not translated, i.e. e'Lpyei ae pp tovto Troiéîv (1553) he prevents youfrom doing this becomes, with e'Lpyei negatived, ovk e'Lpyei ce pp où tovto iroieiv he does not prevent you from doing this ; ovôkv aùroùs kircXveTat. p pX/da to pp oùxl àyavaKTeïv rfj irapovap tvxv their âge does not at, ail prevent them from being upset by their impending fate, Plat. Crito 43 c. was a

GREEK GRAMMAR

342

a. Mi) où is used also when the leading verb is interrogative imnégative ; e.g. tL èpiroSùv py oùxl ùfipiÇopkvovs àirodaveïv; what is there to prevent (us) from being put to death with insuit? X. An. 3, 1, 13. b. It is sometimes used with participles, or even nouns, to express an exception to a négative (or implied négative) statement ; e.g. 7rôXets xaXeiral \a(3eîp, /xi) où ttoXlopklçl cities hard (i.e. not easy) to capture, except by siege, Dem. 19, 123. For the synizesis of py où see 54 a.

1620.

plying

1621. When a négative is foliowed by a simple négative (ou or ^17) in the same clause, each retains its own force. If they belong

word

to the same

expression, they make

affirmative ; but if

they belong to différent words, each is independent of the other. Hereoû and /n) may frequently be translated/az7 to, refuse to. E.g. où5è tov <\>opplwva oùx ôpâ nor does he fait to see Phormio (i.e. he sees Phormio well enough), Dem. 36, 46 ; où 8d àireLptav ye où </>i)<rets 'éxeLV ° rt eÏTrys it is surely not through inexpérience that you will deny that you bave anything to say, Dem. 19, 120; et p.y npo^evov oùx ù-ireSk^avro if they had not refused to receive Proxenus (had not not-received him), Dem. 19, 74. So /ti) oùv ôtà raOra prj ôôtco 8Lk7]v do not then on this account let him escape punishment (do not let him fail to be punished) Dem. 19, 77 ; oùôè .

Xa/i/3âfwf ôca\éyop.ai, p.i) Xap^àvwv 8' ov and I do not converse (with a man) if I get money (for it), but refuse to converse if I don't, Plat. Ap. 33 a. See 1612.

xpvuaTa

1622. But when a

négative is followed by

(or by several eompound négatives) in

tion is

strengthened. E.g.

the

eompound négative

same

clause, the néga¬

ets oùSev oùSevos <xv ypCiv oùôéxore y'tvono â^tos UO One of US (in that case) would ever corne to be of any value for anything, Plat. Ph. 19 b ; tierre pt^8eirccTroTé poi p^Sk irpos iva pr]8èv 'éyn\r)pa yevkaôai SO that there has never arisen against me any ground of complaint whatsoever on the part of a single solitary person (1223 c), Lys. 16,10. But when ou (ap' où) introduces a question (1605), the négative following retains its own force; e.g. où vvv 'eneivoi iraiôpei'oi, KeuroùpevoL, ùfipt.Ç'ôpevoi, où8è àiroOaveïv ol rXrjpoves SùvoLVTai is it not now true that those poor wretches, beaten, goaded, and insulted, are unable even to die? X. An. 3, 1, 29.

où8eis

For the double

oùx Ô7rcos,

py oirœs,

négative où 1519.

see

py,

see

1369 and 1370. For oùx

oti, py on,

PART V VERSIFICATION RHYTHM AND METRE 1623. Greek verse, being developed in intimate connection with music, is regulated by the quantity of syllables, not by the accent of words, which in Greek was marked by différences in pitch, not stress (127). Sometimes word-accent seems to correspond with metre, e.g. "Op Twôapîs 7rats ijô' àivôvTa Kevorcufreî

> \J > \J KJ \J\J\J ± (E. Hel. 1546) but in général we may disregard accent, and understand that Greek verse consists in the combination of syllables of differing —

—

quantifies. This is rhythm (pvdpôs regular movement or order). In forms of verse the number of syllables is not fixed.

some

1624. It is

the

length of

regard a long syllable as having twice short, especially in pure anapaestic or dactylic

common

but it was observed in ancient times that this is not althe case. Not ail long syllables are of the same length, and short syllables are not ail equally short. verse;

ways

1625. Although in English poetry the rhythm dépends on the regular succession of accented and unaccented syllables and, except in blank verse, is also marked by rime, in Greek poetry rhythm dépends on measures (perpa), or the proper combinations of longs and shorts. There is no rime, in the modéra sense. The elements composing measures are called feet. Thus, in the trochaic verse ^rjaopev

irpos tous crrpaTrjyovs

have two measures, each composed of two trochaic feet.

the rhythm compare the English

Far from môrtal câres retreâting. 343

For

GREEK GRAMMAR

344

distinguished from the The part of (déais setting, down-beat), and the rest of the foot is called the arsis (àpais raising, up-beat). The regular alternation of thesis and arsis in suc¬ 1626. In each foot one

part is inevitably

other by a stress of voice, called the ictus (stroke). the foot on which the ictus falls is called the thesis

the rhythm of the verse. and déais, as they were used by nearly ail the Greek writers on rhythm, referred to the raising and putting down of the foot in marching, dancing, or beating time, so that déais denoted the part of the foot on which the ictus fell, and âpa is the lighter part. Most of the Roman writers, however, inverted this use, and referred arsis to the raising of the voice and thesis to the lowering of the voice in reading. Much confusion has arisen from the Roman inversion of the terms. As to ictus, although it plays no part in the théories of rhythm and foot advanced by Greek metricians, it is difficult, if not impossible, for a modem reader to render a Greek verse without it. It has, of course, nothing to do with the written word-accent (1623). 1627. The change from metrical to accentuai rhythm can best be seen in modem Greek poetry, in which, even when the forms of the ancient language are retained, the rhythm is generally accentuai, and quantitative metre is no more regarded than it is in English poetry. These are the first two verses in a modem translation of the Odyssey :

cessive feet produces a.

The terms

^àXXe

ap<m

tov

Tottovs The

original

verses are :

| iroXXà

If the former verses set our teeth on edge, it is only through force of acquired habit ; for these verses have much more of the nature of modem poetry than the Homeric originals, and their rhythm is precisely what we are accustomed to in English verse, where Still stands the

is dactylic,

and And the

ol|ive of

peace

| spreads its branch|es abroad

anapaestic. Feet 1628.

The unit of

measure

in Greek verse is the short

(w), which for convenience may be given the value of eighth note in music. This is called a time or mora.

syllable

or an

The long

MEASURES IN VERSE

syllable (_) has generally twice the length of

has the value of

quarter note

345 a

short one, and 1624.

J in music. See

b. But a long syllable sometimes has the length of three called a triseme (l_), and sometimes that of four

tetraseme

shorts, and is shorts, and is called a (l_j). The triseme has roughly the value of J. in music, and the

tetraseme that of

1629. Feet

; see 1634. Greek musical notation lacked the bar.

distinguished according to the number of times which they contain. The most common feet are the following : are

Of Three Times

Trochee

paive

Iambus

€</>7?y

Tribrach

AéyÉre

J /

///

b. Of Four Times

Dactyl u

(paLvere

Anapaest

creftofiaL

Spondee

eiirwv

Proceleusmatic

Cretic

Paeon quartus

w w

Bacchïus

(paLveTG)

—

'enTpeirere

\J \J

—

KaraXéyœ

—

àpeyyqs

Antibacchïus

4>aivr]Te

d. Of Si

Ionic

maiore

Ionic

minore

irpocnbeaOai

\J w

—

Antispast

w \J

knTpeiropai

—

TaXalirœpa

Molossus e. The pyrrhic, or For the dochmius,

(3ov\evœv w

u,is

n n

never w

J /J

J./Jl n /j /j j j j /

Times é/cXet7rere

\j w

Choriambus

fipécpos

Of Five Times

—

Paeon primus

erc

j n n j j j

j j n n j j j n j

■N \;

j j j

counted as a foot. 1683. For the epitrite,

see

1689.

GREEK GRAMMAR

346

time (a), in which the thesis is twice as long as the double class (yévos ÔL-n-Xacnov), as opposed to those in

1630. The feet in f

the arsis, form

length, and which

| time (b), in which the thesis and arsis are of equal form the equal class (yévos taov). Where the ratio of thesis to arsis is as 3 to 2, as in the feet of five times, the foot belongs to the yévos rj/xiôXLov.

falls naturally on a long syllable, but it someshort. The first syllable of the trochee and the

1631. The ictus

times falls on a

dactyl, and the last

syllable of the iambus and the anapaest,

thesis, the remainder of the foot being the arsis ; e.g. j- w, j- w w, w -a, ^ .l. 1632. When a long syllable in the thesis is resolved into two short syllables (1633), the ictus properly belongs on the two taken together, but in reading it is usually placed on the first. Thus a tribrach used for a trochee (_L w) is one used for an iambus (w JL) is www. Likewise a spondee used for a dactyl is _L ; one used for an anapaest is L. So a dactyl used for an anapaest (_ w w for for w w _) is w. The only use of the tribrach and the chief use of the spondee are (as above) to represent other feet which hâve their thesis naturally

therefore, form the

—

marked by a long

syllable.

Resolution and Contraction — Irrational Syllaba Anceps

Time —

long syllable, being ordinarily the metrical équivalent (1628), is often resolved into these; as when a tribrach www stands for a trochee w or an iambus w _. On the other hand, two short syllables are often contracted into one 1633. A

of two short ones

long syllable ; as when a spondee stands for a dactyl \J \J or an anapaest w w _. The mark for a long resolved into two shorts is ^ ; that for two shorts contracted into one long is oo. 1634. A

If this

syllable

occurs

syllables forming the arsis

in the middle of

a verse

may

be omitted.

it is called protraction

(tovti) ; if at the beginning, the verse is said to be acephalous (headless) ; if at the end, the verse is catalectic (/caraXr?/crt/c6s stopping short). A trochee with arsis omitted may be indicated either by a triseme (l_) or by a long mark and a dot (_.). This occurs frequently in syncopated verses. See 1641, 1666 b. 1635. On the other hand, a long syllable may in certain cases take the place of a short syllable. Such a syllable is called irra¬ tional, and is marked > or "w. The foot in which it occurs is also

SYLLABLES AND RHYTHMICAL SERIES called irrational (ttoùs a\oyos). Thus, in dXX' air' èxdpwv (jL

347 w

the apparent spondee which takes the place of the second trochee is called an irrational trochee ; in ôodvcu ôLkt]v (o L \j _) that which takes the place of the first iambus is called an irrational iambus. 1636. A similar

shortening occurs in the so-called cyclic dactyl w) and cyclic anapaest (marked ^ ), which have the time of only three short syllables instead of four. The cyclic dactyl may take the place of a trochee w. The cyclic anapaest takes the place of an iambus w and is found especially in the iambic trimeter of comedy (1659). (marked

—^

1637. The last

syllable of every verse may be common, i.e. it be made long or short to suit the metre, without regard to its usual quantity. It is called syllaba anceps. But the continuous Systems described in 1656, 1668, and 1679 allow this only at

may

the end of the system.

Rhythmical Sériés 1638. A

the

Verse

—

rhythmical sériés is A

same measure.

verse

may

several such united. Thus the

—

Catalexis

—

Pause

continuous succession of feet of consist of one such sériés, or of

verse

7roAÀà rà

5eivà, Kovôkv

àv\\0 pùjivov heivorepov 7réXet \j

—

a First Glyconic (1688 d), -w u|_ v|_u|_, followed by Second Glyconic, Each part forms a sériés, the former ending with the first syllable of àvOpùirov (see above) ; and either sériés might have formed a distinct verse.

consists of

1639. The

verse

must close in such a way as

to be distinctly

marked off from what follows. a.

It must end with the end of

b. It allows the last or

syllable (syllaba anceps) to be either long

short (1637). c. It allows hiatus (38) before a 1640. A

verse

catalectic (1634).

word.

which has

A complété

vowel in the next verse.

unfmished foot at the close is called verse

is called acatalectic.

1641. a. If the omitted syllable or syllables in a catalectic verse are the arsis of the foot (as in trochaic and dactylic verses), their place is

GREEK GRAMMAR

348 filled

A pause of one time, équivalent to a short syllable (^/), (for A, the initial of Xelppa) ; a pause of two times (_) is

a 'pause.

is marked A

marked Â. b. But in catalectic iambic and anapaestic verses the foot is lost, and the place may be filled by prolonging the

arsis of the last preceding thesis (1634) : thus we have w i or w_. as the catalectic form of w ; and v_/ w l_j as that of w w —. See 1666 and 1667. 1642. A verse measured by dipodies (1647) is called brachycatalectic if it wants a complété foot at the end, and hypercatalectic if it has a single syllable beyond its last complété dipody. —

Caesura 1643. a

and

Diaeresis

Caesura {rop-q i.e. cutting) of the foot occurs whenever a foot is finished; e.g. in three cases in the

word ends before

following

verse,

i.e. in the third, fourth, and fifth feet :

7roXXàs

| 8' i(j)dt\fj.ovs i/'Djxàs "Aï|ôt irpot) a\pev.

important only when it coïncides with the (as after l^dipovs). This caesura is a metrical device introduced to vary the rhythm and to facilitate the rendering of verse which was spoken or recited ; it does not occur in b. This becomes

caesura

of the

verse

(called melic, 1650). In some verses, as in the iambic (1660) and the heroic hexameter (1671), it definite principles, but with great freedom.

sung verses

trimeter acatalectic

follows

word coïncides with the end of

a foot, (ôeaLpeaLs division) ; as after the first foot in the line just quoted. Diaeresis becomes important only when it coincides with a natural pause produced by the ending of a rhythmic sériés ; as in the trochaic tetrameter (1653) and the so-called dactylic pentameter (1672).

1644. When the end of

the double division is called diaeresis

1645. The following verse of Aristophanes (Nub. 519) shows the irrational long (1635) in the first, second, and sixth feet; and at the end catalexis and pause (1640, 1641), with syllaba anceps (1637) : ToKyOr}

vr\

—

tov —

Aiôvv-

w w

crov tov

-L-

knQpe- \pavra

rhythmical sériés (1638) ends with the penult of Aibvvaov, consisting measures (dimeter) of eight syllables; the second measure is a choriamb (1686). The en tire verse is " Aeolic," and is called a Eupolidean

of two

tetrameter.

CAESURA —KINDS OF VERSE

349

Verses 1646. Verses

are

called Trochaic, lambic, Dactylic, etc., from

their fundamental foot

(1629).

1647. In most kinds of verse, a monometer consists of one foot, dimeter of two feet, a trimeter, tetrameter, pentameter, or hexameter

three, four, five, or six feet. But in trochaic, iambic, and anapaestic verses, which are measured by dipodies (i.e. pairs of feet), a monometer consists of one dipody (or two feet), a dimeter of four feet, a trimeter of six feet, and a tetrameter of eight feet. of

1648. When trochaic or iambic verses are measured by single feet, they are called tripodies, tetrapodies, hexapodies, etc. (as having three, four, six, etc. feet). Here irrational syllables (1635) seldom occur. See 1658.

1649. Rhythms are divided into ascending and descending rhythms. In ascending rhythms the thesis follows the arsis, as in the iambus and anapaest; in descending rhythms the arsis follows the thesis, as in the trochee and the dactyl.

be spoken or recited; such was the iambic be chanted or delivered in recitative, with or without instrumental accompaniment ; in the former case they are called melodramatic. They may be sung (melic or lyric verse). 1650. Verses may

trimeter.

They

may

1651. The same kind of verse may be used by the line (nara (xtLxov), that is, repeated continuously, as in the heroic hexameter Çéirri) and the iambic trimeter of the drama. Secondly, similar verses may be combined into groups called strophes, of which the simplest is the distich or couplet (1672). Thirdly, in lyric poetry (peXp), which was composed to be sung to music, verses may be combined into strophes of complex rhythmical and metrical struc¬ ture, with antistrophes corresponding to them in form. A strophe and antistrophe may be followed by an epode (after-song) in a différent metre, as in most of the odes of Pindar. The combina-

tion of these three elements is called Trochaic

triad.

Rhythms

verses generally occur in measures of two feet dipodies (1647). The irrational trochee J- > (1635) in the

1652. Trochaic

each,

350

GREEK GRAMMAR

form of

a spondee can stand in the second place of each trochaic dipody except the last, that is, in the even feet (second, fourth, etc.), so that the dipody has the form J- w_V7. An apparent anapaest (w \j > for J~ >) is sometimes used as the équivalent of the irrational trochee. The cyclic dactyl -4^ w (1636) sometimes

stands for the trochee in proper names in both parts of the

dipody, except at the end of the verse. The tribrach (w ^ w) may stand for the trochee (1633) in every foot except the last. Other substitutions for the pure trochee are the triseme iui (1628 b) and long syllable with pause -L A (1641). 1653. The chief trochaic

is the

which the last is

(1638) by G)

d> oocpœra

toi

-L

(2)

Karà cre\rjvr)v >

(3)

verse

which is used by the Une (1651)

consisting of four measures, of catalectic, and divided into two rhythmical sériés diaeresis (1644) after the second dipody. E.g.

tetrameter

^vyyovôv

catalectic,

deâraL, \j

bevpo

ayeiv XPV

cos

irpocrexere.1

vovv

tov

-L

—

prjv

tov

Zv;_>

—

ILvXâôrjv

f3iov w_

-L

ras

■qpepas.

J-

ta.be

tov

ne-

-A

Notice the tribrach in the first place of (2), and the third place of (3), due to a proper name. This verse is familiar in English poetry, e.g. Tell

not in mournful

£wlbpwvta poi.3 >

numbers, life is but

1654. The lame tetrameter (TeTpàpeTpov xcoXôy

cyclic dactyl in the

empty dream.

aKàÇov), called Hipponactean from Hipponax (see 1665), is the preceding verse with the last syllable but one long. E.g. àjiK/uôé^i-los yâp eipi I —

1655. The

trochaic a.

following

| J-

kovx

| _A

are some

à/xaprâ-ha> kôttwv.*

of the

important lyric

verses :

Tripody acatalectic (the ithyphallic) eKTaKelr).5

Ar. Nub. 575.

E. Or. 1535.

ibid. 626.

Hippon. 83.

_A 5

J-TJ

(1648)

Aesch. Pr. 535 (551).

TROCHAIC RHYTHMS b.

Tripody catalectic : os

aùv \lttcov.1

Tetrapody

dimeter acatalectic

TOV

Tetrapody ôewà

Hexapody

/ A

—

| 1

dimeter catalectic :

eïôopev.3 <j>vX\oppoeî.i or

—

vpàypaT

àcnrlôas e.

pèv fjpOS Ciel (Pkacrravei Kal oîino^avTeZ.2 TOVTO

351

—

| A. >|_£_vy

—

trimeter catalectic :

àpirayal ôè ôiaôpopâv 0p.aip.oves.5 -u

—

o'Iwww

—

1656. A sériés of dimeters acatalectic

(1655 c), rarely with

occasional monometer (_ w), and ending in a dimeter cata¬ lectic (1655 d), is called a trochaic system or hypermeter. E.g. pèv irpos àvôpôs èan ëxovros Kai 4>pèvas Kal 7roXXà irepiTreirXevKÔTos.6

radra

—w

vovv

For iambic and 1668 and 1679.

—

anapaestic Systems, formed

See also 1637.

the

| Z u ] / y> |-iu same

principle,

see

following contain examples of syncopated trochaic in which may be written instead of l_ (1634) :

1657. The verses,

vvv

KaraoTpo(f)al

dearpiwv,

vewv

et KpaTrjaei

ôLkô Z

]

| JL

| _A

v_y

Kal (3\â(3à

u i

|Aui

TOvÔe pÔTpOKTOVOV.

ôupârcov yàp elKopàv __L. \j avarpoiras, brav "Apr/s ridacros ùv (pikov ehy.8 \j

\j \j

i—

\j \j sj

i—

Iwww

—

1658. In lyric trochaic and iambic verses, the irrational syllable is

chiefly in comedy, and is avoided in tragedy ; in comedy, moreover, common in lyric or sung trochaic verse than in that which was spoken.

found

it is less

lambic

Rhythms

verses generally occur in measures of two feet dipodies (1647). The irrational iambus > J- (1635) in

1659. lambic

each,

S. Ph. 1215.

4 ibid. 1481.

7 Aesch. Eum. 490 ff.

Ar. Av. 1478, 1479. ibid. 1472.

6 Aesch. Sev. 351 (338).

8 ibid. 354 ff.

6 Ar. R. 534 ff.

352

GREEK GRAMMAR

a spondee can stand in the first place of each iambic dipody, that is, in the odd places (first, third, etc.), so that the dipody has the form xj ± \j An apparent dactyl ( > A w for > J-) is sometimes used as the équivalent of the irrational iambus ; and the cyclic anapaest w (1636) is used for the iambus in both parts of the dipody, except in the last foot, especially by the Attic comedians (1660). The tribrach (w w w) may stand for the iambus in every foot except the last.

the form of

1660. The most

common

of ail iambic

verses

is the

trimeter

acatalectic, in which most of the dialogue of the Attic drama is

composed. It never allows any substitution in the last foot. With exception it may have the tribrach in any place. The irra¬ tional iambus > JL in the form of a spondee can stand in the first place of every dipody. The tragedians allow the (apparent) dactyl >uu only in the first and third places, and the cyclic anapaest only in the first place ; but in proper names they allow the ana¬ paest in every place except the last. The comedians allow the dactyl >w v in ail the odd places, and the cyclic anapaest in every place except the last (1659). The most common caesura is this

that after the arsis of the third foot.

foliowing scheme shows the tragic and the comic compared, — the forms peculiar to comedy being inclosed in [ ]. 1661. The

iambic trimeter

v_y—

WWW

v_/—]

WWW

w—] [w w—]

www

vy-]

From this it is seen that the greater number of équivalents of the pure iambus occur in the first half of the measure. The tribrach occurs in the sec¬ ond half both in tragedy and in comedy ; the anapaest occurs in the second half in comedy, and then only in trimeters which are not sung. In gén¬ éral the tragedians avoid the feet of three syllables, even where they are allowed. 1662. P orson' s Rule. When the tragic trimeter ends in a word forming a cretic (_ w _), this is regularly preceded by a short syllable or by a monosyllable.1 The following line (E. I. T. 580) violâtes this rule: /capot. to 8' ev pa\ierra y' ovrœ ytyverai. 1

R. Porson,

Suppl. ad Praef. ad Hecubam.

IAMBIC RHYTHMS

following

1663. The

353

examples of both the tragic and the

are

comic form of the iambic trimeter

\ rrfhovpov r{\Kop.ev iréôov, es ol\pov, afiarov eis | kprjplâv. "h4>cucrTe, aol \ Sè xpv P-tXeiv | kinaToXas. Aesch. Pt. 1—3. w ZeO /3acrtXeO • | to xpvpa t&v | vvkt&v octov àirepavTov * ov\ôkirod' rjpkpâ | yevqaerai ; àTrôXoLO ôrjr', | w ttoXepe, iroX\Xwt> ovveKa. Ar. Nub. 2, 3, 6.

TrAGIC

xQ°v°s ~2,kv0tiv

COMIC

Pev

1664. The iambic trimeter is a much livelier verse in Greek than in English, where it appears as the Alexandrine, which is seldom used except at the end of a stanza : That lîke a wounded snâke drags its slow léngth along. And hôpe to merlit Heâven by mak)ing Eârth a Hell.

1665. The lame trimeter (<ricâÇop), called the Choliambus and the Hipponactean (see 1654), is the preceding verse with the last syllable but one long. It is said to have been invented by Hipponax (about 540 b.c.), and it is used in the mimes of Herodas (third century b.c.) and the fables of Babrius (second century a.d.?). E.g. aKovaad' 'IirirœvaKTOs ' ov yàp àXX' jjkoj.1 oÏitco tL aoi ôoirjaav al (f>LXai MoOcrat.2 v7 | w -L \j |w_A__ —

—

a. The tetrameter catalectic, consisting of four measof which the last is catalectic, occurs often in Attic comedy. There is a regular diaeresis (1644) after the second dipody, where the first rhythmical sériés ends (1638).

1666.

ures,

eïirep >

English poetry A

6. A

Kal pri ykXcoT > J-

I ôcfrXricrecs.3 \-L

1641 b)

1667. The

syncopated (1634) iambic tetrameter also occurs, Euripideus :

versus

vvv

iambic

JL have \j

câptain bold | of Halifax, || who lîved in coun|try quârters.

protracted

sometimes called

âvôp' I virepfdaXeî,

top

Kal

tov

>^-w_

> J-

following

W L_

are some

Sevpo.

irapaKaXeî

paîov deov

w w

—

w .

—

/ —

of the more important lyric

verses:

Dipody

monometer : tI 8rjd' ôpas;5

Hippon. 47.

Herod. 3, 1.

Ar. Nub. 1035.

Ar. R. 397.

ibid. 1098.

354

GREEK GRAMMAR

Tripody (acatalectic and catalectic)

Dimeter

(acatalectic and catalectic)

| Sopcov efiâv. f7?X<2 ae rfjs \ evfiovXLâs.* kal Xôyov \ tov 777-7-w.5 laXros

ék

Hexapody

| > J|

>Zu

tov

—

(1641 b)

trimeter catalectic : irpéireL ivap-qis cfroiviois àpvypoîs.6 \j \J | > _A w | \j \1_ —

1668. lambic Systems are formed on the same principle as trochaic Systems (1656), of acatalectic dimeters with an occasional monometer, ending with a catalectic dimeter. E.g. vy >-U-l >iu_ —

These verses end a long iambic system in Ar. Nub. 1090-1104; also Nub. 1447-1451, and Eq. 911-940.

see

1669. For the irrational syllable in lyric verse, see 1658.

Dactylic Rhythms 1670. The

only regular substitute for the dactyl is the spondee,

which arises by contraction of the two short syllables of the

dactyl (_L

from JL

1671. The most

w).

common

of ail Greek

verses

is the

heroic

hexameter, the Homeric verse. It has a spondee or trochee in the last place ; and a spondee may occur in any of the first four

places, less commonly in the fifth (the verse being then called spondaic). There is commonly a caesura in the third foot, either after the thesis or (rather more frequently) dividing the arsis. There is sometimes

a caesura after the thesis of the fourth foot, rarely one in the arsis. The caesura after the thesis is called masculine, that in the arsis féminine or trochaic. E.g.

and

1 2

Aesch. Ag. 211. Ar. Nub. 703.

3 Aesch. Ch. 22. 4 Ar. Ach. 1008.

5 Ar. Nub. 1451. 6 Aesch. Ch. 24.

DACTYLIC RHYTHMS avSpa

jioi

'évveire, Movcra, ttoXvt poivov, ôs pàXa 7roXXà

—

355

kj\-L

U|—

trxâyxdv èirei tpoLips iepov irroXiedpov 'érrepaev.1 w w | J| —, W>j|-U w|-Z-vy \j\-L —

—

A diaeresis after the fourth foot is called

thought to be tLitt'

avr

eiiré p.01, —

bucolic, since it in bucolic poetry. E.g.

more common

alyiôxolo Alos

tékos,

was

eiXpXovdas ;2

Kopvôcov, tLvos al f3ôes ; rjpa <î>iXcoi>ôa;3

v^|-aw \j\jL

1672. In the Homeric

—

uil-u

| y.

long vowel or a diphthong in the arsis (not in the thesis) is often shortened at the end of a word when the next word begins with a vowel or a diphthong (35). This sometimes occurs in the middle of a word. E.g. co

ttottoI, |

verse a

pâXa | Sp peTe\/3ovXev\aav deol. | aXXws.4

XpScrécij àli'à aKp\rrTpcp, Kai \ Xlaaero \

'A|x<«o{)s (54).5

iravras

péfiXpcu, ovô' HXlov /SéXos ëK(f>vyei>, ocjreXSv toi.6 pperépw 'evi oÏkÏxi kv "Apyeï, TpXoOi irârppsd

But

1673. When a short vowel stands in Homer where a long one is required by the verse, it may be explained in various ways. a. By supposing X, p., v, p, or a to be doubled at the beginning of cer¬ tain words; e.g. iroXXà Xicraopkvu (JL\j \j-L), II. 22, 91 (we have kXXio-aeTo written in II. 6, 45). See 535, cf. 64. b. By the original presence of p making position (see 3, 102) ; e.g. toîôv foi irvp (_L L _), II. 5, 7. So before ôelôœ fear and other derivatives of the stem S pet, and before Spv (for Sppv). c. By a pause in the verse prolonging the time ; e.g. 4>evyœpev *

For rules

yâp

Kev

-L

relating to quantity

see

àXv^aipev -L L.

fjpap.8

nanov \j \j

J-

119-125.

1674. The elegiac distich consists of

followed by the so-called elegiac pentameter. consists really of two dactylic trimeters with and catalexis in the last IlaXXàs \j

1 2 3

Od. 1, 1 and 2. II. 1, 202. Theocr. 4, 1.

measure ;

heroic hexameter

This latter verse protraction (1634)

e.g.

'A\6pval\p || xetpas v\irep9ev e[x«.9 | JL—|I_J||— w w | w vy | A —

4 Od. 5, 286. 5 II. 1, 15. 6 II. 11, 380.

—

7 II. 1, 30. 8 Od. 10, 269. 9 Solon 4, 4.

GREEK GRAMMAR

356

At the end of the pentameter verse the pause (a) takes the place of protraction (l_i) in the middle. The verse probably arose from the répé¬ tition of the first penthemimer (irevd-ripL-pepés, composed, of five halves) of the hexameter ; i.e. if the part of the hexameter extending to the masculine caesura be repeated (jufjvw aeiôe dea) the resuit is the "pentameter." But syllaba anceps and hiatus are not allowed after the first trimeter, but only at the end of the verse (1639). The last two complété feet are always dactyls. A diaeresis (1644) divides the two parts of the verse. The pentameter used by itself is not common.

1675. The

ris 8è J-

—

1676. The a.

following

—

\J\

are some

—

of the chief lyric dactylic

verses:

Dimeter:

p.V<TTOÔÔ\KOS ÔÔpOS.2 poîpa ôt|w/cet.3 b. Trimeter

JJ-

(acatalectic and catalectic)

irapirpéirTOLS kv eSpaïaiv.4, ivapdevoL | àp/3po</>6|poi.6

Opening with èyeivaTo

Tetrameter irepirei

\J \J \j \j

| J| J-

\J \J

| JL

J.1

-L

kj w

| J- LA

\j \j

|_A

I— A

short syllable : avrû Otôt7rôôâf.6

ptv popov

iraTpoKTovov c.

—

v\ifj\\-L w\JL uu|lÂ

ou|—A

(acatalectic and catalectic)

£ùv ôopl kolÏ

xep<-

—

irpà.KTopt..'1

ovpavi\oLs re 6e\oîs ôojjprçpara.8 eXOer' k\iro\f6p.e\va,i ôwa\p.iv.9

J_ \j

| JL \ J. u| —

\ J- \j \y\ JL

\j \y

—u U

| J| /

\j \j

I—Â

Anapaestic Rhythms Anapaestic verses are generally measured by dipodies (1647). The spondee and the dactyl ( L and ww) may stand for the anapaest (w \j JL). 1677.

The long syllable of an anapaest is sometimes resolved into two short, making w \j \j \j or proceleusmatic (1629 b). 7

Aesch. Ag. 111.

Mimn. 1, 1 and 2.

Aesch. Ag. 117.

Ar. Nub. 303.

Ar. Nub. 299.

Ar. Nub. 305.

E. Heraclid. 612.

Aesch. Sev. 751, 752.

Ar. R. 879.

ANAPAESTIC RHYTHMS 1678. The a.

following

The monometer rpoirov

are

the most

aiyvTriûv.1 aiveiv.2

akyeai iraLâivv

—

\ K\à^ovres "Apr].i | viraroi Xexéow.5

And the c.

b. The dimeter aeatalectic

dùpov

verses:

\j \j

%Vp(f)UI>OS Ô/JLOV.3

anapaestic

common

Kai dé pts

péyav

357

-L

—

w w

ô|live of peâce | sends its brânch|es abroâd.

The dimeter catalectic, or paroemiac :

fjpav <rrpartw|r£.y àpuyrjp.6 ovto)

ir\ovTr)\<JtTe ir âpres.7

{_ \

\j \j

iA |

(1641 b)

| is advânc|ing. Préparé | ye!

The Lôrd

d. The tetrameter catalectic,

consisting of four measures, protracted and catalectic, like the paroemiac. There is a regular diaeresis after the second measure. This verse is frequently used by the line (1651) in long passages of Aristophanes. of which the last is

Trpoakxere rov rots aidepiois,

vovv

ctg

rots

adavârois || r/plv, rois at|èf éovai, rots atpdira pr]\ôopévoLaLP.s

| roïcnv âyqpœs, || |

CJw ^

_L ZXJ

a sériés of anapaestic aeatalectic, with occasionally a monometer, ending always with the paroemiac (or dimeter catalectic). These Systems are very frequently employed in both tragedy and comedy. E.g.

1679. An anapaestic System consists of

dimeters

ôéKarov p.év eros

rôô' éivei Hpiâpov

péyas àvriSLKos,

crrpaTLWTcp 1

—

sj \j kj

-L JL

\j \j \j \j \j

| | | |

\j ^

w \J \j w

\j \j

âpwygv.3

Aesch. Ag. 49.

w v/ sj

MejzéXâos aval; 97Ô' 'Ayapépvœv, Sldpàvov Atodev Kai ÔLcrKriirTpov TÏprjs ôxvpov feOyos 'ArpetSSf, crrokov 'ApyeLuv xi^LOva-vràv rrjab' âirô X^pâs

fjpav,

w ^

-L

4 Aesch. Ag. 48.

ibid. 98.

5 ibid. 50.

Ar. Av. 221.

6 ibid. 47.

\j \j

Iwv^i

7 Ar. Av. 736.

8 ibid. 688. 9 Aesch. Ag. 40-47.

GREEK GRAMMAR

358

1680. Anapaestic Systems are especially common The following rules are to be noted :

in march movements.

a. Except in lyric anapaests, a proceleusmatic is not common, nor a dactyl followed by an anapaest, because a succession of four short syl-

lables

was

avoided.

paroemiac a dactyl occurs only in the first foot ; the third usually has a pure anapaest. c. There is no syllaba anceps or hiatus except at the end of a period. Thus the last syllable of «WiSikos (verse 2 above) is long by position, since it is chanted in close connection with the word Me^éXaos (verse 3). This is called avvàtfreia tying together. b. In

Rhythms with Feet of Five Times of which the forms in use are (_ w w w) and the fourth paeon (w w w _). These are often interchanged with the cretic (_ w _). Trochaic measures are sometimes mingled with them. 1681. The basic foot is the paeon,

the first

ovk

cbs

—

1682. Bacchic

mental foot

—

rhythms have the bacchïus

the funda-

| t'ls 08/j.tl \ irpoGeirrà \ Iw I W | aTevàÇco ; \ ri pé£w; w [ w yt\ûp.aL • | ôviToicrra w | w_M ris âx«, W

—

ttoXitcus w

—

àcfreyyris;2

| 'éiradov.3 I W w X2 Dochmiacs

which

1683. Dochmiac verses,

are

used in tragedy to

express

parody, are based called the dochmius, compounded of an iambus

great excitement and in comedy for the sake of upon a measure 1

Ar. Ach. 299-301.

Aesch. Pr. 115.

Aesch. Eum. 788.

FEET OF FIVE OR SIX TIMES and

359

cretic (or a bacchius and

an iambus) ^ | w (or _). This may appear in nineteen différent forms, by resolving the long syllables and admitting irrational longs in place a

v./

of the two shorts.

Its most

common

examples

ôucraX'yet tvxç-1 irTepoifiôpov ôepas.2 piiaodœv pèv ovv.3 peyàXa peyàXa Kai.4

forms

w w

peroLKelv anoTCc davùv ô rXapcov. p,edelrai arparos, urpaTOirebov Xlttcov.6

J-

Cf. in English : Rebél, serfs, rebél,

and

f —

Z v /

v_y \j

are

be given

may

| Resént

(for *> f (for _L —

_L | JL\

wrongs so

f) ji)

> w

—

J-

dire.

Rhythms with Feet of Six Times 1684.

The ionic rhythm, if ascending (1649), has the arsis

preceding the thesis, w w and is called ionic a minore-, if it is descending, the arsis follows the thesis, w v, and forms the ,

ionic

maiore

ireirépâKev | pev à Trepaé\irToXis f/ôp fiacriXeLos \ arparos e'cs àv\riiTOpov 7eL\rova x^pàv, Xivobeap.(p | ax^diç. Trop\0poi' àpeLxf/às

'Adapavlriôos 'EXXàs.7 w

-L.

—

-L

U-

w-A-

J-.

ipo\evTa (3ûpoi>s I w w b. Trochaic measures are often interspersed with pure ionics, but the double shorts make the character of the rhythm clear. This is called &PXVVT' à7r<x|Xot(r' àp.<j>'

ww!

anaclâsis (avauXacns breaking up). TLS

E.g.

| TTOÔÏ TT7jÔ7j\p(X TOÔ' 6Ûxe]rC0S àvà<T(T<j)V ; 9 | \J \J low-ol — \J — —

— —

composed of prosodiac. E.g.

A dimeter a

acis

—

ionic and

2 3

Aesch. Ag. ibid. 1147. ibid. 1090.

1165.

choriambic measure (1686)

àirTÔpe\vos (paperpâs 10 \j \J I W \J —

—

Ô KpCUTTVCp

\J \J

is called

4 E. Bacch. 1198. 5 E. Hipp. 837. 6 Aesch. Sev. 79.

—

7 Aesch. Pers. 65-70. 8 Sapph. 54.

9 ibid. 95. 10 Ar. Eq. 1272.

GREEK GRAMMAR

360

composed of a choriambic and an ionic measure is called enoplius. It is sometimes catalectic. E.g. fjp ôe cre kclp\kLvos 'eXdùv1

d. A dimeter an

—

\J W

—

(ppovriô' tiri\(ïTap.evr)V 2 w

—

1685.

—

\j KJ

The Anacreontic verse is an ionic dimeter with IToXlot pèv Tfplv \J

-L

anaclasis :

fjOT)

—

XevKÔv ~L Xapiecraa ô' ovuer' U w ^ \J J7râpa, yrjpâXeoL 5' oSôpres

KpôracjyoL kj

Kapr} re

—

-—

yXvKepoî) ô' oû/cért ttoXXôs.3 \j \j

b. With these verses may or

w w

—

be compared the so-called hemiambi,

iambic dimeters catalectic, used in some 'Avaupeuv idœv v-L

ô Tipos

of the Anacreontea :

peXcoôôs

—

A ±14

choriamb (_ ^ w—) is closely related to the iambic (w w— ). Pure choriambs appear in the foliowing

1686. The measure

—

trimeter and tetrameter: iraîSa —

top

\j \J

—

auras

—

Seivà pev ovv, —

W \j

—

ttÔitlv

\J kj

—

aura

—

depévâ.5 W w

—

Seivà Tapàaaec crocpos

—

w W

—

oicovoOeTàs.6 I ww

—

1687. Some variations on the pure choriambic sériés are seen in the following. Resolution, irrational syllables, and protraction may occur :

■jreirX,r)6évcLi.'! I w w (1688 k) àpairéropaL ôfj irpos "OXvpirov irTepvyecrcri /coûtais.8 U \J KJ \J I WW I W W — I Ul

iriveLV âel Kal pedveiP irplv àyopàv V7

—

Ar. Pax 782.

Ar. Eccl. 572.

—

3 Anacr. fr. 43 B. 4 Ps.-Anacr. 1 B.

u \j kj

—

6 Aesch. Sev. 929. 6 S. O. T. 484.

7 Pherecr. 29. 8 Anacr. 24.

FEET OF SIX TIMES

361

1688. The choriamb is an important element in many commonly called "logaoedic." See also 1684 c. E.g. a.

the

Adonic:

avfj.va.xos

'éaao.1

w w

Sapphic strophe (1688 g).

i—I

This is the closing

b. First Pherecratic : èirTairvXoLai. Qrf(3ais.2

Catalectic c.

èiri,Tvpl3(.os.s

—

—.

—

"Epcos àvlkâte pâxàv.10

—

f. Third Glyconic: cf)ôiTa fieLut a iravaayia.9

—

Second Glyconic: Qv(3a rûv irporépoiv </>âos.7 a

—

verse

—

Glyconic: 'L-k-kC avat; noaeibov, <£.6 ôLiraLS toL

\J \J

—

rpépopev Xéyeiv.2,

Second Pherecratic : xatôôs ôvacpopov aravA Catalectic ê/c pev dr/ iroXépcov.5

d. First e.

verses

—

Sapphic hendecasyllable, making with the Adonic (a) the Sapphic strophe : iroïKiXodpov' adàvar' 'A</>po5trâ, —sj w—

w—\j

irai a Los,

—

pi7

g' w

'—X7

ooXottXo/cê, XLaao/ia.l —

aaaiaL

ae,

ol—

—

p7]ô' ovlaïai ôâpva,11 —

—

w w—

W W

—

I— SJ

TTÔTVia, dv/jov. —

h. Alcaic

strophe: àovvéfypL \j

—

tô pev

rœv

àv'epoiv ordaiv.

—

yàp tvdev

\J to

—

Kvpa

• afjp.es

Lesser Asclepiadean :

(three choriambs)

—

f ôv

Sapph. 1, 28. Pind. P. 11, 11.

S. 0. C. 129.

S. Aj. 643.

5 S. Ant. 150. 6 Ar. Eq. 551. 7 S. Ant. 101.

—

p'eaaov vâi 4>oprfpe9a avv

—

tco

ww—I

péXalvq..12 yi—"C7

—\J w—

\j \j

en irepaToiv y a. s

Xâ/3àv

\j—

rfXOes

—

nvXLvSerai

—

ô' evdev \j

I—

\J \J

e\e<f>avTLvav

—

ÇLifieos xpaerodérav 'éxoiv.13

8 Aesch. Ch. 334. 9 S. Ant. 107.

10 ibid. 781.

11 Sapph. 1, 1-4. 12 Alcae. 6, 1-4. 13 Alcae. 36,

GREEK GRAMMAR

362

j. Greater Asclepiadean : prjôèv aXXo 4>UTevor]s irpoTtpov ôévôpiov àpnreXu,1 (four choriambs) _u|_uu_|_uw-l-uo-lok.

Eupolidean :

<£ Oeûpevoi, Karepû irpos ùptâs èXevdépœs.2

PHapean :

àpiorov pev ïiôup, ô ôè xpucôs a'idopevov

w kj

\J KJ

—

irvp.3

—

Dactylo-Epitritic Rhythms odes of Pindar

1689. About half of the

are

called dactylo-epitritic, which consists

measure

composed in a of dactyls, with

équivalent spondees and protracted forms (i i), and epitrites. epitrite was said to be a foot of seven times, in these forms : w w —, \j. The dactylic parts of the verse generally have the form iuu-ow--or (catalectic) -oo-uu-Â. The epitrite also may be catalectic, w Â.

their The

1690. The first strophe of Pindar's third Olympian ode is an example of this measure : TwSaptSais

-L\j

—

4>iXo£e'ivois àôeiv KctX||Xi7rXoKâpcp 9' 'ISiXkvç. -u II \J \J \J \J A

\J \J

'AKpàyavTa yepaLpœv

nXeivav

—

W W

—

|| ciKapavroirobiov 1| —A v_y W w

Qrjpuivos '0\v pur loin Kâi> \ vpvov ôpdœoais, JL\j liriroiv

—

\j \j

aicTOV. \J

Motcra ô' —

—

outoj ttoi

A vtoaïyaXov evpôvri rpôirov —

irapeurâ

—

evxopai,

—

poi

—

KJ \J

Aaiptaj (j)iôvài> 'tvapposai ireôTXw. —

w 1

Alcae. 46.

w 2

— —

Ar. Nub. 518.

Pind. O. 1,

—

APPENDIX CATALOGUE OF VERBS This

catalogue professes to contain ail verbs in ordinary use in classic

Greek which have any such peculiarities as to présent difficulties to a student. No verb is introduced which does not occur in some form before Aristotle ; and no forms are given which are not found in writers earlier than the Alexandrian period, except sometimes the présent indicative of a verb which is classic in other tenses, and occasionally a form which is

given for completeness and marked as later. The forms printed in heavy type (except the lemmata and unless otherwise noted) are those which were in good Attic use, and may be employed by the student in writing Greek prose. The verb stem, with any other important forms of the stem, is given in

parenthèses directly after the présent indicative. The class of each

verb is given by Arabie numéral in parenthèses at the end, unless of the first class (608), or is a contract verb like rïjuâw (634). A hyphen prefixed to a form (e.g. -é<5pâv) indicates that it is found

it is

only

composition. This is omitted, however, if the simple form occurs even in later Greek ; and it is often omitted when the occurrence of cognate forms, or any other reason, makes it probable that the simple form was in use. It would be extremely difficult to point out an example of every tense of even the best English verbs in a writer of established authority within a fixed period. The imperfect or pluperfect is generally omitted when the présent or perfect is given. Second perfects which are given among the principal parts of a verb (463) are not specially designated (see /3Xtbrrw).

(da-, àpa-) injure, infatuate, stem with aor. aaaa (ââaa), àaa ; aor. p. ààaOrjv; près. mid. àârat, aor. àaaày.-t)v erred. Vb. aaros, in compos. â-aaros, avâros. Epie.

d-yàXXw (àya\-) ornament, honor, dyaXw, près, and impf. (2)

Tj-yrjXa; à-ydXXo|j.ai. take pride in,

ci.-yan.ai (àyaa-, àya-) admire, epic fut. àyàa(a)onai, T|-yda0t]v, T|-ya<rd|i.T|V. Hom. also àyâonai admire, Archil. àyaLofxai. envy. Vb. àyaarôs.

à-y-yc'XXft) (âyyeX-) announce, d-y-ycXû [âYYeXéco], ij-y-ytiXa, ^Y-ycXica, îj-y-yïXuai, t|-y-yeX0T]v, fut. p. àyy6X0^jcro|i.ai ; aor. m. 7)yytikaiA-qv ; 2 aor. pass. r/yyéXijv, Att. inscr. (2) 363

GREEK GRAMMAR

364

âycCpu (àyep-) collect, 7]"y€ipa ; epic plpf. p. âyyyéparo ; aor. p. yykpdyv, aor. m. (yyeipâpyv) Çw-ayeLparo, 2 aor. m. àyepôpyv with part, âypopevos. See

yyepédopai.. (2) â."yvvp.i (fay-), in comp. also àyvvw break, a£a>, eSÇa (537) rarely epic y£a, 2 pf. 'éâya, Ion. eyya, 2 aor. p. «ryijv, epic èâyyv or âyyv. (3) a-y« lead, a£«, yÇa. (rare), rjxa> *1y1uu> 1ÏX0T1V> âx0^«rop.ai; 2 aor. TÎ-ya-yov, yya.yop.yv ; fut. m. a^opai (as pass.), Hom. aor. m. âÇâpyv, 2 aor. act. irnv. a£ere, inf. àÇépevcu (654h).

(d8«-) be sated, stem with aor. opt. aôyaet.ev, pf. part, aôyxûs. Epic. (j8« sing, ao-ojxai (ij.au>, rare), fjo-a, f|o-0Tiv. Ion. and poet. detSw, âdau àeiaopat.,

and

yeLaa.

(dt-) rest, stem with aor. decra, âaa. Epic. : Hom. for aùÇco. ar)p.i (ây-, àe-) blow, ayrov, âeîai, inf. àyvai, àypevaL, part, âeis ', impf. âyv. Mid. Q.7JTCLL and âyro, part, àypevos. Poetic, chiefly epic. alSéo|xai, poet. aïSopat. respect, atSeo-opat, T)8€<rp.ai, fjS€a-0i]V (as mid.), yôeaâpyv (chiefly poet., in prose showed mercy), Hom. imv. alôeîo. 596, 597. atvïto praise, alv€<r«, rjveo-a, f|vtKa, ^vT]pai, rivé0T]v, 596, 599. Epic and lyric aivyau, yvyaa. Usually in comp. Prose fut. usually -aiv€(rojjiai. aïw^ax take, impf. aivvpyv. Epic. (3) alpéw (alpe-, è\-) take, mid. choose, alpfjora», rjpijKa, 'gpijp.ai, Hdt. àpaipyna, âpaipypaL, 'np^0T]v, alp£0f)crop.ai ; fut. pf. r]prjo-op,ai (rare) ; 2 aor. ïîXov, <=Xco, etc. ; €Î\<5|at]v, ëXwpeu, etc. (5) aïpw (dp-) take up, apw, r^pa (689), •rçpKa, ^ppai, îip0i]v, ap0fjo-o|j,ai ; ypâp.yv (689). Ion. and poet. delpu (àep-), yeipa, ykpdyv. Hom. plpf. âu>pTo (from yopro) = yepro ; aor. m. àeipàpyv. Fut. àpovpcu. and 2 aor. ypôpyv (with dpcopat (d) etc.) belong to apwpaL (dp-) win. (2) alcr0dvop,cH (aiaQ-, aiade-) perceive, aîo-0fj<rop.ai, i]cr0Tjp,ai ; r|o-06p.t]v. Près. atadopai. (doubtful). (3) alcrx^va) (aicrxvv-) disgrâce, at«rxvv«, rj'crxwva, pf. p. part, epic yaxvppévos, f|orx'ûv0T)v felt ashamed, atcrxvv0'qa-o|iai ; fut. m. altrxwovp.ai. (2) à'trTCi» (àiK-, orig. fcu-fiK-) rush, àt^u>, ï}i.£a, yîxdyv, y'Ojâpyv. Also «yrrto or 4<r«r<o, <j£«, T)Êa- Both rare in prose. (2) dtw hear, imp. âïov, fjïov, aor. -y'iaa or -fjaa. Vb. 'eir-aLaros. Ionic and poetic. d ta breathe out, only impf. âiov. Epic. See âypt. dKaxlÇo) (àx-, àK-ax-, 561, 617) afflict, redupl. près., with âxéw and àxevu> be grieved (only in près. part, âx^v, àxevuv) and dxopat be grieved ; fut. aKaxyaw, aor. ànâxyaa', pf. p. âxâxypo.L (àxyxkôaTaL), âicâxyadai, àxaxypevos Or àxyxkpevos ; 2 aor. yKa.xov, âxaxopyv. See &xwpcu and âxopai. Epic. (2) dKax^vos (à/c-ax-, 561, cf. âx-pov edge) sharpened, epic pf. part, with no présent indicative in use.

déga»

CATALOGUE OF VERBS

365

aice'op,ai (à/ce-, à/cetr-) heal, aor. T]Keo-àpT]v. (2) àKT)8e« (àKTjôe- for â/cTjôecr-) neglect, aor. àicgôeaa epic (634). Epie and poetic. (2) dxova> (à/cou- for ÛKof-) hear, àtcovoropai, î]KOvo-a, pf. âKfjKoa (for aK-gKopa, 721), plpf. TIKTJKOTI or àKTJKOÎ] J T|KOVCT0t]V, dKOvo-0fjo-op.ai.. 600. dXaXdÇco (àXaXay-) raise the wat-cry, àXaXâôpaL, rçXàXaâ. (2) àXàofxai WCinder, pf. àXàXrçpcu (as près.), W. inf. àXâXrjadat., part. àXaXgpevos, aor. à\i]dr]v. Chiefly poetic. dXSaCvw (àXôav-) nourish, epic 2 aor. gXôavov. Près, also àXôrjcrKw. Poetic. (2) dXe£(J>« (àXei<£-, àXc</>-) anoint, àXe£\|/«, r]Xei\|/a, àXf)Xi(j>a (554), dX'CjXip.pai, TiXe£<}>0Tjv, dXei<f>0f|crop.ai (rare), 2 aor. p. gXi^gv (rare). Mid. aXelôpai, ■gXenf/àprjv.

àX££co (àXe£-, àXe£e-, àXe/c-, àX/c-) WOjd off, fut. aXé^opac, epic àXe^gcrco (590), Hdt. àXefrçcropai. ; aor. gXé^gaa (jiXe!;a, rare), rçXe^ctprjv) epic 2 aor. aXaXKov. dXeop.ai avoid, epic ; aor. gXeâpgv. 37,611. Cf. àXevœ. àXevco avert, àXevaw, gXevaa. Mid. àXeûopai avoid, aor. rjXev6.fj.ijv, with subj. e^-aXevaupai,. Poetic. Cf. àXvcrKœ.

grind, r^Xecra, dXf|Xep.ai, (àXrçXea-pcu). 596, 597. aX0op.ai (àXO-, àXOe-) be healed, àXOgaopaL. Ionic and poetic.

âXéw

dXCo-Kop.ai (âX-, àXo-) be captured, âX«o-op,ai, eaXwKa or -rçXwKa, 2 aor. éaXwv or t^Xcov, àXco (epic àXcôa/), àXoigv, àXûvai., àXovs (694) ; ail passive in meaning. 592, 604. No active àXLaKœ, but see dv-aXCo-Kw. (4) àXiTcuvo|Acu (àXtr-, àXirav-), with epic près. act. âXiTpaCvw sin; 2 aor. yXirov, aXiroyqv, pf. part. àXLTyyevos sinning. Poetic, chiefly epic. (2,3)

(àXXay-) change, âXXàgco, T]XXa£a, fjXXaxa, rjXXa-yp.ai, rjXXàxOilv and T)XXà-yr]v, dXXax0f|o-opai and dXXa-yr|a-op,ai.. Mid. fut. dXXd{;op.ai, aor. r|XXa^à|iT]v. (2) aXXo|j.cu (âX-) leap, âXov(j,ai, T]Xà(j,T]v ; 2 aor. riXopgv (rare). Epic 2 aor. aXcro, aXro, âXpevos, athematic. 696 b. (2) dXvKTdÇto and dXuKTe'û) be excited, impf. àXvKra'Çov Hdt., pf. àXaXvKTgya.L Hom. Ionic. (2)

àXXàrrco

dXvo-Ko»

(oXvk-) avoid, àXvÇoj (epic àXu£opai), r/XvÇa (rarely -âpgv). Poetic. (648). Hom. also àXvanaÇw and àXvaKâvw. (4)

'AXûcncw is for àXvK-(Ticu>

dX<J)àvû) (àX0-) find, acquire, epic 2 aor. gXtpou. (3) dpapTavco (àpapr-, àpapre-) err, âp.apTT]<ropai,, T|p.dpTT|Ktt, T)pdprrjpai, rjpapTrj0î]v; 2 aor. ripapTov, epic and Aeolic fipfiporov (108). (3) dppXtcTKco (âp/3X-), dppXoo) in compos., miscarry, f[pPXcocra, f|'pPXcoKa, ri'pPXwpai, -gfjL^Xœdgv. (4) dpeCpco change, dp,eC*|/<o, r)p,€i\|/a. Mid. àp.e£Pop,ai make return, àpeC\|/op,ai, T|pei\|/dp.T|v ; poetic gpeopàpgv, rjiieLcpdgv answered. Mostly poetic. dpeCpco (àpep-) and dp.e'p8<o deprive, gpepera, gpkpdgv. Poetic. (2, 1)

366

GREEK GRAMMAR

ànir-fx*» and âpir-Iaxw (àp4>i and ëxw, 105 d) wrap àbout, clothe, àp.<f)èfa, 2 aor. fnj.TTL-<ixov ; epic irnpf. àpirexov. Mid. d[nr€'xop.ai., àp.7rC(rxofJ.at,, à|xm<rxvëo|j,ai ; impf. T|[j.Treix6|j.Tiv ; fut. à|i4>ë£op.ai ; 2 aor. T||Ain.-o-x<>piv and rnnv-t<jx°nriv> 567. See and ïcrxw. dfjs.irXaKCoTKCi) (àpirXaK-, àp.irXaKe-) err, miss, i]p,irXàKT)p.a.i ; 2 aor. funrXaKov,

(4) ail epic : see àvairvéw. dpvvu (àpw-) ward off ; fut. dp-wû, dp.wovp.ai; aor. f(p,vva, t|pivvdp.riv. Also impf. ■gp.vvaBov, imY. àpwàdere-(601). (2) àp,vrra) (âjuvx~) scratch, epic à/xû£a>, îfjpv^a (Theocr.), rip.v^âp.T]v. Poetic and part. àpirXaKcov OT àirXaKÙv. Poetic.

aivrrwe,

àpirvvvdrjv, àpirvî/TO,

Ionic. (2) dp.<f>i--yvoë doubt, T|p<}>€-yv6ow, r]pc|)€Yv6r|cra ; aor. pass. part. àpctu-yvoijOeis. 567. dp.<j>i-ëwvp.i. (see èvvvpi) clothe, fut. epic àpcfriéau, Att. dpcjn» (678 c) ; T|p4>(€0-a, rjp.4>C«crp.ai, ; àp.<j>ucrop.at., àpcf>Leaàpr]v (poet.). 567. (3) dp4>i,o-pr]Tëw dispute, augmented ?)pcfn.<T- and rm^ecr- (567) ; otherwise regular. dva(vop.ai (àvav-) refuse, impf. rjvai.vôpT}v, poetic aor. r\vr)vàpr\v, àvrfvaadai. (2) dvâXCo-Ku (à\-, àXo-, 592), and dvâXow expend, àvâXiocrw, dvfjXcocra (/cart]vaXoxra late), dWjXwKa, àvT)Xcop.ai (naT-r)vaXwpai late), dvnX»0T]v, dvâX<o0fjo-op.ai. See aXCo-Kop.ai. (4) dvairvëto take breath ; see irvéœ (irvev-, irvv-). Epic 2 aor. imv. apiruve, aor. p. àpirvvvdr]v, 2 aor. m. apirvÛTO. dvSdvco (fah- for crfah-, àô-, àôe-, 88) please, impf. Hom. avbavov and èàvôavov, Hdt. ijvôavov (èàvôavov 1) ', fut. àôrjocj Hdt. ; pf. èâôa, epic ; 2 aor. àôov, Ion. eaôov, epic evaSov for èffaSov from èafabov. Ionic and poetic. Cf. aar-nevos pleased, as adj. (3) dvï'xw hold up, àvëxop.ai endure, impf. T]veix<5pi]v, fut. dvt'Çopai and dvao^fj<rop.ai, 2 aor. r|V€o-xdp.Tjv. See «xw> and 567. dvf|vo0£ (LvtO-, àvod-) defect. 2 pf. springs, sprung; in II. 11, 266 as 2 plpf. (654 d). Epic. dv-otyvvp.1 and dvotyw (see otyvvpn) open, impf. dvëw-yov (■fjvoi.yov, rare), epic àvèœyov with synizesis ; dvoC£w, dvëw£a (fjvoi^a, rare), Hdt. MSS. avouai àvi<o\a, dvë(pYp.ai, dv£cpx0r]v (subj. àvoLxOû etc.) ; fut. pf. àv«a>£op.ai (pf. àvéœya late, very rare in Attic). (3) dv-op06« set upright, .augment âvœp- and r/vwp-. 567. dvvw, Attic also dvvTw accomplish ; fut. dvvo-w, Hom. -GLVVGJ, OtVt)CrO|JLCll | aor. r]'w(ra, ^waàp-qv ; pf. fjwxa, fjwo-p,ai. 596. Poetic also âvœ. avw-ya, 2 pf. as près., command, 1 pl. âvcoypev, subj. àvœyœ, opt. àv&yoïpi, imv. avoiye (rare), also âvœxdi (with àvcoxSut, avwxOe), epic inf. àvœyèpev', 2 plpf. rtvdoyea, rjvooyei (or àvàyei), epic also f/vutyop (or âvœyov), see 654 d. Présent forms àvùyei and àvûyerov (as if from àvùyco) occur in epic; also fut. àvûfa, aor. fjvuÇa. Poetic and Ionic.

CATALOGUE OF VERBS

âir-avpàtt take

367

not found in présent; impf. àiryvpœv (as aor.) ; kindred epic fut. airovpycTcv, and aor. part. àirovpàs, àirovpàpevos. 'Airovpàs is for à-n-o-fpâs, and àiryvpwp for àir-eppuv (with 77 for e). Poetic.

forms

away,

are

dira<j>£crKW (àw-cuf)-, air-acf>e~) deceive, -airàfyycra (rare), 2 -aTva(j)oLp.7]v. Poetic. (4:)

aor. -qira4>ov, m.

opt.

direxOdvojJiai (exO-, hx&e-) be hated, dir€X0fjcro|ji,ai, d'7r/!|X011fJ-a'i ; 2 aor. dirnx06p.T)v. Late près, àiréxdopai.. (3) àirô (f)€p<t« swept off, subj. àTroépay, opt. àirotpaeie (only in 3 pers.). Epic. àTTOKTtCvUp.1 and --uo), forms of àiroKreLvw (sometimes written à-n-oKTtiwvpi, -VCO, KT~LVVVp.l, -vui) See KTtCvW. d'irôxp'*! it suffices, impersonal. See XP"Hd-JTT» (à<£-) fasten, touch, fut. d\J/«, d\|rop£H ; aor. ■nvj/a, y-^àpyv ; pf. •ppp.ai ; aor. p. îî^Gtjv (see èà<f>0y). (2) dpdopai pray, àpacropai, TjpâoràpTjv, Tjpâpcu. Ion. àpeopai, âpyaopai, ypyaàpyv. Epic act. inf. âprifievai. dpaplcKco (àp-) fit, ypaa, ypdyv ; 2 pf. âpâpa, Ion. apypa, plpf. àpypea and ■fiprjpea and ypypet.(v) ; 2 aor. f/papov ; 2 aor. m. part, àppevos (as adj.) fitting. With form of Attic redupl. in près. (646). Poetic. (4) dpdTTti) (àpay-) strike, àpa£to, T|'paÊa> T|pdx0T]v. (2) dpéo-Kco (âpe- for âpea-) please, dp€<r«, r(pe(ra, T|p6o-0T]V ; dpecropcn, T|pe<rdp,Tjv. 596. (4) àpî][x€voç oppressed, perf. pass. part. Epic. dpK&o (dp/ce- for àpnea-) assist, suffice, dpK€<rw, T)'pKc<ra. 596. .

âppdTTtû, poet. dppô£« (àppoô-) fit, dp|AO(rco, î^ppocra (avvapposa Pind.), yppona (Aristot.), T^ppocrpai., f]ppà<r0T]v, fut. p. àppoadyaopai ; aor. m. yppoaàpyv. (2) apvvpai (àp-) win, secure, fut. àpodpal, 2 aor. ypôpyv (àpôprjv). Chiefly poetic. See aïpw. (3) dpôco plough, tfpoaa, perf. mid. Ion. àpypopai, ypôdyv. 596. dpird£« (àpiray-) seize, àpir-d<r« and dpTrdo-opai., epic àpirâ^co, T^ptracra, epic ypira^a, TjpiraKa, ^pirao-pai (late ypiraypai), Tjpirdo-OTiv, Hdt. ypiràxdyv, âpiraa-0'qtropai. On the Attic forms, see 617, 624. (2) àpvw and dpvTW draw water, aor. rjpvo-a, ypvaàpyv, -I]pv0r]v, Ion. ypvadyv. 596.

begin, rule, ap£«, îjp|a, (fjpxa) rjp"ypai (mid.), tjpxG'nv, àpxOycropai (Aristot.), apgopai (sometimes pass.), ypÇâpyv.

apx«

a<rcrw

and <JTTû> : see àiTrco.

(ànraX-) tend', aor. àrtrTjXa. Epic and lyric. (2) (avav-) or avatvto dry ; fut. avavw ; aor. yvyva, yvâvOyv or avàvOyv, aiiavOyaopai ; fut. m. avavovpai (as pass.). Augment yv- or av- (542). Chiefly poetic and Ionic. (2)

driTdXXci) avaCvu

GREEK GRAMMAR

368

pass.),

avjjàvw or av£o> (av£-, av£e~) increase, aù^crco, aiifjfjcro|icu, (sometimes rpipiou, tiîi'^Ka, i]v£t]|MU, Tp£fj0îiv, aùfpi0fj(rop,ai. Also Ion. près, impf. ae^ov. (3) à<j>ào-<r<o (see 623 and 625) feel, handle, aor. p4>aaa used by Hdt. for or

d<£dw.

(2)

à(|>-fi](x,i let go, impf. à<jnr)v or tion of tri ni, 514.

ri4>tr)v (567) ; fut. àtpyaw, etc. See

àtj>vo-o-« (â<t>vy~) draw, pour, à<j>v£œ. Poetic, chiefly epic. See d4>va> draw (liquids), ^(jWa, rj^uaàpriv. Poetic, chiefly epic. a\0o|J.ai (àxO-, àxOedx0eo-0ficro|x,ai.

for àxOea-, 596) be

âxw|iai (dx-) be troubled, See àKax^w. aw

(à- for à-,

d</>dco

the inflec-

à^ôw. (2)

displeased, âxO^crojjiai, t)x0€'°"011v>

impf. àxvvuvv- Poetic. (3) Also epic près, axopeu.

87, cf. a-br)v, Lat.

sa-tis) satiate,

ao-œ,

âaa; 2 aor. subj.

inf. apel'ai to satiate one's self. Mid. (aopai) (to be written aérai) as fut. ; fut. acropat, aor. âaâpr]v. Epic.

or aarai

ira-,

àé£ûj,

kûpev from yop-ev, près.

pdî> (Pcuc-) speak, utter, 8<x£w, epic pf. pépaierai. Poetic. (2) peuveo (/3a-, Pau-) go, pfjcrop.ai,, pép^tca, pépapcu, «pdOriv (rare) ; 2 aor. ëPriv (694) ; 2 pf., see 727 ; epic aor. mid. kPyaâpriv (rare) and kp-qaonw, 654 h. In active sense, cause to go, firjaui, 'épiera, poetic. See 643. The simple form is used in Attic prose only in the près, and pf. active. 604. (2, 3)

pdXXw (/3a\-, 18X77-, 169,

107, jSaXÀe-) throw, epic fut. /3aXéw,

PaX«, rarely

pépXr)|xa.w, opt. ôia-/3e(3\rja9e (766), èpXÔriv, pXr]0f)(ro(iai ; 2 aor. «PaXov, èpaXop-qv > fut. m. paXovpai ; fut. pf. P«PXt]ct-op.cu. Epic 2 aor. dual ^vp-pXrjTtiv ; 2 aor. m. kp\ripriv, with subj. pxêrai, opt. 8X770 or PXeio, inf. pXrjadai, part. pXrjpevos ', fut. %vpP\r]aeai, pf. p. pkpXrjai and PepôXypai. (2) pdirTO) (pa(f>-) dip, pd\J/co, «Paxj/a, pépappai, èpdcJjrjv and (Aristoph.) èpà<t>0i)i> ; fut. m. pà-fopai. (2) pdcrKw (8a-) poetic form of Pal™ go. (4) Pao-Ta^w (see 618) carry, paaràaoj, kpàaraaa. Later forms from stem fiaaTay-, Poetic. (2) PfjTTeo (Prix-) cough, prifa, 'éPrjâ. (2) pipd^w (pa-) make go, -Pipdo-to and -PiPw (678), -«pepao-a. Cf. PaLvu. (2) ptpiuu (8a-) go, près. part. Pipas. Epic. PiPpcoo-KCD (8pw-) eat, pf. P^PpcoKa, péppwpai, 'ePpiod-qv Hdt. ; 2 aor. 'éPpcov ; fut. pf. peppûaopai Hom. ; 2 pf. part. pl. Peppûres. Hom. 2 pf. opt. PePpœdois from Ppœdœ (601). (4) Pioco live, Piwo-opai, ipCaxra (rare), PepCwKa, PtpCwpai ; 2 aor. «pCwv (694). paW-qaœ, pëpXijKa,

For kPioj<ràpr}v see

fticoaicopai.

CATALOGUE OF VERBS

369

plcotTKopai (/3io-), usually comp. àva-j3LÛ(JKop,aL TCStore to life, -e/jLOiaâpriv stored to life, 2 aor. -e/3tcov intr. (4)

re-

pXdirrco (/3Xa/3-) injure, pXd*j/a>, ëpXcn|/a, pépXcu|>a, Pe'pXa|x(j.ai, €pXa<jj0T]v ; 2 aor. p. èpXdp^v, 2 fut. pXa,pT)<j-op,ai ; fut. m. (3Xàfop.ai ; fut. pf. Be(3Xà■fo^aL Ion. 622 b. (2) pXaa-Tava) (f3Xaar-) sprout, f3\aarf]aco, PepXdcrTT]Ka and kjBXàoTpua (546) ; 2 aor. ÉpXao-Tov. (3) pXsirw look, pX€\J/0|xai, Hdt. àvo.-(3Xk\pœ, «pXetj/a. PXCttûj (jjlXlt-, (3Xlt-, 108) take honey, aor. «pXia-a. (2) pXâxrKto (poX-, p.Xco-, (3Xu>-, 108) go, fut. p.oXovp.cH, pf. |iép.pX«Ka, 2 aor. ëpoXov. Poetic. (4) Podco shout, Po"qcro|iQL, iporjcra. Ion. (stem j3o~) ficocropai, eftcoaa, kfiu<râp.T)v,

(Péfiœuai.) f3e(3œ/jikvos, kf3û<xdr)v. PôtrKw (/3o-, (3octk-, (Boane-) feed, PocrKf|crw. (4)

PovXofiot (/3ouX-, fiovXe-) will, wish (augm. k/3ovX- or rçflouX-) ; PouXf|<rofj.cu, p<PovXT](i.ai, ipovX^0i]v; epic 2 pf. Trpo-(3é(3ovXa prefer. Epie près, also /36Xofj.aL, 536. (Ppax-) stem, only 2 aor. 'éfipaxe and 13paxe resounded. Epic. ppCÇw (see 618) be drowsy, aor. 'éf3p^a. Poetic. (2) Ppi0co be heavy, (3pi<rœ, e(3pïcra, j3éj3pïda. Rare in Attic prose. (PP°X~) Stem, swallow, aor. e/3po£a (opt. -/3pô£eie), 2 aor. p. àvafipoxds ; 2 pf. àvaptfipoxell. 17, 54(Zenodotus). Epic. Cf. Kara-^poxdifw gulp down (Ar.). ppvxdopai (ppûx~, /3pûxa"> 591) roar, 2 pf. /3é/3pûxa ; -e^pvxyo-âpr]v ; fpvxrjOds. Pvv&i> or Pvw ((3v- for /3va~) stop up, Pvo-to, «Pvo-a, P^vcrpai. 639. Chiefly poetic. (3) yap,ëa> (yapyape-) marry (said of a man), fut. ya.p.cà, aor. «yr^pa, pf. *y€-ydp.i]Ka ; pf. p. ■ye'ydp.rip.ai (of a woman). Mid. marry (of a woman), fut. ■yap.ovpcu, aor. èyi]p.d[AT|v. 590, 1245. ydwpai rejoice, epic fut. yavvaaopaL. Chiefly poetic. (3) ■yëywva {yoiv-, ywvt-), 2 pf. as près, shout, subj. yeycovœ, imv. ykywve, epic inf. yeyœvkpev, part, yeyuvûs ', 2 plpf. kyeyùvei, with kykycove and 1 sing. kyeyœvevv (654 d\ Derived près, yeyœvkw, W. fut. yeyuvrjaœ, aor. kyeyclivpaa. Chiefly poetic. Présent also yeywvlaKw. ■yelvopxu (yev-) be born; aor. 'eyeLvàpyv begat. (2) ■yeXdoj (yeXa- for yeXaa-) laugh, "y£Xdcrop,ai, kyéXacra, ly€Xdo-0t]v. 596, 597. ytvro seized, epic 2 aor., II. 18, 476. (See kykvero, yi.yvop.aL). ■yr]0^« (yijO-, ypde-) rejoice, poetic ypdjaw, kyijdycra ', pf. ■yéyqOa as près. 590. yilpào-Kco and less common -yTjpdw (-yrjpa-) grow old, Yqpacropai, less often yripaau, ly^paca, y£yr)pâKa am old ; 2 aor. (694) inf. yrjpôivaL, Hom. part. yypas. (4)

370

GREEK GRAMMAR

■y£"yvo(j.ai (yev-, yeve-, yov-, yv-) become (605), ■yev/jo-ojAai, ■y€,yÉVî]fi.ai, kyevrfdrfv Dor. and Ion., yevrfOifaopaL (rare) ; 2 aor. èycvdiAriv (epic ykvro for kykvero) ; 2 pf. yéyova am. For yeyàâai, -ye-yws, and other athematic forms, see 727. After 300 B.c. yiyvopai in Attic became yivopai, as in New Ionic and Doric. 586, 604.

■yiYV<&o"K« (yvœ-, yvo-) know, "yvc5<ro|Aai, àv-kyvoxra, eyvwica, eyvwcruai,, €YV(S<r0T]v; 2 aor. 'éyvoiv perceived (694). New Ionic, and Attic after 300 B.C., yivcOCTKCO. (4) y\vfyo> carve, kv-ky\vipa Hdt., ky\v\pàprfv Theocr., and «:'-yX.vnnai (546). ■yvd(j.irT« (yva.fj.ir-) bend, yvâpipio, eyvap\pa, kyvâp<t>drfv. Poetic, chiefly epic. See KCLfJ7TTCO. (2) ■yod» (70-, 591) bewail, 2 aor. yôov, only epic in active. Mid. yoàopai, poetic; epic fut. yorfcropai. ■ypd<J>« write, Ypd\J/co, €-ypat|sa, -yéypa^a, yé^pa^piai, 2 aor. p. è"ypdcj>T]v (kypà(f)0T]v late) ; 2 fut. p. -ypa<j>f|cronai ; fut. pf. ■yeYpaiJ/op.ai., aor. m. €Ypa*Jfdp.r]v. ■ypv£« (ypvy-) grunt, •ypvÇop.cu (7pvÇw

late), É-ypuÇa. Chiefly Att. comedy. (2)

(8a-) teach, learn, no près., (Sae-) Sarpropai, 8e8âi]Ka, ôeôâijfjat. ; 2 aor. mid. inf. ôeôaéirdai (MSS. ôeôâaadai) ; 2 pf. pt. 8e8acl>s (726) ; 2 aor. eôaov learned, redupl. 8k8aov taught; 2 aor. p. kSà-qv learned. Cf. Hom. Sîfu shall find, and 5i8ao-Kw. Poetic, chiefly epic. SaiSdWco (ôaiôaX-, 8ai8a\o~) decJc out, ornament, epic and lyric. Pindar has pf. p. part. 8e8ai.8aXpkvos, aor. part. 8ai.8a\deis ; also fut. inf. SaiSaXuakpev (592). (2) Sat£ci> (Saïy-) rend, ôaîijco, êSâïÇa, SeSaiypai, kSaîxSrfv. Epic, lyric, and tragic. (2) SaCvvpi (ôat-) entertain, 8aLau, 'éSaicra, (kSaiaOrfv) Satadels. Epic Saivv, impf. and près. imv. Mid. SaLwpai feast, SaLcropai, k8aiaâpr]v ; epic près. opt. SarvvTO for Saivvi-ro, SaivVaro for SaLVVi-aro (654 c) : see 766. (3) Salopcu (8acr-, Sacri-, 8ai-, 636) divide, epic fut. Sâaopat,, aor. kSaaâpifv, pf. p. 8k8aarpai, epic SkSajpai.

(2) See also SaT^op,ai.

(Saf-, 8api.-, Sat.-, 636) Jcindle, epic 2 pf. SéSrfa, 2 plpf. 3 pers. SeSrjei ; 2 aor. (k8a6p.rfv) subj. SârjTaL. Poetic. (2) SaKvco (8t]k-, 8aK~) bite, SfjÇopai, 8é8r|Yp.ai, ISfj\0T]v, S^xO^o-opai, ; 2 aor. «Saicov. (3) 8d|ivî]|xi. (642), (8ap.vda>?) (8ap-, Sprj-, Sapa-), also près. Sapai;» (620), tame, Sllbdue, fut. Sapàcrœ, Sapàto, ôapw (with Hom. 8ap.ô.a, Sapa, Sapôcocn), aor. kSàpacra, pf. p. SeSprfpai, aor. p. kSpijOrfv and kSapâadrfv ; epic also 2 aor. p. èSàpifv (with 8âpev) ; fut. pf. SeSpifcropai. ; fut. m. 8apàaopaL ; aor. k8apaaàprfv. In Attic prose only SapaÇo), éSapdcr0T|v, ISapacrdp/rjv. 659, 678 b. (3, 2) 8aC»

CATALOGUE OF VERBS

371

SapOavco (5apd-, ôapde-) sleep, 2 aor. «8ap0ov, poet. ëSpaOov ; p. KaTa-StSap0i]kws. (Usually in comp. Kara-Sapdàvu, except 2 aor.) (3) 8ar«op,ai (Sar-, S are-) divide, 8àa(cr)opai, -68acràp.T|v (in prose rare), epic kSaa (a) âpriv ; Hes. Saréaodai (should be written Saréeadai). See Salopcu. Seapai appear, only in impf. Séaro Od. 6, 242. Cf. Soâaaaro II. 13/458. ScSia fear : see SéSouca. SéSoixa, pf. as près. {S pu-, S fol-, S fi-, 34), epic SelSoina, 552, fear. Epic fut. Selcropai, aor. «Seura ; 2 pf. S^Sia, epic SelSia ; for full forms see 727. From stem Sfi- Homer forms impf. SLov, SLe feared, fled. Epic présent 8el8u> fear. See also Slepai. 8eC8€KTO welcomed II. 9, 224, pf. SeiSSxarai Od. 7, 72, plpf. SeiSexaro II. 4, 4, probably belong with Sexopai (652) ; some refer to SelKvvpi or to a still différent base Stjk-. Cf. SeiKavowvTo made welcome II. 15, 86. 8éCkvv|ai (ôei/c-) show: for synopsis and inflection

see 503, 504, and 507. (ôe/c—), SeÇcj, ëSeÇa, SeSeypai, 'eSex^qv, 'eSe^àpqv. Epic pf. m. Selôeypai greet (for SéSeypai) probably cornes from another stem ôe/c- or S-qn- (see 8éx°(Aai')- 552, 553. (3) Sépco {Sep-, Spr]-) build, ëSeipa, SéSprjpai, èSeipàprjv. Ionic and poetic. SÉpKopai (bepK-, bopn-, S pan-) see, kbkpxdrjv ; 2 aor. 'ébpaKov, (eSpaK-qv) SpaKeis ', pf. SeSopua (585, 587). Poetic. 8^p« (Sep-, Sap-) flay, Ssp», eSeipa, SéSappcu ; 2 aor. ISapi^v. Ionic and poetic also SeCpw (Sep-). 585, 633. Sexopai receive, await, accept, 8e'f;op,ai, Se'Se-ypat, èSfyOTF, «Selàp/rçv ; 2 aor. m. (chiefly epic) kSéypqv, SSkto, imv. S'eô (788 a), inf. Séxdai, part. Skypevos (sometimes as près.). So Hom. 3 pl. Sexarai (652). 8é« bind, 8ô-co, 6'8r]o-a, SeSesca (SeSrjKa doubtful), 8é8ep.ai, è8€0T]v, 860f)crop.ai : fut. pf. SïS'fyrop.ai, aor. m. eSqoàpqv. 8&o (Sep-, Se-, See-) want, need, Sefjo-M, è8^r]o-a, epic ebqaa, SeSérçKa, 8e86t|p.ai,, «SïÔt^v. Mid. 8&>p.ai aslc, Ssô-opiai. From epic stem ôeue- corne kbevqaa Od. 9, 540 and Sevopat, Sevqaopai. Impersonal 8«î, debet, there is need, (one) ought, 8€ô-ei, èSérjare. 8î]piâ«> and Sripho, act. rare (8-qpi-, S-qpia-, 591), contend, aor.kSqplaa (Theocr.), aor. p. Syplvdqv as middle (Hom.). Mid. Sqpiâopai and Sqpiopai, as act., Sypiaopai (Theocr.), èSqplacipqv (Hom.). Epic and lyric. 8^w, epic présent with future meaning, shall find. See stem 8a-. SiaiTau arbitrate, with double augment in pf. and plpf. and in compounds (565 and 567); SiaiTô-w, Surpr-ria-a (àrr-68iTfTT]cra), 868iT]TT|Ka, 868i.rfrrip.ai, 8it)tt|0t]v (e^-eSiqrqdqv, late) ; 8iaiTrjtropai, kat-«8ixitr](rapt]v effected a seulement. SiâKOvÉco wait on, «SiSkôvovv; 8iâKOvfjo-a), (aor. inf. SiàKovrjcrai), S€8iâK6vr]pai, !8iâKov/j0'nv. Later and doubtful (poetic) earlier forms with augment Si7]- or SeSir]-. See 565.

Ion.

GREEK GRAMMAR

372

(bibax") for Siôax-^KCj (648) teach, 8i8d£«, è8(8a|a, epic kbibàaKyaa (stem bibacrice-), 8€8C8axa, 8£8£8aynai, «SiSàxOilv; SiSagopai, kbiba^âpyp. See stem 8a-. (4)

SiSdcrKco

StSijin (5ri-, Se-) bind, chiefly poetic form for 8&o ; Xen. 8i8éao-i. SiSpao-kw (<5pâ-) only in comp., run away, -8pda-op.ai, -8£'8paxa; 2 aor. -$>pSv, Ion. -kôp-qv, -5p£>, -bpaiijv, -bpavai, -bpas (694). (4) SCSwpi (ôco-, 5o-) give, 8wo-«, ëSwxa, Sc'Swxa, etc. ; see synopsis and inflection in 503, 504, 507. Ep. bopevai Or ôôpev (= bovvai), fut. bibûcru (= Sœaw), 2 aor. itérative Sôcfkov (606). Swpai (bit-) be frightened, flee (612), inf. biecrdai to flee or to drive (chase) ; SLupai and SioLprjp (cf. bvvupai, 761, and ndoLp-qv, 773) chase, part. Siôpevos chasing. Impf. act. kv-ôieaav set on (of dogs) II. 18, 584. S(£r|p.ai (Si-Sir]-, cf. £t|t&i>) seek ; biÇr/aopai, kôi^rjaâppp. Ionic and poetic. (Suc-) stem, 2 aor. ebmov threw, cast. In Pindar and the tragedians. 8i\|/d<o (Si\p7]-, Supa-) thirst, 8uJ/fja-«, €8C\J/Tj<ra. See 486. Siwxco pursue, 8iwi;op.ai (SiwÇai), èSCwfja, 8£8£a>xa, For kbi&KaOov see 601.

Sox&o

(Sok-, boue-) seem, think, 86jj«, £8o£a, 8é8o-ypai, I86x0iiv (rare). Poetic

boK-pcrùo, èbÔKTjaa, SebÔKrjKa, ôeboK-rjpai, kboKrjdrjv. etc.

590.

Impersonal, 8okéî it

seeiïlS,

(Sovtt-, bourre-) SOUnd heavily, kbovrryaa ', epic bovmpaa and kir i-y Soinn] a a, pf. Skbovira, Sebovirûs fallen. Chiefly poetic. 590. SpaTTopai or 8patr<rop.ai (Spay-) grasp, aor. kbpa^àppv, pf. Sk5payp.ai. (2) 8paco do, 8pdo-a>, é'Spâo-a, SéSpaxa, SéSpâpai (doubtful ôkbpàapai), !8pa<r0T]v. 598. Svvapai be able, augm. usually kbw-, also rjbw- (536) ; 2 p. sing. près, (poet.) bvvq., Ion. bvvr], impf. kbvvu (kôwaao late, 667) ; SvvTjcrop.ai, SfSvvîjpai, €8vvTj0T]v (kbwàcrdriv, chiefly Ionic). 8v« enter or cause to enter, also go down, and 8vv« (55-, ôv-) enter ; 8do-«, «Bvcra, SéSvxa, StSupau, ISviOrjv, fut. p. 8v0^crop,ai; 2 aor. é'Sïiv, inflected p. 125, see 503 and 694; fut. m. bvaopai, aor. m. kôvaàpyv, epic kbâaôpyv (654 h). 8outt€0) 2

cd<j>0T] with kirt, was hurled upon (? II. 13, 543; 14, 419), aor. pass. commonly referred to arrru ; also to eiropai ; possibly it should be referred to stem pair (iairrco). «du permit, let alone, «dcrw, £ïa<ra, £Ïâxa, £ïap,ai, eldO^v ; édcropai (as pass.). Ep. etdw, impf. eà, aor. eàcra. For augment, see 537. lyyvdw pledge, betroth, augm. rjyyv- or kveyv- (kyyeyv-), see 565, 567. kyelpo) (kyep-, kyop-, kyp-, 34) raise, TOUSe, £*y£pw, rjyfvpa, 6-yVj-yeppat, T|-y£p0Tjv; 2 pf. Éyprpyopa am awake, Horn. kypyyôpdàai, imv. kyprjyopde, inf. kyprjyopdai OT -ôpQai', 2 aor. m. r|-yp6|j.T]v, epic kypopyv. For lyp^-yopa see 557. (2)

CATALOGUE OF VERBS «Su eat,

373

poetic (chiefly epic) présent : see êo-Gîw.

É'£op,cu (èô- for aeô-; cf. sed-eo) sit, fut. inf. kcX-koaeo9aL trans. (Hom.) ; aor. eiaàprjv, epic écrcrâpijv and èeaaâ/j.T]v. Active aor. elaa and encra. (Hom.). 87,88. Chiefly poetic. (2). See ï£« and Ka0££op.cu. È0ÉXco (kOeX-, kOeXe-) and QéXca wish, irnpf. t|0eXov ; €0€\rjo-a> or 0EXfjo-w, r]0€\r|tra, T|0cXr]Ka. 'E0éXw is the more common form except in the tragic trimeter. Impf. always r/deXov; aor. (probably) always pOeX-paa, but subj. etc. kdeXrjaœ and deXi)crœ, inf. kdeXrjcrai. and deXrjoai, etc. I0£ï« (see 620) accustom, kdiû (678 c), eï0i<ra, base is aped- (see 537). (2)

eïOikci, £Ï0io-p.ai, e10£o-0t]v. The

{<rféd-) Hom. près. part. : see éluda. (15-, fcô-), vid-i, 2 aor. saw, no présent (see 537) : iôu>, ïSoipi, ï8e or iôk, lôeîp, iôœv. Mid. (chiefly poet.) EÏSopai (peiô-) seem, epic elaàp-qv and Éeio-âyurjj' ; 2 aor. ei86p.r)v (in prose rare and only in comp.) saw = eïôov. OÎSa, 2 pf. as près. (poiS-) know, plpf. "nSrj knew, fut. £Ïo-op.ai ; see 529. (5) EticdÇu (see 620) make like, rj'KaÇov, eIkcio-w, récura, f|Kao-p.ai (etnao-pai), eIko.O-0TJV, €tKa<r0Vjo-O|Aai. (2) £Ïk«, not used in près, (ek-, o'lk-, Ik-), resemble, appear, impf. éluov, fut. £Ï£W (rare), 2 pf. eoikci, Ion. oka (with 'éoiypev, eÏKTOv (728), e'L^âcn, ekévai, eIkws, chiefly poetic) ; 2 plpf. «ifcri, with kÎKryv. Impersonal ïoike it seems, etc.

€0cov

tîSov

For 'éoLKa, see 537, 549.

yield, eï£co, £Î(ja. For e'UaOov see 601. (éX-, eiX-) press, roll up (590), aor. 'éXaa, pf. p. eeXpaL, 2 aor. p. édXrçv or oXt]v w. inf. âXrçpevcu. Près. pass. eCXopac. Epic. Hdt. has (in comp.) -elXyaa, -elXrjuaL, -EiXfjOtiv (Thuc.). Pind. has plpf. kôXec. The Attic has elXéo/iaL, and e'IXXu or elXXw. See ïXXw. £tjj,C be and EÎpi go. See 509-513. eîitov (kir- for feir-) said, epic eenrov, 2 aor., no présent ; £Ïir<o, Et'iroipi, eIité, eIiteiv, eLitwv ; Ion. and late Att. 1 aor. £Îira, poet. eei7ra (opt. eliraipL, imv. elirov, inf. elxat, part. ei7râs), Hdt. àir-eLirâiJ.T]v. Other tenses are supplied by a stem kp-, pe- (for pep-, fpv~, Lat. ver-bum) : Hom. près, (rare) eZpw, fut. kpkœ, êp« ; pf. £ÏpT]Ka, EÏptipai, (552) ; aor. p. Êppfj0T|v, rarely kppkB-pv, Ion. eiped-pv; fut. pass. pii0f|a-op.ai ; fut. pf. £lpf|o-opai. See êvéïra. (5) £Ïp-yvû|jw and (rarely) Etpyvvw, also EÏp-yw (elpy-), shut in ; e'IpÇw, eîpÇa, elpypar, èipxdyv- Also ïp"Y«, ep£co, ep£a, Hom. pf. (epypat.) 3 pl. 'épxo-rai, plpf. ipxo.ro (652), epxdrjv. Often with smooth breathing, «ïpyw, eîp£«, etc., Soph. 'épÇercu. Epic also eepyu. (3, 1) A'poptti (dp-, eipe-) Ion. ask, fut. tiprjoopai. Hom. kpkpœ (rare), subj. kpeiopev (for kpevopev) ; kpkfopai, imv. epeio Or kpeïo. See Epopai. £Ïp« (pep-) say, epic in présent. See eîitov. EÏpto (kp- for crep-, Lat. sero) join, aor. -etpa, Ion. -épcrct, pf. -eîp/ca, elppai, epic UppoLu Rare except in composition. (2)

éZk»

éIX&o

374

GREEK GRAMMAR

(fin-, redupl. pefiK-) liken, compare (561, 648); poetic, chiefly epic: also ïcxkco. Upoa-rjï^aL art like (Eur.) and epic t/ïkto or t'Uro, sometimes referred to eÏKco. See tÏKco. (4) eï«0a, Ionic tcoôa (kd- for aptO-, 537, 719), pf. am accustomed, plpf. clc&0i). Hom. has près. act. part. Wœi>. Ito-Kco

près,

«KKXricriâ^co hold

assembly;

augm. tjkkXtj-

and k^Xy- (565).

cXavvw, for éXa-fu-w (641), poetic «Xàw (èXa-) drive, march, fut. (kXâaw) «Xû

(678 b), epic k\à<T<Tu, kXôco; fjXaera, cXfjXaxa, èXfjXap.ai, Ion. and late (3) 4X£yXw test< confute, i\Xty^a, cXfjXe-ypcu (497 b), T|X«'yx®1lv> «Xe-yx®lntrolAalIXCttw (rarely «IXCttw, Hdt. dXLaaco, stem «Xt/c- for peXiK-) roll, êX£ij«, «ïXiÇa, (537), eïXi-yiiai, «IX£x0tiv, k£-tXixOyaop.ai. Epic aor. m. «Xt^àpyv, plpf. m. tkXiKTO (MSS. éXéXt/cro), aor. p. keXixOyaav (MSS. kXtXixOyaav). Written also éXCttw etc. (2) kXyXaapat., Hom. plpf. kXyXkôaTO (558), T|\d0Tjv, yXaaâp.yv.

4'Xkm

(èX/c- for creX/c-, kXxv-) pull, fXt-o) (Ion. and late Att. tXKvaw), eïXxvora,

eïXxvxa, €ÏXKvo-(j.ai, éIXkvo-0tiv. Près. kXKvœ late. 537.

«XirCÇu (kXxLÔ-) hope, aor. TjXirura; aor. p. part. 'tXiriaOtv.

(2)

(éX7r- for ptXir-) cause to hope, pf. ïoXira (for pe-poXira) hope; plpf. éwXirea (585). Mid. tXiropai. hope, like Attic kXirLÇœ. Epic.

cXiru

vomit, fut. «|aov|a(u, kjjLûi (rare) ; aor. -ff^cra. 596. 4va(pb) (kvap-) kill, 2 aor. yvapov. Hom. aor. m. kvyparo. Poetic. (2) €V€ttci) (kv and Stem atir-, air-, crire-) Or «vv^irw say, tell, epic fut. kvi-airyau and kvL\{/(jJ ', 2 aor. tvi-airov, W. imv. tviairt, epic kvLairts, 2 pl. 'tairert ÎOT kv-airert, inf. kviaireïv, epic -kptv. Poetic. See tlirov. €|i.€o>

(kviir-) chide, epic also kviaaco, 2 aor. kvkvlirov and yvtirairov (559). (2) for fta-, cf. ves-tio) clothe, près. act. only in comp. ; epic fut. ta cru, aor. taaa, ta(a)àpyv or ktaaàpyv (for kpeaaâpyp) ; pf. tapai, or eipai, tlpkvos in trag. In comp. -€<r«, -«o-a, -tcràp.T)v. Chiefly epic : âp.<j>i-4vvv|jLi is the common form in prose. (3) èvoxX4w bother, w. double augment (567) ; ypùxXow, kpoxXyaw, yp&xhyaa, evtirrtt

ew\j|xi (k-

yv&xhyp'ai.

coixa

seem,

perfect

see

efrcw.

éopTaÇw (see 616), Ion. ôprâfw keep festival; impf. kùpTa'Çov (for yopraÇop, 33). (2)

iir-avp4w and èir-avpC<rK<o (avp-, avpe-) enjoy, both rare, 2 aor. Dor. and epic kiravpop ; epic fut. m. kiravpyaopai., aor. kiryvpàpyp, 2 aor. tiryvpôpyp. Chiefly poetic. 590. (4)

€ir-€vfjvo0É, defect. 2 pf. sit on, lie on ; also as 2 plpf. (654 d). See àvypodt.

Epic.

«irto-Tapai understand, 2 p. sing. (poet.) kiriarç., Ion. kiriareai, impf. T|iriorTàp.T|v, 2 p. sing. yirLaraao or yirLarœ (667) ; fut. €iri<rWj<rO|i<U, aor. yiriaTydyp. Not to be confounded with forms of k^iarypi.

CATALOGUE OF VERBS i'iro)

375

(<xew-, crir-) be after, be busy with, impf. elirov (poet. eirov) ; fut. -epw, 2 aor. (for k-aeir-op), aor. p. irepL-é4>dr)p (Hdt.) : active chiefly Ionic or poetic, and in compos. Mid. é'irojiai follow, fut. «ij/opat ; 2 aor. «nréjAtiv (o-irûfiai, o-7ro£p.r|v, o-irov, crir€o-0ai, o-irdpcvos). Hom. imv. aireio for cnrov.

-kffirov

87, 537.

ipdco love, tipacrGriv fell in love, 'epaad-qaopai, epic r)paa(a)âp.T)v. Poetic près. cpapai, impf. -ppap-qv. cp-yaÇopai (pepy-) Work, do ; cp-ydcropai., cïpyacrp.ai, T|p-yda-0T)v, rjp-yacrdp.T]v, lpYao-0fj<rop.ai. 537, 616. (2) « PY« and eipyto : see eïpyvvpi (eïpyw). cp8o> and é'pSco work, do (pepy-uo, ppey-ua, 618, 537) ; fut. cpfw, aor. ep£a, Ion. 2 pf. eopya, 2 plpf. kàipyea (for epepopyea), Ion. kôpyea. Ionic and poetic. See péfco. cpetSu

(later), r|p€icra, Ion. -ripeina, epic kp-ppeiapai with kpripédarai 654 c, 558, r)peiadr]v', kpeLcrop.ai (Aristot.), -ppeiaàpTjv.

prop, kpeiaœ

and

-aro,

cpctxco (epeiK-, epiK-) teOJ, bUTSt, f/pei^a, kprjpiypai, 2 aor. tfpiKOP. Ionic and poetic. cpc(ir (epeiir-, kpiir-) throw down, epe'upca, epic rjpeifa, 2 pf. kpppnra have fdllen, pf. p. epTjpLppciL (plpf. kpkpLTTTo, Hom.), 2 aor. ripLicov, tjpLtttjp, aor. m. àv-r]peifàpr\v (Hom.), aor. p. ripeL<pdr]p.

èp£<r<ra> (éper-)

TOW,

epic

aor.

ôi-r]pea(a)a. 625. (2)

kpiu ask, epic. See elpopai and cf. epopai. cpi8aCv« contend, aor. m. inf. kplhpaaadai. Epic. (3) !p£Ç(o (kpLÔ-) contend, ir)pia(a)a, kprjpiapai. Poetic. (2) cpopai (rare), Ion. eïpopcu, epic «péw or cpfopai (pep-, pepe-) for the Attic IptoTaco ask, fut. Ipfyropai., Ion. e'iprjaopai, 2 aor. T)p6p.r|v. See ctpopai.

(oepir-)

cpira»

Poetic.

cppto

creep, 537.

(êpp-, eppe-)

impf. elpirov; fut. ep\|/a». Also épirvjw, aor. cïpuwa. to destruction, 'eppriau, fippr]aa, eia-r)ppi)Ka.

cpuyydvco (epvy-) eruct, 2 aor. f|'p\)yov. (3). Ion. epevyopai, kpevÇopai. cpvKû) hold back, epic fut. kpv^co, fipvÇa (Xen.), epic 2 aor. ripénaKov.

(pepv-) and eïpvpai (eppii-) protect ; 3 pl. e'ipvarai and eipvarai, inf. impf. êpvro and e'ïpvro, eipvaro ; fut. èpva(a)opai and eipva(a)opai, aor. èpva(a)àpT]v and eipva(a)âpr)v. See pVopai. 4pvtt (pepv-, ppv-) draw, fut. kpvœ, aor. eïpva(a)a and 'épva(a)a, pf. p. eïpvpai and eïpvapa i. Mid. cpvopai draw to one's self ; 'epvaaopai, kpva(a)àpijv and e'ipva(a)àpt]v, eïpvpai and eïpvapai, e'ipvpTjv, kpvadr)v and e'ipvadrjv. Epic and Ion., with poetic and New Ion. près, eipvœ. 537, 596. cpX.op.ai (kpx~> 4X0-, èXevG-, eXvG-) go, COme, fut. kXevaopai (Ion. and poet.), 2 pf. c\fj\v0a, epic kXgXovda and eiXriXovda, 2 aor. rjX0ov (poet. fiXvdov). In Attic prose, elpi is used for kXevaopai (1257). 166 b. (5)

cpvpai

'épvadai Or eïpvaOai ;

GREEK GRAMMAR

376

€cr0Lco, also poetic eo-0» and «8» (è5-, <t>ay-, edo) eat, fut. è'Sopai, è8f|8eo-(j,ai, epic kôr)ôonai(l), T\h'toOt}v; 2 aor. «jHvyov; epic près. 2 pf. part. kSriôœs. 681. (5) Éo-Tidw entertain, augment élan- (537). €v'8«

(evô-, evôe-) sleep, impf. evSov (è-KaO-evSov) Or tjS5ov Ion. -evôrjaa. Commonly in xa0-6ti8w. 590.

evôrjaœ,

pf. èSfjSoxa, inf. 'éôpevai ;

(KaQ-rjvSov, 541),

do good, tvepyerr\<ra>, rjvepykr-riaa, etc., regular : sometimes (wrongly) augmented evrjpy-. See 567. Évpta-Kci) (evp-, evpe-, 604) find, evpr\a-(o, TppTixa, ^Tipripai, i}{>pé0T]v, €i>pe0f|o-op,ai, ; 2 aor. Tjvpov, Tjvpopi]v, 596, 597. Often found with augment ev(541). (4)

eviep-yerecù

£Ùij>paiv(i> (evcfrpav-) cheer, fut.' €V(j>pavû ; aor. tivtjjpâva ; aor. p. fut. p. €V(j>pav0Tjoropai ; fut. m. €ti<j>pavovp,ai. 541. (2)

î]V(}>pdv0T]V,

cllxopai pray, boast, «îi^opai., i]vÉ;d|j.Tiv, rj{ryp.ai. 541.

éxGatpco (exOap-) hâte, fut. 'exda.povp.ai, aor. r/xdvpa. Epic and poetic. (2) (aex~, ax~, axe-) have, impf. «lx°v (537) ; or (rxfjcrw, eoxnxa, ca-xtipai, €o*x€0t]v (chiefly Ion.) ; 2 aor. «crxov, crx», crxouiv and -o-xoipi, cxéS, crxeîv, trxûv; poet. eax^dov etc. (601). Hom. pf. part. aw-oxoKœs for ok-ox-ws (585, 554), plpf. èT-wxaro were shut II. 12, 340. Mid. «xopai cling to, be next to, ë£op.ai and o-x^o-opai, èa-xop-qv. See àp-rréxoy ïaxu>, and VTveaxvtopai. 1250/.

«\J/w (e\p-, &pe~) cook, boil, fut. €i|/r)a-op.cu, "eip-qaoi (in rj\pripai, r)\f/r]9riv. 590. Ça» live'(Ça-, Çrj-), with Çfjs, Çfj, etc. eÇ-qaa, eÇ-qua, drama.

are

COmedy), aor. fjij/ricra, Ion.

(486), impf. è'Çwv ; Ç^o-», Çrjo-opai. Later uses k/3'iuv, PefiicoKa. Ion. fww in the

for which Att.

Çev-yviîpi (Çeuy-, Çvy-, cf. iug-um) (rare) ; 2 aor. p. êÇvyriv. (3)

yoke, Çèv^», eÇev^a, ëÇevypai, lÇ€vx0i]v

Çé» (Çe- for Çea-) boil (poet. Çeiw), Ç«rw, «Çïca, -éÇeapai Ion. 596. Çwvvvpi (Çco- for Çcoa-) gird, è'Çcocra, 'éÇœpai

(inscr.) and è'Çw<rpai.. (3)

come to manhood, with r)Pd» be at manhood : -iiPrjcrw, T^ora, -VjPîiKa. For epic ypœovTa etc. see 659 b. ri-yepéOopai be collected, poetic passive, see d-yelp» (âyep-) and 601. Only in 3 pl. rtyepeOovTai, the SUbj. and infin., and 177epedovro.

TjPdo-K» (rpSa-)

fjSopcu be pleased ; aor. p. rfo-Gtiv, fut. p. TprGrjcropai,, aor. m. ??<raro Od. 9, 353. The act. rfS» with impf. rjôov, aor. rjaa, occurs very rarely.

rjcpÉGopai be raised, poetic passive, see deîp» (dep-) and 601. Only in 3 pl. r\epeBovrai (impf. -rjepéOovTO is late). ■npaisii: see 521.

CATALOGUE OF VERBS

■nui

say,

chiefly in impf. rjv 8' èyw said I and

he said. 'Hp.L I say is colloquial.

377

said he (1023 b). Epie

bow, sink, aor. 7}pîiaa, Hom. pf. vir-efj.v-rnj.vKe (with an inexplicable v vit-ep.-qp.vKe, 554). Poetic, chiefly epic.

T||Ava>

inserted, for

(6a\-) bloom, 2 pf. Tkdrfka as présent. 589. Poetic. (2) Ta*))-, stem : see dqrr-, 9àirT« (racf)- for 0a</>-) bury, 0d\|/«, £0ax|/a, T£0ap.p,cu, Ion. kdâcjrdqv, rare ; 2 aor. p. €Ta<}>T]v; 2 fut. Ta<j>rja-o|xai ; fut. pf. T«0di|/op.ai. 105 e. (2) 0at)[ià£co (see 620) wonder, 0avp.dtrop.ai,, 40avpacra, T€0avp.aKa, l0avpacr0T]v, 0avp.ao-0fj<ropai,. (2) 0e£vw (6ev-) smite, depw, Weiva Hom., 2 aor. Wevov. Poetic, Att. comedy. (2)

6dXXa> 0air-

0éXio wish

see

èOeXco.

0épo(iai warm one's self, epic fut. dépaopai (682), Chiefly epic. 0€<D (dev-, deF-, dv-) run, fut. 0€vcrop,ai. 611.

2 aor. p. (kdkpqv) subj. dep'ew.

(0T1-), inf. drjadai Tïlilk, kdqaâpqv. Epic. (0t]ir-, Oair-, or raf) astonish, stem with epic 2 pf. réduira am astonished, epic plpf. kredrirrea ; 2 aor. 'érac/jov, also intransitive. 34, 105 e. Ocyyavtij (diy-) touch, di^opai, 2 aor. ediyov. 638. Chiefly poetic. (3) 0Xdw bruise, 'éd\aaa, red\acrp.o.L (Theocr.), kdXâadqv (Hippocr.). Ionic and poetic. See <£X<ko. 0Xtp« (0X1/3-, 0XÏ/3-) squeeze, €0XîiJ/a, T€0Xïtj>a, Te6\Lppai, è0XÎ<f>0T]v ; kdXiPqv ; fut.

dXifopai, Hom.

0vt|'o-kw, près, also written dvqcrKw, Doric and Aeolic dvpaKw (dav-, dvq-) die, 0avov|xai, T€0vîjKa ; fut. pf. T€0vrj|û) (736), later TedvqÇopai ; 2 aor. è'0avov; 2 pf. see 727 and 802. In Attic prose always dTro-0avovp.ai and dir€0avov, but T«'0vi]Ka. 594, 647. (4) 0pdTTW (dpâx-, rpâx-) disturb, aor. <É0pâ£a, be disturbed, Hom. See raparTu. (2) Opatito bruise, Opavtrco, «Opavtra, T€0pavp,ai

èdpàxdw (Soph.) ; 2 pf. TeTpqxa-

and TÉ0pav<rpai, lOpavtrO-iiv

0pvirTa> (rpvcf)- for dpv4>~) crush, Wpvfa Hippocr., aor. p. èrpvcljrjv, dpvfopai. 105 e. (2)

(600).

T£0pvppai, 'edpv4>dqv, epic 2

0p(io-Kw and 0p'&o*K(o (dop-, dpu>~) leap, fut. dopodpai., 2 aor. Wopov. Chiefly poetic. Cf. Hdt. dopvvopai. (4) 0vw (dv-, dv-) sacrifice, impf. 4'0vov ; 0vtr«, ë0vo-a, T^Ovtca, T€0vp.ai, 4tv0t]v ; dvaopaj, kdvaâpqv. 105 a and c. Gv<o or 0vvû) rage, rush. Poetic: classic only in présent and imperfect. Hes. dvveui.

(laX-) send, fut. -taXw, ep. aor. ïqXa. errl). (2)

tdXXw

Poetic (in Ar. comp. with

378

GREEK GRAMMAR

tàx« and tax&» (fifax-) shout, pf. ('taxa) àp4>-iaxv'îa. Poetic, chiefly epic. In tragedy commonly written iaux-. (tS-, FiS-), in tîSov for epiSov. ISpôw sweat, lôpccaco, ïSpasaa : for irregular contraction lôpûai etc. see 488. LSpvo) 'place, î8pv<rw, ÏSpïicra, ïSpvKa, ÏSpûpai, iSpvOrjv, epic iôpvvdrjv (740), iôpvaopai, ïôpvaàpr]v.

(fie-, Lat. in-vî-tus) strive, in Att. chiefly in comp. irap-tÉpax enDistinguish from mid. of lypi ((Tri-, ae-) send. ÏÇw (ae8-, redupl. ai-aô-, 561) seat or sit, mid. ïÇopcu sit ; used chiefly in Ka0-£5«, whi'ch see. See also é'Jopai and rpac. (2) By-form IÇavw. ït^pi (ar\-, ae-, redupl. aL-arj-, 561) send : for inflection see 514. ÎKv€op.cu (Ik-), poet. «ai, come, ïfjop,ai, typai ; 2 aor. îKdprjv. In prose usually d<j>-iKV€opai. From uw, epic impf. Ikov, aor. l&v, 654 h. Also iitavw, epic and tragic. (3) îXdcrKopai (tXa-) propitiate, iXacropai, ïXdcr0r]v, ïXacrdp/rjv. (4) Epic près. i€p,ai

treat; ep. aor. keiad^yv and eiaâpyv.

iXâopai, aor. ÏXaaaàp.r}v.

IXtjp.1 (ix??-, or

tXa- for ai-aXy-, ai-a\a~) be propitious, près, only imv. ÏXydi (Xadc, pf. subj. and opt. iX^/cw, IXyicoLpi (Hom.). Mid. 'IXapai pro¬

pitiate, epic. Poetic, chiefly epic.

l'XXopai roll, aor. IXa. See elXéco. (2) tp.doro-<o (ipavr-, see 625) lash, aor. ïpaaa or ïpaaaa epic. (2) ïpeCpw (tpep-) long for, ipeipàprip (epic), ïpepOyv (Ion.). Poetic and Ionic. (2) t'irrapai fly, late présent : see iré-i-opai. l'crapi, Doric for olSa know, with 'Laas or 'Laais, ïaâri, 'iaapev, 'Laare, ïaavri, ïXXto and

part. 'Laàs.

t<TKo>

see

ktanœ.

Ïo-ti]|u (art]-,

ara-, redupl. ai-art]-, ai-ara-) set, place, for synopsis and inflec¬ 503, 504, 507 : a-Tfja-co shall set, €o-TT]<ra set, brought to a stop, €orTt]v came to a stand, «rTTjKa am standing, éutt^kti was standing, 2 pf. èVraTov (506), pf. mid. earapai (rare), fut. pf. shall stand, aor.

tion

pass.

see

€o-Ta0r]v

was

placed.

l«rxvatv« (iaxvav-) make lean, make dry, fut. iaxvavû, aor. ïaxvàva (688), laxvyva Ion., aor. p. ïaxvavdriv ; fut. m. iaxvavovpai. (2) ïerx« (for ai-ax-u, 561) have, hold. See è'x«.

(KaS-, KaSe-) in Hom. redupl. 2 KeKaôovro

see

xdfw.

aor. KeKaSûv

depriving, fut. KenaSyaui. For

Ka0a(pci> (naOap-) purify, Ka0apw, €Ka0T|pa (and 'euddapa), K€icd0app.ai, €Ka0dp0i]v; Kadapovpai, e.KaQr\pâpr\v. (2) Ka0-éÇop,ai (aeô-, èô-) sit down, impf. eKa0eÇ6p.rjv, fut. KaOeSovpai. See ï£opai.

CATALOGUE OF VERBS

379

KaOcvSd)

(evS-, evôe-) sleep, impf. €K(x0€ij8ov and Ka0t]v8ov, epic KdOedôov, see fut. ka0€v8iîio-û>. See «tjSw. KaOtÇco set, Slt, fut. Ka0iw (678 c), Kad^rfaopai; aor. eKàOlaa Or naOlaa, Hom. Kadeîaa, Hdt. xareîaa, kKadi<Tâp.r]v. See ÏÇco. For inflection of Ka0T](j.ai. see 522. (2) Ka£vvn.ai, perhaps for xaù-vvpai (/ca5-), excel, impf. é/caîvi/To, pf. /cé/caapai, Dor. /ce/caôpévos. Poetic. (3) Katvu (xav-, kov-) kill, fut. ka.vu), 2 aor. 'txavov, 2 pf. xkxova, KaTa-kekovôtes (Xen.). Chiefly poetic. (2) Kat<o (/ccufco for Kap-iw, Kav-, kou-, 635), in Attic prose generally kq« (not contracted), burn; Kavo-w; £Kai>a~a, epic aor. exija, part. Krjâs, Att. Keas Eur., Ar. ; KCKavKa, KÉKavp,ai, £Kav0t]v, Kav0rjcro(iai, 2 aor. ê/càrçv (poetic) ; fut. mid. KaiicrofiaL (rare), àv-exavaâpi]v, Hdt. (2) KaXÉco (/caXe-, /cX77-) call, KaXû (678 a), ÈKdXeo-a, K€KXr|Ka, K€KXî]p,ai (opt. xexXfjo, Ke/<Xj7/uei9a), èKXrj0r)v, KXr]0r)oro|j,ai ; fut. m. KaXovpai, aor. èKaXeo-djiilv ; fut. pf. KCKXrjo-OHai.. Aeol. près. xàXTfpi, epic inf. xaXrfpevaL, fut. xaXko: (Hom.), KaXécrco (Aristotle), aor. èKâXeaaa. Epic près. kl-k\ï]-o~ku), itéra¬ 567 ;

tive kaxéeitkov.

KaXvTTTco

(xaXvfi-)

596, 597, 766.

KaXvij/û), «KaXvij/a, KEKdXup.p.ai, èKaXv<|>0i]v, KaXu<J>0Tj(2) kcl|xv<o (/cap-, Kur]-) labor, be sick, Kap.ovp.ai, k6ku.t]ko, epic 2 pf. part, /ce/cp^cis ; 2 aor. €Ka[j,ov, epic èKapôptfv. (3) Kapirrci» (icafj.ir-) bend, Kdp.vJ/<o, 'eicapij/a, KéKap,p,ai (81), €Kdp.<j>0T]v. (2) KaTT|-yopÉa> accuse, regular except in augment, xaipyopow etc. (565). (Ka«}»£-) pant, in Hom. pf. part. /ce/caq^côs. KtSdvvvfU epic for <rK€8dvvvp.i, SCatter, èxéôaaaa, 'txehàadpv. (3) KÉîpai lie, KEto-opai ; inflected in 525. Ketptt (/cep-, /cap-) shear, fut. Kepû, aor. «Keipa, poet. exepao., KÉKappai, extpd-qv (Pind.) ; 2 aor. p. kKàpifv ; fut. m. /cepoDpai, aor. m. é/ceipâpîj/' with poet. part. Keprràfxevos. 689 b. (2) K€Ka8ov in Hom. part, xexaôûv depriving. See (KaS-) and x«ïwKeXaSéb) shout, TOar, fut. xeXaOrprui, KeXaôrjaopai, aor. kKeXàôrfcra ; Hom. près. part. /ceXdôwv. Epic and lyric. kcXevco command, k«Xev<rto, €K^Xevo-a, KeKÉXevKa, K€k&.evo-p.ai, €KeXevor0t]v (600). Mid. (chiefly in compounds) /ceXevcropai, kxeXevcràp'rfv. kéXXw (/ceX-) run ashore, /céXa-w, e/ceXaa. 682, 689. Poetic : the Att. prose form is ÔKéXXw. (2) Ke'Xopai (/ceX-, /ceXe-) COmmand, xeXrjcropai, kxeXrjaâprfV ; 2 aor. m. l/ce/cXop^v (559, 692). Poetic, chiefly epic; Att. prose KeXev». KevTe'co (xevr-, xevre-) goad, Kevrrfcrœ, kxkvrpaa, KexkvTripai Ion., €KevTr)6r]v later, arvyKevTrfdrfaropaL Hdt. Hom. aor. inf. xkvaai, from stem KevT-, 590. Chiefly Ionic and poetic. cover,

<ro(iai ; aor. m.

èxaXv\pâpijv. In prose chiefly in compounds.

GREEK GRAMMAR

380

and K€pavvvw (/cepa-, «pâ-) mix, «Kï'paora, K€Kpâ[UH, £Kpa0îiv and £K£pdcr0T|v; fut. p. Kpâdrjaopai. ; aor. m. èKepaaâpgv. Ion. eKprjaa, poet. eKepaaaa, Ktupripai, 'eKpgdgv. Other près, forms are KtpcLeu, KepaLœ, nipvr)p.i, Kipvâœ. (3)

K£p(xvvUjj.i

KepSaCvw («epô-, Kepôe-, icepôav-) gain, fut. K£pSav«, aor. tKepSava (688), Ion. eKépÔTjva, fut. KepôrjaopaL and aor. ènépôticra (Hdt.) ; pf. 7rpo<r-K£K£p8'r|KCÛri (Dem.). 643. (3, 2) KfvOa) (kevd-, kv6~) hide, Keùaco, eKevaa ; 2 pf. KeKevda (as près.) ; epic 2 aor. kWov, redupl. aor. subj. kckWeu. Epic and tragic.

icf|8« (kî?ô-, K7]ôe-, Kaô-) cause distress, Kriôrjaco, -eKrjôrjaa ; 2 p. KkKrjôa ; active only epic. Mid. KT)8op,ai sorrow, èi<r]5eacipr]v, epic fut. pf. KeKaôrjaopaL. KTjpwTTO)

(kt]pvk-) proclaim, KqpvÇco, iKrjpv^a, K£K^pvxa, KeKîjpû-ypai, £KT]pvx0Tlv>

KTipvx0'n<rop.ai ; Krjpv^opaL, tK-qpv^àpr^v. (2)

kix<xv« (kcx~! KLxt~) find, Kixgcropai., epic é/ax^càp?iv ; 2 aor. Epic forms as if from près. Kixvuh 2 aor. pass. with intrans. meaning enLxvv'- (^«lx^s, kLxvp-w, klxvttiv, klxv« (Ktx«w MSS.), /"xe"?> klxvvcu and kix^ew, KLxeis, Kixvpevos. Poetic. 638 (b). (3)

Ki-yx®11"0!

epic

emxov■

See anibvrjpl. (3) (intrans.), près, and impf. ; as mid. of kîv€<o. Epic. (3) KCpvT|pt and Kipvdû» : epic forms (in près, and impf.) for Kepdwvpi. kCxp1!^1 (xpv-, xp«~) lend, xpvw Hdt., ëxPTlcra; K€XPTlH-cu; lxPTlcr°L(ATlv borrowed. KXdÇco (/cXayy-, KXay-) clang, KXàyÇw, e/cXa-y^a ; 2 pf. /cé/cXayya, epic pf. part, formed like près. KeKXpyovres ; 2 aor. 'éuXayov ; fut. pf. KtK.Xày^opa.1. Chiefly poetic. (2) «Xaécu (/cXatfw for «Xa^-tw, kXau-, /cXat-, /cXate-, 634, 635), in Attic prose and Ar. generally «Xaio (not contracted) weep, xXavo-opai (rarely nXavaovpai, SOmetimes nXaL-qao: or KXâijo-a)), ecXaucra and èKXavaâprji>, KéhcXavpcu ; fut. pf. (impers.) /ce/cXaitcrerai. (2) xXdw break, ïxXao-a, K€KXa(rpai, «KXdcrO'qv ; generally in composition. 2 aor. Ki8vt]pi (klô-vo.-) spread, Ion. and poetic for 0-KeSdvvvp.i. xi vu pat. move

part. àiroKXâs Ion.

(kXêtt-, kXott-) steal, kXéxJ/co (rarely «Xéxf/opai), £KX£*|/a, K£KXo<f>a (585, 723), K£K\£ppai, {kK.Xe(j)drjv) nXecpdeLs ; 2 aor. p. £KXdirTjv. (2)

kXéttto)

kXt(£<û sound the praises of, KXyaœ, euX^cra. Dor. aor. é/cXéï^a from /cXeîfcu. Poetic. (2) kXt(w, later Attic kXéCco shut, kXtjctû), £KXr]o-a, K£KXT]Ka, K£KXripai, 6kXt]'o-0t]v ; KXycrdriaopaL, KeKXr]aopaL, èKXyaàprii' (also kXeutco, fKXfura, etc.). Ion. KXrjiœ, 'tKXi]l(xa, KeKXijlpai, euX-qlcrdriv.

(kXiv-) bend, incline, kXivû, i'KXïva, KÉKXipai, ê/cXîéfyv, epic euXlvdriv, ; 2 aor. p. £kX£vt]v, 2 fut. KXLvfjffopaL ; fut. m. /cXivoDpcu, aor. eKXivâprjv. 602. (2) kXtuû) hear, impf. UXvov (really 2 aor., as from a présent KXev-u) ; 2 aor. imv. kXv6l, kXvt€, epic k.€kXv9l, KénXvTe. Part. KXvpevos renowned. Poetic. xXtvw

740; KXidr]crop.aL

CATALOGUE OF VERBS

381

scratch (in compos.), -watou, -e'Kvaio-a, -K£Kvaitca, -Ke'Kvai(rp.ai, -€Kva£cr0r]v, -Kva«r0T|crop.ai,. Also Att. kvw (as from Kva-u, Kvy-, kvcl-), with ae, a?7 COntracted to y, and aei, ay to y (486). KO|jd£w («Ojutô-) care for, carry, Kopuco, €Kdpwo-a, KeKÔpuKa, K€Kôp.io-pai, £ko|j,Co-0t|v; Kop.i<r0fj<rop.ai ; fut. m. Kop,i,ovp,ai (678 c), aor. eKoptaâpyv. (2) KÔ-rrro) (,kott-) eut, k6*}cm, £KOv|/a, K€KO<j>a (724), part. KeKoirùs Hom., Ke'Kop.p.ai; 2 aor. p. âitÔTTTjv, 2 fut. p. K07rrjcrop,ai ; fut. pf. k€kô\|/o|ach ; aor. m. 'eKofàpyv. (2) KOpe'vvvpu (Kopea-, Kope-) satiate, fut. KOpeau (Hdt.), Kop'eu (Hom.), aor. èKÔpeaa (poet.), KeKopeapai, Ion. KeKÔpypae, 'eKop'eadyv ; epic 2 pf. part. KeKopyûs, aor. m. eKopeaâpyv. 596. (3) Kopticrcrû) (Kopvd-) ariïl, Hom. aor. part. Kopvcraâpevos, pf. pt. Ke.Kopvdp.kvos. Poetic, chiefly epic. (2) kot£« be angry, aor. kKÔreaa, kKoreaâpyv, 2 pf. part. KeKoryùs angry, epic. KpdÇco (Kpây-, Kpay-) cry OUt, fut. pf. KeKpà&pai (rare) ; 2 pf. K£Kpâ-ya (imv. KkKpaxSt- and KeKpayere, Ar.), 2 plpf. eKeKpayere (Dem.) ; 2 aor.eKpa-yov. (2) Kpaiva) (Kpav-) accomplish, Kpavœ, eKpâva, Ion. eKpyva, eKpàvdyv, KpavOyoopai ; pf. p. 3 sing. KeKpavTai (cf. iveipavTai), fut. m. inf. Kpavkeadat, Hom. Ionic and poetic. Epic près, also Kpaïaîvw (possibly for KpàaLvu), aor. kKpyyva, pf. and plpf. KeKpâavraL and KeKpâavTo ; aor. p. 3 pl. 'eKpaavOev (Theocr.). (2) Kpep.ap.cu (Kpepa-) hang (intrans.), Kpep.f|crop.ai. See Kpep,dvvvp.i and Kpipvypi. Kpep.àvvvp.t (Kpepa-) hang (trans.), Kpepuô (Kpepàau in comedy), êKpe'p,ao-a, €Kpep.dcr0T|v. For the mid. (intrans.) see Kpkpapat. (3) KpîÇco (kplk-, Kpiy-) creak, squeak, epic 2 aor. KpiKe or Kplye, 2 p. part. KeKplyores squeaking (Ar.). (2) Kplp.vr]p.i (npip-vy-, Kpip-va-) hang (trans.), rare in act. Mid. Kpipvapai Kpep.ap.ai. Poetic (often wrongly written Kpypvypi) ; used only in près, and impf. (3) Kpivco (kplv-) jlldge, fut. Kpivrô, eKpïva, KeKpiKa, Ke'Kpcpiat, èKpC0r]v (epic 'eKpivdyv), Kpi0i]crop.at ; fut. m. Kpivovp,ai (rarely pass.). 602. (2) Kpotco beat, Kpovcrû), eKpo-ucra, -KeKpouKa, -KeKpo'up.ai and -Ke'KpoTJcrp,ai, -eKpovadyv. KpvirTft) (Kpvf-) COnceal, Kpv\|/«, eKpu\|/a, K€Kpvp.p,ai., €Kpiic}>0T]v; 2 aor. p. eKpvcfyyv (rare), 2 fut. Kpv(3yoopai (rare). (2) KTdop.ai acquire, K'nfjo-op.ai, €KTT|crdp.T|v, K€KTi]p.ai (rarely eKTypai) possess (subj. KeKTÛpai, Opt. KeKrypyv Or KeKrùpyv, 766), €KT^0T|v (as paSS.) ; K€KTfjcrop,ai (rarely kKryaopat) shall possess. KTetvîjp.1 and KTeivvw, in compos., only près, and impf. See KTeCvw. (3) ktcÎvco (ktcv-, ktov-, KTa~v~) kill, fut. KTevw, Ion. Kreveu, epic also Krav'eu, aor. eKTeiva, 2 pf. àir-e'KTova, epic aor. p. eKràdyv ; 2 aor. eKravov (for poetic eKrav and 'eKTâpyv see 694) ; epic fut. m. KTav'eopai. In Attic prose diroKTeivM is generally used; pass. supplied from àwoOvyaKu. 585, 1242. (2) Kvatw scrape,

—

382

GREEK GRAMMAR

ktutw, £KT«ra, e/ma^ai, €ktCo"0t]v ; aor. m. kKrLaàpr]v epic 2 aor. m. part. Kripevos as pass. founded. (2) Kru-rrëo) (ktutt-, KTvire-) SOUnd, cause to SOU7ld, ektvir-qaa, Hom. 2 aor. eKTVirov. Chiefly poetic. 590. kvXCvSoj and kuXivSéco, later kvXîoû, roll, £KvXïo-a, -K€KÎ>Xur[j.ai, €KvXto-0i]v, -Ki)Xï«r0fjcro|i,CH. kvv&o (kv-) kiss, eKucra. Poetic. irpotr-K-uveco do homage to, fut. -irpoo-Kvvfjo-tt, aor. irpoo-€KiivT]a-a (poet. Trpoaéicvcra), are common in prose and poetry. (3) Kvu-Ttt (ku4>~) stoop, Kinpco and nvipopai, aor. £Kvt|/a, 2 p. K£KÎJ<j>a. (2)

ktC£« (see 620) found,

(rare)

;

{nvp-, Kvpe-) meet, happen, Kupéo) is regular.

Kvp<o

kvp<tco, envpaa

(682, 689). Chiefly poetic. (2)

Xa-yx^vû) (Xa%-, Xrçx-) obtain by lot, fut. m. Xrj£op.ai, Ion. XâÇopai., 2 pf. eïXiixa, Ion. and poet. XkXoyxa., pf- m- £ÏXtyi«u, aor. p. ëXfjxOiiv ; 2 aor. i'Xaxov, epic 'éXXaxov (redupl. XkXaxov). 559, 638. (3) Xap.(3avb> (Xa/3-, Xrjfj-) take, Xfj\|/o|ACH, £ÏXti<J>a, «ïX^ppai (poet. XkXr] pipai), ëXfjtj>0r|v, Xrj<f>0f|cropai ; 2 aor. eXaôv, kXaf3ôp.riv (epic inf. XeXa/3kcr0a<., 559)Ion. Xàpiipopcu (better Xâipopai), XeXà^rjKa, XéXappat, kXâp.cj>dr]v ) Dor. fut. XâipovpaL, aor. p. kXt,<j>9riv. 604, 638. (3) XcLpirco shine, Xdp\|/w, «Xap.\|/a, pf. \é\ap.ira (poetic). XavOdvw ÇkafJ-, \tj6-) lie hid, escape the notice of, Xfjo-a», 2 pf. X^XiÔo, 2 aor. ëXaOov. Mid. forget, £mXf|crofiai, -XëXr]o-pai, fut. pf. XeXrçcro/uai, 2 aor. èXadôpriv. Epic 2 aor. XkXaOov, Xe\adôp.r]v (559), Dor. 2 pf. XkXàda, Hom. pf. m. XéXacrpaL. Poetic près. X-qdw, aor. eXrjaa. 638. (3) XauTto (Xa/3- or Xa</>-) lap, lick, Xa\pco, eXavj/a, pf. XcXa<j>a (724) ; fut. m. -Xàxtoficu, èXcupâpriv. (2) XdcrKM for XaK-ffKCxi (Xclk-, Xa/ce-) Speak, XaKrjaopai, kXaKrjaa, 2 pf. XkXâKa, epic XéXTjKa with fem. part. XeXaKvîa ; 2 aor. eXanov, epic XeXaKô/j.rjv. Poetic. 648. (4) Xdw, Xœ wish, Xfjs, Xfj, etc. ; inf. X^. 486. Doric. Xé-yto say, Xé'£co, é'Xeâ, X^Xf-ypai (bi-t'iXeypai), ÈXe'xOtiv ; fut. X£X0f[tro|iai, Xeôpai, XeXéô/uat, ail passive. For pf. act. ^pîca is used (see eïpœ, ftirov). Xë-yw gather, arrange, count (Attic only in comp.), Xëfjw, 'îXtâ, £ÏXoxa, £ÏX£-yp,ai or XëXf-yiiiu, kXkxByv (rare) ; aor. m. kXeÇàfjiyv, 2 aor. p. k\éyi\v, fut. Xfyfj«ro(j.ai. Epic 2 aor. m. (kXkyp-qv) Xckto counted. See stem X£x-. XtiiTta (Xei7r-, Xoltt-, Xltt-, 585) leave, XfCvJ/w, X£'X£i|x|iai, IX£Ccj>0t]v; 2 pf. XëXoiira; 2 aor. É'Xnrov, kXLTTop-qv. See synopsis in 477, and inflection of 2 aor., 2 pf., and 2 plpf. in 481. XfXtîjiAai, see XiXaio/xai. \tv<o stone, generally KaTa-Xfvw stone to death, -X£v<rw, -ÉXfvo-a, -£XeW0Tiv (600), -X£v<r0fjarop,ai. (X£X-), cf. Xéx-os; 2 aor. m. (kXkyprjv) 'éXeKTo laid himself to rest, with imv.

CATALOGUE OF VERBS

383

Xé£o (also Xé£to), inf. Kara-XkxOai, part. Kara-Xkypevos (696 b). Also eXe£a laid to rest, with mid. XkÇopai will go to rest and kXeÇâprjv went to rest.

Only epic. \t)0o>, poetic : see Xav0dv<o. (Xrjïô-) plunder, act. rare, only impf. kX-qïÇov. Mid. XT]ti;op,ai (as act.), Ion. fut. Xtjiaopai, aor. kXrjïaàprjv. Eurip. has kXrjao.iJ.-rjv, and pf. p. XkXrjopcu. (2) XiXa£o|iai (Xaa-, Xa-) desire eagerly, only près., impf., and pf. XeXiripcu, part. XeXcTjjxkvos eager. Hom. Cf. Xâu. (2) \(<r<ro|iai or (rare) XCTojiai (Xtr-) supplicate, epic éXXiaàprjv, 2 aor. eXirop-qv. (2) Xo«« (Xofe-) epic for Xouw ; Xokaaopac, èXôeaaa, kXoeaa aprjv. Xovw wash, bathe, regular. In Attic writers and Hdt. the près, and impf. generally have contracted forms (Xov- becoming Xo-) where a short thematic vowel would appear ; e.g. Xovo>, Xoveis, Xovei, but Xodpev, XoOre, Xovai ; éXou, XoDrai, Xovodai ; aor. ïXoxxra, pf. X€'Xov|j.cu. 488. Xva» (Xv-, Xv-) loose, see synopsis and full inflection in 475 and 480. Hom. also Xuco (C). Epic 2 aor. m. kXbprjv (as pass.), XOro and XO to, Xvvto; pf. opt. XeXdro and XeXdvro (766). 604. liaCvti) (pav-, jxrjv-) madden, aor. «yriva, pf. pi^va arn mad, 2 aor. p. «pavTjv. Mid. hcUvojjlch be mad ; pavovpai (Hdt.) ; poetic are kprjvàptjv and jjejj.clvrjij.cu. (2) |xa(o|xai (jjaa-, jlooi-, jiai-, 636) desire, seek. Ep. pàoaopai, kpaa(a)àprjv. Also Aeolic près, pâopac (contracted pcorcu, poivrai, pœao, pœadai, pcopevos) and epic and poetic jjoujido belong here. (2) p,av0avio (paO-, jdaOe-) leam, paO^cropcu, n«[xd0r]Ka ; 2 aor. <ya0ov. Hom. 'éppaOov. 638. (3) fidpvapai (jiap-va-) fight (subj. pàpvœpai, impf. jjàpvao) ; only in près, and impf. Poetic. (3) H.dpirTto (jxap-K-) seize, pàpypoj, epap\[/a, epic 2 pf. pkpaprra, 2 aor. pkpaprrov (559). Poetic. (2) paTTW (pay-) knead, pd£a>, 'épaÇa, pkpaxa, pkpaypai ; 2 aor. p. £p.dy»]v. (2) |idxo|xai (pax-, paxe-) fight, fut. p,axovp,ai, aor. €[xax€crdp.Tiv, pf. |i£p.dxi]pai. Ion. forms are Hom. près, pax^opai, part, paxeovpevos and paxeiopevos, fut. paxtaaopai (paxvaopai) and paxkopai, Hdt. paxrjcropai, aor. kpaxea (a) âptjv. |xlSo|j.ai (pe5-, peôe-) think of, plan, pe5rjaopai (rare). Epic. p.e0-tT]iu let loose ; see ïrjfu (514). Hdt. pf. part, pepenpkvos. |i£0v<rK(i> (pedv-) make drunk, kpkdvaa. Pass. ptOvonopai be made drunk, aor. p. kpedbodrjv became drunk. See p.£0v«. (4) |j.£0vw be drunk, only près, and impf.

384

GREEK GRAMMAR

|i,eC"yvv|Ai (jj.ei.y-, piy-) mix,

also

(j.€i-yvv<o

and plaryoi, fut.

ë(i.€i|a, (j.é-

€|aé(x.0t]v, 2 aor. p. éutyiv > p^x^veropac (rare) ; epic 2 fut. pass. piypaopaL, 2 aor. m. eptKTO (OT 'épeLKTO) ; poetic fut. pf. pepei&pat.. Formerly written piyvvpi ; the spelling with et is attested by the inscrip¬ tions. (3) (xetpojicu (jxep- for ajiep-, p.op-, pap-) obtain a share, epic, 2 pf. 3 sing. epjiope ; impers. eïjjiapTai (552) it is fated, elpappévp (as subst.) Fate. (2) (peXX-, peXXe-) am going to, augm. èp- or pp- (536) ; p.eXXf|crco, epeXX-qo-a. (Ae'Xa) (pe\-, IueXe-) COUCem, care for, peXrjaœ, epic pek-qaopaL, 2 pf. péprjXa ; pepeX-qpai, epic pép(3XeTCu, pépPXero, for pepXerai, pepXero (108) ; (epeX-qdpv) peXrjdeLs. Poetic. fj-éXeL it concerns, impers. ; peX^jo-ei, ènéXr|a-e, (lepeX^KÊ, used in Attic prose, with «TrifiiXoixai and êmfj.e\eo|Aai., èm|jte\T)(ro|j.ai,, €TriH€[JiéX'q(xai, éire|xeX-ri0Tiv. (i€|xova (pev-, pov-, pa- for pv-) desire, 2 pf. with présent meaning; dual péparov, pl. pepapev, p'epare, pepàâai, impf. pepârui, part, pepàcos and pepaœs, pepavta, inf. pepovkvai (Hdt.). See 728. Epic and poetic. jxévco (pev-, peve-) remain, fut. (j-evcà (Ion. pevkoo), eneiva, p.ep,eVqKa. 633. |X£ppLT|pt^a> (see 620) ponder, àirepeppppLaa (Ar.), but peppppi^a epic. (2) |jif|8o|Aai devise, ppaopaL, èprjaàpriv. Poetic. (j.r|Kcxo|j.ai (pria-, pai<-, 591) bleat, Hom. 2 aor. part, patccov; 2 pf. part. peprjKcos, pepaKvîa ; 2 plpf. 'epeppuov (654 d). Chiefly epic. 728. p.T]Ttd(o (ptjTL—, 591) plan. Mid. p.r]Tido(xai, |xtiT£o(jiai (Pind.), ppAo-opaL, eprjTlaâppv. Epic and lyric. (Aiaîvw (piav-) stain, ptavw, èfxtâva, peptao-pai, €(J.idv0t]V, (uavOfja-opai. (2) pi-yvv|w mix, see pe£Yvvfu. p,i[i,vf|<rK« and (older) (j.l(j.vt)'o-kû) (pva-, 647) remind; mid. remember; nvfjo-w, ë|xvricra, (x^(Avr)|j.ai remember, è[ivf|cr0r|v (as mid.) mentioned; |ivr]o-0f|o-o|iai., p,vfjo-o|Aai, p.efxvfjcro|j.ai shall keep in mind ; èpvrjacippv (poet.). (j.é|xvT|nai (memini) has subj. pepvûpcu (754), opt. pepvrjppv (766), imy. pépvrjcro, Hdt. pepveo, inf. pepvrjadai, part, pepvppevos. (4). From epic pvàopai corne kpvwovro, pvcoôpevos. 659. |i.£|j.v« (pev-, pv-) for pi-pv-co (604, 605) remain, poetic form of jxévw. jj.£trY«> (pt-y-) for pi-p-cryœ (604, 648) mix, près, and impf. See (jietYvvin. (4) |avÇû> SUCk, Ion. pvÇkœ, aor. -epv^paa (Hom.). p.-u^co (pvy-) grumble, mutter, aor. épvÇa. (2) [ivKdoptai. (pvK-, pvK—, pvna-, 591) bellow, epic 2 pf. pkpma', 2 aor. pvkov; èpvKrjaàpriv. Chiefly poetic. H,vtt« (pvk-) wipe, àiro-n,v£d[Aevos, plpf. àir-epépvkto. In comedy. (2) (J.TÎIC0 shut (the lips or eyes), aor. «puo-a, pf. [X6|xvKct. |j,eiY|j,ai,

—

(va-, vr]-) in vw spin, près, vfjs, vfj (486), inf. vrjv, part, vûv ; €Vi}0T]V.

fut. vfjo-w, €vr]o-a,

CATALOGUE OF VERBS

385

636) swim, be full, impf. vaiov Od. 9, 222. (2) 636) dwell, evaaaa CClUSed to dwell, èvaaaàp-rjv came to dwell, €vàadT]v was settled, dwelt. Poetic. (2) vaTTco (vaô-, va-y-) stuff, evaÇa (epic and Ion.), v£vacrp.ai. (Ar.) or vévaypai (Hippocr.). 624. (2) (va») v» spin, see stem va-. V61K&I) and V€IKé(w (veinea-, veine-, 597) chide, veinéaic, ève'iKe<r(a)a. Ionic, chiefly epic. (2) vêtent it is snowing ; -évtn|/€. Formerly written vicj>ei. v€|x» (vep.-, vepe-) distribute, v€|A», ëveipa, vevép^Ka, vevë|j.T]|Aai,, €V€(j.r]0r]v ; vaCw

(vaf-,

vafi-, va,L-,

va£w

(vacr-,

va-,

ve/ioufiai,

èveipaprfv. 590.

véofxai (vea-) go, come, also in future sense. Chiefly poetic. See vio-opai. v€» (vev-, vef-, vv-, orig. avev-) swim, vewovpai (679), ëvevora, véveuKa. 611. vë» heap up, «videra, v€vr](j.aL (? v'evrfofxai). For the près. Att. generally uses X.6». Epic and Ion. VT]ë», vrprfaa, 'evrpqaàp-qv. vf|0» spin, vîjo-w, evî]o-a, tvfjOîjv; epic aor. m. vffaavTo. See (va-). v££« (vi/3-, viy-), later v'iirTœ, Hom. viinopai, WCLsh, vL\l/œ, ëvuj/a, v€vip.|iai, -evL<p07]v (Hippocr.) ; v£»j/ojjiai, kvi\J/apr]v. 619. (2) vtoro|i,ai (vea-, redupl. vi-v(e)a-iopai) go, fut. vïaopai. Cf. 604. (2) See veofjai. voé<û think, perceive, vo^cr», etc., regular in Attic. Mid. usually in comp., as

fut. biavo-qOrfaopai.

Ion.

evcoaa, vevoina, vevwpai,

èvutaàpTfv.

vop.££w (see 620) believe, fut. vop,i» (678 c), aor. €vé|AKra, pf. v€vôp.iKa, VÉv6|U<r|iai, aor. p. €vop.£<r0t]v, fut. p. vopiadifaopai, fut. m. vopiovpai (Hippocr.). (2) v» spin, see (va-).

(■€» (Çecr-, Çe-) scrape, aor. 'éÇeaa and féo-o-a, chiefly epic, €ÊÉtrp,at. 597, 598. £r]pa(v» (Çr/pav-) dry, £r|pavw, ë£f|pava, €£fjpacrp.ai and late èÇrjpappai, è^npav0i]v. Ion. aor. è^priva. 732. (2) ijv» polish, «ijwra, 'éÇvapai, €£vo-0î]V. 598. oSoiirope'w travel, regular; but pf. ôôonreTrôprfKa for ùSonrôprfKa (565). ôSoirou» make a way, regular ; but pf. part, œôoireiroiypévos for ùôoiroirfpévos occurs (566). (ô8v-) be angry, only Hom. ù8v(a)aàprfv, 68û8vapai. o£w (68-, ôfe-) smell, ô£fjo-«, wjftcra, Ion. ôfécrw, ojÇeaa, Hom. plpf. 68w8ei as impf. 590. Aeol. has 6a8u. (2) oï-y» open, poetic o'î£co and œÇa, aor. p. part. oixOeis. ot'-yvvp.i, simple form late in active, impf. p. ùïyvvpyv Hom. (ùeiyvvpyvl), aor. «i£a (&>et£a?). In prose in composition : see àv-o£-yvU|n. oîSa (foiô-), 2 pf. as près, know, see eî5ov. 529. olSéw swell, wSijaa, q>8r]Ka. Also ot8dv».

386

GREEK GRAMMAR

olKTtpco (o'iktlp-) later written oinreipu, pity (630), aor. ukrlpa. (2) olvo\oê(o pour mine, oipoxorjaco, oivoxorjacu (epic and lyric). Impf. epic 3 ,

oivoxôei,

œvoxoet,,

ecovoxôei. 566.

pers.

ot'opas. (oi-, oie-) think (582 g), in prose generally otp.ai and up/rjv in 1 pers. sing. ; olfyro|Acu, <î>t|0î]v. Epic act. oico (only 1 sing.), often oiu ; oiopcu, àioàpriv, ùAoOyv. olpai is probably a perfect. ot'o-û»

s hall

bear,

see

<j>e'pw.

oi'xopai (oix~, oixe-, oîx°~) be gone, ot\^<rop.ai, oixwKa or o'Lxyp-cu or cçxvgaL> doubtful. oke'XXco

(ô«eX-)

run

ashore,

aor.

wxwKa

(592)

;

Ion.

«i«iXa. Prose form of /céXXco. (2)

ôXicrOdvo) (oXLad-, bXiade-), also -oXiadaLva) slip, Ion. -eoXLaOyaa, àiXLcrdyKa',

2 aor. wXiadov (poetic). (3) oXXvpi (ôX-, ôXe-, ôXo-, 640), for bX-vv-pi, also -oXXvu destroy, lose, ôXw, «Xeo-a, -oXcoXsku; 2 pf. oXwXa am ruined, 2 plpf. -«XcoXii (558). Mid. oXXvpai be lost, -oXoOpai, 2 aor. -coXopr^v, epic part. ovXopevos ruinons. Epic also fut. éXétr(cr)co. In prose dir-6XXvpi, also 5t- and è£-. (3) ôXo<{>vpopai (oXocfrvp-) bewail, fut. ôXocjujpotpcu, wXo<j>îipdpT]v, part. ôXo<f>vpdeLs made to lament (Thuc.). (2) opvvpi and ôp,vtitt (opopo-, 592) swear, opovpai, up.ocra, ôpcopoKa 0pcop.oa~p.cn (with ôpcoporai.), ûpô6r]v and «poo-O^ v ; ôpoo~0f|o-opai., aor. m. copoaâpyv. (3) ôpop-yvvpt (bpopy-) wipe, ôp6p£op<H, upopÇa, côpopljàprjv ; àir-opopxdds. Chiefly poetic. (3) ôv£vii|ii (bvy-, ova-, probably for bv-ovy-pi, 605) benefit, Ôvrjo-W, uv^cra, a>vf|0T]v ; bvyaopac', 2 aor. m. (hvrjpyv, bva.Lp.yv, ovaadai. (covâpyv late), Hom. imv. ovyao, pt. bvypevos. 707. j Svopcu insuit, inflected like ôLSopai, with opt. ovolto (Hom.), fut. bvoaaopai, aor. ùvo(a)aàpyv (œvaro II. 17, 25), aor. p. Kar-ovoadfjs (Hdt.). Ionic and poetic. o£uvco (b£vv~) sharpen, -o|uv«, «£ôva, -w£vppai, -co|t>v0r|V, -o^vvdyaopai Hippocr. 732. In Attic prose only in compos. (usually irap-). (2) ôirv£« (ottv-, 636) take to wife, fut. biriaco (Ar.). (2) épdw (ôpa- for popa-, ott-) see, imperf. Icopwv (537, Ion. &pu>v), ovj/opai, lôpSxa or Icopaxa (plpf. Itopaxt]), coppai or écopapai, wc|)0t]v, ôtjjO'qo-opai ; 2 pf. oira»ira (Ion. and poet.). For 2 aor. eîSov etc., see «î8ov. Hom. près, mid. 2 sing. bpyai, 659 d. Aeol. près, opypt. (bpyppC), New Ion. bpkœ. (5) ôp-ya(vco (ôpyav-) be angry, aor. cbpyâva enraged. Only in tragedy. (2) ôpé-yco reach, bpéÇœ, wpe^a, Ion. pf. cbpeypai, Hom. 3 plur. bpœp'exa.Ta.1, plpf. bpupexa.ro, aor. pass. as mid. ùpéxdyv ; ôpé£opcu, ù>pe£dpr|v. Epic bp'eyvvpi, près. part, opeyvvs. opvvp.i (op-) raise, rouse, 'ôpau, S>paa, 2 pf. opwpa am roused, epic 2 aor. ibpopov ; mid. rise,'rush, fut. bpovpai, pf. opcopepaL, 2 aor. ùpbpyv with upro, imv. opcro, opaeo, ôpaev, inf. bpOai, part, oppevos. Poetic. (3)

CATALOGUE OF VERBS

387

ôpvTTw (opvy-) dig, ôpv|o>, wpv^a, -opwpvxa (rare), ôp<6pv-y|i.cu (ibpvypai rare and doubtful), wp{»x0T]v ; fut. p. KaT-opvx0f|crop.<H, 2 fut. KaTopvxfj<rop,ai ; ùpvZâp-qv caused to dig Hdt. (2) oo-<J>pa(vopcu (ocrippav-, ôatfrpe-, 643) smell, ôo-tfjpi^cropaL, ùarfrpâvdyv (rare), 2 aor. m. ùaippôpyv, Hdt. aHTifrpavTo. (2, 3) ovplu mingo, irnpf. èovpovv, fut. ovpfjcronai,, aor. èovpT]ora, pf. €ovpr)Ka. New

Ionic has ovp- for Attic kovp-. ovt&£<o (616) wound, oîiTâaœ, ovracra, ovrairpai. Chiefly epic. (2) ovTdw wound, ovTTjtra, ovrridrjv ; athematic 2 aor. 3 sing. oCra (cf. 696), inf. ovràpevaL and ovràpep ; 2 aor. m. ovrâpevos as passive. Epic.

ô<f>c(X<o (ô</>eX-, ô0etÀÉ-, 631) owe, ôtjjetXfjo-w, ôkJjïCXtjo-ci, «<|>€CXî]Ka, aor. p. part. ô<j>eiXî]0££s ; 2 aor. »(j>«Xov, used in wishes (1360), 0 that. Hom. has the Aeol. form ô</>éXXw.

(2)

b$é\\o> (ô<êX-) increasé, aor. opt. ô^éXXeie Hom. Poetic, especially epic. (2) ô«j>Xio-Kavw (à<f>X-, otpXe-, ô4>Xi<tk-) owe, be guilty, incur a penalty, ô<J>Xfj(ra>, w<j>XT]cra (?), ^«4>Xr]Ka, w(j)Xt]pai ; 2 aor. «cj>Xov (ocfrXeLv and ocf)Xœv, for ô<pXeïv and o4>Xœp, are said by grammarians to be Attic forms of inf. and part., as from a later présent 6</>X«). (3, 4) o\|/o|xai, see ôpâoj. iratÇw (7rai5-, 7rcuY-) sport, iraiôvpai, «iraura, irÉTraïKa, irîrcucrpcu. Att. fut. probably iraicropai. 618, 679. (2)

{irai-, traie-) Strike, ira£cro) and •»raifja-« (Ar.), (598).

ira£û>

iraXaCco

wrestle, ÈiràXaura, eiraXaiaOrjv (598)

;

«raiera,

iréiraïKa, èiraLadpp

fut. iraXaiao} in epic.

(iraX-) brandish, eirrfXa, iréiroXpai ; Hom. redupl. 2 aor. àp-ireiraXicv, as if from ireiraXop ; 2 aor. m. etraXro and 7râXro. (2) irapavopéw transgress the law, augm. irapevépow and irap^vbpow, irapavEvô|rr]Ka iràXXco

(565). irapoivéw insuit (as a drunken man), impf. «raptivow; ÈTrapa>vrça-a, -rrEirapwvrçKa, irapwvfjGriv (Dem.) and ETrapa>vT|0T]v (567). ira<rop.ai fut. shall acquire (no près.), pf. iréirâpai possess, £ir5o-àp,t|v. Poetic = KTaopai. Not to be confounded with irâaopai, tTraaappv, etc. (with a) of iraréopai eat. irà«rx« (trevd-,' ttopQ-, traO- for irvO-), for irad-aKin (648) suffer, ir££<rop.ai (for irevO-cropai, 70), 2 pf. ir£irov0a (Hom. ireiroarOe Or iretracrde for ireirovdaTe, and ireiradvla) ; 2 aor. eiraOov. 585. (4) ira,Tàcr<rw strike, près, and impf. epic. Att. uses tvittw or iracw in près. System, but has 7raTâ£û>, ÈiraTaija ; Hom. tK-Tveirà.Taypai ; eiraraxOpp late. Perf. and aor. pass. in Att. from irXf|TT« (irÉirXîpypai, ÈTrXf|ytiv). (2) wa,T€0|ACU (xar-, irare-) eat, fut. iracrovrai (?), e7ra((r)aàfJLT]v (Hoiïl.) ; epic plpf. TreTràa/jirjv. 590. Epic and New Ionic. Not to be confounded with irâaofJLai.

GREEK GRAMMAR

388

(623, 625) sprinkle, irdaw, ë-iratra, €irdtr0Tjv ; usually in comp. and chiefly in comedy. Hom. has only près, and impf. (2) iravto stop, cause to cease, iravcra>, ïiravcra, iréiravKa, TrÉiravp.ai, €Trav0T]v (kiravadqv and kiravdqv Hdt.), -Jrav0f|crop.ou,, ir€iravi(ro|jiCH. Mid. iravop.ai

-irdrrw

cease

(intrans.),

iravo-op.ai., £iravo-ap.T|v.

(ireud-, ttolO-, ttlO-) persuade, treia-co, ÉTreitra, ir£ir£iKa, ir£ir£icrp.ai am convinced, believe, £ir££cr0T]v (66), ir£io-0fja-op.ai ; fut. m. imo-op.ai ; 2 pf. ir£iroi.0a trust, with imv. iréireiadi (perhaps for ire-irradi) Aesch. Eum. 599, Hom. plpf. kirkirLdpev for eireiroLdepev, 728 ,' poet. 2 aor. 'éiriBov and eiriQopqv, epic redupl. -ivkin.dov (559). From -Kide-, epic ttldqaœ shall obey, ireirid-qaoj shall persuade, irLdqaas trusting (590). ttcCkco, epic près. = irenTkco comb. ireCOco

ireivau

{ireivq-, ireiva-) hunger, regular, except in epic irei.vqiJ.evaL, etc. See 486.

inf. ireLvrjv,

ircCpw (irep-, irap-) pierce, epic in près. ; 'éireLpa, 587. Ionic and poetic. (2)

for

in contract forms,

ireirapp.au,

àv-etràp-qv Hdt.

(ireK-, ireKre-, 590) comb, shear, Dor. fut. 7re£<S, aor. eire^a (Theocr.), epic kire^âpqv ) aor. p. eirexOqv. See epic ireinaj. Poetic. Att. uses ktev££û> or £a£vio comb, Keîpw shear. ireXa^w (cf. iréXas near ; see 620) bring near, approach, fut. ireXâaco, Att. ireXœ (678 b), 'eireXacra, ireirXiqpaL (epic), 'eireXà-ad-qv (epic), eirXaOqv (trag.) ; epic 'eireXacrcra, with mid. eireXaaâpqv ; 2 aor. m. kirX-qpqv approached. Also poetic présents ireXàœ, ireXàOoj, irXadoo, iriXvapaL. (2) irÉXw and irÉXop.ai (ireX-, irX-) be, impf. 'éireXov, èireXôpqv ; 2 aor. 'éirXe, eirXeo (êirXev), eirXero ', SO eiri—irXopevos and irepL-irXôpevos. Poetic. tt€ktita

irépiro) (irepir-, irop.Tr-) send, ire'|J.\J/<o, £ir€p,\j/a, -rrêirop.c^a (585, 724), Tr£ir£p.pai (81, 499 a), êir£p,<j)0T]v, ir£p,c}>0fjo-op,ai, ; ir£pu|/op,ai., £ir£p.\j/dpr|v. ir€7raCvci) (ireirav-) make soft, ripen, £Tr£7râva (688), £ir£'irdv0T]v, ir£irav0fjcrop ai. (2) ir£irop£tv or 7T£trap£îv show, 2 aor. inf. in Pind. P. 2, 57, see (irop-). irÉirptoTai it is fated : see (irop-). irÉpSojACu (irepô-, iropô-, irapô-), Lat. pedo, 2 fut. irap8fj<rop,ai, 2 pf. iréiropSa, 2 aor. fiirapSov. See 585, 587. 7T£p0co (irepd-, irpad-) destroy, sack, irkpaœ (ir'epcropai Hom.), eirepoa, epic 2 aor. eirpadov (587), m. 'eirpaOopqv (as pass.) with inf. irepOaL for irepd-aOai. Poetic. Prose 7rop0Ew. ir^pvr)p,i (irep-va-) Sell, fut. irepau, kirepaa{a)a', mid. irkpvapau, pf. part, ireirepqpevos. Chiefly epic. Prose ir«Xé« and diro8£8op.ai ; cf. iruirpaa-Kw. 642. (3) ir£TdvvUp.i (irera-, irra-) expand, ttetw, Èirérao-a, iren-Tapai. Fut. kK-ireTàaœ Eur., pf. mid. ireirkraapaL late, aor. p. ireràadqv Hom. See 7r£TVî]p.i. (3) TTÊTOpai

(irer-,

ttt-) fly, irTqaopaL (poet. irerijcropaL) ; 2 aor. m. kirTÔpqv. (poet.) belong 2 aor. eirryv and kirràpriv (694). The forms

irere-,

To irkrapai

CATALOGUE OF VERBS -KeiïOTr\\xai

tir Tapai.

389

and kiroTqdriv (Dor. -âpai, -adqv) belong to TrorâopaL. Late is

(ireK-, irew-) œok, Éir€\|/a, 7r€TrÉpp.CH (79, 499 a), £7T€<j>0T]v. See (2) ir«v0o(iai (7revd-, irvO-) : see mjv0d.vop,ai. iré<j)vov slew, see (4>«'-). irfj-yvûp.i (iri)y-, way-) fasten, ir^co, «Tnâ, kTrqxôqv (rare and poet.) ; 2 aor. p. £iràyr]v, 2 fut. p. irayf|crop,CH ; 2 pf. iréirTi-ya be fixed, be frozen ; epic 2 aor. m. Kar-kirqKTO ; 7T777vvto (Plat.) près. opt. for Tvqyvv-l-ro (766); TTTJÔfjLCLLj kirT]îip7]V Ion. (3) irïcuvw (iritxp-) fatten, irïavâ>, kiriâva, ir€macr|Aai. Chiefly poetic and Ionic. (2) ir£Xvap.ai (iri\-va-) approach, only in près, and impf. 642. Epic. See ireXà£a>. (3) 7rî|j.7rXr][XL (77X77-, -rrXa-, with p assimilated) fill, TrXf]crw, ëirXt]<ra, Tré7rXr]Ka, •n-éirXTicr(j,ai, èirXVjcr0T|v, irXîio-0fjcrop.at, ; aor. m. kirXqaâpqv (trans.) ; 2 aor. m. kirXqp'qv (707), chiefly epic, with kv-'eirXqTO, Opt. kp-irXqp-qv, kp-irXfjTO, impf. 'ép-TrXqao, part. kp-wXqpevos, in Aristoph. 613. Cf. irXridœ, in prose Only ■n-XfjOouo-a, also poet. irXridvœ and irXr)6vvopai, and irXrjpôw. irC|xirpT||XL (irpr)-, irpa-, with p. assimilated) bum, irpfjo-w, «rp^cra, irsirp^pat and irk-n-pqcrpai (Hdt.), €irpi]<r0T]V ; Ion. fut. irprjcropai, fut. pf. TreTrpqaopat. 613. Cf. irpqdui blow. ireTTW

626.

(ttlvv-) mafe wise, Hom. aor. kiripvcrcra. Poetic. See irvéw. (4) (7TI-, 7to-, 7TÙJ-) drink, fut. irfopai (iriovpai rare) ; iréirwKa, iréiro|j.ai, €ir60T]v, iro0f|crop,ai ; 2 aor. (iriov. Aeol. ttcovcû. 681. (3) mirtcKto (tî-) give to drink, nia-œ, eirlcra. New Ionic and poetic (nio-às Aristotle). See irïvw. (4) iriTTfjao-Ko) (xpâ-) sell, epic Trepâcrœ, kirkpacra, irîrpâKa, ir€irpâp,ai, Hom. Treweprjpkvos, €iTpa0T]v (Ion. -T)pai, -fidrjv) ; fut. pf. ir€Trpa(rop.ai. The Attic uses forms of diro8îSop.ai and ira>X4» for près., fut., and aor. (4) hwtw (7reT-, 7tt-, 7TT6J-, 605) fall, fut. Trecro tpcu, Ion. iretrkopai ; pf. irÉirTWKa, 2 pf. part. ireiTTCos, epic TreirTr/œs OT -ews ; 2 aor. Shrecrov, Dor. Aeol. eirerov. itCtvtip,i (jrlt-va-) spread, près, and impf. act. and mid. ; also ttltvo.w. 642. Epic and lyric. See ircrdwv|u. (3) ttitvw, poetic for irfirro». (3) irXdô) (-jrXayy-) cause to wander, 'éwXayÇa. Pass. and mid. •n-Xd.Çop.cu wander, irXâyôpai wïll wander, kirXàyxdvv wandered. Ionic and poetic. (2) irXdTTCo (see 625) form, mould, ïirXatra, n-4irXao-|ACH, 4irXa(r0r]v ; kirXaaâpqp. Ion. fut. àva-irXâaco. (2) irXtKa» (irXeK-, ttXok-, ttXcik-) plaît, knit, irXé£«, «irXtÇa, iréirXe-fpcu, kirXkxGyv, irXexOvaopai ; 2 aor. p. «irXàioiv ; aor. m. kirXeÇâpqv. Ion. 7rXé£w, -irkirXoxa (probably also Att.) and -irk-rrXexa. ttlvwko) •7TIVO»

390

GREEK GRAMMAR

(irXev-, trXef-, irXv-) sail, irX€v<rop.cu or ir\ÉVO-ov(xai, ihrX£vora, iréirXevKa, ir£irX€vcrp.ai, èirXevadTjv (later). 600, 611. Ion. and poet. 7rXcocOj irXûao/iai, ÏTrXœaa, iréirXaiKa, epic 2 aor. éirXcjv. Epie près, also TrXeiœ, Att. irXd>fco.

rr\éo)

wX^ttw (irXrjy-, irXay-, 34) strike, irXrj|a», e-n-Xi^a, Tr€irXr|-yHtti., èirXrixOv1' (rare) ; 2 pf. Trétr\r\ya ; 2 aor. p. fir\i\yr]v, in comp. -€irXâ-yT|v (745) ; 2 fut. p. irXii7^0-0(jiai and -irXa'yfjo-opai ; fut. pf. •JM-n-XT^opai ; epic 2 aor. véirXriyop (or é7re7rX-), TreirXr]yôfj.7]i'; Ion. aor. m. kirXri^àpriP. Att. uses COmp. forms in près., impf., fut., and aor., or substitutes tvittw and -traCa. Cf. TraT«3ur<rw. (2) irXwv» (ttXvp-) wash, irXvvû, ïirXtiva, irén-Xv|xai, eirXW^v ; fut. m. (àS pass.) tK-irXvpovp.aL. 602. (2) irXww, Ionic and poetic : see irX4«. irvéo) (irvev-, irvef-, irvv-) breathe, blow, -irvtvo-ojxai and Trv«\)<rov(j.ai, €7rv€\jcra, ir£irv€VKa, epic ireirpvpai be WÎse, part. ireTrpvpépos WÎSe, plpf. iréirvvao ; late èirpevadrjp, Hom. àfjL-irvvvOrjv. For epic âp-wpve etc., see àva-irv€« and d|x1TVVÏ.

See

IttVVCK».

irvf'yw (irvïy-, irpty-) choke, trv£|w, Dor. •jrvt£ovpai, i-irvijja, •ir^7rvï-y|j.ai, êirv£-yrjv,

irvi-y^o-opai.. 584. desire, iroGfjo-w or Tro0«rop.ai, €Trô0T]o-a or èiréOto-a. 596, 597. irov^w labor, irov^o-ai etc., regular, but Ionic irovécru and èiroveo-a (Hippocr. MSS.). 596, 597. Older près. ?roféo/xcu (1244), Dor. and Aeo1. wovolu. iro0ew

(irop-, irpw-) give, allot, 2 aor. 'énopop (poet.), pf. p. ireirpupat., chiefly impers., 7r€7rpwTai it is fated (with tj -nwptop^vri F aie) ; redupl. 2 aor. inf. ireiropeïp (ireirapéiv) in Pind. to show. Poetic except in perf. part. ■jrpaTT» (rrpây-) do, irpaÇ», «Trpââ, Tréirpaxa (trans. have effected, a later form, 725), irîrpâ-ypai, èirpaxOilv, irpâx0ô-op,ai, fut. pf. irtirpagopai ; intrans. pf. TrêVpâ-ya am faring (well or ill, 1250 c), also have done; mid. fut. irpaôpai, aor. 'eivpà^àppp. Ionic irp^jo-(rti» (irprjy-), irpri^w, eirp-qâ, -rreirprjx0-! TveirppypaL, kirprjxôriP ; irkirpriya ; irp-qôpaL, kirpp^àppv. (2) (wpia-) buy, only 2 aor. «irpiap-qv, inflected throughout in 504 ; see synopsis in 503.

•jrpfco saw, €irpïcra, irfirpïcrp.cu, 3irp£cr0T]v. 598. irpottro-opai (irpoLn-) beg, once in Archil. (cf. irpoÎKa gratis) ; fut. only in Kara-irpoiôpac (Ar.) ; Ion. Kara-irpotôpai. (2) irràpvupai (irrap-) sneeze ; 2 aor. eirrapov ; also 1 aor. ewrapa, 2 aor. pass. kiTTàpT}v (Aristotle). (3) imrj<r(ra> ttto.k-) COWer, €-rrTT]â, êirrqxO' ; 2 aor. part. KarairraKUP (Ar.). From stem irra- epic 2 aor. Karairr^T-qv, dual ; 2 pf. part. ireirTpùis. Poetic also -rrrworo-w (cf. Trrœx-ôs beggar, 7rrw£ hare). (2) tttIttw pound (ittlct-), eiTTiaa (Hdt.), -£irTi<rp,cu (Ar.), late -eirriad-qv. (2) TrTVjrtrw (tttvx-) fold, TTTvi^co, €irTv£a, «irTu-ypai, «iTTtixOïlv ; -wTvôpaL, ewTv^à.p7]v ; 2 aor. pass. -eirrvygp (Hippocr.). Usually comp. in prose. (2)

CATALOGUE OF VERBS

391

spit, TTTvaco, irrvcropai, kirrvadyp, Hippocr. ; aor. cttruera. miv0dvop,ai (irevd-, irvd-) hear, inquire, fut. ircueropai, Dor. irevaovpai, pf. irénw|uu; 2 aor. 4irv0ôp.Tiv (with Hom. redupl. opt. TreirvdoiTo). (3). Poetic also ircvOop.ai.. irrv«

paCvw (pa-, pav-) sprinJcle, aor. epacrcra,

pf.

pav«,

cppâva, kppàvdyv.

p. cppa.crp.cu, 'ippavrai

From

stem pab- epic

Aeschyl., epic kppàôarai, plpf. kppa-

ôaro, 654 c. See 643. Ionic and poetic. (2, 3) paCo» strike, paLaœ, eppaïaa, kppaiadyv ; fut. m. (as pass.) paiaopai. Poetic, chiefly epic. pàirTû) (pa</>-) stitch, pd>|/«, cppa*|/a, cppappai ; 2 aor. p. cppdc}>T]v ; aor. m. kppa \pàpyv. (2) pdTTto (pay-), late for àpârrco throw down, pdjja>, cppa£a, kppàxOyv. See àpaTTCD. (2)

p^co (fpe7-, 617) do, pé£co, epe£a ; Ion. aor. p. pexddy, pexdeis. See cp8û). (2) (pev-, pep-, pv-, pve-) fiow, pevcropai, 'éppevaa (rare in Attic), cppvt]Ka; 2 aor. p. €ppvt|v, pufjcropai. 611. (prj-) stem of cïpT]Ka, cfprjpai, cppfj0t]v, pij0fj<rop.ai, clpfjcropai. See cï-nrov and cïpco. pf|'yvvp,v (fpyy-, puy-, pay-) break; p-rjga», cpprjfja, eppyypai and kppyxdyv Ion.; 2 aor. p. cppa-yiiv ; payfyrofuu ; 2 pf. cppco-ya ara (719,1250 c). (3) pî-yéw (plye-, ply-) shlldder, epic fut. pïyyao:, aor. kpptyyaa, pf. eppiya (as près.). Poetic, chiefly epic. 590. pï-yôc» shiver, pïyûaœ, kppiyaxra ; près. ind. and subj. plyQ for plyot, opt. pïyù>T)v, inf. plyœv and plyovv : see 488. ptirrco (pÏ7r-, pLTT—) throw, pfcj/co, cppûj/a, cppîcj>a, cppïppai, cppfc}>0Tjv, pîcj>0Tjcropai ; 2 aor. p. kppi(f>ijv. Près, also pï-jttcw (590). (2) pvop.ai, epic also ptopai (fpv-) defend, piaopai, kppvaâpyv. Athematic forms: 3 pers. eppvro (epvro, 696 a), pl. pvaro, inf. pvaOai. Chiefly poetic. See pca>

epûpat.

be dirty, epic pvrr6« soil ; Ion. pf. part, pepvmopkvos. 547. (paj-, pcocr-, 86 c) strengthen, êppao-a, cppc»p.ai, imv. cppaxro farewell, part, kppupkvos as adj. strong, êpp«o-0T]v. (3)

pviiracp

puvvv|i.i

cralvco (aav-) faWYl Oïl, aor. ecryva, Dor. eaâva. Poetic. (2) craCpco (arjp-, aap-) sweep, aor. ('écrrjpa) part, cri]pas ; 2 pf. crc'crrçpa griîl, esp. in part. aeaypûs, Dor. aeaâpûs. (2) o-aXir^o) (aaÀTriyy-) Sound a trumpet, aor. co-dXm-y£a. (2)

save, près, rare and poet., aawcrai, ko-âœaa, kaa&dyv ; 3 sing. impf. cràw (for co-âw), imv. o-âw, as if from Aeol. aâcopi (or read a-àov for o-ao-e). Epic subj. croys, <rôy (MSS.) should perhaps be craœs, aaœ, or aâcps, crà<}) (cf. 659). See o-wÇw. Epic. 0-dTTO) (aay-) pack, load, aor. co-a£a, pf. p. or&ra-yp.ai. (2) craoco

392

GREEK GRAMMAR

o-pévvv|j.i (cr/3e- for a(3eo-, 86 c) extinguish, o-péorw, ëo-pecra, ëo-p^Ka have gone out (of fire), êa-péo-0T]v; 2 aor. 'éa(3yv (706) went out, with inf. aprjvaL, part. àiroa(3eLs Hippocr. ; fut. m. cr(3r|crop.a,i. (3) crépw revere, aor. p. èo-€<J>0T)v, with part, ae4>6eis aive-struck. creUo shake, ctéio-w, ëcrtura, (réa-tuca, o-eoreio-pcu, ècr€Îo-0T]v (598). o"€va>

(aev-, av-) urge, mid. rush, aor. 'éaaeva, kaaevàprjv

;

'éaav/iat, be in haste,

kaavdriv or kaiiOrjv ; 2 aor. m. ka(a)vp.r]v (with eavro, avro, avpevos). The Attic poets have aovrai (aeDra* MSS.), aovvrai, aovade (ind. and imv.),

(ail probably from aokogai or abopaC). 696 a. Poetic; Xen. (àiv-kaoova). The forms <rov and o-ovo-0é in comedy may be imitative, shoo! <r-q|j.cuva> (aypav-) show, crr]|J.avcô, €o-fj(J.r|va, créer T)|Aa<rp.ai, 6cri]|Adv0r|V, a-r]fxav0f|troii-ai ; mid. a7gji.avodiJ.aL, kagprjvàpyv ; aor. act. kagpâva in Xen. MSS., but not good Att. (2) <nrfTr<o (agir-, aair-) rot, a-qxpco, 2 pf. <T€crT]'Tra auïl rotten ; okar)p.gai (Aristot.), 2 aor. p. €o-âirT)v, fut. «rairfjo-opcu. o-tvo|xai (aIV-) injure, aor. kaïvâpyv Ion. 630. (2) o-Kàirr<i) (a/ca^-) dig, <TKà\|/«, ë<rKCu|/a, ëo-Ka(j>a, ea-Kappai, la-Kdcjyrçv. (2) crKeSdvvûp,t (oneba- for aKeôaa-) scatter, fut. cnceSw, éa-KtSaora, to-KéSao-pai with part. kaKeôaapkvos, €O"Ke8d<r0T|v ; kaKeôaaàpr]v ; fut. aiceôâaco poetic. Epie also Keôàvvi>pi, Ion. aKtôvrjpL and kLÔvt]/jl. (3) o-K€'X.\to (a/ceX-, oKXrj-) dry up, Hom. aor. ëovojXa, Ion. pf. ëa/cXîj/ca; 2 aor. (eoKXrjv) àiro-anXrjvaL (694) Aristophanes. (2) o-Kë-rrrop-ai (<r/CÉ7r-) view, <ri«t|/ojj.ai, êcri«i|/d|AT]v, ëcrK€fip.ai, fut. pf. €0-K€\J/op.ai ; aoî), crovaôco

has âir-ecrcrvâ

kaKk<t>9r)v Ion. For près, and impf. the better Attic writers use o-Koirw,

etc. (see a-KO-iréw). (2) (070771--) prop, o-k^aJ/w, ë<TKT]\|/a, ë<rKîijA[ACH, èo-Kif|<j)0r|v ; aK7ij/o/j.aL, kaKrpJ/àgtjv. In prose usually comp. ImcrKrjirTto lay an injunction upon. (2) o-kCSvt]|ii (aKLôvri-, aiaô-va-), mid. a^Svagac, scatter, also KLÔvrgiL : chiefly poetic for o-KeSdvvCfu. (3) o-Koirëco view, in better Attic writers only près, and impf. act. and mid. For the other tenses trKe\|*op.cu, €<rK€i|/dp.T]v, and ë<j-K€|ip.cu of o-Ken-Topai are used. See «rKeVropcu,. o-kwitto» (aKœir-) jeer, <rK*o»|/op,CH, ë<rK«\|/a, l<TKco<j>0i]v. (2) o-fidtt only in contr. 07*« {aga-, agi7-) smear, with 77 for à in contracted forms (486), 07*775, 07*77, etc.; aor. ëo-p/rço-a, mid. ka^aâii-qv Hdt. Ion. o7*éco and 0-7*77xûj, aor. p. ÔLaagyxOds (Aristoph.). cnraci) (aira- for airaa-) draw, o"ird<r<o, ëcriracra, ëcnraKa, ë<rirao-p.(u, €o-Trdcr0r)V, <rira<r0'/j(ro|A(u ; airâaopaL, kairaaagrjv. 596, 597. <rire(pci> (airep-, airap-) SOW, o"ir£p», ëcnrcipa, ë«rirapp.ai ; 2 aor. p. lo-rrapTiv. (2) cnrëvSto pour libation, arireCtrù) (for oirevS-aoj, 70), ecrircio-a, ëcrTreio-pai (see 499 c) ; mid. <rirëv8op.ai make a treaty, o-ireCa-opcu, è<nr«io-d|j,'7|v. <TKOirov|iai,

<TKTf]TrT<i)

CATALOGUE OF VERBS

393

{rràÇw (aray-) drop, € errata, 'èaraypaL, karax^yp. Late fut. aràaco, Theocr.

<rra£eûpai. (2) crTÉLpoj (crret/3-) tread, tarera, karL(bypai (from a stem cm/3e-, 590, or possibly a près. <m/3éœ). Poetic. <TTe(\a) (<TTeix~> utlx~) ÇO, tarera, 2 aor. 'éarexop. Poetic ànd Ionic. o-reXXcu (o-reX-, oraX-) se?ld, cttéXw, £0"T£iXa, £(ttci\koi, £0-TaXp,ai ; 2 aor. p. €o"to.Xt]v ; crTaXr|cro|j.cH ; aor. m. ktjTetXàpyp. 587. In prose comp. with à7to and €7rt. (2) <TT£vdÇ<o (errepay-) groan, cTTevâÇœ, £crT£vaf;a. Epie or poetic are arévu, arevàx^, aTevaxLfa, errovaxéw' (2) crrépya (arepy-, aropy-) love, crTe'p^co, ëcrTep^a ; 2 pf. 'éaTopya (585). <TT€p€(o deprive, o-Tepf|crw, £CTT£pT)<j-a, £(TT£pTiKa, £CTTëpT]p,CH, £o-T6pf]0T]v, arepydyaop-oli ; 2 aor. p. ko-Tkpyp (poetic), part, arepeis, 2 fut. (pass. or mid.) o-T£pfjcrop,ai. Epie aor. karkpeaa. In prose usually comp. dn-o-<rT£p£w. Also près, o-Tepîo-Kw. Près. «rTEpopai be in want. (o-T£vp.ai) pledge one's self ; only in 3 près. arevrac, arevvTai, impf. arevro. Poetic, chiefly epic. arriva (crriy-) tattoo, <tt(£w, «rn-ypiai ; ecm£a Hdt. (2) o-TÔpvvp.1 (cTrop-, (TTope-) spread Out, CTTOpco, £crT6p£0-a, karopkaOyp (Ion.). Late fut. <jTOpeau>, Theocr. (TTopeaco. (3) (TTp€<J>CO ((TTpecj)-, <rrpo0-, arpeuj)-) tum, 0TTp£\J/M, £<TTp£v|/a, £(TTpap.p.ai, €O-Tp€(j>0T|V (rare in prose), usually 2 aor. p. èo-Tpd4>qv. 2 pf. àp-karpo^e trans. (comedy) ; Ion. aor. p. karpà^Gyp ; fut. o-Tpa<j>Tj<rop.ai ; mid. arpepopac, karpexf/àpr/v. 585, 587.

crrptûvvUp.1 (o-rpeo-),

orrpcotra), 'écrrpœcra, £<rrptop.ai, kcrrp&dyp. Cf. <TTÔpvv|u. (3) <TTvyéa (arvy-, arvye-, 590) dread, hate, fut. arvyycropaL (as pass.), aor. karvyyera (epic 'éarvâ made terrible, Ion. pf. karvyyKa), aor. p. karvyyOyp; epic 2 aor. larvyop. Ionic and poetic. (r"rucf>£Xi£co (crriKêXry-) dash, aor. kcrrvcfikXiÇa. Ionic, chiefly epic. (2) o-wp» (crvp-) draw, aor. «rvpa, kaïipâpyv, <r£«rvpKa. In prose comp. with à7ro, <5id, kiri. (2) <r<j>dXXco (<r4>a\-) trip, deceive, o-<J>aXw, ëo-tjniXa, £0-<{>aXp.ai ; 2 aor. p. £0-«|>àXt]v, fut. p. o-<|>aXTi<rop,ai; fut. m. o-</>aXoDpcu (rare). (2) cr<})dTTW (acjray-) eut the throat of, <r4>d|to, «râga, £<r<|>a"yp.ai, kacfraxOyp (rare) ; 2 aor. p. £0-4>dyqv, fut. «râ-y/jo-opai ; aor. m. kcrcjraâpyp. 624. (2) Trag. près. tr«j>dtw, 617. orxdï<o (620) eut open, let go, <rxd<r«, «rxacra, €crxa.crdp.T|V ; Ion. kaxâadyp. From près, orxdw impf. £<rx<»v (Aristoph.). (2) o-wÇo), later o-(6£co, epic usually o-co« (<rco-, <rwt-), save, epic près. subj. aôys (crû.eps, crôuis), crôy (crâpr, erbef), abœcn', trwcrw, «rcocra (Att. inscr. ecrutcra), a-écrcoKO., o"£o"cop.ai or <r£trcpcrp,ai, êcroo0r|v, <r<o0fj<ropai ; acoaopai, kaœaâpyp.

See craôw.

(21

394

GREEK GRAMMAR

seize, in Hom. 2 aor. pt. rerayûv. Cf. Lat. tango. (jev-, ra- for rv + -vv-oi) stretch, ravvcrœ, tTavv(a)aa, TeTavvcrpat, kraviiadrjv ; aor. m. eravvcTcràprjv. Près. pass. athematic ràwTai. Epie form of téCvw. (3) TapctTTW (rapax-) disturb, TapàÇco, èrâpaÉja, T€Tdpa-ypai, êrapaxOtlv; fut. m. Tapàjjopai ; epic 2 pf. (rerprixa) rerprix&s disturbed', plpf. rerp^xei. (2) tcLttw (ray-) arrange, Tal-to, «Ta^a, T^Ta\a, r^ra-ypai, €Tàx0i]v, TaxQfjcropai ; r<x£o/xai, kra^àprjv ; 2 aor. p. èràyqv ; fut. pf. T€Ta|opai. 624. (2) Tcvy-

Tavûw

(Ta<j>- for 6a<f>-, 105) in 2 aor. ira^ov was amazed; see (©rj-ir-). (rev-, ra- for tv) stretch, T£vw, £T€t.va, réraKa, rérapai, €TCt0r|v, TaGrjo-opai ; Tevovpai, kTeLvâpyv. 27, 585, 587. See to.vv« and titcuvw. (2) T€Kpa£popai (retepap-) judge, infer, fut. T£Kpapovp(u, aor. €T£KpT]pàpT]v. Act. TeKpaCpco, rare and poetic, aor. êré/cprçpa. (2) téXé'w (reXecr-, reXe-) finish, (reXécrw) té\w, èreXecra, TETe'XeKa, TÉTïXeo-pai,, ItéXécr0r|v ; fut. m. (reXéopai) reXoOpat, aor. m. kTe\eaâprjv. 596, 597, 600. Epie also reXeio;. Tt'XXw (reX-, raX- for rX-) cause to rise, rise, aor. ereiXa ; plpf. p. éréraXro. In compos. Iv-T^raXpcu, Iv-fTaXap^v. See 27, 585, 587. (2) («p-, Tp-) find, in Hom. redupl. 2 aor. rérpcw or ererpo^ (559). Tépva) (re/x-, rap-, Tprj-), Ion. and Dor. Tapvw, Hom. once répw, eut, fut. T£pû, T^rprjKa, T£TpT)pai, £TpT]0T]V, Tp.rjdricrop.aL 2 aor. erepov, eTepôprjv, poet. and Ion. eTapov, eTapoprjv ; fut. m. Tepovpai ; fut. pf. TÉTp^cropai. See Tpfj-yw. (3) Tepirco (repir-, Tapir-, Tpair-) amuse, r^p\|/a), £T£p\|/a, €T£p<J>0rjv, epic 6Tàp4>9rjv, 2 aor. p. eràpirrjv (with SUbj. Tpairrjopev), 2 aor. m. (^erapirbprjv (559) ; fut. m. Tép\popaL (poet.), aor. ertp^kprjv epic. See 585, 587. téCvw

répo-opeu become dry, 2 répcrco in Theocr. T£Taywv

having seized:

aor. p. èTepcnjv

see

intrans. Chiefly epic. Fut. act.

stem (ray-).

T£TCî]pcu Hom. perf. am troubled, in dual TeTlrja-Oov and part. TeTLijpévos ; also tétitjcos troubled. T€Tpov or €T€Tpov

(Hom.) found, redupl. 2

aor.

(559). See (T£p-).

T€TpaCvw (Terpav-, also rep-, Tprj-) bore, late près. TLTpaivo) and rirpaco ; Ion. fut. TeTpavkw, aor. «T^TpSva and £TpT|(ra, eTtTprjvaprjv (688) ; pf. p. TeTprjpai. 643. (2, 3) T£vx«

(revx~,

tvx~,

tvk-)

'préparé,

make, reûfco, ereu£a, epic TtTevxùs

as pass.,

Tkrvypai, reTevxaraL, kTerevxaTO, eTVxdrjv Hom., èTevxOrjp Hippocr., fut. pf. rerevÇopaL Hom. ; fut. m. TevÇopai, epic aor. eTevÇâprjv, 2 aor. tctvkezi>, TtTVKoprjv.

PoetlC.

(rain Tavvw, Tetvoi) imperative talce. Hence pl. rpre (Sophron). More probably instrumental case of démonstrative stem to- here !

CATALOGUE OF VEEBS

395

raie-) melt, Dor. tclkco, èr-qx(rare) ; 2 aor. p. êTàio]v ; 2 pf. T€Tî]Ka am melted. t£0i](j.i (e-q-, 0e-) put ; see synopsis and inflection in 503, 504, 507. tLkt<o (nu-, To/c-) for tl-tk-u (106, 605) beget, bring fortin, Tôpai, poet. also ré£w, rarely TeKovpai, erexdvv (rare) ; pf. t^tokci ; 2 aor. «tékov, €t€Ko/ji7)v• t£XX« (rtX-) pluck, tl\S), ertXa, rértXpat, krikdqv. Chiefly poetic. (2) t£v» (ret-, rt-) poy, Te£a"«, ÉTeura, t£TeiKa, TÉ-mo-pai, €tec<r0T]v. Mid. Ttrapat fa&e payment, reiaopai, eTtiaàpqv. The futures, aorists, and perfects are written tLo-u, Ïthto., etc. in MSS. ; the spelling et is attested by inscrip¬ tions. Hom. rifco (for rt-vp-u), rtco. Parallel mid. près. retwpat take vengeance (MSS. Hwâi). See t£w. (3) TiTaCvco (redupl. ti-tclv-) stretch, aor. èrirqâ, riTqvàs. Epie for retfto. (2) TiTpwo-Kw (rpco-) wound, Tptocrto, crpcixra, rcrpcapai, €Tpti0r]v, Tpw0â-op,ai ; fut. m. rpcocro/xat as passive, Hom. Rarely epic rpcôco. (4) r£to honor, Hom. rtu (? reteo) or rtco, fut. rfcroj, aor. 'érlcra (irpo-riaâs, S. Afti. 22), pf. p. rérZpat. After Homer chiefly in près, and impf. Attic relau, erettra, etc. belong to rivœ. See t£vo>. (rXa-, rXrj-, raXa-) endure, r\r]crop.cu, TkrXyKa, 2 aor. «ItX?jp (see 694). Epie t^kw

forms of 2 pf. rerXapev, TerXatqv, rérXa^t, rerXàpefat and TerXàpep,

From (raXa-) Hom. aor. érâXacrcra. Poetic. Prose ToXpaw. Tp/fyyo (rp-qy-, rpay-) CMf, poet. for re'pvco ; rp-q^co (rare), erpq^a, 2 aor. erpa-yop, krpâyqv, 3 pl. rpàyev (cf. 741). Top&o (rop-, rope-) pierce, près, only in epic àvTL-Topevvra ; epic fut. Topqaa), TeTopqcrw (Ar.), epic aor. trôpqaa, 2 aor. eropov. 590. Tpeirto (rpeir-, rpoir-, rpair-) [tum, Tpt'*|/<o, erpeij/a, Te'Tpocjja (rerpatf>a rare), t£Tpappai, «rp^<j)0riv; fut. m. rpefopaL, aor. m. èrpefàpqv) €Tpdirriv, eTpa•n-ôpîivyZed. Ion. Dor. près, rpâ™; epic and poetic 2 aor. erpa7rof; Hom. and Hdt. aor. pass. erpâ^d-qv. This verb has ail the six aorists (746). 585, 587. Tpltjxo (rpe0- for 0pe<£-, 105 e, rpo<£-, rpacf)-) nourish, 0p£\J/o), ë0pe*J/a, TÉTpo4>a, TtOpappat with inf. redpcufrdat, £0p€tj>0iiv with inf. Opefydqvat (rare) ; 2 aor. p. €Tpâ<|>T]v; fut. m. 0pé*J/opai, aor. m. èdpefâpqv. Dor. près, rpàcf)œ, epic 2 aor. eTpacfjov intrans. 585, 587. Tp£)(w (rpex- for 6pex~, 105 e, rpexe-, ôpap-) ruw, fut. 8pap.ovp.ai (-dpe^opai only in comedy), e0pefa (rare), 8eSpd,pLT]Ka, Se8pàp/r|p.ai ; 2 pf. ôéôpopa (poet.) in comp. with àvà, âp</>t, é-n-t, 2 aor. é'8papov. (5) Tpéu> (rpea-, rpe-) tremble, aor. i=Tpe<ra. Chiefly poetic. Tpfp« (rp 1/3-, rpï/3-) rub, Tptxjfw, ÉTpîiJ/a, T£Tpi<j>a, rïTpîppai (497, 499), €rpf<j)0Tiv ; more often 2 aor. p. «TpCp^v, 2 fut. p. Tpipfj<ro|iai ; fut. pf. T«Tpfv(fOp.ai ; fut. m. Tp'ixpopai, aor. m. irplfâpqv. Tptî>) (jpïy-, rpcy-) squeak, 2 pf. Terplya as présent (with epic part, rerptyœres, Terplyvla). Ionic and poetic. (2 ) rerXqœs (728). uses

396

GREEK GRAMMAR

Tpvx<*w exhaust, fut. Tpvx«o-o>, aor. €Tpvxo>o-a, pf. part. T€Tpvx«p.évos, aor. p. krpvxûOr)v Ion. Parallel are Tpvxo», epic and rpvœ, rptaio

(Aesch.), pf. T€Tpvp,ai,. (rpcoy-, rpay-, 585)

Tpw-yco

aor.

gnaw,

Tpio£op.ai, 'érpatÇa (Hippocr.),

T€Tparyp,ai ;

eTpcvyov.

TVYxâvw (revx-, tvx~, rvxe-) hit, happen, téu£o[j.ch, pf. T€Tvxr|Ka ; 2 aor. étuxov. Epic aor. érûxrçce, Ion. 2 pf. rérevxa (cf. reûxw). (3) TVirTW (rVTT-, TVTTTe-) StTlke, TU7TTT|0"<0, krVTfT7]<7a (Aristot.), 2 aOr. p. eTVTTTJV, fut. p. TVTTTTjaopaL Or rvirrjaop.ai. Ionic and lyric aor. ervipa, pf. p. réruppat, 2 aor. ervirov; airo-rv^vrai (Hdt.). This verb, once the grammarian's model, was scarcely used in Att. prose except in the près, and fut. Systems (Aristoph. MSS. have fut. m. as pass. rvTvr-qaopai). The other tenses are supplied in «mura or €irdTa£a, Ttéirk^ya., •iréirXTTyp.ai, éirXriYrjv. (2) Tv<j>ci) or ti>4>-, for Qv<j>-, 105 e) raise smoke, smoke, T£0Up,pcu, 2 aor. p. «Txi<|>T]v, 2 fut. p. Tv«j>fjo-op.ai (Menander). (Icx- + ve-, cf. ïcrxw), Ion. and poet. îiirCo-xopai (strengthened virexopai) promise, viroo-xfjorop.ai, virétrx'np.ai ; 2 aor. m. vTTïo-xôp.Tiv. See ï<rx«> and «xw. (3) v<j>a£va) (v<fiav~) weave, v<{>avâ>, v^va, vc|>ao-p.ai (603), v<j>dv0r]v; aor. m. v4>r)v àpriv. (2) va) rain, v<ra>, Ssa, v<rp.CU, vadrjv. Hdt. vcropai as pass. viri<rxv€op.ai

from

4>ae(vo> (4>aev~) appear, shine, aor. p. kÇaavdyv (aa- for ae-, cf. 659) appeared. Epic. See 4>a£va>. (2) 4>a£vco (<fiav-) show, fut. <j>av«, aor. €<{>T]va, ir&f>aiyKa, ir€c|»ao-|j.cu (603), I(|>àv0r)v (rare in prose) ; 2 aor. p. «j>dvriv, 2 fut. cjjaWja-opcH ; 2 pf. iré^riva have appeared ; fut. m. 4>avoûpcu, aor. m. k^vaptiv (rare and poet.) showed, but dir-Écj>iivdn.T}v declared ; epic iter. 2 aor. <t>àveaKe appeared. For full synopsis see 478 ; for inflection of certain tenses see 492. From stem <t>a- (cf. fiaLvœ, 643) Hom. impf. 4>âe appeared, fut. pf. irentrerai will ap¬ pear. For e4>aàvdr]v see <|>a€£vû). (2) <}>owrKa) (4>a~) say, allégé, only près, and impf. See <J>ti|a£. (4) <j>«£8o|xai (0«ô-, 4>i8~) spare, «juîo-opcu, l<|>ei<rdp.T]v, Hom. redupl. 2 aor. m. ■Kt4>i86p.t}v (559), fut. ire4>i8i]cropai. (4>ev-, <j>v-, <j>a-) Mil, stems whence Hom. -n-k^apai, ne^c-opai ; 2 aor. redupl. irecfrvov Or ëire(f>voi> with part. KaTa-irktfrvuv (or -vûv). Related to 4>ôvos murder, OeLvw smite. 4>épco (4>ep-, oi-, kv6K-, 'eveyn- ÎOT èv-even-) bear, carry, fut. OÏO-O), aor. f|'v£-yKa, pf. IWjvoxa, «vfjvt'yp.CH (3 S. 'evqvey tirai inscr.), aor. p. TivexOilv; fut. p. éveX0fjo-op,ai and olo-0f|o-o|ji,ai ; 2 aor. t(véykov ; fut. m. ot'o-opai (sometimes as pass.) ; aor. m. rive^Kd^v, 2 aor. m. imv. kveynov (Soph.). 686. Ion.

CATALOGUE OF VERBS

397

Dor. Aeol. 777/1/ca, Ion. r/veLKov, kvyveiypai, r\vdxQr\v ; Hdt. (or àt>-Q<rai) ; Hora. aor. (also Ar.) imv. olae for olaov (654 h), près. imv. 0épre for 0épere. (5) 4>«v*y» (0evy-, <fivy-) flee, <j>€v£op,ai and (j>€u£ovp.ai (678), pf. ir€«|>€vya (585), 2 aor. è'«|>vyov ; Hom. pf. part, ire<t>vyp.kvos and 7re0ufores, as from 0ûfo). Parallel form tfsvyydvw New Ion. and Att. poetry. (|>ti(A£ (0i7-, 0a-) say, 4>fitrco, é'<|)T]a-a ; pf. p. imv. irecfrâado) (iretpaapévos belongs to 4>aLvu). Mid. Dor. fut. 0aaopai. For the full inflection see 517-520. <j>0dv<o (0077-, 00a-) anticipate, c}>0f|a-o[«H, è'<j>0acra; 2 aor. act. è'4>0T]v (like 'èarriv, 504), epic 2 aor. m. 00âpews. Fut. 00à<rco doubtful. Hom. près. <t>9avco from 00appœ. (3) (}>0eCpa> (00ep-, 00op-, 00ap-) corrupt, fut. <j)0epû, aor. ec})0eipa, pf. e<j>0apKa, 4'<j>0app.cu ; 2 aor. p. e<j>0àpr|v, 2 fut. p. «jjOapfjo-opcu ; 2 pf. 8ie'4>0opa ; fut. m. 00epoOpat. Ion. fut. -00epéw Hdt., -00épcrco Hom. 585. (2) <j>0£vw (00t-) waste, decay, <pOLaco, £00icra, e00ipai ; epic aor. p. e^QLO-qv, fut. m. 00t<ropat ; 2 aor. m. 400£p77^ perished, subj. 00£wpai, opt. 00*7*777/ for 00*-î71*777/ (766), imv. 3 sing. cfidLadœ, inf. 00îo-0a*, part. <t>dipevos. Ail these forms in Hom. or Att. poetry. Hom. also près. 00**0, assumed from 00Î77S and e00ie7/, which have been doubted ; fut. 00icra>, €00îo-a (<pdeLaco, e00eiaa?). Parallel is 00i7/00co. Présent generally in transiti ve ; future and aorist active transitive. (3) (jnXéw (0iXe-) love, <f>iXfio-«, etc., regular. 482. Epic aor. m. (0*X-) 40iXâp777/, inf. près. friperai. (659/). 590. Aeolic 0îXt7p*. 4>Xaw bruise, fut. <p\âacc (Dor. 0Xaa-crû), aor. e0Xao"(cr)a, e0Xatrpat, €0X0(70777/. r/veuca aor.

and

-aprjv,

inf. àv-oîaai

See 0Xdo>.

(jjpd-yvïïp.t (0pay-) /ewce, mid. t^pa^viipai ; only in près, and impf. Also 0âp77/ï0ii.. See cjjpaTTw. (3) 4>pd£« (0pa5-) tell, rnid. consider, devise, c|>pào-co, 4'<j>pao-a, Trempa Ka, 7T€'<j>paa-p.ai (epic part. irecppaôpkvos), €<J>pda-0T]v (as mid.) ,' 0pcur(cr)opai epic, €0pa(o-)o-àp777/ chiefly epic. Epic 2 aor. irk<t>pabov or kirk4>paôov. (2) <j)pdTTO) (4>pay~) fence, è'(|)pa^a (Att. inscr. 4'(|>ap£a), ir€<|>pa-y|j.ai (ire'tjmp-yiACu), ètjjpdxfliiv ; é0pa^âp777/. See <|>pd-yvv|ja. (2) ejjptTTw (0p*K-) shudder, €cj>pî£a, ir&jjpïKa, pf. part. irecjjpiKovras Pind. (cf. epic KeKXrjyovTes from fcXdfco). (2) <j>pv-yo> (0pÛ7-, 4>pvy~) roast, 4>pv£u>, 4'4>pu£a, ire'^pv-ypat., kfypvy-gv (Hippocr.). tjjvXaTTu (0i;Xa7c-) guard, <{>vXdj;«, ec|>vXa^a, ire<j>vXaxa, ■rrecjivXa-yp.ai, è^vXdxOilv ; <j>\jXd|op.ai, (as pass. in Soph.), k^vXa^âppv. (2) 4>vpû> (0L)p—) mix, 'é<t>vpaa (Hom.), iré<f>vpp.ai, 406p077?/; fut. pf. ire^vpaopaL Pind. cjjvpdco mix is regular, <t>vpàcrw etc. (2) <}>v(o (0U-, 0D-), with 0 in Homer and rarely in Attic, produce, <|>vcrco, €<j>Co-a, ir€<j)VKa 6e (by nature), with 2 pf. forms, epic 7re0ûâa-*, kp-iretpvri, u-€0i;ws ; plpf. èirk(t>vKoi> (654 d) ; 2 aor. è'cjjw came into being, was (694) ; 2 aor. p. 400 777/ (subj. 0i/w) ; fut. m. 4>vaopaL.

398

GREEK GRAMMAR

\àÇa> (xaô-) force back, xô-^opai yield (près, only in àva-xâfa), fut. xâ<T(<T)°Pat> aor. -éxaao-a (Pind.), aor. m. kxaaà.pyp (Xen.) ; from stem Kaô- (différ¬ ent from stem of Kyôœ) 2 aor. m. KeKaSôpyv, fut. pf. KtKaôyau will deprive (736), 2 aor. Kenabov deprived. Poetic, chiefly epic; except àvaxâÇovTes and ôiaxâa-a<r0ai in Xenophon. See («aô-). (2) XaCpw (xap-, xaipe-, XaP£") rejoice, xaipf]o"tt, KtxAptjKO, Ktx0.ptwai and /céxappai, 2 aor. p. €x<^Pt]v> epie aor. m- xvPaT0> 2 aor. m. Kexapopyv ; 2 pf. part. Kexapvùs ; fut. pf. Kexa-pricrœ, Kexapyo-opcu (736). (2) XaXàw loosen (xaXâcrco Ion.), èxàXao-a (-a§a Pind.), «x^àcrOiiv. 596, 597. XaX.Éira£v» (xa\eirai>-) be offended, xa.Xeiravû, èxaXemfva, «xaXeiràvâ^v. (2) XctvSavto (xet'ô-, x°J'^"> xa^~ f°r xvf>~) hold, 2 aor. exaôo^; fut. x££°"opc« (70), 2pf.Ktxa.vba (shouldbenkxovdal 585). Poetic (chieflyepic) and Ionic. (3) X<5.<tk<o, later xa£vw (xvv~> x°-v~, xv-vku) gupe, fut. xuvovpai, pf. «éx^va as près. (589), 2 aor. 'èxavov. Ionic and poetic. (4)

xé£« (x£5-) Lat. (585), 2 aor.

fut. x€°"°i'lACU (rarely xécopcu), «x^a, 2 pf. Ke'xoSa (rare) ; aor. m. only in xécrairo, Ar. Eq. 1057 ; pf. p. part. Kextcrpti'os. (2) X^« (x£^-> x£P_> xp-)> epic x££w (660 c), pour, fut. x^®. epic xevu, aor. «x«a, epic 'éxeva, K^yKa, Kï'xvpai, «X'"®T1V> Xv0'H(rolJI'ai aor m. Ix£âp)v> epic kxevâpyv, 2 aor. m. kxvpyv as pass. (696 a). 611. (xXa8 -), in 2 pf. part. KtxXaôùs swelling (Pind.), with acc. pl. KexXâôovTas caco,

ex^ov

and inf. KexXaôeiv.

(xop-) heap up, X"°"w> «Xwcra> K^XWKa> Ke'xwo"Pai (600), êx">o-0T]v, XwcrO-rjo-oixai. Xpa.io-fJ.eaj (xpaicrpe-, xpo-^p-) help, late in présent ; Hom. XPO-LO-pyaœ, XÔft>

èxpatcr^cra ; 2 aor.

expcucpop.

590.

(always xpwp®") use, xpfjo-ofjiai, èxPTl0'*HL11v> K^XPTlP'ai'> £XP'Ho"0Tlv; fut. pf. Kexpyfropai Theocr. For XP^rat., xPâOai (Hdt. xpStcu, xpéwpTat., imv. xp£W> xpâcrât, part, xp^pôs), etc., see 486, 487. Xpâw (always xp») give oracles (Attic xpfis, XPÂ. etc., 486) ; xpî0"40» £XPTl<ra'> K4xPT<a, KéxpyfpaL Hdt., «xpf)o-0iiv. Mid. consult an oracle, xpyôpat, ixpyvàpyv. For xpys and xpv — xpU^s and xpi?f«, see xPtlSwXP^ (impers.), orig. a noun meaning need (cf. xpela) with karl understood, there is need, (one) ought, must, subj. XPTI, opt. xp«bl> inf. XP^v*11 (poet. xpvv) impf. XP*F (= XP*1 *iv) or £XPfiv ""ir6xp»i it suffices, inf. àiroxpyv, impf. àirkxpy, Ion. àtroxpâ, àtroxpâv, àirkxpa ; àiroxpyoret., âirkxpyfre. Xpa.ofj.ai.

528.

Xpf|Ç« (620), Ion. xpif^w, want, ask, xpyw, Ion. xptpcrœ, éxpyo-a, Ion. kxpyïaa ; xpys and xpv (as if from xpàco) occasionally have the meaning of xpU^> xptff"- (2) xpi« (xpï- for xpÎT-) anoint, sting, xpt<ro>, expiera., K^xpïpai (or Kkxplcrpail), kxptvOyv; xpt°"opat Hom., kxpl<ràpyv.

CATALOGUE OF VERBS

399

Xp4>£w, poet. also xP0t£°> (620), color, stain, K^xp^pa-i («exp^pai?), «xpwcrOtiv

(kxpùcrdujvl). (2)

»(fdw (always \|/«) rub, with r/ for â in contracted forms (486), vj/fj, t|nîv, oJ/t], etc. ; generally in composition ; diro^J/fjo-w, €*j/Tj(ra ; pf. KaT^*|/iyyp.ai from parallel form *|H]XWxJ/evSw deceive, xj/evcrw, £\|/eucra, £i|/€ucru.CH, €*l/evo-0Tjv, \J/€ucr0fjoropai ; ^eûtropat, hpevaàfXTjv. 66, 69.

*|/VX« (ipux~, ^vx~) cool, 2

aor.

p. -epiixvv or

;

cî>0£û>

(cô0- for fœO-, œde-) push, impf. gen. £io0ovv (537) ; wcrtt, poet. ùOqcrw, 'tiacra, Ion. œcra, £û>o"|ACH, Ion. coo-pai, IwtOîiv : à>o-0fjcrop.ai ; fut. m. cicropai, aor. m. êaxTa/J-qv, Ion. ùaâ/jir]v. 590.

wvf'opai (pw^e-) buy, impf. £wvov|at]v (537) or ùvoviiqv (in comp.) ; wvfja-opai, éc6vt)|acu (mid. and pass.), «wv/jOriv. Classic writers use £irpidp.T]v (503504) for later (Ionic) kœvT]aâp.qv.

N.B. In these Indexes the numerals refer to the Sections of the Gram-

except occasionally when the pages are specifically Forms not found in the Greek Index should be sought in mar,

Irregular Substantives (pp. 363-399).

(pp. 62-64)

402

mentioned. the list of in the Catalogue of Verbs

GREEK INDEX 5, 6 ; pronunciacontraction 42 ; becomes r? in temp. augment 541 ; a changed to?? in lst decl. 185 ; in verb stems 593 ; added to verb stems 591 ; changed to y in 2 pf. 589 ; Aeol. and Dor. à for t? 164 ;

A 1 ; open vowel tion of 29 ; in

weakened to

in Ion. 234 ;

d; à after e, t, p 185, 187, 190, 293 d or d copulative 861 a d or àv privative 861, 1141 a suffix 817, 841 a a declension 181-196 ; a in 186,187 <j, improper diphthong 7, 10; by a

before f 125

contraction 42

d-ya0ôs compared 357 a-yapai w. gen. 1103 a.7av 412 d-yavaierdco w. dat. 1159, 1160; w. et 1433 ; w. part. 1582 à/yàvvi<{>os 86 d-yairaw w. dat. 1159, 1160; W. et 1433 ; w. part. 1582 d-y-y«XXw 628, 687, 852 ; pf. and plpf. mid. 499 d; w. part. 1590 dyyeXos, pronunciation 21 d-ye and a-yeTÉ w. subj. and imperat. 1344

d-yevo-ros etc. w. gen. 1141, cf. 1103 d-yfjpws, declension of, cf. 299 d-yvtos, adj. of one ending 339 d-yx1 w. gen. 1153 aycu, augm. of 539 ; f/yayov 560 ; pf. 499 b, 723 ; ayuv with 1568 à-ycdvCÇearOcu à-ywva 1049

dSiKéco, fut. mid.

as pass.

dSvivaTd lo-Tiv 888 b

àSwpÔTaTos

XP11H'®'TWV

àÉKcov

&k«v

see

1248

1141

deTôs, epicene noun 173 -d£«, verbs in 620, 851

;

fut. of

678 b

àrjSfjs not contracted 48 dî]8wv, decl. of 251 dGdvaros 165/ 'ABVjvaÇe, -i]0ev, -iicrt 86 d, 412, 413 A0T]vatr) 196 a0\Éa>, r(0XT]cra 541 d0p6os, decl. of 305

"A0«s, ai,

acc.

of 206

diphthong 7

;

augmented 540 ;

sometimes elided in poetry 58;

final, short in accentuation (but opt.) 133, 153, 184 ; infin. ending 794

not in

at Homeric for

1393

Aïas, voc. of 223 ; A'ta^re 838 atSeopai 597 alSws, decl. of 243, cf. 597 aï0e or aï -yàp, Homeric for e'ide etc. 1355

-a£vw, denom. verbs in 499 d, 629, 851

(a-tos), adj. in 445, 814, 842 aïpcd aor. 689; pf. and plpf. mid. -aios

499 d

-a£p«, denom. verbs in 629 -aïs, -aura, -oio-a, in aor. partie. (Aeol.) 658 -aïs, -anri(v), in dat. pl. 180, 196/ -aïs in acc. pl. (Aeol.) 196 g

404

GREEK GRAMMAR

alo-0dvo|xai 638; w. gen. 1103; w. part. 1584, 1590 ato-xpôs compared 354 ato"xvvo|xai w. el 1433 ; w. part. 1582

; w.

infin. 1583

-afrrepos, -aCTa-ros,

comp.

in 348

alT&o

two

aïnos

acc.

and

sup.

1068

1140

gen.

alxp.fj 80

aCco, âiov 541

b, 229 adverbial ending 420, 429 -axds, suffix 843 âxovco, perf. 554, 721 ; w. acc. and gen. 1103, 1104; plpf. 558; <r added to stem 600; ev or nantis àKovu 1242 ; w. part. 1590 àxpoàop.ai 595; w. gen. 1103 axpos w. article 976 SLkwv (àénuv) 327 ; without &v 1573 âXeOjxo 556 dXéf-co, redupl. 2 aor. ahaXnov 559, 560, 692 à\r|0Tjs declined 307 ; 'àX-qdes 308 ; compared 346 d\(arKO|j.ai 592, 604 ; 2 aor. 537 dXiTVjpios w. gen. 1144 b dXXd in apodosis 1432 dXXdTTw 624, 723 ; pf. and plpf. mid. inflected 497, 499 b âXXé£ai 60 âXXfjXtov declined 383 atwv 214 -axis,

aXXo 24

see

aXAo

aXXo0ev 98 âXXo0i 413

&XXo|iai 98

;

aor.

mid. 696 b

dXXos 24, 98 ; decl. of 397 ; w. art. 965

aXXocrE 413 ; âXXore 420 aXXo ti îi or aXXo ti 1606

âXXcos 419

dXo-yos declined 299

àXvo-Ka), formation of 648 aXs declined 229

aXtoirril, epicene noun 173 dp. for àvk (Hom.) 60, 136 apa 420; w. dat. 1190, 1227; w. part. 1574 ; d/xa ecp 956 âpa^a 186 âpapTOiv, opt. 768 àp.f3aXXa> 60 dp^poTos (^op-) 108 àpeipto w. gen. 1133 àpeCvwv, 357, 358, 421 dpeXéto w. gen. 1103 àpés, apé, etc., Dor. for ts etc. 374

àpf]T<ap 311 âpôs and à p.o s for ^pérepos (or èpés) 381

àptre'xw and âpir£«rx« 105 d dpTrtcrxveopat 639 àpvvaOcd 601 àpvvco 630; w. acc. and dat. (Hom.) 1168

dp<j>£

w. gen., dat., and acc. 1207, 1209 ; w. numerals 895, 946

dp.<j>ie'vvvp,i, augment of 567; two

acc.

1068

dptjjio-p-qréû), augment of 567 ; w. gen. and dat. 1123, 1188 dptjjor^pwOev 413; w. gen. 1152 ap.<J>« and àp.<j>6T€pos 438 ; w. art. 974

(epic nè), adv. 1299-1315:

Contents.

Two

uses

1299 ;

see w.

secondary tenses of indic. 1304, 1334,1335, 1397,1407, 1444 ; w. optative 1306, 1327, 1418, 1419, 1447 ; never w. fut. opt. 1307 ; w. fut. indic. (Hom.) 1303 ; w. subj. used as fut. (Hom.) 1305 b, 1365 ; w. infin. and partie. 1308, 1509. In conditions w. subj. 1299 b, 1305, 1393, 1398, 1403,

GREEK INDEX

1413, 1445; dropped when subj. opt. 1512 b. In final clauses w. ùs, o-rrœs, and ocf>pa 1376. Omitted w. subj. in protasis 1406, 1416, 1448, 1481 ; w. potential opt. 1331,1332 ; not used w. eôei, xpw, etc. 1410 ; repeated in long apod. 1312 ; ellipsis of verb 1313 ; used only w. first of several coôrd. vbs. 1314; never begins sentence 1315. In orat. obi. 1499, 1500, 1508. See «dv, t]v, dv (â), and Taxa àv (â) for èàv (et av) 1299 b, 1393 av for àva (Hom.) 60 àv privative 861 âv (â av), by crasis 51, 1440 b -av for -àuv in gen. pl. 196 a becomes

àva

dat. and

acc.

1210

up! 135, 126, 1203 dvd-y*^ w. ècrrt om. 879 àva

1525

àvaiSirjs 597

dvaXCo-Kw and

; w.

infin.

dva\6w, augment of

541

àvaXKis, adj. of one ending 339 àva|Ai[ivij(rKtt w. two acc. 1068 dvà£ios w. gen. 1135; cf. 1141 àvàtro-w w. gen. 1109 ; w. dat. (Hom.) 1164

dvSdvu 460

dvcu w. gen. 1155, 1227 dv^x», augment of 567 ; w. partie. 1582

dvVjp 109; declined 276; voc. 224; Hom. dat. pl. 278; avqp 51 àvGpwiros declined 200 àvoC-yw, augment of 537, 538 ; 2 pf. àvkcpya and âvécpxa. 724 dvop.oCo>s w. dat. 1176 -avos, nouns in 824 àvTC w. gen. 1207, 1211 ; àvO' &v wherefore 1211

405

àvTiir0L€0(iai

w. gen.

à vu «ras, aor.

1123

part, hastily 1567 àvto, àvtoTepos, àvuTaTOs 362, 412 à^tos declined 294 ; compared 346 &£tos and â^tôœ w. gen. 1135

;

-âo, gen. in 196

dirais, adj. of one ending 339; gen. 1135 àira| 433 dirdTcop, decl. of 311 direipos w. gen. 1140 àiri<rT€<o

dat. 1160

dirXôos, dirXoûs declined 303 traction 47, 304

;

con¬

dirXws 417

gen.1207,1208,1212 ; inpregin anastrophe 135, 1202 diroSexopai w. gen. 1104 àiro8£8a)|u and dxoStSopai 1245 àiroXavw w. gen. 1097 b àiroXeCiropai w. gen. 1100, 1117 àiroXis, decl. of 311 àirôXXupi, augm. of plpf. 558 'Air6XX«ov, acc. of 220 ; voc. of 223 b, diré

nant constr. 1204 ;

287

diroXo-Y€op.ai, augment 565 diroerTÉpéû) w. two acc. 1068 ; w. acc. and gen. 1118 diro«r«J>dXXop.ai w. gen. 1100 diro«|)£v-Y«o w. gen. 1127 dirTO) and air Topai 1245 -ap, verbs in 99, 629 apa, àpa où, and apa p.^, interrog. 1605

dpap(«TK(o 556, 646 àp-yùpcos, àpyupoûs, declined 303 ; contr. 44 ; accent 304 dpSr|v 420 àpeCcov, compar. of âyadôs 357 "Api] pXéireiv 1053 b dpt]p«os, dpdpuîa 728, 802 dpi-, intensive prefix 862

406

GREEK GRAMMAR

âpiOfjLos 82 -âpiov, dimin. in 830 âpia-To; 357, 421 âpiràÇa) 97, 617, 624 appr]v or apa-T]v 321 àpxaîos 814 àpxnfjv at first, adv. acc. 1059 apx», apxopai, w. gen. 1100, 1109 ; w. partie. 1582; w. infin. 1583; àpx4uefos at first 1567 -âs, -as, case-endings of acc. pl. 180 -âs, part, ending 125 b -as, stems in 232 -âo-i and -T]<ri, locat. and dat. 412 aerpevos 922 do-iris W. pvpta 442 acrcra or a/rra

395

404, 406 ào-TTjp, declension of 274 6 àa-Tpairm without subject 887 ao-ru, declined 253, 257 -ai-, stems in 216 -ai-ai, -aTo (for -vrai, -vto) in 3 pers. pl. 654 c, 669 e (Hdt.), 733 oté 402; w. part. 1577 ÔLTtp w. gen. 1155, 1227 dispos 53 dTtx.v«s, àT€xv»s 419 'At0Cs 63 ao-o-a or a-rra

fi/ripos and àTipaÇa) w. gen. 1135 -a-ro (for -vto) : see -ai-ai àTpairôs, fem. 201 an-a

and

aTTa :

see aa-o-a

and

'Attikôs 63 av, diphthong 7 ; stems in 265-271 av£dva> 540

avios Aeol. for ê'ws 105

308

aiT&ov

(Hdt.) 373

adriKa 1574 avTis

165 i

avros,

dat. 1187 avToî

adv. 412, 413 for èavTov 377

atiTOÎ etc.

d4>aipew w. acc. and gen. 1118 d(f>0ovos compared 350 d4>irip.i, augment of 514 c, 567 ; opt. forms 514 c, 668, 773 d<j>vT], gen. pl. à0ûoov 146 ax0op.ai w. dat. 1160; w. partie. 1582

axpi, as prepos. w. gen. as

conj. 1478

1155, 1227 ;

-dw, denom. verbs in 634, 851 ; desideratives in 855 ; contract forms inflected 482, 486; part, inflected 336; dialect and athematic forms 659 d, f -dwv, gen. pl. (Hom.) 145, 165 h, 196

ao-o-a

aÙTap in apodosis 1432 avTapKi]s, avTapKïs, accent 142

24, 364 personal pron. in obi. cases 364, 367, 375; intensive adj. pron. 368, 923, 978; position w. art. 978; w. subst. pron. omitted 989; for reflexive 991; W. ordinals (ôé/caros avrôs) 990, cf. 443 ; in Hom. 992 ; joined w. reflexive 997 ; compared (avroratos) 363; ô clvtôs the same, 375, 978, 988; in crasis 51, 376; in

a-ÙTÔ

B, voiced stop 18, 23; labial 17; phonetic changes: see Labials; inserted between p. and X or p 108; changed to <f> in 2 pf. act. 723

-Pa, imperat. (in comp.) 787 c (3a£v<o, formation of, 604, 643 ; athematic 2 aor. 500, 694, 698, 802; athem. 2 pf. 506, 758; (iatveiv irôôa 1050

POCkxos (KX) 63 pdMco 107, 670

696

714 d, 766

GREEK INDEX

PacriXcCâ 187 C, 820 Pao-CXcia 187 C, 825 Pao-iXtûs, transfer of quantity in 33 ; gen. not contracted 48 ; declined 265, 268 ; compared 363 ; used without article 955

PacriAevo), denom. 465, 851 ; 1109; w. dat. (Hom.) aor.

of 1262

w. gen.

1164;

Paa-iXiKés 814 a, 843 PePaiOTcpcos 422 pïCco in Hom. 670 b péxtcpos, P^XTaros, and PéXtCwv, PéXTicrros 357 Pcopai in Hom. 681 PiPâÇco, future of 678 6 ptpXos, fem. 201 c ptî] Aiop/qScos 1084 pîr]<j>i 292 piôw, athem. 2 aor. 694 PX-, how reduplicated 546 b pXàirTa) 622, 723 ; aor. pass. 744 pXén-tt w. acc. 1053 b PXtTTCO T-), 108, 625 pXwo-Ka> 108 Pofj 188 Pot]0€6> w. dat. 1163 Pop^as, Poppâs declined 194 BovXt), in documents 28 PovXopai, augment of 536 ; stem fiovXe-, 590 c, 594 ; fiovXei in indic. (never \3ov\n) 582 g ; (3ov\olpt)v av and 't^ov\6fx7)v av 1326, 1338 ; see «PovX6|xt]v ; f3ov\ei or /3ov\ecrde W. interrog. subj. 1367 ; (3ov\opévy Tivi èiTTiv etc. 1586, cf. 1171 Pots, declined 265; formation of 37, 266; not contracted 48; Hom. forms of 271 ; compounds of 858

pplras, declension of 234 Ppotôs (jj.op~) 108 a P<r, written 19

407

Puvlw (fîv-ve-) 639 Pvpo-a 71 T, voiced stop 18, 23, 617 ; palatal 17 ; nasal (w. sound of ng) before K> 7, x, or £ 21, 68, 603 ; see Palatals

■yapû and 'yap.ovp.a.i 1245 Y<&P 963, 1202 ■yapvtv (Pind.) 657 b ■yao-T^jp, declension of 274 b YYP changed to yp 81, 499 b Y«, elided 57 c; enclitic 159, 963, 1202

yéyova. as près. 1265 -yïXao-cCu, desiderative verb 855 "ytXcûo 596, 597, 598, 855 YewdSas, adj. of one ending 341 •yévos 90, 43 ; declined 232 ■y^vi-o grasped 696 b : see also Y C'y v° peu

compared 348 Y^pas 41 ; declined 232 Y£vw w. acc. and gen. 1107 ; yebopai Ycpaios

gen.

1103

Y&f>vpa declined 183 Y il omitted after article 929 b YT|pcurK<o 644, 649 ; athem. 2 aor. 694 Yi gave f 19, 96, 617, 624 ; or 5 96 yiyas declined p. 51 YCYvopai 561, 604; athem. pf. 802; copul. vb. 896; w. gen. 1125; w. poss. dat. 1173, 1586 Yiyvwo-kw redupl. in près. 546, 561, 605, 644 ; athem. 2 aor. 694 ; infleet. of eyvwv 695 ; w. part. 1590 yX-, how reduplicated 546 yXvkvs declined 315 Yv-, how reduplicated 546 YvdOos, fem. 201 c Yv<op.T] declined 183 YvcoptÇo), augment of 546 b yvûu (Hom.) 670 b

GREEK GRAMMAR

408 YÊ, pronunciation 21 TopY» 815 e

declined 265; formation of 266; Hom. forms of 271 Ypdc}>a> 499 a, 716; and YP<«{>op.ai Ypavs,

1247 ; ypàepopai. W. cogn. accus. 1049, 1074, 1127 Ypt)€s, YP1!®5' Hom. for ypavs 271 Y<r written £19 Yup.vf|s 339 Yvpvôs w. gen. 1140 YX. before p. 499 b 1245 ; kypacj}r]v

A, voiced stop 18, 19 ; see Den¬ tals ; inserted in àvSpos (àv-qp) 109 ; before -arcu and -aro (in Hom.) 654 c Sa-, intens. prefix 862 Sarjp, voc. ôciep 142 d SaCpocri 76; 5aîpwi> 214 b, 229 SaCvup-i, près. opt. mid. 766 Saiopai (ôaa-) divide 636 8a£w (Sap-) burn 636

Sâpap, nom. of 215 a Sapvoûo (oap.-) and Sâp.vtip.1 642 8av€i£w and Saveî^opat 1245 8(js, accent of gen. du. and pl. 148 8é, position 963,1202 b ; elided 57 ; in ô pkv ô Se 979—983 ; in apodosis 1432 -8e, local ending 292, 413, 415; ...

enclit. 159 d

SeSiévai

727, 798

Se\c|>ts (SeXtpiv-) 215 b, 281 b

8e£id 929 b, 956, 1205 Seopai 485 a ; w. gen. or w. gen. and

acc.

8e'<o want 8e£8ia and SeîSoLKa, redupl. of (Hom.) 552 b ; SkSia 727 Sebcvupi 501, 640, 760, 775, 786; synopsis 503, 507 ; inflection of pl forms 504. Synt. w. partie. 1590 ; partie. SeLKvvs declined 329 Seîva, indef. pron., declined 398 ; always w. art. 945 : see

1114

8epr] (oepfri) 188 Se'pKopai 587 ; "A.py) SeSopuevai 1053 b 8etrp.ôs (-a-) 815 b, 819 ; heterog. 288

8eo-ir6TT]s)

voc.

Se^TaTos 362

of 192

8e'x.aTai (Hom.) 553, 652 Se'xopai, 2 aor. mid. of 696 b ; w. acc. and dat. (Hom.) 1169 8éw bind, contraction of 485 b ; vowel grades in 596 b, 734

contraction of 485

Se'w want,

Hdt. 660. w.

Impers. 8eî 887,1162

;

and dat. (rarely acc.)

gen.

1115, 1161; iroXXoD (Seî, oKiyov Sel 1116 ; ôXiyov for oXLyov ùetv alvfiost 1116 b; Séov (acc. abs.) 1571 ; kvos etc.

Skovres 441

;

eôet in apod.

Se'opai 8fj in crasis 49 ; with indef. rel. 410 ; position 963 8t]\oî without subject 886 c 8tî\6s etp.1 w. partie. 1591 8r|X6(o, contracted 43-45; inflect. of partie. 337 ; other contr. without

1410.

See

stem of 593, 634 ; synopsis of 484 ; infin. 45 e ÀTipf|TT]p, declined 277, 278; ac¬ forms 482 ;

cent of

SéSoixa 712

Seî, impers.

8eivov éo-Ttv e£ 1434

voc.

ÀTipoo-0e'vris, 142

142 d

acc.

of 237 ;

voc.

-8t]v, adverbs in 420 Srju-oTe added to indef. rel. 410 -8t]s, patronym. in 833 Si gave f 19, 96, 616 8id w. gen. and acc. 1207, 1208, 1213; Sià 4>L\ias 1189 8iaiTaw, augm. 542 b

GREEK INDEX

Sia\e''yo|j.cu, pf. 552; w. dat. 1176 w. partie. 1589

8vtîv

StaTeXeu

Sia4>£pci> w. gen. 1120 BiScmtkw, formation of 648; w. two accus. 1068; causative in mid. 1246 aor. 'éôpâv

694,

697

8CS«|u, synopsis 503, 507 ; infl. of p.L forms 504, 785; redupl. in près. 501, 612 ; thematic imperf. 665; aor. in «a 685, 701; ôovvcu 579 ; imperative ôLôudt., ôLôol 672 ; conative use of 1255; w. infin. 1536

SIkcuos 814 a, 842, cf. 808 constr. w. infin. 1531

;

personal

SiKao-Tfjs 813 SCkt^v, adverbial accus. 1059 Siopvcro-ci), augm. of plpf. 558 Sion because, w. inf. (Hdt.) 1528 8wrX.d<rios 444 b

;

compar.

1148; yévos ôlx. 1630

Serrés 444 b

8tXa 445 b ; w. gen. 1153, 1227 Si\|/âco, contraction of, 486 SiukcCOO) 601 8iwkw

gen.

and

acc.

gen.

dual and plur.

ypa<jyf]V 1049

Sfj.càs, accent of 148

432, 435 Svvapai 450, 667 ; augm. of 536 ; accent of subj. and opt. 151 c, 761, 774; bvva and kdvvw 667 8vo declined 432 ; indéclinable 435, 436

SiSpcMTKco, athem. 2

gen.

409

1127 ;

Soi», Soiol (Hom.) 435 590 ; impers, ôo/ceî 887, 1526 b, 1527 ; eSo£e or 5é5o/crat in decrees 28, 1543 ; (dis) èpol boKeïv

Sokéco

1538

Sokos, fem. 201 c -8ov (Sa) or -rjôôv, adverbs in 420 86s, accent when compounded 152 b SovXcvo) and 8ovX.6« 853

Spao-eCw, desiderative verb 855 Spcuo, Spatrco 600, 653 Sp6<ros, fem. 201 c

Suer-, inséparable prefix 861 ; augm. of vbs. comp. with 568 8v« 694, 776; 5ts declined 329: see

«8vv

(Hom.) 290 Sûpov declined 200 Soi

E, short vowel 4, 5, 6 ; name of 4 ; pronunciation of 29 ; in con¬ traction 42 ; as syll. augm. 534 ; before a vowel 537 ; becomes y in temp. augm. 539 ; lengthened to ri at end of vowel verb stems 593 ; lengthened to et when cons. are dropped bef. a 32, 70, 75; in aor. of liq. and nasal stems 687 ; in 2 aor. pass. subj. (Hom.) 655 c ; in athem. 2 aor. act. subj. 670 6; mutâtes w. o in 2 pf. 585; in nouns 34, 806, 811, 816; e added to stem, in près. 590; in other tenses 590 c ; dropped in eeo (Hdt.) and eeai and eeo (Hom.) 660 b ; thematic vowel 467 ; in Hom. subj. 655 <=', pron. 369 ; use in Attic 986, 987 -ea contr. to à, not 17 45 a, 210, 309 -eai for -euai in verbal endings, contr. to y or et 45 c, 582 g, 654 b : see -«o

êâv for

1299 b, 1393 ; èâv

irœs

1380 éavTov declined 377 ;

êpov\6p,T)v without

1412 ; éjSov\6p7]v av

synt. 960, 993 av

(potential)

1338

êyyiis, adv. 422; w. gen. 1153, 1227 ; w. dat. 1190

410

GREEK GRAMMAR

è-yetp» 630, 632 ; pf. and plpf. mid. 499 d, ; aor. mid. 692 ; Att. redupl.

flKwv, decl. of 251 ; gender 280 6

e-yx^s, decl. of 264 declined 364; Hom. and Hdt. 369 ; generally omitted 984 : emphatic 985 ; enclitic forms 998 b e-yûSa in crasis 51

elpt 86, 612

557

e-y»

eSSetc-e 535

apod. 1410 ëSo|icu 681 eSUv (of ôéw) 502, 694; synopsis 503, 694; inflected 504; Hom. «Set etc. without cb in

opt. 776 ÈSuSfj 815 e ■€€

in dual of

lé for

nouns

Hom.

pron.

ee8va for ê-feôpa eeticocri 431

ê0e'X»

ts, us

255

369

0ëX» 537, 590 c e0ev for ou 369 mid. 499

;

pf. and plpf.

diphthong 7 ; genuine and spurious et 8, 32, 45 e, 75, 100, 793; pronunc. of 28, 29 ; augment of 540, 541 b ; as augm. or redupl. (for ee) 537, 552 ; normal grade in vowel mutation 585, 610 et if, proclitic 155; 1392, 1432 ; whether 1506, 1607, 1608 ; el yâp, e'ide 1355, 1359 ; et causal 1433 ; in wishes, O i/1355 ; in Hdt. 1528 eî name of epsilon 4 -et for -ecrai, -eai in 2d pers. sing. 582 g, 654 b -eiâ, nouns in, denoting action 820 -eta, nouns in 187 c, 825 -eias, -eie, -eiav in aor. opt. act. 575, €i,

764 elSov

102, 537 ;

el8»s declined 329

partie. 1584,1587

ctltdO», €tK(X0Ol|Xt 601

inflection of 509, 664 ; copula 878, 879; w. pred. nom. 896; w. poss. or part. gen. 1094; w. dat. 1173, 1586 ; ecrrtf ot, etrrtf o S, ecrTLv y or Ô7rcos 1029 ; w. opt. with¬ ;

dialect forms of 510 ; as

out âv 1332 ; èftcôf etfat, to vvv elvai,

Karà

tovto

accent (en¬ accent of &v,

elvai 1539 ;

clitic) 159

161

;

149

ovtos

etpt, inflection of 511 ; dial. forms of 513 ; près, as fut. 1257 eîvai, redundant 1077,1536 c, 1539 el'vaTOS for 'èvaros 435 eiveica

€00;», augment 537

eipaprat, augm. of 552 et jxtj except 1213 b, 1424

165 g

eïvvpi 86 eîo for

: see

ëvvvpi

369

-eîov, nouns of place in 829 eîos, Hom. for è'cos 1478 -eîos, patronymic sufflx 835 eîira, first aorist 686, 699 eîirov, accent 151 ; w. ôrt or <&s 1527 ; tos ifivos) eiireiJ> 1538 ; elircov, formation of 330; Aeol. et'.irnv 657 b

eïpv» etc. or

infin.

w. gen. w. rov

1117

and

;

p-q

w. infin. (5 forms)

1552, 1554, 1619 eïpt]Ka, augment of 552 ets proclitic 155; w. accus. 1207, 1214; for h w. dat. 1204; w. numerals 946; ès x«îpas kXdeîv 1189

eïs, pta, é'v declined 432, 433 ; compounds of 434 -ets, -eo-o-a, -ev, adj. in 847 ; decl. 323, 324 ; compar. 351 -ets in acc. pl. of 3d decl. (for -eas) 240 ; late in nouns in eus 255 eïo-w, adv. w. gen. 1152, 1227

GREEK INDEX eÏT€

€Ït« accent 163 ;

synt. 1608

sîxov, augment of 90, 537 -e£«, Hom. près, in, for -éw 660 670 6

6Ïa)0o, 2 pf. 552, 719 tl'ws, Hom. for «os 1478 4k : see 4£ «Kao-Tos, €KaTepos, 363 ; 974

cf.

syntax of

£|A£0£V, £p£ÎO, £(1£0, £fi£(i 369 £|i£«vToû (Hdt.) 379

£fl.|A€V or £(J.|X£Vau, £|i€V or £|X£Vai., £|X|Xl

article

(Hom.) 510 £p.6s 380, 998

i[Air£irXT](n and £(XTr£irpr](xi 613

6K€ï0€v

413, 425, 1205 Ikéîvos 388, 391, 923, 943, 972, 1004, 1005 ; bieivoai 392 4K£ÎCT£ 413, 423 £K«x»'P'a 105 d 4KKXT]0-ICÎ£W 565 «KirXtcos, neut. pl. &C7rXeco 301

«KiroSwv 412

adv.

w. gen.

£p,irpoo-0£v w. gen. 1152, 1227 «v proclitic 155; w. dat. 1215, 1179 ; as adv. 1201 ; w. dat. for eis w. acc. 1204 6 ; in expr. of time 1195; phon. change before liquid or nasal 73 ; before f or a 77

: see

£v

-£v

1152, 1227

Ikwv declined 327 ; compar. 353 ; as adv. 922; &v omitted 1573; «Kwv elvai 1539

4Xcunrwv, eXaTTwv 63, 357, 1150 èXavvw, form of près. 641 ; fut. 678 6 (see 4X6w) ; Att. redupl. 554 ; Hom. éXi?Xàôarat 654 c ; sense

IpavTov declined 377; 960, 993

£p£v (Dor. for ê/xoc) 374

4k€Î 423

«ktos,

411

1232

éXac{)T]-|3ôXos 858, 871 cXdxtia (Hom.), èXâx'Tros 357

€Xé-yxwi pf. and plpf. 81 ; inflected 497, 499 6, 554 4X£v<rop.ai 34, 511 c 4X04, accent 151 ïXmtov inflected p. 1111 ïXXaPov, ëXXaxov (Hom.) for t\a(iov, ëXaxoj' 535 'EXXtjvuttC 420 IX6o), Hom. fut. of éXaww 659 6, 678 6

éXirCÇw 616, 620; w. fut. infin. or près, and aor. 1287 ëXu-£s declined p. 51; accus, sing. 218 c; voc. 223

£Îs

for

aor.

747

pass.

654 i, 741,

-£v, verbs in 100 ; infin. in 657 6 ëvavTios w. gen. 1146; w. dat. 1175

£vS£f|s 4'v€Kct

w. gen.

1140

accented pron. 161

d; w. 1155, 1227 £V£o-ti, impers. 887 ëv0a, €v0€v 414, 423, 424 IvOÔSE 414, 423 £v0avra, £v0£vt£v (Ion.) 425 £V0£V 292 6 ; 'évdev Kal 'évOev 424, 1205 w.

gen.

ëvi for 'éveaTL 1203

and £vi6t€ 1028 Iwëa not contracted 48 £ viol

é'vvup.1 86, 105/, 553, 640 ëvoxos w. gen. 1140

£VTaO0a 423 £VT£V0£V 424

Ivtos

1153, 1227 25, 67, 80, 84, 116, 362, 564; é/c long before liquid or nasal 123 ; proclitic 155 ; ac¬ cented 156; w. gen. 1207, 1216; for 'ev w. dat. 1204 ; w. agent of pass. vb. 1208 gen.

GREEK GRAMMAR

412

é(;au|>vT]s w. partie. 1574 «leo-Ti, impers. 887; w. dat. 1161; kÇrjv in apod. without âv 1410 è(j6v, acc. abs. 1571 £^a> 416; w. gen. 1152, 1227 €o -€o

for

369

-eao

43, 582

654 b

éoî for oî 369 eoïKa

(eu-) 549, 727, 728 ; plpf. 551 ;

dat. 1176

os (poss.) 381 adj. of material in 845 £Trcuv«a>, stem 599 lirdv and €iredv (èirel av) 51, 1440 b kird and €ir€i8^ 54, 1439, 1463 ; w. infin. in oratio obliqua 1528 lireiSàv and êmfjv 1299 b, 1440 b ImrjPoXos w. gen. 1140 iirl w. gen., dat., and accus. 1179, 1207, 1217 ; as adverb 1201 étti for ëireoTt. 135, 1203 4iri0v|xéû) w. gen. 1103 lirucâpa-ios w. gen. 1146 £7riXav0dvop.cu w. gen. 1103 ; w. partie. 1590; w. infin. 1594 b £iri|j.«Xifjs w. gen. 1140 €TrCcrTa|ACU 612 ; èirioTa and r]TviaTU 667 ; accent of subj. and opt. 151c, 761, 774; w. accus. 1105; w. partie. 1590; w. infin. 1594 b 6iri<rTfi|iwv w. gen. 1142 ; w. accus. 1048 ; w. infin. 1530 €iriTi(iâû> w. acc. and dat. 1163 éirpid|AT)v (Trpta.-) 502 ; synopsis 503 ; inflected p. 128; accent of subj. and opt. 151c, 761, 774; imper-

-eos,

ative 788

verbs in 100, 630 épécro-a), stem êper- 625, 815 d IpÉTpdv 82, 815 d Ipi-, intens. prefix 862 in 273

«s w. acc.

etr-,

los for

-€p, nouns

of 218 c 'Eppéas, 'Epp/fis, declined 193 Ê'ppto-ya. 2 pf. of prjyvvfj,L 34, 719 tperr] 188 èpuOpiaw 855 b CpVKCD, TlpVKaKOV 559 ep\aTai (Hom.) 553 «ptoTaw w. two acc. 1068

«pis, acc.

;

IpiSatvo) 643 èpC£a> w. dat. 1188, 1189

1207

see

«ls

stems of 3d decl. in 232, 821

€cr(3T]V (ofitvvviM) 502 €o-0£o) 650 ; future 681 -Éo-i in dat. plur. 225, 235 èa-o-tlovTo (Hom.) 535 kcrcrl (Hom.) 510, 582 -éo-o-i in dat. plur. (Hom.) 235 é'<r<rwv 165 e, 357 écttcu 509 ; accent when compounded 152 d

€o~T€

until 1478

-éo-Tepos, -^crTaTos 349, 350 £<tt£ w. ending rt 509 ; accented ikn-i 161 ; may be elided 59, 111 ; takes v movable 59, 111 ; w.

subject infin. 1521 894

; w. masc.

plur.

(ou, fj, Ô7TCOs) 894, 1028 ; '&JTLV w. opt. without av 1332 éo"Tcos (for ècrraws), «(TTÛo-a, £(tt6s (Ion. èareœs) 338, 506, 802 «rxaTos 362 ; w. article 976 €o-x.e0ov 105 e, 601 «rw 416 ; w. gen. 1152 : see d<rw é'Tapov (Ion.) 691 €rë0r]v for Wedr/v 105 C éVepos 51, 363, 408, 965; w. gen.

«TTIV 01 ootls

1148

etc.

: see

aTepos

€TT]o-£ai, €TT|(r£a)v 146 iToîpos, «Toipos 142 d €T*U0T]v for Wvdrjv 105 c eu, diphthong 7 ; for eo, ov 165 c ; stems in 265-269, 316 ; verbs in 485, 611

GREEK INDEX

compared 421 ; augm. of verbs compounded with 568 ; w. iroiéco, Tvàax^t ÔKovœ, etc. 1072, 1242 ; w. ëxo> and gen. 1092 ev, pron. for ou 369 é-ù8cu|acov declined 307 ; accent 142 b eve\ins 311 ; accus. 218 c £V€p-y€T€w, augm. 568 evQv w. gen. 1152, 1227 tti0vs w. partie. 1574 €v,

contr. of 309

eîîvoos, «iîvovs, compared 349 «vpia-Kw 604, 644 ; w. partie. 1584, 1590

of specif. 1056 «vpiis wide, Hom. acc. of 317 -evs, nouns in 265-269, 825, 840 ; Hom. forms of 267 ; original forms of 267 ; contracted forms «vpos, acc.

of 269

€v<J>vfjs, contr. of 309 ïiîxapis, decl. of 311 -€v«, denom. vbs. in 634, 851 cvuSrjs 308 £<j>r|va for k4>av-aa 32, 92, 687 £<}>opda> w. partie. 1587 è<j>' w or £<j>' 402 ; w. infin. and

1410

105, 692 ; augment 537 ; w. partie, for perf. 1264 ; 'éxo/iai 1245 ; w. gen. 1099 ; «xw w. adv. and part. gen. 1092 ; 'éxuv continually 1567; with 1568; ££co and (Tx^crw 1250/ -«w and -€<ov, Ion. gen. of lst decl. 131, 165 h, 196 e -é«, denom. verbs in 634, 851 ; in¬ fection of contract forms 482, 485, 660 d «Xw

-éo) for -àœ in vbs. -eco

€«Kip €«s

(Hdt.) 659

in fut. of liquid stems 677

plpf. 551

dawn 105/ ; acc. of 206, 244

conj. 1478; while 1439; until 1478-1483; expr. purpose 1482;

««s,

in indir. dise. 1517

Att. 2d decl. in 131, 203, 299 ewuToî for èavTov (Hdt.) 379 -eus,

F, équivalent to

eflvoia 814

fut. ind. 1476, 1477 èx0p°s compared 354 èXPnv or XP*ÎV in apod. without

413

: see

Digamma

Z, double cons. 19 ; voiced 23 ; origin of 19 ; probable pronunciation of 29 ; makes position 120 ; except for a, i, v 125 d ; e for redupl. before 545 ?a-, intens. prefix 862 £au, contr. form of 486 -S«, adv. in 86 d, 292 Zei)s 291, 886 e -Su, verbs in 616-620 in -dfu

; fut. of vbs. and -Vçw 678 b, c

open long vowel 5, 6; orig. aspirate 13, 28 ; in Ion. for Dor. à 164; a and e length. to tj 31, 532, 536, 538, 539, 593 ; after o188; in contr. 42, 45, 486; as thematic vowel in subj. 467 ; fem. nouns and adj. in 817, 841 r whether (Hom.), or, interrog. 1607, 1608; than 1149, 1474, 1535; om. 1150; in synizesis 54 ■il rel. pron. 399 ; $ 412, 423, 425 il, interrogative 1605, 1608 U, improper diphthong 7 -t| for -ecrai or ~qoai in 2d pers. sing. 45 c, 582 g, 654 b : see -ei T]-Yep,tov decl. 229 f]"ye'op.ai w. gen. 1109; w. dat. (Hom.) 1164 ; w. infin. 1527 ■nSe accent 159, 160, 390

414

GREEK GRAMMAR

•fl8o|xai 460, 465 ; w. cogn. acc. 1049 r|8op.lva> «roC éirnv etc. 1586

8' os : r|8vs 89

see ;

rjni

compared 354 ; rjôLœv de-

■f|TTwp,cu w. gen. 1120 diphthong 7 ; augm. of nx" decl. 248 t|ws (Ion.) 105 ; decl. 244

■qv,

540

clined 355

r|4, ife, interrog. (Hom.) 1608 t|€C8t|s etc. (oîôa) 530 b, 538 -fjeis, adj. in, contracted in Hom. 325

•îÎKio-Ta (superl.) 357, 421 rjKio as perf. 1256 t]\(kos 408 Tj\b>0ov 34, 718 •qpcu 664; inflection of 521; dial. forms of 524

Tjptâs

372 in athem. partie. (Hom.)

or r]|ias

-T)l«vos

674

380, 1003 ; w. avrûv 1003 tiiaC 612, 1023 rjp.1-, insepar. particle 88, 861 tjjjlCv, Tip.iv 372 rjp.io-us 318 •npos 425 t[v for 'eàv (ei àv) 1393 T|'v€-yKa 686, 699 T)vCKa, rel. adv. 423 T|vtirairov 559 nos (Hom.) 1478 nirap declined p. 51 ; form of nom. T]|xcT€pos

216

TÎiretpos, fem. 201 b 'HpaKXéijs 45 /, 48, 241 n'pws declined 246 -tjs, adj. in 841, 867; inflection of 307, cf. 232, 237 -ns (for -îjes), in nom. pl. of nouns in -eus (older Attic) 268 or -ris, in dat. pl. lst decl. (Ion.) 196/ n«ro-cov, t[ttû)v 94, 165; comp. 357, 360, 421 ■no-vxQS comp. 348

0, voiceless aspirate 18, 23 ; dental 17 ; in etc. 601, 815 c ; see Dentals

-0a, local ending 414 -0a, pers. ending (see -o-0a) 582

0àXao-o-a, 0à\aTra decl. 141, 186 0ap.CÇw w. partie. 1589 0dirTw (ra<£-) 620 ; aspirâtes in 105 e 0dporos 107 0do-o-«v, 0d.TTwv 94, 354; aspirate in 105

0aT€pov etc. 53 0avp,a w. infin. 1534 0aup.dÇca w. gen. 1103, 1121 ; OavuàÇu ei 1433 ; Oaufxâ^ciù otl 1433 0€d 196

(Hom.) 670 b or O^XeTe 537, 590 c ; w. inter¬ rog. subjunctive 1367 -0ev, local ending 113, 292, 413, 415 0eos, in synizesis 54 ; vocative 202,

0eCw

0e'X.€is

886

0lpop.ai, fut. of 682 6é(0 (0ev) 54, 485, 611 ©nPâÇe 86 d, 292 0fjXvs 318 0fjp declined 229 ; nom. 214 0fjs declined p. 51 -0TJ-TI for -07J-01 in 1 aor. pass. imperat. 105 b, 672, 784-789 -0i, local ending 159, 292 b, 413, 415 0vjj<rKo) (0af-, 0i>T]-) 647, 714 d; fut. pf. act. TeBvrt^œ 736, 1268 ; perf. as près. 1265; athem. 2 perf. 500, 790 ; part. Tedve&s, Hom. Te0vi)6)s 802 0olp.aTi.ov (by crasis) 51 Opdo-os 107

GREEK INDEX

Gplf;, Tpi\6s, aspirâtes in 105 clension of 227

de-

-0pov, nouns in 822 0pvirrû) (rpv4i>-) 105 e 0vyc£tt)p declined 274 ; poetic forms 275

0vpâ£e 292 0vpâcri 412

foll. vowel 46 ; contr.

w. pre-

class of verbs 615-636

-C, deictic suffix 392 ïa for ixta (Hom.) 435 -ta, fem. partie, in 332; nouns in 819, 826, 827 -ictÇw, imitative verbs in 854 lâopai 593 -iâ<o, desideratives in 855 -i8, stems in 223 tSeîv, accent of 791 -CStos, suffix 839 -£8t]s (fem. -Ls) and -laS^s (fem. -tâs), patronym. in 833, 836 -iStov, diminutive in 830 ïSios w. poss. gen. 1143 Ï8p,«v 82 ïSpts declined (one ending) 340 I8p6w, contraction of 488

i8pvv0T)v (tôpvw), Hom. 740

aor.

pass.

mood suffix in opt. 573, 574, 769, 771

ie- or

trj- as

corne

1344

ceding vowel 41 ; a after 32,185, 187; length. to l 31, 32; interchanged w. et and ot 34; mood suffix in opt. 573, 574, 763; in redupl. of près, stem 547, 561, 604, 612; before f 125 d; noun stems in 250, 257 ; phon. changes caused by 93-101 ; semivowel t 26, 37, 212 ; subscript 7, 10, 12 -i, local ending 412, 413 -i

Upos w. poss. gen. 1143 -tÇtt, denom. vbs. in 620, 851, 854 ïr]pi, inflection of 514, 612; dial. forms of 516 ; augment 537 ; aor. in -ko. 685 ; opt. irpôoiro etc. 514 c, 668, 773 ; etvat 798

Ï0u

I, close vowel 5, 6; rarely contr. w.

415

subj. and imperat.

ÎKvéopat 639 adjectives in 843 ÏXews, adj. declined 204, 299 *I\i60i irpô 292 b, 415 -ikos,

-ipos,

suffix 844

(fiv) Doric for ol 374 -iv in acc. sing. 218 c

ïv

-iv, verbs in 100 ïva, final conj. 1371, 1372, 1374, 1376, 1377 -ivos, adj. of material in 845; adj.

of time in

-iov, -ios,

-tvos

846

suffix 829, 830 adj. in 842 ; patronymic 835

ïiriros 63 ; fem., cavalry, w. numerals 442

sing.

[irirôTa, nom. (Hom.) 196 6 verbs in 100 -is, féminines in 840 b IcrOpoî 412 -icru, dat. case ending 180 -ip,

-io-k%-,

stems in 644 dimin. in 830 ï<r|A€v for ïô/xev 82, 530 ïo-os w. dat. 1176; comp. 348; y'tvos 'Lcrov 1630 Îo*tt||u, synopsis 503, 507; inflect. of ixl forms 504, 506, 785; re¬ dupl. of près. 501, 561, 612; fut. perf. act. 736; partie, taras de¬ -£o-kos,

près,

-LUK-q,

clined 329

-îtis, suffix 829

lx.0vs declined 260 ; acc. pl. of 262 ; gender 281 b 'Iw, acc. 'ïovv (Hdt.) 250

GREEK GRAMMAR

416

511 b patronym. in 834

twv, partie. -i«v,

-iwv,

-io-tos,

354 ; -ïœv

comp.

356 b

and superl. in

K, voiceless stop 18 ; palatal 17 ; phon. changes, see Palatals ; changed to x in 2 perf. stem 723 -Ka in aor. of three vbs. 685

Kaf3|3aXe (/caré/SaXe) 60 Kay for «ara 60 Ka0apôs w. gen. 1140 Ka0éÇo(xai, augment 567 ; fut. 678 Ktt0eii8w, augment 567 Kd0T]p.ai, inflection of 522, 524 Ka0î£w, augment 567 Ka0îcrTT|p.i as copul. vb. 893 b, 896 Ka£, in crasis 49-51 ; connecting numerals 441 ; two subjects 891 ; w. part, (see KaLirep) 1575; Kal os, Kal o'i, ôs Kal os 1023 b ; Kal ois 156 e, 424 ; Kal ravra 1575; Kal tov W. infin. 983 ; Ta Kal ra, to Kal tô 983

part. 1575 (Att. Kaa>) 635

Katn-£p Kcuto

(Hom.) for Karà 60 compared 359, 361 tcaKTave (/caretcrave) 60 KaKÛs iroieîv (\éyei.v) 1072, 1242 KaXéto, fut. in (-éw) -W 678 ; perf. ind. 714 c; perf. opt. in -?m-qv 766; perf. as près. 1265; w. two acc.

k«xk

kcikôs

1075

compared 357 KaXvpr] and KctXvTTTw 622 Kdp.irTa), perf. mid. 81, 499 Kav (/cat tv), Kâv («ai av) 51

koàôs

208 (Hom.) for Karà 60 Kcîpno-Tos, superl. 357, 358 KapTos 107

K(JU'€OV, Kavovv Kair

by crasis 51 (Hom.) for Karà 60 Ka/rd, préposition w. gen. and acc. 1207, 1218; in compos. 1127; Karà yrjv 956 ; Karà arlxov 1651 Kiira (Kal elra) 51 KaTa-(35 for Karà-Ppdi 787 C KaTaf3oda> w. gen. 1127

k5,ctti

tS for èvi 435

KttT

KaTa-yiyvwa-Kw W. gen.

1127

KaTcéyvuiu w. gen. 1098 KaTa0ov, accent 151, 152 c KCI,TCu|>pOVÉ« 1103 KaTc«|/€iiSopiai w. gen. 1127 KaTax|/î]<j)iÇop,ai w. gen. 1127 KaTî]-yop€û>, augment of 565 ; w. gen. 1103 ; w. gen. and acc. 1127 KaT0aveîv (Karadavelv) 60, 63 KaTOTrtv w. gen. 1153 KaTa), KaTWTepos,

362, 412,

KaTWTaTOS

416 KavTôs

by crasis 51 (= av) 113, 1299

ké or K€v

Ktt for Kal

50 b

KÉÎ0€V, K6L01 425

Keîp.ai, inflection

of 525, 527

391, 425 Kets for Kal els 50 b

Keîvos

Keûre 425

K€KaSfj<rw, fut. pf. act. of x^fw K€Kp.î]KCL 80

736

perf. imper. 780 and £KTT]p,ai 547

K€Kpct"y€T€,

K€KTTjp.aL

Ke'XevOos, fem. 201 KeXevw w. acc. and inf. 1164 Ke'XXto, fut. 682 ; aor. 689

Ke'XoptH, redupl. 2 aor. 559, K6vôs comp. 347 Kepas

692

declined 233

KepSatvco 643 ; aor. 688 K6xapf|(ra>, fut. pf. act. of Kétos, acc. of 206 Kfjvos, Dor. 391 : see é/cetws KTipÙTTei 623 ; without subject

736

886 d

GREEK INDEX ki(3cotôs, fem. 201 (Attic kXolw) 635 ; fut. 679

k\ci£io

K\aLœv

1567

;

KXavo-icûo, desiderative verb 855 -kXstjs, proper nouns in, decl. 241 kX«Is (Ion. KXrjts), acc. of 219 KXeVnis compared 352, 363 kX£vw, drops v 499 d, 602 ; pf. mid. 498 ; aor. pass. 602, 740 kXio"£TJ<|H 292 K|i 80 Kvdw, contraction of 486 Kop-iÇo) 616 ; future 678 c ; pf. 715 KOptj (Koppri) 165, 188 KÔpO-T], KÔppT] 188

suffix 843 (Ion.) 426 kôtépos etc. (Ion.) 409 kov by crasis 51 kov (Ion.) 426 kov(}>os compared 346 KpdÇw 96, 589 Kparéw w. gen. 1109; w. acc. 1110 Kp^as 216 icpeCtro-tov, kpîCttwv, KpaTurTos 357, -kos, kot€

etc.

358

612 ; accent of subj. and opt. 761, 774 Kpivw, drops v 100, 602, 630, 714 c KpovCcov 834 KpvirTw 654 c ; w. two acc. 1068 Kpv<}>a w. gen. 1154 kot, when written 19 Kp€pa(j.cu

pf. 547; pf. subj. and opt. 754, 766 ktcCvu 587, 602, 669 d ; athem. KTaop.ai,

aor.

694

kvkXw 1191

A, liquid 20 ; sonant 27 ; XX from Xi 98 ; after syllabic augm. (Hom.) 535; voiced stop before 122

Xa|3<6v with 1568 Xa-yx&vci> and XapPavto, redupl. of 552; formation 638, 718, 720 Xa-yws, acc. of 206 ; for Xaywôs 207 Xâflpâ or Xâflpa 412; w. gen. 1154 XaOuv secretly 1569 Xapiras declined p. 51 Xav0âvco (Xad-) 638; w. part. 1588 Xoo-kw (XaK-), formation of 648 X^aiva 186

X«y« collect, redupl. of 552 X£y« say, constr. of 1526, 1527; Xéyovai

886 b

1529

;

Xéyerai

omitted

Xeîirw, vowel grades in 34, 169, 466, 610 ; synopsis 477 ; 2 aor., 2 pf., and 2 plpf. inflected 481 ; middle 490, 494 ; XêXonra 34, 157 c, 330, 481, 718 X€'X€l|A|ACU 79, 481 Xégo, imperat. 788 Xccov declined 227 ; nom. 214 ; voc. 223

ArfjSa 188 Xl6o|3ôXos and Xi0o|3oXos 871 Xlo-o-opai w. œs or ottœs 1388 XoiSope'co w. acc. and Xot8opéop,ai

-Xos, suffix 844 Xovw, contraction of 488 X<r 71

(kv-) 639

Kîipw, fut. 682

K(oXva>, accent of certain forms 495 ; KœXvei as impers. 886 d ; w. infin. (5 forms) 1552, 1554, 1619 K«s, acc. of 206

dat. 1163

ktïCs, ktév-ôs, nom. 215 b xvSpôs compared 354

KTJV&û

417

Xvw ; aor.

689

KVWV, KVVTÉpOS, KVVTaTOS

363

465; synopsis 474, 475; conjug. 480 ; Hom. pf. opt. 766 ; Xvuv, Xùaas, and XeXvKws declined 329 ;

GREEK GRAMMAR

418 quantity of v 584 151 b, 223 Xc&uv, XGo-tos 357

see75,95,101,

gen. w.

1103, 1105;

part. 1590;

infin. 1594 b

p^p«j>opai w. dat. 1160 ; w. acc. 1163 pév 963, 1202 ; in ô pkv ô 5é 979 -pevai, -p«v, in infin. (Hom.) 657, .

M, nasal 21 ; and sonant 27 ; stops before 79, 122 ; becomes v 24 ; v becomes p 732; a before p 82; p/3A and p(3p for p\ and pp 108 |x«x

in oaths

w. acc.

1065-1067

neut. nouns in 821 patopai (jiacr-) 636 jiaKpôs, decl. of 294 ; comp. 357 ;

-pa,

paKpQ w. comp. 1184

pdXa 420 ;

351, 421

comp.

(pâXKov, p&kurta)

-pâv, Dor. ending for

-prjv

654 of source

pavOdvco 450, 638 ; w. gen. 1125; w. infin. 1594 5; ri padwv 1569

MapaOwvi, dat. of place 1193 papi-upopcu 630 paxopcu, fut. -eaopai, -odpai 590 C, 596, 678; w. dat. 1189 Ml-yapaSc 292 pe-yas, decl. 342 ; comp. 357, 358 p^£«v for peiÇ(ov 96, 165, 357, 358 -p,€0ov in first person dual 582 b pc0vo-0T)v 657 b p€t'^<av 358 pclpopai, redupl. of .pf. 552 pe£«v, peîa-ros 357, 360 P^Xas 32, 75; declined 319; fem. of 320; nom. 215 b; comp. 346 p&€i pf. (Hom.) 722; w. dat. and gen. 1106, 1161 P&i 24, 108, 214 d peXurtra, p^Xi-rra 63 C, 95 plXXco, augment of 536; w. infin., as periphr. fut. 1254 plpPXuKot 108 pépvtipai 547, 654 a; pf. subj. and opt. 754, 766; as près. 1265; w.

673

MtvéXaos and MtvtXtws 33, 205 ; ac¬ cent 131

plvos 'ArpetSao 1084 ptvT&v (by crasis) 51 p«pos in fractions 443, 1090; w. gen. 1091, 1098 -p«S, -p€O-0a for -pev, -peda 578, 582 d, 654

p€(rr]p(3p£a 108 pécros, péaaos 95 b ;

compar.

361 ; w. art. 976

348,

Pïo-t6s w. gen. 1140

dat., and acc. 1207, 1219 ; as adv. 1201 ; pkra (Hom.) for p'eTtcrTL 1203

p€Tct w. gen.,

peTapéXïi

gen.

1161

and dat. 1106,

p£Ta|îi w. gen. 1155, 1227 ; w. part. 1574 pÉTauoiéopai w. gen. 1097, 1099 p€T€o"Ti w. gen. and dat. 1097 b, 1161

p€T£x« w. gen. p€T£COpOS

1097 b, 1098

pe'Toxos w. gen. 1140 -péTpus, compounds in, 190 pcv 369 ; enclitic 159 pï'xpii as prep. w. gen. 1227; as conj. 1478; w. subj. without av 1481

pii, adv. not 1609-1622 ; w. ïva, fous, etc. in final clauses 1371, 1373; with vbs. of fearing, w. subj. and opt. 1389; w. indic. 1391 ; in protasis 1394 ; in rel. cond. sent. 1440 ; in wishes 1355, 1359, 1613; w. imperat. and

GREEK INDEX

subj. in prohibitions 1343, 1345; subj. expressing fear 1347, 1348; for Ô7rws pù 1386; w. subj. (also m où) in cautious assertions 1349 ; w. indic. 1350 ; w. dubi¬ tative subj. 1367 ; w. infin. 1614 ; in clauses of resuit 1459 ; in causal sentences 1462 ; w. infin. after négative verb 1554, 1618 ; generic 1616 ; pù on, py oircos 1519. See où |at) and pr| où -ptl, fem. nouns in 819 pijSapoû etc. 427 |at]8€, \ii\Tt 1608; nr]ôè els 434; w. w.

concess. part. 1575 pijScts 396, 411, 434, 1609

etc. 434

;

pyôéves

|Ai]SéTepos 411 prjKaopai 591 pt]K€Tl 115 p.T) où 1553, 1618, 1619 ; one syllable in poetry 54 ; pi) où in final cl. 1373 ; w. subj. or indic. in cautious négations 1349, 1350 |AfjT£ 1609 ; accent 163 p.fjTT]p 169 ; declined 274 pfjns (poet.) 411 ; accent 163, 396 pfjTpa>s 246 -|u, conj. of verbs in 500-532, 662674; in lst pers. sing. 578, 582, 637,763 ; dépendent moods 755761, 771-777 ; Aeol. vbs. in, for -au, -eu, -ooj 659 /, 660 d pCa 88, 429, 432, 433 pucpùs 88; compared 357; juucpov (ôeïv) 1116 6 pipvfiorKw 647 ; augment of pf. 547 ; w. gen. 1107. See p^pvi]pai pCv and v(v 371, 374 M£vws, acc. 206 ; gen. 247 p.£o-yw 648 picrc'b) w. acc. 1163 p.p.p. changed to nn 81 ...

419

p.vâa, p.vâ, declined 193 poîpa 88, 99, 187, 443 po\- in pf. of (3\ù<tkw 108, 644 povaxxi 445 b pùvos 165, 445 c pop- in /Sporôs 108 -pos, nouns in 819 ; adj. in 844 poîvos (pows) 165 Movo-a declined 183 ; Aeol. Molaa 165 gr

p-uîa 187 c pvpiâs 430

pùpioi and pvploi 442 pvpîos, pupCa 442 b p€s, pods, declined 260 pûv (pù ovv), interrog. 1605 -pwv, adj. in 841 d N, nasal 21

sonant 27

;

can

;

end

word 24 ; movable 59, 110, 489 ; before labial, dental, and palatal

72; before liquid and nasal 73, 6; before ar 75; vt, vô, vd, dropped before a 70; in kv and aùv 77; after voiced stop 122; dropped in some vbs. in -vu 92, 499 d, 602 ; changed to <r before pat 74, 499 d, 603, 732 ; dropped before a in dat. pl. 85 ; added in aor. pass. 740 ; adj. in 319 ; in 3d 78

class of verbs 637-643 added to verb stem 642

va-

va( yes

1066

vaCxij accent 159 d,

;

163 -vai,

infin. in 579, 795, 797, 798.

See -ptvai va£a>

(vaf-) 636

vâô$, vtjùs, and vet&s 203 vavs declined 265; Dor. and Ion.

decl. of 270; vaO^t 292; forma¬ tion of 37, 266; compounds of

(vaupaxta, etc.) 858

vavaLiropos,

vecoaoïxos,

420

GREEK GRAMMAR Attie 28, 29 ; can end word 24 ; and u short before 125 d ; re-

vcîw

spin, contr. 486 dropped before a 70 -v8as patronymic 835 vS

added to verb stem 639

v£-

vaxcUo

(Hom.) 660

véos not contracted 48, 305

(w-) 611

vt'w v«cos

;

fut. 666, 679

for vàôs 33 ; declined 203

vfj in oaths w. acc. 1065, 1066 vî]-, insep. neg. prefix 861 vfjo-os declined 200 vt]îs (for vavs) 270 v0 dropped before a- 70 vCÇw, fut. vtyw 619 ; w. 2 acc. 1069 viKcuo w. cogn. acc. 1049, 1074 ; w. dat. of relation 1172; pass. w. gen. 1120 vCv and |Av 371, 374 v(<j>a (acc.) 289 vojaCÇw 125 d, 599, 620 ; w. infin. 1527 ; w. dat. like xpâo/xat 1183 vôos, voîs declined 208 -vos, adj. in 844 vocros, fem. 201 vov|x?]v£a 1196 -vs 75; in acc. pl. 180, 182, 198, 211 d

-v<ri

and

-vti

vt-

dropped before

in 223, 323 -vto in 3d pers. -vtwv

pl. 75, 578,

in 3d pers.

582 e, 654

;

barytones

pl. 578 pl. imperat. 578,

in 3d pers.

778 w-

added to verb stems 640

and èv wkt'l 1195 -vt5|ai, verbs in 501 6, 640, 760, 775 vuv or vv (epic) 113 ; enclit. 159 v»ï, vwïv 369 vcotTcpos 381 wkt<5s 956 ; wktL

S, double consonant 19, 69 ; voiceless 23; how written in early

dupl. before 545 fjeîvos, Ion. for %kvos 165 £vv for avv, w. dat. 1224

short vowel 5, 6 ; name of in contraction 42 ; length. to co 31, 593, to ou 32; interchanged w. a and e 34 ; in 2 pf. 718 ; in nouns 197-211, 806, 811, 816 ; as thematic vowel 467, 500, 569 ; in Hom. subj. 655 ; as suffix 817, 841 ; at end of first part of compounds 871 6, t], to, article, decl. of 385 ; syntax of 933-983; in Hom. 933-936; in Hdt. 937 ; in lyr. and trag. poets 938 ; in Attic 939-983 ; ô ixkv ô ôé 157, 979-983; proclitic forms 155; when accented 157. O,

open

See Article

rel. (neut. of ôs), 399; for on (Hom.) 1493 b -o in 2d pers. sing. 582 g ô-ySoaTos 431 ô-yScoKovTa (Ion.) 431 o8e, tîSé, t686, demonstr. pronoun 408 (ouros) ; decl. 388 ; syntax 1004, 1005, 1008 ; w. article 943, 972 ; ôôl 392

éSôs declined 200 ; ôôov ikvaL 1055

ôSwv, oSovros, and

o€

contr. to

o€i

215, 289 ou 8, 43 45 e ; to oi (in vbs.

nom.

contracted to ou

-ou) 45 d -ôéis, adj. in, contracted 45 in

325,

847 w. two gen. 1108 contr. to a» 43 ; see 304, 188 ot| and oéi contr. to ot (in vbs. in -ôco) 45 d 6'0ev 423 ; by assimilation 1033

6£a> or]

GREEK INDEX 001 425

ôOovvcKa 1493

diphthong 7 ; pronunciation of interchanged w. ei and î 34 ; augmented to q> 539 ; rarely elided 58; short 133, 153; stems in 248 ; oî in voc. sing. 249 oï pron. 364 ; use in Attic 986, 987 oï adv. 412, 423 oîa w. part. 1577, 1573 ol8a in crasis 51 ; inflection of 529, 717, 728; dial. forms of 530; w. partie. 1590 ; w. infin. 1594 b ; oïad' ô ôpcLuov 1342 ; elôcos inflected 329, 728 oï8e, accent 163 OlStirovs, gen. and acc. of 286 a -otTiv etc. in opt. act. of contract vbs. 769; in 2 perf. opt. 767; <Txoirjv 574 c, 767 -ouv (ep.) for -oiv in dual 211, 285 oÏKaSe, oïko0év, oÎkôvSé 413 otKtîos, formation 814 b ; w. gen. oi,

29 ;

1144;

dat. 1176

otKia 185

oLkoSo|i€co, augment of 566 oÏkoi 133, 412, 413, cf. 1191 olKTÎpw 100, 630 oïjioi elided 58 ; accent of 163 -oiv, rare for -oijui in opt. act. 768 oîvos and vinum 102

-oto in gen. sing. of 2d decl. 199, 211 oïopai or oîpai, only o'tet in 2d pers. sing. 582 g ; parenthetieal 963, 1202 b ; w. infin. 1527 oïov or oîa w. part. 1577 oîos 408 ; oïœ croi etc. 1035 ; oîôs re

able in Att. 1024 b.

See oîa and

oîov

oîos 445

ol'xo(xai, fut. of 590 c ; pf. of 592 ; in près, as pf. 1256 ; w. partie. 1589

okov

oîs 102, 259, 291 -oicra for -ovaa in part. (Aeol.) 658 -oio-i in dat. pl. of 2d decl. 211 c

etc. 426

o\î-yos compared 357, 360; 6\Lyov (8eîv) 1116, 1538; oXiyoL 966 oXi-ywpe'to w. gen. 1103 oWvpi, form of près. 73, 640 ; fut. 678; pf. and plpf. 554, 558

oXos

article 977

'OXvp.iria (tù.) 289;

w. vlkcLp 1050; 'OXu/t7rtacrt 412 ôp.iXéa> w. dat. 1176 op.wp,i {du-, àfio-) 592 ; plpf. 554 ; ofivvdi 672, 784; w. acc. 1047; w. vh 1511 opoios and opoiow w. dat. 1176 ôp-oXo-y^w w. dat. 1188 ôpoî w. dat. 1190 épwwpos w. gen. 1144 ; w. dat. 1176 ovâ-, stems in 824 ovap 289 ôveiSiÇco w. dat. or acc. 1163 -ovrç, nouns in 824 ôvCvripi (ôva-) 612 ; accent of 2 aor. opt. 774; inflect. of ùvqp.i)v 707 ovopa by name 1056; bvopaTL 1182 ôvopdÇu w. two acc. 1075; in pass. w. pred. nom. 896, 1076 ôvopacrTi 420 ovt-, part, stems in 329, 800 ôwpa Aeol. 165 ôljvvtt, pf. and plpf. pass. 732 ôg-ûs comp. 346 oo contracted to ov 8, 42 -oos, nouns in 208; adj. in 303 ; compared 349; compounds in,

accent of 209 b

oov

421

for

401

diTT), oirrjvtKa, ôir60£v, oiroi 423 Ôttt]Xikos 408 diria-0€v w. gen. 1153, 1227 oirô0€v 423 ; rel. of purpose 1454

422 oiroi

GREEK GRAMMAR whither 412, 413;

where 1205

of place

oo-o-os

ôiroîos, 6ir<5<ros 408 ôtriTt, rel. 423, 1437 ; causal 1463 ; ôiroTav w. subj. 1440 b, 1299 b oiroTepos 363, 408, 410 c oiTov 412, 423 ôinrôTÉ etc. 426, 409 ôiruCw (Ô7ru-), àiriao: 636 dir«s, rel. adv. 412; as indir. interrog. w. subj. oropt. 1505;

particle 1371, 1374, sometimes w. av or ycè 1376; w. past t. of indic. 1381; rarely w. fut. ind. 1375; in obj. cl. w. fut. ind. 1382 ; sometimes w. &v 1387 ; in obj. cl. in Hom. 1388 ; o7rcos nv after vbs. of fearing, 1390 ; ôircvs and oiroos [xrj w. fut. in commands and prohib. 1351 ; Ô7rws for ùs in indir. quot. 1493. Mt) Ô7rcos and ovx ottcvs 1519 -op, verbs in 99 ôpda> 650; augm. and redupl. of 537; Hom. forms 659; w. ovcos 1382; w. au7 1389; w. suppl. part. 1584; w. part, in indir. dise. 1590, 1585 opc-yopai w. gen. 1099 opvis declined p. 51 ; acc. sing. of 218 c, 219. See 291 opwpii, fut. 682 ; aor. 689 b ôpôw etc. 659 b os, rel. pron. 399, 408; fem. dual rare 400; Hom. forms of 401; as

final

1377 ;

as os

demonstr. 1023

his, poss. 382, 1000

pron.

(poet.) 89, 380,

in 197, 817 ; adj. in 293, 841, 857 ; neuters in -os (stems in eo--) 232, cf. 243, 821

-os, -ov, nouns

oo-ov w.

oo-os,

do-rrep 402

absol. infin. 1538

oirôo-os 408, 1035, 1038

Hom. 409

ôo-t^ov,

oo-tovv,

declined

declined 208

Hom. indir. interrog. 407, 408, 1012, 1601 ; sing. w. pl. antec. 1021 ; oemerow 410 ôo-(f>pa(vop.ai., formation 643 ; w. gen. 1103 dr«, rel. 420, 423; causal 1463; elided 57 ; otgw w. subj. 1440 b oo-Tis

form

ot€v

406 ;

403-405 ;

ott€v, ott610, ot€«v, ot€outl

406 that 404; in indir. quot. 1491, 1502,1593 ; in direct quot. 1492 ; causal (because) 1463 ; not elided

57 o Tt o tl

(neut. of oo-rts) 403, 404 |ia0wv, o ti iraOwv 1569

otis, onva, otivos, ottéo, otti

406

diphthong 7 ; genuine and spurious ov 8, 32, 45 e, 75, 793 ; pronunc. of 28, 29 ; length. from o 32; for o in Ion. 165; not augmented 542 d ; stems in 265 ov, ovk, ov\ 25, 103, 115; proclitic 155; accented 115, 156; uses of 1439, 1457, 1461, 1468, 16091622 ; ovk ëad' Ô7rws etc. w. opt. (without âv) 1332 ; ovx oirœs and ovx otl 1519. See ov p/fj and pi] ov ov, name of omicron 4 ov, oî, e, etc. 159, 161, 364 ; syntax of 986, 987 ov, rel. adverb 412, 423 -ov in gen. sing. 191, 199 ; for -eoo in 2d pers. mid. 582 g, 702 ovSapov etc. 427 ov,

ovSas 234

ovô' eïs and ovôeLs 434 ; C ; ovôè ttoXKov ôeî 1116 ; w. concess. participle 1575 ovSeCs 396, 411, 434, 1609 ; ovôéves ovSé 1609 ;

ovô'

156

GREEK INDEX etc. 434 ; ovôels oarii

1034

adv. 1059; ovôèv fjTrov 1185

;

ovôév

ovSÉTepos 411

o-ùk

see ov

(Ô €«) 51

ovk

ovk^tl 115

(interrog.) 1605 OvXô|l£VOS 165/ ov |j.t] w. fut. ind. or subj. as strong fut. 1369; in prohib. 1370 ovkovv

added to indef. rel. 410, 428; position 963, 1202 -ovv in acc. sing. (Hdt.) 250 ovvEKa for 'èvena 1227; introducing ovv

obi. 1423

or.

OVTrC (Ô €7Tt) 51 ovpavo0€v, ovpavôGi 292, 413 ovs ear, accent of gen. dual and pl.

148

-ovs -ovs

pl. 198, 211 (for -eos, -oos), adj. in 303, 845; in

acc.

part, in for

-ovo-i

-ovs

-ovctl

329, 800 75, 582 e

o4>pa, as final particle 1371, 1374, 1375, 1377 ; sometimes w. /cè or av 1376, 1299 b ; until 1478 ô\|/€ W. écrrt Or rjv 886 C o«(/op.ai (ôpâaj ), oij/a 582 g -ou, denom. verbs in 634, 851 ; infl. of contr. forms 337, 482 etc., traditional Hom. form of vbs. in -âu 659, 661 ; Hom. fut. in -ôu (for -àau, -àu, -û) 659 b (3)

-ou

II, voiceless stop 23; labial 17; phon. changes, see Labials and 499 a; w.

irdXai 412 ; w. près.,

(poetic) 396, 411; accent 163 declined 388, 392 ; use of 408, 1004 ; disting. from è/ceîvos and oôe 1005 ; ravrâ and ravraiv (dual) rare 389 ; w. article 943, 972 ; in exclam. 1006 ; réf. to preceding rel. 1039 ; tovto yu.kv tovto Ôé 1010; ravra and tovto as adv.

<r in compos. 78; dropped 214, 323; irâvra 1059

irdvTO0€v 413

irdvTWS 419

ovx,

1060 ; ovroaL 392 and oï™ 116, 412, 423

ov\î

owe

(Ilôm.) for irapà 60 1200 ; w. gen., dat., and acc. 1207, 1208, 1220 ; as adv. 1203 ;

irap

irapa w.

irapa

dat. 1179

for

irapeari.

irapavop.€io,

135 b, 1203

augment of 565

OKevàôaTaL 654 C

631

wishes 1360, 1412 b

ô<J>€\\a> increase 631 ô({}4\X(o owe (Aeol.

Trapao-KEvd^û), impers. irapeantbaoTai, TcapetJKevacTTO 886 d, 1241 b ; irape-

: see ov

ô({>el\a> (60eX-)

incl. pf. 1258

iraXaios comp. 348 iraXiv, before a in compos. 78 iraXXa), iréiraXov 559

ovtis

acc.

forms 1/ 19, 69; ch.

•n-aîs, for 7ràis 137 ; voc. sing. 224 ; accent of gen. du. and pl. 148

ovros

ovtws

in 2 pf. 723 •ircUÇco, double stem 618 to 0

irâv, before

1609 ; accent 163

ovte

423

;

&4>e\ov in

= ô</>et\co) 631 impf. w0éXXov in wishes 1360 o<|>€Xos 289 oc{>0aXpi.da> 855 d<j)Xio~K(xvct) 645; w. gen. 1128

;

irapà-o-Tâ 787 C irapeipi W. dat. 1179 irapos w. infin. 1489 iras, irâa-a 75, 95; iralaa 165 g', de¬ clined 323; w. article 977; ac¬ cent of gen. and dat. pl. 148, 324 irdcrxto 69,105/, 648 ; tL irâdu; 1366 ; tL 7radûv; 1569

GREEK GRAMMAR

424

iraWjp declined 274 ; voc. 224 irdxpws declined 246, 247 iravw and ircuiop,cn w. gen. 1117 ; w. part. 1582 irelGopai w. dat. 1160 iT€t0o> 709, 715; pf. and plpf. mid. inflected 496, 497, 499 c, 599 ; TrkirLOov 559, 605; ireiroida. 34, 712, 718, 728

irfj 412, 423 irf|, indef. 412, 423 ; enclitic 159 ITr|X.eî8Tis (Hom. -étôris) 833 C ■7TT]\CKOS 408 1TT]v£Ka 423 ir'nx'us declined 253, 258 iriKpos comp. 346 ir£p.'irXr)pi (ttAc*-), redupl. 612 ; w. inserted p. 613 ; inflection of èir\Tjprjj>

■jreivdw, contraction of 486 Ileipaievs decl. 269 ir£ipdop.ai and impdw w. gen. 1099 ; w. Ô7rcos and obj. cl. (Hom.) 1388

ir£p.irpr|p.i (xpa-), redupl. 612 ; w. inserted p 613 irîva» 650 ; fut. 681 ; aor. 693, irWi 694 ; w. gen. 1097 •ïï-Ctttw 34, 547 ; fut. 679 ; w. cogn.

im0(o declined 248

pf. and plpf. mid. 499 d gen. 1153 IlïXoirovvTicros 86

ireipco,

TT€\as

ir£(J.Tr£ = irevre

431

1097 ; compar.

351

iré-n-avo-0, pf. imper. 782 iréimKa 68

•jréirTco 626

see ttêttw

irèp, enclit. 159; w. partie. 1575; w.

rel. 402

ire'pav w. gen. 1152 irépas 216; declined 228 irepC w. gen., dat., and acc. 1207, 1220 ; as adv. 1201 ; in compos. w. dat. 1179 ; w. numerals 946, as subject 895; not elided in Attic 57 ; ivepi 135, 1202 irïpi-ytyvop.ai w. gen. 1120 IlepiKXérjs, IIïpiKXfis, declined 241 irepiopaa) w. partie. 1587 "TrcpiirforTtt w. dat. 1179 iréropai, 2 aor. mid. 604, 692 ; 2 a. act. athem. 694

626; pf. pass. 499 7ré<j>a<rp.ai 74, 499 d, 603

irêTTO)

accus.

1049 ; w. h 1204 dative 1160

irio-n-vœ w.

mo-vpes

443 irspiroj, pf. pass. 81, 499 a, 725 ; irepireLV TvopTvr\v 1050 ; W. part. gen.

TTÉpirTOS

irévqs 339

707

437

(Hom.) for rkaaapes 165

irXaKÔÉis, irXaKovs,

contraction of

325 nXaTtuâcri 412 ttXélv

(for irXéov) 1150 or irXéwv, irXsîo-TOS 357 ; oi

wXe£wv

irXéoves 966

ttXék», pf. and plpf. mid. inflected 496, 497, 499, 587 irXéov without r) 1150 •n-Xéto

(xX«u-) 611, 738; contraction fut. 679 ; ir\eiv dâXaaaav

of 485 ; 1055

ttXé'ws, declension of 301, 302 TrXrjv w. gen. 1155, 1227 irX^o-idÇco w. dat. 1176 irXt]o-Cov w. gen. 1153, 1227 "irXrjTTco 624 ; 'eirXâyriv (in comp.) irXov<rios 91, 101 irXvvto 602

(xvev-) 485, 611 ; fut. 679 *7To8f|pT|S 308 ■7tv£m

7T06ÎV

7TO06V 423

iro0év 423 ;

enclitic 159

745

GREEK INDEX ird0i and iro0£

159, 425 412, 423 ■troC, indef. 412, 423 ; enclitic 159 iroiéw w. two accus. 1071, 1073; w. partie. 1566 h, 1584 ; eu and /ca/ccos 7roiû 1072 ; derivatives 808, 815; 7roto0/xat value 1133 •jroijATjv declined 229 woî

iroîos, iroiôs 408

iroXep.€<o, iroXep.££« W. dat. 1188; disting. from iroXepôœ 853 declined

irôXws

iroXecos

253 ;

131, 254;

voc.

224

;

irôXivôe 415;

Ion. forms 257

TroX£TT]s declined 189 iroXXés, Ion.

63, 343 Ion. forms 343 ; compared 357 ; oi ttoXXoL and to ttoXv 966, 1090 ; iroXv and 7roXXâ as adv. 412 ; as pred. 922 ; ttoXXQ W. comp. 1184; iroXXov ôeî and ovôè ttoXXov ôeî 1116; èirl iroXv

■jtoX-ûs

ttoXûs

declined

342 ;

1217

Tre'[i7reiv 1049 iroppw or irp6o-« 422 ; w. gen. 1153 IlocreiSdcov, Iloo-eiSwv, accus. 220 voc. 142 d, 223 b irôa-os, iroo-ôs 408, 1014 iroTapos after proper noun 969 irordopai 34 irop/irrjv

;

irÔTe 423

425

irpijos, declined 342 344 ; irpri'vs 344

two stems of

;

-irpd.TT« (irpày-), 2 perf. 97, 120, 499 b, 624, 724 ; w. ôirois and obj. cl. 1382

irpéirei, impers. 887 ir-p€cr|3a 318

irpecrPeuT^s, TrpecrPÛT-qs, irp&rPu$ 291 irpeo-pevw, denom. verb 851 ; irpeafieveiv eiprjvrjv 1053

(epic) 344 infin. and indic. 1484 ; w. infin. 1485, 1486 ; w. indic., subj., and opt. 1486 b; w. subj. without iiv 1488 ; irpïv rj 1489 irp£o)p.ai and irpia£p,r]v, accent of 761, •n-pi-ps

irp£v

774

irpô in crasis 49, 51 ; w. gen. 1207, 1222 ; not elided 57 ; compared 362 ; contracted w. augment 563, or w.

foll.

and 4>povp6s 105

860 b ; <t>povôos

irpoPe'PouXa Hom. 722 irpoîxa gratis, as adv. 1059 irpôKEi|i.ai w. gen. 1132 irpôoiro, etc. 514 c, 668, 773. See ÏT]|U irpôs w. gen. 1208, dat., and acc. 1207, 1223, 1179; as adv., besides 1201

; enclitic 159 interrog. 363,

Trpoo-8exop.éva> p.o£ ècrnv 1586 Trpoo-fjKei 887 ; w. gen. and dat. 1097 b, 1161 ; irpoarjKov, acc. abs.

irÔTepos, irÔTepos 408 irov 412, 423 ; w. part. gen. 1088,

irpôcrOev 113, 414 ; w. gen. 1152 irpotrco W. gen. 1153 ; levai, tov irpôcrù)

indef. 423, 427

•n-oTe,

iroTïpov

iroTepa,

1608

1571

1092

indef. 420

1138

enclitic 159 •7rovs, nom. sing. 215; compounds of 345 ; côs iroôœv elxov 1092 inr Aeol. 409, 426 wpd-ypaTa, omitted after article irov,

951

;

irpocrcûSCa 127 irpoT«pos 362 ; irpÔTepov 1489

(like irplv g)

983 and irpovxtt 51, 860 ITpWTlO-TOS 362

irpo tov or irporov

irpovp-yov

GREEK GRAMMAR

426 irpwTOS

362,

445

to Trpœrov

irpÛTov at first 412, 922, ira- written \p 19 ït,

1059

verbs in, 621 622

IIvOoî 412

irvvOdvopai w. acc. and gen. 1103 ; w. partie. 1590 ir®P> gen. 7rïip-ôs 216 ; plur. 291 ir<6, indef. 423 ; enclitic 159 Trois 423

irt&s, indef. 423 irajTd.op.ai 588

;

enclitic 159

P, liquid 20 ; sonant 27 ; p at beginning of word 15; can end a word 24 ; a after p 32 a, 185,187, 593 ; pp after syll. augm. and in comp. after vowel 64, 535; p/3p for pp 108 pà, enclitic 159 pçSios compared 357 paCvu 643 'Papvots 325 pqûov, pâo-Tos 357 péoi (pev-) 37, 485, 611 pfj-yvvpi 34, 745 ; 2 pf. eppœya 719 pijtSios, pt^lTcpos, etc. 357 pi-yôw, infin. and opt. of 488 pis nose, declined 229, 215 -poos, adj. in, decl. of 305 -pos, adj. in 844 PP, po- 71

S, two forms 2 ; spirant or sibilant 22, 537 ; voiceless 23 ; can end a word 24 ; after labials and palatals in £ and / 69 ; after dentals (o-cr > a) 69 ; <xar retained 86, 509 b ; consonants before a 6971 ; v before a 75, 77 ; <t < dental before dental 66 ; initial a = h 82, 87-89, 537, 549 ; intervocalic lost 90, 230, 231 ; in -ocu, -<ro 91,

-s

582 g, 654 6, 660 6, 669 c, 702; dropped before nasals 86, bet. conson. or liquid and conson. 83, in liq. and nas. aor. 92, 687 ; re¬ tained 84, 91, 654 g-, a for v 74, 499 d, 732 ; in some tenses 598 ; stems in, 499 6, e, 596-600, 634 ; after syll. augment 535 ; in mixed aor. 654 h ; in fut. and aor. of liq. vbs. (poetic) 682 ; in deriv. 815 6; movable 116 as ending of nom. sing. 189, 214, 331 ; not used 227, 330

<ra. = tlvcl

-<ra, -aa

395

tense suffix of 1 in fem. of

aor.

572

adj. and partie. 75,

95 6 ; -ccra 827 and -o-o in 2d pers.

sing. 578; in vbs. in w 90, 582 g, 654 6 ; -o-cil elided 58 o-àX/nvyÉj declined 227 ; aaXirL^o: 617,

-crai

drop

886 d -o-av,

plur. 578, 582/, 663 declined 248

pers.

2air<j>w 63

;

377, 993 o-(3€vw|u 640; 2 aor. 'éa-^rjv 706 o-S became f 19 o-é 364, 369 -o-é, local ending 413 o-«avTov 377, 993 O-^év 292 6, 369 o-é£«i without subject 886 e o-awToî)

CT€ÎO, CT€06V 369

-o-€£oj, desideratives in 855 0-tp.vôs compared 346 O"€0, 0"€V 369 crevco, 2 aor. mid. 696 -o-ï'oj, -crû, Doric future in 654/, 679

(Hdt.) 379 o"r]pa(va> 499 d -o-0a, chiefly Hom. ending 578, 582 ^ ; in 2d pers. sing. subj. and

<rea>vTov

GREEK INDEX

opt. act. 655 d, 656 ; in indic. of pu 669 d -<r0ai (-dat) 579 ; elided 58 -<r0âv, Dor. ending for -ad-qv 654 -o-0€ (-de) 83, 499 b -o-0ov and -O-0T1V in 2d and 3d pers. dual 578; -adov for -crdqv in 3d pers. 582 c -cri in 2d pers. sing. (in èaaL) 582 ; in 3d pers. 578 -cri (for -vtl, -vai) 91, 101 ; in 3d pers. pl. 582 e -o-i in dat. pl. 180, 225, 285 b ; -iai 180, 196 -o-i as locative ending 412, 413 -o-iâ, fem. nouns in 819 -cris, fem. nouns in 819 vbs. in

o-îTos and o-îTa 288

a-KàÇov verse 1654, 1665 o-KeSavwni, fut. of (-àcrcj, -œ) 678 b o-kéXXco, âiro-o-k\fivai 694, 706 -ctkov, -a-KO|iriv, Ion. itérative endings 606 ; w. âv 1298 o-Koiréw w. oitcûs and fut. ind. 1371, 1382

o-kôtos, declension of 286 2kv0t]s, 2kû0is 326 -o-Kw, verbs in 644 <r|id», contraction of 486 in 2d pers. sing. 578, 582 g,

788 -<r

786,

see -o-tu

%-, tense suffix in future and fut. pf. 572, 675, 734

crôos

see

crûs

«ropôs, fem. 201 c «rés, poss. pron. 380, 998

<rocj)6s declined 294 ; comp. 346 o-itévSw, fut. cnreLaoû 70 ; pf. and plpf. mid. 499

o-t

69, 85, 235; retained 86,

abbreviated 3

-o-Tâ

for arrjdi 787 C

o-Ta0pos 82, 815 d crTas

<tt£\X«

34, 587, 628; pf. and plpf.

mid. inflected 497, 499 d, 545

o-Ttcns 670 b (TTL^os: K&TOL CTTCxov 1651 o-Toxa^opai w. gen. 1099 o-TpaTi]-y£w w. gen. 1109 o-Tpé<j)w 587, 739 crû 101 ; declined 364 ; Hom. and Hdt. 369 ; omitted 885 <ruyyevT|s w. gen. 1144 ; w. dat. 1176 CTvyYcyvwo-Kû) w. partie, (nom. or dat.) 1592 ; w. gen. 1121 cru|i(3aCvei, impers. 887 crûv or £ûv, w. dat. 1207, 1224 ; in compos. 1179; becomes ow- or ctv- in compos. 77 cruvcXôvTi (or cbs crvveXôvTi) etirÉÎv

1172 b

-o-ûvTj, nouns in 826 ctvv£t||xi w. acc. 1105; w. gen. 1103 «rûvoiSa w. partie, (nom. or dat.) 1592

ct|XlKp6s 88 -oro

aa>

427

159

cr^Tepos 380, 1000, 1003 <r4>C or cr<|>£v 367 °"4> 21 <rcj)£ori 364 ; not enclitic 161 e crevés for aefrérepos 381 cr<|><o, etc., crcjjw^, crcjxoLv 364, 369

o-tkûSco and

crirovS'/j 34 o-n-oSôs, fem. 201 c «ro- = rr 63, 85, 94, 623-626, 827

<rvvTp£(3ca w. gen. 1098 <rc})d£«, cr<j>aTT« 97, 617, 624 o-cf>£ 367, 370 ; enclit. 159 crcjjea 369 ; a<t>éas, 369 ; enclit.

;

crc{>ci)'(:T£pos 381 <r<j>wv aÛTwv etc. 377 crxïSôv 420

GREEK GRAMMAR

428

and o-xo£t]v (of ëxw) 574 c, 694, 705, 787 ; aXw« 1250 f o-wÇw 620 2(0Kpd.TT]s, decl. of 232 ; acc. 237, 286 ; voc. 142, 224 <rûp.a 24 ; declined 223 ; nom. o"x«s

pl. 226 (Hom. aôos) 302 o-wTcipa 100 o-wHjp, voc. crtôTtp 142 d, 223 b ; formed 214 ; dat.

<rws

decl. 229

tékwv as

T, voiceless stop 18, 23 ; dental 17 :

Dentals; dropped 24, 214 c;

assimilated 63, 69 ; before a 70

(Hom.) for

-Ta

decl. 196 b

-rys

dropped

nom.

of first

(dual of ô), rare 386 -Tai in 3d pers. sing. 578 ; elided 58 tà\as, adj., decl. of 319; nom. of Ta

and Taîv

215 6

(rà aXXa) 50 6, 1059 (rot av) 51 -Tâv, Doric ending for -ryv 654 TâvSpC 51 Tâpa 51 TapaTTO) 94, 623 ; pf. mid. 499 6 -TaTos, superl. in 346 toLttû) 498, 624 ; w. part. gen. 1096 TaiTa, TavTÔ, TavTÔv, TavTov 51,114, r'âWa Tâv

376 toutcLv 391

adv. 423 ra<|>- for 6a<t>- (Oâirrœ) 105 B Tdxa 420 ; w. av (rax àv ) 1315 Taxws compared 94, 105 e, 354 ; r-qv Taxî-CTrjv 1059 tduv (= tôjv) 386 tï (enclitic), Doric for <ré 374 tc and, enclitic 159 ; elided 57 ; w. TavTfi,

subst. 1564

finally 1567 TeX«a>, stem in a 85, 91, 596 ; fut. in -û, -ovuai 678; pf. and plpf. mid. inflected 497, 499 e ; cf. 598, 599, 634, 660 c té'Xos finally, adv. acc. 1059 t€pvco 637, 714 c; 2 aor. 107, 169, téXïvtwv

<T<0(j)pOO"UVT| 815 o-u(j>pv compared 349

see

1024; position 963, 1202 t€0â<j>0ai 105 e TeOvecos 338, 802 T€0vt]£w, fut. pf. act. of OvfjaKto 736 t€0pa<j)0ai 105 e Tttv (Ion. = crot) 369 t€£v« 100, 587, 602, 630, 731, 738 -Tïipa, fem. nouns in 818 Teixopaxîa 858 relatives 402,1024 ; w. olos

691

Tïîs, t€ov (== <700) 374 (= roD for TLVOS or TLVÔs), t€0), t€wv, téolo-l 394 6 -t^ov, verbal adj. in 581, 804; im¬ pers., w. subj. in dat. or acc.

t€0, T€v, t€os, t€0,

t€v

1599

-Téos, verbal adj. in 581, 804; pas¬ sive 1174 6, 1597 t€6s, Doric and Aeolic (= a os) 381 Tëpas 216 ; declined 234 Tëptjv, decl. of 319; fem. of 320 -Tepos, comparative in 346 Tëpirw, 2 aor. redupl. 559; 2 aor. pass. 655 c T&r<rap€S, T€TTttpeç, Ion. réa-aepes 165 e, 437, etc. ; declined 432 T€Tax0€ 83, cf. 499 b T£Top«s (Dor.) 437 T£Tpatvw 643 ; aor. 688 T€Tpao-i (dat.) 437 Tëws, accus, of 206 Tfi, TjjSe 423, 1191 34, 720, 745 ttjXCkos, ttjXikovtos 393, 408, 945

GREEK INDEX

•nrj|i£pov 412 Tfjpos 425 -tt|v in 3d pers. dual 578; for -top in 2d pers. 582 c. See -o-0ov and -ct0t]v Tî^vtKa, TTjviKaSe, TT]viKavTa 423 -Tfjp, masc. nouns in 273, 818 -•nrjpiov, nouns of place in 829 ; adj. in 844

nouns in 189, 196 b, 818, 825, 840; fem. (denom.) in

-ttis, masc.

826

Tfjo-i and Tfjs (= raîs) 386 t{| va-TepaCa 929 6 t0 for 69 63

tt becomes oo (tt) or a 95, 827 tC, adv. acc. 1059 -n, adverbs in 420 -ti 101 ; ending of 3d pers. sing. 106, 578, 582, 654, 669 d t£0t]|ii 101, 105, 466 ; synopsis 503, 507; inflection 504, 665, 785; redupl. in près. 561, 614; imperf. 665 ; aor. in -ko. and -kcl^p 685, 701 ; opt. mid. in -oL^p and accent 668, 773 ; deîpai 579 ; partic. TLÛels declined 329 ; w. 2 acc.

1073

adj. in 843 b T£ktû) 106, 604 Tipaco, denom. verb 634, 851 ; stem of 593 ; inflect. of contr. forms 39, 43-45, 482 ; synopsis of 484 ; infin. 45 e, 793 ; partie. tl^lw, tl/jlcop declined 336; w. gen. of value 1133 ; tl/iclp tlpl tlpos and tl/ulaudcll tlpos 1133 Tip,rj declined 183 Tip.T]€is, Ti|ifjs, contraction of 325 Ti|j.cop&0 and Tip,wpéop,ai 1245 ; w. acc. and dat. 1163 ; w. gen. 1121 ; w. 2 acc. (poetic) 1069 t£v, Doric (= aoL) 374 -tikos,

429

t£ iraOtov 1569

t£s, interrog. 408; declined 394; accent 134, 149, 398 ; Ion. forms 395; subst. or adj. 1011; in di¬

and ind. questions 1012, 1078, 1601 tIs, indef. 408; declined 394; indef. article 387, 1015; accent 159, 394 b ; Ion. forms 395 ; po¬ sition 963; subst. or adj. 1015; like iras tls 1017 ; sort of 1016 -Tis, fem. nouns in 818, 819, 825, rect

840 b

(tov, tû) and infin. 1545, 1549 t60év, t60i 425 rot, enclitic 50, 51, 159, 963 toi, rai 386, 401, 938 toi, Ion. and Dor. (= ooi) 369, 374 toîos, toiôo-Sé, toiovtos 393, 408,945, tô

974

toioîtos,

totrovtos 393 ; w. article 945; position 974, 975; toloûtop 114, 393 b ToîcrSecro-L or TourSeo-i (= toîoôé) 390 TÔ\jJLa 186 -tov, in 2d and 3d pers. dual 578; for -tt}p in 3d pers. (Hom.) 582 c.

See -tt]v

tov

kal

tov

983

verb. adj. in 581, 804 tôo-os, too-ôo-Sé, too-oîtos 393, 408 ; tooovtcù w. compar. 1184 ; tooovtop 114, 393 b totê 423 ; w. art. 950 toô for tlpos, tov for tlvos 394, 395 b -tos,

TovvavTtov Tovvopa tov

(by crasis) 51

irpdo-ci) 1138

(Hdt.), fem. 391 tovto'yf, tovtoSC 392 tovto p.^v • • « tovto 8« 1010, 1059 -Tpâ, fem. nouns in 822, 829 Tpeîs, TpCa, declined 432 tovté'cov

GREEK GRAMMAR

430

34, 165 e, 588, 604, 725 ; aor. 739 ; six aorists of 746 Tp€<j>oiv, opt. 768 Tpé4>a>, rp€x«, aspirâtes in 105 e, Tptirw

pass.

587, 739 fem. nouns in 187 c, 818 rptpw, perf. and plpf. mid. inflected -rpia,

496-499

Tpi^KovTa (Ion.) 431 Tpi/rjpîjs, declined 238 ; accent 142 c, 239, 308 TpiirXd<riov w. gen. 1148 -rpts, fem. nouns in 818 TpCTaTos 431 TpÛTOV ïtos tovt£, etc. 1063

of Op'd105 e, 227 in 818, 822 Tpôirov, adv. accus. 1059 Tpwn-do) 588 Tpcis, accent 148 ; declined 246 tt, Attic for acr 63, 85, 94, 623—626 tv, Dor. 101, 365 nryx,*vw (rvX~) 638 ; w. gen. 1099 ; w. partie. 1588 ; tvxôv (acc. abs.) Tptx-os, gen. -Tpo, nouns

1571

tvvtj,

Ion. (== crû) 374

1049 1109 tû for tIvi, and t« for tlvL 394 tS therefore (Hom.) 983 -Twp, masc. nouns in 818

tvtttw w.

Tvpavvéw

rcas

for

TcovT<S

cogn. accus.

w. gen.

ovrœs

423

(Hdt.) 373

Y, close vowel 5, 6; name of 4; initial u always ù in Att. 14; rarely contr. w. foll. vowel 46; length. to û 31, 32 ; interch. w.

(sometimes ou) 34 ; not contr. preced. vowel 41 ; not elided 57 ; semivowel y 36, 37, 89, 814 c ; stems in u 252, 260, 313 ; u before f 125 d eu

v(3(3d\X.civ 60 v-yiîjs, contraction of 309 -vSpiov, diminutives in 830 v8«p, declension of 291 vei, impers. 886 d ; vovtos (gen. abs.) 1570 (end) vi diphthong 7 -vîa in pf. part. fem. 332 b vlôs, decl. 291 ; om. after art. 951, 1087

vpàs, vp,£v 372 374 vp.|xes, iippi, vppe, etc. (Aeol.) 369 vpos for vpérepos 381 -vvû), denom. verbs in 100,499 d, 851 virép w. numerals 946 ; w. gen. and acc. 1207, 1225 ; in compos. w. gen. 1132 virepe'xco w. gen. 1120 v-n^pTaTOs, vire'pTepos 362 vpas, vp.Lv,

vpe, vp.es

VTT€V0VVOS 1145

w. gen. 1140 vTri<rxvëop,ai 639 viré w. gen., dat., and acc. 1207, 1226; w. pass. vb. 1208, 1236; in comp. w. dat. 1179 virôK€ip,ai w. dative 1179 viroirrevft), augment of 565 viroxos w. dative 1175 -vp, verbs in 100, 630 -vs adjectives in 841 ; -ùs partie. ending 125 b, 329 vo-TepaCa (se. vpepq.) 929 b, 1194 vcrrep£î> w. gen. 1120 vcrTepov rj w. infin. 1489 vo-Tepos 362; w. gen. 1154; ùo-répep xpovtp 1196

virfjKoos

4», rough stop 18, labial 17, surd 23; not doubled 63; phonetic changes : see Labials 4>a£va> 32, 92, 99, 105; synopsis of 478; meaning of certain tenses

GREEK INDEX 479 ;

fut. and 1

mid. and 2

aor.

act.

and

and 2 fut. pass.

inflected 492 ; perf. mid. infl. 497, 499 d ; formation of près. 629 ; of fut. act. 677 ; of aor. act. 687 ; of pf. act. and mid. 75, 603, 732 ; of 2 perf. 589 ; copul. vb. 896, 897 ; w. partie. 1590, 1594; w. infin. 1594 4>av«p6s €l|w w. partie. 1591 <j>dos (<pœs) 216 <j>€CSop.ai, irccfaSco-Ocu 559 ; w. gen. 1103

4>€pe

come,

imper,

1344 ; 4>kpre 652

and subj.

cjupTepos, <j»epraTOS, cj>épitrTOS 357 <J>«pw 34, 169, 650 ; aor. in -a 686 ; 4>épcov, cftepopevos 1567, 1568. See

fcvvw 34, 610, 718, 723

; fut. 679 ; perf. 34, 716; w. gen. 1127 4>r]p,£, accent 151 b ; inflected 517 ; dial. forms 520; près. 501, 612 ; w. infin. of indir. dise. 1527; ov (f>TjpL 1394 b cj>0dvco 637 ; e4>dr)v 699 ; w. partie. 1588; 4>dâaas as adv. 1567 <t>06CPo) 587; fut. 677, 682, 731; aor. 687, 689 b <|>0ivu0« 105 e, cf. 601, 637 4>0£vw 637 ; 2 aor. kcj^dLprju 696 ; 4>dïprfv (opt.) 671, 766 <j>0ové w. gen. and dat. 1121,1159 -<jn or -<|>iv, epic ending 292 «{uXaCTEpos, «juXalTciTos 348, 357 4>iXéw, contraction of 39, 4244 ; inflect. of contr. partie. 336,

and of other forms 482 ;

593, 634 669 b

;

synopsis of 484 ;

<j>iXop.|i.E(8T|s 86

«j>CXos compared 348, 357 «j>iTvw 636

stem

431

<j>Xcyé0<o 601 <t>XÉ\Jf declined 227 4>o(Î€« and «}>6Pos (êo-rO 1391

pi] 1389-

<}>ovdw, desiderative verb 855 <j>ope'(0, athematic ^opppevai 660 d, 669 b

<}>pd£<o 616

;

pf. and plpf. mid. 499

7rkippaôov 559

c ;

<}>pao-( 76; 4>peaL 225 4>p^v, accent of compounds of (in

~4>pœv) 142 b ; decl. 229 <j)povTCt« w. ottùjs and obj. cl. 1382 ; w. pi] and subj. or opt. 1389 <J>povTurTTjs w. obj. accus. 1048 <|>povSos and «j>povp6s 51, 105/, 860 b 4><r written ^ 19 ; in Old Attic 28 <j>vyds, adj. of one ending 339 <|>vXa£ declined 227, 812 <j>vXdtr<r«, jj>vXdTT« 63, 85, 94, 499 b, 623, 723 ; act. and mid. 1245 4>v<o 105 ; 2 aor. 'écfrvv 694 ; perf. 713 ; cf. eôîiv 503

«|>ws (</>ôws), nom. of 216; accent of gen. du. and pl. 148 X, rough stop 18, palatal 17, surd 23; not doubled 63; phonetic changes : see Palatals \al (Kai ai) and x°£ (fiai oi) 51 xa£pw 99, 629 ; fut. perf. (Hom.) 736 ; w. partie. 1582 ; xalpw 1567 XaXeircdvw w. dative 1159, 1160 xaptcis declined 323, 324 ; com¬ pared 351 ; xapteccra 95 XapCÇopai w. dative 1160 Xapis, nom. sing. 214; acc. sing. 218 c ; xdpw (adv.) 1059 XavTTj by crasis 51 Xeihwvos, gen. of time 1136 X«£p 71 ; declined 291 xctpcov (xepeiuiv) 100 ; x£'P«rT°S 357-359

GREEK GRAMMAR

432

XeXiSwv, declension of 251 X&», près. 485, 611; fut. 680; aor. 686 ; 2 aor. mid. 696 X0' (Kal ot ) 51 X°vs, declension of 272 Xpdo|iai contr. 486, 487, 653 ; w. dat. 1183 ; w. dat. and cogn. acc. 1183 ; xpwpevos with 1568 Xpdw, contraction of 486 ; fut. 595 ; a in perf. and aor. pass. 598 Xpf) 528; w. infin. as subject 887 Xpfiv or «xP'nv 528 ; out

1410

potential with-

XpVip.°s w- dative 1175 Xpf)o-TTis, accent of gen. pl. 146 Xpva-Éos, xPW0"°^s 28 ; in synizesis 54 ; declined 303 ; irreg. contr. 45 ; accent 304 X<r, written £ 19 ; in Old Attic 28

declined 183 ; gen. sing. 180 X«pts w. gen. 1152, cf. 1117, 1227 X»pa

dépend, 763-769 », improper diphthong 7, 10; by augm. for ot 540; in dat. sing. 198 ; in nom. sing. 249 »8« 412, 423, 1005 œ/v-i thematic vowel of subj. 467, 500, 571 6, 751 «0£» 537, 590 -»p.t, verbs in 501 ; -wpt in subj. (Hom.) 655 d »v, partie, of «t/xt 509; nom. 214 c; accent of 149, 509 d; declens. 329 ; omitted 1566 /, 1573,1588 ; pred. with 926 verbs

wv = OVV

before 545

\|/ap.p.os, fem. 201 c \}rdb>, contraction of 486 *J/€ for crcfrè 374 t|/evSo|iai w. gen. 1117 \|rfj4>ur|j.a vikcLv 1050 i|/îjos, fem. 201 c fî,

open long vowel 5, 6 ; name of 4 ; length. from o 31 ; in contr. 42 ; lengthened grade 588 ; for o in stem of Att. 2d decl. 203 ; in

of o decl. 211 ; nouns in -w (stem —ot) of 3d decl. 248, voc. sing. in -ot 249 w, interjection w. voc. 1042; in crasis 49, 51 », subj. of etyttt 509 -» or -wv in acc. sing. 251 gen.

469-499 ;

165

-wv,

masc.

-wv

in gen.

denom. in 829

;

primi-

tivesin824; adj.in,compared354

-wv for -éwv 145, 165 h, 180, 184 b fem. subst. in, 251

plur. 167 ;

in lst decl. -wv,

wv€0|ach,

M*, double consonant 19, surd 23; can end word 24, 25; redupl.

moods 751-754,

augment 537 ;

aor., see

€7T piCLfJLTJV

wvt|t6$ w. gen. of price wv0pw7r€ in crasis 51 wvTivwv,

»pa

accent 163

(éoTt) 879

; w.

1133

infin. 1525 ;

wpçt

dat. of time 1196 wpp,T]0ev (Hom.) 654 i ws, proclitic 155; accented (ws) 156; rel. adv. 412; w. partie. 1576, 1595; in wishes w. opt. 1357 ; in indir. quot. 1491, 1593 ; causal 1463 ; as final particle 1371, 1374, 1377, sometimes w. av or /cè 1376; in obj. clauses 1385 6; rarely w. fut. indic. 1375; w. past tenses of indic. 1381 ; like wo-re w. infin. 1472 ; w. absol. infin. 1538 ws, as prepos. (to) w. accus. 1227 ws thus 412, 423, 424 ; accent 156 c, w.

gen., as

424

GREEK INDEX -»s, nouns

in (Att. 2d decl.) 131,

203 ; nom. of 3d decl. in 243,245 ; in gen. sing. 252 ; in acc. pl.

(Dor.) 211 d; adj. in 299; pf. part, in, p. 73 ; adverbs iri 417 «s «t, «s ot€ in similes 1424 b, 1450 -<û<rt for -œvcri 75, 751 wa"jr«p w. partie, in comparions 1578; w. acc. absol. of personal vbs. 1572 ; &airep àv ei 1313 ; ac¬ cent 131, 163

433

infin. and indic.

1466,1467 ; disting. 1467, 1468; négative 1468; w. other con¬ structions 1470; for obj. infin. 1473; after y 1474; stipulative 1476; accent 163 (ov, stems in 245 uvtôs, «{itôs, twuto Ionic 373 coo-té w.

two constr.

w. acc.

1163

w<j>e\ov in wishes 1360, 1361 ùxpi'aM 855 b

ENGLISH INDEX See note

Ability or fitness, verbal adj. denoting 843, 1530 ; infin. w. verbs of 1523

Ablaut 30 ; see Vowels Absolute case: gen. 1156, 1570; 1571 ;

infin. 1538

Absorption of vowels 44, 45, 195 Abstract

402

Accompaniment, dat. of 1186; dat. of clvtôs 1187

Accusative

Ablative, functions of, in Greek 176, 1040, 1100, 1117, 1121

acc.

page

substantives

174,

187,

196 ; in compos. 864, 865 ; w. art. 942 ; neut. adj. or part. w. art. for 931, 932

Abuse, vbs.

dat. 1160 1640, 1656 Accent 29 ; général principles of 126-163 ; of diphthongs 12 ; na¬ ture of 127 ; kinds of 126 ; réces¬ sive 129 ; of nouns and adj. 141149; indicating quantity 125 c; of gen. and dat. sing. of oxytones 143 ; of Att. 2d decl. 131, 144, 205 ; of contracts of o decl. 209 ; of gen. and dat. of monosyll. of 3d decl. 147 ; of gen. pl. (in 0>v ) of lst decl. 145 ; in adj. 296 ; of verbs 150-161, 475; of part. 149, 151, 334, 335 ; of opt. in «t and oi 133 ; of contracted syll. (incl. crasis and elision) 137-139 ; enclitics 158; proclitics 154, 156; of art. 980 ; anomalies 160 c ; accent and ictus in verse 1623, 1626 Acatalectic

expr., w.

verses

case

175-180; sing. of

3d decl. 218-220; pl. 226; acc. and nom. pl. alike in 3d decl.

240, 252, 310; subj. of infin. 883 ; pred. with 899 ; after prep. 1200 fif. ; in compos. 1206 ; acc. absol. 1571 ; rarely w. part, of Personal verbs 1572 ; in appos. w. sentence 904 ; infin. as acc. 1522 ; acc. of object retained w. passive 1240 ; two acc. w. one verb 1068-1079; acc. and gen. w. ô<p\i<rKâvœ 1128. Other syntax of

acc.

1044-1079

Accusing, vbs. of, w. gen. 1127; compounds of Karà w. acc. and gen.1129 Acephalous verses 1634 Achaeans, p. 1 Acknowledge, vbs. signif. to, w. partie. 1590 Acquitting, verbs of 1127 Action, suffixes denoting 818 Active voice 447, 1230; Personal endings of 577-579 ; form of, incl. most intrans. vbs.

object of, Acute

accent

subj. of 127 ;

changed to grave 134 Addressing, voc. in 1042 in 1043

1231 ;

1236 oxytone

pass.

;

nom.

GREEK GRAMMAR

436

ov 1394 b, 1612 Adjectives, formation of 841-849; inflection 179, 293-363 ; of two endings 299, 300 ; contr. 303 ; of one ending 339; irregular 342-345; comparison of 346363 ; agreement w. nouns 915, 918; attributive and pred. 916 ; pred. adj. w. copulative verb 893 ; in adv. relation 922 ; referring to omitted subject of infin. 923, 924 ; used as subst. 927, 929; verbal, w. gen. 1139-1146; w. acc. 1052 ; inner object 1052 ; position 1202 c ; verbal, in -ros 800 ; in -réos and -r'eov 800,1596— 1600 ; see Attributive and Predi-

Adherescent

cate

Admire, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1102 ; w. causal gen. 1126 Adnominal genitive 964,1081-1087 Adonic

verse

1688

Adscript iota 10 Advantage or disadv., dat. of 1165 Adverbial

acc.

1059

Adverbs, elided 56; how formed from adj. 412-420, 850; from part. 417, 1567 ; comparison of 421 ; numéral 429, 444 ; relative 412 ; local 86 d, 412-416, 1205 ; meaning 419 ; phrases 930 ; qualify verbs etc. 1228 ; w. gen. 1151, 1155; w. dat. 1175, 1190; assim. of rel. adv. to antec. 1033; w. article for adj. 950

Advising, vbs. of, infin. 1523

dat. 1160 ;

Aeolian Greeks, p. 1 Aeolic race, p. 1 ; dialect, p. 1 ; â for Attic V 165; barytonesis 166

aor.

101 ; Aeolic forms of opt. in Attic 656, 764 ;

; -<ri

forms of infin. and

partie. 657, forms in hl 669 b JCschylus, language of, p. 2 Age, pronom, adj. denoting 408 Agent, nouns denoting 818 ; expr. by gen. w. prep. 1208, 1236 ; in poetry without prep. 1126; by dat. (esp. after pf. pass.) 1174; w. verbal in -réos by dat. 1174 b, 1598 ; w. verbal in -réou by dat. or acc. 1174 b, 1599 Agreement, of verb w. subject nom. 888 ; of pred. w. subject 896 ; of adj. etc. w. subst. 915; of adj. w. subst. of diff. gender or number 918, 919 Agreement, words implying 1188 Aim at, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1099 Alcaeus, language of, p. 1 Alcaics and Alcaic strophe 1688 h Alexandrian period, p. 2 Alexandrine verse (Engl.) 1664 Alpha copulative 861 e : see à and à Alpha privative 861 a, 1141 Alphabet 1 ; obsolète letters of 3, 446; used as numerals 3, 429; 658 ;

Ionic 28

Alternative questions 1608 Anaclasis in Ionic verse 1684 b

Anacreontics 1685

Anapaest 1629 b ; cyclic 1636 ; in trochaic verse (apparent) 1652 ; in iambic

verse

1659

Anapaestic rhythms 1624, 1677, 1680 ; Systems 1679 Anastrophe 135, 1202 Anceps, syllaba 1637, 1638 b Anger, vbs. expressing, w. causal gen. 1121 ; w. dat. 1160 Antécédent, agreement of rel. w. 1019; omitted 1026; assim. of rel. to 1030; of antec. to rel. 1034; attraction 1036; attrac-

ENGLISH INDEX tion w. assim. 1037 ; indef. antec. 1428

def. and

Antepenult 117, 126 6

Antibacchius 1629

Antispast 1629 d Antistrophe 1651 Aorist 450, 452;

secondary tense 433; pers. endings 577-580; augment of 533; iter. endings -ctkov and -akô/irjv (Ion.) 606. First aor. act. and mid., tense System of 461 ; formation of tense stem 683-689 ; of liquid and nasal

vbs. 32, 687 ; in -ko. (or -nâwv) in three vbs. 685 ; Hom. short them. vowel in subj. 665 ; accent of infin. 151 d.

Second

aor.

act.

mid., tense system of 461 ; conjug. 481 ; formation of tense system 690-708 ; redupl. (Hom.) 559 ; Att. redupl. 560 ; Homeric mixed aor. w. a 654 h, 686 ; athem. forms 694-708; Ion. subj. of 670 ; accent of imperat., infin., and part. 151. Aor. pass. (first and second) w. active end¬ ings 480, 757 ; tense Systems of 572; formation of tense stems 738, 744 ; accent of infin. and part. 151 Aorist, syntax of. Ind. 1250 e ; disting. from impf. 455, 1261 ; of vbs. denoting a state 1262 ; gnomic 1293 ; itérative 1297. In dépendent moods 1273 ; how disting. from près, (not in indir. dise.) 1274; opt. and infin. in indir. dise. 1282 ; infin. w. vbs. of hoping etc. 1287; in part. 1289 ; not past in some constr. 1291, 1524, 1589 ; not changed in dépendent clauses of or. obi. 1514; in similes 1295. See In¬ and

437

dicative, Subjunctive, etc., for spécial constructions Aphaeresis 38, 62 Apocope 60 Apodosis 1392; négative of (où) 1403 ; w. past tenses of indic. w. 1407 ; various forms in cond.

1397; w. protasis omitted 1424,1426 ; represented by infin. or part. 1428, 1429 ; implied in sent.

context 1430 ; suppressed for effect 1426 ; introd. by ôk 1432

Aposiopesis 1426 Apostrophe (in elision) 55 Appear, vbs. signif. to, 896; part. 1590

Appoint, vbs. signif. to, w. two acc. 1075; w. acc. and partitive

1094 g, 1095 ; w. infin. of 1536 Apposition 900-907, 935; gen. in app. w. possessive 902, 1001 ; gen.

purpose

nom. or acc.

in app. w. sentence

904 ; other cases 1083 ; infin. in

app. 1521 ; partitive app. 905 Approach, vbs. implying, w. dat.

1188

Arcadia, dialect of, p. 1 Argives, p. 1 Aristophanes, language of, p. 2 Aristotle, language of, p. 2 Arsis 1626, 1649 ; omitted 1634 Article, in crasis 49-53 ; definite, declined 385 ; râ> and toïv as fem. 386 ; rot and rai (epic and Doric) 386; proclitic in some forms 155 ; ô clvtôs 375, 376, 988 6. Use of article 933-983 ; r forms as rel. 937, 938 ; as pronoun in Hom. 933 ; w. adj. or part. 929 ; in Hdt. 937 ; in lyric and tragic poets 938 ; Attic prose use 939 ; position w. attrib. adj. 959; w.

GREEK GRAMMAR

438

pred. adj. 970; w. demonstr. 943, 972; as pronoun in Attic 979-983; distributive 949; ge948.

neric names

941,

prop. names

used w.

Article

proper

957; omitted w. 943 b, 955, 956, 969 ;

w. names

of countries 958 ;

abstract subst. 942 ;

omitted

in trag. 938, 943; w. possess. 944 ; w. numerals 946 ; in périph¬

Attain, vbs. 1099

signif. to,

94, 623

;

Attic

reduplication 554, 646

Attic second declension 131, 203-

207, 247, 298, 299, 301, 302

951 ;

joined

article

Articular infinitive 953, 1544

Ascending rhythms 1649 Asclepiadean verse 1688 i, j Ashamed, vbs. signif. to be, w. part. 1582 Asia Minor, pp. 1,2; 28 Asking, vbs. of, w. two acc. 1068 Aspirate, w. vowels 11 ; w. stops 18, 103-105 ; avoided in succes¬ sive syll. 105, 544 ; transfer of 69, 90, 105, 740 ; avoided in Aeol. and Ion. 104, 165 Aspirated perfects 723 Assimilation of vowels 43, 659 b ; of consonants 60, 66, 73, 99, 535. Assimilation of rel. to case of antec. 1030; w. antec. omitted 1031 ; in rel. adv. 1033 ; antec. rarely assim. to rel. 1034. Assim. of cond. rel. cl. to mood of antec. clause 1451, 1452 ; infin. in 1528 Assist, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 1160 Athematic verbs 468, 470, 500, 612-614 ; athem. forms of « vbs. 652, 659 d, 660 d, 669 b, 674 ; 2 aor. 694 ; pf. 726, 727

Attic future 678

in possess. sense

repeated 954, 967 ; 947 ; w. adv. etc. used like adj. 950; w. yrj, irpà-Ynara, vlôs, etc. understood 951; w. infin. 953, 1544; w. a clause 953 b, 1557 ; w. partie. 1007, 1555

gen.

basis of in 63, Old Attic alphabet 28

Attic dialect, p. 1 ; why Greek Grammar, p. 2 ;

Attic shortening 121 Attraction in rel.

rases

sent.

1036;

assim. 1037 Attributive adjective (opp. to predicate) 916, 919; position of 959

compounds 874 Attributive genitive 1082 Attributive participle 916, 968 Augment 64, 152, 514 c, 533-542, Attributive

562-568

Babrius,

verse

Bacchius 1629

of 1665 c ; bacchic rhythms

1682

Barytones 129,

142

154, 223,

334

Barytonesis in Aeolic 166 c 354 b, 805, 806 Be or become, vbs. signif. to 896; w. gen. 1094 Begin, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1099, 1100 ; w. à™ or 1204 c ; w. part. 1582 Belonging to, adj. signif. 842 Benefit, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 1160 Blâme, vbs. expressing, w. dat. Bases 169,

1160

Boeotia, Aeolians in, p. 1 Borrowed words, p. 3 Brachycatalectic verses 1642 Brachylogy 1177 Breathings 11-15; form of 13; place of 12

ENGLISH INDEX Bucolic diaeresis in heroic hexam. 1671

Byzantine Greek,

Caesura 1643 Call: seeName

Capital letters 7, 28 Cardinal numbers 429-432; decl. of 432-440 ; as distributives 444

Care

for, vbs. signif. to,

1103 Cases 175;

gen.

meaning of 176; ob¬ lique 178. Case endings of nouns 180. Syntax 1040-1196: see Nominative, Genitive, Dative, etc.

Catalexis

catalectic

verses

1246

Cause, expr. by gen. 1082/, 1121; by dat. 1181 ; by part. 1566 b, 1577 ; infin. w. vbs. denoting 1523

danger, vbs. of, w. m or opt. 1389 Cease or cause to cease, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1117 ; w. part. 1582 Changes of consonants 63-116; of vowels, see Vowels Choosing, vbs. of, 896 ; w. two acc. 1075; w. acc. and gen. 1095 Choral parts of tragedy, p. 1 Choriambus 1629 d; choriambic rhythms 1686 Circumflex accent 126; origin of 127 ; on contr. syll. 137 Circumstantial participle 1566 Claim, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1099, and

subj.

1097 6

Classes

of conditional sentences 1396-1399 Classes of verbs, five 607 : I 608-

614, II 615-636, III 637-643, IV 644-649, V 650 Close vowels 6; stems ending in 212

Clothing, vbs. of, w. two acc. 1068 Cognate acc. 1049-1055,1074,1182 Cognate stops 17 Cognate words, p. 3 Collective noun, w. numerals 442 ;

pl. verb 890 ; w. pl. part. 917 ; by pl. rel. 1021 6 Collision of vowels, how avoided 38 w.

foîl.

Comitative dative 1180 and

1634, 1640, 1653 Causal sentences, w. indic. 1463 ; w. opt. (ind. dise.) 1464; w. rel. 1461, 1462 Causative verbs 476,1107 ; middle

Caution

439

Commands

exhortations 1267,

1341-1354,1358,1384,1510; in¬

fin. expressing 1540;

verbs of

commanding w. gen. 1109; w. dat. (Hom.) 1164; w. infin. 1523 Common Dialect of Greek, p. 2 Common gender 173 Common syllables 121 Comparatio compendiaria 1177 Comparative degree 346-363; w. gen. 1147 ; w. dat. (différence) 1184 ; r} and infin. 1535 Comparison, adjs. denot. 1148; verbs denot., w. gen. 1120 Comparison of adjectives 346-363 ; irreg. 357 ; of ad verbs 421, 422 ; of

some nouns

in Homer 362

and pronouns 367 ;

Compensative lengthening 8, 32, 71, 75, 86, 92, 100, 125 6, 165 g Complex sentences 878, 1512 Compound négatives 1622 ; répéti¬ tion of 1621

Compound words 807, 856-875; first part of 857-862 ; second part of 841 c, 863-868 ; meaning of (three classes) 869-875. Com-

GREEK GRAMMAR

440

pound verbs 868, 875; augment and redupl. of 562-568; accent 150, 151 a,f, 152 ; w. gen., dat., or acc. 1129, 1132, 1179, 1206. Indirect compounds 565-568, 868 b ; augm. and redupl. 565-568 Comprehend, vbs. meaning 1103 Concealing, vbs. of, w. two acc. 1068 ; w. infin. and m 1618, cf. 1554-1556

Concession, expressed by opt. 1358; by part. 1566/, 1575; by Kal ei (ksI ) etc. 1435 Conclusion : see Apodosis and Condition

Condemning, vbs. of, w. gen. and acc. 1127 ; w. acc. and two gen. 1130

Condition and conclusion 1392 ; conditional sentences 1392-1453 ; classification of cond. sent. 1396-

général and particular cond. disting. 1395 ; comparison of Latin général cond. 1399 ; cond. expr. by part. 1423,1566 e ; 1398;

mixed cond. 1423-1431 : seeProtasis. Relative cond. sent. 14411453 : see Relative

Conjugation 168, 458, 459; verbs in

472-499

;

of verbs in

jtu 500-532 Conjunctions elided 56; proclitic

155

Conquer, vbs. meaning to 1110

Consécutive clauses 1466-1475 Consonant declension (third) 212 Consonant verb stems 471, 491499

Consonants, divisions of 16-27; double 19 ; doubling of 63-65 ; changes in 65-116, 166; movable 110-116; pronunciation 29 ; apocope

before 60

Constructio ad

sensum

918, 1084

Constructio praegnans 1204 Construction of whole and of part

906, 1058 Continue, verbs signif. to,

1582

part.

rules of 39-48; quantity of contr. syll. 125; accent of contr. syll. 137140, 151 c; contr. of nouns: lst decl. 45, 193, 2d decl. 207, 208,

Contraction 8, 38, 125;

d^cl. 230-269; of adj. 303-

307 ; of part. 336-338 ; of verbs in -au, -eu, and -ou 482—490, 769, 793 ; in gen. pl. of lst decl. in augm. and redupl. (ee

184 b ; to «) 537 ; in formation of words 814 b, 860 b ; v preventing contr. 48. Table of Contractions, p. 15. See Crasis and Synizesis

Convicting, vbs. of, 1127

w. gen.

and

acc.

Coôrdinate stops 18, 66

Copula 879 Copulative alpha 861 e Copulative compounds 873 Copulative verbs 893 b, 896 ; case of pred. adj. or subst. with infin. of 924, 927 ; in passive 1076 ; w. pred. gen. 1094, 1096 Coronis 49, 52 Corrélative pronominal adjectives 408 ; adverbs 423 Correptio Attica 121 Crasis 38, 49-53, 376, 528; quan¬ tity of syll. 125 ; accent 139 Crete, p. 1 Cretic 1629 c ; cretic rhythms 1683 Cyclic anapaests and dactyls 1636, 1652

Dactyl 1629 6 ; cyclic 1636 ; in anapaestic verse 1677 ; in iambic

ENGLISH INDEX

(apparent) 1659; in troverse (cyclic) 1652 ; in dactylo-epitritic verse 1689 Dactylic rhythms 1624, 1670-1676 Dactylo-epitritic rhythms 1689 ; in verse

chaic

Pindar 1690

Danaans, p. 1 Danger, vbs. expr., w. nv and subj. or opt. 1389 Dative case 176, 1157; endings of 180, 187, 196; dat. plur. of 3d decl. 76, 225, 235; syntaxof924, 1158-1196. Prépositions w. dat. 1200, 1207 Declension 168; contr. of lst and 2d decl. 45, of 3d decl. 45 6 ; of nouns : first 181-196, second 197-211, third 57 d, 212-285 ; of irreg. nouns 286-291 ; of adjectives : first and second 293-305, third 306-312, first and third 313-327; of part. 328-338; of adj. w. one ending 339-341 ; of irreg. adj. 342-345; ofthe article 385-387 ; of pronouns 364-406 ;

of numerals 432

Defective

nouns

289

Defend, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 1160; lfiuveiv tivi 1168 Degree of différence, dat. of 1184 Deictic suffix -i 392 ; 68e etc. 1008

Demanding, vbs. of,

1068

Demes,

two

acc.

441

Denominatives 808 ; denom. nouns 825-840; adjectives 843, 849; verbs 465, 565, 851-855 Dental stops 17, 62, 66, 74, 82; nasal 21 ; subst. stems in 227 ; verb stems 499 b, 616, 620, 715 Denying, vbs. of, w. infin. and nv 1554, 1618 Dépendent moods 474, 750 ; tenses of1273-1288

Déponent verbs 449 ; principal parts of 464 ; passive and middle déponents 450 Deprive, vbs. signif. to, w. acc. and gen. 1118; w. two acc. 1068 Descending rhythms 1649 Desiderative verbs 855

Desire, vbs. expr., w. gen. 1103 Despise, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1103

Determinative compounds 872 Diaeresis, mark of (") 9 ; in verse 1644 ; bucolic 1671

Dialects,

from Attic

;

dialect variations

164-166; dial. forms of substs. 196, 211, 285, cf. 292 ; of adj. 302, 317, 325, 343, 344, 356 b, 357 ; of numerals 431 ; of the article 386; of part. 338, 658 ; of pronouns 365, 369-374, 379, 381, 386, 391, 395, 401, 404, 406,409 ; of verbsin w 654-661 ; of contract vbs.'659-661 ; of vbs.

names of

Attic, in dat. 1193

Démonstrative pronouns 388-393 ; syntax of 1004-1010 ; w. article

943, 944 b, 972

distinctions of

;

position of 970 ; 68e, èneîvos

ovtos,

1005; article as demonstr. (Hom.) 933, (Att.) 979-983; for rel. 1039 ; rel. as demonstr. 1023 ; w. omitted anteced. 1029

Demosthenes, language of,

mi 510, 513, 516, 520, 524, 527, 530, 669-674 Digamma or Vau 3, 102 ; as nu¬ méral 429-446 ; omission of, seen in inflections 26, 37, 89,165, 527, 549, 634, 641, 866; retained in Aeol. and Doric 102; seen in

metre 1673 b Dimeter 1647, 1656; anapaestic 1678 b, c; dactylic 1676; iambic

1667

trochaic 1655, 1656

442

GREEK GRAMMAR

négatives 1369,1370,1619, See où p.y and ny où

Diminutives, suffixes of 830-832;

Double

Diphthongs 7 ; accent and breathing of 12, 128; genuine 8, 29, 42, 47 ; improper 7, 10, 12 ; spurious 8, 28, 29; in contrac¬ tion 39-48 ; in crasis 49-51 ; elision of (poet.) 58; augment of 540, 541; shortened in verse 1672 ; p not doubled after 64 Dipody 1647 ; iambic 1667 Direct, vbs. meaning to 1109, 1164 Direct discourse, question, and quotations 1490 Direct object 880; of act. verb 1044, 1045 Disadvantage, dat. of 1165, 1170 Disobey, vbs. signif. to, w. dat.

Doubtful vowels 5 Dual 170; masc. forms used for

neut. 174 d

1160

Displease, vbs. signif. to,

1160

dat.

Displeased, vbs. signif. to be, w. part. 1582 Disputing, vbs. of, w. causal gen. 1123

Dissyllabic vbs. in -«o 485 Distich 1651 ; elegiac 1674 Distinction, gen. of 1117 Distributive expressions 444, 949, 1136

Distrusting, vbs. of,

dat. 1160;

1618 Dividing, verbs of, w. two w.

infin. and

p.y

acc.

1075

Dochmius and dochmiacs 1629 e, 1683

Doing, verbs of, w. two acc. 1071 Dorian Greeks, p. 1 Doric dialect, p. 1 ; retains -ri 101 ; has à for Attic y 164; Doric future (also in Attic) 679 Double consonants 16, 19; make position 120; reduplication before 545

1620.

fem. 297, 386, 389,400 ; of verbs, lst pers. very rare 456, 582 b ; -tov

and -crdov for

-ryv

582 c; agreement 893, natural pairs 914; of

and -crOyv 901; of brothers

838

E, sounds of 28 Effect, acc. of 1053, 1079 Elegiac distich and pentameter 1674

Elis, dialect of, p. 1 Elision 38, 55-61 ; of diphthongs 58 ; in compound words 61 ; irepL, irpô, on, dat. in i, etc. not elided 57 ; accent of elided word 134, 140

Ellipsis of verb w. av 1313 ; of protasis 1414 ; of apodosis 1424 b, 1426, 1430 Emotions, vbs. expr., w. gen. 1121, 1433 Enclitics 134, 140, 154, 158, 366 ; w. accent if emphatic 161 ; at

end of compounds 163 ; succes¬ sive enclitics 162 ; forms of <j>ypL 518

End consonants 24

Endings: case endings of nouns 180, 198; local 292, 412, 423; verbal 577-582; personal 45, 578; remarks on 582 Endure, vbs. signif. to, w. part. 1582

Enjoy, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1097 b Envy, vbs. expr., w. causal gen. 1121 ; w. dat. 1160 Epenthesis 99 Epexegetic infinitive 1538

ENGLISH INDEX

Epie dialect, pp. 1, 2 Epicene nouns 173 Epitrite 1689 Epode 1651

;

suffixes 292

Find, vbs. signif. to, w. part. 1584 Finite moods 451, 1325 First

Eupolidean verse 1688 k Euripides, language of, p. 2 Exchange of quantity 31, 33, 203, 205, 267 Exclamations, nom. in 1043 ; voc. in 1042; gen. in 1124; relatives in 1038; infin. 1558 :

see

Commands

Exhorting, vbs. of, w. dat. 1160 Expecting etc., vbs. of, w. fut.,

infin. 1287 of 1061 ; gen. denoting

près., or aor.

Extent, 1094

acc. e

Faïl, vbs. meaning to 1117, cf. 1099 Falling and rising rhythms 1649 Fearing, verbs of, w. nv and subj. or opt. 1389 ; sometimes w. fut. indic. 1390 ; w. près, or past tense of indic. 1391 ; w. infin. 1523

Feet (in verse) 1628, 1635 ; ictus,

arsis, and thesis of 1626

tional 1635

Féminine

caesura

;

irra-

aorist

1671

b, 332 ; in 2 pf. part. (Hom.) 801, 802 Féminine nouns 171-174 ; in o 95

decl. 201

of, in dat. of time 1194, 1195; in pl. 913 FUI, vbs. signif. to, w. acc. and gen. 1113 Final clauses 1371; w. subj. and opt. 1374; w. subj. after past tenses 1378; rarely w. fut. ind. 1375; w. av or «è 1376; w. past names

tenses of indic. 1381 ;

neg. ]xg

tense

System

form of tense stem 683-689

461

;

First

declension 181-196 ; contracts of 193 ; adjs. of 293 First passive tense System 461 ; formation of tense stems 572, 738

First

perfect tense system 461, 479, 587; formation of tense stem 572, 709-715 Fitness etc., verbal adj. denot., formation of 843 ; w. infin. 1523, 1530

Forbidding, vbs. of, w. hv 1384 ; w. ht] and infin. 1618, 1552, 1554 Forgetting, vbs. of, w. gen. 1103; w. part. 1590 Formation, of cases in 3d decl. 214-226; of words 805-875

Friendliness, vbs. 1160

expr.,

dat.

Fullness and want, vbs. expr., w. gen.

1112

See FUI

Féminine form in participles 75,

Festivals,

final disting. from object

clauses 1372

Ethical dative 1171

Exhortations

1373 ;

443

;

adj.

expr.

847, 1140.

Future 452, 453 ; tense system 461,

572,

675-682;

of liquid

and

nasal verbs 632, 675; Attic fut. in -£> and -oDmai 678; Doric fut. 679 ; also Attic 679 ; without

tense suffix 681 ; 748 ; fut. meaning

passive 742, in près. 511 c ; fut. mid. as pass. 1248 ; represented by opt. w. av 1327 ; fut. indic. expressing permission or command 1267, 1354; rarely in final clauses 1375; regularly in object clauses with onus 1382 ; rarely w. hv after verbs of fear¬ ing 1390; fut. conditions 1413-

GREEK GRAMMAR

444

protasis 1401, 1415 ; not cond. 1446 ; in rel. clauses expressing purpose 1454 ; with e<j> œ or ecj}' utre 1477 ; with OV HT] 1369,1370 ; with a? (Hom., rarely Att.) 1303; periphrastic fut. with /xéXXco 1254; optative 1288, 1382 ; never w. av 1307 ; in protasis 1420; infin. 12781280, 1282, 1284, 1288; part. 1422 ;

rel.

1289

perfect452,453 ; in pf. mid. system 461 ; tense stem formed 572, 734 ; active form in a few vbs. 736, generally peri¬ phrastic 737 ; meaning of 452, 735, 1250 ; as emph. fut. 1268 ; infin. 1285 ; part. 1289

Future

tense

Gender 171; natural ana gram¬ matical 172; common and epi-

général rules 174; of lst decl. 181 ; of 2d decl. 197, 201 ; of 3d decl. 280-284 ; masc. pl. of woman 173, 910; generic use of masc. 920 ; of neut. w. cene

173;

abstracts 921

General, disting. from particular suppositions 1395 ; forms of 1398, 1399; w. subj. and opt. 1403, 1442 ; w. indic. 1405, 1443 ; in Latin 1399 Genitive case 175, 176, 178; in -6WÎ, -eœv 131 ; of lst decl. 165 h, 180, 184, 187, 191 ; of 2d decl. 198, 199 ; of 3d decl. 212. Syntax 1080-1156 ; apposition 902 ; w. omitted subject of infin. 924 b ; position 960, 964, 1089 ; gen. absol. 1156, 1570, 1595 6; gen. of infin. w. roO 1549-1552 Gentile nouns, suffixes of 840 Genuine diphthongs 8,28,29,42,47

w. infin. 1536 1638, 1688 d

Give, vbs. meaning,

Glyconic

verses

Gnomic tenses 1292-1296; prés¬ ent 1292 ; aorist 1293, 1294 ; as

primary tense 1270, 1404; w. xoXXâ/as, r/ôr;, o'virœ, etc. 1294 ; per-

fect 1296

Gradation of vowels 30-34; Vowels

see

Grave accent 126, 127 ; for acute in oxytones 134, 154; on ris 134 b

Greece, modem language of, p. 3 Greek language, history of and re¬ lations to other languages, pp. 13

Greeks, why so called, p. 1 Hear, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1103 ; w. acc. and gen. 1104 ; w. part. 1590

Hellenes and their divisions, p. 1 ; of Homer, p. 1

Hellenistic Greek of New Testa¬ ment and Septuagint, p. 2 Hemiambi 1685 b

Herodas 1665

Herodotus, dialect of,

Heteroclitic

nouns

286

Heterogeneous nouns 288 Hexameter 1647, 1651, 1671 Hiatus, how avoided 38; allowed 38, 938 ; at end of verse 1639 c Hindrance, vbs. of, w. nv and infin. etc. 1552-1556, 1618, 1619

Hippocrates, dialect of, p. 2 Hipponax 1654, 1665 Historical présent 1252 Historical tenses 1269 ; see Secondary

Hit, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1099 Homer, dialect of, p. 1 ; verse of 1671; apocope in 60; article in

445

ENGLISH INDEX 933-936 ; syllables in 60 ; books

Impersonal verbs 887, 1241 6, 1521 ; part, of, in acc. abs. 1571 ; impers, verbal in -rkov 1599 Imploring, vbs. of, w. gen. 1101 c Improper diphthongs 7, 128 Improper prépositions 1227 Inceptive class of verbs (IV) 644,

Iambus 1629-1633 ; iambic rhythms 1659-1669 ; tragic and comic

Inclination, formation of adj. de¬ noting 841 d Indéclinable nouns 174 e, 290 Indefinite pronouns 394-398 ; pro¬ nominal adj. 408, 409 ; adverbs 423 ; indef. relative 403, as in¬ direct interrog. 407 ; syntax of

of, numbered by letters 446 c ; Hellenes of, p. 1 Hoping etc., vbs. of, w. fut., près., or aor. infin. 1287 ; w. py 1511 Hostility, vbs. expr., w. dat. 1160 Hypercatalectic verse 1642

649

iambic trimeter 1660-1664 ; iam¬ bic systems 1668 ; in dochmiacs 1683

Ictus 1626, 1631

Ignorant, vbs. meaning to be, w. part. 1590 Imperative 451, 452, 705; pers. endings of 456, 509 c, 778-790 ; aor. pass. 789 ; pf. 780,783,1275. In commands etc. 1323, 1341 ; in prohib. w. prj (près.) 1345 ; W. aye, <t>épe, '10l 1344 ; after olad' 6 1342

Imperfect tense 452 ; secondary 453; in présent tense System 569 ; augment of 534-542 ; Per¬ sonal endings 578; infection of 583, 593, 601, 607, 662 ; itérative endings -ctkov and -aKÔpyv (Ion.) 606. Syntax 1250 5; how disting. from aor. 1249, 1251, 1261 ; denoting repeated or customary past action 1253 6 ; attempted action 1255; how expr. in infin. and part. 1286, 1290; in opt. 1503; w. av, itérative 1304 6, 1297 ; in unreal conditions 1407 ; in Hom. 1408 ; w. âv as potential 1304, 1334, 1339; without av 1412 ;

in rel. cond. sentences 1444; in wishes 1359; in final clauses 1381; in or. obi. 1497, 1503, 1504

1015-1018

Indicative 451 ;

Personal endings 456, 578; thematic vowel 467, 571 ; formation of 570, 572 (see under spécial tenses) ; tenses of 452, 453, 1250-1270, primary and secondary (or historical) 1269-1272. General

potential w. dep. w. pv or

use

of 1316 ;

1334-1340; inp-q ov 1350 ; fut. w. Ô7rcos and ôircùs prj 1351 ; w. où py (fut.) 1369-1371 ; in final clauses, rarely fut. 1375, second, tenses 1381; in obj. cl. w. ôwœs (fut.) 1371 6, 1382 ; w. py and vbs. of av

fearing, rarely fut. 1390, près, and past 1391 ; in protasis : près, and past tenses 1400, in gen. suppos. for subj. 1405,

future 1401, 1415, second, tenses in supp. contr. to fact 1407,1443,

clauses 1441, 1443, 1444, by assimila¬ tion 1452 ; second, tenses w. av 1304,1334,1407 ; in wishes (sec¬ ond. tenses) 1359; in causal sent. 1463 ; in rel. sent, of purin cond. rel. and temp.

pose

(fut.) 1454 ; fut. w. è<j>' <3 or

GREEK GRAMMAR

446

k<f>' $re 1477, w. ê'ws etc. 1479, w. irplv 1484, 1486 b ; in indirect quotations and questions 1502, 1508. See Présent, Future, Aorist, etc.

Indirect compounds

568, 868

1490-1518

1157, 1158

1278,1378,1464,

of verb 880, 1044,

Indirect quotations

and questions

1491-1494, 1601, 1607 Indirect reflexives 367, 986, 987

Indo-European languages, p. 3, 805 Inferiority, vbs. expr., w. gen. 1120 Infinitive 447, 452 ; endings 579 ; formation of 457,791 ; formation of contr. infin. 45 e ; accent 151 d ; dial. forms of 657,659/, 673. Syntax 1520-1558 ; subject of 883 b, omitted 923-928. Tenses of, not in indir. dise. 1273, 1274, 1275, 1277 ; in indir. dise. 1282-1288, 1509, 1526, 1529 ; distinction of the two uses 1510 ; obj. infin. 1522 ; impf. and plpf. suppl. by près, and pf. 1286, 1509 ; w. av 1309,1509 ; w. article 953,1544 ; w. eô« 1410 ; w. AiéXXco 1254 ; w. &4>èkov in wishes 1360, 1361 ; négative of 1614,1511 ; py ov with 1619, 1553, 1555. Rel. w. infin. 1528.

of accompaniment 1187 Intention, infin. w. vbs. of 1523 ; part. expr. 1566 d Interchange of vowels 30-34,165 e ; of quantity 33, 203, 267, 538 ; of conson.

Indirect discourse Indirect object

(verbs) 565,

Intensive pronoun 364,988 ; w. dat.

Consécutive 1537.

Dist.

suppl. part. 1583 Inflection 168; of w verbs, près, and impf. 651-661 ; of pi vbs. from

662-674

Inscriptions, numerals in 446 Inséparable préfixés 861, 862 Instrument, dat. of 1040, 1176, 1181; suffixes denoting 822, 823 Intensive préfixés 862

in dialects 166 b

Interrogative pronoun 394; pron. adj. 408; pron. adv. 423; syntax of 1011-1014

Interrogative sentences 1601-1608 ; subjunctive in 1367, 1505 Intransitive verbs 449, 454, 891, 1044, 1231 ; cognate object of 1049 ; verbs both trans. and intrans. 1232

Inverted assimilation of relatives 1035

rhythms 1684

Ionic feet 1629 d;

Ionic Greeks, p. 1 Ionic race and dialect, pp. 1, 2.

alphabet 28.

Ionic

for

Attic à 164, 196; et and ov for e and o, yï for et 165 ; omits con¬ traction and 165

;

movable 38, 110,

for rr 63, 94 psilosis 104

acr

in 555 ; Iota class of verbs

;

redupl.

(II) 615-636 subscript 7, 10, 29 Irrational syllables 1635,1648,1652 Irregular substs. 285-291 ; adjectives 342-345 ; comparison 357362 ; athem. verbs 508-532, 650 Isocrates, elision in 59 Italy, Dorians of, p. 1 Itérative impf. and aorist w. av 1297. Itérative forms in -o-kov, -aKopyv (Ion.) 1298, 606 ; W. av Iota

1298

Ithyphallic verse 1655 a Judicial 1133

action,

verbs of

1127,

ENGLISH INDEX

Know, vbs. signif. to, w. part. 1590 Koiné dialect, p. 2 Koppa 3 ; as numéral 429, 446 changes of 6679; before m 79; before i 94, 621; change ofv before 72; noun stems in 227,214 b, c ; verb stems in pf. mid. 499 a Lead, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1102, 1109; w. dat. (Hom.) 1164 Learn, vbs. signif. to, w. acc. and gen. 1104 ; w. part. 1590 Lengthening of vowels 31 ; in verb stem 593 ; compensative 8, 32, 71, 75, 86, 92, 100, 125 5, 165 g-, metrical 165/, 815 Lesbos, dialect of, p. 1 Letters 1 ; names of 1, 4 ; lost 3 ; used for numbers 429, 446 Likeness, dat. of 1176; abridged expr. w. adj. of 1177 Liquids 16, 20, 29 ; v before 73 ; doubled 63 ; w. i in stems 99101 ; vowel bef. stop and liquid Subst. stems in 229.

Liquid and nasal verb stems 32, 471, 587, 627-636, 716; in pf. mid. 499 d ; fut. of 677 ; aorist of 687 ; passive 738, 743 Local endings 292, 412, 423, 1191 Locative case 176, 1040, 1191 Long vowels 5, 119-125 ; how augmented 541 ; shortened in verse 1672

Lost sounds 26, 37, 67, 89, 535,

537, 634 Lyric poets, p. 1

Màke, vbs. signif. to, 896 acc.

; w.

1075 ; w. acc. and gen.

in pass. w. gen. 1096

Manner, dative of 1181

two

1095 ;

;

w. com-

1184; part, of 1566 Masculine nouns 174; of par.

189-192.

Labial nasal m 21 Labial stops 17;

120-122.

447

decl.

See Gender

Material, adj. denoting 845; gen. of 1082, 1094, 1112 Means, dative of 1181 ; part, of 1566 c ; suffixes denoting 822, 823

Measure, gen. of 1082, 1094 Melic poetry 1651, 1655, 1658, 1667, 1676 Metaplastic substs. 287

Metathesis 106 Metre 1623 ; related to 1625 Metrical Mi forms

rhythm

lengthening 165/ 470, 500-532; enumera-

tion of 662 ; enclitic 159 c. Athematic verbs

Middle

voiced stops 18;

doubled 63 b

See

not

Middle voice 448,1243 ; endings of 45 c, 577, 578, 579 ; déponents 450 ; three uses of 1243 ; in causative sense 476, 1246; fut. in pass. sense 1248 ; aor. as pass.

1235, 1248 Miss, vbs. signif. to,

w. gen.

1100

1099,

Mixed aorists 654 h Mixed class of verbs (V) 650 Mixed forms of conditional

sen¬

tence 1431

Modem Greek, p. 3 Molossus 1629 d Monometer 1647

Monosyllables, not elided 57 ; in apocope 60 ; of 3d decl. 147 ; part. 149 ; in Porson's rule 1662 Moods 451, 460; finite 451; dé¬ pendent 474; suffixes of 573576 ; général uses of 1316-1325;

GREEK GRAMMAR

448 constructions of

(I-XIII) 1326-

1558

Nominative voc.

case

202, 1043;

175, 177 ; for for acc. 240,

singular of 3d subject nom. 882, 884-888, 1041 ; pred. nom. 896 ; w. infin. 923 ; in appos. w. sentence 904 ; infin. as

310, 316, 356;

Mora 1628

Motion, yerbs of 1055, 1064, 1119 Movable consonants 38, 59, 110116, 489

Multiplication, how expressed 441 Mutes 16-19 ; smooth, middle, and rough 18; coôrdinate and cognate 17, 18 ; changes of 63-109 ; bef. <r 69 ; bef. /x 79 ; vowel bef. mute and liquid or nasal 121. See Consonants

decl. formed 214-217 ;

1521. Pl. nom. w. sing. verb, generally neut. 888 b ; rarely masc. or fem. 894. Sing. coll. noun w. pl. verb 890 Nouns substantive 179-292; ac¬ cent 141-149; adjective 293nom.

formation 817-850 of adj., peculiarities in agreement 917-921 Numerals 3, 429, 446, 895, 946 363 ;

call, vbs. signif. to 896; w. two acc. 1075; w. elvai 1077 ; w. acc. and gen. 1095 ; in pass. w. gen. 1094 g, 1096 Narration, infin. in 1529 Nasals 16, 21, 27, 29, 68; vowels before stop and nasal 121, 122; nasal doubled 63,165 g ; v before stops 72; verb stems in nasal 499 d, 587, 603, 627-636, 714;

Name

aor.

of nasal vbs. 32 a, 687 ;

inserted

638;

dropped

498,

499 d, 602 Nature, vowel long or short by 119 Négatives 1609-1622 : see Où and

M17

Neglect, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1103 Neuter gender 174, 177, 181 : see Gender. Neuter pl. w. sing. verb 888 b ; neut. pred. adj. 921 ; neut. sing. of adj. w. art. 931, 932; neut. adj. as cognate acc. 1052 ; neut. acc. of adj. as adverb 421 ; neut. part, as subst. 932 ; neut. part, of impers, vbs. in acc. absol. 1571 ; verbal in -rkov 1599 New Attic, p. 2 ; 63 c, 71 b New Ionic, p. 2 New Testament, Greek of, p. 2

Number 170, 456;

O, sounds of 28, 29 Obey, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 1160

Object, defined 880; direct and indirect 880, 1044; direct obj. (acc.) 1045/; as subject of pass. 1236; internai obj. (cognate) 1049 ; indirect obj. (dat.) 11571164; gen. as object of verb 1080; of noun 1082; of adj. 1139-1146; double obj. acc. 1068-1079. Object of motion, by acc. w. prep. 1200; by acc. alone (poetic) 1064 Object clauses w. oirws and fut. indic. 1382; w. subj. and opt. 1385, 1382; in Hom. 1388; infin. 1510, 1522 Objective compounds 870; trans. and intrans., accent of 871 Objective genitive 999, 1044, 1082, 1094, 1139 Oblique cases 178 Obsolète letters 3, 446 Old Attic dialect, p. 2 ; 28 Old Ionic, pp. 1, 2

ENGLISH INDEX Old Testament Greek, p. 2 Omission of augment 542;

of redupl. 553 ; of subject nom. 885, 886 ; of subject of infin. 923-928 ; of antécédent of rel. 1026 ; of pà

in oaths 1067 ; of viôs 1087 ; of

opt. 1331 ; of protasis 1424 ; apodosis 1426, 1430. See Ellipsis Open vowels 6 ; in contraction 39 Optative 133, 451, 452 ; pers. endings 456, 578, 762; mood suffix 573, 762 ; formation of 762-777 ; av

Aeolic forms in Attic

aor.

act.

575, 656, 764; in contract vbs. (près, act.) 769; pi forms 771777 ; of verbs in wpi 775; Ion. aro for vto 654 c ; Hom. oiaOa for ois 656 6; periphrasis in pf. 765; reg. pf. in few verbs 766; 2 pf. in olt]v 767 ; lst pers. rpkcpoiv 768. Tenses : not in indir. dise., près, and aor. 1273, 1274, pf. 1275, never fut. 1288; in indir. dise. 1282 ; près, asimpf. 1503 ; future, only in indir. dise. 1288, or in obj. cl. w. o7rcos 1382, and rarely in rel. cl. of purpose 1456 ; w. effect of primary or second, tense

449

purpose vbs.

(chiefly Hom.) of

1455; obligation 1431 d,

1449 ; w. eus etc. until 1480 ; w. irpiv 1485, 1486 6 ; in indir. dis¬

after past tenses, by change from subj. or indic. 1496 6, 1502, 1503, 1508, 1512 6, course,

1517

Oratio obliqua: see Indirect Dis¬ course and 1510 Ordinal numerals 429, 440, 441,

443, 1062 Origin, genitive of 1082 /, 1094 /

Orthotone words 129

Overlook, vbs. signif. to, 1587

part.

Oxytones 129, 151, 318 Paeons 1629 c; 1681

in cretic rhythms

Palatals 17, 63 ; phonic changes of 66-79 ; v before 72 ; before p. 79, 499 6 ;

subst. stems 227 ; verb before -otcw 6

stems in près. 617 ; 648 ; in pf. mid. 499

Parataxis 1432

po-

Paroemiac verse 1679, 1680 6 Paroxytone 129, 146, 161 / Participle, accent 151 e, 334 ; for¬ mation of 217, 580, 658, 800-804, 848 ; declension of 295, 328-338 ;

1329 ; in inferences 1330 ; wishes 1355; in final cl. 1374; in obj. cl. w. o7rcos, fut. 1382 ; près, or aor. 1385 ; in Hom. 1388 ; w. pv after vbs. of fearing 1389; in protasis 1397, 1403 6, 1418 ; sometimes w. e'L ne (Hom.) 1421 ; in apod. w. âv or 1418; in cond. rel. clauses 1442 6, 1447 ; by assimil. 1451; in rel. cl. of

658 ; 338, 506, 802. Syntax: attrib. 916, 968, 15621565; tenses 1289; près, for impf. 1290 ; aor. not past 1291 ; W. Xavdâvco, Tvyxàvoj, <t>6àvœ 1588 ; w. irepLopû etc. 1587 ; that inwh. an action consists 1566 h; aor. (or pf.) w. ex« as periphr. pf. 1264; pf. w. œ and eiV as pf. subj. and opt. 752, 753, 765; fut. (or près.) of purpose 1566 d;

1272 6

General

uses

1321, 1322;

tential opt. w. av 1326-1333 ; for fut. indic. 1327 ; in commands

Aeol. forms in

athem.

forms

eus, aiaa, oeera

GREEK GRAMMAR

450

Penult 117

e; w. av 1309; 1570 ; in acc. absol. without subject in gen. abs. 1570; omission of &v 1573, 1588; pl. w. sing. collec¬ tive subst. 917; w. neut. art. 932 ; in orat. obi. 899, 1509, 1590-1595; in protasis 1423. Part. W. a/,ta, pera^v, evdvs, etc. 1574 ; W. Kai, Ka'nrep, ovôé, prjôé 1575; w. côsl576; w. are and olov (ola) 1577 ; W. ticrirep 1578 Three uses of participle 1560: attributive 916, 968, 1562-1565;

conditional 1566

Perceive, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1103 ; w. part. 1584, 1590 Perfect participles 329, 338 Perfect tense 452 ; primary 453 ; Personal endings 578; redupli¬ cation 543-553 ; Att. redupl. 554-558 ; compound forms in subj. and opt. 752, 753, 765; in

in gen. absol. 1571 ; part,

circumstantial 1566-1579

;

3d pers. 780-783

sup-

tion 903 Passive voice 447,1234 ; déponents

personal endings of 45

578-581; accent of part. 151e; aor.

pass. w.

inflection of act.

694, 738, 1235; infl. of conson.

pf. and plpf. 496, 497. subject of 1234, 1241 ; retains one object from active constr. 1240; imstems in

Use of 1234-1242 ;

constr. 886 d, 1241 b ; intrans. active forms as pass. 1242; w. infin. as subject 1526 5; pass. of both act. and

personal

pass.

mid. 1247

Patronymics, suffixes of 833-839 Pause in verse 1641 ; caesura 1643 diaeresis 1644

Peloponnesus, dialects of, p. 1 Pentameter, elegiac 1647, 1674 Penthemimer

(2| feet) 1674

perfect tense system 461 ; meaning 479, 1250 c, 1275, 735; orig. from vowel stems only 713; First

formation of 572, 709;

plementary 1580-1589. Adver¬ bial 1567 ; as substantive 1564 Particular and général suppositions distinguished 1395, 1399, 1442 Partitive genitive 903, 1082 g, 1088, 1094, 1095, 1100; posi¬ tion 960, 964. Partitive apposi¬

450 ;

pl. mid. 496; imperat.

;

modified vowel of stem 712

Second perfect tense system 461; formation of 572, 716; meaning 479 ; modif. vowel of stem 718-720 ; Hom. 2 perfects 722 ; aspirated 2 pf. 723, not in Hom. 725 ; 2 pf. of pi form 500, 506, 726, 727, 777 ; part, in aws or ews

802

Perfect mid. tense system 461 ; formation of stem 569, 572, 587,

496, modif. vowel of stem 730, a in stem 598, 599, 732 ; in 3d pers. pl. (Ion.) 654 c,

729-733 ; consonant stems 497 ; 731 ; arai

733

Syntax : pf. indic. 1250 c ; as 1265 ; as vivid future 1266 ; subj., opt., and infin. (not in ind. dise.) 1273,1275; infin. expr. dé¬ cision or permanence 1277 ; im¬ perat. (generally 3d sing. pass.) 1276 ; opt. and infin. in ind. dise. 1282 ; part. 1289 Periphrastic forms : of pf. and plpf. indic. 498, 732, 733; subj. 752, 753; opt. 765 ; imperat. 783; of fut. w. pkWœ 1254 ; of fut. pf. 737 près.

ENGLISH INDEX

Perispomena 129, 304 a Permit, verbs meaning to 1582 Persevere, vbs. signif. to, w. part. 1582

Person of verb 456 ; agreement w.

subject in 888 ; subject of first or omitted 885 ; third person 886; pers. of rel. pron. 1020. Personal endings of verb 577, 578 Personal pronoun 364-376 ; stems of 365 ; omitted as subject 885, 984 ; of third pers. in Attic 986 ; in Hom. and Hdt. 987 ; position of gen. 960, 975 ; substituted for rel. 1039 ; personal construction 1591, 1594, 1596 Pherecratic verses 1688 6, c Pity, vbs. expr., w. causal gen. 1121 Place, suffixes denoting 829 ; adverbs of 292, 413, 423 ; w. gen. 1146; acc. of (whither) 1064; article omitted 956; gen. of (■within which) 1137 ; dat. of (where) 1192, 1193 ; dat. w. adv. of 1190. See 1204, 1205 Plato, language of, p. 3 Please, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. second pers.

1160

Pleased, vbs. signif. to be,

part.

1582

Pluperfect tense, v movable in 112 ; use 452, 453 ; in perfect tense Systems 461 ; personal endings 578; redupl. and augment 550; Att. redupl. 554, 558 ; compound form w. fjaav in 3d pers. pl. 496, 497. First plpf. act., formed from 1 pf. stem 709; second, from 2 pf. stem 716 ; /.u forms 506, 726 ; form of plpf. act. in Hom. and Hdt. 654 d, 710 ; in later Attic 709. Plpf. middle

451

729, 730 ; w. aro in 3d pers. pl. (Ion.) 654 c, 733 Syntax : meaning of plpf. 1250 d; as impf. 1265; in cond. sent. 1407 ; w. av 1304 ; expr. in infin. by pf. 1286 ; by pf. w. av 1308 ; in or. obi. 1497, 1504 Plural 170, 456; neut. w. sing. verb 888 h, 889 ; verb w. sing. collect. noun 890; w. several subjects connected by and 891 ; in appos. 901 ; names of cities 908; women910; in veiled reference 911 ; abstracts 912 ; fes¬ tivals 913 ; adj. or rel. w. several sing. nouns 920,1021 ; pl. antec. Of

OOTIS

1021

Porson's rule 1662

Position, vowels long by 120 Position of article 959-978 ; of gen. 960, 1089 ; of prep. 1202 Possession, gen. of 1082, 1094, 1095, 1143 ; dat. of 1173 Possessive pronouns 380-382, 998 ; w. article 960, 998-1003. Pos¬ sessive compounds 874. Our own, your own, etc. 1003 Postpositive words 963 Potential opt. w. av 1326-1333 ; withoutcb' 1331,1332 ; pot. indic. w. av 1334-1340 ; in Hom. 1409 Predicate 877 ; pred. noun and adj. w. verbs 897-899, 922 ; referring to omitted subject of infin. 923, 924, 927, 928 ; noun without ar¬ ticle 954 ; pred. adj. 909, 916, 920, position of, w. art. 970 ; pred. acc. w. obj. acc. 1075, 1076; pred. gen. 1093; tertiary pred. 971 ; interrog. pron. as 1604 ; infin. as pred. nom. 1521 Prépositions 416, 850, 1197 ; w. gen., dat., and acc. 1207 ; elided

452

GREEK GRAMMAR

56; accent when elided 140; anastrophe 135, 1202 ; proclitic 155, cf. 166 c ; w. numerals 895, 946; tmesis 1199; augment of comp. verbs 562-568; prepos. as adv. 1198, 1201 ; in comp. w. gen., dat., or acc. 1206, 1132, 1179; omitted w. rel. 1025; w. rel. by assimil. 1032 ; w. infin. and article 1549. List of prépo¬

sitions, pp.254-262 Présent tense 452; primary 453 ; Personal endings 577,582 ; tense system 461 ; stem 569, 590 ; for¬ mation of, five classes of vbs. 607-650

see

Classes. Inflection

indic. 651, /j.l form 662 ; redupl. 561 ; contracted 482 ; in opt. 767 ; imperat. 778, of /« form 784-788; infin. 791, 797799 ; part. 800, decl. of 328-337. Syntax of près, indic. 1250 ; historical 1252,1269 ; gnomic 1253, 1292 ; as fut. 1257 ; of attempt (conative) 1255 ; of r/Kœ and otxoiiai as pf. 1256 ; of eï/xi as fut. 1257 ; w. 7râXeu etc. 1258 ; never w. av or fcè 1302. In dep. moods : not in indir. dise. 1273, how disting. from aor. 1274, from pf. 1275; in indir. dise. (opt. and infin.) 1282 ; infin. and opt. as impf. 1286 ; infin. w. vbs. of hoping etc. 1287 ; time of 1524 ; part. 1289 ; part, as impf. 1290. See Indicative, Subjunctive, etc. Priapean verse 1688 l Price, genitive of 1133 Primary bases 460 Primary or principal tenses 453, 578,1269 ; how far distinguished in dépendent moods 1272 Primitive verbs 465; words 808; of près,

substs. 817 ; adjectives 841, 848, 849

Principal parts of verbs 463 ; of déponents 464. See Catalogue of Verbs

Proceleusmatic 1629 b

Proclamations, infin. in 1543 Proclitics 140, 154-157 ; with ac¬ cent 156, 157 Prohibitions w. m 1345; w. ov m 1369. See Commands

Promising, verbs of,

fut.,

près.,

infin. 1287 ; w. uv 1511 Pronominal adj. and adv. 408, 423 or aor.

Pronominal article 979-983

Pronouns 364-411 ; synt. 885, 984-

enclitic 159; w. accent See Personal, Relative, etc. Pronunciation, probable ancient 1039;

retained 164 d, e.

Proparoxytones 129 Properispomena 129 Prosecute, vbs. signif. to, and

acc.

w. gen.

1127

1392 ; forms of 1398 in part., adv., etc. 1423 omitted 1424, 1327, 1337

Protasis expr.

;

Prothetic vowels 36 Protraction 1634

Prove, vbs. signif. to, w. part. 1590 Ps 19, 28 Psilosis in Ionic 104, 165 i ; in Aeol. 165 i

Pull, vbs. meaning to 1102 Punctuation marks 167 Pure verbs 471 expr. by final clause by rel. cl. w. fut. indic. 1454; in Hom. by subj. 1455; implied in a condition 1380 ; in cl. w. é'cos, trp'iv 1482; by infin. 1536; by fut. (or près.) part.

Purpose, 1371 ;

ENGLISH INDEX

by «o-re 1469; someby gen. (without evena) by gen. of infin. 1551

1566 d; times 1122 ;

Qualitative gradation of vowels 34, 466, 585. See Vowels Quality, nouns denoting 174, 821, 826 ; genitive 1085 Quantitative gradation 31, 466. See Vowels

Quantity

of syllables 119-125; shown by accent 125 c ; inter¬ change of 33, 254, 584 ; relation of, to rhythm 1623-1627, 1672, 1673

Questions, direct and indirect disting. 1490 ; direct 1601-1606 ; of appeal w. subj. 1367; indirect 1607, 1496, 1505 Quotations 1490, 1492 Récessive

129, 133, 142, 150, 152 ; in lst decl. 192, 196818 c ; 2d decl. 202 ; 3d decl. 237, 242, 273, 818 c; in adjs. 308, 356 d; in verbs 150-161, 495 Reciprocal pronoun 383 ; reflexive accent

used for 996

Reduplication 460; of pf. stem 543-558, 605 ; repres. by e 545, or by temp. augm. 548 ; in compounds 562 ; rarely omitted 553 ; of 2 aor. 559, 560, 692 ; of près, stem 501, 514, 561, 565-568, 605, 646 ; in plpf. 550 ; Attic, in pf. 554; in 2 aor. 560; in nouns 815

Reflexive pronouns 377-379, 993 ; used for reciprocal 996 ; 3d pers. for lst

2d 995;

indirect

flexives 367, 986, 987, 993

re-

Regard, vbs. meaning to 896,1075, 1095

453

Relation, adj. denoting 842, 843; dat. of 1172

Relative pronouns in crasis 49-52, 1440 b ; Homeric forms 406 ; pronom,

adj. 408-411; adverbs

423 ; agreement 1020, 1022 ; re¬ lation to antécédent 1019; antec. om. 1026 ; assimilation of rel. to case of antec. 1030; of

antec. to case of rel. 1034 ; assim. in rel. adv. 1037 ; attrac¬ tion of antec. 1036; joined w.

assim. 1037 ; rel. not repeated in 1039 ; rel. as demonstr.

new case

1023 ; in exclam. 1038. and 1462

Relative

temporal sentences 1427-

Release, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1117 Remember, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1103 ; w. part. 1590

Reminding, vbs. of,

two

acc.

1068 ; w. acc. and gen. 1107

Remove, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1117 Repent, vbs. signif. to, w. part. 1582 Represent, vbs. signif. to, w. part. 1584

Reproach, vbs. expr., w. dat. 1160 Resemblance, words implying, w. dat. 1176

Resolved syllables 1632, 1633

Respect, dative of 1182 Restrain, vbs. signif. to,

gen.

1117

Resuit,

nouns

denot.

821

;

rel.

clauses of 1457-1459 ; expr. by (Serre w. infin. and indic. 14661475

Revenge, verbs

expr., w.

causal

gen.

1121

Rhythm and metre, how related 1623-1626; ascending and descending rhythms 1649. See Anapaestic, Dactylic, lambic, etc.

GREEK GRAMMAR

454

Rhythmical sériés 1638 Rising and falling rhythms 1649 Romaic language, p. 3 Rough breathing 11-15 ; in crasis 52 Rough stops 18 ; never doubled 63 ; not in successive syllables 105, 544

Rule, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1109 ; w. dat. (Hom.) 1164

Sampi, obsolète letter 3 ; as nu¬ méral 429, 446 San, for sigma 3 Sapphic strophe 1688 g Sappho, language of, p. 1 ; name 63 Satisfy, vbs. signif. to, w. dat. 1160 Saying, verbs of, w. two acc. 1071 ; constr. in indirect discourse 1526, 1527

Second aorist, perfect, etc. 454 Second aorist tense system 461 ;

conjugation 481

;

stem 569, 572,

690-708 ; athem. forms 694-708 Second declension 197-247

Second passive tense system

461

;

572, 587, 744 Second perfect tense system 461 ; of Ait verbs, inflected 505, 506 ; irkcpriva 479 ; stems 569, 572, 587, stems

716-728

Secondary (or historical) tenses 453, 533, 578, 1269, 1407; how far distinguished in dépend, moods 1272

See, vbs. signif. to, w. part. (ind. dise.) 1590, (not in ind. dise.) 1584, 1585 Semicolon 167 Semivowels 26, 212, 611 Sentences 876, 878 Séparation, gen. of 1117, 1141 Septuagint version of Old Testa¬ ment, p. 2

Serving, vbs. of, w. dat. 1160 Sharing, vbs. of, w. gen. 1097 b Short vowels 5, 35, 121, 123-125; apocope of 60 ; elided 61 ; aphaeresis of 62 ; syllables, time of 1628, 1673 Shortening of vowels and diphthongs 121, 165 h, 203 Show, vbs. signif. to, w. part. 1590 Sibilant (<r) 22 Sicily, Dorians in, p. 1 Similes (Homeric), aor. in 1295 Simple and compound words 807 Simple sentences 878; in or. obi. 1502

Singular number 170, 456; sing. vb. w. neut. pl. subj. 888 b; rarely w. masc. or fem. pl. subj. 894 ; rel. w. pl. anteced. 1021 ; several sing. nouns w. pl. adj. 920 Smell, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1103 ; ôfw w. two gen. 1108 Smooth breathing 11, 12 Smooth stops 18 Sociative dative 1180 Sonants and surds 23 ; sonant uids and nasals 27

liq-

Sophocles, language of, p. 2 Source, gen. of 1125, 1208 Space, extent of, w. acc. 1061 ; measure of, w. gen. 1082 e Spare, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1103 Spécification, acc. of 1056 Spirants 22 Spondee 1629 b ; for anapaest 1633,1677 ; for dactyl 1671 ; for iambus or trochee 1659, 1652. Spondaic hexameter verse 1671 Spurious diphthongs et and ov 8, 45 e, 75, 100, 739; how written and sounded 28, 29

Stem and base 169, and weak stems 34,

805. Strong 585-589,604.

ENGLISH INDEX Verb

stem

569-572 ;

added

590 ; <t in 598. Tense stems 569, 607. Présent stem : see Présent

Stigma, abbreviated <tt 3 Stipulative clauses 1476, 1477 Stop consonants 16 Striving, verbs of 1382 Strong and weak grades of vowels 34.

See Vowels

Strophe 1651 Subject 877 ; of finite verb 882, 892, (omitted 885, 886 ; of infin. 883, 884, omitted 883 6, c ; sen¬ tence as subject 887,1383 ; infin. as subject 1521 ; agreement of finite vb. with 888; of passive 1234, 1236 Subjective genitive 1082, 1094 Subjunctive 451, 452; pers. endings 456, 578, 750; long thematic vowel 03/rj- 571 b, 666, 751 ; formation of 752-761; jut forms 755; of vbs. in w/.u 760; Ionic forms 655 ; short them. vowel in Hom. 655; uncontracted forms 655 5, 670 ; Hom. forms in 2 aor. act. 670 b ; periphrasis in pf. 752, 753 ; reg. pf. forms rare 752, 754. Tenses: près, and aor. 1273, 1274 ; pf. 1275 General uses 1319, 1320; as fut. 681, 1320, 1364 ; in exhorta¬ tions 1343 ; in prohibitions (aor.) 1345; w. m, expr. fear or anxiety (Hom.) 1347 ; w. ixi) Or A") où in cautious assertions or néga¬ tions 1349 ; rarely indep. w. ôirws

ah) 1353 ; in Hom. like fut. indic. 1355, 1364, w. /cè or av 1365 ; in

questions of appeal 1367, retained in indir. questions 1505; w. où fxrj, as emph. fut. 1369, sometimes in prohib. 1370; in

455

final clauses 1374, also after past tenses 1378, w. àv or *è 1376; in

object cl. w. Ôircos 1385, w. av 1387 ; in Hom. w. oirœs or ùs 1388 ; w. a«) after vbs. of fearing 1389 ; in protasis w. èàv etc.

1393, 1398, 1403, 1413; w. d (in poetry) without àv or «è 1406, 1416; in cond. rel. cl. 1441, 1445 ; by assim. 1451 ; in rel. cl. of purpose (Hom.) 1455; in similes 1450; w. 'éœs etc. until 1480, without àv 1481 ; w. irpLv 1485, 1486; in indir. discourse 1497 ; changed to opt. after past tenses 1496, 1512, 1517 Subscript, iota 7, 10, 12 Substantive 179-292; w. gen. in periphrasis 1084 : see Noun Suffixes 169, 412, 810; tense 460, 572, 601 ; optative suffix 573, 763

Superlative degree 346, 353 dat. 1185

Supplementary 1589

participle

;

1580-

Suppositions, général and particular distinguished 1395 Surds and sonants 23

Surpassing, vbs. of, w. gen. 1120 Swearing, particles of, w. acc. 1065, cf. 1047, 1287, 1511 Syllaba anceps at end of verse 1637, 1639 b

Syllabic augment 533, 534-538, 545 ; of plpf. 550 ; before vowel

537, 538 ; omitted 542 Syllables 117 ; division of 29, 118 ; quantity of 19, 119-125; long and short in verse 938, 16231626, 1632 ; irrational 1635 Syncopation in verse 1634, 1657, 1666

456

GREEK GRAMMAR

Synecdoche (or spécification), acc. of 1057

Synizesis 54, cf. 38 Synopsis of Aûw 475; XeLirco 477; 4>aLvœ 478; Tip.ô.0), </>iAe«, ôrj\ôu, Orjpâœ 484 ; 'L(TT7)p.L, ridripi, ôtôw/xt, ôeiKwpi. 503, 507 ; athem. 2 aorists 694, 695 Systems, tense 458-462. In verse (anapaestic, trochaic, and iambic) 1637, 1656, 1668, 1679 Taking away, vbs. signif., w. two acc. 1068, 1118 Taking hold of, vbs. signif., w. gen. 1099; w. acc. and gen. 1101 Taste, vbs. signif. to, w. gen. 1103 Teaching, vbs. of, w. two acc. 1068 Temporal augment 533, 539-542, 548, 558 ; of diphthongs 540 ; omission of 542

Temporal particles 1478 Temporal sentences : see Relative Tense stems 460, 569-572 ; forma¬ tion of 583-748; table of 749 Tense suffixes 572 Tense Systems 458, 460-462, 583606. See Présent, Future, etc. Tenses 452 ; relations of 1249 ;

primary (or principal) and secondary (or ffistorical) 453, 1269 ; of indic. 1250-1272 ; of dépend, moods 1273-1288 ;' of part. 12891291; gnomic 1292-1296; itéra¬ tive 1297-1298. See Présent, Imperfect, etc.

Terminal accusative 1064

Tertiary predicate 971, 1604 Tetrameter 1647 ; trochaic 1653 ; lame (Hipponactean) 1654 ; iambicl666; dactylie 1676 c ; ana¬ paestic 1678 d Tetrapody 1648

Tetraseme 1628 6

inflection 469 ; vowel (%-) 467, 500, 569, 571, 582; long (œ/y-) in subj. 467, 500, 666 ; près, stems 609-611 ; short in subj. 655, 681; them. forms in rWrujiL etc. 665, 668 Thesis 1626, 1649 Thessaly, language of, p. 1 Think, vbs. meaning to 896, 1075, 1095, 1526, 1527 Third declension 212-285, 306-341 Threats, vbs. expressing, w. dat.

Thematic

1160

Thucydides, language of, p. 2 ; 59 Tie, vbs. meaning to, w. âirô 1204 c Time, adj. denoting 846; acc. of (extent) 1061; art. om. in ex¬ pression of 956; gen. of (within which) 1136; measure of, w. gen. 1082 e ; time since 1166 ; dat. of 1194, 1196; dat. w. adv. of 1190; part, denoting 1566; time in

verse

1628

Tmesis 1199 or For dative 1158, 1165, 1175 Tragedy, iambic trimeter of 16601664 ; choruses in, p. 1 ; lan¬ guage 63 c Transfer of aspirâtes 105 e ; of quantity 33, 203, 254 Transitive verbs 454, 891, 1047, 1074, 1078, 1232 Trial of, vbs. denoting to make, w. gen. 1099 Tribrach 1629 ; for trochee or iambus 1633, 1652, 1659 Trimeter 1647 ; iambic 1660-1663 ; in English 1664 ; lame (Hippo¬ nactean) 1665 ; trochaic 1655 e ; dactylic 1676 & Tripody 1648; trochaic 1655;

iambic 1667 6

ENGLISH INDEX Triseme 1628 b, 1634

Trochee

1629, 1634. Trochaic rhythms 1652-1658 ; Systems 1656 ; w. paeon 1681 Trust, vbs. denoting to 1160

Uncontracted forms of verbs 483,

acc.

1105

Union, words implying, 1188

dat.

Unity, words denoting 445 c Unlike vowels, contraction of 43 Unlikeness, words denoting, w. dat. 1176

Until, conjunctions meaning 1478 Value, genitive of 1133, cf. 1082 e Vau 3 : see Digamma Verb stem 460, 569, 583 Verbal nouns 457, 580; accent 151/; w. object gen. 1082,1139, 1140 ; w. object acc. 1048 Verbals (primitives) 808 Verbals in -tôs and -réos 457, 804 ; syntax of 1596-1600 Verbs, accent 150-153 ; conjugation and formation of 447-804.

Five classes of 607 ; see Classes.

Syntax of 1230-1600.

See the Augment, Reduplication, etc. Verses 1623, 1638, 1646-1651; several moods and tenses,

catalectic and acatalectic 1640

Vocative

175, 177 ; masc. decl. 192 ; of 3d decl. 221-224 ; récessive accent 142 d/\; 192 ; like nom. 223, 333 ; in a^r'" dress 1042 ; nom. for 1043 / fV? Voiced stops 23; pronunciatfon

sing. of

case

29; not doubled except by

similation 63 ; lengthen 122 ; see Consonants

as¬

syllable

Voiceless stops 18, 23 ; pronunciation 29 ; see Consonants

Voices 447 ; uses of 1230-1248

Unclothe, vbs. meaning to 1068

493, 654 b, 655, 659, 670 Understand, vbs. meaning to,

457

see

Active, Middle, Passive Vowel declensions (lst, 2d) 179, 197 ; (3d) 252-272 Vowel stems of verbs 471

Vowels

and close 6; changes of 30-62 ; gradation 30-34, 169, 223 b, 258, 273, 466, 585, 610, 614 ; hiatus voiced 23 ;

open

38 ; contraction 39-54 ; apocope 60 ; aphaeresis 62 ; quantity

119-125 ;

33, 203 compos. see

;

transfer of quantity prothetic 36 ; lost in 814 ; thematic 467 :

Thematic

Want, vbs. meaning to,

gen.

1112-1116 Weak and strong forms 34, 316,

585-587, 604, 662, 690, 714 b, 745, 814 b ; in subj. and opt. 703, 704 While, conjunctions meaning 1478 Whole, gen. of (partitive) 1082 Whole and part, construction of 906, 1058 Wishes, expressed by opt. 1355; secondary tenses of indic. 1359 ; &(j)èhov w. infin. 1360 ; infin. alone 1541 ; négative uv 1361 Wondering, vbs. of, w. gen. 1103, 1121; w. d 1433; w. Sn 1434

guage

of,